JP2020028594A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of devising a countermeasure against fraudulence.SOLUTION: A magnetic sensor board of a magnetic sensor 1111 for preventing contents of a circuit formed by mounting electronic components from being estimated easily is disposed while being mounted in a state in face contact (contact) with a rear side of a flat, transparent panel board 1110 in a game panel 1100 of a game board 5 and near a start pocket unit 2100 as a position visually recognizable by a player. Accordingly, a countermeasure against fraudulence can be devised.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 113

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine including a substrate on which a part number and the like are indicated by silk printing (for example, Patent Document 1). Some substrates are coated with a resist solution of a predetermined color to enhance the decorativeness to achieve a high reflectance.

JP-A-2006-141683 (paragraph [0047], paragraph [0048], and FIG. 3)

  However, there is a possibility that the circuit configuration of the substrate is inferred from the silk printing and the circuit of the substrate is illegally modified, thereby performing an illegal act.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of taking measures against fraud.

  The following are effective solutions for achieving the above-mentioned object. The operation and the like will be described as needed. In addition, for easy understanding, corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention are also shown as appropriate, but are not limited in any way.

(Solution 1)
A gaming machine on which a plurality of boards are mounted, comprising a plurality of main-side boards related to the progress of the game, a first main-side board having a display unit capable of specifying mounted components as the main-side board; A second main-side board that does not have a display unit capable of specifying mounted components and makes it difficult to externally estimate the contents of an electronic circuit as compared to the first main-side board. A gaming machine.

  As described above, the plurality of main-side boards related to the progress of the game do not have the first main-side board having the display unit that can specify the mounted component and the display unit that can specify the mounted component. And a second main-side substrate, which makes it difficult to externally estimate the contents of the electronic circuit compared to the first main-side substrate. This makes it possible to take countermeasures against fraud by adopting the above-described configuration of the second main-side board as a board for preventing the contents of the electronic circuit from being externally estimated among the plurality of main-side boards (paragraph). [2712] to paragraph [2713]).

  In the present embodiment, for example, the pachinko machine 1 in FIG. 1 corresponds to a game machine, and the main control board 1310 accommodated in the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 in FIGS. The magnetic sensor substrate 1111c accommodated in a box 1111a molded of a colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. 113 corresponds to the second main substrate.

(Solution 2)
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a spinning-type gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, since the gaming machine is a spinning-type gaming machine, the effect of the solving means 1 can be obtained in the spinning-type gaming machine. As a basic configuration of a spinning-type gaming machine, after a symbol information sequence composed of a plurality of symbol information (for example, a plurality of reel columns with a plurality of symbol information) is variably displayed, the display result of the symbol information is stopped and displayed. A variable display means is provided, and a variable display of the symbol information is started based on an operation of a starting operation means (for example, a start lever), and based on an operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or the elapse of a predetermined time. To stop the variable display of the symbol information. The game machine further includes a profit providing state generating means for generating a profit providing state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and a medal is used as a game medium to generate the profit providing state. It is configured so that a large amount of medals are paid out sometimes.

(Solution 3)
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is an integrated gaming machine obtained by integrating a pachinko gaming machine and a spinning-type gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, since the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which the pachinko gaming machine and the spinning machine are fused, in the fusion gaming machine in which the pachinko gaming machine and the winding machine are fused, The operation and effect of Solution 1 are obtained. As a basic configuration of an integrated gaming machine in which a pachinko gaming machine and a spinning-type gaming machine are integrated, a symbol information row composed of a plurality of symbol information (for example, a plurality of reel rows with a plurality of symbols) is variably displayed. Later, a variable display means for stopping and displaying the display result of the symbol information is provided, and the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the starting operation means (for example, a start lever), and the stop operation means (for example, stop The change display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the button) or the elapse of a predetermined time. In addition to the provision of a profit provision state generating means for generating a profit provision state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, a game ball is used as a game medium, A large amount of game balls are paid out when they occur.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to take countermeasures against fraud.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position from the front right. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame left assembly of the outer frame, and the outer frame right assembly, respectively, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame from the front and disassembled. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after the rear case and the fraud prevention member are removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 3B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit exploded and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the plate unit from the advancing and retreating direction of the production operation unit button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation unit disassembled for every main member from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. FIG. 2A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotary drive unit from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit from the left front. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit from the front and the upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation button unit and looked from the front lower part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lower position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the upper position. It is an explanatory view showing the relation between the production operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the production operation unit. It is an explanatory view showing a relation between a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the production operation unit viewed from a pressing direction of a pressing operation unit. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position, and (c) is a center pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, and (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front lower part disassembled. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decorative board. It is a front view of a main part frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device viewed from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, which is cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (A) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a main part frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board unit from the lower back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and looked at from behind. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction center. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from behind. (A) is a perspective view seen from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front in (a). FIG. 101 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the exploded view of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball to a detour passage in an upper part of a main part frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the hinge side back. It is the front view of the game board which made the front component, the game panel, the front unit, etc. opaque in the pachinko machine. FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front right. FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 107 as viewed from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. It is a front view of the game board in the state where the front component, the game panel, the front unit, and the like are made transparent. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member and looked from behind. FIG. 108 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 107. It is a front view of the game board which cuts a front unit in parallel with the surface of a game panel, and shows the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and obstacle nails. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit and the side unit of the front unit as viewed from the rear, and (c) is It is a left side view of a starting opening unit, and (d) is a left side view of a side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general winning opening, and the inclination of the door member of a variable winning opening at the time of an open state. It is an enlarged front view which shows the part of the starting port unit and the side unit in a game board. (A) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit as viewed from the front by exploding. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit when disassembled and viewed from behind. It is an explanatory view showing movement of the first big winning opening door in the first attacker unit from the left side. It is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in a first attacker unit in a cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center role of the front unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd attacker unit in the front unit, the right side middle unit, and the gate member from the front, and (b) is the 2nd attacker unit in the front unit, the right side middle unit, and the gate member. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the device viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the path | pass of the game ball in a 2nd attacker unit and a side right middle unit by a cross section. FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged right portion in the game area in FIG. 115. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in the game board from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structure and looked at from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in which the upper left corner of the game board is enlarged and the door frame is transparent. (A) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back effect unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back effect unit and looked from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of a back effect unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of a back back effect unit. It is a front view which shows a back decoration movable body with a back decoration board. 142A is a cross-sectional view taken along a line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 142B is a cross-sectional view taken along a line EE in FIG. 142. (A) is a perspective view of the back decorative movable body viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back movable decorative body viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back movable movable body and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back movable movable body and looked from behind. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back movable movable body. FIG. 147 is an explanatory view showing broken lines of the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration substrate in the front view of FIG. 147. (A) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back movable movable body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body of (a), (c) (A) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration board in the same part as the decoration body of (a). It is an expanded sectional view which expands and shows the upper part of FIG. 143 (a). FIG. 150 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 in an exploded manner. It is explanatory drawing which expands a part of front part of a back movable movable body, and shows the relationship between the decoration by a decorative body and a decoration sheet, a light guide radiation plate, and a back decoration board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration board in the site | part of a 1st LED by a cross section, (b) is a 2nd LED located on the optical axis of a 1st LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the light guide radiation plate in the part which exists from the front, (c) is the LED accommodation part of the light guide radiation plate with respect to the 2nd decoration part in a decoration body and a decoration sheet, and the 1st LED of the back decoration board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement | positioning from the front. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of back decoration board with copper foil of a circuit pattern. (A) is a front view of a back decoration board, (b) is a back view of a back decoration board. (A) is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back movable movable body, and (b) is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion in a form different from that of (a). It is a figure, (c) is an expanded sectional view showing a part of ornaments which have a metal ornament part of a form different from (a) and (b) further. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the back movable movable body of 2nd Embodiment different from the back movable movable body of FIG. 142 by cross section, (b) is a back movable movable body of 3rd Embodiment. (C) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the configuration of the back movable movable body according to the fourth embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower left production unit and the back lower right production unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a back lower left production unit and a lower back right production unit of the back unit as viewed from behind. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower back left production unit and the lower back right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower back left production unit and the lower back right production unit, and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of a lower back left production unit and a lower back right production unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the under-representation effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the under-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering mechanism under the back of the under-back effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering mechanism under the back of the under-back effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower back middle decoration body unit of the lower back middle effect unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower back middle decoration body unit of the lower back middle effect unit and looked from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising and lowering of the under-back middle decoration body unit by the under-back middle raising / lowering mechanism in a back-under middle production unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure concerning rotation of the lower back middle decoration body of the lower back middle decoration body unit in a back lower middle production unit from the front, and (b) is the stop position of the lower back middle rotation decoration body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a table indicating a relationship between the sensor and each detection sensor. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement | positioning of the LED of the decoration body unit under the back in the under the back effect unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper presentation unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper presentation unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper presentation unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper presentation unit for every main member and looked at from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back up-and-down decoration body unit in a back upper presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back up-and-down decoration body unit in a back unit, and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation mechanism of the back upper front rotary decoration body in a back upper presentation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of the back raising / lowering decoration unit in the back upper production unit from the front, (b) is the back raising / lowering decoration in the state which moved the back raising / lowering decoration unit to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of a body unit, and the rotation mechanism of a back decoration rotating body from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decoration board from the front in the state which moved the back raising / lowering decorative body unit to the appearance position in a back upper production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear left rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left rendering unit of the back unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back left effect unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back rear left effect unit for every main member, and was seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back left decoration body unit of the back back left production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back back left decorative body unit of the back back left production unit, and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of a back back left production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back back left decoration body unit in a back back left effect unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back right effect unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back right effect unit for every main member, and was seen from behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back back right decoration body unit of the back back right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back right decoration body unit of the back back right production unit, and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of a back back right production unit from the front. It is an explanatory view showing movement of a back right decoration body unit in a back right effect unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back front left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left production unit, and was seen from behind. (A) is a front view showing a shutter group in a back front left production unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view showing a shutter group in a back front left production unit in an open state. (A) is a perspective view of the back front right rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front right rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back right decoration body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right production unit, and was seen from behind. (A) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a front right production unit in a closed state, and (b) is a front view which shows a shutter group in a front right production unit in an open state. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back movable decoration object of the back back effect unit was moved from the retreat position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the under-back middle decoration of the under-back middle rendering unit was moved from the lowered position to the raised position. The back-up rotating decoration of the back-up production unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-left rotation decoration of the back-left production unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back of the back-right production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the rear-right rotating decorative body moved from the evacuation position to the first appearance position, respectively. A state in which the back-left rotating decorative body of the back-left production unit has been moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-right rotating decoration of the back-right production unit has been moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown by. It is a front view of the game board which shows the shutter unit of the back front left production unit and the shutter unit of the back front right production unit from a closed state to an open state, respectively. Move the back-to-back decorative unit from the evacuation position to the appearance position from the back-to-back production unit, move the back-to-back rotation decoration body from the back-to-back production unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, and back-to-back left-rotation decoration body to the back-to-left production unit From the evacuation position to the first appearance position, the back right rotation decoration of the back right production unit from the evacuation position to the first appearance position, and the bottom bottom rotation decoration of the back bottom production unit ascend from the descending position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state moved to the position, respectively. It is a block diagram showing roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine shown with a self-supporting auxiliary member. It is a front perspective view (a) of a drawer connector mounted in a relay board provided in a main part frame, and is a rear perspective view (b). FIGS. 7A to 7C are diagrams for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and are small DIP type connectors electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type). (D)-(f) for preventing a solder bridge of each terminal. 209 (c) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 209 (c), and FIG. 209 (b) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 209 (f). It is a figure which shows the modification which forms the terminal of the last stage and a solder escape pattern by separating by a predetermined distance. It is a schematic diagram (a) of overresist applied to each terminal of a main part frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is a schematic diagram (b) of a section of an XX line in (a). It is the schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) side of the board | substrate on which the surface mount type connector is mounted, and the schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of a board. FIG. 213 is a continuation of FIG. 213 and is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 213 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an over-resist applied to a housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector; It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the YY line. It is the schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) side of the board | substrate on which the surface mount type connector in a modification is mounted, and the schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of a board. 215 (b) is an enlarged view of part B of FIG. 215 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an over-resist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector, and FIG. It is the schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the ZZ line. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 4 is a view showing the shape of a beta land at a portion where the front surface of a disconnection prevention rib portion formed on a base body is in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate, and shows a copper foil on the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram of a surface, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram of a back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board. It is a figure which shows the shape of the resist with respect to the land at the time of flowing a peripheral control board to a solder tank. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment. It is a front view of the peripheral control unit concerning 2nd Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the XX line of FIG. 224 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 229 is a view as viewed in the direction of the arrow A in FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment. FIG. 229 is a view as viewed from the direction indicated by the arrow A in FIG. 224 according to the third embodiment. Extraction of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board to improve the contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) and the conductive elastic member according to the third embodiment. It is a figure which shows the method, the schematic diagram (exposed example (a)) of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control board, and the schematic diagram (exposed example (b)) of the back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control substrate. Schematic diagram of the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged), schematic diagram of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate (through This is an example (d) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a back exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing the attachment procedure of the peripheral control board etc. concerning a 4th embodiment. It is the figure which shows the land formed around the through-hole of the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board etc. which concerns on 4th Embodiment, (a), and the figure which shows the foil removal area | region (b). FIG. 7A shows a land formed around a through hole on the back surface (solder surface) side of a peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 8B shows a land and a screw designation symbol, and FIG. (C) of FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit concerning a 5th embodiment. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 7A is a view showing a part of a rear perspective view of a peripheral control unit according to a fifth embodiment, and shows a part of a base body constituting the peripheral control unit so that a state where a conductive elastic member is inserted can be seen. FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit cut along a line CL in FIG. 238 is a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit in which a part of the peripheral control unit is cut out so that a state in which the conductive elastic member is pressed against the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and deformed can be seen. FIG. 3C is a diagram showing a part thereof. It is a front part enlarged drawing of a cover which constitutes a peripheral control unit which has an opening which can insert and contact a tip part of a contact probe concerning a 5th embodiment. Extraction of the ground (GND) on the back (solder surface) side of the specific substrate to improve the contact between the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the specific substrate and the conductive elastic member according to the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows a method, and the schematic diagram (exposed example (a)) of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific board, and the schematic diagram (exposed example (b)) of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific board. Schematic diagram of the copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged); schematic diagram of the rear surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (through hole having lands) This is an example (d) in which a plurality of holes are arranged. It is a front perspective view of a flexible flat cable. FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating a state in which a flexible flat cable is electrically connected to a connector on the back side of the effect display device, and is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to a connector of a liquid crystal output substrate; 2B is a partially enlarged view of a portion B shown in FIG. 3A and a portion C shown in FIG. 3B, showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to each connector through a cutout portion. It is a figure (c). It is a figure (a) which shows the state where a flexible flat cable is not electrically connected normally with the connector of the back side of an effect display device, and the flexible flat cable is electrically connected normally with the connector of a liquid crystal output board. It is a figure (b) which shows a state without. It is a figure (a) showing arrangement of a connector of a relay board, and a figure (b) showing a state where wiring and a connector of a harness were normally connected to a connector of a relay board. FIG. 5C is a diagram illustrating a state in which a wiring or a connector of a harness is not normally connected. 245 is a modification example of FIG. 245, showing the arrangement of connectors on the relay board and the component product arrangement lines, and shows a state in which wiring and harness connectors are normally connected to the connectors on the relay board. It is a figure (b) and is a figure (c) showing the state where a connector of wiring and a harness is not normally connected to a connector of a relay board. FIG. 2A is a partial perspective view of a game board for explaining an area where a wiring groove is to be attached, as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 2B is a view illustrating a state in which the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board. 246 is a continuation of FIG. 247, showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board; FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state of various wirings when the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back surface side of the game board and the game board is viewed from behind. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which various wirings are provided when the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from the front. It is a perspective view showing the state of various kinds of wiring when the wiring groove concerning a 2nd embodiment is attached to the back side of a game board, and the game board is seen from behind. It is a perspective view showing the state of various kinds of wiring when the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the light emission production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the light emission production unit from the disassembly before. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as viewed from behind after being disassembled. It is a front view which shows the arrangement | positioning relationship between an LED bear chip and a light guide plate. It is a front view showing the diffusion sheet arranged on the surface of the light guide plate. It is a figure (a) which shows the state where the flexible flat cable was electrically connected with the connector of the LED board, and is an enlarged view of the Z section shown in (a), and the difference of the flexible flat cable from the connector of the LED board to the connector. FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a state where the plug is normal, and FIG. 7B is an enlarged view of a portion Z shown in FIG. 7A and a diagram showing an abnormal state where insertion of the flexible flat cable into the connector of the LED board is insufficient. (C). It is a block diagram explaining electrical connection of each decoration board with which a door frame is provided. It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a schematic diagram of an arrangement method of an LED constant current drive circuit. FIG. 269 is an enlarged view of a part D in FIG. 263 as viewed from a non-LED mounting surface. This is a configuration of a countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. This is a configuration of a measure against a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment. FIG. 269 is an enlarged view of a D ′ part in FIG. 265, a D ″ part in FIG. 266, or a D ″ part in FIG. This is a configuration of a countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 268 is an enlarged view of a portion D ′ ″ in FIG. 268 viewed from a non-LED mounting surface. This is a configuration of a measure against a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment. This is a method of arranging a front surface display unit capable of specifying a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of a decorative board and LEDs respectively corresponding to the plurality of LEDs. It is the schematic which shows (the 1) (b), the case of centralized arrangement | positioning (part 2) (c), and the case of distributed arrangement (part 2) (d), respectively. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the magnetic sensor from the disassembly before. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the magnetic sensor as viewed from behind after being disassembled. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of main control side power-on. 274 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing in FIG. 274. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main control timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting value confirmation display process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payment control part. 280 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit in FIG. 280. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing following FIG. 281. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a peripheral control part. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control section power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the prior judgment processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used in a lottery process for a big hit, (B) is a big hit symbol design determination table used in a lottery process for a big hit type, and (C) is a small hit It is a small hit symbol design determination table used in the lottery process for types. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design change processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a time chart showing a control state when the movable decorative body is driven, and (B) is a time chart showing a control state when the movable decorative body is driven in a modified example. It is a time chart which shows about the control state at the time of driving of a movable decoration. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect which makes a movable decoration body appear in front of the effect display device. It is a time chart which shows a control state at the time of a player participation type production. It is a side view which shows the light from the light emission decoration body in a waiting position when a pachinko machine is seen from the side. It is a side view which shows typically the light from the light emission decoration body in the appearance position when a pachinko machine is seen from the side. It is a figure showing the back decoration board provided with a plurality of holes. FIG. 2 is a front view showing a light emitting area on the back side of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the light emission area | region in the side surface side which looked at the game board from the left front. It is a perspective view which shows the light emission area in the side surface side which looked at the game board from the rear left. It is a figure showing the opening provided in the back side of the effect display device. FIG. 99 is an enlarged schematic diagram illustrating a part of a cross section cut along a line CC in FIG. 99 (a). FIG. 3 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is at the ascending position, and FIG. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a player that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 with the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 extending vertically and separated from each other. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the outer frame upper member 30 And an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the upper outer frame assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the upper frame hinge assembly 50 and the lower frame lower hinge member 60 allow the outer frame 2 to be connected to the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

  Also, when the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by a player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player separately from the handle 182. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained by operating the effect operation unit 301 in addition to the game using the game ball B.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. A main frame upper hinge member 510 and a lower main frame hinge assembly 520 for opening and closing the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, a main frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main frame base unit 500, and a game. A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a game board attached to the main frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, and uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to a lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a board attached to a rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral arranged behind the game panel 1100 A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) and an effect display device arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image 600, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units that can perform a movable effect or a light emitting effect according to a game state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are provided a plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N (in this embodiment, brass is used) which are in contact with the game balls B and are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting, for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, paying out a predetermined number of playing balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. A mouth 2004, a first winning prize opening 2005, and a second winning prize opening 2006 are provided. The obstacle nail N having a gold color is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, and the second winning opening 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  In the gaming area 5 a of the game board 5, the player can drive the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. Thereby, the game ball B is set to the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, the second winning opening 2006, and the like in the gaming area 5a. The player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to a game state that is changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, the rear effect unit 3100, and the lower back. Left production unit 3200, Ura lower right production unit 3250, Ura lower middle production unit 3300, Ura upper production unit 3400, Ura rear left production unit 3500, Ura rear right production unit 3600, Ura front left production unit 3700, Ura front right production The player can be entertained by causing the unit 3800 or the like to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, or the like.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

  As shown, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are vertically separated and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and an upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

  The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward with its phase inverted.

  The outer frame 2 allows the outer frame hinge assembly 50 to detachably support the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially and rotatably by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are respectively disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down, and are disposed apart from each other. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially. This is for mounting the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically in a front-rear direction with a constant width (depth), and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to an upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly depressed rightward in a rear portion of the left side surface obtained by dividing the front-rear direction into three equal parts, and a right portion from a portion opposite to the concave portion 11a in the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b bulging to the right and a hollow portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-rear direction, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of the upper portion 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c of the rear side to be inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, and causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame left member 11; By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c abutting on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a abut on the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat upper and lower side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and a right side from a rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 13d to contact the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. In contact with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, so that the outer side is fixed. It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and causes the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, an outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically in a front-rear direction with a constant width (depth), and an upper right connecting member attached to an upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and an outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a which is flatly depressed to the left at a rear portion of the right-side surface where the front-rear direction is divided into three equal parts, and a left portion which is leftward from a portion opposite to the concave portion 21a on the left side. It has a bulging portion 21b bulging in the upward direction, and a hollow portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat contact portion 23d extending shortly toward the right side. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By contacting the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, whereby the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are used to hook an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hooking member 24 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 24a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a plate-shaped hooking piece 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the cage is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. And a flat-shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 penetrates forward and backward through the hooking piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with cutouts 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The upper and lower fixing portions 12b and the upper and lower fixing portions 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutouts 30a at both left and right ends, respectively, while the upper and lower fixing portions 12b and 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are depressed from the general surface at the left end. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and extends left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41, A box-shaped front panel member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A left and right box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open frontward, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with cutouts 41a that are respectively recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower right connecting member 23 are respectively inserted. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is concave from the upper surface, and has a concave portion 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and escapes to the front end side from a rearward position at the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portion 41b maximizes the capacity of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a length in the left-right direction extending to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height, The entire rear side is open. The front panel 42 is closed by the rear panel 43 so that the open rear side cooperates with the rear panel 43 to become a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends right and left on the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel 42 to the front side of the rear panel 43, the front panel 42 cooperates with the front panel 42 to form a panel internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear part 43 of the curtain plate has a tubular connection tube part 43a extending left and right and projecting upward at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicating with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connection cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end is located upward as it goes rearward from the front end side, which coincides with a general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about ３ of the entire length of the rear plate 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the whole rear member 43. Are also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection tube portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder 43 a. The enclosure 624a is in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball-meshing preventing mechanism 44 causes the game ball B to stay between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the game ball B stays at the position of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is for preventing the pinching.

  The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and has a mounting portion 44 a formed flat so as to be touched by an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later; A first discharge port 44b opening upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c opening upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b of the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a; and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is located upward as going backward. A portion 44e.

  The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game balls B to pass. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the inner space 40a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is used when an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d that rises from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized entry of a tool. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upright wall portion 44d, the unauthorized tool abuts on the forwardly projecting upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion occurs. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game sphere B that has fallen on the placing portion 44a for some reason becomes the standing wall portion. Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game balls B easily stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game balls B are staying on the placing portion 44a, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B are sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. As a result, there occurs a problem that the main frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole 60d. Through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the rear panel member 43 (the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front panel 42 and the rear panel 43 so as to be separated from each other, and the opening 42a of the front panel 42 from the rear side. A grill member 46 having a flat plate shape, and a port member 47 having two cylinders that are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween and have two cylinders extending in the front and rear directions. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

  When the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the pair of guide members 45 abuts on the lower ends of the door frames 3. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide, and facilitates opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having countless small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted rearward (in the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622 by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (the player side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched between the upper end of the connection tubular portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 and is compressed. This prevents sound in the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the lower front. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the concave portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And an attachment screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b, and an upper fixing portion; A flat horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and a lower portion extending from the edge extending from the left side to the front side of the front extension portion 51b to a portion where the bearing groove 51c is open. And a flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 described later in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending forward and backward, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from a rear end of the lock body 52a, and a lock member 52 extending leftward from a rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally left forward and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably mounted on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by a mounting screw 53 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The distal end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall 51e of the outer frame hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c at a position on the front side of the lock body 52a so as to accommodate the hinge pin 512 on the body frame of the hinge member 510 on the body frame.

  By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under outer frame]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d sized to penetrate vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and allow only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. Thus, it is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. The rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 60 d coincide with the first discharge ports 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main frame are closed as the main frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and the air can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 22 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extending vertically when viewed from the front. The inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Have been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by a player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 includes a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover a lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, and a door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the tray, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400 and the upper side of the plate unit are attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a square (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically and having a door window 101a that penetrates forward and backward, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear lower right corner on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and mounted near a rear right lower end on the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. Door frame main relay board 104, a door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the door frame main relay board 104, and a door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub relay board 105. The relay frame 106 after the handle, the door frame relay substrate cover 107 that covers a part of the door frame main relay substrate 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay substrate 105 from the rear side, A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower right portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 to provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4. Hereinafter, a frame constituted by the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 may be referred to as a “front frame”.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reaching the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by a player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved by the ball launching device 540 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is for playing a game to drive into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the left side of the main frame 4 so as to be hinged rotatable with respect to the main frame 4, closes the front surface of the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and has a game board mounted on the main frame 4. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay board at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board attached to the rear of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and a door frame base 101. , Which is attached to the rear side of the door frame and covers the relay board 106 after the handle from the rear side, and a cable which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the handle rear junction board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is mounted on the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  Further, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates back and forth, and whose inner peripheral shape in a front view is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. As described above, the entire door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface in front view, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b whose left end is inclined slightly forward from the right end side, a handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a door window 101a. Between the front side and the right side in the front view, from the rear side to the front side, and into the insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b, which penetrate back and forth on the left side in a front view, and pass through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 in front. And a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the ball.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the ball for the lower plate that faces the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 forward. A passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for the upper plate which penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to a lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view, and which faces the through ball passage 150a of the fal cover unit 150 forward; A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  The door frame base 101 has a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrating back and forth. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are provided such that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located forward and the body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 is located rearward when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth above the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the door window 101a. The through hole 101j is a hole through which a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted, and penetrates the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting a handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, A plurality (three in this embodiment) of ridges 102c protruding into the portion 102a and extending over the entire length of the cylindrical portion 102a in the axial direction and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a. And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

  The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three protruding ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state where the three protrusions 102c and the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (the handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicular to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a state of being similarly inclined.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Accordingly, the sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211, it is possible to satisfactorily guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

  Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed on the left side in front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner in rear view at the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the rear handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and has a connection cable 503 (FIG. 83) extending from the main body frame 4. And FIG. 84).

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L-shape in which an outer shape is combined with a square extending left and right on the right side in a front view of an upper part of a square extending vertically, and extends vertically. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side in rear view. The door frame auxiliary relay board 105 includes a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the in-window decorative part decorative board 413, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the various boards of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 form a door extending vertically above and below the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150 on the rear side.

  The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a rectangular shape having an outer shape extending left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 below the ball feeding opening 101e and on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The relay board 106 after the handle is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The relay board 106 after the handle is in a state where the rear side is covered with the relay board cover 108 after the handle in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover, relay board cover after handle, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the relay board cover after the handle 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a vertically extending portion in an inverted L-shape) are provided. It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and at the left in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted from the left side inside and connected to those terminals.

  The relay board cover 108 after the handle is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the relay board 106 after the handle. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left and right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and to provide the door frame base unit 100 with rigidity. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 includes a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that are vertically separated and are disposed at right and left sides and a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that connect upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached to a position closer to the upper side from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcement frame 112 and a plurality of cylinders are vertically mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 so as to be vertically separated from each other. And a hook member 116 to be provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend up and down at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically separated from each other and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcement frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction, and extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right in a vertical direction wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a cut squarely downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart left and right and has a pair of rear pieces formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear pieces facing each other. The vehicle includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat shape from the sides to the front, and a flat front piece connecting the front ends of the pair of front extensions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that projects forward when viewed in plan. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is mounted on the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole that penetrates back and forth. The hook members 652 of the locking unit 650 are locked by these hook members 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by punching a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcement unit 110, the left reinforcement frame 111, the right reinforcement frame 112, and the upper reinforcement frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 is The door frame base 101 is assembled below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 match the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. And the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in a hinge-rotatable manner in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 movably in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in a front view, and a flat protruding piece 121b extending forward from upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has a mounting piece 121 a mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L-shape. In the state where the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, a vertically extending part penetrates from below near a front end of the pair of protruding pieces 121 b of the hinge bracket 121, and an upper end is an upper end. A portion that extends above the protruding piece 121b and extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame has its upper end rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511 a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4.

  The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121 around a portion extending vertically of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is urged upward by the lock spring 124 via the flange member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and a horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower projecting piece. By abutting on the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

  When the horizontally extending lower end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame moves the hinge pin 122 on the entire door frame. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 allows the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to be inserted into or pulled out of the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main frame upper hinge member 510 from below. it can. Thus, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinged in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in front view, a flat protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a hinge pin 126 below the door frame (see FIG. 22) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the front end 125b.

  The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 below the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame is a cylindrical metal rod, and a tapered chamfer is applied to the outer periphery of the lower end. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is coaxial with a portion of the protruding piece 125b extending vertically above and below the hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main frame side lower hinge member. Can be.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The cylinder lock 130 is mounted on the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 has a columnar cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a regular lock inserted into the keyhole 132 and attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. A rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 is achieved by inserting a pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 into a pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252 h of the plate unit main body 252 in the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and play the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate pull button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Is a box-shaped front cover 141 having an open front end, and a game ball which has entered a front cover 141 which is formed in a box shape having a front end opened and closed at the rear end thereof, which penetrates in a front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hit ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball firing device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. At the rear side of the ball 141, a ball removing member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 are provided one by one in the rear cover 14. To the ball supply port 142a, and rotates the ball supply member 144 and the ball supply member 144 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the drawing, in the ball feeding unit 140, a ball feeding member 144 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a in a front view, and a ball removing member 143 is provided on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is disposed on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball ejection member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in front view. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 described below extends forward from 141c. The front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit for removing upper bowl balls 240. And a portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball-excluding guide path 241c is closed from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 143 has a partition part 143a below the entrance 141a and between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, the upper surface of which is lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 144, and a partition part 143a. Around the axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bent in a V-shape from near the center in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b rotatably supported by the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from an upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b below the operating rod 143c. And a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray removing slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper tray removing button 222 of the tray unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 ( (Upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a having a fan shape in a plan view centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. The ball holder 144b includes an arc-shaped recess 144b extending from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holder 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation in the left-right direction.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the partitioning portion 143a and a ball holding portion 144b in a direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a. It is designed to rotate between a holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540, and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The movement of the game ball B toward the ball holding unit 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) is blocked by the blocking unit 144a, and the game ball B stays on the partition unit 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition 143a is held in the ball holding unit 144b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip which swings up and down in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 about an axis extending in the vertical direction while rotating about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the movement of the ball.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that an end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. Have been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears, and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves around the right end part downward. To return to the initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 near the ball feeding crank 147 is vertically swung by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding crank 147 is engaged with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and is engaged with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 drives the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 moves the ball feeding operating rod 146 away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip (left end) is located upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. To rotate. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 206) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the ball removing member 143 rotatably supported by the shaft or the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper ball removing slider 242 that is operated by pressing the upper ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. In the normal state, the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removing portion 141b to partition, and the rotation is restricted. The game ball B does not invade.

  Then, when the player presses the upper tray removing button 222 of the tray unit 200 downward, the upper tray removing slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmitting part 242b, and the downward movement of the operation transmitting part 242b is performed. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also relatively moves downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting part 242b, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. The partition is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the upper tray ball is removed from the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the ball removing member 143 with which the operating rod 143c is in contact is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. , The impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, preventing the ball-pulling member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B being separated from the partition portion. At 143a, it is possible to prevent bouncing.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and A fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The anti-fraud member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in a front view extends left and right, and is separated vertically by a substantially vertical center at a predetermined distance from the right side to the left, and A lower portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape at the tip end (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper and lower portions 148a and 148b are provided. . The upper piece 148a of the anti-fraud member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 148 so that the right end in front view projects rearward. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that spreads rightward.

  The anti-fraud member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to this fraud prevention member 148, the illegal game ball B with the string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140, and is attached to the illegal game ball B. When an illegal action is performed such that the illegally operated game ball B is moved in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like by operating the provided string, the illegal game ball B fired (hitted) by the ball firing device 540 is The V-shaped formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b after inserting the string attached to the illegal game ball B by the momentum between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using the illegal game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
Fail cover unit 150 of door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which has been fired by the ball firing device 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As illustrated, the foul cover unit 150 is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 with an open front side, and a flat lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates the lower normal discharge passage 610 a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211 a of the tray unit 200. A ball passage 150a and a full tank receiver which is open rearward at the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a in a front view and which can communicate with the lower full tank discharge passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. And a mouth 150b.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side in front view of full-ball receptacle 150b and does not reach game area 5a despite being fired by ball firing device 540 of main body frame 4. Ball receiving port 150c for receiving the game ball B (foul ball), and the game ball B opened forward near the lower right corner in front view and received by the full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. And a ball discharge port 150d that communicates with the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d by the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible area is provided.

  The through ball passage 150a is formed so as to extend over both the unit body 151 and the cover member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of storage passage 150e, and has a flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to unit body 151 and lid member 152; And a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 becomes full of the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 moves into the storage passage 150e to some extent. Game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in the direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. Then, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. Accordingly, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B, and when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the game balls B are full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, the fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, and a prompt can be made to cancel the fullness of the lower plate 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a. 613 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operating protrusion 613a can contact (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact part 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operating projection 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b ( Front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is detachably mounted. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and The front of the area 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 101h. 162 and a pair of glass units rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for mounting the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a flat plate shape, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the projection 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking pieces 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are respectively attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161 and are separated from each other so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes from the base 163a in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the rear of the door frame base 101, outside the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located above the base 163a. I do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking pieces 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 are inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated such that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thus, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed in the reverse procedure. Thus, the glass unit 160 is detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is at a rotational position located below the base 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the projection 163b does not rotate to a position above the base 163a. Therefore, the regulation of the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is provided with a flat main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 projecting rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. The upper end of the main body 171 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, an out guiding part 1003, a part of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 described later. The pachinko machine 1 is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear protruding piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where it is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear protruding piece 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the gaming board 5 in a state where it is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thus, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not abut on the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. The hitting of the game ball B into 5a is not inhibited.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  In the state where the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a portion where the front surface of the main body 171 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and projects rearward from the lower side of the main body 171. The removed rearward projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 has a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle frame in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by a player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Things.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. And a plurality of LEDs mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”) mounted on a front side of the cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181. And a transparent handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decorative substrate 184. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the handle decoration board 184 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

  Also, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 behind the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 to the outer periphery. A handle member 181 having a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188; A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to an initial rotation position (a rotation end in a counterclockwise direction in front view). The energizing handle return spring 190 has one end attached to the inner base 186 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 urged in the direction.

  The handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end projecting outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single button 193 whose end side is rotatably mounted on an axis extending back and forth on the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a single button mounted on the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 193. An operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a depression from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. The three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, and the ridges 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, which protrude outward away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, and the other end of the handle return spring 190 is locked. Locking projection 182f.

  The four first projections 182a, the second projections 182b, the third projections 182c, and the fourth projections 182d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a is formed such that a side surface in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the first protrusion 182a is the opposite side. Side is concave (gouge) so as to curve inward. The second projection 182b is such that a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first projection 182a by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees in a clockwise direction. It protrudes slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the most protruding portion bulging outward, and the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first projection 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c is such that a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from a most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees in a clockwise direction. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surface of the third protrusion 182c is substantially linearly inclined on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is more gradually inclined than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c by a clockwise rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and It protrudes slightly higher. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 182d are inclined substantially linearly, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges forward and is formed to be transparent. An inner lens 185a that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member is mounted on the back surface of the handle cover 185 and inside the handle cover 185. The surface of the inner lens 185a is provided with a lens cut so that the light can be irregularly refracted (formed in a polyhedron), and the surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 disposed behind the inner lens 185a ( The plurality of LEDs mounted on the mounting surface) are clearly difficult to visually recognize from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the inner lens 185a (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be performed on the back surface instead of the front surface of the inner lens 185a. (May be formed in a polyhedron). The handle cover 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184. Note that the front surface of the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and the rear surface together with the front surface of the handle cover 185 may be lens-cut. Alternatively, the rear surface of the handle cover 185 may be lens cut (or may be formed in a polyhedron).

  The handle unit 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined such that the right end side is located behind the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the outside also inclines outwardly in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). To be fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player comes into contact with the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is turned while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and cannot hit the game ball B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a different manner from the original and playing the game, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In addition, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the handle control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 operates the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thus, without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single button 193, the operation before the single button 193 is operated is released. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

  Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is most rotated clockwise in a front view. Thus, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d causes the first protrusion 182a to rotate when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the handle 182 can be maintained in the “right-handed” position in a comfortable state by changing the handle 182 by using the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, The player's feeling of fatigue can be reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The plate unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 mounted on the front surface of the plate base unit 210. , And an effect operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, a plate body 212 attached to the upper front of the plate unit base 211 and having a plate 201, and a right side of the plate body 212. , A mounting unit 213 protruding forward, a plate unit relay board 214 mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213, The unit includes an upper bowl removing unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213, and an upper bowl removing unit 240 attached behind the upper bowl removing unit 230.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and has a lower dish main body 251 having the lower dish 202, and is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251, a dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit body 252 and separated from each other left and right, and It includes a dish upper right decoration unit 275, a dish lower left decoration unit 280 and a dish lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The rendering operation unit 300 includes, as the rendering operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. ing. The effect operation unit 300 is an effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, an operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotating operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the transmission ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to a lower surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 by light emission, a decoration substrate cover 353 covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, and the operation unit base 320. A vibrating speaker 354, an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And

  The plate unit 200 is entirely bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is disposed so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. A ball rental operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300 with the upper plate 201, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212. The upper plate 201 is formed in a container shape which bulges forward to a large extent on the left side from the left and right center in front view and opens upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion which is about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges forward most. The upper plate 201 has a front end that is receded rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and has a depth in the front-rear direction that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (FIG. 46). ). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  In a state where the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface thereof is positioned at a position below the upper plate ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211 e. It is inclined so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game balls B released forward from the upper dish ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper dish 201, and the received game balls B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding member 201b which is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball B. It is possible to remove the static electricity charged to B.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating up and down in the bottom wall so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower bowl 202 is closed by a lower bowl removing unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape whose plan view extends left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is disposed near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower plate hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c when assembled to the plate unit 200.

  The lower plate 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c and open the lower plate hole 202a while the lower plate hole 202a is closed. Can be discharged below the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). In addition, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The released game balls B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower bowl extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 of the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The plate base unit 210 is a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the plate 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is mounted on the upper right side of the upper plate main body 212 in the upper front part of the plate unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. And a dish unit relay board 214.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. And an upper tray removing unit 240 attached to the rear of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray removing unit 230.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is a flat plate-shaped (shallow open rear portion) extending right and left over the entire width of the door frame base 101. (Box shape).

  The plate unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates backward and forward below the upper plate ball supply port 211a, and extends downward in a cylindrical shape. A speaker port 211b having a punched metal mounted on the front side, a lower tray ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at a lower portion on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view, and extending rearward in a tubular shape; A cut-out portion 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass therethrough, on the right side wall of a portion extending cylindrically behind the ball supply port 211c, and front and back at the front right upper side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. And an upper tray ball feed port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper tray body 212 and extends vertically.

  Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper tray ball feed port 211e, and has a mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is mounted, and an upper left side of the upper tray ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray removing slider 242 of the upper tray removing unit 240 penetrates forward and backward below the tray body, and penetrates forward and backward at the lower right corner in front view. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view. Port 211i.

  The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is open to the rear wall of the upper plate 201 when assembled to the door frame 3, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper plate ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  In a state where the lower dish ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end is opened to the rear wall of the lower dish 202, and the cylindrical rear end is connected to the lower dish ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150 d of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The downstream end of the ball guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the upper ball is removed is connected to a notch 211d formed at a portion of the lower ball supply port 211c that extends in a cylindrical shape. ing. Thereby, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are moved to the upper plate ball feed port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140, The ball is discharged from the lower bowl supply port 211c into the lower bowl 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the tray is removed.

  The upper bowl feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper bowl removing unit 240 in a state assembled with the bowl base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper part and the rear part opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side is larger than the left and right center in front view and bulges forward. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end receding rearward as it goes rightward in a front view from a portion that bulges forward most, and a depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than an outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined such that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 has its upper part near the right end closed.

  The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that a portion near the right end, which is closed at the top, is sunk below the ball rental operation unit 220 in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200. The upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a formed at an upper middle portion in the left-right direction, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball rental operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape whose upper part is open. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the rear right corner.

  The front slider 232 of the unit for removing the upper counter ball 230 is inserted through the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. In addition, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted into the through-hole 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the upper left decorative board 273, the upper right decorative board 278, the lower left decorative board 283, and the lower right decorative board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball rental operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the mounting base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 (illustrated in the drawing). After omission of cash or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is displayed. The purpose is to return the cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine by subtracting the amount of the rented game ball B, and to adjust the sound volume related to the performance to a large or small value.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 which is disposed to the right of the extraction button 222 and has translucency, and a ball lending operation base 223 on the upper surface of the base portion 221, which is located to the lower right of the upper ball extraction button 222. , A volume down button 227 disposed below the volume up button 226 on the upper surface of the base 221, and a ball disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223. A lending button 224, a return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a return button 225 disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223. Spherical rental display unit (not illustrated) is provided with a.

  The upper bowl removing button 222 protrudes upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by the player performing a pressing operation. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and moves slightly downward when the player performs a pressing operation (a distance dimension in which the upper ball removing button 222 moves downward when the player performs a pressing operation). The pressing operation portion of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a (lead type) can be pressed slightly downward to turn on the ball lending button tactile switch 224a, while the player releases the pressing operation. By doing so, the ball lending button 224 moves to the upper original position, and the pressing operation portion of the ball lending button tactile switch 224a returns upward, and the ball lending button tactile switch 224a can be turned off. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape, and moves slightly downward when the player performs a pressing operation (the distance dimension in which the upper ball removing button 222 moves downward when the player performs the pressing operation). When the pressing operation part of the return button tactile switch 225a (lead type) is pushed down slightly, the return button tactile switch 225a can be turned on, while the player releases the pressing operation. The return button 225 moves to the upper original position, and the pressing operation part of the return button tactile switch 225a returns upward, and the return button tactile switch 225a can be turned off. The ball lending display unit is constituted by three 7-segment LEDs (lead type), and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. When a ball rental button 224 is pressed after a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the returned game balls B are deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. The ball lending display section displays the amount of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine. An error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

  The volume up button 226 is formed in a triangular shape, is arranged so that one of the three vertices faces upward, and moves slightly downward when the player performs a pressing operation (when the player presses the It is smaller than the distance dimension in which the upper plate ball removal button 222 moves downward by operation.) The pressing operation part of the volume up button tactile switch 226a (surface mount type) is pushed down slightly and used for the volume up button. While the tactile switch 226a can be turned ON, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume up button 226 moves to the upper original position, and the pressing operation portion of the volume up button tactile switch 226a returns upward. The volume up button tactile switch 226a can be turned off. The volume down button 227 is formed in a triangular shape, is arranged so that one of the three vertices faces downward, and moves slightly downward when the player performs a pressing operation (when the player presses the It is smaller than the distance dimension in which the upper tray ball removal button 222 moves downward by operation.) The pressing operation part of the volume down button tactile switch 227a (surface mount type) is pushed down slightly and is used for the volume down button. While the tactile switch 227a can be turned on, when the player releases the pressing operation, the volume down button 227 moves to the upper original position, and the pressing operation section of the volume down button tactile switch 227a returns upward. The volume down button tactile switch 227a can be turned off.

  The ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front or front surface) of the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220, Via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side, it is electrically connected to a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume adjustment board 229 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. , The door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side, and the interface board 635 on the body frame 4 side without passing through the body frame 4 Drive board unit 1700 (an effect drive board 1720 described below that drives a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in response to a command from a peripheral control board 1510 described later). The game console 5 is electrically connected to a peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effect, which will be described later). The ball lending board 228 and the volume control board 229 are housed in the ball lending operation unit 220 so as to be adjacent to the ball lending operation unit 220.

  In this manner, the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220 on which the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted are electrically connected. The door frame main relay board 104 on the side of the door frame 3 and the volume control board 229 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220 on which the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are mounted are electrically connected. Is different from the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side, which is connected to the door frame 3 side. In various relay boards on the door frame 3 side, the tactile switch 224a for a ball lending button and the tactile for a return button are provided. Switch 225a, signal transmission path for three 7-segment LEDs, and volume up button A signal transmission path for Tactile 226a, and a volume down button for Tactile 227a, but has a configuration which is not mixed in the same relay board. This is because the signal transmission path for the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs is a path through which a so-called main-side signal is transmitted. In contrast to the configuration via the frame main relay board 104, the signal transmission path for the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a is a path through which a so-called main side signal is transmitted. Therefore, it is configured to pass through the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side.

  On the upper surface (front or front surface) of the ball rental board 228, a ball rental button tactile switch 224a, a return button tactile switch 225a, and pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which three 7-segment LEDs are soldered are removed. In the entire region, a green resist layer is formed by a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated green resist”). On the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the ball rental substrate 228, a solid green color is applied over the entire area excluding a pad, a through hole, a land, and the like where an area for mounting a connector (lead type), not shown, is soldered. A green resist layer is formed by the resist. Furthermore, on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the ball rental board 228, although not shown, the mounted surface of the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component, a region indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like (in addition to the shape of the front-side electronic component, The front side notation indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component and the type of the front-side electronic component may be included. It is printed on the green resist by silk printing. Although not shown, the component number of the backside electronic component and the backside electronic component are arranged near the backside electronic component such as a connector (surface mount type) on the lower surface (rear surface or back surface) of the ball rental board 228, although not shown. Attributes of the back-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position of the back-side electronic component (the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic component, and the model of the back-side electronic component. Is printed on the solid-colored green resist by silk printing with a white paint that is conspicuous to green.

  On the other hand, pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a are soldered are removed from the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume control board 229. In the entire region, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the volume control board 229, the entire area except for the pad, through hole, land, and the like where the connector (not shown) is mounted is soldered with a white resist that is solid-coated. A resist layer is formed. Further, on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume control board 229, although not shown, near the mounted electronic components such as the mounted volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a. The attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the component number of the front-side electronic component, an area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like (the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component) The front side notation indicating the component mounting direction (mounting direction) and the type of the front side electronic component may be included.) The solid white color is a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous against white. Is printed on the resist by silk printing. On the lower surface (rear surface or rear surface) of the volume control board 229, although not shown, an area indicating the component number of the rear electronic component and the position where the rear electronic component is arranged near the rear electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of the back-side electronic component such as the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic component, and the type of the back-side electronic component in some cases. ) Is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  As described above, the color of the resist liquid applied to the ball rental board 228 and the volume control board 229 stored in the ball rental operation unit 220 adjacent to the ball rental operation unit 220 is different. To explain this, the tactile switch 224a for the ball lending button, the tactile switch 225a for the return button, and the signal transmission path for the three 7-segment LEDs are paths through which a signal on the so-called main side is transmitted, as described above. Therefore, the ball rental button tactile switch 224a, the return button tactile switch 225a, and the three 7-segment LEDs are mounted on the upper surface (front or front surface) of the ball rental board 228 housed in the ball rental operation unit 220. A ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 is electrically connected via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main body frame 4 side. While connected, the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button As described above, since the signal transmission path to the tactile switch 227a is not a path through which a signal on the so-called main side is transmitted, the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are operated by the ball lending operation. It is mounted on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the volume control board 229 housed in the unit 220, and does not pass through the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main frame 4 side. The drive board unit 1700 on the side of the main body frame 4 (the later-described effect drive for driving a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in response to a command from a peripheral control board 1510 described later) The peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side via the board 1720) It is electrically connected later to peripheral control board 1510) and can control the progress of the presentation.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the volume electrically connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control board 1510 which can control the progress of the effect, which will be described later) on the gaming board 5 side, which is a control device in the pachinko machine 1. The adjustment board 229 and the ball rental board 228 electrically connected to a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1 are adjacent to the ball rental operation unit 220 of the pachinko machine 1. However, while the volume control substrate 229 is coated with a white resist liquid to form a white coating, the ball rental substrate 228 is coated with a green resist liquid different from white. Since the green coating film is formed, an operator who performs wiring connection electrically contacts the volume control board 229 using the color of the coating film thus formed (that is, the color of the resist) as a mark. A wiring to be, it is possible to contribute to the prevention of the wiring connected sphere rental substrate 228 and electrically, erroneous connection. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of erroneous connection of wiring.

  In addition, the volume control board 229 includes a volume up button tactile switch 226a that allows the player to largely adjust the volume related to the effect, and a volume down button tactile switch that allows the player to adjust the volume related to the effect. 227a are mounted, and the detection results (ON signal by ON, OFF signal by OFF) of the tactile switch 226a for the volume up button and the tactile switch 227a for the volume down button are used as the control device in the pachinko machine 1. This is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control board 1510 which can control the progress of the effect, which will be described later), and the player can request the ball rental board 228 to pay out the game ball B by ball rental. Tactile switch 224a for ball lending button and ball lending machine (for example, , CR unit), a return button tactile switch 225a for requesting the return of cash or a prepaid card, and three 7 for displaying the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. The segment LED is mounted, and the detection result (ON signal by ON, OFF signal by OFF) detected by the tactile switch for ball lending button 224a and the tactile switch for return button 225a is a ball rental machine which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1. (For example, a CR unit). When a drive signal from a ball rental machine (for example, a CR unit) is transmitted to the ball rental board 228, the ball rental display unit including three 7-segment LEDs mounted on the ball rental board 228 provides a ball rental display. While the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the machine is displayed, volume control is performed by a peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control board 1510, which can control the progress of the effect, described later) on the game board 5 side. No drive signal is output to the board 229, and the volume control board 229 is controlled based on the drive signal from the peripheral control unit 1500 (a later-described peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 side. No electronic components constituting the display unit to be displayed are mounted. In this way, the path through which the position of the player's operation is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control board 1510 described later, which can control the progress of the effect) on the game board 5 which is a control device in the pachinko machine 1. And a path transmitted to a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 which is a control device outside the pachinko machine 1, and is electrically connected to the volume control board 229. If the wiring and the wiring electrically connected to the ball rental board 228 are erroneously connected, an unintended disadvantage may occur to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is assumed that a white resist solution is applied to the ball rental substrate 228 to form a white coating film, and a green resist solution different from white is applied to the ball rental substrate 228. A wrong green connection is prevented by forming a green coating film to be formed.

  Also, while surface mount type electronic components are employed as the volume up button tactile switch 226a and the volume down button tactile switch 227a mounted on the volume control board 229, they are mounted on the ball rental board 228. Tactile switch for ball lending button 224a, tactile switch for return button 225a, and three 7-segment LEDs are lead type electronic components, so that the type of electronic component mounted on the substrate (lead type or surface mount) Based on one of the types, the wiring electrically connected to the volume control board 229 and the wiring electrically connected to the ball rental board 228 can be determined. This can contribute to prevention of erroneous connection.

  By the way, as for the light reflectance, the white color is highest and the dark color is low, but as described above, the volume control substrate 229 without the display unit is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film. On the other hand, the ball rental substrate 228 provided with the ball rental display unit is coated with a dark green resist solution to form a green coating film. This reduces the efficiency of reflection of light emitted by the ball rental display unit on the upper surface (front surface or front surface) of the ball rental board 228 so as not to hinder the performance of the rendering device excluding the ball rental display unit. Can be. In the present embodiment, green is adopted as the dark color, but purple or black may be used instead of green.

  In the present embodiment, the ball rental machine 228 is provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 via the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the body frame 4 side. (For example, a CR unit), the volume control board 229 does not pass through the door frame sub-relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side and the interface board 635 on the main frame 4 side. The drive board unit 1700 on the side of the main body frame 4 (an effect described later for driving a decorative board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in response to a command from a peripheral control board 1510 described later). Via the drive board 1720) and the interface control board 635 on the main frame 4 side, the peripheral control unit 1500 on the game board 5 side (controls the progress of the effect). Bets are electrically connected later to peripheral control board 1510) and can. That is, the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 exist on the door frame 3 side. Therefore, the same color as the color of the resist liquid applied to the ball rental substrate 228 is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the door frame main relay board 104 on the door frame 3 side, and the green resist liquid is applied. The same color as the color of the resist liquid applied to the volume control board 229 is adopted on the front surface (front surface) of the door frame sub-intermediate board 105 on the door frame 3 side so that a green coating film is formed. Preferably, a white resist solution is applied to form a white coating film. Note that the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is more brittle than the green coating film formed by applying the green resist solution, and is a single-sized copper-clad laminate (base). When arranging and cutting out a plurality of substrates from a material, the substrate may be broken or split.

  By the way, when manufacturing a substrate, as described above, since a plurality of substrates are arranged and cut out from one fixed-size copper-clad laminate (base material), the color of the silk paint and the resist liquid are reduced. Are the same, and a plurality of substrates having the same color are manufactured. For this reason, for example, by examining a substrate having white color, it may be possible to determine whether or not the substrate is manufactured from the same fixed-size copper-clad laminate (base material). When it is found, when checking for other defects, it is only necessary to first trace (search for) other substrates having white color one by one, and this has the advantage of being able to contribute to early detection of defects.

  Note that the volume adjustment operation for adjusting the volume of the effect based on the volume up button 226 to a large value or for adjusting the volume related to the effect based on the volume down button 227 for a certain period (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on) The variable display is displayed for a certain period of time until the peripheral control MPU is activated (hereinafter, if the peripheral control MPU also has the function of the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control MPU may be described as “peripheral control IC”). May be always executable by the peripheral control MPU (or the peripheral control IC) except for one or both of the predetermined periods before and after the special symbol is stopped, and may be in a customer waiting state. Specific conditions such as the period during which the demonstration using the effect display device 1600 is performed by the peripheral control MPU (or the peripheral control IC) Or it may be set to be executed by the peripheral control MPU only if you are standing (or peripheral control IC). In addition, the volume control result based on the volume control operation of adjusting the volume related to the performance based on the volume up button 226 or the volume controlled related to the performance based on the volume down button 227 is immediately changed to the peripheral control MPU (or the peripheral control MPU). The control IC) may be reflected, or the peripheral control MPU (or the peripheral control IC) may be delayed at a timing later than the timing of the volume adjustment operation according to the situation (whether or not the display is fluctuating, the progress of the effect, etc.). It may be reflected.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine having a plurality of substrates has been conventionally proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0047], and FIG. 5). In the case where the wirings are arranged in the same manner, the person who performs the wiring connection work may erroneously connect the wiring electrically connected to one substrate and the wiring electrically connected to the other substrate.

[3-5c-6. Unit for removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 for removing the upper tray ball and the unit 240 for removing the upper tray ball in the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. When the upper ball removing button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper ball removing unit 230 and the upper ball removing unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to form the upper plate 201. This is for discharging the game balls B stored therein to the lower plate 202.

  The upper bowl removing unit 230 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 to the left of the mounting protrusion 211f and below the ball lending operation unit 220. The unit for removing the upper tray ball 240 is attached to a rear portion of the unit for removing the upper tray ball 230 on the rear surface of the tray unit base 211.

  The upper bowl removing unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the bowl unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231, and a front barrel 231 that is vertically movably inserted into the barrel of the front base 231. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end abutting on the lower end of the upper counter ball removing button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242 a of the upper counter ball removing slider 242 of the upper counter ball removing unit 240. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The unit 240 for removing the upper tray ball is provided with a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed port 211e and the slider insertion opening 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. A slider 242 that is slidably mounted on the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 that is mounted on the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and has a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides the ball backward, and a game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. And a guiding path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a, when assembled to the dish base unit 210, is directed forward through the upper dish ball feeding port 211e of the dish unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper dish 201. It is formed at the position where it opens. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed such that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower portion in a state where the ball feeding guiding path 241b is assembled to the door frame 3. Thus, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The portion extending to the left and right of the ball guide path 241c protrudes to the right in rear view from the portion to which the upper plate ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. And is open on the right side in rear view. A portion extending to the left and right of the ball guide path 241c is closed by a rear cover 244 on the rear side. In a state where the ball guide path 241 c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of a portion extending vertically below the ball feed guide path 241 b is located in front of the ball outlet 141 b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the pitch guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish removing slider 242 has a square shape in a front view, and has an operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from an upper left corner and protruding rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined such that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  In the state where the slider 242 for removing the upper tray ball is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242 a penetrates the slider insertion opening 211 g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242 a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the head. Further, in the state in which the upper ball removing slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball removing member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. The rod 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper countersunk slider 242, and urges the upper counterslider 242 upward. Therefore, the slider 242 is positioned at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by opposing the urging force of the spring 243.

  The unit for removing the ball from the upper ball 230 and the unit after removing the ball from the upper ball 240 are positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the slider for the upper ball from the ball is removed. The upper ball removing button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward through the front slider 232 in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c abutting on the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition between them.

  Accordingly, in a state where the upper plate ball removing button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and are sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving portion 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 through the entrance 141a and the ball feed member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper ball removing button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper ball removing slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the operation of the upper ball removing slider 242 is performed. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partitioning portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B, which has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b, is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the cutout portion 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball ejection guide path 241c, and then is lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper tray removing button 222 is released, the upper tray removing slider 242 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is removed via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball pullout button 222 is raised, the ball pullout member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c abutting on the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball dropout 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is sent to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feed unit 140 by the unit for removing the upper plate ball 230 and the unit for removing the upper plate ball 240, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202, is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and has the effect operation unit 300 attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202, and a dish unit base 251 covering the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252 attached to the front of the 211, a lower dish emptying unit 260 attached to the lower face of the lower dish main body 251, and a dish attached to the upper part of the front of the dish unit main body 252 with a space left and right. The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. 285.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and that is open at the top and rear. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

  The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the right front end in plan view. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl removing hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower bowl removing unit 265.

  The lower plate main body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 in a state where the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. In addition, when the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball hole 202a supplies the lower plate ball. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210, and decorates the front of the plate unit 200. The plate unit body 252 protrudes so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and protrudes forward on the left side in the left-right direction on the lower side. The upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 bulges forward from the left and right ends to the center in the left and right direction at the upper part and extends downward and is separated to the left and right. Has a lower front decorative portion 252b bulging forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251; and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and have a dish upper left decoration unit 270, a dish lower left decoration unit 280, a dish upper right decoration unit 275, and a dish lower right decoration unit on the front surface, respectively. 285 are attached. The right side of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The plate unit main body 252 has a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows a player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed such that the top and bottom become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending forward and backward by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

  Further, the plate unit body 252 includes a front notch 252e cut out upward from a lower front end of a portion of the lower front decorative portion 252b covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. And a bottom notch 252f which is cut out at a portion below the bottom. In the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f, the lower tray removing unit 260 is inserted.

  Further, the plate unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion opening 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b back and forth and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side swelling portions 252a that are located at the center in the left-right direction. And a production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which the attachment 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is approximately １ ／ of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 when assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. . Further, in a state where the lower plate removing unit 260 is assembled with the lower plate removing unit 260, the lower plate removing button 260 of the lower unit removing unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate removing base 260 of the lower unit removing unit 260 is attached. The bottom notch 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are on the same plane.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate empty unit]
The lower dish removing unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower dish ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower dish ball extracting hole 202 a, the game balls B are stored in the lower dish 202 or the game balls B are discharged from the lower dish 202. It is to make it.

  The lower plate removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a plate-like lower plate removing base 261 having a through hole vertically penetrating at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower plate removing unit 261. A slider 262 mounted on the upper surface side of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower counter ball removal button 263 mounted on a front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 for urging the slider 262 forward; The slider 262 is provided with a lower ball removing cover 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower ball removing cover 265 through the slider 262 in an open state.

  The lower plate empty base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom cutout 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the lower plate empty hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower bowl removing hole 261 is formed in the same size as the lower bowl removing hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-back direction, and is slidably mounted in the left-right center of the lower dish removal base 261 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The slider 262 has a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a columnar shape.

  The lower ball removing cover 265 is attached to the lower ball removing base 261 at a position on the left side of the slider 262 at a position on the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically. And the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower bowl removing lid 265 is formed with a left-right extending slit into which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the state where the lower dish removing unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish removing base 261 closes the bottom cutout 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower face of the lower dish removing base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the lower tray removing unit 260, in a normal state, the slider 262 is located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower tray removing lid 265 is located immediately above the through hole. And the through hole (lower countersunk ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower bowl 202 is closed by the lower bowl removing lid 265, and the lower bowl 202 can store the game ball B. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower bowl removing button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower counter button 263 is pressed rearward to move rearward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower counter button 263. Becomes When the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower bowl removing lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower bowl removing lid 265 centers on the left end side and the right end side moves backward. It turns in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removing cover 265 located immediately above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, whereby the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removing hole 202a is opened. The game balls B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by the pressing of the lower plate removing button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate removing button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower bowl removing lid 265 is kept rotating backward, the lower bowl removing hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower bowl 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower bowl removing hole 202a from this state, when the lower bowl removing button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b, is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. You. Then, when the pressing of the lower ball removing button 263 is released, the slider 262 is moved forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower ball removing button 263 is returned to the state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower countersunk ball cover 265 rotates and the right end side is located immediately above the through-hole, and the lower countersunk ball hole 202a is closed by the lower countersunk ball cover 265. Thereby, the game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper front side of the upper side bulging portion 252 a of the dish unit main body 252. The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the dish unit 200.

  The upper left dish decoration unit 270 includes a semi-cylindrical transparent upper left dish decoration 271, a transparent upper left dish lens 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration 271, and an upper left dish inner lens 272. A decorative plate 273 mounted on the rear side of the lens 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”).

  The upper left dish 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The upper left decorative plate 271 is formed transparent. In addition, a lens cut may be made on the surface of the upper left dish decoration 271 (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be made on the back surface together with the surface of the upper left dish decoration 271. May be formed (may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface of the upper left dish 271 may be lens-cut (may be formed in a polyhedron).

  The upper left dish inner lens 272 is inserted into the interior of the upper left decoration 271 from behind. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper left plate decoration substrate 273 are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and the upper left plate decorative body 271 can be illuminated by emitting light. . The dish upper left inner lens 272 is formed to be transparent. The surface of the upper left dish inner lens 272 is provided with a lens cut (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be scattered and refracted, and the upper left dish decoration arranged behind the upper left dish inner lens 272 is provided. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 273 are hard to clearly see from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the rear surface together with the surface of the upper left dish inner lens 272 (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and instead of the front surface of the upper left dish inner lens 272, A lens cut may be performed (a polyhedron may be formed).

  The upper left plate decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. And is continuous. Since the upper left dish decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the upper left dish decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left decoration board 273 emit light, the entire front of the upper left dish decoration 271 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 includes a transparent dish upper right decorative body 276 extending in a semi-cylindrical shape, a transparent dish upper right inner lens 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right inner. And a right upper decorative board 278 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) mounted on the rear side of the lens 277.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely right and upper at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed transparent. In addition, a lens cut may be made on the surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be made on the back face together with the front face of the dish upper right decorative body 276. (Or may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be formed on the back surface of the upper right decorative body 276 (may be formed in a polyhedron).

  The dish upper right inner lens 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from behind. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs that are surface-mounted type and capable of emitting multicolor light, and by emitting light, the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be made to emit light. . The dish upper right inner lens 277 is formed transparent. The surface of the dish upper right inner lens 277 is lens-cut (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the dish upper right decoration placed behind the dish upper right inner lens 277. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 278 are hard to clearly see from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the dish upper right inner lens 277 (may be formed in a polyhedron), and instead of the front surface of the dish upper right inner lens 277, A lens cut may be performed (a polyhedron may be formed).

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. And is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 partially protrude upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250 when assembled in the door frame 3. The upper left side decorative unit 270 and the upper right side decorative unit 275 side of the upper side bulging portion 252a can form a step. Thus, the player can hook his / her finger using the step between the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game balls B in the upper plate 201 are evenly distributed. It can be used as a fingerhold when performing, or operating the effect operation unit 301 described later. In addition, due to the steps between the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Decorative unit at lower left of plate and decorative unit at lower right of plate]
The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front side of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. Can be The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 cooperate with the upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The lower left dish decoration unit 280 includes a semi-cylindrical transparent lower left dish decoration 281, a lower left dish inner lens 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decoration 281, and a lower left dish inner. And a lower left decorative plate 283 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”) mounted on the rear side of the lens 282.

  The lower left dish decoration 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. In the lower left dish decoration 281, a semicircular arc bulging forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276 has a central axis extending slightly obliquely to the upper left rear at the left end, and a center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that a half cylinder is bent. The lower left corner of the dish 281 has a spherical shape at the left end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the lower left decorative plate 281 becomes thinner toward the left end. The lower left decorative body 281 is formed transparent. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the surface of the lower left decorative object 281 (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be performed on the rear surface together with the front surface of the lower left decorative object 281. May be formed (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be formed on the back surface of the lower left decorative body 281 (may be formed in a polyhedron).

  The lower left dish inner lens 282 is inserted into the lower left decorative body 281 from the rear. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left dish decoration substrate 283 are full-color LEDs that are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multiple colors. By emitting light, the lower left dish decoration 281 can be decorated with light. . The lower left inner lens 282 is transparent. The surface of the lower left dish inner lens 282 is provided with a lens cut so that light can be irregularly refracted (formed into a polyhedron), and a lower left dish decoration arranged behind the lower left dish inner lens 282. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 283 are clearly hard to visually recognize from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the surface of the lower left inner lens 282 (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and instead of the front surface of the lower left inner lens 282, A lens cut may be performed (a polyhedron may be formed).

  The lower left dish decoration unit 280 is located on the lower left side of the upper left dish decoration unit 270 in a state where the lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end of the lower left dish decoration unit 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300 is located. It is continuous with the left end. In the lower left dish decoration unit 280, the left end of the lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left dish decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the lower left dish decoration 281, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower left decoration board 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decoration 281 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The lower right decorative plate unit 285 includes a transparent lower right decorative plate 286 extending in a semi-cylindrical shape, and a transparent lower right inner lens 287 attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative plate 286. And a lower right plate decorative board 288 mounted on the rear side of the lower right inner lens 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”). , Is provided.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as going from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The lower right dish decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that a half cylinder is bent. The right lower end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the lower right decoration 286 becomes thinner toward the right end. This lower right decoration 286 is formed transparent. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the surface of the lower right decorative piece 286 (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be formed on the back surface together with the upper surface of the lower right decorative piece 286. May be provided (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be provided on the back surface of the lower right decorative body 286 (may be formed in a polyhedron). .

  The lower right dish inner lens 287 is inserted into the interior of the lower right decorative body 286 from behind. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right plate decoration substrate 288 are full-color LEDs that are surface-mount type and can emit multicolor light. Can be. The lower right inner lens 287 is transparent. The surface of the lower right inner lens 287 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be scattered and refracted. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative board 288 are clearly hard to visually recognize from the player side. A lens cut may be made (a polyhedron may be formed), and a lens cut may be made on the back surface together with the surface of the lower right inner lens 287 (a polyhedron may be formed). May be formed), or a lens cut may be formed on the back surface instead of the front surface of the lower right inner lens 287 (may be formed in a polyhedron).

  The dish lower right decorative unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decorative body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous with the right end of In the lower right dish decoration unit 285, the right end of the lower right decoration body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right dish decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decoration piece 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower right decoration board 288 emit light, the lower right decoration body 286 The entire front surface can be almost uniformly illuminated and decorated, and it can be seen that the fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the direction in which the effect operation button moves forward and backward. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. The effect operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, decorates the plate unit 200, and, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates and participates in the effect. Is what you can do. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The rendering operation unit 301 includes a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by a player, and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by a player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about に 対 し て of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a transparent central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and the outer circumference of the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit. And a transparent annular outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b disposed between the inner periphery of the inner periphery 302 and the inner periphery.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotating operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330 An operating ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operating ring transmission gear 350 to the operating section base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and has a plurality of effect operation ring decoration substrates 352 and effect operation ring decoration substrates 352. The decoration board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the display unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit facing the inside of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The production operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper part and the rear part opened.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is depressed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the upper front end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, A transparent dish center upper lens 313 attached from the back inside the dish center decoration 312a of the cover 312, and a light attached forward of the dish center inner lens 313 and capable of irradiating light forward. A dish center upper decorative board 314 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a transparent dish center inner lens 315 mounted from the rear in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and a dish center lower lens Decorative substrate 31 under the center of dish mounted with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear side of 315 and capable of irradiating light forward. It has a, and.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape that bulges downward at the front side from the center rearward in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is a production operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252. 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on an upper end edge extending in a front semicircular shape is located forward as it goes upward. In the present embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest part when assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape whose front view is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and is formed on the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a transparent upper dish center decoration 312a in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends along the front end of the lower unit cover 311 in a semi-circular shape, and below the center dish upper decoration 312a. A transparent bottom center decorative body 312b in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius), and extending in a semi-arc shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a shape bent as described above. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semi-circular shape with a large curvature with respect to the plate center upper decoration 312a, and the plate center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the plate center upper decoration 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. In addition, when assembled to the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish upper decorative body 312a are respectively continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish center lower decorative body The left and right ends of 312b are respectively connected to the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285. The unit front cover 312 is formed transparent.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and its front end is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is equal to the door frame. The distance is about の of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper inner lens 313 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted from the rear into the dish center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 and attached thereto. The dish center decorative board 314 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center decorative body 312a, and is forward (outside) in the upper surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”). ) Are mounted. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center decoration board 314 are full-color LEDs that are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multicolor light. By emitting light, the dish center decoration body 312a can be decorated with light. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the surface of the plate center decorative body 312a (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be formed on the back surface together with the surface of the plate center decorative body 312a. May be applied (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be applied to the back surface of the upper plate 312a (or may be formed in a polyhedron). .

  The inner lens 313 on the center of the plate is formed transparent. The surface of the inner lens 313 on the center of the plate is subjected to lens cutting (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be scattered refraction. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the dish center upper decorative board 314 to be arranged are difficult to clearly see from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the inner lens 313 above the plate center (a polyhedron may be formed), or on the back surface instead of the surface of the inner lens 313 above the plate center. May be subjected to lens cutting (or may be formed in a polyhedron).

  The dish center lower inner lens 315 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The plate-under-center decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the plate-under-center decorative body 312b, and is forward (outside) in the upper surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”). ) Are mounted. The plurality of LEDs of the dish-under-center decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs that are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multicolor light. By emitting light, the dish-under-center decoration body 312b can be illuminated and decorated. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the surface of the dish-under-center decoration 312b (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and a lens cut may be formed on the back surface together with the surface of the dish-under-center decoration 312b. May be applied (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or a lens cut may be applied to the back surface of the dish 312b under the center of the dish (may be formed in a polyhedron). .

  The inner lens 315 below the center of the plate is formed transparent. The surface of the inner lens 315 below the center of the dish is subjected to lens cutting (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be diffused. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower plate center decoration board 316 to be arranged are difficult to clearly recognize from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the surface of the inner lens 315 below the plate center (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or on the back surface instead of the surface of the inner lens 315 below the plate center. May be subjected to lens cutting (or may be formed in a polyhedron).

  Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the semi-circular shape of the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower plate decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, When the LED of the upper center decorative board 314 and the LED of the lower plate center decorative board 316 emit light, the whole of them can be made to emit light almost uniformly, and it can be seen that the fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end protruding farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 when assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decorative body 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decorative body 271 and the plate upper right decorative body 276, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is the plate lower left decorative body 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by integral decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit mounting of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape having an open top, and is formed to have a light-transmitting property (for example, a milky white color).

  The operation unit base 320 has a substantially cubic box-shaped outer shape, and a main body 321 whose upper part is open, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (here, four) legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting portion formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and mounted to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body 321 has a vibration speaker 354 attached to the bottom wall from below, and a portion of the lower surface where the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and can amplify the vibration and convert the vibration into sound such as voice or music and output the sound. it can.

  The leg 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. In the main body 321, a through hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The outer diameter of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially coincident with the inner circumference of the upper plate center decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the operation ring transmission gear rotatably around an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. 322 is exposed to the outside below.

  When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in a state where the vibration speaker 354 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to a lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from the lower front. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a transparent rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by a player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation part 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice as large as the front-rear dimension of the upper plate 201, and an inner diameter of approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation section base 320, an annular rotating base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotating base. A plurality of bushes 333 which are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the shaft 332 and are rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to move the rotary base 332 upward. And a restricting ring retaining member 334. The ring attachment base 331, the rotation base 332, the bush 333, and the ring stopper 334 are each formed to be transparent.

  The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to a lower outer ring cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and a lower side of the outer ring cover 335. The outer ring lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotary operation unit 302 and the inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are mounted on the upper surface of the rotary base 332 to form a part of the rotary operation unit 302. And a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a transparent annular shape.

  The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge on which the rotating base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction, in the outer circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a boss 331b for cylindrically protruding upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions for rotatably mounting the bush 333 and a circumferentially spaced outer side than the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of portions. The plurality of through-holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs on the effect operation ring decorative board 352.

  The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring attachment base 331, and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a protruding downward from the lower surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the rendering operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state where the ring gear 332a is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a three-dimensional shape on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc constituting the outer and upper part of the circle extends in an annular shape. And a plurality of outer upper cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending to the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. I have. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative part 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotating base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 includes an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer and lower portion of a circle extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of circumferentially projecting upper and lower portions protruding from inside the outer lower surface portion 336a. And an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b arranged. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc forming an inner and upper part of a circle extends in an annular shape, and a tube extending downward from an inner end of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which a circular arc extending in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface 337 b has the same cylindrical inner diameter as the rotary base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer upper cover 335, the outer lower cover 336, and the inner cover 337 are assembled to the rendering operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface 335a, the outer lower surface 336a, and the inner surface 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion of a half or more of a circle, and the entire portion has a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotary drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57 (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation axis projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342; a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343; and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. I have. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the transmission gear 344, and a leftward protruding portion from the left side of the gear portion 345a. A plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detecting pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detecting pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from integral multiples of the intervals of the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Accordingly, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It has become. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotation drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper part of the gear part 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed part of the gear part 345a is the drive side gear part 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Meshes with In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 as a whole in a state where it is assembled with the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to drive the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby causing the rotary operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate. it can.

  In addition, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring drive is performed in the same rotation direction as the rotated operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The transmission ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing 325.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. And a drive-side gear portion 350b in the form of a spur gear meshing with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring gear 350a and the drive gear 350b have the same pitch circle diameter. The bevel gear ring side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above and the gear attachment member 351 being attached to the operation portion base 320. Can be

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring gear 350a is meshed with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive gear 350b is The transmission drive gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 meshes with the gear 345a. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and also controls the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Directional operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which the ring is divided into front and rear, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer circumference on each of the upper surfaces (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs that are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multiple colors.

  The effect operation ring decorative board 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state where the effect operation ring decorative board 352 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a transparent decorative substrate cover 353 on the upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a form divided into front and rear similarly to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352 a from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, so that the decoration board cover 353 and the ring attachment base 331 are formed transparent, so that the decoration board cover 353 and the ring attachment base 331 are formed. Through, or through the decorative board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331, the transparent outer ring upper cover 335, the transparent outer ring lower cover 336, and the transparent inner ring that constitute the transparent rotary operation unit 302. The cover 337 can be decorated with light from inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration in which the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound (sound) such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a vibration plate. In addition, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device in which an eccentric weight is rotated by a motor, and can present more various effects to a player.

[3-5e-8. Direction operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as viewed from the lower front. FIG. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lower position, and FIG. 62B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the upper position. The production operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the production operation ring 330, and has a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a transparent columnar central pressing operation unit 303a, and a transparent cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed to cover the outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303a. , It consists of.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged symmetrically with a button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a center axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward and in a columnar shape, and a disc-shaped connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other and having a circular outer shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted respectively. It includes a pair of lift springs 365, the a and elevating base 364 is being biased upward.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and having an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 mounted on the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 so that the central shaft 366 is inserted therethrough. 370, the lower and upper cam drive gear member 370 are connected to the lower end, and the central shaft The elevating cam member 371 which is rotatably mounted and rotatably attached to the elevating base member 364, and the elevating driving gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam driving gear member 370 are covered from above. And a disc-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Furthermore, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted above the elevating base 364 so as to be movable vertically by a pair of guide shafts 362. A central button body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button body 373 and the elevating base 364 to urge the central button body 373 upward, and a central button body 373. A transparent central button cover 375, which is formed in a cylindrical shape with substantially the same diameter and closed at the upper end side and which is closed on the upper end side, and which is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover above the upper base 363; A central button decoration board 376 mounted on the upper surface and mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward.In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button main body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing operation section 303a.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the center button main body 373 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and an outer peripheral portion. A transparent outer board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and the outer circumference of the center button body 373, and covers the outer circumference of the center button body 373 in the outer board cover 378. A transparent cylindrical outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 that is arranged on the outer peripheral side of the part and above the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and has a three-dimensional decoration, and covers the outer peripheral and upper surfaces of the outer decorative inner lens 379. The center button cover 375 is attached to the lifting base 364 and has a transparent Has such an outer peripheral button cover 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral board cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The pressing detection sensor 381 is attached to the button unit base 361, and the up / down cam driving gear member 370 A lifting / lowering detection sensor 382 for detecting the lifting / lowering of the lifting / lowering base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting / lowering cam driving gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface, and a pressing detection sensor 381 and a lifting / lowering detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is attached. The button unit base 361 has the lower end of the leg 361 b attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 forward and backward from the center, respectively, at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends thereof are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361, and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The elevating base 364 has an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating the center in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. An upright wall portion 364c protruding upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding near the lower end of the upright wall portion 364c into the central hole 364b so as to face each other. I have. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably mounted around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in a vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 has a space in which the bottom part 373b of the center button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the upper part 363, while the upper end of the upright wall part 364c abuts on the upper base 363. Has formed. Further, the lifting base 364 is moved up and down by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the lifting cam member 371.

  The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to a lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And an elevation detecting piece 370c which is cylindrically protruded downwardly from and is notched at two locations facing each other, and is detected by an elevation detecting sensor 382. The lifting cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 at the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar shape and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the lifting base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis, a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  In addition, the lifting cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 to move the elevating base 364 up and down.

  The central button body 373 has a cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts penetrating the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the upright wall 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom 373b. It includes a pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a columnar shape and are inserted into the button spring 374.

  The center button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward, and its lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, whereby the downward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the center button main body 373.

  The center button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 into which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and the lower ends are attached with screws into which washers are inserted. When the washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevating base 364, the upward movement of the center button main body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button body 373 is moved upward and downward when the bottom 373 b (the lower end of the center opening 373 d) of the center button body 373 abuts against the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 is formed so as to penetrate downward. The center button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a smaller urging force than the lifting spring 365.

  The center button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tube portion 373a of the center button main body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate 375a. It is provided and is formed transparent. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373 a of the center button body 373.

  The central button decoration board 376 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on an upper surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”) are of a surface mounting type and can emit multicolor light. ing. The center button decoration board 376 can cause the center button cover 375 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. The outer peripheral button decorative board 377 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) are surface-mount type and can emit multicolor light. ing. The outer peripheral button decoration board 377 can illuminate the outer peripheral inner lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers an upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular board section 378 a is extended from the inner periphery of the board section 378 a in a cylindrical shape. A cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

  In the outer peripheral inner lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction upward are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379 is attached to the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 above the substrate portion 378a. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer decorative inner lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a to the center. . In the outer peripheral button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380 a is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b has an inner diameter substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the effect operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 62A, the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364 are moved in a state where the elevating base 364 is urged upward by a pair of elevating springs 365. The lifting cam member 371 is inserted from below into a locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which it has moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. In this state, the center button main body 373 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Therefore, in the state assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also project upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62A), when the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward to move downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button body 373 is pressed. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation section 303a is detected. When the center pressing operation section 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. There is no detection by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the elevating cam drive is driven via the driven gear 369 meshed with the elevating drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 62 moves rightward, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the fourth position. Rolling to the left part of the locking portion 371c of the one cam 371b, the lifting base 364 moves downward via the guide pin 364d against the urging force of the lifting spring 365.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls leftward along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365. At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to be in the ascending position.

  In the state of the ascending position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the operation of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the state of the ascending position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. In the state of the ascending position, the positional relationship between the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowering position is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 has moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has protruded above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in a state where they are assembled to the production operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are projected more than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the state of the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The central button body 373 moves downward against the force and comes into contact with the lifting base 364. When the center button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button body 373 protrudes below the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is connected to the button unit base 361. , The pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  When the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward by a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the center button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the elevating base 364, the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b) is also in the lowered position.

  As described above, when the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the center button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 projecting downward from the lifting base 364. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation unit 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved via the outer peripheral button cover 380 to move the elevating base. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the elevating base 364 are in the lowered position. However, since the center button cover 375 (central pressing operation part 303a) projects upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button body The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view. Then, in FIG. 62 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d is moved to the first cam. Rolls along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c depressed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original lowering position is restored.

[3-5e-9. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to a rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 mounted on the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 mounted in the board box 391.

  The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled to the rendering operation unit 300. The operation section relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer periphery button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, and the elevation detection sensor 382, and the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 and the relay. I have.

[3-5e-10. Operation of the production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the rendering operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the rendering operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the plate unit when the operation unit is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer circumference pressing operation unit disposed between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The center pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer pressing unit 303b is formed by the outer button cover 380 and the outer substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state where the front side of a virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the circular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is inclined to be lower. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 disposed in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, the pressing operation unit 303 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted through the operation ring transmission gear 350. Rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotary operation unit 302 by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by a player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and is rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in left side view. The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are spaced apart in the circumferential direction is different from the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Thus, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

  In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. I do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the left side, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b of the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the contents of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotationally driven in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in a direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy and a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which a half or more arc of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. Further, as shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is mounted in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that is easy to grasp by a player's hand. .

  This allows the player to touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a manner that the player can easily perform. The sex has been enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can perform the rotation operation even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lower position or the upper position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, it cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of a car.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape below the effect operation ring 330. Thus, by turning on the LED of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated. Further, in the effect operation ring decoration board 352, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, so that the plurality of LEDs arranged in order are rotated in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be made to emit light. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to the player as if an LED (decorative board) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 65A, the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface that is higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of a descending position that projects slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation section 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation section 303a of the pressing operation section 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation unit 303a (central button cover 375) descends to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380). Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

  In the normal (down position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b of the pressing operation section 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b (the outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing detection is performed. No pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). As a result, the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 causes the pressing operation portion 303 to vigorously protrude upward together with the elevating base 364 to the state of the ascending position (see FIG. 65B). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotating operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude more upward than the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330.

  When the center operation unit 303a is pressed downward in the state where the operation unit 303 is in the raised position, first, the center operation unit 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the center operation unit 303a is pressed. The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect pressing. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b The state is substantially the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 detects pressing.

  Also, when the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b is pressed downward in the state where the pressing operation section 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation section 303a projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operating unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). . In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect pressing.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to encourage the player to press the center pressing operation unit 303a firmly, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the production operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , It is possible to further entertain the player-participation type production.

  Note that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, it is difficult for some players to perform the rotation operation by using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult because the pressing operation unit 303 is in the way. As a result, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the upper left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outside of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame left side base 401 attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”), and a front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. , A transparent left side inner lens 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401, and a transparent door frame left side decoration attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side inner lens 403. And a body 404.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opening forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are of a surface mounting type and capable of emitting multicolor light. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side inner lens 403 is formed to be transparent. The surface of the left side inner lens 403 is lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the door frame left behind the left side inner lens 403 is left. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decorative substrate 402 are difficult to clearly recognize from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the left side inner lens 403 (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or instead of the front surface of the left side inner lens 403, A lens cut may be performed (a polyhedron may be formed). The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed to be transparent. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thus, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward. Note that the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be subjected to lens cutting (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the back surface thereof may be The lens may be cut (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface of the door frame left side decorative body 404 may be lens-cut (formed in a polyhedron). Good).

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the upper left dish decoration 271 of the upper left dish decoration unit 270 in the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 and the door frame top decoration 453. Is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 69 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side of the front of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction. And a plurality of decorative portions 410b in the side window capable of emitting light, which are arranged in the side window 410a. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult for the pachinko machine 1 where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine disposed on the right side, or the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 on the right side. Thus, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, thereby forming a player's personal space that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A transparent side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of transparent side window interior decoration portions 410b attached to the front surface, extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on portions corresponding to the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b, and a side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and a side window interior decoration member 412, and a plurality of transparent inner inner lenses 414 inserted into the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b, respectively.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the door frame right side base 411 and a transparent right side inner lens 415 that is disposed forward of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and extends vertically. A penetrating opening 416a that extends in a flat plate shape in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the cage door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415 and penetrates in the left-right direction to form a side window 410a is formed. The door frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side inner lens 415 are attached to the upper and lower sides to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side inner lens 415. Through hole 417 that extends in the horizontal direction and in the front-back direction and penetrates in the left-right direction to form side window 410a Includes but a door frame right side panel 417 are formed, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side inner lens 415, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”). It includes a door frame right side decorative board 418 and a transparent door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side inner lens 415 so as to cover the front side of the right side inner lens 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opening rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three in this case) of side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The decorative portion 410b in the side window of the decorative member 412 in the side window has a front end side formed in a truncated conical cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than a rear end side, and a front end of the cylinder formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The decorative member 412 in the side window is attached to a part of the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a position lower than the center in the vertical direction to an upper part. The side window interior decoration member 412 is formed to be transparent. Note that the surfaces of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 may be subjected to lens cutting (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or may be formed in a side window interior decoration member 412. A lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b (or may be formed in a polyhedron), and the inside of the side window decoration member 412 may be formed with a plurality of side windows. A lens cut may be provided on the back surface of the decorative portion 410b (the surface may be formed into a polyhedron).

  The in-side window decorative portion decorative board 413 is attached to the front of the right side base 411 of the door frame at a position behind the connection base 412a of the in-side window decorative member 412. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) of the decorative portion decorative substrate 413 in the side window are of a surface mounting type and capable of emitting multicolor light. It is an LED. In the side window decorative portion decorative board 413, four LEDs are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross shape around the axis of the side window decorative portion 410b at a position behind each of the plurality of side window decorative portions 410b. Have been.

  The inner inner lens 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The inner inner lens 414 divides the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, up, down, left, and right. The inner inner lens 414 is formed transparent. The surface of the inner inner lens 414 is subjected to a lens cut (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and a decorative portion in a side window disposed behind the inner inner lens 414 The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the decorative board 413 are difficult to clearly see from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the inner inner lens 414 (or may be formed in a polyhedron). (May be formed into a polyhedron).

  The right side inner lens 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and has a wavy shape such that the shape in the front-rear direction moves forward from the upper end to the lower end, and then moves rearward. Is formed. The right side inner lens 415 is formed transparent. The surface of the right side inner lens 415 is subjected to lens cutting (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the right side of the door frame disposed behind the right side inner lens 415 can be used. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the side decoration substrate 418 are difficult to clearly see from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the right side inner lens 415 (or may be formed into a polyhedron), or instead of the front surface of the right side inner lens 415, A lens cut may be performed (a polyhedron may be formed).

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and front and rear, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending wavy along the right side inner lens 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending vertically, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the side window decorative member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (the right side inner lens 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

  The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame has a flat plate shape and extends vertically and front and rear, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending in a wavy manner along the right side inner lens 415. The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending vertically, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (the right side inner lens 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. The door frame right side decorative board 418 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are of a surface mounting type and can emit multicolor light. The door frame right side decorative board 418 can make the door frame right side decorative body 419 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed transparent. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends in a wavy manner along the right side inner lens 415. Thereby, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward. Note that the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be subjected to lens cutting (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be provided with a back surface. The lens may be cut (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface of the door frame right side decorative body 419 may be cut in a lens (formed in a polyhedron). Good).

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the upper right decorative plate 276 of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. The body 453 is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. Looks embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) extending forward in a wavy manner so that a quarter of the area from the top projects most forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration section 410b extending in the front and rear direction within the side window 410a, and emits light from the LED of the side window interior section decoration board 413. Thus, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b inside the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be hardly seen through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the LED of the side window decoration unit decorative board 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of side window decoration units 410b is turned off. The game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the space between the three side window decorative portions 410b at 410a. Therefore, a player who is searching for the present pachinko machine 1 (the main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not need to move to the front of the present pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities to easily operate the present pachinko machine 1. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game in the present pachinko machine 1 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates through the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration part 410b can block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity. A player can make the entire game area 5a difficult to see, and by making it difficult for other players to feel as if viewed by another player, the player can play the game without hesitation. .

  Furthermore, when the three side window decoration portions 410b emit light by the LEDs of the side window decoration portion decoration board 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzling, and the visibility through the side window 410a changes. Let it. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is radiated in a band shape and radially. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the game area 5a and to make it difficult for another player, such as an adjacent player, to look inside the game area 5a. As described above, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be peeped, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that the attention is paid to other players. You can prevent discomfort from being unable to concentrate on the game as it becomes and feeling that you have lost due to mistakes, and make the game more fun by focusing the player on the game In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state which carried out. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit when disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 has a light-transmitting (for example, milky white) door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame. A light-transmitting (for example, milky white) top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover the left and right sides and the front upper part of the top base 451, and attached to the front end of the top cover 452. And a transparent (eg, milky white) door frame top bottom plate connecting the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451. 454. In the present embodiment, the door frame top base 451, the top upper cover 452, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are configured to have a light-transmitting property (for example, having a milky white color). A top cover 452 is attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides and the front upper part of the base 451, and the lower end of the transparent door frame top decoration 453 and the lower end of the door frame top base 451 are closed. Since the frame top bottom plate 454 is connected, the door frame top base 451 may be configured to be transparent instead of a light-transmitting one (for example, having a milky white color).

  The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top center decorative substrate 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted to the left of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 mounted on the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. Have.

  The door frame top unit 450 is disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 (that is, the door frame top decorative body 453 is disposed behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative body). A transparent top central inner lens 458 attached to the front of the top top cover 452 (located in front of the substrate 455), and disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 (ie, A transparent top left inner lens 459 which is disposed behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and is disposed in front of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456) and is mounted on the front surface of the top upper cover 452; It is disposed between the decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, it is disposed behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has the door frame top). Includes a right decorative disposed in front of the substrate 457) clear top right inner lens 460 is attached to the front surface of the top on the cover 452, the.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 and the light transmitting member attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below (for example, milky white) ) And the upper right edge of the lower cover frame 466 and the door frame top base 451. A door frame top relay board 467 mounted near the door frame and a translucent (eg, milky white) door frame top mounted on the top cover 452 so as to cover the door frame top base 451. And a plate 468.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat main body 451a extending to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction, and near the left and right ends on the front surface of the main body 451a. And a front protruding portion 451b protruding forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is located upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends move rearward as they go downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protruding portion 451b on the right side in the front view is also opened upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in a front view shape that is substantially the same as the door frame top base 451. The top upper cover 452 covers the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is formed in a shape that connects between the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most protruding forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward from the center in the left-right direction to both ends in the left-right direction. In addition, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed transparent. The door frame top decoration body 453 has a form in which the semicircular arc bulging forward becomes smaller in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively. Note that the front surface of the door frame top decoration 453 may be lens-cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron), and the front surface of the door frame top decoration 453 and the rear surface thereof may be lens-cut. May be applied (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or the back surface of the door frame top decoration 453 may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed in a polyhedron). .

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction, connects the front end and the rear end, and extends upward and downward in a flat plate-like shape, and vertically penetrates between the pair of reinforcement ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the left and right outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speakers 464. ing. A center speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. The door frame top center decorative board 455 is a full-color type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) are surface-mount type and can emit multicolor light. It is an LED. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the center portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is a full-color type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multiple colors. It is an LED. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by emitting a plurality of LEDs as appropriate.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is a full-color type in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “surface (mounting surface)”) are of a surface mounting type and can emit multicolor light. It is an LED. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can make the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 each extend in the left-right direction and are formed transparent. The surfaces of the top central inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 are each provided with a lens cut (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. Plural LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top central decorative board 455 arranged behind the top center inner lens 458, and a door frame top left decorative board arranged behind the top left inner lens 459 A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the 456 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the door frame top right decorative board 457 disposed behind the top right inner lens 460 are provided. It is difficult for the player to clearly see it. In addition, the front center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460 may have a lens cut on the front surface and the back surface, respectively (or may be formed in a polyhedron), Instead of the front surface of the top center inner lens 458, the top left inner lens 459, and the top right inner lens 460, the back surface may be provided with a lens cut (or may be formed into a polyhedron).

  The center speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top center speakers 462 face downward and forward. The center speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protruding portions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high range of sound such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, to form an integral decoration. I have. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice or music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[Lighting with topside speaker]
Next, the structure of the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIGS. 72 to 74 will be briefly described. In the top side speaker 464, a vibrating portion such as a diaphragm and a center cap is made of a light-transmitting resin (for example, milky white polypropylene or the like), and a magnet and a magnetic circuit portion such as a yoke are front and rear. The vibrating part and the magnetic circuit part are held by the housing part. A plurality of openings are formed in the housing in the circumferential direction. The through-hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a columnar shape is covered with a center cap disposed in the front, while the back is opened.

  On the front surface of the speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464 is mounted on a mounting portion (not shown), and on the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, a predetermined distance dimension from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 to the rear (in this embodiment, approximately 18 mm) The acoustic decorative board 469 is attached to attachment portions formed on four extended board attachment bending plates (not shown). In addition, a transparent plate (not shown) is attached together with the acoustic decoration substrate 469 to a mounting portion formed on the above-mentioned four board attachment bending plates together with the acoustic decoration substrate 469 so as to cover the rear surface (back surface) side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. This transparent plate protects the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 from being in contact with other members and causing no electrical trouble. As described above, the speaker decoration unit is assembled by mounting the top side speaker 464 on the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and mounting the acoustic decorative board 469 and the transparent plate on the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463. In other words, the speaker decoration unit includes the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, the sound decoration board 469, and the transparent plate.

  In a state where the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is a magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. And the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 covers the rear of the magnetic circuit unit of the top side speaker 464.

  On the front surface (front surface) and rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). .), A white resist layer is formed. A plurality of LEDs (in the present embodiment, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) 469a are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469. A connector (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469. A plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 are configured to flow a constant current controlled by an unillustrated LED constant current drive circuit mounted on the door frame top relay board 467. The LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 receives light emission data and a clock signal serially output from the peripheral control board 1510. By controlling the constant current flowing to the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469, the lighting, extinguishing, blinking, gradation lighting, etc. of the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 are controlled. Various light emission modes are realized.

  The peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging of the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the dispensing device 580, etc., detection of wrongdoing, opening of the door frame 3, main body Opening of the frame 4, disconnection of the wiring, etc.) or malfunctions (malfunctions related to the operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), detection of original positions (standby positions) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc.) have occurred. When there is no light emission data, the light emission data in the light emission mode of the effect mode is output to the LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 detects an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging of the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the dispensing device 580, etc., detection of wrongdoing, door frame 3 opening, body frame 4 opening, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or trouble (fault related to the operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc. If)) occurs, the light emission data serving as the notification mode as a mode different from the above-described normal mode is output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal.

  Note that the light emission mode of the production mode (normal time) is a variety of light emission modes combining lighting, turning off, blinking, gradation lighting, and the like, and the main control board 1310 sends a control signal to the function display unit 1400. The main control board 1310 outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 a command corresponding to a variable pattern displayed using a plurality of LEDs based on the control signal, and a variable pattern set when the symbol is variable displayed. Based on this command, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the light emission state in the effect mode as a predetermined effect light emission (normal time). On the other hand, in the notification mode (different mode from the normal mode), a predetermined color (red in the present embodiment) is a light emission mode in which the maximum brightness is turned on. When the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is detected based on the detection signal from the opening switch, a door frame opening command notifying the fact is transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control board receiving the door frame opening command is transmitted. Reference numeral 1310 denotes a door frame opening command for notifying that the door frame 3 is to be opened with respect to the main body frame 4 to which predetermined information (information for adjusting a format for transmitting the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) is added. The peripheral control board 1510 that has transmitted to the control board 1510 and received such a command controls the notification to a predetermined notification mode (a mode different from the normal mode).

  Although not shown, the component number of the front-side electronic component and the front-side electronic component are arranged near the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs 769a on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469, although not shown. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position (including the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the type of the front-side electronic component Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, on the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469, a component number of the back side electronic component, an area indicating a position where the back side electronic component is arranged, or the like is provided near the back side electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of the back side electronic component (and may include the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the type of the back side electronic component.) The back side notation shown is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist using a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white coating. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation (rear side notation) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist While the notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the configuration of the present embodiment), the yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation (backside notation) is yellow, the yellow frontside notation (white backside notation for white resist) is less noticeable for white resist.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant luminous effect by illuminating with a light emitting unit such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 are As described above, it is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, and the light emission mode changes variously when it is turned on (emit light) or turned off. For this reason, on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, a white resist solution is applied over the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. (Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist.”), A white resist layer is formed, and a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is formed on the solid-coated white resist. The front side notation that can be specified is printed with yellow paint by silk printing so that the yellow front side notation is inconspicuous with respect to the white resist when the full-color LED that can emit multiple colors is turned off. In addition to the above, when a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (during light emission), a solid white register with high reflectivity is used. And the front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the white reflectance, the reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114 can be kept high. .

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for the silk printing, the yellow printed by the silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to the variation of the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a yellow color range (yellow to the light side, yellow to the dark side). Even if yellow is specified, the color is not exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make the color exactly the same), and the color has a wide range of yellow.

  In a state where the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is the magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. Since the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light because they are arranged so as to cover the rear side, the light passes through the through-hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in a columnar shape of the top side speaker 464 and becomes transparent. The light is emitted from the light-transmitting center cap, and the light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing. It can be decorated. As described above, since the top lower cover 465 is formed of a punched metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes, the front surface of the top side speaker 464 and the periphery thereof are passed through the through holes of the top lower cover 465. In addition to being visible, the illumination of the top side speaker 464 can be visually recognized.

  Further, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 emit light, the LEDs 469a are reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a columnar shape) and the top surface. The light exits from the rear of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, while repeatedly emitting between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. In other words, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part around the acoustic decoration board 469. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 through (through) a transparent plate (not shown) that covers the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469.

  As described above, the speaker brackets 463 are attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protruding portions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The door frame top base 451 is larger than the outer periphery of the acoustic decorative board 469 so that the acoustic decorative board 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 is exposed at a position corresponding to the position where the left and right speaker brackets 463 are attached. Through holes 451ba each having a shape and penetrating back and forth are formed. When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emit light, the light is emitted backward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (in other words, acoustic decoration). When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469). A plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (through) through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (back surface)), and to the outer periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 and the door frame top base 451. After passing through the gap formed by the inner periphery of the formed through hole 451ba, it projects to the rear of the door frame top base 451. To.

  The door frame top base 451 is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 as described above. The door frame base 101 has, at positions corresponding to the left and right through holes 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, a shape larger than or the same as the outer periphery of the through hole 451ba, and a through hole 101k penetrating back and forth. Are formed respectively. Accordingly, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light is emitted backward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 (in other words, When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration board 469 (the acoustic decoration on the back side of the acoustic decoration board 469). A plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decorative substrate 469 (through) through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (back surface) of the substrate 469), the outer periphery of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, and the door frame top base. A gap formed between the through hole 451ba formed on the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba and the door frame base 101 Through hole 101k, emitted rearward of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100.

  In a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 passes through the left and right through holes 101 k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a to be mounted divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a provided in the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 and has an outer left upper area of the front component 1000 having a substantially square shape when viewed from the front. The light is reflected on the upper right region. In the present embodiment, the front component 1000 is made of a transparent resin, but may be made of a black resin. Hereinafter, when the door frame 3 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the open / close axis side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is referred to as “the pivot side of the door frame 3” or “the pivot side of the main body frame 4”. And the opposite side of the open / close shaft side may be described as “open side of the door frame 3” or “open side of the body frame 4”.

[The upper left area of the front component]
On the front surface (front surface) of the upper left area of the front component 1000, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation (in this embodiment, black except for each transparent area for checking a lighting mode of a plurality of LEDs). Is provided, a reflection sheet 1000a, which is a white printed portion having a high reflectance or a color close to white, is stuck except for a region where the function display unit 1400 is arranged.

  The front (front) area of the upper left area of the front component 1000 to which the reflection sheet 1000a is attached is an area outside the game area 5a formed on the game board 5, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. In the closed state, except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged, the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 is configured to be covered with the reflection sheet 1000a through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. It becomes difficult to see. That is, the presence of the reflection sheet 1000a, which has nothing to do with the content of the game effect, can be hidden, so that the game is not obstructed.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the reflection sheet 1000a is disposed at a position corresponding to the left acoustic decorative board 469 in the upper left region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, and the pachinko machine is provided. When the machine 1 is viewed from the front, the front surface of the left acoustic decorative board 469 on the pivot side of the door frame 3 (the pivot side of the main body frame 4) passes through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (front surface) is provided on the game board 5 side provided separately from the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side). The light is reflected by the reflection sheet 1000a and emitted forward, and the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101, the outer periphery of the left acoustic decorative board 469, and the left through hole formed in the door frame top base 451. Of the hole 451ba Light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm of the left topside speaker 464 through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing of the left topside speaker 464 and through the gap formed by the periphery. The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 can be efficiently used as a game effect or a notification mode. In a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of components mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decorative board 469 passing through the left through hole 101 k formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a is reflected by the reflection sheet 1000a provided on the game board 5 side provided separately from the left acoustic decoration board 469 (provided separately from the member provided on the door frame 3 side), In order to emit light forward, light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 through the left through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is in the game area 5a. No light is emitted toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, in a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the plurality of left acoustic decoration boards 469 mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left through hole 101 k formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 (the door frame 3 is in a closed state), the reflection sheet 1000a is the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. Is provided on the front surface of the upper left area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 at a position corresponding to the above, and the light emitted by the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side can be reflected toward the front of the reflection sheet 1000a. Therefore, the light (leakage) leaking backward from the left acoustic decoration substrate 469 can be reflected toward the front of the reflection sheet 1000a and emitted toward the front of the left acoustic decoration substrate 469. It can function as a reflective member that can be used. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the light leakage of the left acoustic decoration board 469 from proceeding toward the rear of the game board 5. Therefore, light traveling toward the rear of the game board 5 can be suppressed.

  Although not shown, a QR code (registered trademark) on the reflection sheet 1000a is stored a number (management number) for specifying the model of the game board 5 and attribute information of the game board 5 such as the date of manufacture of the game board 5. And are printed at predetermined positions with dark black paint. The pachinko machine 1 is identified by the reflection sheet 1000a, a number (management number) for specifying the model of the game board 5, and a QR code (registered trademark) in which attribute information of the game board 5 such as the date of manufacture of the game board 5 is stored. A specific information display unit is configured to display information (that is, a QR code (registered trademark) in which attribute information of the game board 5 such as a number specifying a model of the game board 5 and a manufacturing date of the game board 5 is stored). ing. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4, the front component 1000 is made of a transparent resin (when the front component 1000 is made of a black resin, the background is black). Since the white reflection sheet 1000a is conspicuous, the line of sight of a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall can be naturally directed to the reflection sheet 1000a by the attractiveness.

  Further, the front (front) area of the upper left area of the front component 1000 to which the reflection sheet 1000a is attached is, as described above, an area outside the game area 5a formed on the game board 5, and is a door frame. 3 is closed by the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 except for the area where the function display unit 1400 is arranged, in a state in which the reflective sheet 1000a is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Since it is difficult to see through the door window 101 a of the frame 3, the management number and the QR code (registered trademark) printed on the reflection sheet 1000 a are difficult to see through the door window 101 a of the door frame 3.

  Furthermore, in the reflection sheet 1000a, since the reflection sheet 1000a is white, if the background is white, dark black is conspicuous and the management number and the QR code (registered trademark) are easily visible. Further, when the QR code (registered trademark) is read by a code reading device which is a separate device from the pachinko machine 1 and is held by a staff such as a clerk of a game hall, the reflection sheet 1000a is white, and thus the background is reflected. Becomes white and the QR code (registered trademark) having a dark black color can be easily read. In other words, the white color of the reflection sheet 1000a can improve the readability of the QR code (registered trademark). The surface area of the reflection sheet 1000a is larger than the area of the front surface (front surface) or the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the left side. Instead of the QR code (registered trademark), it may be a one-dimensional barcode, a character, a number, a figure, a symbol, or the like, or a combination of letters, numbers, figures, symbols, or the like as appropriate.

  Although not shown, a plurality of pseudo nails are arranged on the front surface (front surface) of the upper left area of the front component 1000. In the reflection sheet 1000a, a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to a region where the pseudo nail having a gold color is arranged. As described above, a plurality of obstacle nails N having a gold color are planted on the front surface (front surface) of the game area 5a of the game board 5. Since the false nail is also made of metal having a golden color, it can be used as a reflection member in a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, similarly to the reflection sheet 1000 a.

[Top right area of the front component]
On the open side of the main frame 3 and on the front (front) side of the upper right area and the lower right area of the front component 1000, a metal for maintaining the mounted state of the game board 5 and the main frame 4 is provided. Stops FT (see FIG. 10) are provided. That is, on the opening side of the door frame 3, the metal stoppers FT are arranged on the front (front) side of the upper right region and the lower right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, respectively. In particular, the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 is located at a position corresponding to the right acoustic decoration board 469, and the metal stopper FT is arranged. The metal stopper FT is inserted into and engaged with a panel stopper insertion hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame 4.

  Further, the door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 is made of metal, and as described above, is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101, The door frame base unit 100 is provided with rigidity, and connects the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which extend vertically, and which are arranged to be separated from each other in the left and right directions, and the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. An upper reinforcing frame 113 extending to the left and right, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having a left end side attached to an upper position from a lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and an intermediate reinforcing frame. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right end of the right reinforcement frame 114 and the right reinforcement frame 112 is vertically separated from a rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112. To it includes a 鉤掛 member 116 where the door frame for hook 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is mounted a plurality is hooked, the. That is, the metal right reinforcing frame 112 is arranged on the rear side of the door frame 3 and on the open side of the door frame 3.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, on the open side of the main body frame 4, the metal stoppers FT are respectively provided on the front (front) side of the upper right region and the lower right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5. On the open side of the door frame 3, a metal right reinforcing frame 112 is disposed on the rear side of the door frame 3. The metal stopper FT and the metal right reinforcing frame 112 are both made of metal and have luster. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the right acoustic decorative board 469 passing through the right through hole 101 k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 ( The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface) is separated by the metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the right reinforcing frame 112 made of metal. Can be reflected. Further, even when the door frame 3 is slightly opened to the main body frame 4, the light emission on the back side of the door frame 3 can be easily recognized. In a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, a plurality of components mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decorative board 469 passing through the right through hole 101 k formed in the door frame base 101. Although the light from the LED 469a is reflected by the metal stopper FT disposed on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112, the door frame base Light from a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the right through-hole 101k formed in the 101 does not exit toward the game area 5a, and is behind the game board 5. Also does not exit. That is, in a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the plurality of left acoustic decoration boards 469 mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left through hole 101 k formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

  In addition, since the front component 1000 is made of a transparent resin, the front component 1000 may be made of a black resin instead. Even in this configuration, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the right acoustic decoration passes through the right through hole 101 k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. Light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the board 469 is transmitted to a metal stopper FT arranged on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, and a metal right reinforcement. Since light can be reflected by the frame 112, light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the right through-hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 is generated. It does not exit toward the game area 5a, nor does it exit toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, in a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the plurality of left acoustic decoration boards 469 mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left through hole 101 k formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

  In addition, a white reflective sheet obtained by appropriately modifying the shape of the white reflective sheet 1000a described above may be attached to an upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 and a peripheral area where the metal stopper FT is arranged. May be configured. In this way, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the right acoustic decorative board 469 passes through the right through hole 101 k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the (front surface) is transmitted to a metal stopper FT disposed on the front side of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, a metal right reinforcing frame 112, Since the light can be reflected by the white reflection sheet, a plurality of LEDs 469 a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 through the right through-hole 101 k formed in the door frame base 101. The light does not exit toward the game area 5a, nor does it exit toward the rear of the game board 5. That is, in a state where the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the plurality of left acoustic decoration boards 469 mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left acoustic decoration board 469 passing through the left through hole 101 k formed in the door frame base 101. The light from the LED 469a does not leak into the game area 5a and does not leak toward the rear of the game board 5.

  By the way, when opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall inserts a regular key into the cylinder lock 130 and turns the door lock 3, for example, to be provided on the door frame 3. The decorative member such as the transparent door frame right side decorative body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410 is grasped by hand, and the door frame 3 is opened from the state closed to the body frame 4 to the state opened. Since the decorative member is kept being pulled, the work of opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 increases, and the load may be repeatedly applied to the joint between the decorative member and the door frame 3 to damage the door frame. There is.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, light from the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right acoustic decoration board 469 on the open side of the door frame 3 is as described above. In order to emit light rearward through the right through-hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 include a door frame. 3 can emit light toward the rear. On the open side of the door frame 3, a metal right reinforcing frame 112 is disposed on the rear side of the door frame 3, and on the open side of the main body frame 4, the front surface of the upper right region of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 is provided. A metal stopper FT is arranged on the (front) side, and since both are metal members, when a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 3, Light reflected by the metal right reinforcing frame 112 and the metal reflecting portion such as the metal stopper FT leaks through a gap formed between the open side of the door frame 3 and the open side of the main body frame 4, and the gap is formed. May emit light. In this way, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall can open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 when, for example, opening the door frame 3 with respect to the transparent door frame right side unit 410 provided on the door frame 3. When the decorative member such as the side decorative body 419 is grasped by hand and the decorative member is pulled to such an extent that the gap emits light, the pulling of the decorative member is stopped. 3 can be opened. Since the time for grasping and pulling the decorative member by hand can be shortened, the time for applying a load to the joint between the decorative member (door frame right side unit 410) and the door frame 3 can also be shortened. Therefore, damage to the door frame 3 can be suppressed.

[When the door frame is open]
By the way, when the player plays a game, the pachinko machine 1 accidentally hits the obstacle nail with another game ball when the game ball fired toward the game area 5a of the game board 5 is flowing down. It may become clogged. In this state, when the player hits the game balls one after another toward the game area 5a, the game balls are further stacked on the packed game balls, and the state is such that the game balls are gathered in a grape shape. In order to eliminate the state in which the game balls are gathered in a grape shape, the player calls a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall to have the grape balls gathered in the game hall to be removed. A clerk, such as a clerk of a game hall, called by the player opens the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, the pachinko machine 1 applies the decorative board to the game board 5. In addition to performing control to turn off a plurality of LEDs to be mounted, all the movable members provided on the game board 5 are controlled so as to be maintained at the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether or not they are operating. Of the game board at the time. " Along with or instead of controlling the game board at the time of opening, a specific LED (for example, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469) among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration substrate provided in the door frame 3 When the door frame 3 is provided with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether or not the movable body is operated, while performing control for lighting a plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the door frame 3. "Control of the door frame at the time of opening" is performed.

  When opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and performing control of the door frame at the time of opening, a state in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided on the game board 5 are all turned off, and / or A specific LED (for example, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469) among the plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration substrate provided in the door frame 3 is turned on in a notification mode of notifying that the door is open. State. When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 emit light, as described above, the LEDs 469a pass through the through-holes of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the columnar shape of the top side speaker 464, and the light transmission property is improved. The light is emitted from the center cap and the light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing. Further, the light is reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke constituting the magnetic circuit portion formed in a columnar shape), and is repeated between the back surface of the top side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469. On the other hand, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 emit light to emit light backward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469. Then, a plurality of LEDs 469 a leak from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 (through a transparent plate (not shown) covering the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on the back side of the acoustic decoration substrate 469. ) Since a plurality of LEDs 469a leak from at least a part of the periphery of the acoustic decoration substrate 469), the acoustic decoration The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 passes through a gap defined by the outer periphery of the plate 469 and the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, and the through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. The light exits behind.

  In other words, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3 and can emit light toward the rear of the door frame 3; When the door 3 is opened with respect to the main frame 4 (that is, when the door frame 3 is opened), the acoustic decorative board 469 is moved from the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3. The notification mode by the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) can be visually recognized. In other words, the fact that the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 emits light in the notification mode can be visually recognized not only from the front of the door frame 3 but also from the rear of the door frame 3. A plurality of LEDs 469a are arranged to leak light from at least a part around the acoustic decoration board 469. Thereby, in the game hall, the staff (such as a clerk of the game hall) passing through the passage side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the passage side facing the rear side of the door frame 3 are provided with the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469. The notification mode by the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the device can be transmitted. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened, the notification mode can be visually recognized from the front side and the rear side of the door frame 3. In addition, in the game hall, an abnormality or malfunction occurs in a staff such as a clerk of the game hall from both the passage side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the passage side facing the rear side of the door frame 3 (pachinko). An abnormality in the machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging of the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the dispensing device 580, etc., detection of wrongdoing, opening of the door frame 3, opening of the body frame 4, wiring Disconnection, etc.) or malfunctions (malfunctions related to the operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), inability to detect the original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc.)) The work efficiency of the hall can be improved.

  By the way, if the speaker's diaphragm is broken with an incorrect tool, the sound stops flowing.However, it is easy to visually recognize that the speaker's diaphragm is broken. Just opening it will change the sound, but the sound will flow. Therefore, if you make a hole in the speaker diaphragm with an incorrect tool and disconnect or disconnect the wiring connected to the speaker connection terminal so that sound does not flow from the speaker, you can use a magnet Is performed, the warning sound is not heard from the speaker even if the gaming machine can detect the act of illegally acquiring the game ball. When a person who performs such an illegal act leaves the gaming machine, the gaming machine enters a player waiting state, and a silent demonstration (a plurality of LEDs provided on a door frame or a gaming board are switched to a player waiting light emitting mode). The image for waiting for the player is displayed on the effect display device which emits light and can display the effect image.). Then, in such a waiting state of the game hall, a clerk such as a clerk at the player waits for the player to open a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an incorrect tool, disconnect the wiring connected to the connection terminal of the speaker, or disconnect the wire. For example, it is difficult to determine whether sound is output from the speaker.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is perforated with a wire, the acoustic decoration board 469 is disposed behind the top side speaker 464, and thus the front (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 is disposed. When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the light-emitting device emit light, light is emitted from the light-transmitting center cap through the through-hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the columnar shape of the top side speaker 464, and the housing portion is lighted. Light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of. Since the diaphragm and the center cap of the top side speaker 464 are made of a light-transmitting resin (for example, milky white polypropylene or the like), they pass through the holes formed in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. The light exiting from the vibrating plate and the center cap shines as a spotlight with higher brightness than the light exiting from the center cap. Accordingly, as described above, since the top lower cover 465 is formed of a punched metal made of a metal plate having a myriad of through holes, when the silent demonstration is being performed, the top lower cover 465 can be penetrated. Through the hole, the presence of the hole formed in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 can be found as the presence of a spotlight shining with high brightness. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to determining whether or not sound is flowing from the top side speaker 464.

  Further, when the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is perforated with a wire to perform a silent demonstration, a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 are turned off (accidentally turned off). Or a state in which the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 are turned off within a period from the end of the silent demonstration to the start of the silent demonstration again. Also, the acoustic decoration substrate 469 on which a white coating solution coated with a white resist solution is formed is disposed behind the top side speaker 464, and the white coating causes the background to become white, so that the top side speaker Holes in the 464 diaphragm, and countless holes in the top bottom cover 465 That through the through-holes, a white coating of white can be visually recognized, incorrectly drilled hole in the diaphragm of the top side speakers 464 becomes easily visible. This makes it possible to find out whether or not a hole is improperly formed in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to determining whether or not sound is flowing from the top side speaker 464.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 emit light in a player waiting light emitting mode, and a soundless demonstration in which a player waiting image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image. Is performed, a plurality of LEDs emit light in a player waiting light emitting mode. Therefore, even if the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is improperly drilled with a wire, it is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469. Since the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 469a leaks through holes formed in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464, it appears that a part of the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 is emitting light. Thereby, it can be found that the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 has a hole.

  Note that a translucent speaker net may be provided on the front surface of the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. By providing the speaker net, it is possible to prevent the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464 from being illegally penetrated by a wire, and it is possible to take a long time for an attempt to make a hole in the diaphragm of the top side speaker 464. This can contribute to early detection of such misconduct. In addition, since the speaker net has a light-transmitting property, it hardly hinders light emitted through the light-transmitting diaphragm of the top side speaker 464.

  The top side speaker 464 has a diaphragm and a vibrating portion such as a center cap made of a resin having a light-transmitting property, such as polypropylene having a milky white color. (A color close to black), polypropylene having red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow, or the like, or a transparent resin instead of a translucent resin.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). The light-emitting device performs effects, errors, and the like that occur during the game. However, when the front frame is opened, the notification mode of the light emitting device can be visually recognized from the direction facing the front side of the front frame, but it is difficult to visually recognize the notification mode of the light emitting device from the direction facing the rear side of the front frame. There was a problem.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine having a front frame configured to detachably hold a game board in a middle frame and cover a front side of the game board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163). (Paragraph [0019] and FIG. 1). By the way, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall, when opening the front frame, inserts the key into the cylinder lock and performs a rotating operation, and then grasps the decorative member provided on the front frame by hand and pulls the front frame. As the opening work increases, the load may be repeatedly applied to the joint between the decorative member and the front frame, and the front frame may be damaged.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine having a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). The light emitting device emits light in a special mode different from a normal state when an abnormality or a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, and can notify the outside of the occurrence of the abnormality or the malfunction. However, it is difficult to say that it is sufficient to notify the occurrence of an abnormality or a defect to the outside in the same manner as in the related art.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine having a front frame provided with a light emitting device has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0019] and FIG. 1)). The light emitting device emits light in a special mode different from a normal state when an abnormality or a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine, and can notify the outside of the occurrence of the abnormality or the malfunction. However, when the light traveling toward the rear of the game board increases, the light traveling toward the front of the gaming machine decreases, so it has been difficult to say that it is sufficient to inform the outside of the occurrence of an abnormality or malfunction.

  Also, conventionally, a gaming machine in which specific information on the gaming machine is provided on a gaming board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-080279 (paragraph [0035] and FIG. 14)). As a result, it is possible to externally confirm whether or not the gaming machine is a legitimate gaming board, and it is possible to suppress an unauthorized change of the gaming machine. However, in the same manner as in the related art, the specific information can be visually recognized from the player side, so that the decorativeness is reduced, and there is a possibility that the entertainment interest of the game is reduced.

  Further, conventionally, a gaming machine having a speaker in a front frame has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). The effect sound generated during the game flows from a speaker provided in the gaming machine, and an error notification sound and the like also flow. By the way, if the diaphragm of the speaker is broken by an unauthorized tool, the sound stops flowing. However, it can be easily visually recognized that the diaphragm of the speaker is broken. Just making a hole in the speaker diaphragm with an incorrect tool will change the sound, but the sound will flow. Therefore, if you make a hole in the speaker diaphragm with an incorrect tool and disconnect or disconnect the wiring connected to the speaker connection terminal so that sound does not flow from the speaker, you can use a magnet Is performed, the warning sound is not output from the speaker even if the gaming machine can detect an act of illegally acquiring the game ball. When a person who performs such an illegal act leaves the gaming machine, the gaming machine enters a player waiting state, and a silent demonstration (a light emitting device emits light in a player waiting light emitting mode, and the image display device displays (A player waiting image is displayed.). However, a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall waits for such a player to open a hole in the diaphragm of the speaker with an incorrect tool, disconnect the wiring connected to the connection terminal of the speaker, or disconnect the wire. For example, it was difficult to determine whether or not sound was flowing from a speaker.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  A dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative Since the board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately illuminating the LEDs of the decorative boards. A light emission effect can be shown to a player so that light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and a coaxial arrangement in the ring of the rotary operation unit 302. A pressing operation portion 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation portion 302 below the rotation operation portion 302. The two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) and large-diameter dish upper decorative bodies 312a and 312b are attached vertically two apart from each other at the top and bottom of the dish. Door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side unit 41 of door frame left side unit 400 of the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of decorative body 312a and plate center lower decorative body 312b Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Thus, in the dish unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302 and the two dish upper decorations 312a and the dish lower decoration 312b are vertically arranged with three donut-shaped members. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made more conspicuous.

  In addition, the upper left dish decoration 271, the upper right dish decoration 276, and the lower left dish decoration 281, the lower right dish decoration 286, and the lower middle dish decoration 312 b disposed below the upper dish decoration 312 a are cut in half. The thickness of the tubular tube is made slightly thinner, and a semispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the effect operation unit 300, since it becomes larger upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302, which can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 is rotatably mounted on an upper surface of the plate unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be located forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotary operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the state is inclined so as to be lower, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The operation unit 302 can be operated to rotate, and the player's participation-type effects can be enjoyed by operating the rotation operation unit 302, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotary operation unit 302 is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameter of the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower plate decoration 312b is larger than that of the rotary operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotating operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b protrude forward more than the upper plate 201, and the plate center 200 Since the decorative body 312a and the lower plate center decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b can be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from the other pachinko machines at a glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to appeal to the player. And the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, and uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably mounted on the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall on the upper and lower sides of the front left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body base unit 500 having a rear portion insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left front view of the main body frame base unit 500. A main frame upper hinge member 510 which is rotatably mounted on the upper frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the upper frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3; A lower body frame hinge assembly which is attached to the lower left end of the base unit 500 on the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably mounted. And a solid 520.

  The main body frame 4 is mounted on the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in a front view, and is mounted on the lower front part of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for hitting the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side in front view on the rear side of the main frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 mounted on the rear side for paying out game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 mounted on a lower rear portion of the main frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 which is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and covers a rear side of the game board 5; 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stopper 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is configured to guide the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, and to provide the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 that pays out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and the game balls B that pass through the upper full ball path unit 600 with the door frame 3 side. Or a lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a door frame hook 652 or a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hook 652 is attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is urged and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward is provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 83 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and FIG. 83 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIGS. 84A to 84C are explanatory views showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main frame. The body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 and the main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to a lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a having a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about ３ of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion port 501b penetrating the game board 5 from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, forming a lower side of the game board insertion port 501b. The game device includes a placement section 501c and a game board regulation section 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placement section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a firing device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540; The cylinder unit 501e penetrates back and forth on the right side in front view of the unit 501e, and the cylinder unit 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. At 620, a circular speaker opening 501g of the main unit frame 620a of the speaker unit 620a facing the front and a main frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and the correctness of the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b of the base main body 501a in a front view, and a locking unit 650 is attached to a right side surface, and a back cover 640 is provided at a rear end. A rearwardly extending portion 501j that is rotatably mounted and formed near the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view of the rear surface of the base body 501a to mount the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. And an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, thereby enabling the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b to be attached and detached.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable mounting concave portion 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be rotatably mounted on the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a, and extends rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b protruding, a column-shaped mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b to each other, and penetrating front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a and And a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

  The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and is large enough to be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 has a mounting shaft 502c rotatably mounted around a vertically extending axis near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. Accordingly, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, and one end of the connection cable 503 is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 or the drive board unit 1700 on the side of the body frame 4 (the front unit 2000 according to a command from a peripheral control board 1510 described later). And a decoration drive board 1720 for driving a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like, which are provided in the rear unit 3000, and an end on the opposite side is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3. And is connected to the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end (right end) on the opposite side to the side (left side) where the door frame 3 in the left and right direction is hingeably mounted on the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  Then, a connection cable for connecting the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and an effect drive board 1720 (described later) of the drive board unit 1700 on the main body frame 4 side to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3. Reference numeral 503 denotes a guide such that the side of the drive board unit 1700 of the drive board unit 1700 on the interface frame 635 or the body frame 4 side connected to the later-described effect drive board 1720 extends from right to left of the guide body 502 a of the connection cable guide member 502. A binding band 504 inserted through a pair of through holes 502d in the same position in the left-right direction among a plurality of through holes 502d formed at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a in a state of being brought into contact with the front surface of the main body 502a. By being tightened together with the guide main body 502a, it is attached to the guide main body 502a.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but stops increasing when the opening angle α exceeds a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward with respect to the main body frame base 501. Since the connection cable 503 is guided, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves backward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from occurring.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. Thus, when the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back by 180 degrees changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force for closing the connection cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the folding habit, and to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving. The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

  Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is connected to the cable holder 103 a at a position closer to the center axis (axial center) of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is moved by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103 a when the door frame 3 is closed. It can be pulled toward the center axis (axis) of the hinge pin 126 below the door frame.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502, and is centered on the center axis (axis) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame. An angle at which a tangent to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the center axis (axis center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503 to close the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. As the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. In addition, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 opens and closes can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on body frame]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 Is mounted on the door frame hinge assembly 120 so as to be rotatable.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge body 511. And a body frame upper hinge pin 512 pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 when viewed from the front in a horizontally extended portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511 a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. Have.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to an upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is rotatably supported by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame to the body frame 4. 3 can be mounted so that it can be hinged.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under body frame]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is mounted on the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably mounted on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3. Door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped material is bent upward in an L-shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of the flat plate-shaped plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an interval upward from a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower part. The vertically extending part of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending part of the hinge first main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower part for the door frame into which the lower hinge pin 126 of the lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restriction piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Can be The body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the body frame 4. Can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 81 and FIG. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view formed in a U-shape whose right side is opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove 530a that is opened to the right and extends vertically on the front side formed in a U-shape with the right side opened in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into the groove 530a. When the left reinforcing frame 111 is inserted into the groove 530a, the gap between the main frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 is in a meandering state in a plan view, and an incorrect tool is inserted from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also passes through the space between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 inside the main body frame 4 (from the left side). The illegal insertion of a tool into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launching device]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launching device viewed from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is mounted on the main body frame 4. 5 for driving into the game area 5a. The ball firing device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 540 is attached to the flat-plate-like launching base 541 attached to the launching device attaching portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the launching base 541 on the right side when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting hammer 543 having a base end attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and a vicinity of the tip of the hitting hammer 543. A shooting rail 544 attached to the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the firing rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the firing rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in the state of being turned, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting hammer 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 544, and is hit into the game area 5a.

  In the case where the hitting ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the ball B, etc., the firing rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) are used. From there, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L-shape, and is attached to the rear side of the body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to a rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a extending in the front-rear direction and having a substantially constant width in the left and right direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose front-rear direction width is approximately the same width as the top plate portion 551a and extends downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. And a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position nearer to the front side than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right and near the lower end with a substantially constant width. Left back plate portion 551e, inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of left plate portion 551b, and rightward from the front of the lower side of left plate portion 551b. Extends to almost the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e It includes a bottom plate portion 551g and a connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L-shape in a front view, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward in the L-shape.

  In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b has upper and lower sides of the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends up and down with the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate 551a, the left plate 551b, and the right plate 551c are attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501.

  The payout base 551 has a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by a left plate portion 551b, a back plate left portion 551e, and an inner plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes rightward in the upper part of the right side of the inner plate portion 551f in front view, and has a back cover attaching portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward. A tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is provided at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball retaining member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

  The ball tank 552 has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551, and a length in the front-rear direction shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate 551a. Is formed. The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in a plan view in which the depth in the front-back direction is diagonally left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and is formed to extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. An opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with an upper end opening of the guiding passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

  Also, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at an appropriate angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight leftward substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate 551a. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopper 557 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Things.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. Mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). This rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B circulating in the upper and lower stages, and rectifies them so that they flow in a single stage on the downstream side. Even if the height decreases, the ball is not clogged.

  The ball stopper 557 is slidably mounted in the left and right directions near the left end of the lower surface of the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

  Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 has a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The entire configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88A is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back plate portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Payout device 580 that pays out the game balls one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the payout device 580 with the game balls B arranged in a line by the tank rail 553. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball ejection passage 580b that branches off in the middle of the payout passage 580a. The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the upper full tank path unit is operated from the ball discharge path 580b in which the ball release lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game balls B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B discharged from the ball discharge passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball discharge path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

  The ball guiding unit 570 includes a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a meandering guiding passage 570a through which the game balls B can flow and is opened forward, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. A flat guiding path front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 movable by a game ball B flowing in the guiding path 570 a, and a game ball B in the guiding path 570 a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cut detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence / absence of the ball (see FIG. 92).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front lid 572 in a front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, and extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends rightward to guide. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning over the width of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front, rear, right and left directions and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball B. Can be guided in a row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. More specifically, the movable piece member 573 has an upper portion rotatably mounted around an axis extending frontward and rearward at a position on the right outside of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed so that. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on a portion projecting into the guide passage 570a, whereby the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Becomes

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it does not project, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

  When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570 a is connected to the discharging passage of the discharging device 580. 580a communicates with the upstream end. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding path 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guiding path 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guiding path 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, it detects the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. FIG. 90A is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the rear of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate portion 551e.

  The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581 having a dispensing passage 580a that is a box-like shape opened backward and through which game balls B can flow, and a ball ejection passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a. A flat-plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward. ing.

  The dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached thereto, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585, and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583; A second transmission gear 587 meshing with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583, and a second transmission gear 587. Between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 having a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detecting pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a. It has a dispensing gear member 588 rotatably mounted, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 and protrude into the dispensing passage 580a between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. And a blade rotation detecting sensor 590 attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and detecting the detecting piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582, and detects a game ball B, a payout detection sensor 591, and the payout device main body 581 and the payout device. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is attached to the part branched from the pay-out passage 580a by the lid 582 so that the ball-moving passage 580b can be opened and closed. And a ball ejection lever 593 slidably mounted in the up-down direction by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a square shape whose plan view shape extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction is larger rightward in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward at a position closer to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction, as viewed from the rear. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward from the upstream end downward, and after being bent slightly diagonally rightward from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotary axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, after being bent rightward in rear view at a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B above the center of the payout blade 589, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery thereof. Are formed so as to form a circular arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589 so as to be formed, and extend vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in the rear view from the center of the dispensing blade 589.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

  The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched and on which the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached. A main-body-side guide wall 581a that projects rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and that is formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b when viewed from the rear. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rightward as viewed from the rear at a height of about 1/3 from above in rear view. It is formed at the left position. The main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed diagonally upward to the left when viewed from the rear, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the back view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by a dispensing device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat detecting pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The dispensing blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade and the side wall of the payout passage is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b that is recessed by a circular arc having a radius larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be stored in the ball storage portion 589b. Thus, the payout blade 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and also rotates clockwise in rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are mounted coaxially and integrally rotatable by a dispensing device rear lid 582 and a dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed on the left side of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in rear view as viewed in rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The ball-moving movable piece 592 has its upper end rotatably mounted on an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a rectangular shape, and is attached so that the concave side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Can be projected into the ball ejection passage 580b or retreated outside the ball ejection passage 580b.

  The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side in rear view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. The ball pull lever 593 partially projects through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can contact the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to make the ball removal movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a bead on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592, becomes a ball removal movable piece 592. And flows down to the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight and straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flow straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as suppressing the flow of the game ball B like the payout blade 589. Will also flow down quickly.

  As described above, in a state where the ball-moving movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-pulling passage 580b, so that the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-pulling passage 580b. Game ball B abuts vigorously against the lower end of the payout device, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it is possible to move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the contacting force causes the ball removal movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball is not sandwiched between the wall of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force is not applied to the movable ball 592 by the game ball B, and the ball is movable by the collision of the game ball B. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  Because of this, the ball-moving movable piece 592 can be hardly damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island facilities downstream of the ball-pulling passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall.

  Also, when the ball-moving movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes through a space between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a at a smaller interval than the game ball B, and the ball removing passage 580b. When the game ball B comes into contact with the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-passing passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 is moved between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the gap, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B is spaced more than the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

  The movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable piece 592 is caused by the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable piece 592, so that the movable piece 592 can be hardly damaged and the main body side guide is provided. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the payout device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a square shape whose front view shape extends vertically.

  An upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 with an open rear side, and a box-shaped mount attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and has an open front side. And a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in front view, and includes a back cover attaching portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 opens upward near the left end in the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a height of about ／ of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a communicates with the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends rightward as viewed from the front by about 3/4 of the entire width, and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and near the right end of the upper surface in the front view. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, an upper normal discharge passage 600c, an upper full discharge passage 600d, and an upper ball discharge passage 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left side in a front view. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving path 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout path 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thus, the game balls B released (paid) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 pass through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the. Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball discharge passage 600e.

[4-7d. Bottom full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 includes a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 mounted on the upper side of the lower full base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a mounted on the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharging passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. And a closing spring 614 that is biased.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of a portion extending above the rear end. In this state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state where they are arranged side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball passage 610c extends forward along the right side of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 614. In a normal state, the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b have respective front end openings (downstream ends). Opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and as the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operation protrusion 613 a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout path 610a, the lower full fill payout path 610b, and the lower ball discharge path 610c, which are open upward at the rear upper end, are respectively filled with the upper full tank. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball ejection passage 600e of the tan ball path unit 600. Thus, the game balls B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full fill payout passage 600d are lower full fill payout passages 610b. , And the game balls B discharged downward from the upper ball passage 600e flow through the lower ball passage 610c.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is open immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball guide portion 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In the normal full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting on the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided. Is rotated clockwise in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Game ball flow in payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branched from the ejection passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. In the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  In the ball tank 552 that is open upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of the ball being cut by the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570. A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blades 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout blades 589. Becomes

  Then, the game ball B in the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it can be seen that the game balls B are stored at least in the passage from the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated clockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream from 589. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blades 589 (ball storage portions 589b) are sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

  The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 normally passes through the upper ball storage passage 600b and is disposed immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and passes through the plate unit 200. Are discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 at the time.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, it becomes impossible to discharge the game balls B forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game balls B paid out from the 580 stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B are upstream from the lower normal payout passage 610a. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that is in communication. When the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. The game balls B start to stay, and the game balls B begin to flow toward the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout path 600d passes through the lower full tank payout path 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received. Thereafter, the game balls B received by the full tank receiving port 150b are discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thus, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game ball B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  In addition, when the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

  When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are to be discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the state of the position of the rising end. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and rotates in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. , And is pushed out of the ball passage 580b. As a result, the game balls B can enter the ball passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game balls B are discharged downward through the ball passage 580b.

  At this time, at the portion of the ball-moving movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B abuts more strongly on the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a than the ball-moving movable piece 592. Is hard to break.

  Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball empty passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball empty passage 600e of the upper full ball empty path unit 600 and the lower ball empty passage 610c of the lower full ball empty path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside (the game hall) of the pachinko machine 1. To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from below and below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to a lower portion of the rear surface of the body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from behind. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a is mounted on the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a position lower than the game board placement portion 501c, and forwards near the left end in front view of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction near the left end in front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of vertically extending slits, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A space front concave portion 621b that is depressed so as to swell from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction and diagonally downward toward the rear. And an open connection portion 621c.

  The main frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sound.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape opened frontward, and a portion on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. Is formed so that the protrusion of the boss becomes small. As a result, it is possible to secure a sufficient space behind the speaker box 623 on the right side from the center in front view, and to arrange the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620a includes the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623, and forms a part of the enclosure 624 that contains the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In the enclosure 624, since the space front concave portion 621b swelling forward on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front is formed, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it goes rightward. Even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount, the space to the right of the main frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

  When the main unit frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection tube portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48 between the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622. Is in communication with the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame 2. Therefore, the enclosure 624 of a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel 42, and the rear panel 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622, and the rear side of the main frame speaker 622. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel 42 of the curtain plate.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to a relatively large depth to the right in front view, and the connection unit 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear is not attenuated particularly in the low frequency range, and the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not attenuated. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to amplify the sound, so that a large sound with heavy bass can be output even if the aperture of the main frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass. Accordingly, a sound output from the front surface of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are obtained. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between a lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space is formed in the speaker cover 621, and a speaker box 623 is formed. In addition, a through-tube 623a which extends in a tubular shape in communication with the through-hole 621d and penetrates forward and backward is formed. When assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610, and is viewed from the front. A ball-pulling guiding unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving unit that opens upward on the right side when viewed from the front downstream of the ball-pulling guiding unit 627 and receives game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B having passed through the ball guide unit 627 and the discharged ball receiving unit 628 downward.

  The ball-pulling guide 627 has an upstream end opening leftward at an upper portion of a left side in a front view, and a downstream end opening leftward of the discharged ball receiving portion 628. In the state in which the ball-pulling guide unit 627 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening at the upstream end is opposed to the downstream-end opening of the lower ball-pulling passage 610 c of the lower full-ball path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharged ball receiving portion 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the discharged ball receiving portion 628 has a left end in front view continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627, and is inclined so as to become lower rightward.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by a ball pull-out guiding unit 627 or a discharged ball receiving unit 628, and Since the air is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is easy to secure a wide space on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than a conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a rear side of the power supply board 630. A transparent power supply board attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover a surface on the rear side of the board 630 may be referred to as a “surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630” on which electronic components are mounted. And a cover 631. When the front surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 is covered with the transparent power supply board cover 631, the power supply board 630 is housed in the transparent power supply board cover 631. The front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the power supply substrate 630 may be described as a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid green resist”). .), A green resist layer is formed, and a power switch 630 a having an operation unit for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630. On the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630, in addition to the power switch 630a, the attribute of the front-side electronic component such as the component number of the front-side electronic component, an area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like The front side notation indicating the shape of the side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component may be included). It is a white paint that is easy to stand out and is printed on a solid green resist by silk printing. The power switch 630a is exposed from the transparent power board cover 631. Further, the power switch 630a is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, and thus is located at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the power switch.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the transparent power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control housed in the payout control board box 632. And a substrate 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 or the like. This is for controlling and paying out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed such that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrence against illegal acts.

  The interface unit 620e covers the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 mounted on the rear face of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The board base 634 is attached to the rearmost surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost part of the main frame speaker 622, and most protrudes rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (the body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) in front view so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached thereto. The back cover 640 has a right side in front view attached to a vertically extending rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and a left side thereof is a payout base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions as viewed from the front is bent forward. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate back and forth and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, and depending on the rotation direction, the door frame. And a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  Further, the locking unit 650 urges the hook 652 for the door frame downward and also urges the hook 653 for the outer frame upward, and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) of the door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinders 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 projects forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the body frame base 501, and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted by the engagement with the transmission member 133, and the key is rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outside members are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in front view, a plurality of The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and 4 is unlocked. In this manner, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hooks 652 and the outer frame hooks 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the lock state is established by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed Configuration of Upper Body Frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an upper portion in an enlarged manner in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view as viewed from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view as viewed from the lower front in (a). FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing an area in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is detachably attached to the outer frame 2 by the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body mounted along the upper side and the left side of the rear side of the body frame base 501 in front view. A dispensing base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551 and extending upward and downward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail 553 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to an upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a tank rail. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, a payout device 580 attached to the rear side of the payout base 551 downstream of the tank rail 553, and for paying out game balls B to the player side; , Is provided.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction in a plan view, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lower in a front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape having an open upper side. Have been. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut out from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about ／ of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the end of the left wall 552d to the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (the side of the right wall 552e). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and a downstream side extending to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a in which the width direction orthogonal to the flowing direction of the game balls B is formed so that only one game ball B can flow. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left as viewed from the front. In plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends from the right end to the left in the left-right direction after extending from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with an axis extending leftward and rightward from the right end side. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end in parallel with an axis extending in the left-right direction from there. . The tank rail 553 has a portion extending in the main guide portion 553a parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed such that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game balls B are formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be circulated (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  In addition, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed above the main guiding portion 553a, and the main rail 553 is arranged such that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in a width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b bulging wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrowing in width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. I have. By the bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have been spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. The bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side to the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes one line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulge portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed on the inner side, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. In the bulging portion 553b, the center of the curved curvature is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that comes into contact. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball dust in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a shape extending constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the inside game ball B is always pushed in a fixed direction, so that the game ball B becomes difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball dust) is liable to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside circulates. By dispersing the direction in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball damage) can be suppressed.

  The tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. Accordingly, even if a ball jam (ball damage) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the clogging of the ball in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, and the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging can be shortened as much as possible. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, it is possible to confirm the status of the transmission motors, the gears, the belts, and other transmission mechanisms with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4. The effect of the invention can be obtained.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. Of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m and the rear end of the overflow tank portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b of which the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. And the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left and right direction is inclined so as to be lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in the left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, the interval in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, and A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side to the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring can be connected from the rear, and an upper surface of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. A terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from a position lower by a distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from an upper side of a rear surface of the base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a gap having a distance about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface 501 m and the outer frame upper member 30. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m, and extends substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m. The upper end is higher than the left step part 501n and the right step part 501o at the left and right outer sides of the left step part 501n and the right step part 501o, respectively, and extends in the front and rear direction like a strip, and the game ball B is left and right in the left and right directions. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in rows at a smaller interval than the diameter. The left step part 501n is formed to be shorter in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left-stage portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner at the rear end becomes slightly lower in a front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. The right step part 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear left corner is slightly lower in a front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. Is formed at a height that is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  The main body frame base 501 is assembled with the main body frame 4 and, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface 501m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface 501m. The left end of the right side of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end of the detour passage 552g, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and has a front end that is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and is inclined so that the rear end is lower. And a weir extending upward from an end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. As for the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g, the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and the left end side thereof. From the right to the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination that is horizontal.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled with the main body frame 4 such that the rear end thereof extends along the front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction and extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. Extending. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided rearward by the detour passage 552g changes its distribution direction from the slanted rear end to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction in which the game ball B flows in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is formed at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. From the game ball B. Further, since the game balls B are supplied from the bypass path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular to the flow direction) of the game balls B, the tank rails formed by the game balls B from the bypass path 552g. Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

  Since the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left and right direction such that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the game ball B can be released to the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow due to the obliquely extending rear end. By discharging the ball to a wide area, the occurrence of ball dust in the tank rail 553 can be suppressed.

  In addition, a portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to an outer portion of the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left portion of the rear wall 552c in the front view on the tank rail 553. A game ball B that flows under the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (on the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at a position behind the bypass passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is equal to the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Height). Therefore, on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) where the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received on the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

  The spherical tank 552 is a flat plate that extends rightward from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in a front view from a position about 1/3 of a total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from a left end of the front wall 552b, and a right end side in a left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b at about 1/9 of the total length to a position near about 1/2 of the total length of the left side wall 552d in the front-rear direction, and extending parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, The rear wall 552c is formed to have a constant width in the front-rear direction and to extend from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position about one-third of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction in parallel with the rear wall 552c.

  The ball tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the shape as described above and the end of the right end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in plan view. Has an opening 552k formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat flange extending in the left-right direction outward and up-down direction on the same surface as the front wall 552b at the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. The spherical tank 552 is configured such that the heights of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper edges of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the body frame base 501). (The upper surface of the left step 501n and the right step 501o).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (the right end in a front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion extending straight leftward in the left-right direction are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )are doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j, when assembled to the main body frame 4, is stepped downward from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in the ball tank 552 so as to step backward. A position that extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553 and then rises to the left along the tank rail 553 above the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). Nearby position) and then extend rearward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is mounted on the rear surface in a state where a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can open a grip portion by operating a lever to grip the end of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in a state where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

  Next, the operation and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left-stage portion 501n, the right-stage portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower on the rear end side, as shown by white arrows in FIG. The left stage 501n is inclined such that the rear right corner is lower, and the right stage 501o is inclined so that the rear left corner is lower. In addition, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end sides thereof are lower in a front view. Further, the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

  Then, when the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island facility, first, the game balls B exceed the lowest overflow portion 552f of the outer peripheral upper end edge. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be caused to flow out of the ball tank 552 to the forward overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, so that it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In addition, the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball dust) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be prevented.

  Further, since the detour passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the backward pressing force from acting on the game balls B in the ball tank 552 by the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled to the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass path 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553 to prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

  Further, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is formed. The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after the ball 552 overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface 501m to the bypass passage 552g is moved to the left side on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to cause the ball to move. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). , The game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass 552g without passing through the overflow surface 501m. Thus, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) into the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is rearward from the overflow surface 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a certain direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a certain direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B are different from each other, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing and biting each other, and to prevent the game balls B from being clogged. Can be prevented.

  Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, and are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the upper portion of the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, a game discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552g is provided. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end to the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a is reduced. Since the game balls B are changed so as to coincide with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned so as to be aligned in the width direction as the plurality of game balls B move downstream in the bulging portion 553b. Further, since the upper portion of the tank rail 553 is closed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side). A plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are flowed downstream through a portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction and forming one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, a certain number of the game balls B can be stored therein, and the tank rail 553 has the bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Further, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j therebetween). Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be farther from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility jumps or is supplied vigorously at the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, there is no problem such as a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

  In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facilities to the ball tank 552 is used for the ball 552. When the game ball B jumps on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made harder to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it jumps at the overflow surface 501m. It is possible to easily avoid occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface 501m to the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 104) due to the inclination of the guide surface 552j. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and the game balls B are clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

  Also, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 jumps at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m, and rides on the left and right steps 501n and 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g by their inclination, and a problem occurs when the game balls B spill out of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls stacked on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the tank rail 553, downstream of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j), that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (vacant space) where the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass path 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 in which the upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, it is not affected. The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board in which a front component, a game panel, a front unit, and the like are opaque in a pachinko machine. 108 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front right, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 107 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the gaming board viewed from the back. . FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board in a state where the front components, the game panel, the front unit, and the like are made transparent. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG. 114 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and obstacle nails.

  In the following, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is square when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate, the LED irradiates light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate. When the LED mounted on the decorative board has a rectangular shape, it indicates that the LED emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative board (side-view LED). Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is hit by a player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, paying out a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first winning port 2005, and a second winning port 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first winning opening 2005, and a second winning opening in the gaming area 5a. In 2006 or the like, a game is performed in which the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game balls B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be accepted or passed.

  The game board 5 partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a front component 1000 whose outer shape is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to partition the rear end of the game area 5a. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of gold-colored obstacle nails N (see FIG. 115 and the like) that are in contact with the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The game board 5 has a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100 and a game carried out by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 114 and 206) for controlling the contents.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The front component 1000 is formed entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (refer to FIG. 116 and the like) to which the rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side while being mounted on the rear side.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the game panel 1100 has the transparent panel board 1110, the game panel 1100 is disposed behind the game panel 1100 from the front of the game panel 1100 (that is, the front of the game board 5) through the game panel 1100. The user can easily visually recognize the presence of various members (hereinafter, may be referred to as “transparent game panel 1100”).

  The drive board unit 1700 includes various boards (for example, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400) electrically connected to the above-described door frame sub relay board 105. , A decorative frame 413 in the side window of the door frame right side unit 410, a decorative board 418 on the right side of the door frame, a door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, a main control board 1310 and peripheral control. The panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection with the board 1510 and the decorative board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are driven according to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. The effect drive board 1720, the panel relay board 1710, and the effect drive board 1720 are accommodated. It includes a driving substrate box 1730, the. The drive board box 1730 has a left side on the rear view, which is hingedly mounted on a rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000, and a right side on the rear view, which is detachably mounted on a rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Note that, for example, the effect driving substrate 1720 has a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) (hereinafter, simply referred to as “solid-coated green resist”). To form a green resist layer. A plurality of electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of effect drive board 1720, and in the vicinity of these electronic components, the attribute of the electronic component such as the component number of the electronic component and a region indicating the position where the electronic component is arranged. (Furthermore, the notation indicating the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the type of the electronic component may be included.) Are printed on the solid-colored green resist by silk printing.

  The table unit 2000 includes a plurality (four in this example) of general winning ports 2001 which are always open to accept the game balls B driven into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning ports 2001. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B at a different position in the game area 5a, a gate section 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detecting passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game balls B through the gate unit 2003; and a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port 2004. A first special winning opening 2005 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving game balls B, and a first starting opening 2002 or a second starting opening. 2004 Includes the second special winning opening 2006 which is possible to accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is the lottery by accepting game balls B, and.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a and is provided with an out port 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the inside of the game area 5a. A first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012 for discharging the game from the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, right above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first opening port 2002 and a front opening unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general winning openings 2001, and an upper left unit provided slightly above the side unit 2200 on the left side in a front view 2300, and a second starting port 2004, a first winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011, which are provided to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, in front view. Above the first attacker unit 2400, the starting port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, and the front in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center item 2500 provided substantially at the center and slightly above, and a second large winning opening 2006 provided on the right side of the center item 2500 and above the first attacker unit 2400. A second attacker unit 2600, a middle right side unit 2700 provided above the second attacker unit 2600 and having one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a portion above the middle right side unit 2700 And a gate member 2800 having a gate portion 2003.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower part of the front end of the back box 3010 in the form of a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, respectively. The rear guidance unit 3050 provided at the rear end of the rear box 3010, the rear production unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the rear box 3010, and the rear guidance unit 3050 at the lower portion of the rear box 3010 are provided left and right apart from each other. The lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250, and the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 provided behind the back lower left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 in the back box 3010. Have.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in front of the back rear presentation unit 3100 and in the back box 3010, and is provided in the back of the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. Left back production unit 3500, back right production unit 3600 provided behind back right decoration 3040 in back box 3010, rear left decoration 3030 inside back box 3010 and back left A front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500, and a front right production unit provided between the rear right decoration 3040 and the rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back.

  The front component 1000 is formed entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The inner shape of the inner shape defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower left end to the left in the left-right direction in the front view and extending in the clockwise circumferential direction from the center in the front view and passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in the front view to the upper right diagonal, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed substantially inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view An out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear (the out port 2010).

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and having an upper portion curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and abuts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member that is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction and rotatable only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened and the closed position. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 2010 that penetrates forward and backward at the rear end of the out guiding section 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view within the frame. The out port 2010 penetrates the game balls B with a width that is sufficiently aligned in the left-right direction. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guiding unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 2010 and an out ball detection member 3080 of the back unit 3000 described later.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 of the door frame 3 is formed in the security recess 1009. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the lower full tank path passes through the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

  Furthermore, the front component 1000 is formed at the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attaching portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed at the lower left corner. I have.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent so that the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since the front component 1000 is formed transparent together with the game panel 1100 mounted on the rear side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5. In addition, a sense of openness can be given to the player, and the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, but the game area 5a can be made large (wide) for the player.

  In addition, since the front component 1000 is transparent together with the game panel 1100, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the like is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). It is possible to make it look as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 116 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and has the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface. On the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N having a predetermined gauge arrangement and having gold are implanted (see FIG. 115 and the like).

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even when the obstruction nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has been. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front component 1000 is depressed upward from the lower end. The panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  In addition, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated in the left and right direction at an upper edge and a lower edge from a plurality of positioning holes formed in a round hole and a short elongated hole penetrating front and rear, respectively. And a plurality of engaging steps each having a small thickness. The positioning holes are for positioning with respect to the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center role 2500, which is offset to the upper right from the center in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and when viewed from the front, the width orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame) is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The ball B has a wide width in which the balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in the present embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) which is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a holding step having a size substantially equal to the game area 5a. A through-hole 1121 penetrating in the front-back direction is provided.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a cutout portion 1122 cut out upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1122 penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch to penetrate the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full filling dispensing passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 has an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed forward from the rear surface. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 2010. The cylindrical portion 3081 of the out ball detecting member 3080 in the back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 described later is inserted into the out concave portion 1123.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 protrudes forward from the holding step and is disposed outside the holding step with a plurality of projecting pins that are inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110 respectively. And three engaging claws elastically engaging with the engaging step portions at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and projecting upward from the lower outer side of the holding step portion. And a pair of engagement pieces respectively engaged with the two engagement steps on the lower side. The panel holder 1120 engages the engagement step on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 from the upper front with an engagement piece, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper and lower left sides. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be removably attached while housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the projecting pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  Since this game panel 1100 is formed transparently together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a when assembled on the game board 5, A sense of openness can be given to the player, and although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be made large (wide) to the player.

  Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the like is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). It is possible to make it look as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

  In addition, on the back side of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, near the right side of the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, an illegal A magnetic sensor 1111 for detecting magnetism is attached (see FIG. 113 and the like).

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state where the board holder 1200 is assembled on the game board 5 and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A transparent main control board box 1320 is mounted.

  When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and the back unit 3000 is out. It is located immediately below the ball detecting member 3080. The substrate holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and discharges the game balls B from the discharge portion 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below. Can be.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 206) for controlling the contents of the game and payout of the game balls B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the improper act on the main control board 1310 is increased.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting port sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting port sensor 2401, a general winning port sensor 3051, a first winning port sensor 2402, and a second winning port. The sensor 2601 is connected to the out-port sensor 3053, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, the second sub-out port sensor 3054, the magnetic sensors 1111, 404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state where the function display unit 1400 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator made up of three LEDs for displaying a game state, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate unit 2003. It has a normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs, and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball B at the gate section 2003.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display including eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and a first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the reception of the game balls B to the second ball and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game balls B to the second starting port 2004 A second special symbol display comprising eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserve number display comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

  Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “hit” or the like, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern (the number of rounds) of the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006. , A round indicator comprising five LEDs.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

  Here, the configuration of the function display unit 1400 will be briefly described. The function display unit 1400 includes a box having an opening at the rear, a function display substrate housed in the box, and a flat cover covering the opening. The outer shape of the function display substrate is smaller than the outer shape of the box. In the present embodiment, the box body and the cover body are molded of a colored opaque resin (black resin). The colored opaque resin may be a resin of gray, red, pink, sky blue, blue, green, yellow or the like in addition to black. Further, the box body and the cover body may be formed of a milky white resin or a colorless and transparent resin instead of the colored opaque resin.

  In the box, LED insertion holes are provided at positions corresponding to a plurality of LEDs (in the present embodiment, LED bare chips) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate, from the back side to the rear side, respectively. Have been. Each LED insertion hole is formed in a cylindrical shape so that the lit or blinking light of each LED is not mistaken for the lit or blinking light of an adjacent LED. At a predetermined position of the box, a locking hole into which a locking portion formed on a plurality of mounting pieces of the cover described later is inserted is formed.

  It should be noted that a function display sticker having white color is affixed to the front surface of the box. The function display seal is formed with a transparent portion having a circular shape at a position corresponding to each LED insertion hole when attached to the front surface of the box. That is, the lighting or blinking of the LED mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate is guided by the LED insertion hole and can be visually recognized through the transparent portion.

  A plurality of LEDs (in this embodiment, LED bare chips (also referred to as “LED elements”)) are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate, and front-side electronic components (surfaces) such as a plurality of LEDs are mounted. In addition to the pads to which the side electronic components are soldered, a white coating (hereinafter simply referred to as “solid white”) is formed by applying a white resist solution in all areas except through holes and lands. In some cases, a white resist layer is formed. In this embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate, the component number of the front electronic component (front electronic component), an area indicating the position where the front electronic component (front electronic component) is arranged, and the like. Attributes of the front electronic component (front electronic component) (including the shape of the front electronic component (front electronic component), the size of the front electronic component (front electronic component), and the front electronic component (front electronic component) The front-side notation (front-side notation) indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component) and the type of the front-side electronic component (front-side electronic component) may be a predetermined color (for example, It is a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous to white) and is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid white resist.

  In addition to the connector housing to which the electrical wiring is connected, various ICs, various resistors, various capacitors, and the like may be mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the function display substrate. The connector housing, various ICs, various resistors, In addition to the pads to which the back-side electronic components (back-side electronic components) such as capacitors are soldered, a white coating is formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area except through holes and lands. (Hereinafter, a white resist layer may be simply referred to as a “solid white resist”). In the present embodiment, on the back surface (back surface) of the function display substrate, the component number of the back electronic component (back electronic component), an area indicating the position where the rear electronic component (back electronic component) is arranged, and the like. The attributes of the rear-side electronic component (back-side electronic component) (the shape of the rear-side electronic component (back-side electronic component), the size of the rear-side electronic component (back-side electronic component), the rear-side electronic component (back-side electronic component) The rear electronic component (back electronic component) indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic component) and the type of the rear electronic component (back electronic component) may be a predetermined color (for example, It is a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous to white) and is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid white resist.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the function display substrate, there is no silk printing on the solid white resist. In the present embodiment, the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) is formed on the front surface (front surface) of the functional display substrate by a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. Information for specifying whether each electronic component is a unique electronic component is not formed by the foil removal foil formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information, and is not formed on the back surface (back surface) of the function display substrate. Is information for specifying what kind of electronic component the rear-side electronic component (back-side electronic component) is in a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. It is not formed by the remaining foil foil formed by removing the copper foil around the outside. That is, in the present embodiment, the information for specifying what kind of electronic component is the front-side electronic component (front-side electronic component) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate is displayed on the front surface of the function display substrate. No information is written on the (front surface), and information for specifying what kind of electronic component is the rear electronic component (back electronic component) mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) of the function display board is a function. Nothing is written on the rear surface (back surface) of the display substrate.

  The product management number (for example, FDU-TYP-A) of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body, and is formed in a flat plate shape from a predetermined position on the front surface (front surface) of the cover body toward the front. Are extended. Locking portions are formed projectingly outside the distal ends of the plurality of mounting pieces. Each locking portion is locked by being inserted into each locking hole formed at a predetermined position of the box when the cover is closed with the opening of the box.

  By the way, since the function display unit 1400 is an important one whose display, such as a lottery result and a game state, is controlled by the main control board 1310, the function display board accommodated in the box of the function display unit 1400 is tampered with. Then, the lottery result, the game state, and the like cannot be displayed correctly. In this case, for example, even though a game ball has not actually entered the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, an illegal signal is input to the main control board 1310 as if the game ball had entered. Even if a fraudulent act of acquiring lots of lottery opportunities is performed, the function display unit 1400 cannot correctly display the lottery result, the game state, and the like, making it difficult for a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall to notice.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the function display substrate, there is no silk printing on the solid white resist. That is, on the front surface (front surface) and rear surface (back surface) of the function display substrate, a front-side notation portion (front-side notation portion) and a rear-side notation portion (back-side notation portion) printed by silk printing are formed at all. Absent. In the present embodiment, the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) is formed on the front surface (front surface) of the functional display substrate by a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. Information for specifying whether each electronic component is a unique electronic component is not formed by the foil removal foil formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information, and is not formed on the back surface (back surface) of the function display substrate. Is information for specifying what kind of electronic component the rear-side electronic component (back-side electronic component) is in a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. It is not formed by the remaining foil foil formed by removing the copper foil around the outside. This makes it difficult to identify the electronic component mounted on the function display substrate and to grasp the circuit configuration.

  In this embodiment, the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is mounted directly on the front surface (front surface) of the functional display substrate, instead of mounting the LED package encapsulated with the LED bare chip on the front surface (front surface) of the functional display substrate. The configuration was adopted. An LED bare chip (also referred to as an “LED element”) is enclosed in a package such as a surface mount type (top type or side type), chip-on-board type, or shell type, and is an extremely small electronic component. is there. Therefore, as compared with the case where the LED package is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the functional display substrate, the depth distance dimension of the surface mount type (top type or side type), chip-on-board type, or shell type package is smaller. And the function display unit 1400 can be reduced in size. Note that, since the LED bare chip is an extremely delicate electronic component, even if an impact caused by the player hitting the door frame 3 or the like is transmitted directly to the door frame 3, the LED display chip 1400 provided on the game board 5 is docked. Is weakened, and it is unlikely that a plurality of LED bare chips mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the functional display substrate will be damaged by such a shock.

  Examples of a method for electrically connecting the electrodes of the LED bare chip to predetermined electrodes on the front surface (front surface) of the functional display substrate include wire bonding and flip chip bonding. In the present embodiment, flip chip bonding is employed. did. In this flip chip bonding, the electrodes of the LED bare chip are not electrically connected to the predetermined electrodes on the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate using wires, as in wire bonding, but are called bumps on the electrodes of the LED bare chip. A projection is formed to be electrically connected to a predetermined electrode on the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate. This connection portion is reinforced with solder, resin, or the like.

  In the present embodiment, there is no area printed by silk printing on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the function display substrate. As a result, the step of silk printing can be omitted, so that the cost of manufacturing the substrate can be reduced by reducing the cost of the silk printing plate and the number of manufacturing steps of the substrate.

  In the above-described embodiment, the front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components) mounted on the front-side (front-side) of the function display substrate are arranged on the front (front-side) and rear-side (back-side) of the function display substrate. There is no information on the front surface (front surface) of the functional display board for identifying whether the electronic component is a simple electronic component, and the rear electronic component (back surface electronic component) mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the functional display substrate. Although no information for identifying what kind of electronic component is described on the rear surface (back surface) of the function display substrate, the board management number of the function display substrate is indicated by the front surface (front surface) and the function display substrate. And / or may be written on the rear surface (back surface). As a method of indicating the board management number, the board management number may be printed by silk printing with a paint of a predetermined color (for example, yellow, which is a light color that is inconspicuous against white, and black or green, which is easily conspicuous against white). In the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the board management number is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the board management number in the wiring pattern that is a copper foil. Is also good.

  In the above-described embodiment, the model of the connector housing mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the function display substrate is not indicated at all on the rear surface (back surface) of the function display substrate. May be written on the front surface (front surface) and / or the rear surface (back surface). As a method of indicating the model of the connector housing, even if the connector housing is printed by silk printing with a paint of a predetermined color (for example, yellow, which is a light color that is inconspicuous against white, and black or green, which is conspicuous against white). In the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the wiring pattern is a copper foil, and the type of the connector housing is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the type of the connector housing. It may be formed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the product management number of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body. However, instead of the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body, the left side wall of the box body is used. , The product management number of the function display unit 1400 may be engraved on any one of the upper side wall, the right side wall, and the lower side wall.

  In the above-described embodiment, the product management number of the function display unit 1400 is engraved on the rear surface (rear surface) of the cover body. It may be printed directly on the back side (back side) of the cover with a paint of a color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or printed on a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet. The applied material may be attached to the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body. Further, instead of the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body, the product management number of the function display unit 1400 is given to any one of the left side wall, the upper side wall, the right side wall, and the lower side wall of the box body. The product management number of the function display unit 1400 may be printed directly with a color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.) paint, or on a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet. The printed matter may be pasted.

  In the above-described embodiment, a white resist layer is formed on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the function display substrate by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution. Instead of white, a green resist layer may be formed by a green coating formed by applying a green resist liquid, or a black coating may be formed by applying a black resist liquid. A resist layer may be formed. The green resist solution is inexpensive because it is a commonly used general solution. The use of a black resist solution prevents reflection by light emitted by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate, so that the light is not mixed with light emitted by LEDs arranged in the vicinity. Can contribute to

  In the above-described embodiment, the LED package in which the LED bare chip is sealed is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate, but the LED bear chip sealed in the LED package is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate. However, instead of the LED bare chip, an LED package having a surface mounting type (top type or side type), chip-on-board type, or shell type is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate. May be implemented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, flip-chip bonding is employed as a method of electrically connecting the electrodes of the LED bare chip to predetermined electrodes on the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate, but wire bonding is used instead of flip-chip bonding. May be adopted.

  In the above-described embodiment, the front side electronic component (front surface), which is a plurality of LEDs, is formed on the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate by a wiring pattern of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. Side electronic component), information for specifying each type of electronic component was not formed by a foil-cut foil formed by extracting a copper foil around the outside of the information. A circle symbol is formed near the position corresponding to the terminal of the LED (anode terminal or cathode terminal). Each of the foil-less reference terminal symbols is covered with a white resist (which may be green or black instead of white) which is formed and solid-coated on the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate. Configuration may be. The wiring pattern forming the foil extraction reference terminal symbol is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the LED. When the surrounding area is a so-called beta tag land (substrate ground), the circle symbol itself may be used as the foil extraction reference terminal symbol. Instead of the circle symbol, the foil removal reference terminal symbol may be a symbol representing the polarity of the LED (a symbol used in a circuit diagram (a symbol that can distinguish between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal) or a symbol in a circuit diagram. Symbols used (symbols for distinguishing between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal) may be simplified. Further, when the mounting directions of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the function display substrate are substantially the same (that is, the mounting directions of the plurality of LEDs are the same for the mounting operator or the automatic machine ( If there is no rule to be mounted in reverse) (if a rule is provided in advance), a foil-less reference terminal symbol is displayed near the position corresponding to the terminal of any one of the plurality of LEDs on the front of the function display board. (A front surface), or a foil extraction reference terminal symbol may be formed on the front surface (the front surface) of the functional display substrate near a position corresponding to one or more predetermined LED terminals. Is also good. Also in this case, instead of the circle symbol, the foil extraction reference terminal symbol may be a symbol representing the polarity of the LED (a symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol that can distinguish the anode terminal and the cathode terminal), Symbols used in the circuit diagram (symbols for distinguishing between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal) may be simplified.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 110, FIG. 113, FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 206) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is covered with a protective cover 1601 molded of a non-conductive transparent resin except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. A plurality of L-shaped wiring processing pieces 1601a for locking various wirings along the vertical direction of the protective cover body 1601 are formed on the back side of the protective cover body 1601, and the ventilation length is long in the vertical direction. A plurality of holes are formed in a state of being aligned vertically and horizontally.

  The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601b projecting upward from the upper end face, and one lower fixing piece 1601c projecting downward from the lower end face. The effect display device 1600 includes two fixing grooves 3010c opening on the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described below, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601b from obliquely behind 3010, the lower fixing piece 1601c side is moved forward, and the lower fixing piece 1601c is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front face of the panel board 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. And project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality (four in this example) of general prize ports 2001 that are always open and a plurality of general prize ports 2001. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in the area 5a, a gate section 2003 provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of the game ball B, To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game balls B can be received in accordance with the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game balls B through the gate portion 2003. Is different from the first special winning opening 2005 and the first special winning opening 2005 in which the receiving of the game ball B can be performed according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving the game ball B. position The first special lottery result provided by receiving the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 or the second special lottery result enables the receiving of the game ball B according to the second special lottery result. And two major winning openings 2006.

  A plurality of (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and the remaining one is in the up-down direction on the right part in the gaming area 5a. It is arranged above the center. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 2010 at the lowermost end at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate section 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from below in the up-down direction near the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged at the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end. The first winning opening 2005 is disposed between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The second special winning opening 2006 is disposed above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

  The first sub-out port 2011 is disposed below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is disposed on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, right above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first opening port 2002 and a front opening unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and having three general winning openings 2001, and an upper left unit provided slightly above the side unit 2200 on the left side in a front view 2300, and a second starting port 2004, a first winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011, which are provided to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view in the game area 5a, in front view. Above the first attacker unit 2400, the starting port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, and the front in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center won game 2500 provided substantially at the center slightly above closer, and a.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 to the right of the center role 2500 and has a second attacker unit 2600 having a second big winning opening 2006 and a second attacker unit 2600. And a middle right side unit 2700 having one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a gate portion 2003 provided above the right side middle unit 2700. And a gate member 2800.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 118A is a perspective view of the starting port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, FIG. 118B is a perspective view of the starting port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. () Is a left side view of the starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening with the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing the portions of the starting port unit and the side unit in the game board. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed just above the out port 2010 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

  The starting port unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from a peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102. A flat flange portion 2103 extending outward in the left-right direction from the middle in the front-rear direction, and is entirely formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front by combining a rectangular portion that is long on the left and right and a semicircular portion having a lower side of the rectangular portion as a chord. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the peripheral edge excluding the upper side of the front wall portion 2101, and is formed in a gutter shape with an open upper part. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is lower, and can guide the game ball B backward.

  The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where a flange portion 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The starting port unit 2100, when attached to the panel plate 1110, forms a first starting port 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B by a front wall portion 2101 and a peripheral wall portion 2102 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110. Has formed.

  The starting port unit 2100 is attached to the game panel 1100 so that the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, and the stage 2513 of the center role 2500 is opened. It is located just below the center of. Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is accepted to the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  The starting port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the inclination of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102 in a state where the starting ball is attached to the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000 Can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the above. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

  Although not shown, a decorative sticker is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101 so that the sticker is more prominent than the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. As a result, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting port 2002 rather than the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be prompted to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002. By allowing the first starting port 2002 to receive the game ball B, a lottery of a special lottery result (first special lottery result) in which an advantageous game state in which a player such as a "big hit" game is advantageous occurs. Therefore, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for a special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  In this starting port unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B backward is inclined at a smaller angle (closer to the horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B relatively backward is slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to reliably recognize that the game ball B has been received in the first starting port 2002, and to give the joy (feeling of superiority) to the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 as a general winning port 2001. You can taste it for a longer time than when you are accepted.

  In addition, in a state where the starting port unit 2100 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the under-rear effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rear, and is provided in the under-rear effect unit 3300. It is designed to be illuminated and decorated with light from the LEDs of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the starting port unit 2100 may be provided with a rib that straddles the front wall 2101 and the bottom of the peripheral wall 2102 in the first starting port 2002. The rib is formed in a triangular shape (a part may be rounded) in side view, and the upper surface is inclined at the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right side of the side unit 2200. And the distance to the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the distance from the upper end to the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. (The position of the rib is lower than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). Thereby, the timing at which the game ball B received at the first starting port 2002 abuts on the rib and is guided rearward is determined by the game ball B received at the general winning opening 2001 at the first front wall portion 2203. The timing can be made later than the timing of abutting on the inclined portion and being guided backward, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game balls B can be always received. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general winning opening 2001 on the left side is open upward.

  The side unit 2200 has a flat base plate and two gutters that extend in a gutter shape from the base plate back and forth and that are inclined so as to move rearward as the front end moves downward and are separated to the left and right. One guiding gutter, a first front wall portion closing the front end side of each of the two first guiding gutters, and extending in a gutter shape from the base plate back and forth on the left side of the two first guiding gutters. A second guiding gutter, and a second front wall closing the front end side of the second guiding gutter. The side unit 2200 is entirely formed of a transparent member.

  The first guiding gutter 2202 and the second guiding gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. The first guiding gutter 2202 has a U-shaped open portion facing upward, and the second guiding gutter 2204 has a U-shaped open portion facing upper left. The front end of the first guide gutter 2202 is vertically extended on the upper side of a portion about 3/4 from the bottom, and near the base plate 2201 such that the lower side moves rearward as it goes downward. It extends diagonally to. Accordingly, the first front wall portion 2203 that closes the front end side of the first guide gutter 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a height of about か ら from the bottom.

  The second guide gutter 2204 has a vertical front end. Therefore, the second front wall 2205 that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 with the base plate 2201 in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The first guiding wall 2202 and the second guiding wall 2204 can receive the game ball B at a portion of the first guiding gutter 2202 and the second guiding gutter 2204 projecting forward from the panel plate 1110, and at the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205. A general winning opening 2001 is formed. When the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the portions of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that project rearward from the base plate 2201 penetrate through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The first guiding gutter 2202 and the second guiding gutter 2204 are inclined so that the bottom surface is lower toward the rear, and can guide the game ball B received at the general winning opening 2001 to the rear.

  When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the third delivery port 3050 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game ball B delivered to any of the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port 3064 of the back guiding unit 3050 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051, and then, the lower position is detected. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200.

  The side unit 2200 is different from the starting port unit 2100 in that a decorative seal is not attached to the first front wall 2203 or the second front wall 2205 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001, It is less noticeable than the first opening 2002. Since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general winning openings 2001 can be emphasized, and even if a decorative seal is not stuck on the front surface. It doesn't look bad.

  In the state where the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 120, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located at the rear, and the lower back left decoration of the back lower left rendering unit 3200. Light emitting decoration can be performed by light from the LED on the substrate 3203, and the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 can be visually recognized in a favorable state. In addition, since the side unit 2200 has a portion that is inclined at the first front wall portion 2203 that forms the front end of each of the two general winning openings 2001, the lower portion of the back unit 3000 is formed by the portion. The light emitted forward from the lower decorative substrate 3203 under the back of the effect unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, The appearance can be improved.

  In the side unit 2200, since the bent portion and the obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 are inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 is relatively rearward. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is fast. The bottom surfaces of the first guiding gutter 2202 and the second guiding gutter 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B becomes invisible in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest from being unnecessarily attracted to the general winning opening 2001 for a long time while making the player surely recognize the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, the player's interest can be easily directed to the next game ball B, the first starting port 2002, the first winning port 2005, the other winning port such as the second winning port 2006, and the like. It is possible to entertain a game in the game area 5a and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In other words, since the bent and obliquely extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to reliably recognize that the game ball B has been received in the first starting port 2002, and to give the joy (feeling of superiority) to the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 as a general winning port 2001. You can taste it for a longer time than when you are accepted.

  By the way, in the side unit 2200, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front end of each of the two general winning openings 2001 is inclined, so that the first front wall portion 2203 is positioned from the side of the first guiding gutter 2202. The game ball B can pass in front of the inclined portion of the game ball B. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203, when viewed from the front, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001, so that the game ball B is received by the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. When the payout of the game balls B is not performed, the player may feel distrust of the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall side, which may reduce the interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guiding gutter 2202 are received by the general winning opening 2001 and rearward. Since the guided game ball B can be visually recognized by the player for a short time, it is possible to recognize that the game ball B has been accepted in the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, even if the illusion that the game ball B passed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

  Further, in this side unit 2200, a portion of the game ball B can pass in front of the first front wall portion 2203, so that a game ball is formed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001. When most of the game balls B (at least half or more of the game balls B) overlap with the general winning opening 2001 in a front view when B passes, some players place the game balls B in the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. An illusion of being accepted can be provided, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001, and it can be thought that it is an illusion. Therefore, even if a bonus (payout of the game ball B or a lottery of the first special lottery result) is not provided thereafter, it is possible to avoid distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. It is possible to keep the player entertained in the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (left end) general winning opening 2001 among the three general winning openings 2001 in parallel with the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) by the second front wall portion 2205. It has the same shape as the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Thus, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 at the left end, it is possible to give an illusion that some players have been accepted in the starting opening. Then, even if the game ball B is accepted in the general winning opening 2001, which is an illusion that it is the starting port, the lottery of the special lottery result is not performed, so that the player feels distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. There is fear. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 distant to the left from the first starting opening 2002 at the center in the left-right direction (a position that cannot be received by “right-handed”), and Since a decorative seal indicating a starting port is not attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2205, it can be reconfirmed that the starting port is not a starting port, and the player can enjoy the game by feeling distrust. It is possible to avoid lowering.

  In addition, since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 are inclined in the side unit 2200, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 is smaller than when the front ends are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Can be reduced, and the sticker for decoration is not attached to the front of the general winning opening 2001, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  The angle of inclination of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning opening 2001) from the horizontal is not shown, but a variable winning opening such as a large winning opening or a bonus winning opening is openably closed. Is larger than the inclination angle from the horizontal when the upper side is opened around the lower side so that the upper side moves forward so as to guide the game ball B toward the winning side. Angle. More specifically, depending on the player, if the number of game balls B paid out by accepting the game balls B to the variable winning opening is larger than the general winning opening 2001, the number of the game balls B to the variable winning opening is increased. To win the prize. Alternatively, even with a variable winning opening (large winning opening) in which the defined winning number is determined, it is desired to win more than the defined number. Accordingly, since the inclination of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening is set to be smaller than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall portion 2203), the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow. As described above, when the game ball B is received in the variable winning opening, the received game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. Can be surely recognized that the game ball B has been received in the variable winning opening, and the joy (feeling of excellence) that the game ball B has been received in the variable winning opening is given to the general winning opening 2001. You can taste it for a longer time than when you are accepted. In addition, since the angle of the winning opening door in the open state is loose, the time required for the opening winning door to be closed becomes longer, so that the game balls B win more than the specified number for the player. You can make them seem to.

  Further, at the two general winning openings 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200, a portion extending obliquely downward from the lower end of the first front wall portion 2203, compared with a distance of a portion extending vertically downward from the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203. Is formed longer. As a result, since the winning port is the general winning port 2001, the payout of the game ball B is performed but the lottery such as the normal lottery or the special lottery is not performed. Can be quickly invisible from the player's view.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 in which the front surface of a specific general winning opening 2001 is inclined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The front of the winning opening 2001 may be inclined. In the present embodiment, the game ball B fired at the firing position (so-called “left-handed”) in the normal gaming state through the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is not inclined can enter. Although the position provided at the position is shown, the present invention is not limited to this. The general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is not inclined is set in the advantageous gaming state (during "time saving", "probable change" or "big hit"). The game ball B fired at the firing position (so-called “right strike”) may be provided at a position where the ball can enter, or may be provided at both.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 provided with an inclination on the front surface is larger than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, the big winning opening) is opened from when it is closed. The angle is narrow. When the payout number of the game balls B at the time of winning in the special winning opening is made larger than the general winning opening 2001, even if the special winning opening has a predetermined winning number, the player can win more than the specified number. I wish. Therefore, the speed at which the game ball B winning the big winning opening rolls to the back side is slower than the speed at which the game ball B winning the general winning opening 2001 with the front surface inclined rolls to the back side. I have. In other words, when the player wins the general winning opening 2001 which is smaller than the number of payouts when the player wins the big winning opening, it is assumed that the speed of the game ball B winning the big winning opening rolls inward. ing. In other words, it can be said that the winning port with more payouts has a longer time of disappearing from the player's view. As a result, the prize port having more payouts can provide a longer joy time when a prize is won.

[5-8c. Upper left side unit]
The upper left side unit 2300 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 117 and the like. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 inclined so as to be lower rightward. The upper left side unit 2300 is formed entirely transparent.

  When the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 121A is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 121B is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the first winning port door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a path of a game ball in the first attacker unit.

  The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the front right side of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view, in the game area 5a, and is located on the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. Installed. The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port 2004, a first winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011 (see FIG. 130 and the like). In the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, the second starting port 2004 is provided at the upper right side from the center in the left-right direction, and the first big winning opening 2005 is on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and is located more than the second starting port 2004. The first sub-out port 2011 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and lower than the first big winning port 2005.

  In addition, the first attacker unit 2400 has a second starting port sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 and a first detecting port for detecting the game ball B received in the first big winning port 2005. It includes a special winning opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the first sub-out opening 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 for detecting illegal magnetism. The first big winning opening sensor 2402 and the magnetic sensor 2404 are provided two each.

  The first attacker unit 2400 includes a unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, a front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 and forming a flow path of the game ball B, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 2411. Rear cover 2413, a second starting port door 2414 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the second starting port 2004, and moving the second starting port door 2414 to open and close the second starting port 2004. A starting opening solenoid 2415, a solenoid cover 2416 covering the starting opening solenoid 2415, a first winning opening door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first winning opening 2005; To open and close the first big winning opening 2005 by moving the big winning opening door 2417 It includes as one attacker solenoid 2418, the transmission member 2419 to the movable first winning opening the door 2417 by transmitting the advance and retreat of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the.

  Also, the first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 2413 and the first large winning opening decorative board 2420 for emitting and decorating the first large winning opening 2005. The second starting port sensor 2401, the first winning port sensor 2402, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 2404, the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the first winning port decorative board 2420 and the panel relay board And a first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with the 1710.

  The unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 has a first opening 2411a penetrating front and back near the upper end on the right side from the center in the left and right direction, a first guide hole 2411b penetrating front and rear below the first opening 2411a, and a left and right direction. A second opening 2411c penetrating back and forth long left and right in the upper part on the left side from the center; two second guide holes 2411d penetrating back and forth side by side under the second opening 2411c side by side; And a first sub-out port 2011 penetrating back and forth below the one guide hole 2411b.

  The left and right widths of the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 are formed slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inserted therethrough. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position below the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, and is inclined so that the rear end side becomes lower. The second opening 2411c extends right and left at a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 is inserted therethrough. The second guide holes 2411d each project rearward in a tubular shape, and are inclined so that the rear end side is lower.

  In addition, the unit base 2411 is arranged side by side along the upper side of the second opening 2411c, and has two contact portions 2411e protruding forward in a triangular shape. These contact portions 2411e move the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 when the first special winning opening 2005 is in the closed state, with the contact portion of the front cover 2412. In cooperation, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

  The second starting port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 immediately above the first guide hole 2411b with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. In addition, right above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first special winning opening sensor 2402 is attached with the detection holes protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, a first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes coincide with each other. Further, magnetic sensors 2404 are mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 2411 on the left side of the first guide hole 2411b and on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411d, respectively.

  The front cover 2412 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and is transparently formed as a member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage for the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 125, the front cover 2412 extends from the vicinity of the upper right corner to the left in a front view, and extends downward from the vicinity of the upper right corner, and a game ball from the left end of the first shelf 2412a to the left. B is slightly longer than the diameter of B and extends shorter than the first shelf 2412a so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf 2412a. And a second shelf 2412b forming a second starting port 2004, and a second shelf that is lower leftward than a left end of the second shelf 2412b and smaller than the diameter of the game ball B to the left. And a third shelf 2412c extending from the left end of the third shelf 2412c to the left with a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and a third shelf 2412c extending from the left end of the third shelf 2412c. From lower position to lower left It extends so that has a fourth ledge 2412d forming the first special winning opening 2005 between the third ledge 2412c, a.

  The right end of the first shelf 2412a is separated from the right side of the front cover 2412 to the left slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The first shelf 2412a, the second shelf 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are each inclined at the same angle, and the fourth shelf 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2412a and the like. ing.

  Further, the front cover 2412 is the same as the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a and the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. A second standing wall portion 2412f extending to the height, a third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and a third shelf portion 2412c. The fourth standing wall portion 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end of the front cover 2412 to the lower side, the fifth standing wall portion 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c, and the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. And a sixth standing wall 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf 2412d.

  The fifth standing wall portion 2412i extends a little longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to extend downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then lower leftward. , Extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The sixth standing wall portion 2412j extends from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d downward to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to lower rightward. Above, it extends further downward to the lower side of the front cover 2412. The interval in the left-right direction between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

  Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 24121 connected to lower ends of the first vertical wall portion 2412e, the second vertical wall portion 2412f, and the third vertical wall portion 2412g, and a first vertical wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of 2412e, the game ball B is inclined to the left with an interval at which the game balls B can flow between the first horizontal wall portion 2412l and then to the middle of the left fourth standing wall portion 2412h. And a second horizontal wall portion 2412m that is inclined so as to be higher toward the front. The first horizontal wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second horizontal wall portion 2412m is formed such that the portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

  In addition, the front cover 2412 extends from near the lower portions of the fifth upright wall portion 2412i and the sixth upright wall portion 2412j in a direction approaching each other to around the center between the fifth upright wall portion 2412i and the sixth upright wall portion 2412j. It has a third horizontal wall portion 2412n that extends and a partition portion 2412o that connects the opposing ends of the two third horizontal wall portions 2412n together and extends upward. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

  Further, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise so as to be lower to the left along the upper side of the front cover, and is an interval at which the game balls B can flow between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c. It is provided with an opening. It has an upper shelf 2412p. The upper shelf 2412p has a right end located directly above a left end of the first shelf 2412a, and a left end located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. The upper shelf 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end becomes lower to the right.

  Further, although not shown, the front cover 2412 is located in front of the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411, and a triangular portion that is alternately arranged in the left-right direction with respect to the two contact portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two abutments projecting rearward in shape. These contact portions, when the first special winning opening 2005 is in the closed state, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 and the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411. In cooperation, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction.

  The rear cover 2413 is formed in a box shape opened forward, and is formed of a transparent member. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold a second starting door 2414, a solenoid cover 2416, a first winning opening door 2417, a first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to hold the second starting port sensor 2401, the first winning port sensor 2402, and the first sub-out port sensor 2403 so as to sandwich the same.

  The second starter door 2414 has a flat door portion 2414a, an arm portion 2414b extending downward from the door portion 2414a, and a left and right extending from a lower end of the arm portion 2414b. A rotating shaft 2414c that is rotatably attached to the arm portion 2414b, and a connecting portion 2414d that is provided at a position below the rotating shaft 2414c below the arm portion 2414b and that is connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415. .

  The door part 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inclined such that the left end side is lower. The arm portion 2414b of the second starter door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c of the arm portion 2414b.

  The second starting port door 2414 can close the second starting port 2004 by the door portion 2414a. The second starting port door 2414 is rotated (rotated) about the rotating shaft 2414c by the forward / backward movement of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415, so that the door section 2414a moves in the front / rear direction. The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

  The starting port solenoid 2415 is attached with the plunger protruding forward. In this starting port solenoid 2415, the plunger protrudes forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown) in a state where power is not supplied, and the plunger is retracted by supplying power.

  The first winning opening door 2417 has a flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a that is long in the left and right directions, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from both left and right ends of the door portion 2417a, and a pair of arm portions 2417b. It has a rotating shaft 2417c coaxially extending from the lower end in the left-right direction, and a cylindrical link pin 2417d protruding rightward from the lower part of the right arm 2417b.

  The door portion 2417a of the first winning opening door 2417 is inclined such that the left end side is lower. The pair of arm portions 2417b extend downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a and then bend forward to a position substantially equal to the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided at a lower portion of the arm portion 2417b on a side closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotation shaft 2417c. The link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a vertically extending slit 2419c of a transmission member 2419 described later.

  The first special winning opening door 2005 can be closed by the door portion 2417a. The first award winning door 2417 is rotated (rotated) about the rotation shaft 2417c by the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 in the front-rear direction, so that the door portion 2417a moves in the front-rear direction. The first winning opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

  The first attacker solenoid 2418 is attached with the plunger protruding forward. When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retreats.

  The transmission member 2419 penetrates in the left-right direction near the front end of the extension 2419b, the base 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the extension 2419b extending forward from the base 2419a. And a slit 2419c extending vertically. The link pin 2417d of the first winning port door 2417 is slidably inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419.

  A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front surface of the first special winning opening decoration board 2420. The plurality of LEDs on the first winning prize opening decorative board 2420 are full-color LEDs that are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multiple colors. The first special winning opening decoration board 2420 can make the first special winning opening 2005 emit light by emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the starting port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are each in a non-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415 projects forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 passes through the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411. Protruding forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the state in which the game ball B cannot be received into the second starting port 2004 by the door section 2414a. Has become. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door part 2414a) (see FIG. 125).

  In a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward by the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 is connected to the second opening of the unit base 2411. It protrudes forward through 2411c. In this state, the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 is located above the first special winning opening 2005, and the reception of the game ball B into the first special winning opening 2005 is impossible by the door portion 2417a. It is in a state. That is, the first special winning opening 2005 is closed by the first special winning opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 124 and 125).

  In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down on the first shelf portion 2412a, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf portion 2412a, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414a After rolling on the upper surface and the second shelf 2412b, it is discharged to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 according to the momentum, and the inclination thereof causes the game ball B to be left. Roll towards you. When the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b abuts against the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and rebounds rightward, a gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c is formed. May enter.

  At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a that closes the first special winning opening 2005 is moved toward the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412. As a result, they come into contact alternately and roll leftward while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the door 2417a is discharged from the left end thereof to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 after rolling on the fourth shelf 2412d.

  In the first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows to the right of the first shelf portion 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e, falls near the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412m, and falls on the second lateral wall. Due to the inclination of the portion 2412m, it rolls leftward and enters the first sub-out port 2011. When the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c, the game ball B passes between the third standing wall 2412g and the fourth standing wall 2412h, and the second horizontal wall 2412m passes through the gap. It falls near the left end, rolls rightward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

  The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is returned to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. It is delivered and discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B flowing on the right side of the first shelf 2412a and the game ball B passing through the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c are both It is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

  In this normal state, when the starting port solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, the plunger is opposed to the urging force of the spring. Is retracted, and the connecting portion 2414d of the arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 above the rotary shaft 2414c (on the side of the door portion 2414a) is pulled rearward by the tip of the plunger. Thus, the second starting door 2414 rotates about the rotation shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door 2414a moves rearward. When the door portion 2414a rotates so as to retreat from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper portion of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. Becomes That is, the second start port 2004 is opened.

  When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, the game ball B flows down between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and the second starting port sensor 2401 After being detected, it falls on the first horizontal wall portion 2412l. The portion between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g in the first horizontal wall portion 2412l is inclined so as to be lower rearward, and the game ball B rolls rearward due to the inclination, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged backward from its rear end. The game ball B released backward from the rear end of the first guiding hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is transferred from the back guiding unit 3050 to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is discharged.

  On the other hand, in a normal state, according to a special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) selected by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger retreats together with the transmission member 2419 attached to the tip thereof against the urging force of the spring. When the transmission member 2419 is retracted, the link pin 2417d of the first winning opening door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pressed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding in the slit 2419c. It will be.

  Accordingly, the first winning opening door 2417 rotates so that the door 2417a moves rearward about the rotation axis 2417c, and the front end of the door 2417a moves rearward from the front of the unit base 2411. Will move. By moving the door portion 2417a of the first special winning opening door 2417 behind the front surface of the unit base 2411, the first special winning opening 2005 is opened upward, and the state is shifted to the first special winning opening 2005. Can be received (see FIG. 124). That is, the first special winning opening 2005 is opened.

  When the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 when the first special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the game ball B passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j, and then passes through the fifth standing wall. After passing between the portion 2412i and the partitioning portion 2412o or between the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and the partitioning portion 2412o, it is detected by one of the two first big winning opening sensors 2402, It falls on the three horizontal wall portions 2412n. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is inclined so as to become lower rearward from the upper surface, and the game ball B that has fallen on the third horizontal wall portion 2412n rolls rearward due to the inclination, and It is discharged backward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B released backward from the second guiding hole 2411d is delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 to the lower substrate holder 1200. .

  As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first special winning opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005, near the front end of the door 2417a that closes the first special winning opening 2005. The first large winning opening 2005 is opened and closed by rotating the door portion 2417a about a rotating shaft 2417c extending left and right at the same position in the front-rear direction. The depth in the front-back direction applied to the attacker unit 2400) can be shortened as much as possible. This effect is the same in the second starting port 2004 opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414. Thereby, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

  Also, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first special winning opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition part 2412o, and each is detected by the different first special winning opening sensor 2402, and the unit base 2411 is detected. , The game balls B can be prevented from staying between the first special winning opening 2005 and the first special winning opening sensor 2402, and more game balls can be released in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 126 (a) is a perspective view of the front center unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 126 (b) is a rear perspective view of the front center unit of the front unit. FIG. 127 is a front view of the center item. The center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed in the game area 5a above the starting port unit 2100, substantially in the center in front view and slightly upward, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center role item 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and can visually recognize, from the front, various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 provided in the rear of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000. .

  The frame-shaped center role 2500 has a portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It is inaccessible.

  The center role item 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped member projecting from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. It has a flange 2502 and a flat support 2503 projecting from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall 2501. The peripheral wall 2501 extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state where the peripheral wall 2501 is assembled to the game board 5. The peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 into which the center role 2500 is inserted. When the peripheral wall portion 2501 is assembled to the game board 5, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from entering the inside of the frame from the outside of the center role object 2500.

  The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed smaller than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange 2502 and the support 2503 project from the peripheral wall 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support part 2503 (flange part 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall part 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

  A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall 2501 where the flange 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall 2501. The support portion 2503 has an edge protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 formed in a shape following the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a straight line so that the support portion 2503 is not noticeable. The support portion 2503 has a protruding amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within a range from the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness (1 mm to 10 mm) of the panel plate 1110, and the player exerts an effect as reinforcement. To make it less noticeable.

  More specifically, a plurality of support portions 2503 of the center role 2500 are provided. For example, in a support portion 2503 provided above a warp inlet 2511 to be described later and at a portion where the peripheral wall portion 2501 protrudes to the leftmost, the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at that portion is intermediate between the vertically extending portions. Has a shape that swells to the left. The tip side of the support part 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall 2501 on both the upper and lower sides of the part bulging leftward of the peripheral wall 2501, and in the part bulging leftward of the peripheral wall 2501, It has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and is formed linearly so as to connect the upper and lower portions (see FIG. 135). When the support portion 2503 of this portion is assembled to the game board 5, the portion extending linearly up and down on the tip side of the support portion 2503 is the back front left decorative body of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. 3030 substantially along a part of the right side. Therefore, since the tip side of the support part 2503 coincides with the edge of the back front left decorative body 3030, the support part 2503 is hard to distinguish, and the back front left decoration provided relatively rearward. The decoration of the body 3030 can be prominent.

  Further, of the plurality of support portions 2503, the support portion 2503 below the warp entrance 2511 extends rightward in a square shape while the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends diagonally. The support portion 2503 of this portion is located in front of the third back-front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back-front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 when assembled on the game board 5 (see FIG. 107 and the like). ). Since the left and right end sides of the support portion 2503 extend in parallel with the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C, they are partly formed in the shape of the shutter 3732. , And it is difficult for the support unit 2503 to determine (see FIG. 111).

  The center role 2500 has a warp entrance in which a game ball B in the game area 5a is opened at a position on the left side of the peripheral wall 2501 in a front view and in front of the front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. 2511, a game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2511, a warp exit 2512 that can be released from the front of the game panel 1100 and opens in the frame, and a game ball B released from the warp exit 2512. A stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction and a stage cover 2515 provided so as to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 are provided (see FIG. 127 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the invasion of the game ball B from outside the frame of the center role 2500 into the frame by bouncing the game ball B bouncing on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

  The stage 2513 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to a position just above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is placed on the panel plate of the game panel 1100. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the position of the approximate center in the left-right direction when attached to the 1110 is slightly higher than both left and right sides thereof. In the stage 2513, a portion (central emission portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left-right direction and a lowest portion (side emission portion 2513b) on the left and right sides thereof are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be lower, and the game balls B can be released into the game area 5a from those portions.

  In the state where the center role item 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the raised portion (central discharge portion 2513 a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2513 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is accepted to the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  The center role item 2500 includes a guide passage group 2520 that is provided at the upper right corner and includes two passages through which the game balls B can flow. When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center role 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5 a (the stop of the front component 1000). The game ball B, which is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005) in the vicinity of the portion 1006 and is driven to the right above the center role 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

  The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the up-down direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in a groove shape that is opened forward, so that the game balls B flowing therethrough can be visually recognized in a favorable state from the front.

  The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and is located along the peripheral wall 2501 to the right of the first guide passage 2521 and the first guide passage 2521 apart from the peripheral wall 2501. And a second guide passage 2522 extending therefrom. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated to the left and right. The outlet of the first guide passage 2521 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and open diagonally to the lower right along the arc above the right rail 1005.

  The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate 2003 in a state where the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. In addition, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located immediately below the lower end of the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B contacting the stop portion 1006 are the first guide. It is formed so as to enter the passage 2521.

  In addition, the center role 2500 has a lower right guide passage 2530 that protrudes rightward from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then discharges the ball downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance opening upward over the front width in the left-right direction, and an exit opening diagonally lower left with a width of one game ball B.

  The lower right guide passage 2530 has a right end substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 when assembled to the game board 5 and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are arranged.

  According to the center role 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 Since it is the outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (within the frame of the center role 2500) can be relatively widened, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 passing through the frame of the center role 2500 and the back unit 3000 decorations and the like can be made more visible.

  Further, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. This can prevent the peripheral wall 2501 from being deformed or damaged even when the game ball B comes into contact with the peripheral wall 2501 outside the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Further, since the strength of the center role 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center role 2500 can be released from the injection mold without being deformed.

  Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is made to protrude shortly from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is provided partially on the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is provided on the rear side. The visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 can be reduced. In addition, the center role 2500 such as the support portion 2503 is transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are located as close as possible to the rear surface of the center role 2500. Is arranged, it is possible to prevent the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 from being blurred due to the lens effect of the transparent center role 2500. For this reason, according to the center role 2500 of the present embodiment, the visibility of the decorative body and the like provided at the rear can be improved, and the decorative effect by them can be reliably exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 and the like are transparent and the support portion 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body and the effect display device 1600 that can be illuminated and decorated, it can be illuminated and decorated with light from them, and the appearance is good. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the back front left effect unit 3700 and the effect display device 1600 in the back unit 3000 are provided behind the support unit 2503 (cross-hatched portion in FIG. 135). By transmitting, reflecting, refracting, or diffusing light radiated forward from the LEDs of the front left decoration board 3714, the effect display device 1600, and the like in the front left rendering unit 3700, a brilliant luminous decoration is provided. Can be shown to players. Note that a step, a notch, or the like may be provided in the support portion 2503, so that light from behind can be diffused by the step or the like, and a more brilliant appearance can be achieved.

  In addition, since the support portion 2503 is provided to have a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) is provided. In a close part, the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall 2501. Thereby, the game area by the plurality of obstacle nails N in the game area 5a can be made as wide as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the original game.

  The peripheral wall 2501 has the same shape as the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Is provided on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the support portion 2503 can be made less noticeable to the player, and the center role 2500 is made to appear to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

  Furthermore, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center role 2500, the inside of the frame of the center role 2500 is more compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the rear side can be more easily seen. In other words, when the non-distribution area (the inside of the frame) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center role 2500 is to be made large, the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You may do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear when viewed from the front.

  The edge of the support portion 2503 may have a shape similar to the shape of the front cover 3711 (the shape of the decorative body) of the rear left effect unit 3700 provided at the rear. This makes it possible to prevent the support portion 2503 from being noticeably degraded in the decorativeness of the rear decorative body due to the support portion 2503 being different from the rear decoration. Can be increased.

  In the above-described embodiment, the support unit 2503 is provided at a position near the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, and the decoration is performed by the lens effect. Although the one that suppresses blurring is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the support part 2503 is provided near the front end of the peripheral wall part 2501 that is remote from the rear unit 3000 at the rear. Alternatively, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided rearward may be intentionally blurred.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game panel 1100 has the opening 1112 penetrating through the panel plate 1110, and the rear side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be no rear part inserted into the opening 1112 in the peripheral wall 2501. In this case, the peripheral wall 2501 may be attached to the gaming panel 1100 having no opening 1112. . When the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 having no opening 1112, the support portion 2503 may be mounted to the game panel 1100. In this case, the center portion 2500 does not have the flange 2502. You may do it.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Subsequently, the second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 128A is a perspective view of the front side of the second attacker unit, the right side middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit. FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross-section, a passage of a game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit.

  The second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 and between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is attached to the front of panel panel 1110 in panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 is provided with a second big winning opening 2006 which is openable and closable to the left (see FIG. 129).

  The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second special winning opening sensor 2601 for detecting the game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006, and a magnetic sensor for detecting an improper time acting near the second special winning opening 2006. 2602. In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second special winning opening door 2611 to open and close the second special winning opening 2006, and moves the second special winning opening door 2611 to open the second special winning opening 2006. A second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, a transmission member (not shown) for transmitting the advance and retreat of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second winning port door 2611, and a second winning port 2006 And a guiding passage 2613 for guiding the received game ball B and discharging it backward.

  In the second attacker unit 2600, the second large winning opening 2006 is opened to the left at a position closer to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and the second large winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. A winning opening door 2611 is provided.

  The second winning opening door 2611 has a semicircular lower side bulging downward, a right side linearly extending upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and bulging leftward from the upper end of the right side. It is formed in the shape of a so-called wing composed of an arc-shaped left side in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second winning opening door 2611 has a cylindrical rotary shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircular shape as an axis, and a link protruding rearward from a position further than the rotary shaft. Pins (not shown). The second large winning opening door 2611 has a lower rotating shaft rotatably mounted such that the upper end moves leftward.

  Although not shown in detail, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger projects downward. A transmission member (not shown) includes a base attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612, and a transmission pin that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the link pin of the second winning port door 2611 can slide. And a slit to be inserted, and is mounted so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

  The second attacker unit 2600 is located such that the right side thereof is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 when assembled to the game board 5, and the second large winning opening 2006 and the peripheral wall portion of the center role item 2500. A space through which game balls B can flow is formed between the right side of 2501 and the right side. In the second attacker unit 2600, when assembled to the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes more rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100.

  In the second attacker unit 2600, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state in a normal state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to its own weight and the own weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second special winning opening door 2611 is upright, and the second special winning opening 2006 is closed by the second special winning opening door 2611. In other words, in the normal state, the game ball B cannot be received in the second special winning opening 2006.

  In this normal state, according to a special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second special winning opening door 2611 inserted into the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. In addition, by sliding in the slit, the second winning port door 2611 rotates counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 2611a.

  As a result, the upper end of the second special winning opening door 2611 moves to the left, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened to the left, and the right end side of the second special winning opening door 2611 is lowered. Thus, the state is inclined. That is, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the second big winning opening door 2611, it rolls rightward due to its inclination and is received in the second big winning opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, and then guided by the guiding passage 2613 and discharged backward. The game ball B released backward from the guidance passage 2613 is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guidance unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right center unit 2700 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The right side middle unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012.

  In the right side middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward in the left-right direction with the width of one game ball B, and is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001. The second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with the width of two balls B.

  The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 backward, and the first guide path 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 backward. And two guide passages 2702. The first guidance passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape that extends rearward from the general winning opening 2001, and then bends rightward and further backwards. The second guide passage 2702 extends backward from the second sub-out port 2012 below the first guide passage 2701 and then bends rearward. The outlet of the first guide passage 2701 and the outlet of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged vertically.

  When the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. I have.

  In the state in which the right side middle unit 2700 is assembled to the game board 5, the right end is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the lower end is substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space through which the game balls B can flow is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 in the center role 2500. In the side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is opened slightly upward to the left of the second big winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is formed between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It opens upward almost entirely between them (see FIG. 130 and the like).

  The right side middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide path 2701, and is provided at the back. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game balls B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 are detected by the general winning port sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In addition, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel board 1110 by the second guiding passage 2702, and then provides the back unit provided behind. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in 3000. The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is disposed between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the middle right side unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. Have been. The gate member 2800 includes a gate portion 2003 in which a lottery of a normal lottery result for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 by passing the game ball B is performed, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate portion 2003. 2801. A detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is a gate 2003.

  The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 projecting obliquely to the lower left from near the right end of the lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003 to the lower left. When the guide piece 2802 is assembled to the game board 5, the guide piece 2802 is inclined so that an extension thereof passes near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

  The gate member 2800 is located substantially at the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500 when assembled on the game board 5, and the game is played on both left and right outer sides. The ball B forms a gap through which the ball can flow. The gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left from directly below the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500, and also to the right from above the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram in which the right part in the game area in FIG. 115 is enlarged. When assembled on the game board 5, a center role 2500 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at both left and right outer portions and a lower portion of the center role item 2500. Further, on the left side of the center role item 2500 and above the upper left side unit 2300, a windmill W that is rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the center role 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven into the left side of the center role 2500 into a portion on the right side of the center of the windmill W. The wind turbine W is adjusted so as to enter a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than the above. Thus, the game ball B is driven down the left side of the center role 2500 to be able to enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 with a certain probability.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center role item 2500 and the gate member 2800 are larger than the gaming balls B flowing through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game balls B flowing through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 are adjusted so as to pass through the gate 2003 with a higher probability. In addition, the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game ball B flows mainly on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

  The plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate member 2800 and the middle right side unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game balls B mainly flow on the left side of the middle right side unit 2700.

  In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and is driven upward from the left side along the periphery of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven so as to flow on the left side of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails implanted on the left side of the center role 2500 as shown in FIG. By N, it is guided to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 or a portion on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and a portion on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than these. You are guided to enter.

  The game ball B guided to the site on the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided rightward by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 will be accepted. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and thereafter, the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. 3064, and is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the site on the left side of the center of the windmill W is hardly accepted by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game balls B not received in the general winning opening 2001 are discharged out of the gaming area 5a from the out opening 2010.

  The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is centered in the left and right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally along the lower side of the center role 2500. Side and may be accepted into the first opening 2002. Further, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through a plurality of obstruction nails N arranged diagonally, and may flow down to the side unit 2200. May be accepted in the general winning opening 2001.

  The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center role 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from a central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the central discharge part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513 into the game area 5a, the central discharge part 2513a is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that the first discharge port 2513a has a high probability. It is received in the starting port 2002. When the game ball B is released from the left and right side discharge portions 2513b of the central discharge portion 2513a, it is accepted to the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

  The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then transferred to the first receiving port 3061 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and the first starting port sensor. After being detected by 3052, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the first starting port sensor 3052 detects the game ball B, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

  In addition, the game ball B flowing on the left side of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003, and is received in the second starting port 2004, the first winning port 2005, and the second winning port 2006. There is no possibility that it will be done.

  In the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right of the center role 2500 is accepted by the second starting port 2004 is higher than the game ball B hit to the left of the center role 2500. The probability of being accepted by the first starting port 2002 is set higher. Thereby, when the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is not in the open state, it is possible to urge the operation of hitting the game ball B to the left side of the center role item 2500 (“left hit”).

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game balls B enter the upper part of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 with a strength at which the game balls B penetrate above a portion that becomes lower rightward from near the center in the left-right direction. When driven, the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

  More specifically, the game ball B is driven with a strength to abut against a stop portion 1006 projecting inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed). Then, the game ball B abutting on the stopper 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly closer to the right than immediately above the gate portion 2003.

  The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is caused by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800, the left side of the gate member 2800, the gate portion. In 2003, the gate member 2800 is guided in such a manner that the probability becomes lower in the order to the right, and flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center role 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it is on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. It is released from below. The game balls B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are guided so that the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability, and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability than them. Then, it flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

  The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received in the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received at the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and is transferred to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then the second sub-out port sensor is provided. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged out of the game area 5a. The game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is released to the side right middle unit 2700 side after being detected by the gate sensor 2801. By detecting the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery of a normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed is performed.

  The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate unit 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability that the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 have a high probability. Of the side right middle unit 2700 and occasionally accepted in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 or rarely in the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. After being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. At this time, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is provided.

  The game ball B flowing on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Down to the left of

  At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and “small hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted with a high probability in the second big winning opening 2006.

  The game ball B received in the second special winning opening 2006 is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, and then guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a. It is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guiding unit 3050 and is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. By detecting the game balls B by the second special winning opening sensor 2601, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  The game ball B, which was not accepted by the second winning opening 2006 and flowed to the left of the second winning opening 2006, enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500 and exits from the lower right guide passage 2530. From the first attacker unit 2400 side.

  The game ball B discharged downward (obliquely lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500 flows down onto the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly transmitted from the lower right guide passage 2530 to the first attacker unit 2400. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

  The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and moves the upper surface of the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 and the second shelf 2412b. After rolling, it is discharged to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2412b. Then, the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first big winning opening door 2417 according to the momentum, and the inclination thereof. , And after rolling from the door 2417a to the fourth shelf 2412d, it is discharged from the fourth shelf 2412d to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

  In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500, the plurality of nails N abut on the upper shelf 2412p without flowing down to the first shelf 2412a. May flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf 2412p rolls to the left due to its inclination, is discharged to the left from the left end of the upper shelf 2412p, and is then placed on the obstacle nail N implanted to the left. After contacting and turning downward and flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a in the first big winning opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d are rolled to the left and the first It is released outside the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, depending on the timing at which the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing at which the first special winning opening 2005 is opened, the first large game ball B is opened. The winning opening 2005 may be accepted.

  Also, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500, the ball rebounds to the right due to contact with the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf 2412p and the first shelf 2412a. By flowing down, the first shelf 2412a may roll rightward against its inclination and be discharged rightward (downward) from the right end of the first shelf 2412a. The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf 2412a flows between the first standing wall portion 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. Then, it rolls leftward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m and is received in the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is not returned into the game area 5a, but the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. And discharged from the back guiding unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

  When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role item 2500 and “normal hit” is selected as a result of the normal lottery by the passing of the game ball B at the gate unit 2003, the second start is performed. Since the mouth door 2414 is movable and the second starting port 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling the first shelf 2412a to the left is received in the second starting port 2004. there is a possibility. When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second start-up opening sensor 2401, a lottery of the second special lottery result is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out.

  When the game ball B is released to the left from the second shelf 2412b, the game ball B is accepted by the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is obtained. As a result, when the "big hit" is selected by lottery, since the first big winning opening door 2417 is movable and the first big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, it is discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b. The game ball B will be accepted with a high probability in the first big winning opening 2005. The game ball B received in the first special winning opening 2005 is detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by the first special winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given.

  In addition, depending on the momentum of the game ball B discharged to the left from the second shelf 2412b, the game ball B abuts on a step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p, and flows down diagonally to the lower right, and the third shelf 2412b and the third The game ball B may enter the gap between the rack 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c passes between the third standing wall 2412g and the fourth standing wall 2412h and is near the left end of the second horizontal wall 2412m. It falls down, rolls rightward due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m, and is received in the first sub-out port 2011.

  The game ball B discharged from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role item 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is received by any of the second starting port 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out port 2011. If not, the game is discharged from the out port 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

  Therefore, in order to open and close the first winning opening 2005 and the second winning opening 2006, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 receives the game ball B, and the "small hit" It is necessary to have a lottery of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, such as a "big hit" or the like. While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 needs to let the game ball B pass through the gate unit 2003 to draw (or allocate) a "normal hit" as a normal lottery result. Therefore, the opportunity to accept the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

  Therefore, in a normal state, the player inserts the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center role 2500 so that the game ball B can be received in the first starting port 2002. The pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the original game by displaying the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002. Expectations can be raised for acceptance of

  Then, when the game ball B is accepted to the first starting port 2002 and “small hit” or “big hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result, the first big winning port 2005 or the second big winning port 2006 is obtained. Is opened and closed, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to “right-handed” so that the game ball B can be received in the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006, and the first special winning opening is set. It is possible to increase a sense of expectation for accepting the game ball B to the 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006.

  At this time, a guide passage group 2520 including a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided at the upper right corner of the center role 2500, and the gate passage 2003 can be easily passed depending on the guide passage to be circulated. And the second sub-out port 2012 makes it easier to receive the game ball B so that the game ball B circulates in a desired guide path. The driving operation of B can be enjoyed.

  In addition, by performing “right-handed”, by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, there is a possibility that a “normal hit” in which the second starting port 2004 is in the open state may be drawn, and The game ball B can be accepted by the second starting port 2004 and "small hits" or "big hits" can be drawn by lot, so that the sense of expectation for the game can be increased and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. Can be.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 of the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided at the lower part of the front end of the back box 3010 in the form of a flat back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, respectively. The rear guidance unit 3050 provided at the rear end of the rear box 3010, the rear production unit 3100 provided at the rear end of the rear box 3010, and the rear guidance unit 3050 at the lower portion of the rear box 3010 are provided left and right apart from each other. The lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250, and the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 provided behind the back lower left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 in the back box 3010. Have.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 in front of the back rear presentation unit 3100 and in the back box 3010, and is provided in the back of the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. Left back production unit 3500, back right production unit 3600 provided behind back right decoration 3040 in back box 3010, rear left decoration 3030 inside back box 3010 and back left A front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500, and a front right production unit provided between the rear right decoration 3040 and the rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100. Inside the back box 3010, a back front left decorative body 3030 and a back front right decorative body 3040 and various effect units are attached, and an effect display device 1600 and a drive board unit 1700 are attached on the rear side. This back box 3010 is transparently formed of synthetic resin.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c into which the upper fixing piece 1601b of the effect display device 1600 is inserted and recessed upward from the inside of the frame at the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b; And a notch portion 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center of the lower side in the left-right direction, to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 so that the lock mechanism 3020 is slidable left and right on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout portion 3010d in a rear view.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting a decorative body, an effect unit, and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

  The back box 3010 has a strip-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is reinforced by the reinforcing plate 3011.

[5-9b. Back front left decorative body and back front right decorative body]
Subsequently, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 135 and the like. FIG. 135 is a front view of the pachinko machine in which the upper left corner of the game board is enlarged and the door frame is transparent. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 so as to be separated from each other left and right.

  The back front left decorative body 3030 includes a flat base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010, and the left end is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative seal 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The back front left decorative body 3030 is formed opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

  The back front right decorative body 3040 includes a flat base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative seal 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to near the center in the vertical direction, and the right end is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative seal 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The back front right decorative body 3040 is formed opaque, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

  The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended in a flat plate shape in an assembled state on the game board 5 so that an outer peripheral edge located outside is located outside the game area 5a in front view. (See FIGS. 111 and 135). Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are formed in a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge located outside is located outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Has been extended to.

  To be more specific, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, when viewed from the front, the back front left decorative body 3030 is half of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 provided at the upper left corner of the back rear left rendering unit 3500. To the position of. In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in a front view. Furthermore, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3.

  Thus, when assembled on the game board 5, the lower half of the rear left and right elevating drive motor 3554 can be covered by the front left decorative body 3030 (shaded portion in FIG. 135), and the rear left and right sides of the player are viewed from the player side. The lifting drive motor 3554 can be made difficult to see. In the state assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 is located outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 135). The rear left and right elevating drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (invisible) from the player side by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3. Accordingly, the functional components such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible to the player side, and the appearance of the gaming board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. can do.

  The back front left decorative body 3030 extends so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back back left elevating drive motor 3554. When the back front left decorative body 3030 is assembled to the game board 5, the back back left elevating drive motor 3554 Although a part (upper half) can be seen from the front, by assembling the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the rear left up / down driving motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 so as to cover the entire back left lifting drive motor 3554, and it is possible to suppress the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outside the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in front view, the function display unit is provided. In place of 1400, the back front left decorative body 3030 can hide the back rear left vertical drive motor 3554 (functional component) provided at the rear.

  On the other hand, the back front right decorative body 3040 extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 in the back right right rendering unit 3600 in front view. Even through the component member 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the rear right up / down drive motor 3654 is not visible from the front (the player side). Therefore, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved by making the functional components such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 invisible from the player side. Accordingly, the same function and effect as those of the back front left decorative body 3030 can be exerted.

  As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the present embodiment, at least a part of the functional components such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided at the rear are covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional component difficult to be seen from the player side, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the game board 5 (the pachinko machine 1).

  Also, as described above, the front front left side decorative member 3030 and the front front right side decorative body 3040 can cover the front of the functional component provided at the rear, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are made transparent. Also, the functional component can be made invisible to the player. That is, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the transparent front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a so as to give the player a sense of openness, and at the same time provide the player with the actual game area 5a. Although the size of the game area does not change, the game area 5a can be shown large (wide) to the player. At this time, the parts outside the game area 5a in the decorative seal 3032 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative seal 3042 of the back front right decorative body 3040 to which a predetermined decoration is applied are the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100. Can be viewed from the front of the game area, and thereby, the outside of the game area 5a can be decorated, and the game area 5a can be made larger than the actual game area. The board 5 (the pachinko machine 1) can be used.

  In addition, as described above, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, so that the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the back unit. 3000, etc., can be reflected or refracted forward (by the player) by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. The decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

  In addition, a part of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, which extends outside the game area 5a, allows a functional component such as a drive motor or a drive solenoid provided at the rear to be provided from the player side. Since it can be made invisible, all functional components may be provided outside the game area 5a in front view. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, in order to secure a space for providing all the functional components outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced. Since there is a possibility that a problem that must be caused may occur, a part of the functional component is moved out of the game area 5a with a balance that allows the game area 5a to be larger than the size of the game board 5 as in the present embodiment. It is desirable to provide.

  Further, it is desirable that the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 be a decoration related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a in a front view. Thereby, the design in the game area 5a can be extended to outside the game area 5a by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 can make the 5a look larger than it actually is, and can strongly attract the player's interest.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back guiding unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 136 and the like. FIG. 136 (a) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of the back guiding unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. The back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, and has a shape in which both ends extending left and right are bent upward. Almost the entire back guiding unit 3050 is formed transparent.

  The back guiding unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening sensor 3052 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, Out port sensor 3053 for detecting game ball B received in out port 2010, second sub out port sensor 3054 for detecting game ball B received in second sub out port 2012, and warp entrance 2511 of center role 2500 And a magnetic sensor 3055 that is provided at a position behind the sensor and detects illegal magnetism.

  In addition, the back guiding unit 3050 is received at the first delivery port 3061 where the game ball B received at the first startup port 2002 of the startup port unit 2100 is delivered and the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. A second delivery port 3062 for receiving the game ball B, a third delivery port 3063 for receiving the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 in the middle of the side unit 2200, and a general left side of the side unit 2200. The fourth delivery port 3064 to which the game ball B received in the winning opening 2001 is delivered, and the fourth delivery port 3064 to which the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 are delivered. The game ball B received at the fifth delivery port 3065 and the first winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 is delivered. The sixth delivery port 3066, the seventh delivery port 3067 to which the game ball B received at the second big winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 is delivered, and the general winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 And a ninth delivery port 3069 through which the game balls B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 are delivered.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the back guiding unit 3050 guides the game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 rightward and then discharges the game ball B downward, and a second delivery path. The game ball B delivered to the delivery port 3062 and the game ball B delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are merged and then discharged downward, and delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064. A third discharge path for guiding the game ball B downward and discharging diagonally to the lower right, and a position where the game ball B transferred to the eighth delivery port 3068 is below the sixth delivery port 3066. And a fourth discharge path that guides leftward to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066 and then discharges diagonally to the lower left. A fifth delivery port 3065, a sixth delivery port 3066, a seventh delivery port 3067, and a ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge path.

  The game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and transferred to the first delivery port 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first starting port sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path. Is done. The game ball B received at the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and transferred to the second receiving opening 3062, and the game ball received at the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side and transferred to the third receiving opening 3063. The ball B merges in the second discharge path, and is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the fourth delivering opening 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path. .

  The game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and passed to the fifth delivery port 3065, and is received by the first winning port 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B received at the second winning port 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 are the fourth Discharged through the discharge path.

  The game ball B received at the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is located upstream of a portion communicating with the ninth delivery port 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and transferred to the ninth delivery port 3069 is merged with the fourth discharge path after being detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054, and It is discharged through four discharge channels.

  The back guiding unit 3050 includes an out ball detecting member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out ball detection member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a, and is received by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, and the second winning opening 2006. In order to detect the game ball B received from the out port 2010 opened at the lower end of the game area 5a, of the game balls B that did not exist (the game balls B to which the privilege was not given, also referred to as “out balls”). belongs to.

  The out-ball detecting member 3080 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 from the rear, and the game ball B is formed so that the game ball B can flow therethrough and extends in the front-rear direction. A partition portion 3082 that divides the inside into right and left, a flange portion 3083 that protrudes in the shape of a flat plate in the left-right direction from the outer periphery of the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081, and the game ball B that is continuous with the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3081 and is downward. And a rear cover 3084 that can be guided to and discharged (see FIG. 114). The out ball detecting member 3080 has an out port sensor 3053 between the cylindrical portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

  The cylindrical portion 3081 has substantially the same size as the out port 2010, and has a width in the left-right direction that is sufficient for two game balls B (a width not having three game balls B), and a lower inner surface. It is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear side. The partition part 3082 is provided near the rear end of the cylindrical part 3081, and is partitioned on both left and right sides into a size that allows one game ball B to pass therethrough. The partitioning portion 3082 has a front end side curved so as to protrude forward as it goes downward, and protrudes forward shorter than the diameter of the game ball B.

  In the out ball detecting member 3080, two out mouth sensors 3053 are provided side by side. The left outlet sensor 3053 detects the game ball B flowing on the left side of the partition 3082 in the cylindrical portion 3081, and the right outlet sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition 3082 in the cylindrical portion 3081. The game balls B which have been distributed are detected. The outlet sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

  The two out-opening sensors 3053 are provided such that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the lower inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3081. As a result, the distribution direction of the game balls B flowing through the cylindrical portion 3081 does not change even at the portion of the out-mouth sensor 3053, so that the game balls B can be smoothly detected by the out-mouth sensor 3053. Can be quickly discharged to prevent stagnation on the front side of the outlet sensor 3053.

  In this out-ball detecting member 3080, the tubular portion 3081 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100 in a state where the out-ball detecting member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5 (see FIG. 114).

  When the out ball detecting member 3080 is assembled to the game board 5, the upper front end of the cylindrical portion 3081 protrudes forward from the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (see FIG. 114). That is, the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 3081. In addition, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200.

  The out ball detection member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, and is guided rearward by the out guiding portion 1003 to be received in the out port 2010. The game ball B passed through the cylindrical portion 3081 is detected by one of the two out-port sensors 3053, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 to be discharged. The out ball detection member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the main body frame 4 without abutting the game ball B on the substrate holder 1200.

  According to the out-ball detecting member 3080 of the present embodiment, since the two out-port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right are partitioned by the partition portion 3082, the gaming ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 is removed. The game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center role item 2500 can be guided to the right out-port sensor 3053 side while being able to be guided to the left-side out port sensor 3053 side. Therefore, in each of the left and right out-mouth sensors 3053, it is determined whether the player has a tendency to "left strike" or "right strike" based on the number of game balls B detected per time. Based on the discrimination, it is possible to prompt a driving operation that is optimal for the game situation, and entertain the intended game.

  In addition, in the out ball detecting member 3080, since the forward projection of the partition portion 3082 is shortened so that the game balls B can easily get over, when many game balls B enter the out port 2010 per hour, the partition The game ball B can escape to the left or right side of the part 3082 where the circulation amount of the game ball B is relatively small, and the game ball B can be discharged without delay at the out port 2010.

  In addition, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 projects downward from the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second special winning opening 2006, the first sub-out opening 2011, and the second sub-out opening 2012 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 flows backward by the out-ball detecting member 3080 and is detected by the out-opening sensor 3053. It can be prevented from being detected, and only the “out ball” received in the out port 2010 can be accurately detected.

  In the present embodiment, the out-ball detecting member 3080 is provided in the back unit 3000. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The out-ball detecting member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has the out recess 1123, the out ball detecting member 3080 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1123. In addition to this, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, and the second winning opening 2006 are driven into the game area 5a. Since the game ball B (“out ball”) that was not accepted by any of them can be detected by the out mouth sensor 3053, the first sub out mouth sensor 2403, and the second sub out mouth sensor 3054, for example, a specific winning If the "out ball" is not detected even though the acceptance of the game ball B into the mouth is continuously detected, it means that a specific winning port has been misconducted, It is possible to notify that the wrongdoing is being performed.

  In addition, since the number can be counted by detecting the "out ball", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first winning opening 2005, and the second winning opening 2005. The number of “winning balls” and the number of “out balls” counted by the detection of the game balls B received in 2006, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large The “payout rate” of the pachinko machine 1 can be known from the number of “safe balls” paid out by receiving the game balls B into the winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. Although not shown, a display unit for displaying the “outtake rate” is provided on the rear side of the game board 5.

  In the game board 5, all the game balls B ("all") hit into the game area 5a are detected, or all the game balls B ("all") discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ), Only the “out ball” is detected by the out mouth sensor 3053, the first sub out mouth sensor 2403, and the second sub out mouth sensor 3054. By comparing the numbers of "" and "all", it is possible to detect the occurrence of clogging of balls in the game board 5.

[5-9d. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 141 and the like. FIG. 137 (a) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 137 (b) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back effect unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable configuration of the back rear production unit from the front. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the back effect unit.

  The rear production unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost position (the front surface of the rear wall) in the rear box 3010. The back rear production unit 3100 has a U-shape that is open downward when viewed from the front, and is formed to be approximately the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back-side effect unit 3100 includes a back-side movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction, and a back-side movable mechanism 3120 for moving the back-side movable decorative body 3110 in the vertical direction.

  The back-side movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction and has a transparent flat decorative body 3111 provided with a relief-shaped decoration on the front side, and a plurality of first decorative bodies 311 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 on the front side. It includes a back decoration board 3114 on which the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decoration base 3115 attached to the decoration 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back decoration board 3114. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the back decoration board 3114 are full-color LEDs each of which is a surface-mounted type and capable of emitting multiple colors. With the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b of the back decoration board 3114, the decoration 3111 (the back movable decoration 3110) can be illuminated.

  In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a left slider 3116 extending vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111, and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 includes a movable projection 3116a projecting leftward from the vicinity of the lower end, a locking projection 3116b projecting triangularly leftward from the vicinity of the upper end, and a detection piece 3116c provided at the upper end. Have.

  The back rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U-shape that is open downward when viewed from the front, and has a unit base 3121 mounted in the back box 3010, and extends vertically in a cylindrical shape on the left side of the unit base 3121. And a slide shaft 3122 that supports the left slider 3116 of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and extends vertically up and down in parallel with the slide shaft 3122 on the left side of the slide shaft 3122. And a spiral shaft 3123 in which a groove is formed.

  The rear-rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a transmission gear 3124 in the form of a spur gear attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a motor gear 3125 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and a motor gear 3125 having a rotating shaft. The back rear drive motor 3126 mounted, the motor base 3127 mounting the back rear drive motor 3126 to the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 rotatably mounted to the unit base 3121. It includes a bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123.

  Further, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 is screwed to the spiral shaft 3123, and is a slide guide 3130 that can abut from below on the movable projection 3116a of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and a left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 extending vertically and capable of ascending and descending, and a lower end side of which can contact the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 for urging the transmission slider 3131 upward, and a transmission slider 3131. A link member 3133 that rotates around the axis in the front-rear direction by elevating and lowering, a lock member 3134 that slides in the left-right direction by the rotation of the link member 3133 and can contact the locking projection 3116b of the rear movable decorative body 3110, It has.

  Further, the back rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, a back rear lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, and A front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and a right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the back and back movable decorative body 3110 from the front. The rear right drive motor 3126, the rear rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rear lower lower detection sensor 3136, which are mounted on the lower front of the front right cover 3138 and the front left cover 3137, are connected to the effect driving board 1720. Between the back rear left relay board 3139 that relays the A back right rear relay board 3140 relaying the connection is assigned a back after decoration board 3114 of the back after the movable decorative body 3110 and effect driving substrate 1720, and a.

  The unit base 3121 has a shock absorbing member 3121a that abuts on the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 that has moved downward to absorb a shock. The upper end and the lower end of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

  The slide guide 3130 protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the lower end, and has a detection piece 3130a that is detected by the back lower detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided so as to be vertically slidable between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and is incapable of rotating around the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by being in contact with them. The lower surface of the movable projection 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can contact the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130. The slide guide 3130 is configured such that an upper end surface of a lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can contact the lower surface of the slide guide 3130.

  The transmission slider 3131 is mounted to be vertically movable between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 can be moved up and down only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protruding portion 3131a protruding rightward on the lower end side, an upper protruding portion 3131b protruding rightward on the upper end side, and a columnar shape protruding rearward from near the upper end of the upper protruding portion 3131b. Projection pin 3131c. In the transmission slider 3131, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 can contact the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131a. In the transmission slider 3131, the projection pin 3131c is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133.

  The spring 3132 has an upper end attached to the unit base 3121 and a lower end attached to the upper projection 3131b of the transmission slider 3131 to urge the transmission slider 3131 upward.

  The link member 3133 has a triangular shape with a vertex chamfered at each vertex when viewed from the front. The link member 3133 is attached to the unit base 3121 near one vertex so as to be rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction. The link member 3133 has a slot-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left apex from the rotation axis, and a slot-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the top apex from the rotation axis. A second slit 3133b. In the link member 3133, the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The lock member 3134 is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137 by the front left cover 3137 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction.
The lock member 3134 protrudes rearward in a columnar shape, forms a transmission pin 3134a that is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and forms a flat upper end surface and moves in the left-right direction. A contact surface 3134b that extends and can contact the lower surface of the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear movable movable body 3110, and is inclined to move leftward from the right end of the contact surface 3134b downward; A guide surface 3134c with which the locking projection 3116b can abut.

  The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to support the right slider 3117 of the back and back movable decorative body 3110 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

  Next, the operation of the back effect unit 3100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 140 (FIG. 141 (a)), the back rear production unit 3100 is in a retracted position in which the back movable ornament 3110 is moved upward in a normal state, and the slide guide 3130. Are located near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 moves rightward to be at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the rear movable movable body 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is in contact with the rear movable movable body. The lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of 3110 is in contact.

  In a normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 3132. Since the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, the spring The biasing force of 3132 is acting in the clockwise direction about the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and is biased in the direction in which the lock member 3134 slides rightward. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained at the lock position by the urging force of the spring 3132.

  In this state, the downward movement of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is restricted by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if one of the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134 moves from the position for some reason (inconvenience), it is possible to prevent the remaining movable decoration 3110 from moving downward (falling) due to the rest. it can.

  In a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is located above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b into which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. Also, the back-back upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the back-movable decorative body 3110, and the back-back lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

  In the normal state of the evacuation position, the back rear production unit 3100 is located behind the back upper production unit 3400, and is invisible from the front (player side).

  In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, the counterclockwise direction in plan view) by the back rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 moves downward. Move to. Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, since the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear movable movable body 3110 is in contact with the lock member 3134, the rear movable decorative body 3110 cannot move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward away from the movable projection 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110.

  Then, the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123, and when the detection piece 3130 a is detected by the back rear detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 is moved downward by the lower protrusion 3131 a of the transmission slider 3131. It contacts the upper end surface (see FIG. 141 (b)). When the slide guide 3130 further moves downward in a state in which the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward. The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the urging force of the spring 3132.

  When the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 into which the projection pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 is rotated counterclockwise about its rotation axis. It turns in the surrounding direction. Then, by rotating the link member 3133 in the counterclockwise direction, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and via the transmission pin 3134a inserted in the second slit 3133b. The lock member 3134 moves to the left (see FIG. 141 (c)).

  When the lock member 3134 moves to the left from the locking projection 3116b of the back movable movable body 3110, the lock (restriction downward) by the lock member 3134 is released, and the back movable movable body 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130 a of the slide guide 3130 that is moving downward is in a non-detection state with respect to the rear lower detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the rear rear drive motor 3126 stops.

  Then, the dropped movable decorative body 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, and stops falling to be in the appearance position (see FIG. 141 (c)). In this appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is positioned below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the rear movable ornament 3110, and the rear movable ornament 3110 does not abut.

  In the back rear production unit 3100, in a state where the back movable ornamental body 3110 has dropped, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is visible from the front (from the player side). In this state, the back movable decoration 3110 (decoration 3111) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back decoration board 3114. The luminous decoration can entertain the player.

  When the back movable ornament 3110 is to be returned from the position where the lower moving end appears to the retracted position in the normal state, the spiral shaft 3123 is moved in the reverse direction (here, clockwise in plan view) by the back drive motor 3126. Direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 by the urging force of the spring 3132. When the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, contrary to the above, the link member 3133 rotates clockwise, and the lock member 3134 moves rightward and stops at the lock position. Become.

  In addition, as the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable protrusion 3116a upward. By pressing, the back movable ornamental body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 141 (d)).

  Then, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward to the vicinity of the retracted position by the slide guide 3130, the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 from below. When the locking projection 3116b abuts against the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking projection 3116b presses the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c causes the locking member 3134 to move the lock member 3134 to the left. Accordingly, the lock member 3134 slides rightward against the urging force of the spring 3132 which is to be moved rightward via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

  When the locking protrusion 3116b is positioned above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 by the upward movement of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the guide surface 3134c is not pressed upward by the lock protrusion 3116b. The lock member 3134 is slid rightward by the urging force of the spring 3132 to be in the lock position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is positioned below the locking projection 3116b of the back movable movable body 3110, and the lock member 3134 moves the rear movable movable body 3110 downward. Can be regulated.

  At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is detected by the back rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the back rear drive motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the back movable ornament 3110 can return from the appearance position to the retracted position, which is the normal state.

  According to the back side rendering unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back movable decoration body 3110 extending to the left and right is dropped from the state of the evacuation position invisible from the player side to the state of the appearance position in which it is visible. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted.

  Further, since the lock member 3134 that locks (restricts) the rear movable movable body 3110 in the retracted position is moved to the left to release the lock, the lock member 3134 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In comparison with the case where the lock is released by moving the lock, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when the lock is released.

[5-9d-1. Movable decorative body behind back]
Next, the back movable ornament 3110 in the back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 156. FIG. 142 is a front view showing the back-side movable decorative body together with the back-side decorative substrate. FIG. 143 (a) is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 142, and FIG. 143 (b) is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 142. FIG. 144 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear movable decorative body as viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear movable decorative body as viewed from the rear. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the rear movable ornamental body disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the rear rear movable ornament body disassembled and viewed from the rear. 147 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the back movable movable body, and FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram showing the light guide radiation plate and the back decorative board in broken lines in the front view of FIG. FIG. 149 (a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-side movable decorative body, and FIG. 149 (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body in FIG. (C) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration board at the same part as the decoration body of (a).

  FIG. 150 is an enlarged sectional view showing the upper part of FIG. 143 (a) in an enlarged manner. FIG. 151 is an exploded view showing the cross-sectional view of FIG. 150 in an exploded manner. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a relationship between the decoration by the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the light guide radiation plate, and the rear decorative board by enlarging a part of the front surface of the rear movable decorative body. FIG. 153 (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the relationship between the light guide radiation plate and the back decoration board at the position of the first LED, and FIG. 153 (b) shows the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the light-guide radiating plate in the part which is doing from the front, (c) is the LED housing part of the light-guide radiating plate with respect to the 2nd decoration part in a decoration body and a decoration sheet, and the 1st of the back decoration board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of arrangement | positioning of one LED from the front. FIG. 154 is a front view showing a part of the back decoration board with a copper foil of a circuit pattern enlarged. FIG. 155 (a) is a front view of the back decoration board, and FIG. 155 (b) is a rear view of the back decoration board. FIG. 156 (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back movable decorative body, and FIG. 156 (b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative part in a form different from that of FIG. It is an expanded sectional view, and (c) is an expanded sectional view showing a part of ornaments which have a metal ornament part of a form different from (a) and (b).

  As shown in FIG. 142 and the like, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 made of a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 is, when viewed from the front, in a horizontal direction between two first decorative portions 3151 provided near the left and right ends, respectively, and between the two first decorative portions 3151. And a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row. The first decorative portion 3151 imitates a single cherry blossom. Although not shown, each of the second decorative portions 3152 imitates predetermined characters, and is arranged side by side on the left and right, so that the concept of the present pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 5) is used. A predetermined logo is formed along the machine 1 (game board 5 world view). As described above, the back movable movable body 3110 is decorated with a logo between two cherry blossoms.

  As shown in FIG. 142 to FIG. 146 and the like, the back movable decoration body 3110 in the back back effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decoration part 3150 by embossed (relief-shaped) irregularities. And a translucent portion (area) provided with a decoration (picture) provided behind the decoration 3111 and having a decoration (picture) forming the rest of the decoration portion 3150. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112 having a transparent portion (region), a transparent flat light guide radiating plate 3113 provided behind the decorative sheet 3112, and provided behind the light guide radiating plate 3113. A back decoration board 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs are mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”), and a back side of the back decoration board 3114. Overturn And a left slider 3116 extending vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111, and a right slider extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111. 3117.

  In addition, the component numbers of the front-side electronic components such as the plurality of first LEDs and the second LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back-side decorative substrate 3114, and the front surface such as a region indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are arranged The attributes of the side electronic component (which may further include the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component). The front-side notation is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back decoration board 3114 with a predetermined paint color by silk-screen printing, and a transparent part (111) is provided behind the transparent flat decorative body 3111 ( Area) and a sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112 having a transparent portion (area), a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113, and a back decoration board 3114 are arranged in this order. Sites with properties Area), the color of a predetermined paint printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the back decoration board 3114 is transmitted through the light guide radiation plate 3113, the sheet-shaped decoration sheet 3112, and the decoration 3111. In the state where the color of the predetermined paint is visible in a region corresponding to a portion (region) having a light-transmitting property in a state where the first LED and the second LED are turned off, Is enough to confirm the presence of the color of the predetermined paint, while it is not possible to determine whether the color of the predetermined paint indicates a character or a symbol or a shape, If the color of the predetermined paint is visible in a region corresponding to the transparent portion (region), the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) are determined by the predetermined paint color. ) Door can be.

[5-9d-2. Decorative body of movable decorative body behind the back]
The decorative body 3111 has flat front and rear general surfaces. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward from the front general surface, a second decorative protrusion 3111b shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and protruding forward, and a second decorative protrusion. And a third decorative protrusion 3111c which is shorter than the portion 3111b and protrudes forward. The first decorative projection 3111a is provided at a portion that becomes the contour of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152. The first decoration protrusion 3111a in the part of the first decoration part 3151 is formed on the outer periphery of the petal of the first decoration part 3151 imitating cherry blossoms, and on the part imitating the central stamen and pistil, respectively. . The first decorative projections 3111a in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 are formed so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the second decorative portions 3152 in a double (two) manner. The first decorative projection 3111a is curved so that the front surface swells forward.

  The second decorative projection 3111b is provided outside the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom or a petal smaller than the first decorative portion 3151. The second decorative projection 3111b is curved so that the front surface swells forward.

  The third decorative projection 3111c is provided in the frame of the first decorative projection 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 is curved. Further, the front surface of the third decorative projection 3111c corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 is flat.

  The first decorative projection 3111a and the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111 constitute a part of each of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152 of the decorative part 3150.

  In addition, the decorative body 3111 has a metallic luster in a portion (first foil stamping area (see FIG. 156 (a))) of the first decorative protrusion 3111a that projects forward from the second decorative protrusion 3111b. It has a metal decorative portion 3111d (shaded portion in FIGS. 147 to 149). The entire decoration body 3111 except for the metal decoration part 3111d is formed to be colorless and transparent. As shown in FIG. 150 and FIG. 156 (a), the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment is provided at a curved front part of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and is provided with the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is not provided on the side portion. Thereby, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration 3111 to the back decoration substrate 3114 is made longer as compared with the case where the metal decoration portion 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a. Thus, the insulation against static electricity discharge or short circuit can be improved.

  Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, it is possible to impart a sense of quality by the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d. At the same time, the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative projection 3111a can be further enhanced by the curvature of the metal decorative portion 3111d. As shown in FIG. 148 and the like, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided at a position in front of the first LED 3114a of the back decoration substrate 3114 in the second decoration portion 3152, and the first LED 3114a and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided. Is difficult to see from the front.

  In addition, since the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, light from the first LED 3114a or the like of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is transmitted by the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. The light can be reflected backward to illuminate the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear, and the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be more easily seen.

  The metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by hot stamping. More specifically, first, an intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is formed by injection molding of a synthetic resin. The intermediate product of the formed decorative body 3111 is mounted at a predetermined position of the hot stamping device with the front side from which the first decorative protrusions 3111a and the like project upward facing upward. At this time, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat hot plate whose lower surface side is elastic and heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged above the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111. . Then, the hot plate is lowered to a position at a predetermined distance below the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b) in the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111, and The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil pressed) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. Thus, the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed at the portion of the first foil stamping region FS1 above (in front of) the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111 (see FIG. 156 (a)). .

  In the hot plate of the hot stamping device used for forming the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment, since the portion that comes into contact with the decorative body 3111 to which the metal foil of the transfer sheet is to be transferred has elasticity, the transfer destination ( Even if the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is not flat but curved, the metal foil can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal foil can be satisfactorily applied to a three-dimensional portion such as a curved surface. Transfer (foil stamping). Thereby, compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition, it is possible to easily form the metal decorative portion 3111d without requiring large-scale equipment, and to suppress an increase in cost.

  In the above-described embodiment, the decorative body 3111 has the metal decorative portion 3111d provided only at the tip end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the metal decoration part 3111d is formed by the hot stamping device, the hot plate is lowered to a position lower than the second decoration protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decoration protrusion 3111c, thereby forming the first decoration protrusion. The decorative body 3111 can be formed by providing a metal decorative portion 3111d at the tip of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b.

  Alternatively, in a state where the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111 is mounted on a hot stamping device, first, a hot plate is formed using a transfer sheet having a metal foil of a predetermined color (first metal foil). It is lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c (second foil stamping area FS2), and the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the first decorative protrusion 3111b are moved to the first end. Transfer the metal foil. Subsequently, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) of a different color from the first metal foil, the hot plate is set lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b. It is lowered to the position (first foil stamping area FS1), and the second metal foil is transferred to the tip of the first decorative projection 3111a (see FIG. 156 (b)). Thereby, the decorative body 3111 including the metal decorative portions 3111d of different colors is formed between the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b without performing the masking process on the intermediate product of the decorative body 3111. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the metal decoration 3111d of the decoration 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil stamping). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after a metal film is formed by plating or vapor deposition on the surface of the intermediate product before completion of the decorative body 3111, the metal film at the portion excluding the first decorative protrusion 3111a is peeled (laser peeled) by laser light. Alternatively, the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d on the first decorative protrusion 3111a may be formed. At this time, as shown in FIG. 156 (c), the metal decorative portion 3111d may be provided not only at the tip of the first decorative protrusion 3111a but also at the side portion.

  The decorative body 3111 of the back movable decorative body 3110 has a rear recess 3111e that is recessed forward from the rear general surface. The rear recess 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. The concave portion 3111e thereafter equalizes the thickness of the decorative body 3111, so that deformation due to sink of the resin at the time of injection molding can be suppressed.

  The rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided in a flat rear surface corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c so as to be recessed forward. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear concave portion 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of the later-described first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112. As a result, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 come into close contact with each other, so that light is not irregularly reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. The picture or the like of the first contour portion 3112a of the decoration sheet 3112 can be clearly recognized through the transparent decoration body 3111.

  In addition, since the rear concave portion 3111e is provided at a portion corresponding to the third decorative projection 3111c, the rear concave portion 3111e is located in front of the later-described first light diffusing portion 3112c and second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112. It is provided in the part. As a result, a gap is formed between the rear recess 3111e and the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112, so that the light emitted from the front to the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 from the front is formed by the gap. The light is irregularly reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear concave portion 3111e, and the portion of the rear concave portion 3111e is brightened by light from the front. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration board 3114 are not emitting light, the portions of the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d in the decoration sheet 3112 by light from the front, that is, The first decorative part 3151 imitating cherry blossoms and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 forming the logo are brightened and are easily visible from the front.

  Further, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f that protrude rearward from the rear surface in a cylindrical shape. The mounting boss 3111f is for mounting the decorative body base 3115 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111. The mounting boss 3111f is provided at a position immediately behind the third decorative projection 3111c. This makes it difficult for the mounting boss 3111f to be seen from the front (from the player side) due to the lens action of the third decorative projection 3111c. In other words, the third decorative projection 3111c is provided at a position in front of the mounting boss 3111f, and the lens effect of the third decorative projection 3111c makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Decorative sheet of movable decorative body behind back]
The decorative sheet 3112 has a thin sheet shape and is formed to have the same outer shape as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 is obtained by applying a pattern to the rear surface of a transparent resin sheet. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152, at a portion excluding the rear of the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111, and at a central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. A first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b provided in a portion corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 and between the doubly formed first decorative protrusions 3111a of the decorative body 3111, A first light diffusing portion 3112c provided at a portion corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 and located inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c); The second decoration portion 3152 is provided in a portion inside the first decoration protrusion 3111a provided in the double of the decoration body 3111 corresponding to the second decoration portion 3152 (the portion behind the third decoration protrusion 3111c). It has a diffusion section 3112D, a.

  Further, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transmitting portion 3112e provided at a position behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c in the decorative body 3111. Have.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (b) and the like, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a portion of a pattern imitating a cherry blossom smaller than the first decorative portion 3151, and the remaining portions are The hologram is a portion where interference fringes of light are displayed. The first contour portion 3112a is formed opaque. In the present embodiment, the hologram portion in the first contour portion 3112a is the same gold as the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration 3111. The portion of the first contour portion 3112a that resembles a cherry blossom is white or pink (pink in this embodiment is the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). It is colored according to the view.)). Note that an ink (paint) used for a picture or the like may have a glitter that glitters in particles.

  This first contour portion 3112a is located rearward outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the rear movable movable body 3110 is viewed from the front, and is formed of metal. Since it has a portion of the same color (gold in this embodiment) as the decorative portion 3111d, continuity with respect to the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be provided. Therefore, the perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decoration portion 3111d can be emphasized, and the thinness of the rear movable decoration 3110 can be hardly felt.

  The first contour portion 3112a has a rear surface side formed in light gray or white. Thereby, the coloring of the picture and the hologram on the front side is improved. In addition, the light emitted from the light guide radiation plate 3113 forward can be reflected backward and returned to the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a. Since the plate 3113 can emit light more brightly, the amount of light radiated forward from the translucent portion of the decoration sheet 3112 can be increased, and the back-side movable decorative body 3110 can be light-emittingly decorated. In addition to this, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be more uniformly illuminated.

  Furthermore, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111, the first contour part 3112a is flat except for the rear concave part 3111e on the rear surface of the decorative body 3111. It is provided behind the part. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into contact with and adheres to the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a, so that light is transmitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. There is no irregular reflection, and the picture and the hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111.

  As shown, the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed in a black line shape having a predetermined width. The second contour portion 3112b is located behind a portion of the second decorative portion 3152 between the double decorative first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111. That is, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the gold metal decoration portions 3111d formed in double, the black color of the second contour portion 3112b enhances the double metal decoration portion 3111d. The decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be further enhanced.

  The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 has a light-transmitting property and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the first light diffusing portion 3112c is formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of ridges that extend linearly in a random direction. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 149 (b) and the like, in the petal of one of the cherry blossoms simulated by the first decoration portion 3151, from the center of the petal to the periphery, as shown in FIG. A predetermined color (the present embodiment) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) so that the shading becomes darker (transparency becomes lower) as it goes. (Pink) are printed by printing. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 for emitting light from behind to the first light diffusing unit 3112c emits light, the first light diffusing unit 3112c has a pear-skinned pattern. The light and shade of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms can be given a three-dimensional effect.

  The second light diffusion portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 has a light transmitting property and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. The second light diffusing portion 3112d is provided on the entire inside of the first decorative projection 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative portions 3152, as shown by light and shaded shading in FIGS. 147 to 149. Have been. The second light diffusion portion 3112d has a light-transmitting property and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusion portion 3112d are formed in a halftone dot pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusion unit 3112d of the present embodiment is formed in a translucent milky white. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 for emitting light from behind to the second light diffusing unit 3112d emits light, the predetermined pattern is formed by the halftone dot pattern of the second light diffusing unit 3112d. The second decorative portion 3152 composed of the characters of the characters can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

  The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind a portion of the decorative body 3111 inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111 Is provided with a concave portion 3111e that is recessed forward. Accordingly, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed on the front surface of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d due to the presence of the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111. It will be in the state that was done. Due to the gap, light applied to the rear concave portion 3111e of the decorative body 3111 from the front is irregularly reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear concave portion 3111e. The diffusion unit 3112c and the second light diffusion unit 3112d become bright. Thereby, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration board 3114 are not emitting light, the portions of the first light diffusion portion 3112c and the second light diffusion portion 3112d in the decoration sheet 3112 by light from the front, that is, The first decorative part 3151 imitating cherry blossoms and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 forming the logo are brightened and are easily visible from the front.

  The decorative sheet 3112 has a predetermined pattern formed by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d. The remaining part of the part 3150 except for the decoration by the decorative body 3111 is configured. In the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment, a first contour portion 3112a, a second contour portion 3112b, a first light diffusion portion 3112c, and a second light diffusion portion 3112d are provided on a rear surface side of a transparent sheet serving as a base. I have. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. Further, the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by sticking a predetermined light diffusing film (diffuser film). Note that the first light diffusing unit 3112c and the second light diffusing unit 3112d may be a lens film or a prism film.

  The transmitting portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparent. Since the transmitting portion 3112 e is provided behind the first decorative projection 3111 a (metal decorative portion 3111 d) of the decorative body 3111, the light-emitting plate 3113 emits light from the first LED 3114 a of the rear decorative substrate 3114. A part of the light emitted forward can be transmitted to irradiate the first decorative projection 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front side, and the side surface side remains transparent. Therefore, the first decorative protrusion 3111a from behind through the transparent portion 3112e. Is emitted from the side surface of the first decorative projection 3111a to the outside. For this reason, the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 3112e allows the player to see a light-emitting decoration in which the first decoration protrusion 3111a (metal decoration portion 3111d) is illuminated by back light. In addition, the first contour portion 3112a located outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be illuminated from the front by light emitted through the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a through the transmission portion 3112e. Therefore, the picture and the hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily seen, and the decoration effect by the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exerted.

  Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed to be approximately the same size as the decorative body 3111, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated by the first contour portion 3112a having a picture or a hologram. The decoration of the movable decorative body 3110 behind can be made to look large. Also, since the decoration sheet 3112 is approximately the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back movable movable body 3110 is not bordered. Therefore, the back movable movable body 3110 is moved to the appearance position. In this case, the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear displays an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back movable movable body 3110, so that the player can see the effect with a sense of unity, In addition to giving a visual impact to the player, attention can be given, a large decoration can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Note that, in the decorative sheet 3112 of the above embodiment, a transparent sheet 3112e is provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) of the decorative body 3111, but the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, you may make it provide the 1st outline part 3112a also in the site | part behind the metal decoration part 3111d. Thereby, when the back movable ornamental body 3110 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transmissive portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112. In addition, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be prevented from being deteriorated. In addition, by providing the first contour portion 3112a to a portion behind the metal decorative portion 3111d, the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the first contour portion 3112a passes through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a can be seen, the side of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated by the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can be decorated by the first decorative protrusion 3111d. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiation plate of movable decorative body behind back]
As shown in FIG. 145 and FIG. 146, the light guide radiation plate 3113 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body 3113a, a flange portion 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 3113a, and a main body. A plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c, which penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and into which the first LEDs 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 are inserted, and the back decoration board 3114 which penetrates the main body portion 3113a in the front-rear direction. A plurality of second LED housings 3113d into which the second LEDs 3114b are inserted, a plurality of reflectors 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body 3113a, and a first LED housing section on the rear surface of the main body 3113a. The leg 3113f projecting rearward from the periphery of the 3113c is opposite to the first LED housing 3113c in the leg 3113f. And a, an auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g that is provided along the rear edge of the side.

  The light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the right end of the main body portion 3113a in a front view.

  The main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flat front surface with which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 contacts. The flange portion 3113b protrudes rearward about 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3113b has a rear end protruding rearward from the back decoration board 3114 in a state where the flange portion 3113b is assembled to the back back movable decorative body 3110.

  The inner peripheral shape of the first LED housing portion 3113c is formed in a rectangular shape. As shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind the low-transparency portion of the decorative portion 3150 when the rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the portion of the first decoration portion 3151, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided behind the portion of the decoration sheet 3112 in which the first light diffusing portion 3112c is darkened in shades of pink by dots. ing. More specifically, the first LED housing portion 3113c provided at the portion of the first decoration portion 3151 is closer to the center than the first decoration protrusion 3111a of the decoration 3111 in each of the five petals simulating cherry blossoms. The inner periphery is provided such that the center of the long side of the rectangle is located on the center line of the petal.

  On the other hand, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c provided in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 are provided so as to be located behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. Have been. For this reason, the plurality of first LED housings 3113c (first LEDs 3114a) are difficult to visually recognize from the front.

  In addition, the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided at the portion of the second decoration portion 3152 so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decoration portion 3152. When the plurality of first LED housing sections 3113c are close to each other to some extent, as shown in FIG. 149 (c) and FIG. 153 (c), the respective first LED housing sections 3113c are connected to each other. It is formed in the state where it was set. By connecting the approaching first LED housing portions 3113c to each other, it is possible to prevent a portion smaller than the thickness in the main body portion 3113a from being formed, and to damage the light guide radiation plate 3113. It can be difficult.

  Incidentally, the first LED housing portion 3113c has a rectangular inner periphery and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when the light guided inside the main body 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (the front surface or the rear surface) of the main body 3113a reaches the first LED housing portion 3113c, the light is transmitted. A part is directly reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a, and the remainder passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. It will be radiated inside 3113c. Then, when the light radiated inside from one of the four inner peripheral surfaces of the first LED housing portion 3113c reaches another surface of the inner peripheral surface, a part of the light is emitted from the first LED housing portion 3113c. The light is reflected inward, and the rest enters inside the main body 3113a. That is, inside the main body 3113a, light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a radiates to the inside of the first LED housing 3113c when trying to pass through the first LED housing 3113c. Since a part of the light is reflected on the inner peripheral surface portion and on the inner peripheral surface portion of the first LED housing portion 3113c incident on the main body portion 3113a side, the light passing through the first LED housing portion 3113c is reflected. Is significantly reduced as compared to before passing.

  For this reason, the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a inside the main body 3113a can be blocked by the first LED housing section 3113c. In addition, since the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 is housed inside the first LED housing 3113c, light going through the first LED housing 3113c may be blocked by the first LED 3114a. In the portion where the first LED 3114a is housed, light is prevented from passing through to the opposite side of the first LED housing 3113c. Accordingly, by providing the first LED housing portion 3113c at an optimum position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decoration portion 3152, light from the first LED 3114a housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c is It is possible to prevent the light from being guided to another second decorative portion 3152 to perform light-emitting decoration, and it is possible to reliably light-emitting and decorate only a desired second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of second decorative portions 3152. .

  The operation of the first LED housing portion 3113c as described above will be described in further detail. For example, as shown in FIG. 153 (c), a plurality of second decoration portions 3152 of "I", "RO", "HA", and "☆" In order to make the light emitting decoration, a first LED housing portion 3113c is provided on the outer periphery of each second decoration portion 3152, and light is radiated toward the inside of the second decoration portion 3152 in each first LED housing portion 3113c. The first LED 3114a is provided to be operated. In this embodiment, since the first LED housing portions 3113c provided between “i” and “ro” and between “ro” and “ha” are close to each other, they are connected to each other. One hole. Thus, a thin portion that is easily damaged is not formed in the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Further, in this embodiment, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for illuminating and decorating “☆” arranged below “I” are provided below “☆”. For this reason, when the first LED 3114a for emitting light decoration of “☆” emits light, there is a possibility that “i” provided above “☆” may be light-emitting decorated, but it is provided at the upper left of “☆”. An extension 3113j extending to cover the upper part of "☆" is provided in the first LED housing part 3113c in which the first LED 3114a for making a part of "i" emit light decoration is provided. ing. The extension portion 3113j can reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for decorating “☆” by emitting light to the “i” side. Thus, even if “☆” is illuminated, “i” is not illuminated. In addition, the extension portion 3113j can reduce (block) the light for causing the “i” to emit and decorate the light to the “☆” side. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as “I” or “☆” can be reliably lighted and decorated, and the desired effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the second LED housing section 3113d has a circular inner periphery. The plurality of second LED housing portions 3113d are provided behind five circular portions imitating stamens provided around the center in the first decoration portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms. More specifically, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided behind each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms, which is located on the center line of the petal and is a circular part imitating a stamen. Accordingly, in each of the five petals, one first LED housing portion 3113c and one second LED housing portion 3113d are provided on the center line of the petals.

  The second LED housing portion 3113d has a circular inner periphery and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. Accordingly, when the light guided inside the main body 3113a (within the plate thickness) in the direction along the surface (the front surface or the rear surface) of the main body 3113a reaches the second LED housing portion 3113d, the light is transmitted. A part is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing portion 3113d so as to be diffused in a fan shape toward the inside of the main body portion 3113a. In the present embodiment, in each of the five petals of the first decorative portion 3151 imitating cherry blossoms, the second LED housing portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a. As shown in the figure, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body 3113a is fan-like reflected toward the first LED 3114a by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing 3113d. The light can make the petals luminous decoration brighter.

  One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed in a quadrangular pyramid, and is arranged in a row so as to be continuous vertically and horizontally. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e exclude the portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the portion around the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, and the portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. Within the thickness of the main body 3113a, the plurality of reflectors 3113e can mainly reflect light emitted in a direction along the plate surface forward and radiate the light forward from the front surface of the main body 3113a. The light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is formed such that the rear is difficult to visually recognize when viewed from the front due to the presence of the plurality of reflection portions 3113e.

  Further, since the plurality of reflectors 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface. Even if the design of the decorative part 3150 by the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed by the change or the like, it is not necessary to change the light guide radiation plate 3113, and it is possible to easily cope with the design change and the cost. Increase can be suppressed.

  The leg portion 3113f protrudes rearward from the rear end side of a portion facing the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to be inserted on the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the surface of the leg portion 3113f on the first LED housing portion 3113c side is provided on the same surface as the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. Thereby, the area of the light receiving portion 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body 3113a can be increased, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be applied to the inside of the main body 3113a. Can be. When the leg portion 3113f is assembled to the back movable movable body 3110, the rear surface abuts on the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114, and a gap is provided between the rear surface of the main body 3113a and the front surface of the back decorative substrate 3114. Can be formed.

  The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is provided in a C-chamfered shape along a side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c at the rear end of the leg portion 3113f. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g reflects the light emitted from the first LED 3114a to the leg 3113f forward.

  The right slider front portion 3113h is for configuring a right slider 3117 in cooperation with a right slider rear portion 3115d described later of the decorative body base 3115.

  Since the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment covers the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 by the flange portion 3113b when assembled to the back movable decoration body 3110, the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 by the flange portion 3113b. The surface can be made difficult to see, and the appearance can be prevented from becoming poor. Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the flange portion 3113b protruding rearward from the back decoration board 3114, the light decoration plate 3111d is provided with a metal decoration portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decoration 3111. The creepage distance EL to 3114 (copper foil 3114d or electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back decoration board 3114, and the back decoration board 3114 is damaged. Can be prevented.

  In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, since the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are holes penetrating the main body portion 3113a, the first LED housing portion 3113c housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c. The heat from the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed in the second LED housing portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body 3113a, and the heat influence on the back decoration board 3114 can be reduced.

  Further, since the first LED housing section 3113c and the second LED housing section 3113d are formed as through holes, the front sides of the first LED housing section 3113c and the second LED housing section 3113d are closed by the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111, and the like. Even if it is formed, the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion are compared with the case where the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d are formed in a concave shape (groove shape) having no bottom. The volume (heat capacity) of 3113d can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to alleviate a rapid temperature rise due to heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed therein, and to suppress a thermal influence on the back decoration board 3114 and the like. In addition, in the first LED housing portion 3113c which is close to and connected to each other, and in the first LED housing portion 3113c having the extension portion 3113j, the volume of the first LED housing portion 3113c is large. For the same reason as described above, it is possible to dissipate more heat from the first LED 3114a or to alleviate a sudden rise in temperature.

  Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED housing 3113c and a second LED housing 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 are inserted from behind. Since the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted into the first LED housing 3113c and the second LED housing 3113d, the rear surface of the main body 3113a is as close as possible to the front surface of the back decoration board 3114. The thickness of the back movable movable body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced.

  Furthermore, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the leg 3113f projecting rearward from the rear surface of the main body 3113a, the rear end of the leg 3113f can be brought into contact with the front surface of the back rear decorative board 3114. A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body 3113a and the front surface of the back decoration board 3114. Thereby, heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 can be released through the gap, and a temperature rise in the back decoration board 3114 can be suppressed, thereby affecting the heat. Can be reduced. In addition, the gap between the main body 3113a and the substrate main body 3114c of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is set to “half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting unit of the first LED 3114a” to “the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the first. Distance to the front surface of one LED 3114a. " If the gap is smaller than this, the heat may not be able to be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body 3113a and the back decoration substrate 3114. If the gap is larger than this, the amount of light from the first LED 3114a incident on the main body 3113a of the light guide radiating plate 3113 decreases, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a possibility that decoration cannot be performed.

  In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 guides light from the first LED 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions on the back decoration board 3114, and the entire surface of the rear surface of the main body 3113a is forwardly reflected by the reflection portion 3113e. Therefore, the light from the first LED 3114a can be radiated forward even in a part of the main body 3113a where the back decoration board 3114 is not provided behind. In other words, even if the back decoration board 3114 is smaller than the size of the main body 3113a, light can be emitted forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body 3113a. Therefore, since the back decoration board 3114 can be made smaller than the main body 3113a, the distance between the outer periphery of the main body 3113a and the back decoration board 3114 can be made longer, and the decoration 3111 of the decoration 3111 can be made longer. The creeping distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface can be made longer to more easily exert the above-described effects.

[5-9d-5. Decorative substrate behind back of movable decorative body behind]
A plurality of first LEDs 3114a of a surface mount type and a side view, a plurality of second LEDs 3114b of a top mount type and a surface mount type, and 155g (FIG. 155 (a), one surface mount type connector 3114g is disposed on the right side of the front (front) surface of the back decoration board 3114.). The packages of the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are each made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the housing of the connector 3114g is white (natural color). It is also said to be made of white (natural color) resin. An electronic component 3114e (see FIG. 155 (b)) such as an LED driver IC and a resistor is mounted on the back surface (rear surface) of the back decoration board 3114. Further, the back-side decorative substrate 3114 has a flat board main body 3114c, and a copper foil 3114d (see FIG. 4) on which a predetermined circuit pattern is formed on the front surface (front surface) and the back surface (rear surface) of the flat substrate body 3114c. 154 etc.).

  In addition, on the front surface (front surface) of the back rear decoration substrate 3114, the first LED 3114a (surface mounting type), the second LED 3114b (surface mounting type), and the connector 3114g (surface mounting) are the front surface (front surface) of the substrate main body 3114c. White coating liquid (hereinafter simply referred to as a “solid white resist”) formed by applying a white resist solution over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which the type is soldered. In some cases) to form a white resist layer. On the back surface (rear surface) of the back-side decorative substrate 3114, there are provided pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a region on the back surface (rear surface) of the substrate main body 3114c where the electronic component 3114e (surface mounting type) is to be soldered is soldered. A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area except for the above. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back rear decoration board 3114, although not shown, near the front side electronic components such as the mounted first LED 3114a, second LED 3114b, and connector 3114g, the front side electronic component is provided. Attribute of the front-side electronic component such as the part number of the front-side electronic component and the area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is to be arranged (Furthermore, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, Direction) and the type of the front side electronic component may be included.) Is printed on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous against white. It is printed by. Although not shown, the back surface (back surface) of the back decoration board 3114 shows the component number of the back surface electronic component and the position where the back surface electronic component is arranged near the back surface electronic component such as the electronic component 3114e. Attributes of the back-side electronic component such as a region (further include the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic component, and the type of the back-side electronic component in some cases. ) Is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white coating. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation (rear side notation) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist While the notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the configuration of the present embodiment), the yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation (backside notation) is yellow, the yellow frontside notation (white backside notation for white resist) is less noticeable for white resist.

  Moreover, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light emission effect by lighting the light emitting units such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are as described above. A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors emits light (light emission) or is turned off so that the light emission mode changes in various ways. For this reason, as described above, the surface (front surface) of the substrate main body 3114c and the pad to which the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the connector 3114g are soldered, A white resist is formed in a whole area except a through hole, a land, and the like by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). A layer is formed, and furthermore, on the solid-coated white resist, the front side notation that allows identification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is printed by yellow printing with silk printing, thereby providing multi-color emission. When the full-color LED is turned off, it is possible to make the notation part on the yellow surface side inconspicuous against the white resist. In addition, when a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned on (when light is emitted), it is printed by silk printing with a solid white resist having a high reflectance and a yellow paint very close to the white reflectance. The reflectance of the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 can be maintained high by the combination of the front side notation portion and the back side notation portion.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for the silk printing, the yellow printed by the silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to the variation of the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a yellow color range (yellow to the light side, yellow to the dark side). Even if yellow is specified, the color is not exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make the color exactly the same), and the color has a wide range of yellow.

  The back-side decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner periphery of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a gap slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b between the outer peripheral shape and the flange portion 3113b. It is formed in a substantially uniform size. The back decoration board 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner periphery of a flange portion 3115b of a decorative body base 3115 described later, and a slight gap is substantially formed between the outer peripheral shape and the inner periphery of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed in a size that is formed to be constant. That is, the back rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed in a size to be accommodated inside the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115.

  As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 is located on the center line of each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms, as shown in FIG. It is provided so that light is irradiated toward the center of the flower near the tip inside the (metal decoration part 3111d). Thus, the first LED 3114a at the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 allows each of the five petals simulating cherry blossoms to be illuminated and decorated.

  In addition, in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, in each of the second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row on the left and right, the first decorative protrusion provided double of the decorative body 3111. In the vicinity of the rear of 3111a, it is provided so that light is emitted toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152. Accordingly, the first LEDs 3114a at the portion of the second decoration portion 3152 can cause the plurality of second decoration portions 3152 arranged in the left and right directions to be illuminated one by one.

  As shown in FIG. 152 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are, in the first decorative portion 3151, a central portion simulating cherry blossoms, a circular portion simulating a stamen located on the center line of five petals. It is provided at the back. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal imitating a cherry blossom in the first decoration portion 3151. Thus, the five portions imitating the stamens at the center of the first decorative portion 3151 can be respectively illuminated by the second LED 3114b.

  Since the second LED 3114b is a top-view type capable of irradiating light forward, when the second LED 3114b emits light, a portion imitating a stamen of a central portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is separated from other portions. Can also emit a point light with high luminance, which can strongly attract the interest of the player. Therefore, in the light-emitting decoration of the decoration portion 3150, a portion that emits light in a planar shape by the first LED 3114a and a portion that emits a dot in the shape of a dot by the second LED 3114b can be provided. Various light emission effects can be performed, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired of.

  The board main body 3114c is a rigid board whose thickness is slightly smaller than the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The substrate body 3114c of the present embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

  The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the substrate main body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to have a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by an etching process (a hatched portion in FIG. 154). As shown in FIG. 154, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is away from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (in this embodiment, SL = 1 mm). ing. With this predetermined distance SL, a creeping distance EL and a space distance from a conductive member (for example, a metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111) outside the back decoration substrate 3114 to the copper foil 3114d are obtained, and discharge of static electricity or the like is performed. The insulation property against short-circuit can be improved, and the damage of the back decoration substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

  Further, regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3114d is provided from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c to a position inside a predetermined distance, and the area of the copper foil 3114d is increased. Is as wide as possible. By transmitting a part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e to the copper foil 3114d, the heat can be radiated from the copper foil 3114d, and the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b , And the cooling effect on the electronic component 3114e can be enhanced to prevent heat damage.

  In addition, the rear back decorative board 3114 has a predetermined size on the light-emitting surface side of the side view type first LED 3114a on the front side so as to easily reflect light emitted from the first LED 3114a toward the board body 3114c forward. (A region surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 154). As shown in FIGS. 151 and 153 (a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the present embodiment does not include the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. The angle of light emitted from one LED 3114a into the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f is such that it approaches the vertical line on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c, so that the light emitted toward the substrate main body 3114c can be easily reflected forward. Can be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 153 (a) and the like, the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, and the rear end of the leg 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is fixed. Because of the contact, the leg portion 3113f can be extended rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the size of the light receiving portion 3113i that receives light from the first LED 3114a can be increased, and the amount of light (light amount) radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be increased. And the decorative sheet 3112) can be made to emit light more brightly.

  The rear end of the leg 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is in contact with the rear end of the light guide radiation plate 3113 in the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (see FIG. 153 (a) and the like). Thus, even if the white coating (white resist) applied to the surface due to the contact of the leg 3113f is worn or turned up, only the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c is exposed and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. I will not. Therefore, the insulation property is reduced due to the exposure of the copper foil 3114d, and damage due to a short circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the back decoration board 3114 of the present embodiment is assembled to the back movable decoration 3110 to form a flange 3115b of the decoration base 3115, which will be described later, and a flange of the light guide radiation plate 3113. 3113b, the outer periphery is double-enclosed, so that the outer peripheral surface becomes hard to see from the outside, and deterioration of appearance is prevented. Also, in a state where the back decoration board 3114 is assembled to the back decoration board 3110, the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. The flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 is inserted from behind into a gap between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3113b, and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration portion 3111d on the front surface of the decoration 3111 to the back decoration substrate 3114 is moved to the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration body base 3115. Since the windings meander so as to go around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back decoration board 3114, and the back decoration board 3114 is damaged. Can be prevented. In this embodiment, the creepage distance EL is set to a distance of 10 mm or more, or a distance that can correspond to a discharge voltage of 10 kV.

  Further, since the back decoration board 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the member provided behind the back movable decorative body 3110 by the back decoration board 3114 (in this embodiment, The light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light from the effect display device 1600 or the like provided at the rear from being irradiated on the decorative sheet 3112 or the decorative body 3111. Can be avoided, and a desired light emission effect can be reliably performed on the rear movable decorative body 3110. In addition, since the back decoration board 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiating plate 3113, the back decoration board 3114 can prevent the back from being seen through the light guide radiating plate 3113, and the back movable decoration can be prevented. Deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is provided with only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b which are housed from the rear with respect to the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113 on the front surface. Since the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted into the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d, the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 approaches the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a as much as possible. The thickness of the back movable movable body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced.

  Further, the back rear decorative board 3114 has electronic components 3114e such as LED driver ICs and resistors mounted on the rear surface. Since the LED driver IC, the resistor, and the like as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components, by providing the electronic component 3114e on the rear surface of the back decoration board 3114, the black electronic component 3114e cannot be seen from the front. It is possible to improve the appearance of the back movable movable body 3110. Further, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the back decoration board 3114 which is not visible from the front, there is no need to apply a paint such as white to make the electronic component 3114e difficult to see, The cost of the back decoration board 3114 can be reduced.

[5-9d-6. Decorative body base behind movable movable body]
The decorative body base 3115 is entirely formed to be transparent. The decorative body base 3115 penetrates the flat-plate-shaped covering plate portion 3115a that covers the rear side of the back decoration board 3114, the flange portion 3115b protruding forward from the outer peripheral edge of the covering plate portion 3115a, and the covering plate portion 3115a. And a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from the right end of the cover plate portion 3115a in a front view when viewed from the front.

  The outer peripheral shape of the covering plate portion 3115a has a shape substantially along the inner peripheral surface of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed between the inner peripheral surface and the flange portion 3113b. It is formed in the size which is. That is, the cover plate portion 3115a (decorative body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the covering plate portion 3115a covers the rear side of the back decoration board 3114, it is possible to protect the back decoration board 3114 by preventing other members from contacting the back decoration board 3114 from behind. It is possible to prevent the back decoration board 3114 from being damaged.

  As shown in FIG. 150 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114, and has a front end forward of the back decoration board 3114. Is projected to be located. The flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the back decoration substrate 3114, and makes it hard to see the outer peripheral surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 from the outside to improve the appearance. Moreover, since the flange portion 3115b is inserted into the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back decoration substrate 3114 in a state where the flange portion 3115b is assembled to the back decoration member 3110, The shortest route from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear decorative substrate 3114 can meander so as to go around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Out. Therefore, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from flowing to the back decoration board 3114 and damaging the back decoration board 3114.

  Each of the plurality of openings 3115c has a slit-shaped portion that is long on the left and right, and a portion that is larger than the slit-shaped portion. With the plurality of openings 3115c, heat from the electronic component 3114e mounted on the back surface of the back decoration board 3114 can be released to the outside of the back decoration board 3114. Can be reduced.

  The right slider rear portion 3115d is for configuring the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide radiation plate 3113.

  The decorative body base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e slightly protruding from the front surface of the cover plate 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are arranged so as to abut on a portion of the rear surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 near the outer peripheral edge where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. The plurality of protrusions 3115e can form a gap between the rear surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 and the front surface of the cover plate portion 3115a by bringing the rear surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 into contact with the front surface thereof. . Accordingly, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily released through a gap between the rear surface of the back decoration board 3114 and the front surface of the cover plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main effects of movable back body
Subsequently, main functions and effects of the back movable decorative body 3110 in the present embodiment will be described. The back movable movable body 3110 of the present embodiment has a decorative sheet 3112 sandwiched between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiating plate 3113. In a state where the back decoration board 3114 is sandwiched between the base 3115 and the base 3115, the mounting boss 3111f of the decoration 3111 is mounted on the decoration base 3115 to assemble (see FIG. 143 and the like). Accordingly, the thickness of the back movable movable body 3110 in the front-rear direction is relatively thin.

  The back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c protruding forward on a transparent flat decorative body 3111, and Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a provided with a hologram displaying a pattern or light interference fringe, the decorative portion 3150 of the back movable movable body 3110 is not provided. Thus, the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, and the third decorative projection 3111c can provide a three-dimensional effect, and the lens effect by the second decorative projection 3111b and the third decorative projection 3111c. And a hologram can provide a sense of depth. Accordingly, even if the thickness of the back movable ornamental body 3110 in the front-rear direction is small, it does not make the player feel thin, and the decoration effect of the decorative portion 3150 of the back movable ornamental body 3110 is sufficiently achieved. It is possible to entertain and entertain the player.

  Further, as described above, the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, the third decorative projection 3111c, the first contour 3112a, and the like can provide a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth. The thickness of the back movable movable body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced. This can reduce the space required for installing the back-side movable decorative body 3110, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the back-side movable decorative body 3110 can be increased, and a more effective portion inside the game board 5 can be provided. By providing the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back, the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player can be easily embodied. In addition, since the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner, it is relatively easy to secure a space for arranging another decorative body. The pachinko machine 1 can provide a pachinko machine 1 having a good appearance or a pachinko machine 1 that can enjoy various effects, and has a high appeal to players and can be differentiated. can do.

  The back-side movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative part 3111d made of a metal foil on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative part 3151 and the second decorative part 3152. Therefore, the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be made to stand out by the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. In addition, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, it is possible to give the metal decorative portion 3111d a three-dimensional appearance and a high-grade appearance. Thereby, when the rear movable decorative body 3110 moves from the evacuation position invisible to the player to the visible appearance position, the high-quality decorative portion 3150 can be seen, thereby giving the player a sense of premium. Can be given, so that the player can strongly think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Also, since the back movable ornamental body 3110 has a flat rear surface of the ornamental body 3111 and the ornamental sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer periphery of the ornamental body 3111, the movable body 3110 has a first contour portion 3112a having a picture or a hologram. In addition, it is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111, and to make the decoration of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back large. In addition, since the decoration sheet 3112 is substantially the same size as the decoration body 3111, the decoration of the back decoration part 3110 is not framed, so that the back decoration part 3110 is not bordered. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear displays an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back movable movable body 3110, thereby providing a sense of unity. It can be shown to the player, and can give the player a visual impact to attract attention, and can also enjoy a large decoration, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player.

  In addition, since the rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a at a position behind the metal decorative part 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour part 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, the metal decorative part 3111d and the second The two LEDs 3114b can make the first LED 3114a difficult to see from the front by the two contours 3112b, and can suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 and sufficiently exhibit the decorative effect.

  Further, since the back movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround each outer periphery in each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152, the first decorative portion 3151 And the second decorative portion 3152 can be individually illuminated. Accordingly, the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row on the left and right can be sequentially illuminated and decorated, or only the specific first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 can be illuminated and decorated. By appropriately illuminating the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152, various luminous effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to be bored and suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  In addition, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 irradiates light in a direction along the surface thereof within the thickness of the main body part 3113a of the light guide radiating plate 3113 by the first LED 3114a of the side view type. The light from the first LED is radiated forward from the front surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 because light is emitted forward by the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiating plate 3113. Distance can be increased. Thereby, since the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and emitted forward from the light guide radiating plate 3113, even if the thickness of the back movable ornamental body 3110 in the front-rear direction is thin, the decorative body 3111 And the decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly and luminously decorated, and the player can be entertained by the luminous decoration having a good appearance. In addition, since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly illuminated and decorated by the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the side view type first LED 3114a, the thickness of the back movable movable body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be increased. It is possible to reliably realize the pachinko machine 1 which can be made thin and has the above-described effects.

  In addition, since the rear movable decorative body 3110 uses the first LED 3114a as a side view type for planar light emission and uses the second LED 3114b as a top view type, the rear movable movable body 3110 (the decorative portion 3150) can be used. In the light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) described in (2), a portion that emits a high-brightness point-like light with the second LED 3114b can be added to the portion that is light-emitting decorated with the first LED 3114a. Thereby, the light emission effect can be sharpened by the light emission of the second LED 3114b, so that it is easy to present the optimum light emission effect according to the game state, and it is possible to make the player more entertaining and play the game. Can be raised, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a first LED housing portion 3113c into which the first LED 3114a of the side view type is inserted in the light guide radiating plate 3113 to receive light on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c. The portion 3113i is irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a so that the light enters the inside of the main body 3113a. Accordingly, by providing the first LED housing portion 3113c at a position close to a desired portion to be illuminated and decorated by the first LED 3114a, the desired portion can be brightly illuminated and decorated, and a more staging effect The player can enjoy the high-luminance decoration.

  Further, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a first LED housing portion 3113c and a second LED on which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the back rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear on the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since it has the accommodation portion 3113d, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are inserted into the first LED accommodation portion 3113c and the second LED accommodation portion 3113d, so that the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a is behind and the front surface of the decoration board 3114 is behind. And the thickness of the back movable movable body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be further reduced.

  Also, in the rear movable decorative body 3110, the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide radiating plate 3113 abuts on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3114, so that the main body 3113a and the rear decorative board 3114 can be connected. Is formed, the heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 can be released through the gap, and The effect of heat can be reduced by suppressing a rise in temperature. The gap between the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the substrate main body 3114c of the back decoration substrate 3114 is set to be "half the distance from the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c to the light emitting unit of the first LED 3114a" to "substrate". Distance from the front surface of main body 3114c to the front surface of first LED 3114a ". If the gap is smaller than this, the heat may not be able to be sufficiently discharged through the gap between the main body 3113a and the back decoration substrate 3114. If the gap is larger than this, the amount of light from the first LED 3114a incident on the main body 3113a of the light guide radiating plate 3113 decreases, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 emit light with sufficient brightness. This is because there is a possibility that decoration cannot be performed.

  In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can form a gap between the main body part 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the rear decorative board 3114 by the legs 3113f, and the decorative body base 3115 has a plurality of openings. By having the portion 3115c, the surface of the back decoration board 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c by raising and lowering the back decoration body 3110, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be ventilated. In addition, heat from the electronic component 3114e and the like can be released, and a rise in the temperature of the back decoration board 3114 can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that a temperature effect is provided on the back-side movable decorative body 3110, and when the back-side movable decorative body 3110 (back-side decorative substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the movable back-to-back movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down. May be increased in frequency (probability). As a result, the back-side movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down, whereby the surface of the back-side decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated, and the back-side decorative substrate 3114 can be cooled to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to heat.

  Further, the back movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the back decorative board 3114 from the rear side by the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, and also surrounds the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b of the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. Accordingly, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decoration portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decoration 3111 to the back decoration substrate 3114 is radiated by the light guide radiation due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decoration base 3115. Since it meanders around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d flows to the back decoration substrate 3114, and the back decoration substrate 3114 3114 can be prevented from being damaged.

  In addition, the back movable decorative body 3110 is configured such that the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit is provided at a position away from the outer periphery of the substrate main body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL in the back decorative board 3114. The predetermined distance SL can also increase the creepage distance EL and the spatial distance, increase the insulating property against a discharge such as static electricity or a short circuit, and suppress the damage of the back decoration board 3114 due to the discharge or the like.

  In addition, the rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Not. Accordingly, the creepage distance EL to the back decoration substrate 3114 can be increased by the length of the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained. Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decorative portion 3111d is smaller than the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The size can be reduced, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be reduced. Accordingly, since the discharge voltage can be reduced, even if a discharge occurs to the back decoration board 3114, the influence thereof can be reduced.

  By the way, as described above, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down (movable) between the retracted position moved upward and the emerged position moved downward by driving the rear drive motor 3126. Therefore, friction occurs in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like each time the vehicle moves up and down, and the static electricity generated by the friction easily accumulates on the surface of the back movable movable body 3110. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 constituting the surface of the rear movable decorative body 3110 are formed of a synthetic resin having low conductivity, even if a large amount of static electricity is accumulated, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 may have the surface thereof. It is difficult for the accumulated static electricity to be discharged at once. On the other hand, in the metal decoration portion 3111d made of the metal foil of the decoration 3111, since the conductivity is high, static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decoration portion 3111d is easily discharged at a stretch. For this reason, the back movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment easily accumulates static electricity in the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. Since the creepage distance EL to the back decoration board 3114 is sufficiently long, the back decoration board 3114 is not damaged by the discharge of static electricity, and the movable effect in which the movable decoration body 3110 moves up and down, and the movable decoration body behind the back. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which both the light emitting effect in which the light emitting decoration 3110 is provided and the light emitting effect can be enjoyed.

  When the area of the metal decoration portion 3111d in which static electricity is accumulated is equal to or larger than a predetermined value (for example, 100 cm2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decoration portion 3111d to GND (ground). Accordingly, it is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the back decoration substrate 3114.

[5-9d-8. Another embodiment of movable backside decorative body]
Next, mainly referring to FIG. 157, the back movable decorative body 3160, the back movable decorative body 3170, the back movable movable body 3180, and the like of the embodiment different from the above-described rear movable movable body 3110 will be described. This will be described in detail. FIG. 157 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the configuration of the back movable movable body of the second embodiment different from the back movable movable body of FIG. 142, and FIG. 157 (b) is a back movable movable body of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a decoration body by a cross section, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a back movable decoration body of 4th Embodiment by a cross section.

  As shown schematically in FIG. 157 (a), the rear movable movable body 3160 of the second embodiment is provided on the decorative body 3161 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and on the rear side of the decorative body 3161. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3162 provided with a predetermined decoration, a light guide radiating plate 3163 provided behind the decorative sheet 3162 and internally radiating light in a direction along the front surface, and a light guide radiating plate A back decoration board 3164 having a plurality of LEDs 3164a for irradiating light inside the 3163 in a direction along the front surface.

  The decorative body 3161 of the rear movable decorative body 3160 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body 3161a, a flange 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 3161a, and a metal provided on the front surface of the main body 3161a. Decorative portion 3161c. The main body 3161a may be flat, or may be provided with a relief-like decoration having irregularities. The metal decoration portion 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3161a, and forms a predetermined decoration. The metal decoration portion 3161c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  The decoration sheet 3162 is a sheet in which a predetermined decoration (pattern) is printed on a transparent sheet. In the decoration sheet 3162, a part having low transparency in the decoration is located at a part in front of the LED 3164a of the back decoration board 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED 3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed in a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161.

  The light guide radiation plate 3163 is formed in the shape of a flat plate having the same size as the decoration sheet 3162. And a reflecting portion 3163b. The LED housing portion 3163a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner periphery is formed in a square shape along the outer periphery of the LED 3164a. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are each depressed forward in a triangular cross section, and are provided only at predetermined portions. The plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are provided so as to respectively reflect light from the determined LED housing portion 3163a forward, and are arranged in a concentric fan shape around the determined LED housing portion 3163a. . That is, the plurality of reflectors 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction to the front. In addition, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiating plate 3113 of the back movable movable body 3110, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b can reflect light from an unspecified direction forward. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

  The back decoration board 3164 is formed in the same size as the decoration sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. On the back rear decoration board 3164, a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3164a that are inserted from the rear into the LED housing portions 3163a of the light guide radiation plate 3163 are mounted on the front surface. Although not shown, the back decoration board 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil at a position inside a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3164 on the front surface and the rear surface. In addition, a white coating film made of a white resist is formed on the front surface (both surfaces) of the back decoration substrate 3164.

  In the assembled state, the back rear movable decorative body 3160 of this embodiment has the decorative sheet 3162 in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3161a of the decorative body 3161 and the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162 with the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. Further, the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163. Accordingly, the thickness of the back movable movable body 3160 in the front-rear direction is small. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back decorative board 3164. Thereby, in the back movable decorative body 3160, the outer periphery of the decoration sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the back decoration substrate 3164 is covered with the flange portion 3161b, so that the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are hard to be seen from the outside. And make it look good.

  Since the rear movable decorative body 3160 has a flange 3161b extending rearward from the main body 3161a of the decorative body 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3164, the metal decorative portion on the front of the main body 3161a is provided. The creepage distance EL from 3161c to the back decoration board 3164 (the copper foil thereof) can be made a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back decoration board 3164, and the back decoration. The substrate 3164 can be prevented from being damaged.

  As described above, according to the back movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment, the same operation and effect as those of the above-described back movable movable body 3110 can be achieved. Note that a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back decorative board 3164 may be provided in the back movable decorative body 3160.

  Subsequently, as shown schematically in FIG. 157 (b), the back-side movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment includes an outer decorative body 3171 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3171 (frame). And a light guide radiation plate 3173 provided behind the inner decoration 3172 and radiating light in a direction along the entire surface to the front in the interior. And a back decoration board 3174 on which a plurality of LEDs 3174a for irradiating light inside the light guide radiation plate 3173 in a direction along the front surface are mounted on the front surface.

  The outer decorative body 3171 of the back-side movable decorative body 3170 includes a frame-shaped main body 3171a extending forward and backward, a support part 3171b protruding inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body 3171a in a flat plate shape, and a main body 3171a. And a metal decoration portion 3171c provided on the front surface of the. The distance from the front end of the main body portion 3171a to the front surface of the support portion 3171b is the same as the thickness of the inner decoration 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration portion 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3171a, and forms a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3171c may be formed by foil stamping, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  Although not shown, the inner decorative body 3172 is formed with a relief-shaped decoration having irregularities. The inner decoration 3172 is attached so as to close the front opening of the frame-shaped outer decoration 3171.

  The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner decoration 3172. The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the outer decoration 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiating plate 3173 has an LED housing portion 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the back decoration board 3174 is inserted from behind, and a plurality of reflection portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED housing portion 3173a is a hole penetrating the light guide radiation plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and has an inner periphery formed in a square shape along the outer periphery of the LED 3174a. The reflecting portion 3173b extends in an arc shape with the determined LED housing portion 3173a as a center, and a plurality of reflecting portions are provided concentrically. The reflecting portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect light from the predetermined LED housing portions 3173a forward. That is, the plurality of reflectors 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction to the front. Note that, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the back movable movable body 3110, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b can reflect light from an unspecified direction forward. Alternatively, it may be provided on substantially the entire rear surface.

  The back decoration board 3174 is formed in the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. The rear back decoration board 3174 has a plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a mounted on the front surface thereof, which are inserted into the LED housing portions 3173a of the light guide radiation plate 3173 from behind. Although not shown, the back decoration board 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern made of copper foil at a position inside a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3174 on the front surface and the rear surface. In addition, a white coating film made of a white resist is formed on the front surface (both surfaces) of the back decoration substrate 3174.

  In the assembled state of the back rear movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the inner decorative body 3172 is fitted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171 from the front, and the front surface of the outer decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the inner decorative body 3172 are provided. And the outer periphery of the rear surface of the inner decorative member 3172 is in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. In the rear movable decorative body 3170, the light guide radiating plate 3173 and the back decorative board 3174 are inserted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171 from the rear, and the light guide radiating plate 3173 is provided on the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact, and the front surface of the back decoration substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. Thereby, the thickness of the back movable movable body 3170 in the front-rear direction is thin. In the rear movable decorative body 3170, a gap having a thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the inner decorative body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

  The main body 3171a of the outer decoration 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back decoration board 3174. In the back decorative movable body 3160, the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3172, the light guide radiating plate 3173, and the back decorative board 3174 are covered by the main body 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171. Makes it harder to see and makes it look better.

  Since the rear movable decorative body 3170 covers the outer periphery of the rear decorative board 3174 by the main body part 3171a extending rearward of the outer decorative body 3171, the metal decorative part 3171c on the front surface of the main body part 3171a. The creepage distance EL to the back decoration board 3174 (the copper foil thereof) can be made a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3171c flows to the back decoration board 3174, and the back decoration board 3174 Can be prevented from being damaged.

  As described above, according to the back movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the same operational effects as those of the above-described back movable movable body 3110 can be obtained. In addition, you may make it provide a metal decoration part also in the front surface of the inner decoration body 3172. Further, in the back movable decorative body 3170, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back decorative board 3174 may be provided.

  Subsequently, as shown schematically in FIG. 157 (c), the back-side movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment includes an outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and an inner side of the outer decorative body 3181 (frame). Inner decoration body 3182 having a light-transmitting property, and a plurality of LEDs 3183a provided behind the inner decoration body 3182 and capable of irradiating light to the front are mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3183. And

  The outer decorative body 3181 of the back movable movable body 3180 includes a flat frame-shaped main body 3181a, a flange 3181b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the main body 3181a, and the entire surface of the main body 3181a and the flange 3181b. And a metal decorative portion 3181c covering the metal decorative portion 3181c. The metal decoration portion 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decoration 3181. The metal decorative portion 3181c may be formed by plating or may be formed by vapor deposition.

  The inner decoration 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decorative body 3182 has a flat outer shape that is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange 3181b. And a flange portion 3182b extending to the front. Although not shown, the main body portion 3182a is formed with a relief-like decoration having irregularities on substantially the entire surface.

  The back decoration board 3183 has an outer shape smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration 3182. That is, the back decoration board 3183 is formed in a size such that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration 3182. A plurality of top view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3183. Although not shown, the back-side decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil at a position inside a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the back-side decorative substrate 3183 on the front surface and the rear surface. In addition, a white coating film made of a white resist is formed on the front surface (both surfaces) of the back decoration substrate 3183.

  In the assembled state of the back rear movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, the inner decorative body 3182 and the back decorative board 3183 are inserted into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3181 from the rear. The rear movable decorative body 3180 has a front surface near the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 in contact with the rear surface of the main body 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181, and the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decoration 3181 is covered by the flange 3182b of the inner decoration 3182. In other words, the outer periphery of the flange 3182b of the inner decoration 3182 is covered by the flange 3181b of the outer decoration 3181. Therefore, the outer periphery of the inner decorative member 3182 and the back decoration substrate 3183 are not visible from the outside by the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative member 3181.

  The rear movable movable body 3180 is provided with a flange 3182b of an inner decorative body 3182 inside a flange 3181b of an outer decorative body 3181 provided with a metal decorative part 3181c, Since the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body 3182a is separated from the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration 3182, the copper of the back decoration board 3183 (from the metal decoration section 3181c is removed. The creepage distance EL to the foil) can be set to a sufficient distance, preventing static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3181c from flowing to the back decoration board 3183 and damaging the back decoration board 3183. can do.

  As described above, according to the rear movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, the same operation and effect as those of the above-described rear movable decorative body 3110 can be achieved. In addition, you may make it provide a metal decoration part also in the front surface of the main-body part 3182a of the inner decoration body 3182. In the back movable decorative body 3180, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back decorative board 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Bottom left production unit and Bottom right production unit]
Next, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 158 to 161 and the like. FIG. 158 (a) is a perspective view of the back bottom left production unit and the back bottom right production unit in the back unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 158 (b) is the back bottom left production unit and the back bottom right production unit of the back unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left rendering unit and the lower back right rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 160 is an exploded view of the lower back left rendering unit and the lower back right rendering unit viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movable configuration of the lower back left rendering unit and the lower back right rendering unit from the front.

  The lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the back rear rendering unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250 are located on the left and right sides of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 in a state where they are assembled to the game board 5, and from the front. It can be visually recognized through the transparent game panel 1100, the front unit 2000, and the like.

  First, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 will be described. The lower back left rendering unit 3200 includes a transparent lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 having a shaft shaft 3201a protruding rearward, and a transparent lower back left decorative body provided behind the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201. 3202 and a lower back left decorative substrate provided behind the lower back left decorative body 3202 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”). 3203 and a lower back left decorative substrate 3203, a lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is rotatably mounted and a lower back left decorative body 3202 is mounted, and the back rear production unit 3100 And a unit base 3204 attached to the lower end of the left side of the unit.

  In addition, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 is mounted on the lower back left drive motor 3205 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotation axis projects rearward, and mounted on the rotation shaft of the lower back left drive motor 3205. And a first transmission gear 3207 which is in mesh with the driving gear 3206 and is rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, and is in mesh with the first transmission gear 3207. A second transmission gear 3208 in the form of a spur gear rotatably attached to the unit base 3204; and a second transmission gear 3208 meshed with the second transmission gear 3208 and attached to the rear end of the shaft 3201a of the lower back decoration 3201. And a third transmission gear 3209 in the form of a spur gear, and attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the lower back left decorative body 3202. Is provided with a cover 3210, a.

  The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms. The shaft shaft 3201a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back decoration 3201 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower back decoration 3202, the lower back decoration substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. . The lower back left decorative body 3202 overlaps two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, and rotates so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It is formed in such a shape as to be made.

  The lower back left rotary decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202 are formed to be transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short and linearly extending ridges in a random direction. In the petal of one of the cherry blossoms simulated by the decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202, the pachinko machine 1 (so that the density becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal toward the periphery of the petal. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are provided by printing, but the back bottom left rotation Through the decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202 (even at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back lower decorative board 3203 disposed behind the lower back lower decorative body 3202 can be visually recognized. Yo It has become.

  The lower back left decorative board 3203 is a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are of a surface mounting type. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is provided with a lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 on the rear surface. The lower back left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that protrudes forward and is detected by the lower back left detection sensor 3203a of the lower back left decorative board 3203. In a state in which the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the lower back left detection sensor 3203a, the lower back left rotary decorative body 3201 has one petal facing upward (see FIG. 161). ).

  When the drive gear 3206 is rotated by the lower back left drive motor 3205, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 of the present embodiment is driven via the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotating decorative body 3201 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the lower back left rendering unit 3200 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203, thereby turning the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202. It can be luminous decoration.

  Note that the front side electronic components such as the component numbers of the front side electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 and the area indicating the position where the front side electronic components are to be arranged. (In some cases, include the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component). The portion is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 by silk printing with a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is a transparent lower back left decorative body. Since 3202 and the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 are arranged in order, the color of a predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 by silk printing is lower back left decorative body 3202, And back lower left decoration When the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the front side) are determined by the predetermined paint color. The attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the notation section can be determined.

  The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 have their packages made of white (a color recognized as being the same color as white) resin. The housing is made of a white (natural color, a color recognized as being the same color as white (natural color)) resin.

  Next, the lower right effect unit 3250 will be described. The lower back right effecting unit 3250 includes a transparent lower right rotating decorative body 3251 having a shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward, and a transparent lower right decorative body provided behind the lower right rotating decorative body 3251. 3252 and a back lower right decorative board provided behind the lower back right decorative body 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”). 3253 and a back lower right decoration board 3253, a lower back right rotating decoration body 3251 is rotatably mounted, and a lower back right decoration body 3252 is mounted. And a unit base 3254 attached to the lower end of the right side of the.

  The lower back right effecting unit 3250 is mounted on the lower back right drive motor 3255 and the lower back right drive motor 3255 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3254 so that the rotation axis projects rearward. And a first transmission gear 3257 in mesh with the driving gear 3256 and rotatably mounted on the unit base 3254, and in mesh with the first transmission gear 3257. A second transmission gear 3258 in the form of a spur gear rotatably attached to the unit base 3254; and a second transmission gear 3258 meshed with the second transmission gear 3258 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3251a of the lower right rotation decorative body 3251. A third transmission gear 3259 in the form of a spur gear and a lower side of the lower back right decorative body 3252 are attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254. Is provided with a cover 3260, a.

  The lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms. The shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower back right decorative body 3252, the lower back right decorative substrate 3253, and the unit base 3254. . The lower back right decorative body 3252 overlaps two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 and rotates them so that the back petals are located between the front petals. It is formed in such a shape as to be made.

  The lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the lower right back decorative body 3251 and the lower right right decorative body 3252 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short and linearly extending ridges in a random direction. In the petal of one of the cherry blossoms simulated by the decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252, the pachinko machine 1 (so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal toward the periphery of the petal. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) according to the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are provided by printing, but the bottom right rotation is performed. Through the decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 (even at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right back decorative board 3253 disposed behind the lower right back decorative body 3252 can be visually recognized. Yo It has become.

  The lower back right decorative board 3253 is a full-color LED in which a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are of a surface mounting type and can emit multicolor light. The lower right back decoration board 3253 is provided with a lower right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) for detecting the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 on the rear surface. The lower back right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and protrudes rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that protrudes forward and is detected by the bottom right detection sensor 3253a of the bottom right decoration board 3253. In a state where the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the bottom right detection sensor 3253a, the bottom right rotation decorative body 3251 has one petal directed upward (see FIG. 161). ).

  When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the lower back right drive motor 3255, the lower back right rendering unit 3250 of the present embodiment rotates through the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotating decorative body 3251 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. In addition, the lower back right rendering unit 3250 can cause the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 to emit light by making the plurality of LEDs of the lower back right decorative board 3253 emit light.

  Note that the front side electronic components such as a part number of a front side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back right decorative board 3253, and a region indicating a position where the front side electronic component is to be arranged. (In some cases, the front-side notation indicates the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the type of the front-side electronic component.) The part is printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back right decorative board 3253 with a predetermined paint color, and behind the transparent lower right rotating decorative body 3251 is a transparent lower right decorative body. Since the lower decorative substrate 3253 and the lower right decorative substrate 3253 are arranged in this order, the color of a predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 by silk printing is the lower right decorative member 3252. And the bottom right rotating decoration In the state where a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, a character, a symbol, and a shape (that is, a surface side) are determined by the predetermined paint color. The attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the notation section can be determined.

  The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower right decorative substrate 3253 are each made of a resin of a white color (a color recognized as being the same color as the white color). The housing is made of white resin (also called natural color, a color recognized as being the same color as white (natural color)).

  A plurality of LEDs (surface mount type), connectors (surface mount type), lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) and lower back are provided on the front surface (front surface) of lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and lower back right decorative substrate 3253. A white resist solution is applied over the entire area except for the pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which the right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) is soldered (hereinafter, simply referred to as “solid white”). In some cases, a white resist layer is formed. On the back surface (rear surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253, pads and throughs to which the lower back left detection sensor 3203a (lead type) and the lower back right detection sensor 3253a (lead type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area except holes, lands, and the like. Further, although not shown in the drawings, the front (lower) surface of the lower back left decorative board 3203 and the lower back right decorative board 3253 is located near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs and connectors. Attributes of the front-side electronic component, such as the component number of the electronic component, an area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, and the mounting orientation of the front-side electronic component (The mounting direction) and the type of the front-side electronic component may be included.) Is printed on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous against white. It is printed by silk printing. Although illustration is omitted on the back surface (rear surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253, near the back side electronic components such as the lower back left detection sensor 3203a and the lower back right detection sensor 3253a, Attributes of the back-side electronic component such as the component number of the back-side electronic component, an area indicating the position where the back-side electronic component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, The back side notation that indicates the mounting orientation (mounting direction) may include the type of back side electronic component.) A white resist that is solid painted with a yellow paint that is a light color that is hard to stand out against white The top is printed by silk printing.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white coating. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation (rear side notation) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist While the notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the configuration of the present embodiment), the yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation (backside notation) is yellow, the yellow frontside notation (white backside notation for white resist) is less noticeable for white resist.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light emission effect by illuminating with a light emitting unit such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode is variously changed by turning on (light emission) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, the entire area excluding the plurality of LEDs, the pads to which the connectors are soldered, the through holes, the lands, and the like is provided on the front surface (the front surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 and the lower back right decorative board 3253. In the above, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). On the painted white resist, the front side notation that allows identification of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors is printed by silk printing with yellow paint, so that when the full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are turned off, white In addition to being able to make the yellow surface-side notation inconspicuous against the resist, it is also possible to use a full-color LED that can emit multiple colors. At the time of light emission), the bottom decoration board is a combination of a solid white resist with high reflectivity and a front side notation printed by silk printing with yellow paint very close to white reflectivity. The reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the 3203 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 can be kept high.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for the silk printing, the yellow printed by the silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to the variation of the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a yellow color range (yellow to the light side, yellow to the dark side). Even if yellow is specified, the color is not exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make the color exactly the same), and the color has a wide range of yellow.

[5-9f. Production unit under the back]
Next, the under-rear effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 162 to 169 and the like. FIG. 162 (a) is a perspective view of the under-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 162 (b) is a perspective view of the under-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 163 is an exploded perspective view of the under-the-under-under-the-rendering mechanism of the under-under-the-side production unit when viewed from the front, and FIG. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the underside middle decoration unit of the underside middle rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 166 is an exploded view of the underside middle decoration unit of the underside middle production unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing the lifting and lowering of the under-back middle decorative body unit by the under-back middle lifting mechanism in the under-back middle rendering unit. FIG. 168 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing, from the front, a configuration relating to the rotation of the under-back middle decoration body unit of the under-back middle decoration body unit in the under-back middle rendering unit, and FIG. 168 (b) is a view of the under-back middle rotation decoration body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a stop position and each detection sensor in a table. FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing, from the front, the arrangement of the LEDs of the under-back middle decoration unit in the under-back middle effect unit.

  The lower back middle rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The lower back middle rendering unit 3300 is attached to the rear of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back right rendering unit 3250. The underside middle rendering unit 3300 includes a bottom inside middle decoration body unit 3320 having a transparent bottom inside rotation decoration body 3310 rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a bottom inside middle part raising and lowering the bottom inside middle decoration body unit 3320. A lifting mechanism 3350.

  The bottom back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the back bottom middle rendering unit 3300 has a regular hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has six numeral decorations formed in a relief shape from “1” to “6” on the entire surface, and is circular at every 60 ° angle clockwise about the center. It is arranged on the circumference. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 includes a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321, a lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, and a front end side of the substrate fixing member 3323 in the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320, which will be described later. Is provided.

  The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is formed to be transparent, the outer periphery of each of the six numeral decorations protrudes forward, and further has a rib portion connecting the six numeral decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring state. It is formed to protrude forward. A metal decorative portion 3310a having a metallic luster is formed on the protruding outer peripheral portion and the rib portion. In other words, a metal decoration portion 3310a having a metallic luster is arranged near the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310. In the present embodiment, the outer peripheral portion where the metallic decorative portion 3310a having metallic luster is formed and the rib portion are molded integrally with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. May be formed separately from the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310, and the formed outer peripheral portion and rib portion and the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 may be assembled. In this case, the metal decorative portion 3310a having metallic luster is formed on the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion.

  The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3310a can give a sense of quality, and the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be made more prominent, so that the presence of the underside middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be further emphasized. It has become. The metal decorative portion 3310a is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The under-rear middle rotation decorative body 3310 has a metal decoration portion 3310a formed only on the outer peripheral portion and the rib portion protruding from the front surface thereof, and the metal decoration portion 3310a is entirely formed on the side surface of the under-rear middle rotation decoration body 3310. Absent. Accordingly, the creepage distance from the metal decoration portion 3310a of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the under-back middle first decorative substrate 3322 is made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3310a from flowing to the lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 and damage the lower middle lower decorative substrate 3322. Therefore, the insulating property against a discharge such as static electricity or a short circuit can be improved.

  Note that, as described above, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is formed such that the rib portion connecting the six numeral decorations arranged on the circumference in a ring state protrudes forward. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a rib portion protruding from the front side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the front peripheral edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 from the peripheral side portion (peripheral side root portion). The rotary decoration 3310 is formed to be transparent up to the rear edge of the side surface, and has a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is configured such that a rib portion protrudes from the front side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 to the front periphery of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, A plurality of ridges extending linearly in a short direction in a random direction over the rear edge of the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 are formed in a pear-skin pattern, and the rib portion is formed in the lower back middle decoration. The shading becomes darker from the peripheral side portion (peripheral side root portion) protruding from the front surface of the body 3310 to the front peripheral edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the side rear edge of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 ( A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) so that the transparency becomes low. Is applied by printing That.

  As shown in FIGS. 165 and 166 and the like, the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320 includes a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 provided behind the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 and an inner lens (diffusion lens). ) Is provided at the rear of 3321 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”). A substrate fixing member 3323 having a shaft portion 3323a attached to the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 so as to sandwich the middle first decorative substrate 3322 from the rear side and projecting rearward in a cylindrical shape; and a shaft of the substrate fixing member 3323. A rotating base 3324 having a shaft hole 3324a into which the portion 3323a is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable, and attached to the rear side of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310. There.

  The surface of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 is subjected to lens cutting (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and is disposed behind the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower lower back are clearly difficult to visually recognize from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or instead of the front surface of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321. A lens cut may be applied to the back surface (a polyhedron may be formed).

  In addition, the lower back middle decorating unit 3320 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotating base 3324 and extends in a semicircular arc coaxial with the shaft hole 3324a. A plurality of position detection pieces 3326 protruding from the rotation base 3324 and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 are provided.

  Furthermore, the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is provided behind the rotating base 3324 and has a penetrating circular opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass. A transparent lower middle decoration 3328 in which a plurality of linear grooves are formed radially from the opening 3328a toward the outer circumference with the center of the circular opening 3328a as a center point, and a rear lower middle decoration 3328. And a lower back middle decorative board 3329 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”). A plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 (lead type), which are attached to the front surface of 3329 and can detect the area detecting piece 3325, , And a position detection piece 3326 can detect a localization sensor 3331 Leaded, the.

  The lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is provided at the rear of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 is attached, and the lower back middle decoration 3328 is mounted. A movable base 3332, a rear lower mid-rotation drive motor 3333 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3332 so that the rotation axis projects forward, A drive gear 3334 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the rotating gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a lower-lower elevating mechanism 3350 attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. And an elevating slider 3336 that is guided by the slide rail 3360 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

  The front end side of the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321, the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, and the substrate fixing member 3323 is located between the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotating base 3324 in an assembled state. , Is in a state of being accommodated in the concave portion 3311 of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, and is not in contact with any of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the rotating base 3324. By appropriately illuminating the plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the portion of the number decoration (relief) in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first lower decorative substrate 3322 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

  The area detecting piece 3325 has a larger diameter than the rotating gear 3327 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotating base 3324. As shown in FIG. 168 (a), the area detection piece 3325 includes “3”, “4”, and “5” from between the number decorations “2” and “3” in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. It is formed in an arc within a range of 180 degrees around the rotation axis through the numeral decoration and between the numeral decorations of "5" and "6".

  Each of the plurality (six in this case) of the position detection pieces 3326 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on a circumference having a diameter larger than that of the area detection piece 3325. The position detection pieces 3326 are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) such that each of the position detection pieces 3326 is positioned at the center of the decoration of the numeral of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. . In the present embodiment, one position detecting piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape within a range of a predetermined angle α degrees (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) around the rotation axis, and is adjacent to the rotation axis. An interval of 2 × β degrees (θ degrees−α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) is spaced from the position detection piece 3326 about the rotation axis (see FIG. 168 (a)). .

  The plurality (three in this case) of the region specifying sensors 3330 are provided so as to be arranged at an angle of θ degrees (60 degrees) around the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are provided in the order of the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c in the clockwise order. In the present embodiment, the three area specifying sensors 3330 position the decoration “1” of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 right above the center of rotation, and select “3”, “4”, and “5”. It is provided at a position corresponding to the numeral decoration (see FIG. 168 (a)).

  The position specifying sensor 3331 is provided at a position at an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) from the first area specifying sensor 3330a in a counterclockwise direction around the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. ing.

  The movable base 3332 has an elevating pin 3332a that protrudes rearward from the lower portion of the rear surface in a columnar shape. The elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 of the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350. The lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting a rotation position.

  By rotating the drive gear 3334 by the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333, the under-back middle decoration body unit 3320 rotates the under-back middle rotation decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3327. Can be. In addition, the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower back middle first decoration board 3322 and the lower back middle decoration board 3329, respectively, thereby forming the lower back middle decoration body 3310. In addition, the lower back middle decoration body 3328 can be decorated with light emission.

  In addition, the front side electronic component such as a part number of a front side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first lower decorative substrate 3322, a region indicating a position where the front side electronic component is arranged, and the like. (In some cases, include the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component). The portion is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and an inner lens (diffusion lens) ) 3321 and the lower back lower first decorative substrate 3322 are arranged in this order, so that the color of the predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back lower first decorative substrate 3322 by silk printing is the inner lens. (Diffusion lens) 321, and through the middle back decoration 3310, and in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized, the character is displayed in a predetermined paint color. , Symbol, and shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be determined.

  Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower lower part have their packages made of white (a color recognized as the same color as white) resin.

  A white resist solution is applied to the entire surface except for pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered on the front surface (front surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back. A white resist layer is formed by the formed white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the first lower decorative board 3322, a white resist is applied by solid white resist over the entire area excluding pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which the connector (surface mount type) is soldered. A resist layer is formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, although not shown, near the front surface electronic component such as a plurality of mounted LEDs, the component number of the front surface electronic component, the front surface Attributes of the front side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the side electronic component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side (In some cases, the type of electronic component may be included.) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous against white. . Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, the component number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is arranged are located near the back side electronic component such as a connector. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the indicated area (including the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the type of the back side electronic component. ) Is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329, the region number sensor 3330, the component number of the surface-side electronic component such as the position specification sensor 3331, and the front-side electronic component are arranged. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the area indicating the position of the front-side electronic component (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component. Is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 in a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and a transparent lower back middle decoration 3328 is included. The second lower decorative board 3329 is arranged behind the lower part, so that the color of a predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the second lower decorative board 3329 by silk printing is lower than the lower back. Through the decoration body 3328, When a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, a character, a symbol, and a shape (that is, the surface indicated by the front side notation portion) are determined by the predetermined paint color. Attribute of the side electronic component) can be determined.

  Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the surface (mounting surface) of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 are such that each package is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). It has become.

  A pad on which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type), an area specifying sensor 3330 (lead type), and a position specifying sensor 3331 (lead type) are soldered on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329, A white resist is formed in a whole area except a through hole, a land, and the like by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). A layer is formed. A pad on which the area specifying sensor 3330 (lead type), the position specifying sensor 3331 (lead type), and a plurality of connectors (surface mounting type) are soldered on the rear surface (rear surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329, A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area except through holes, lands, and the like. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329, although not shown, in the vicinity of the mounted front surface electronic components such as a plurality of LEDs, the component number of the front side electronic component and the front surface Attributes of the front side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the side electronic component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, the front side (In some cases, the type of electronic component may be included.) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous against white. . Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the second lower decorative board 3329, the component number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is to be arranged are located near the back side electronic component such as a connector. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as the indicated area (further include the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the type of the back side electronic component. ) Is printed on a solid-coated white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white coating. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation (rear side notation) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist While the notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the configuration of the present embodiment), the yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation (backside notation) is yellow, the yellow frontside notation (white backside notation for white resist) is less noticeable for white resist.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light emission effect by illuminating with a light emitting unit such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode is variously changed by turning on (light emission) or turning off the light. Therefore, as described above, pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a plurality of LEDs and the like are soldered are provided on the front surface (front surface) of the lower lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower lower middle second decorative substrate 3329. A white resist layer was formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”) in the entire area except for the above, and further, On the solid-colored white resist, the front side notation that allows identification of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors is printed by yellow printing with a yellow paint, thereby turning off the full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface side notation parts inconspicuous with respect to the white resist at the time, furthermore, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned on At the time of light emission), the combination of a solid white resist with high reflectivity and a front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to white reflectivity, The reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3322 and the second lower decorative substrate 3329 can be kept high.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for the silk printing, the yellow printed by the silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to the variation of the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a yellow color range (yellow to the light side, yellow to the dark side). Even if yellow is specified, the color is not exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make the color exactly the same), and the color has a wide range of yellow.

  As shown in FIGS. 163 and 164 and the like, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 extends right and left and both ends are attached to the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250, and a unit base 3351, and a unit base 3351. And a lower-lower middle elevating drive motor 3352 mounted on the front surface of the unit so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and a flat bottom mounted on the rotation shaft of the lower-lower middle elevating drive motor 3352 and partially facing the front side of the unit base 3351. A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354 meshed with the gear-shaped drive gear 3353, the drive gear 3353 and rotatably mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3351, and meshed with the first transmission gear 3354. A second transmission gear 3355 in the form of a spur gear rotatably mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3351; It has a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a that meshes with the motor 355, and a drive pin 3356b that projects cylindrically forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a. A lifting cam gear 3356 rotatably mounted at the upper center.

  In addition, the lower back middle lifting mechanism 3350 has a base end extending in the left-right direction rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and a driving pin 3356b of the lifting cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted in the longitudinal direction. The second slit 3357b, which extends in the longitudinal direction on the distal end side from the first slit 3357a, and in which the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted. And a lifting arm 3357 having a detecting piece 3357c provided at the end thereof, and a lower-lower middle lifting detecting sensor 3358a capable of detecting the detecting piece 3357c of the lifting arm 3357. And a relay board 3358 located on the front side.

  Further, the lower back lower elevating mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the lifting cam gear 3356, and the lifting arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having a vertically extending lifting and lowering slit 3359a into which the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the decorative body unit 3320 is inserted, and a front cover 3359 attached to the front surface of the front cover 3359. A slide rail 3360 for guiding the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, a gear cover 3361 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from the rear, and a tip end side of the lifting arm 3357 move upward (front). In the clockwise direction) Arm 3357 is provided with a spring 3362 that is urged to rotate.

  The lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 is attached to a lower left portion of the unit base 3351 with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The lifting arm 3357 is rotatably mounted at the base end to the right of the lifting cam gear 3356 at the same height as the center of the lifting cam gear 3356. The elevating arm 3357 has a tip end extending leftward from the elevating cam gear 3356.

  The lower back middle relay substrate 3358 includes a lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322, a lower back middle decorative substrate 3329, an area specifying sensor 3330, a position specifying sensor 3331, a lower back middle rotating drive motor 3333, and a lower back middle lifting drive motor. 3352, the connection between the back lower middle elevation detection sensor 3358 a and the effect drive board 1720 is relayed.

  The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided on the front cover 3359 on the right side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. With the lifting slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be supported so as to slide vertically in the vertical direction.

  When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the back-lower middle lifting drive motor 3352, the lower-lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 raises and lowers the cam gear via the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356 a of the lifting cam gear 3356. 3356 can be rotated. Then, the drive pin 3356b revolved by the rotation of the lift cam gear 3356 can rotate the lift arm 3357 through the first slit 3357a in which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be moved up and down together with the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 via the lifting pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

  Next, the movement of the under-back middle rotation decorative body 3310 and the under-back middle decoration body unit 3320 in the under-back middle rendering unit 3300 will be described in detail. In the normal state, the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 is in a lowered position in which the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 has moved to the lowest position. In this normal state, the elevating arm 3357 of the back-and-back middle elevating mechanism 3350 has the tip side located below the base end side, and the detection piece 3357c at the tip moves up and down while the back-and-under middle relay board 3358 is up and down. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 167 (a)).

  In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below the center of its revolution, and is located near the base end of the first slit 3357a of the elevating arm 3357. . More specifically, a normal line passing through a contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. Thus, even if an urging force for rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction is applied by the spring 3362, the line of force of the urging force is applied to the drive pin 3356b contacting the first slit 3357a. Through the center of rotation of the lift cam gear 3356, the lift cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 also does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, and the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 does not move from the lowered position by the urging force of the spring 3362. The biasing force of 3362 does not act on the lower-lower middle elevating drive motor 3352 via the elevating arm 3357 or the like.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the base end of the first slit 3357a. Accordingly, when the lifting / lowering arm 3357 attempts to rotate clockwise by the urging force of the spring 3362, the lifting / lowering cam gear 3356 moves in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b is about to revolve so as to move to the base end of the elevating arm 3357. However, since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end of the first slit 3357a. Since the drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, and the upward and downward movement of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 can be prevented.

  In the normal state, the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 is configured such that the uppermost numeral decoration among the plurality of numeral decorations in the lower lower middle rotation decorative body 3310 is inside the frame of the center role 2500. And can be viewed well from the front (from the player side) (see FIG. 111 and the like). Further, in the normal state, the numeral decoration located at the lowermost position is located behind the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, and the first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower lower middle By illuminating the LED of the second decorative substrate 3329, in addition to the luminous decoration of the lower-back middle rotating decorative body, the first starting port 2002 formed of a transparent member can also be illuminated (see FIG. 120 and the like). ).

  In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the back-and-under middle elevating drive motor 3352, the drive gear 3353 is rotated through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a. As a result, the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates clockwise, and the driving pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 revolves clockwise. When the drive pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a that is in contact with the drive pin 3356b is pressed upward, and the drive pin 3356b slides inside the first slit 3357a toward the distal end, and the elevating arm The distal end of the 3357 is rotated clockwise around the proximal end so that the distal end moves upward.

  When the elevating arm 3357 rotates clockwise, the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted into the second slit 3357b on the distal end side of the elevating arm 3357 is raised by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. , And the lower-back middle decorative body unit 3320 moves upward via the lifting pin 3332a. Then, when the drive pin 3356b moves above the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the base end. At this time, in the elevating arm 3357, since the urging force in the clockwise direction is applied by the spring 3362, the upward movement of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is assisted by the urging force, and the lower back middle The load on the lifting drive motor 3352 is reduced.

  When the drive pin 3356b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches near the base end of the first slit 3357a, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the lower back lowering drive motor 3352 stops and the drive The revolution of the pin 3356b stops. Accordingly, the movement of the lower back decoration unit 3320 by the lifting arm 3357 is stopped, and the lower back decoration unit 3320 is in the state of the ascending position where it is moved to the uppermost position.

  When the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevation cam gear 3356. Accordingly, even if a force is required to rotate the elevating arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the force line of the force is applied to the first slit 3357a. The lift cam gear 3356 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the lift cam gear 3356 via the contacting drive pin 3356b. Accordingly, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 also does not revolve, so that the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the under-back middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the raised position, and the under-bottom decoration body does not move. The own weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the lower-lower middle lifting drive motor 3352 via the lifting arm 3357 or the like.

  When the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the raised position, the lift cam gear 3356 may be further revolved to bring the drive pin 3356b into contact with the proximal end of the first slit 3357a. Accordingly, when the elevating arm 3357 attempts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320, the elevating cam gear 3356 is rotated by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the driving pin 3356b. Try to rotate in the direction around. At this time, the drive pin 3356b is about to revolve so as to move to the base end of the elevating arm 3357. However, since the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the base end of the first slit 3357a. Since the drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, and the downward movement of the back lower middle decoration body unit 3320 can be prevented.

  In the state where the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is moved to the ascending position, most of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is located within the frame of the center role 2500 (further, a game ball rolling in the game area 5a). B is located above the rebound preventing member (stage cover 2515) provided on the center role component 2500 for preventing the B from rebounding from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501), and is positioned forward (by the player). Side), all the numeral decorations can be visually recognized well (see FIG. 201).

  In the case of returning the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 to the lower position from the state in which the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the upper position, the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the opposite direction by the lower back lower middle drive motor 3352, and the lifting arm 3357 Rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the back lower middle decoration unit 3320 moves downward from the raised position. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the lifting arm 3357 is detected by the lifting and lowering detection sensor 3358a of the relay board 3358, the rotation of the driving gear 3353 is stopped by the lifting and lowering drive motor 3352. The center for preventing the lower back middle decorating body unit 3320 from falling from the outside of the center frame (peripheral wall 2501) to the inside of the lower position (further, the game ball B rolling in the game area 5a). The bounce prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the pachinko machine 1 at a position where it overlaps when viewed from the front.

  The lower back middle rendering unit 3300 of the present embodiment rotates the drive gear 3334 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 in the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320, and thereby rotates the lower back middle decoration body 3310 via the rotation gear 3327. Can be rotated about an axis in the front-rear direction. By rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the six numeral decorations provided on the front face rotate like roulette. The under-back middle decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 in any position of the under-back middle decoration unit 3320 such as the lowered position or the raised position.

  In the normal state, the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 of this embodiment is configured such that one of the plurality (here, six) numeral decorations in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located immediately above the rotation center (stop position). are doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 168 (a), in the state where the numeral decoration of “1” in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is located on the upper side, the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotating base 3324 is set to the first area specifying. The three area specifying sensors 3330 of the sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detected, and a plurality of (here, six) position detecting pieces 3326 are detected by the position specifying sensor 3331. Has not been detected.

  Here, first, the relationship between the three area specifying sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 will be described. In the state where the numeral decoration of “1” is set to the stop position, as described above, the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are connected to the area detecting piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324. Is detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), when the first region specifying sensor 3330a, the second region specifying sensor 3330b, and the third region specifying sensor 3330c detect, the numeral decoration of “1” is centered on the stop position. It is located within the range of ± 30 degrees.

  Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect and the third area specifying sensor 3330c does not detect, the numeral decoration of “2” indicates the area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

  Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c do not detect, the numeral decoration of “3” indicates the area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

  Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are not detected, the numeral decoration of “4” indicates the range of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. Located within.

  Further, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b are not detected and the third area specifying sensor 3330c is detecting, the numeral decoration of “5” indicates the area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

  Also, when the first area specifying sensor 3330a is not detected and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are detecting, the numeral decoration of “6” indicates the area of ± 30 degrees around the stop position. Located within range.

  In this way, any combination of the detection and non-detection of the three region specifying sensors 3330, the first region specifying sensor 3330a, the second region specifying sensor 3330b, and the third region specifying sensor 3330c, causes any of the numeral decorations to indicate the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether or not it is located in a stop area including the stop area.

  In addition, since the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 of this embodiment is a stepping motor, the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 rotates by 30 degrees after the area specifying sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop the desired numeral decoration of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 at the stop position. However, in the case of performing such control, it is necessary to identify the origin of the stop position at the stop position while specifying the region of the stop position by the three region identification sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of the 3310 is complicated and the load is increased. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of position detecting pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position specifying sensor 3331 for detecting the position detecting piece 3326 are provided, and the origin is recognized by the position specifying sensor 3331. Thus, the complexity of the control for stopping the rotation of the lower back inside rotary decoration 3310 is suppressed, and the load is reduced.

  More specifically, when it is desired to stop the lower back middle decorative body 3310 at a desired number decoration stop position, the lower back middle decorative body 3310 rotates and the three area specifying sensors 3330 perform the desired stop. When the combination satisfies the position, the position specifying sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detecting piece 3326 because the position specifying sensor 3331 is shifted in the rotation direction at an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first area specifying sensor 3330a. ing. In this state, the desired number is separated from the stop position by a rotation angle of 30 degrees.

  In this state, when the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates by α / 2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees) which is the length of the position detecting piece 3326, the position detecting piece 3326 separates from the position specifying sensor 3331. Thus, the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected. The angle at which the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected is set as the origin. Then, when rotation from the origin (from the origin) by β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees), the rotation of the under-back middle rotation decorative body 3310 by the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped to obtain a desired number. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stop position.

  Note that, in the above description, the rotation stop of the under-back middle rotation decorative body 3310 has been described using an angle. However, the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 including a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is set to 396 steps, in a state where the three area specifying sensors 3330 are in a combination satisfying a desired stop position, if the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates 13 steps, the position detecting piece 3326 is turned. Apart from the position specifying sensor 3331, the position specifying sensor 3331 is not detected. By stopping the rotation of the under-back middle rotating decoration body 3310 by the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 when the position specifying sensor 3331 has rotated by 20 steps with the origin as the origin, the desired numeral decoration is stopped. It can be stopped exactly at the position.

  Next, the light-emitting decoration in the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 169, the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 includes a plurality of LEDs for causing the lower back middle decoration body 3310 to emit light and decorate the lower back middle decoration body 3310. It has a decorative substrate 3322 and a lower second lower decorative substrate 3329. The plurality of LEDs on the lower back middle decoration board 3322 are located behind the six numeral decorations on the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310, and each of the numeral decorations can be independently illuminated.

  On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle decoration board 3329 are located behind a portion outside the plurality of numeral decorations in the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310, and are located outside the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310. The periphery can be illuminated.

  As described above, since the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 can detect the rotation position of the lower back rotating decorative body 3310 to some extent by the three region specifying sensors 3330, based on the detection of the region specifying sensor 3330. By rotating the plurality of LEDs on the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back as appropriate, a state in which only specific numeral decorations are luminously decorated, or a state in which each numeral decoration is luminously decorated in a different color, is rotated. It is possible to show the player an effect that strongly attracts the player's interest.

  Further, in the state where the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the lower number decoration on the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. By illuminating the LED at the relevant portion of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, the first starting port 2002 can be illuminated. Thereby, the player's interest can be directed to the first starting port 2002. Also, when the game ball B wins at the first starting port 2002, the LED of the first decoration substrate 3322 in the lower back is made to emit light (or one light emission mode is determined from a plurality of light emission modes to emit light). ).

  As described above, according to the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the rotating lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions has the area detection of the length extending over the three stop positions. Pieces 3325 and six position detecting pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, and three area specifying sensors 3330 for detecting the area detecting pieces 3325 and one position specifying for detecting the position detecting pieces 3326 Since the sensor 3331 is provided, when the middle back decoration 3310 rotates, the three area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting pieces 3325 decrease sequentially after increasing sequentially from one side in the rotation direction. Is repeated until all the area specifying sensors 3330 are not detected until the lower back middle decoration body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. Not Rukoto, by a combination of area identification sensor 3330 that detects the area detection piece 3325 can roughly grasp the current rotational position of the subplantar rotating decorative body 3310.

  And, since the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 is provided with six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the lower back middle rotation is detected by the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the three area specifying sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331, and the shift of the stop position can be detected. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions with as few as possible.

  In addition, since the stop position of the under-the-bottom rotating decoration 3310 can be accurately grasped, the under-the-bottom rotating decoration 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the stop position shifts to play a game. It is possible to prevent giving a sense of incongruity to the user, and it is possible to entertain the effect (movable effect) of the back-and-under middle rotating decoration 3310, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the stop position of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift of the stop position can be suppressed, and By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotating speed) of the lower lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is more compared to the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 reciprocates. Can be faster. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player by the under-the-rack rotating decoration 3310 that rotates quickly, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of numeral decorations are provided on the front surface, the roulette wheel which stops rotating at an arbitrary stop position after the rounding rotation. Since such an effect can be shown to the player, the player can be excited by whether or not the desired numeral decoration stops rotating at the stop position. It is possible to entertain and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of region specifying sensors 3330 necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position is determined. , The number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 is the same, the ability (grasping of the stop position) by the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 can be maximized, and there are more stop positions. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotating base 3324 that rotates together with the lower middle rotating decoration 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can be set. As a result, the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be further increased.

  Note that, in the above embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally (with) the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The region detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotating body 3310, such as the drive gear 3334.

[5-9 g. Uragami production unit]
Subsequently, the back upper presentation unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 177 and the like. FIG. 170 (a) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 170 (b) is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 171 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper presentation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 172 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper presentation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. is there. FIG. 173 is an exploded perspective view of the back ascending / decorating decorative body unit in the back and top effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG.

  FIG. 175 is an explanatory view showing a rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotating decorative body in the back-up presentation unit from the front. FIG. 176 (a) is an explanatory view showing the elevation mechanism of the back-up / down decoration unit in the back-up presentation unit from the front, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the raising / lowering mechanism of a raising / lowering decoration body unit, and the rotating mechanism of a back decoration rotating body from the front. FIG. 177 is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative substrate from the front in a state where the back-up-and-down decorative body unit is moved to the appearance position in the back-up effect unit.

  The back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is mounted above the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 and in front of the back effect unit 3100. As shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the back upper presentation unit 3400 includes a transparent back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 having an axial shaft 3410 a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface, and a back upper front rotating decorative body. A transparent back upper decorative body 3421 extending left and right, through which a shaft shaft 3410a of the body 3410 penetrates at the center in the left and right direction, and a front surface (hereinafter referred to as “surface (mounting) Surface) "). A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the back upper decorative board 3422, and the back upper decorative board 3422 is provided behind the back upper decorative board 3422 and on the front. And a unit base 3423 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decorative body 3410.

  In addition, the back upper presentation unit 3400 includes a rear cover 3424 attached so as to form a space between the rear cover 3424 and the rear surface of the unit base 3423, and a rotation axis provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 between the unit base 3423 and the front. Meshes with the front upper back rotation drive motor 3425 mounted so as to protrude into the space, the spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 mounted on the rotation shaft of the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425, and the drive gear 3426. A rotating gear 3427 which is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3410a of the front and rear rotating decoration body 3410 and has a detection piece 3427a protruding forward; And a back-upside rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type) that is attached to the rear surface of the Eteiru.

  In addition, the back-up production unit 3400 includes a back-up / down drive motor 3429 attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that the rotation axis projects into the space between the front unit base 3423 and a back-up / down drive A spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3429, a gear portion 3431 a meshing with the motor gear 3430, penetrating the rear cover 3424 from a portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431 a. A drive pin 3431b protruding rearward in a columnar shape, and a detection piece 3431c protruding forward from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a, and an elevating cam gear 3431 rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424. , Which is attached to the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 and detects the detecting piece 3431 c of the lifting cam gear 3431. The rear end of the rear cover 3424 is moved up and down by the rotation of the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 so that the front end side provided with the back-up and down detection sensor 3432 (lead type) and the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 is moved up and down. A back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 attached to the rear surface so as to be rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 is biased so as to rotate in a direction in which the tip side moves upward. And a rod-shaped regulating member 3434 attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424 and regulating the upward movement of the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450.

  As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 has a transparent shaft in which a shaft shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the transparent back-upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 penetrates at the center. A back-upper decorative body 3451 and a back side provided behind the back-upper decorative body 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”). An upper back decoration board 3452 and a back upper back decoration 3451 are attached to the front from the back of the back upper decoration board 3452 and are also rotatably attached to the unit base 3423. A lifting unit base 3453 that rotatably supports the shaft 3440a.

  In addition, the back-up / down decorative body unit 3450 includes a back-upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, which is attached to the front surface of the up-down unit base 3453 so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and a rotation shaft of the back-upper rear rotation drive motor 3454. , A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 meshed with the drive gear 3455 and rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453, and a first transmission gear 3456. And a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3457 that is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453 and that is in mesh with the second transmission gear 3457. And a spur gear-shaped rotating gear 3458 attached to the rear end.

  Further, the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450 includes a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the driving gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotating gear 3458 from behind. 3459, and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the rear upper rear drive motor 3454 from the front.

  The back upper rotating decoration 3410 of the back upper rendering unit 3400 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms. The shaft shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-upper rotary decoration 3410 passes through the back-upper front decoration 3421, the back-upper front decoration board 3422, and the unit base 3423, and the unit base 3423 and the rear. The space extends to the space between the cover 3424 and the cover 3424. The back upper front decorative body 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 at the center in the left-right direction, and the back petals are placed between the front petals. The decoration has a shape as if it were rotated to be located at

  The back upper front decorative substrate 3422 extends right and left over substantially the entire length of the back upper front decorative body 3421 in the left-right direction. By illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 can be light-emitting decorated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 are full-color LEDs that are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multiple colors.

  The back-upper front decoration 3410 and the back-upper decoration 3421 are formed to be transparent, and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short ridges extending in a random direction in a linear manner. In the petal of one of the cherry blossoms simulated by the decorative body 3421, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) is such that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal toward the periphery. That is, a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in the present embodiment) along the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) world view) are printed, and the back upper front decorative body 3421 is printed. The pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) has a constant shading (so that the shading is thinner than the shading at the periphery of the petals and the transparency is higher) in an area excluding the area corresponding to the rotary decorative body 3410. )of A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in the present embodiment) along the concept (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are provided by printing, but the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back Through the upper front decorative body 3421 (even at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 disposed behind the back upper front decorative body 3421 can be visually recognized. .

  The attribute of the front-side electronic component such as the component number of the front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, a region indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like. (Furthermore, the front side notation portion indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component may be included.) On the front surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, a predetermined paint color is printed by silk printing, and behind the transparent back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, a transparent back upper front decorative body 3421, Since the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 is arranged in order, a predetermined paint color printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 by silk printing is applied via the back upper front decorative body 3421. Or back upper front decorative body 3421 In addition, when the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the characters and symbols are displayed in the predetermined paint color through the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410. , The shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be determined.

  The plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the front surface (mounting surface) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 are each made of a white resin (a color recognized as the same color as white) resin. ing.

  A plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type), a back upper rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a back up / down detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the front surface (front surface) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422. In all areas except pads, through holes, lands, and the like, a white resist solution is applied to form a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid white resist”). Is formed. A plurality of connectors (surface mounting type), a back upper rotation detection sensor 3428 (lead type), and a back up / down detection sensor 3432 (lead type) are soldered to the back surface (rear surface) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422. A white resist layer is formed of a solid white resist over the entire area excluding the pads, through holes, lands, and the like. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, the component number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are arranged near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as an area indicating the position where the component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, an area indicating the component number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is to be disposed near the back-side electronic component such as a connector on the back surface (rear surface) of the back-upper front decorative substrate 3422. And other attributes of the back-side electronic component (including the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic component, and the type of the back-side electronic component in some cases. ) Is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous to white.

  The unit base 3423 has a through-hole 3423a through which a back-upside rotation detection sensor 3428 and a back-up / down detection sensor 3432 attached to the rear surface of the back-upper front decorative substrate 3422 are inserted. The rear cover 3424 is coaxial with the shaft shaft 3410a of the back front rotary ornament 3410, and is formed in a circular arc shape through which a cylindrical support shaft 3424a protruding rearward from the rear surface and a drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 are inserted. And an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453.

  The detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427 is detected by the upper back rotation detection sensor 3428 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward. The elevating cam gear 3431 has a gear portion 3431a formed in a semicircular arc shape, and is provided with a drive pin 3431b projecting rearward at a portion bulging outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 penetrates the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back elevating decorative body unit 3450. In addition, the detection piece 3431c of the lifting cam gear 3431 is detected by the back lifting detection sensor 3432 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward.

  The back decoration 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3440a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 penetrates the back-upper decoration 3451, the back-upper decoration board 3452, and the elevating unit base 3453, and the elevating unit base 3453. Extends to the back of the The back upper decorative body 3451 overlaps two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, and rotates so that the rear petals are located between the front petals. It has a decoration in the shape of a creature.

  The back-upper decoration board 3452 can make the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face emit light, so that the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 can be illuminated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back upper back decoration board 3452 are surface-mount type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

  The back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 are formed transparent, and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. To be more specific, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short ridges extending in a random direction in a random manner. In the petal of one of the cherry blossoms simulated by the decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451, the pachinko machine 1 (so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal to the periphery of the petal. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) along the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are applied by printing, Through the decorative body 3440 and the back upper decorative body 3451 (even at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper decorative board 3452 disposed behind the back upper decorative body 3451 can be visually recognized. Yo It has become.

  The surface-side electronic components such as a part number of a surface-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs and connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-upper decorative board 3452 and a region indicating a position where the front-side electronic component is arranged (In some cases, include the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component). The portion is printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-upper decorative substrate 3452 with a predetermined paint color by silk printing, and the transparent back-upper decorative body 3440 is provided behind the transparent back-upper rotary decoration 3440. 3451 and the rear upper back decoration board 3452 are arranged in this order, so that the color of a predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the rear upper back decoration board 3452 by silk printing causes the rear upper back decoration body 3451 to appear. Through or behind the back decoration 3451, and via the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, when a predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where a plurality of LEDs are turned off, a character is displayed in a predetermined paint color. , Symbol, and shape (that is, the attribute of the front-side electronic component indicated by the front-side notation portion) can be determined.

  Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the back upper back decoration board 3452 have respective packages made of white (a color recognized as the same color as white) resin. The housing is made of white resin (also called natural color, a color recognized as being the same color as white (natural color)).

  On the surface (front surface) of the back upper decorative substrate 3452, a white resist solution is applied and formed over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the back upper rear decorative substrate 3452, a white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a connector (surface mount type) is soldered. Are formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back upper back decoration board 3452, although not shown, the component number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are provided near the front side electronic components of the mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the device is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the (It may include a model.) Is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back upper rear decorative substrate 3452, a part number of the back side electronic component, a region indicating a position where the back side electronic component is arranged, etc., in the vicinity of the back side electronic component of the connector. Of the back-side electronic component (also includes the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic component, and the model of the back-side electronic component.) Is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  The elevating unit base 3453 is provided at the base end side (right end side in front view) of the shaft hole 3453a through which the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable, and at the right side of the shaft hole 3453a. And an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453. The motor cover 3460 has a decoration on its front surface imitating cherry blossoms.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white coating. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation (rear side notation) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist While the notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the configuration of the present embodiment), the yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation (backside notation) is yellow, the yellow frontside notation (white backside notation for white resist) is less noticeable for white resist.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light emission effect by illuminating with a light emitting unit such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode is variously changed by turning on (light emission) or turning off the light. For this reason, the front surface (front surface) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 and the back upper rear decorative substrate 3452 is, as described above, in the entire area except for pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). On the white resist, the front side notation, which enables the identification of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, is printed by silk printing with yellow paint. In addition to being able to make the yellow surface-side notation inconspicuous with respect to the resist, in addition to the lighting of the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors (when emitting light) In the back, the front decorative board 3422 and the back are formed by a combination of a solid white resist having a high reflectivity and a front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the white reflectivity. The reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the upper rear decorative substrate 3452 can be kept high.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for the silk printing, the yellow printed by the silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to the variation of the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a yellow color range (yellow to the light side, yellow to the dark side). Even if yellow is specified, the color is not exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make the color exactly the same), and the color has a wide range of yellow.

  Next, the movements of the back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back-upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, and the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 in the back-up effect unit 3400 will be described. In the back state effecting unit 3400, in a normal state, the detection piece 3427a of the rotating gear 3427 attached to the shaft shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is detected by the back upper rotation detection sensor 3428. The upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is in a state where one petal faces upward (see FIG. 175). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425, the back upper front rotation decorative body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

  In the normal state, the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 provided with the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440 on the front end side is in a state of extending in the left-right direction. It is located at the back of the back upper front decorative body 3421 and is in a retracted position invisible from the front (see FIG. 176 (a)). In addition, the part of the back ascending and descending decorative body unit 3450 protruding leftward from the back upper front decorative body 3421 is located behind the back front left rendering unit 3700 in a state where it is assembled on the game board 5, It is not visible from the front.

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3431c of the lifting cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up / down detection sensor 3432. In addition, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is located below the revolving center, and near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back elevating decorative body unit 3450. positioned.

  More specifically, a normal line passing through a contact point of the drive pin 3431b of the lift cam gear 3431 with the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the lift cam gear 3431. Accordingly, even if a force is required to rotate the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward by the own weight of the back elevating and descending decorative body unit 3450, the force is not affected. Since the force line passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the driving pin 3431b in contact with the slit 3453b, the elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450 rotates from the retracted position so that the tip side moves downward. There is no. Therefore, the own weight of the back-up / down decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back-up / down drive motor 3429 via the up / down unit base 3453 and the up / down cam gear 3431.

  In a normal state, the driving pin 3431b of the lifting cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Accordingly, when the elevating unit base 3453 attempts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450, the elevating cam gear 3431 is counterclockwise driven by the force acting from the slit 3453b through the driving pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the direction around. At this time, the drive pin 3431b attempts to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with an end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating unit base 3453 is locked, and the counterclockwise rotation of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450 can be prevented. .

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back up / down drive motor 3429, the up / down cam gear 3431 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430. Thus, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise. When the drive pin 3431b revolves clockwise, the drive pin 3431b moves leftward and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a, The lifting unit base 3453 is rotated counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3453a so that the tip side thereof moves downward by the weight of the back lifting decoration unit 3450.

  When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves clockwise, and moves above a straight line connecting the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the driving pin 3431b is moved. The inside of the slit 3453b slides away from the shaft hole 3453a. When the drive pin 3431b further revolves in the clockwise direction and reaches near the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 is stopped by the back-up / down drive motor 3429, and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b Stops orbiting.

  Thus, the rotation of the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 in the counterclockwise direction via the up-and-down unit base 3453 stops, and the front end side of the back-and-back up and down decorative body unit 3450 including the back-up and down rear rotating decorative body 3440 is moved downward. , The state of the appearance position moved below the back upper front decorative body 3421 (see FIG. 176 (b)). In this appearance position, the front end side of the back-up-and-down decorative body unit 3450 near the center is located below the back-upper front decorative body 3421, so that the back-upper-back rotating decorative body 3440 and the like are visually recognized from the front. It is possible.

  In the state where the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b with the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the up / down cam gear 3431. Thus, even if a force is required to rotate the elevating unit base 3453 further in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450, the line of the force is applied to the slit 3453b. The lift cam gear 3431 does not rotate because it passes through the center of rotation of the lift cam gear 3431 via the driving pin 3431b in contact therewith. Accordingly, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate. , And the weight of the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back up / down drive motor 3429 via the up / down cam gear 3431.

  In addition, in a state where the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the up-and-down cam gear 3431 may be further revolved, and the drive pin 3431b may be brought into contact with the end of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Accordingly, when the elevating unit base 3453 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back elevating decorative body unit 3450, the elevating cam gear 3431 is rotated by the force acting from the slit 3453b through the driving pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the direction around. At this time, the drive pin 3431b attempts to revolve so as to move in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating unit base 3453 is locked, so that the rotation of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450 in the counterclockwise direction can be prevented. .

  In a state where the back ascending / descending decorative body unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the back and upper rotating decorative body 3440 provided on the distal end side becomes visible from the front. In the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-upper-back rotation drive motor 3454, the back-upper-back rotation decoration is performed via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated around the longitudinal axis (see FIG. 176 (b)). Therefore, when the back upper rear rotation decorative body 3440 is visible from the front and the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the rear upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, the rotating rear upper rear rotary decorative body 3440 can be visually recognized. .

  When returning the back-up / down decorative body unit 3450 from the appearance position to the retracted position, the drive pin 3431b of the up-and-down cam gear 3431 is raised and lowered by rotating the motor gear 3430 in the opposite direction by the back-up and down drive motor 3429. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the elevating unit base 3453 rotates clockwise, and the tip side of the back elevating and lowering decorative body unit 3450 moves upward. Then, when the detection piece 3431c of the lifting / lowering cam gear 3431 is detected by the back lifting / lowering detection sensor 3432, the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back lifting / lowering drive motor 3429 is stopped, so that the back lifting / lowering decorative body unit 3450 is moved to the retracted position. Can be restored.

  At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back-up / down decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, and assists the rotation of the back-up / down decorative body unit 3450 to the retreat position side, and the back up / down movement. The load on the drive motor 3429 is reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 177, the back upper presentation unit 3400 of the present embodiment is provided with the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 behind the back upper rotary decoration 3410 and the back upper decoration 3421. By appropriately illuminating the plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decoration substrate 3422, the back upper front decoration 3410 and the back upper decoration 3421 can be illuminated. In addition, since the back upper decoration board 3452 is provided behind the back upper rotation decoration body 3440 and the back upper decoration body 3451, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back upper decoration board 3452 emit light as appropriate. By doing so, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451.

  At this time, while the back-up and down decorative body unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position, the LED of the back-upper decorative board 3452 emits light, so that the back-upper rotary decoration that is light-emitting decorated. The body 3440 and the back decoration 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Back rear left production unit]
Next, the back rear left rendering unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main figures 178 to 184 and the like. FIG. 178 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 178 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 179 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 180 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. FIG. FIG. 181 is an exploded perspective view of the back left rear decoration unit of the back rear left rendering unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which was seen. FIG. 183 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movable mechanism of the back rear left rendering unit from the front. FIG. 184 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back left decoration unit in the back left effect unit.

  The rear left production unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the back box 3010 and in front of the left side of the rear production unit 3100. The back rear left rendering unit 3500 includes a transparent back left rotating decorative body 3510 rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back rear left decorative body 35 rotatably supporting the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 at a lower end side. It comprises a body unit 3520 and a rear left drive unit 3550 mounted in a rear box 3010 by rotating the upper end of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction.

  The back left rotating decorative body 3510 of the back back left rendering unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms. The back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 has a shaft 3510a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface in a columnar shape (see FIG. 182).

  As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the rear back left decorative body unit 3520 includes a transparent back left decorative body 3521 through which the shaft shaft 3510a of the transparent back left rotary decorative body 3510 penetrates at the center. A rear left decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the rear left decorative body 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”); A front cover 3523, which is attached to the rear side of the rear left decorative body 3521 from behind the left decorative substrate 3522 and rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3510 a of the rear rear left rotating decorative body 3510; And a movable base 3524 whose upper end is rotatably attached to the rear left drive unit 3550.

  Further, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3524 so that a rotation axis protrudes between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523, A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3526 attached to the rotation shaft of the left rotation drive motor 3525, and a flat gear meshed with the drive gear 3526 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3510a of the rear left decoration body 3510. And a gear-shaped rotary gear 3527.

  The back back left decorative body 3521 of the back back left decorative body unit 3520 is formed by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back back left rotated decorative body 3510 on the front and rear, and the petals on the back side are the petals on the front side. It is formed in a shape as if rotated so as to be located between them. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 are surface-mounted type full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

  The rear left back decoration 3510 and the rear left decoration 3521 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back left decorative body 3521 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short and linearly extending ridges in a random direction. In the petal of one of the cherry blossoms simulated by the decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521, the pachinko machine 1 (so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal to the periphery of the petal. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in the present embodiment) along the concept of the game board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed, but are rotated left behind and behind. Through the decorative body 3510 and the back left decorative body 3521 (also at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back left decorative board 3522 disposed behind the back left decorative body 3521 can be visually recognized. Yo It has become.

  The attribute of the front-side electronic component such as the component number of the front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear back left decorative substrate 3522, an area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like. (Furthermore, the front side notation portion indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component may be included.) On the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522, a predetermined paint color is printed by silk printing, and behind the transparent back left rotating decorative body 3510, a transparent back left decorative body 3521, Then, since the back rear left decorative board 3522 is arranged in order, the color of a predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative board 3522 by silk printing is the back rear left decorative body 3521 and the back. Rear left rotating decorative body 3510 When the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the front side notation portion) are determined by the predetermined paint color. Can be determined.

  The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 are each made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

  On the surface (front surface) of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522, a white resist liquid is applied and formed over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). On the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear left decorative substrate 3522, a white resist layer is formed by a solid white resist over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a connector (surface mount type) is soldered. Is formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back rear left decorative board 3522, although not shown, the component number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are arranged near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as an area indicating the position where the component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, an area indicating the component number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is to be disposed near the back side electronic component such as a connector on the back side (rear side) of the back back left decorative board 3522. Attributes of the back-side electronic component such as the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic component, and the type of the back-side electronic component in some cases. ) Is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white coating. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation (rear side notation) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist While the notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the configuration of the present embodiment), the yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation (backside notation) is yellow, the yellow frontside notation (white backside notation for white resist) is less noticeable for white resist.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light emission effect by illuminating with a light emitting unit such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode is variously changed by turning on (light emission) or turning off the light. For this reason, as described above, a white resist solution is applied to the entire surface except the pads, through holes, lands, and the like on which the plurality of LEDs are soldered, as described above. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”) formed on the solid-coated white resist. When the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors can be specified, the front side notation portion is printed with a yellow paint by silk printing, so that when the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the yellow surface side with respect to the white resist In addition to being able to make the notation part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (light emission), the solid color with high reflectance is obtained. The reflectance of the surface (front surface) of the back and back left decorative substrate 3522 by a combination of the white resist that has been removed and the front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the white reflectance. Can be kept high.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for the silk printing, the yellow printed by the silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to the variation of the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a yellow color range (yellow to the light side, yellow to the dark side). Even if yellow is specified, the color is not exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make the color exactly the same), and the color has a wide range of yellow.

  The front cover 3523 has a shape in front view formed by combining a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the back left rear decorative body 3521 and a portion extending in a rectangular shape from the upper left of the portion upward. . In the front cover 3523, a plurality of cherry blossom decorations are formed on the front surface of a portion extending in a rectangular shape upward. The front cover 3523 is formed in a shallow container shape opened rearward.

  The movable base 3524 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side extends above the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a penetrating forward and backward on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3524b protruding forward in a columnar shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3524a. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear rear left drive unit 3550 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3524b projects forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

  When the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back left rotation drive motor 3525, the back back left decorative body unit 3520 moves the back left turn decorative body 3510 back and forth through the rotating gear 3527 meshed with the drive gear 3526. Can be rotated about the directional axis.

  As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the rear-left rear drive unit 3550 includes a vertically extending flat reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a that rotatably supports the rear-left rear decorative body unit 3520. A unit base 3552 which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3551 and which is attached to the inside of the back box 3010; a unit cover 3553 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3552; A rear left and right elevating drive motor 3554 attached so that a shaft protrudes between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped motor gear attached to a rotating shaft of the rear and rear left elevating drive motor 3554 3555.

  The back rear left drive unit 3550 is in mesh with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably mounted on the unit cover 3553. The transmission gear 3556 is in the form of a spur gear, and the gear portion 3557a in the form of a spur gear is meshed with the transmission gear 3556. An elevating cam gear 3557 having a drive pin 3557b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3557a in a cylindrical shape, and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from near the outer periphery of the front surface of the gear portion 3557a. The left and right extending first slits 3558a into which the driving pins 3557b of the 3557 are slidably inserted, and the operating pins 3524b of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 extend right and left below the first slit 3558a. Has a second slit 3558b, which is slidably inserted. , A, a link member 3558 are slidably mounted in the vertical direction between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

  Further, the back rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 for urging the link member 3558 upward, a flat partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. The rear left rear relay board 3561 attached to the front surface of the 3553 and the rear left vertical detection sensor 3562 (lead) mounted on the rear surface of the rear left rear relay board 3561 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3557c of the lifting cam gear 3557. Type), and.

  A white resist solution is applied to the front and rear surfaces of the rear rear left relay board 3561 over the entire area except for various connectors, pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which the rear rear elevation sensor 3562 is soldered. Each of the white resist layers is formed by a white coating film formed in this manner (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). Although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the back rear left relay board 3561, the component number of the front-side electronic component and the front-side electronic component are located near the front-side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted connectors. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as an area indicating the position where the component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back rear left relay board 3561, the component number of the back side electronic component and the back side electronic component are provided near the back side electronic components such as the connector and the back left up / down detection sensor 3562. Attributes of the back side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the back side electronic component May be included.) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. The back rear left relay board 3561 is not a decorative board, and is a board provided in the game board 5 although LEDs are not mounted. Therefore, the front and rear faces of the back rear left relay board 3561 are formed by reflecting plates (reflection). When the light emitted from the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, the light is emitted toward the front of the game board 5 by functioning as a board. You can contribute to the production.

  The reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear left rear drive unit 3550 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3551a protrudes forward at an upper portion. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the rear left back decoration unit 3520.

  The unit base 3552 extends vertically longer than the reinforcing plate 3551 such that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is located near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 extends up and down with substantially the same length as the unit base 3552, and is formed in a shallow container shape opened rearward.

  The lift cam gear 3557 has the drive pin 3557b slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558 through the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560. The detection piece 3557c is detected by a rear left up / down detection sensor 3562 that penetrates the unit cover 3553 and projects rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically and has a first slit 3558a near the upper end and a second slit 3558b at the lower end. The spring 3559 has a lower end attached to the link member 3558 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3560.

  The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a that extends in a semicircular shape through which the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is inserted. The back rear left relay board 3561 relays the connection between the back drive left decorative board 3522, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back back left elevating drive motor 3554, the back back left elevating detection sensor 3562, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for doing.

  Subsequently, an operation of the back rear left rendering unit 3500 will be described. In a normal state, the back left left rendering unit 3500 is provided with a back left rotating decorative body 3510 at the lower end (front end) as shown in FIGS. 183 and 184 (a). The unit 3520 is in a retracted position where it is suspended. In this normal state, the back back left decorative body unit 3520 (back back left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700, and is invisible from the front (the player side). Has become.

  In the normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back-left production unit 3500 is located behind the back-front left decorative body 3030 and the back-front left production unit 3700. Only a part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 131 and the like). Note that, in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a portion facing the front of the rear left up / down driving motor 3554 is covered with a portion outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 so that the front side is covered. It becomes invisible from the side (see FIG. 135).

  In this normal state, the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557 is detected by the back rear left elevating detection sensor 3562. In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located immediately below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557, and is located near the left end of the link member 3558 in the first slit 3558a. In a normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3524b located to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is The link member 3558 is located near the left end in the second slit 3558b.

  In this normal state, the link member 3558 is urged upward by the spring 3559, but the normal passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3557b of the elevation cam gear 3557 that is in contact with the first slit 3558a is: Since it passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557 (revolution center of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b via the first slit 3558a by the urging force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Accordingly, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) moves from the retracted position around the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3559 does not act on the rear left rear elevation drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558 and the elevation cam gear 3557 and the like.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. Thus, when the link member 3558 attempts to move upward due to the urging force of the spring 3559, the lifting cam gear 3557 tends to rotate clockwise due to the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 attempts to revolve in the direction to move to the left, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b Cannot be revolved, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557, and the rotation of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 from the retracted position can be prevented.

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear left up / down drive motor 3554, the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates in the counterclockwise direction via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. Thus, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 revolves in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, it slides rightward in the first slit 3558a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3558a upward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will be.

  When the link member 3558 moves upward, the operating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 projecting below and to the right of the support shaft 3551a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. The movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 3551a while the operating pin 3524b slides rightward in the second slit 3558b, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is pressed. It rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the retracted position (see FIGS. 184 (a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is assisted by the urging force of the spring 3559, and the load applied to the rear left up / down driving motor 3554 is reduced.

  In this way, by rotating the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 counterclockwise about the support shaft 3551a, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 provided at the lower end moves rightward. While moving upward, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 moves to the right of the back front left rendering unit 3700 and becomes visible from the front (the player side).

  In the rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the rotation of the rear left decorative body unit 3520 when the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (the state of the retracted position). The position is set as the first appearance position (see FIG. 184 (b)). In the first appearance position, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 has been rotated approximately 44 degrees counterclockwise from the retracted position.

  When the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates counterclockwise from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b slides leftward in the first slit 3558a. When the drive pin 3557b moves to a position immediately above the center of revolution (revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear left up / down drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. .

  As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, the rotation of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 in the counterclockwise direction is stopped, and the state becomes the second appearance position (FIG. )). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 has been rotated approximately 74 degrees counterclockwise from the state of the retracted position.

  When the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located immediately above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, due to the weight of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520, a force is applied to the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 in a clockwise direction about the support shaft 3551a. The link member 3558 attempts to move downward via the operating pin 3524b of the 3524 and the second slit 3558b, but the drive pin 3557b inserted into the first slit 3558a is located immediately above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

  Accordingly, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3557 does not rotate, so that the link member 3558 does not move downward, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates from the state of the second appearance position. In addition, the force of the own weight of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 does not act on the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557 and the like.

  In the state where the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction so that the drive pin 3557b contacts the left end of the first slit 3558a. Is also good. Accordingly, when the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 tries to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a by its own weight, the link member 3558 moves downward via the operating pin 3524b. The lifting cam gear 3557 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from one slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b attempts to revolve to move to the left, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b can revolve. Therefore, the downward movement of the link member 3558 is prevented, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 can be locked so as not to rotate in the state of the second appearance position.

  In a state in which the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retreat position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear left rotating decoration body 3510 provided at the lower end side is forward (the player side). It becomes visible from

  In the back rear left decorative body unit 3520, by rotating the drive gear 3526 by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left rotary decorative body 3510 is rotated via the rotating gear 3527 meshed with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 183). Accordingly, when the rear left rotation drive motor 3525 rotates the driving gear 3526 when the rear left rotation decorative body 3510 is visible from the front (from the player side), the rotating rear left rotary decoration 3510 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by a player.

  When the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is to be returned from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position, which is a normal state, the motor gear 3555 is inverted by the rear left up / down drive motor 3554, and the reverse of the above. , The link member 3558 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557. With the movement of the link member 3558 downward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is moved. It turns in the direction of the retreat position (clockwise direction). When the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557 is detected by the back left elevating detection sensor 3562, the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back left elevating drive motor 3554 is stopped, and the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is retracted. It can be returned to the position.

  As shown in FIG. 183, in the back rear left rendering unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the back rear left decorative board 3522 is provided behind the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521. By appropriately illuminating the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear left decorative board 3522, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521 can be illuminated. At this time, the LED of the rear left back decoration board 3522 is made to emit light in a state where the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side, thereby emitting light. The back left rotating decoration 3510 and the back left decoration 3521 that have been set can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Urago right production unit]
Subsequently, the back right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to main figures 185 to 191 and the like. FIG. 185 (a) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 185 (b) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 186 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view of the rear right production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. FIG. FIG. 188 is an exploded perspective view of the back right right decoration unit of the back right production unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 189 is an exploded view of the back right decoration unit of the back right production unit from the back. FIG. FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the rear right production unit from the front. FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the back right decoration unit in the back right effect unit.

  The rear right production unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end in the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the rear production unit 3100. The back right production unit 3600 is a transparent back right rotation decoration 3610 rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a back right decoration rotatably supporting the rear right rotation decoration 3610 at the lower end side. It comprises a body unit 3620 and a rear right drive unit 3650 mounted in the back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the rear right decorative body unit 3620 around a longitudinal axis.

  The back right rotating decoration 3610 of the back right effecting unit 3600 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms. The back right rotating decorative body 3610 has a shaft shaft 3610a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface in a columnar shape (see FIG. 188).

  As shown in FIG. 188 and FIG. 189, the back right decoration unit 3620 includes a transparent back right decoration 3621 through which a shaft 3610a of a transparent back right rotation decoration 3610 penetrates at the center. A back right decoration board 3622 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on a front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “front surface (mounting surface)”) provided behind the rear right decoration body 3621; A front cover 3623, which is attached to the back of the right back decorative body 3621 from the back of the right decorative board 3622 and rotatably supports the shaft 3610 a of the back right back decorative body 3610; And a movable base 3624 whose upper end is rotatably attached to the rear right drive unit 3650.

  Further, the rear right decoration unit 3620 includes a rear right rotation drive motor 3625 mounted on the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that a rotation axis protrudes between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623, A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3626 attached to the rotation shaft of the right rotation drive motor 3625, and a flat gear meshed with the drive gear 3626 and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3610 a of the rear right rotation decorative body 3610. And a gear-shaped rotary gear 3627.

  The back back right decorative body 3621 of the back back right decorative body unit 3620 is composed of two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back back right rotating decorative body 3610, and the petals on the back side and the petals on the front side are stacked. It is formed in such a shape as to be rotated so as to be located between them. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 are full-color LEDs that are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multiple colors.

  The back right rotating decoration 3610 and the back right decoration 3621 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the back right rotation decoration 3610 and the back right decoration 3621 are formed in a pear-skin pattern by a plurality of short and linearly extending ridges in a random direction. In the petal of one of the cherry blossoms simulated by the decorative body 3610 and the back right right decorative body 3621, the pachinko machine 1 (so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center of the petal toward the periphery of the petal. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in the present embodiment) along the concept of the gaming board 5 (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5)) are printed, but are rotated right behind the back. Through the decorative body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621 (even at the periphery of the petal), the surface (mounting surface) of the back right decorative board 3622 disposed behind the back right decorative body 3621 can be visually recognized. Yo It has become.

  The attribute of the front-side electronic component such as a component number of a front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear right decoration board 3622, a region indicating a position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like. (Furthermore, the front side notation portion indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component may be included.) On the surface (mounting surface) of the back right decoration board 3622, a predetermined paint color is printed by silk printing, and behind the transparent back right rotation decoration 3610, a transparent back right decoration 3621, Since the back right decoration board 3622 is arranged in order, the color of a predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back back right decoration board 3622 by silk printing is the back right decoration body 3621 and the back. Rear right rotation decoration 3610 When the predetermined paint color can be visually recognized in a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the front side notation portion) are determined by the predetermined paint color. Can be determined.

  The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the rear right back decoration board 3622 have their packages made of white resin (color recognized as the same color as white).

  On the surface (front surface) of the rear right back decorative board 3622, a white resist solution is applied and formed over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mounting type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). On the rear surface (rear surface) of the rear right decorative substrate 3622, a white resist layer made of a solid white resist is applied over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a connector (surface mount type) is soldered. Are formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back rear right decorative board 3622, although not shown, the component number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are arranged near the mounted front side electronic components such as LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as an area indicating the position where the component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, an area indicating the component number of the back-side electronic component and the position where the back-side electronic component is to be disposed near the back-side electronic component such as a connector on the back (rear side) of the back-and-right decoration board 3622. Attributes of the back-side electronic component such as the shape of the back-side electronic component, the size of the back-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic component, and the type of the back-side electronic component in some cases. ) Is printed by silk printing on a solid white resist with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white coating. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation (rear side notation) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist While the notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the configuration of the present embodiment), the yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation (backside notation) is yellow, the yellow frontside notation (white backside notation for white resist) is less noticeable for white resist.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light emission effect by illuminating with a light emitting unit such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode is variously changed by turning on (light emission) or turning off the light. For this reason, as described above, a white resist solution is applied to the entire surface except the pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered, as described above. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”) formed on the solid-coated white resist. When the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors can be specified, the front side notation portion is printed with a yellow paint by silk printing, so that when the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the yellow surface side with respect to the white resist In addition to being able to make the notation part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned on (light emission), the solid color with high reflectance is obtained. The reflectance of the front (front) surface of the back and right decoration substrate 3622 is determined by the combination of the white resist that has been removed, and the front side notation portion printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the white reflectance. Can be kept high.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for the silk printing, the yellow printed by the silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to the variation of the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a yellow color range (yellow to the light side, yellow to the dark side). Even if yellow is specified, the color is not exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make the color exactly the same), and the color has a wide range of yellow.

  The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape in which a shape in a front view is a combination of a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the back right rear decorative body 3621 and a portion extending in a square upward from the upper right of the portion. . In the front cover 3623, a plurality of cherry blossom decorations are formed on the front surface of a portion extending in a rectangular shape upward. The front cover 3623 is formed in a shallow container shape opened rearward.

  The movable base 3624 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and has an upper end extending above the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a penetrating forward and backward on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3624b protruding forward in a columnar shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3624a. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 so as to be relatively rotatable. The operating pin 3624b projects forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

  When the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rear right decoration unit 3620 moves the rear right rotation decoration 3610 back and forth through the rotation gear 3627 meshed with the drive gear 3626. Can be rotated about the directional axis.

  As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a vertically extending flat reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651a that rotatably supports the rear right decorative body unit 3620. A vertically extending unit base 3652 mounted on the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and mounted in the back box 3010; a vertically extending unit cover 3653 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3652; A rear-right driving motor 3654, which is attached to the upper rear of the front of the unit 3653 so that a rotation shaft protrudes between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653, and a rotation shaft of the rear-right driving motor 3654, which is attached to the rear. And a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655.

  In addition, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a meshing with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3657a in a cylindrical shape, and a front surface of the gear portion 3657a. An elevating cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c protruding forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery, a first slit 3658a extending left and right into which a drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. A second slit 3658b extending left and right below 3658a and slidably inserted with an operating pin 3624b of a movable base 3624 of the rear right decorative body unit 3620, and has a unit base 3652 and a unit cover 3653. Link section that is slidable up and down between It is provided with a 3658, a.

  Further, the rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3659 for urging the link member 3658 upward, a flat partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevating cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. Rear right relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of the rear and rear right relay board 3661 attached to the rear of the rear right relay board 3661, and a rear right up / down detection sensor 3662 (lead) that can detect the detecting piece 3657c of the lifting cam gear 3657. And a lower base 3663 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652 and the lower portion of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

  A white resist solution is applied to the front and rear surfaces of the rear right rear relay board 3661 over the entire area except for various connectors, pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which the rear right vertical movement detection sensor 3662 is soldered. Each of the white resist layers is formed by a white coating film formed in this manner (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). Although not shown, on the front surface (front surface) of the back rear right relay board 3661, the component number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are provided near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted connectors. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as an area indicating the position where the component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back rear right relay board 3661, the component number of the back side electronic component, the back surface, Attributes of the back side electronic component such as a region indicating the position where the side electronic component is arranged (further, the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, the back side (The type of electronic component may be included in some cases.) Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous against white. . The back rear right relay board 3661 is not a decorative board, and is a board provided in the game board 5 although LEDs are not mounted on the back board. When the light emitted from the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 is refracted inside the game board 5, the light is emitted toward the front of the game board 5 by functioning as a board. It can contribute to the production.

  The reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate extending vertically, and a support shaft 3651a protrudes forward at the upper part. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decoration unit 3620.

  The unit base 3652 extends above the reinforcing plate 3651 such that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to approximately the same length as the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (the lower base 3663), and is formed in a shallow container shape opened rearward.

  The lift cam gear 3657 has a drive pin 3657b slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658 through the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660. The detection piece 3657c is detected by a rear right up / down detection sensor 3662 that protrudes rearward through the unit cover 3653. The link member 3658 extends vertically and has a first slit 3658a near the upper end and a second slit 3658b at the lower end. The spring 3659 has a lower end attached to the link member 3658 and an upper end attached to the partition plate 3660.

  The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semicircular shape through which the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the back right decoration board 3622, the back right rotation drive motor 3625, the back right elevation drive motor 3654, and the back right elevation detection sensor 3662, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for doing.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back right effect unit 3600 will be described. In the normal state, the rear right production unit 3600 has a rear right rotation decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side (front end side) as shown in FIGS. 190 and 191 (a). The unit 3620 is in a retracted position where the unit 3620 hangs down. In this normal state, the back right decoration unit 3620 (back right rotation decoration 3610) is located behind the front right rendering unit 3800, and is invisible from the front (player side). Has become.

  In the normal state assembled on the game board 5, the back right effect unit 3600 is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back front right effect unit 3800, and the whole is forward (player side). It is not visible from.

  In this normal state, the detecting piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657 is detected by the rear right and left elevating detection sensor 3662. In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is located immediately below the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657, and is located near the right end in the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658. In a normal state, the link member 3658 is located at the lower moving end, and the operating pin 3624b located to the left of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is The link member 3658 is located near the right end in the second slit 3658b.

  In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged upward by the spring 3659, but the normal passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3658a of the drive pin 3657b of the elevation cam gear 3657 is: Since it passes through the rotation center of the lifting cam gear 3657 (revolution center of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b via the first slit 3658a by the biasing force of the spring 3659, the drive pin 3657b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the back right decoration body unit 3620 (back right rotation decoration 3610) moves from the retracted position around the shaft hole 3624a (the support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624. It does not rotate, and the biasing force of the spring 3659 does not act on the rear right lifting drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658 and the lifting cam gear 3657 and the like.

  In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. Thus, when the link member 3658 attempts to move upward due to the urging force of the spring 3659, the lifting cam gear 3657 attempts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. . At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 attempts to revolve in the direction to move to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b Cannot be revolved, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3657, and the rotation of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position can be prevented.

  In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear right up / down drive motor 3654, the up / down cam gear 3657 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the gear portion 3657a. Drive pin 3657b revolves clockwise. When the drive pin 3657b revolves clockwise, it slides to the left in the first slit 3658a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3658a upward, and the link member 3658 moves upward. Becomes

  When the link member 3658 moves upward, the operating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the back right decorative body unit 3620 projecting below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. While the operating pin 3624b slides leftward in the second slit 3658b, the movable base 3624 rotates clockwise about the support shaft 3651a, and the back right decorative body unit 3620 retreats. It rotates clockwise from the position (see FIGS. 191 (a) and (b)). At this time, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is assisted by the urging force of the spring 3659, and the load applied to the rear right-up / down drive motor 3654 is reduced.

  By rotating the back right decoration unit 3620 clockwise about the support shaft 3651a in this manner, the back right rotation decoration 3610 provided on the lower end side moves to the left. As a result, the back right rotating decorative body 3610 moves to the left of the back front right rendering unit 3800, and becomes visible from the front (the player side).

  In the back right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the rotation position of the back right decorative body unit 3620 when the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (the state of the retracted position). Is the first appearance position (see FIG. 191 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 has been rotated approximately 44 degrees clockwise from the state of the retracted position.

  Then, when the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates clockwise from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b slides rightward in the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to a position immediately above the center of revolution (revolves by 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the rear right up / down drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. .

  This stops the upward movement of the link member 3658, stops the clockwise rotation of the back right decorative body unit 3620, and enters the state of the second appearance position (FIG. 191 (c)). See). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 has been rotated approximately 74 degrees clockwise from the state of the retracted position.

  In a state where the rear right decoration unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located immediately above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, due to the weight of the back right decorative body unit 3620, a force of the back right decorative body unit 3620 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3651a acts, and the back movable right decorative body unit 3620 is movable by the force. The link member 3658 tends to move downward via the operation pin 3624b of the base 3624 and the second slit 3658b, but the drive pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is positioned right above the revolving center. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

  Accordingly, since the driving pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3657 does not rotate, so that the link member 3658 does not move downward, and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates from the state of the second appearance position. In addition, the rear right decoration body unit 3620 does not act on the rear right lifting motor 3654 via the link member 3658 and the lifting cam gear 3657.

  It should be noted that, when the rear right decorative body unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 is further rotated clockwise so that the drive pin 3657b is brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the rear right decorative body unit 3620 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a by its own weight, the link member 3658 moves downward via the operating pin 3624b. By the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b, the lifting cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the driving pin 3657b attempts to revolve to the right, but since the driving pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the driving pin 3657b can revolve. Therefore, the downward movement of the link member 3658 is prevented, and the rear right decorative body unit 3620 can be locked non-rotatably in the second appearance position.

  In a state where the back right decoration unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back right rotation decoration body 3610 provided at the lower end side is forward (the player side). It becomes visible from

  In the back right decoration unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the back right rotation drive motor 3625, the back right rotation decoration 3610 is rotated via the rotation gear 3627 meshed with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated about an anterior-posterior axis (see FIG. 190). Therefore, when the back rear right rotation decorative body 3610 is visible from the front (from the player side) and the driving gear 3626 is rotated by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the rotating back rear right rotational decoration 3610 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by a player.

  When the back right decorative body unit 3620 is to be returned from the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the normal retracted position, the back right driving motor 3654 rotates the motor gear 3655 in the opposite direction. , The link member 3658 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657. With the downward movement of the link member 3658, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is moved. It turns in the direction of the retreat position (counterclockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657 is detected by the back right elevating detection sensor 3662, the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back right elevating drive motor 3654 is stopped, thereby retreating the back right decorative body unit 3620. It can be returned to the position.

  As shown in FIG. 190, the back right right decoration unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with the back right decoration board 3622 behind the back right rotating decoration 3610 and the back right decoration 3621, By appropriately illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back right decoration board 3622, the back right rotating decoration 3610 and the back right decoration 3621 can be illuminated. At this time, the LED on the back right decoration board 3622 emits light in a state where the back right decoration body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, thereby emitting light. The back right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621 that have been set can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Back left production unit]
Next, the back front left rendering unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 to 195 and the like. FIG. 192 (a) is a perspective view of the back front left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 192 (b) is a perspective view of the back front left rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 193 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decoration unit in the back front left rendering unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 194 is an exploded view of one back front left decoration unit in the back left production unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the swash plate seen from behind. FIG. 195 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left rendering unit in a closed state, and FIG. 195 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left rendering unit in an open state.

  The back front left rendering unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear left rendering unit 3500 so that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back front left rendering unit 3700 includes three back front left decorations of a first back front left decorative body unit 3710A, a second back front left decorative body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in order from the top. It is composed of a body unit 3710.

  In the back front left rendering unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 195, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. The upper end is inclined diagonally so that it moves to the right. The shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is slightly different from that of the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C.

  As shown in FIG. 193 and FIG. 194, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 of the back front left rendering unit 3700 is a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating back and forth, and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. Shutter support member 3712, and are vertically arranged on the front surface of the shutter support member 3712, and each is rotatably supported around a left-right axis so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. A shutter unit 3730.

  The back front left decorative body unit 3710 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from behind, and is provided behind a transparent flat front back left decorative body 3713 and a back front left decorative body 3713. The front left decorative board 3714 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”) and the rear front left decorative board 3714 are covered from behind. And a rear cover 3715 attached to the front cover 3711 and attached to the front of the rear left and right effect unit 3500.

  Further, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a back front A transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger of the left drive solenoid 3717 and a transmission plate 3718 are attached to the support plate 3716 so as to be rotatable around a left-right axis. It includes a rotating link member 3719 and an opening / closing slider 3720 that slides up and down to open and close the shutter unit 3730 by the rotation of the link member 3719.

  The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 has an outer shape formed by turning a “convex” character to the right and rounding the corner (a shape in which a “pine” is designed). On the front surface of the front cover 3711, a portion where a metal decorative portion 3711a having metallic luster is formed is arranged. In other words, a part having a metal decoration part 3711a having metallic luster is arranged near the front cover 3711. In the present embodiment, the part having the metal decoration part 3711a having metallic luster is molded integrally with the front cover 3711. However, the part having the metallic decoration part 3711a is molded separately from the front cover 3711, and the molded part and the front cover 3711 may be constructed.

  The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3711a can give a sense of quality, and the front cover 3711 can be made more conspicuous, so that the presence of the front cover 3711 can be further emphasized. The metal decorative portion 3711a is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by the hot stamping described above. The front cover 3711 has a metal decorative portion 3711a formed only on the front surface thereof, and no metal decorative portion 3711a is formed on the side surface of the front cover 3711. Accordingly, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 to the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be increased by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3711. It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the back front left decorative substrate 3714 and damage the back front left decorative substrate 3714. Therefore, the insulating property against a discharge such as static electricity or a short circuit can be improved.

  The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712a that rotatably support the shaft portions 3733 of the respective shutter members 3731 in the shutter unit 3730 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss 3712b that protrudes cylindrically forward from near the left end of the front surface. The boss 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening / closing slider 3720, and has a support plate 3716 attached to the tip.

  The shutter unit 3730 includes a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 includes a flat shutter 3732 extending left and right, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends in the left and right direction of the shutter 3732, and a leftward projection after projecting in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the tip of the left shaft portion 3733. And a crankshaft 3734 extending in a columnar direction.

  The shutter 3732 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged, with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crankshaft 3734 is located behind the shaft portion 3733.

  The shutter member 3731 can rotate around the shaft portion 3733 in the left-right direction by rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3733 by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712. The crankshaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the opening / closing slider 3720.

  Although not shown, the back front left decorative body 3713 includes characters, items, logos, and the like according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The picture is given. The back front left decorative body 3713 functions as an inner lens capable of diffusing light from the LED of the back front left decorative board 3714. The surface of the back front left decorative body 3713, which is an inner lens, is subjected to lens cutting so as to be able to irregularly refract light (formed in a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear front left decorative board 3714 to be arranged are difficult to clearly recognize from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the back front left decorative body 3713 (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or on the back surface instead of the front surface of the back front left decorative body 3713. May be subjected to lens cutting (or may be formed into a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 are surface-mounted full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors.

  In an open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is open, as will be described later, the front left back decoration 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is in a state where it can be visually recognized from the front. In this open state, the front left decorative body 3713 is formed transparent, so that the front surface of the front left decorative board 3714 disposed behind the front left decorative body 3713 through the front left decorative body 3713 (mounting). Surface) can be visually recognized.

  The attribute of the front-side electronic component such as the component number of the front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, an area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like. (Furthermore, the front side notation portion indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component may be included.) A back front left decorative board 3714 is arranged behind a transparent back front left decorative body 3713 while being printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 with a predetermined paint color by silk printing. Therefore, in the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is open, the color of a predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 by silk printing passes through the back front left decorative body 3713. Is visible. If the color of the predetermined paint can be visually recognized in the state where the number of LEDs are turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic components indicated by the front-side notation portion) are changed according to the predetermined paint color. Can be determined.

  The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are each made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white).

  On the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, a white resist solution is applied and formed over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, a white resist is applied by a solid white resist over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. A layer is formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, although not shown, the component number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are provided near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as an area indicating the position where the component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714, the component number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is arranged are located near the back side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the indicated area (including the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the type of the back side electronic component. ) Is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white coating. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation (rear side notation) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist While the notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the configuration of the present embodiment), the yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation (backside notation) is yellow, the yellow frontside notation (white backside notation for white resist) is less noticeable for white resist.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light emission effect by illuminating with a light emitting unit such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode is variously changed by turning on (light emission) or turning off the light. For this reason, as described above, a white resist solution is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 except for pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”) formed on the solid-coated white resist. When the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors can be specified, the front side notation portion is printed with a yellow paint by silk printing, so that when the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the yellow surface side with respect to the white resist In addition to being able to make the notation part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (light emission), the solid color with high reflectance is obtained. Of the front (front) front and back of the back decoration board 3714 by a combination of the white resist thus obtained and the front side notation printed by silk printing with yellow paint very close to the white reflectance. Can be kept high.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for the silk printing, the yellow printed by the silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to the variation of the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a yellow color range (yellow to the light side, yellow to the dark side). Even if yellow is specified, the color is not exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make the color exactly the same), and the color has a wide range of yellow.

  The support plate 3716 extends up and down with the plate surface facing in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent rightward. In the support plate 3716, a portion bent rightward on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion projects rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. I have. In addition, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a that protrudes rightward from the vicinity of the lower end in a columnar shape. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

  The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 in a direction in which the plunger moves forward and backward. The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is urged by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. When the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716 is inserted, the link member 3719 can rotate around the support pin 3716a around the left-right axis. The link member 3719 has a first connection portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3716a is inserted, and a second connection portion connected to the opening / closing slider 3720. A connection portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

  The opening / closing slider 3720 extends up and down with substantially the same length as the height of a shutter unit 3730 including a plurality of shutter members 3731, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3720a, and a slit 3720b into which the boss 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

  Next, the operation of the back front left rendering unit 3700 will be described. In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 195 (a), the back front left rendering unit 3700 has a state in which the shutter 3732 of the shutter member 3731 of the shutter unit 3730 has its plate surface directed forward. Of the front cover 3711 is closed by the shutter 3732. In this normal state, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is invisible from the front (from the player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front left decorative body 3713 is provided on the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (the plurality of shutters 3732). Have been.

  In a normal state, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward by the urging force of the spring. In a normal state, the opening / closing slider 3720 is located at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is located above the shaft portion 3733.

  In this normal state, when the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to When the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connection portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates about the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3719b opposite to the first connecting portion 3719a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the opening / closing slider 3720 connected to the second connecting portion 3719b to move downward.

  When the open / close slider 3720 moves downward, the crankshaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3734 is located below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates around the shaft portion 3733. Accordingly, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 is oriented in the up-down direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the front side provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is opened. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 195 (b)).

  Thereafter, by turning off the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the plunger that has been moving upward is moved downward by the urging force of the spring. The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is a normal state.

  As described above, according to the back front left rendering unit 3700 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3730 by the back front left driving solenoid 3717, the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3730 is changed from the back front left decorative body 3713. Can be switched to the decoration (pattern), and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

  In addition, since the back front left decorative board 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative body 3713, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3714 can emit light. Thus, the player can see the shutter unit 3730 decorated with light emission, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, the plurality of LEDs on the front left decoration board 3714 emit light, so that the light emitting decoration left front panel 3714 is turned on. The decorative body 3713 can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the back front left rendering unit 3700, three back front left decorative body units of a first back front left decorative body unit 3710A, a second back front left decorative body unit 3710B, and a third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. Each of the 3710s can independently open and close the shutter unit 3730 and decorate it with light, so by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front left decorative units 3710, a variety of effects can be provided to the player. I can show you.

[5-9k. Ura-mae right direction unit]
Next, the back front right rendering unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 196 to 199 and the like. FIG. 196 (a) is a perspective view of the back front right rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 196 (b) is a perspective view of the back front right rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 197 is an exploded perspective view of one back-front right decoration unit in the back-front right rendering unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 198 is an exploded view of one back-front right decoration unit in the front-right rendering unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the swash plate seen from behind. FIG. 199 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the front right production unit in a closed state, and FIG. 199 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the rear right production unit in an open state.

  The back front right rendering unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back rear right rendering unit 3600 such that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back box 3010. . The back front right rendering unit 3800 includes three back front right decorations of a first back front right decoration unit 3810A, a second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration unit 3810C in order from the top. It is composed of a body unit 3810.

  In the back front right rendering unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 199, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. The upper end is inclined diagonally so as to move to the left. The shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is slightly different from that of the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C.

  As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the back right decoration unit 3810 of the back right effecting unit 3800 is a frame-shaped front cover 3811 that penetrates forward and backward, and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. Shutter support member 3812, and are vertically arranged on the front surface of the shutter support member 3812, and each is rotatably supported around a left-right axis so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. And a shutter unit 3830.

  The back front right decorative body unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from behind, and is provided behind a transparent flat back right front decorative body 3813 and a back front right decorative body 3813. The front right decorative board 3814 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “front surface (mounting surface)”), and the rear front right decorative board 3814 are covered from behind. And a rear cover 3815 attached to the front cover 3811 and attached to the front of the rear right and rear effect unit 3600.

  Further, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front right solenoid 3817. A transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger of the right drive solenoid 3817 and a transmission plate 3816 are attached to the support plate 3816 so as to be rotatable around a left-right axis. It includes a link member 3819 that turns, and an opening / closing slider 3820 that slides up and down by the rotation of the link member 3819 to open and close the shutter unit 3830.

  The front cover 3811 of the back-front right decorative body unit 3810 has an outer shape formed by turning a “convex” character to the left and rounding the corner (a shape in which “pine” is designed). On the front surface of the front cover 3811, a portion where a metal decorative portion 3811a having a metallic luster is formed is arranged. In other words, a portion having a metal decorative portion 3811a having metallic luster is arranged near the front cover 3811. In the present embodiment, the portion having the metal decoration portion 3811a having metallic luster is molded integrally with the front cover 3811. However, the portion having the metallic decoration portion 3811a is molded separately from the front cover 3811, and the molded portion and the front cover 3811 are formed separately. 3811 may be assembled.

  The metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3811a can give a sense of quality and the front cover 3811 can be made more conspicuous, so that the presence of the front cover 3811 can be further emphasized. The metal decorative portion 3811a is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment) by the above-described hot stamping. The front cover 3811 has a metal decorative portion 3811a formed only on the front surface thereof, and has no metal decorative portion 3811a formed on the side surface of the front cover 3811. Accordingly, the creepage distance from the metal decorative portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 to the back front right decorative substrate 3814 can be made longer by at least the length of the side surface of the front cover 3811. It is possible to prevent the accumulated static electricity from flowing to the front right decorative substrate 3814 and damaging the front right decorative substrate 3814. Therefore, the insulating property against a discharge such as static electricity or a short circuit can be improved.

  The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearings 3812a that rotatably support the shaft portions 3833 of the respective shutter members 3831 in the shutter unit 3830 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss 3812b that protrudes cylindrically forward from near the right end of the front surface. The boss 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening / closing slider 3820, and has a support plate 3816 attached to the tip.

  The shutter unit 3830 includes a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3832 extending to the left and right, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a cylindrical shape from both ends in the left and right direction of the shutter 3832, and a rightward projection after protruding in a direction perpendicular to the axis from the tip of the right shaft portion 3833. And a crankshaft 3834 extending in a columnar direction.

  The shutter 3832 is formed to have a length and a shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged, with respect to the shape inside the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 protrudes from near the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crankshaft 3834 is located behind the shaft portion 3833.

  The shutter member 3831 can rotate around the shaft 3833 in the left-right direction with the shaft portion 3833 being rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812. The crankshaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the opening / closing slider 3820.

  Although not illustrated, the back front right decorative body 3813 includes characters, items, logos, and the like according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The picture is given. The back front right decorative body 3813 functions as an inner lens capable of diffusing light from the LED of the back front right decorative board 3814. The surface of the right front decorative body 3813, which is an inner lens, is subjected to lens cutting (formed into a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear right decoration board 3814 to be arranged are difficult to visually recognize from the player side. In addition, a lens cut may be performed on the back surface together with the front surface of the back front right decorative body 3813 (or may be formed in a polyhedron), or on the back surface instead of the front surface of the back front right decorative body 3813. May be subjected to lens cutting (or may be formed into a polyhedron). The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 are full-color LEDs that are surface-mounted and capable of emitting multiple colors.

  In an open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is open, the rear right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is visible from the front as described later. In this open state, the back front right decorative body 3813 is formed transparent, so that the surface of the back front right decorative board 3814 disposed behind the back front right decorative body 3813 through the back front right decorative body 3813 (mounting). Surface) can be visually recognized.

  Note that attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a component number of a front-side electronic component such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, an area indicating a position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the like. (Furthermore, the front side notation portion indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component may be included.) A back-front right decorative board 3814 is arranged behind the transparent back-front right decorative body 3813 while being printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back-front right decorative board 3814 with a predetermined paint color by silk printing. Therefore, in the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened, the color of a predetermined paint printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 by silk printing passes through the back front right decorative body 3813. Is visible. If the color of the predetermined paint can be visually recognized in the state where the number of LEDs are turned off, the characters, symbols, and shapes (that is, the attributes of the front-side electronic components indicated by the front-side notation portion) are changed according to the predetermined paint color. Can be determined.

  Further, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 have their packages made of white resin (color recognized as the same color as white).

  On the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814, a white resist liquid is applied and formed over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which a plurality of LEDs (surface mount type) are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). On the back surface (rear surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, a white resist is applied by solid white resist over the entire area except pads, through holes, lands, etc. to which various connectors (surface mount type) are soldered. A layer is formed. Further, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, the component number of the front side electronic component and the front side electronic component are arranged near the front side electronic components such as a plurality of mounted LEDs. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as an area indicating the position where the component is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, the front-side electronic component Is printed on the solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white. Although not shown, on the back surface (rear surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814, the component number of the back side electronic component and the position where the back side electronic component is arranged are located near the back side electronic components such as a plurality of connectors. The attributes of the back side electronic component such as the indicated area (including the shape of the back side electronic component, the size of the back side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the back side electronic component, and the type of the back side electronic component. ) Is printed on a solid white resist by silk printing with a yellow paint that is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white.

  Here, the reason why a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid and yellow is used as the paint for silk printing will be described. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white coating. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, red is conspicuous when the background is white, and when the front side notation (rear side notation) is red, the red front side with respect to the white resist While the notation part (the notation part on the back side of red with respect to the white resist) is conspicuous, in the combination of white and yellow (the configuration of the present embodiment), the yellow is not conspicuous when the background is white, and When the side notation (backside notation) is yellow, the yellow frontside notation (white backside notation for white resist) is less noticeable for white resist.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light emission effect by illuminating with a light emitting unit such as a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration board, the plurality of LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, as described above. The light emission mode is variously changed by turning on (light emission) or turning off the light. For this reason, as described above, a white resist solution is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 except for pads, through holes, lands, and the like to which a plurality of LEDs are soldered. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”) formed on the solid-coated white resist. When the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors can be specified, the front side notation portion is printed with a yellow paint by silk printing, so that when the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the yellow surface side with respect to the white resist In addition to being able to make the notation part inconspicuous, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned on (light emission), the solid color with high reflectance is obtained. The reflectance of the front (front) surface of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is determined by the combination of the white resist that has been removed and the front side notation printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the white reflectance. Can be kept high.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for the silk printing, the yellow printed by the silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to the variation of the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a yellow color range (yellow to the light side, yellow to the dark side). Even if yellow is specified, the color is not exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make the color exactly the same), and the color has a wide range of yellow.

  The support plate 3816 extends up and down with the plate surface facing in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape in which a front end side is bent leftward. In the support plate 3816, a portion bent leftward on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion projects rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. I have. In addition, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a that protrudes leftward from the vicinity of the lower end in a columnar shape. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

  The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 in a direction in which the plunger moves forward and backward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is urged by a spring in a direction in which the plunger projects downward. By inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816, the link member 3819 can rotate around the support pin 3816a around the left-right axis. The link member 3819 has a first connection portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 provided on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3816a is inserted, and a second connection portion connected to the opening / closing slider 3820. A connection portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

  The opening / closing slider 3820 extends up and down with substantially the same length as the height of a shutter unit 3830 including a plurality of shutter members 3831, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. 3820a, and a slit 3820b into which the boss 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

  Next, an operation of the back front right rendering unit 3800 will be described. In the normal state, the back front right rendering unit 3800 has a state in which the shutter 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 has its plate surface directed forward as shown in FIG. 199 (a). The inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed by the shutter 3832. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is invisible from the front (the player side). Although illustration is omitted, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern provided on the rear back right decoration 3813 is provided on the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (the plurality of shutters 3832). Have been.

  In a normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward by the urging force of the spring. In a normal state, the opening / closing slider 3820 is located at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is located above the shaft portion 3833.

  In this normal state, when the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connection portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3819b on the opposite side to the first connecting portion 3819a moves downward. When the link member 3819 moves downwardly of the second connecting portion 3819b, the opening / closing slider 3820 connected to the second connecting portion 3819b moves downward.

  When the open / close slider 3820 moves downward, the crankshaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is moved so that the crankshaft 3834 is positioned lower than the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates around the shaft portion 3833. Accordingly, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 is oriented in the up-down direction, so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the front side provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is opened. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 199 (b)).

  Thereafter, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is de-energized (OFF), so that the plunger that has been moving upward moves downward by the urging force of the spring. The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is a normal state.

  As described above, according to the back front right rendering unit 3800 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3830 can be removed from the back front right decorative body 3813. Can be switched to the decoration (pattern), and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

  In addition, since the back front right decorative board 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decorative body 3813, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative board 3814 can emit light. Thus, the player can show the shutter unit 3830 decorated with light emission, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, the plurality of LEDs on the front right decoration board 3814 emit light, so that the lighted decoration front right The decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the back front right rendering unit 3800, three back front right decorative body units of a first back front right decorative body unit 3810A, a second back front right decorative body unit 3810B, and a third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. 3810, the shutter unit 3830 can be independently opened / closed or illuminated, so that various effects can be provided to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front right decorative units 3810. I can show you.

[5-10. Production on a game board]
Next, main effects (movable effects) in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 200 is a front view of the game board in a state where the back movable ornamental body of the back back effect unit has been moved from the evacuation position to the appearance position. FIG. 201 is a front view of the game board in a state in which the lower back middle rotating decorative body of the lower back middle effect unit has been moved from the lowered position to the raised position. FIG. 202 shows the back-upper rotating unit of the back-up production unit from the retracted position to the appearing position, the back-left rotating decorative unit of the back-up left rendering unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and back-right. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decoration body of the effect unit moved from the retreat position to the first appearance position, respectively. FIG. 203 shows the back left rotating decorative body of the back left rendering unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back right rotating decorative body of the back right rendering unit from the retracted position to the second appearance position, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown in the moved state. FIG. 204 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left rendering unit and the shutter unit of the back front right rendering unit in a closed state to an open state, respectively.

  FIG. 205 shows the back decorative unit from the retracted position to the emerging position, the rear decorative unit rotated from the retracted position to the appearing position from the retracted position, and the back left rear unit from the retracted position. Move the left rotating decorative body from the retracted position to the first appearance position, move the right rotating decorative body behind the back right rendering unit from the retracted position to the first appearing position, and move the lower rotating middle decorative body of the back lower directing unit to the first appearance position. It is a front view of a game board shown in the state where it was moved from a descent position to a descent position, respectively.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the game area 5a, a starting port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side panel. Since the upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the middle side right unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed almost entirely transparent, in a normal state, As shown in FIG. 111, the back-front left decorative body 3030, the back-front right decorative body 3040, and the back-bottom left-hand rotation of the back-front left decorative unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through them. Decorative body 3201, bottom right rotating decoration body 3251 of back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit Rotating decorative body 3310 under the back of the unit 3300, front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back front decorative body 3421 of the back effect unit 3400, front cover 3711 and the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left producing unit 3700, back front The front cover 3811, the shutter unit 3830, and the like of the right effect unit 3800 can be viewed well, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be viewed well through the frame of the center role 2500. be able to.

  More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 is moved from the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000 to the right rail 1005. Along the side right middle unit 2700. In addition, the back movable decoration 3110 of the back effect unit 3100 is located behind the back effect unit 3400, and is invisible from the player side.

  The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is located below the frame of the center role 2500 and in the center of the side unit 2200 and behind the general winning opening 2001 on the left side. Is located behind the first big winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 below the frame of the center role 2500. The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000.

  In addition, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the lowered position, and is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 so that the upper part protrudes into the frame of the center role 2500. ing. Since the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 is viewed from obliquely above from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the numeral decoration above the rotation center is passed through the frame of the center role 2500. It can be visually recognized well.

  Further, the back upper front decorative body 3421 of the back upper effect unit 3400 extends left and right in the upper part of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and the upper part on the left side from the center in the left and right direction is a transparent game panel 1100 and a center role. In addition to being visible through the center 2500, the rest can be viewed well through the frame of the center role 2500. The back upper rotation decorative body 3410 is in a state where one petal faces upward at the center in the left-right direction in front of the back upper front decoration body 3421, and is favorable from the player side through the frame of the center role 2500. Can be visually recognized. In the normal state, the back up / down decorative body unit 3450 having the back upper back rotating decorative body 3440 of the back upper performance unit 3400 is in a retracted position behind the back upper front decorative body 3421, and It is not visible from the side.

  In addition, the back-left decoration unit 3520 having the back-left rotation decorative body 3510 of the back-left production unit 3500 is in a retracted position that is behind the front-left left production unit 3700 in a normal state. , Is invisible to the player. In addition, the back right decoration unit 3620 having the back right rotation decorative body 3610 of the back right production unit 3600 is in a retracted position that is behind the back front right production unit 3800 in a normal state. , Is invisible to the player.

  In addition, the three back front left decorative units 3710 of the back front left rendering unit 3700 are vertically arranged along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in front view, and are transparent games. The panel 1100, the center role 2500, and the frame of the center role 2500 can be viewed from the player side. Of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, the upper first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is mostly located behind the transparent gaming panel 1100 and the center role 2500 in front view, The lower part is located within the frame of the center role 2500. The middle second back front left decorative body unit 3710B is located within the frame of the center role 2500 when viewed from the front. Most of the lower third back front left decorative body unit 3710C is located behind the transparent gaming panel 1100 and the center role 2500 when viewed from the front, and the right portion is within the frame of the center role 2500. positioned.

  In the back front left rendering unit 3700, in the normal state, the shutter unit 3730 is closed in each of the three back front left decorative body units 3710, and the back front left decorative body 3713 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

  Further, the three back right decorative body units 3810 of the back front right rendering unit 3800 are vertically arranged along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in front view, and are transparent games. The panel 1100, the center role 2500, and the frame of the center role 2500 can be viewed from the player side. Of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, the upper first front front right decorative body unit 3810A is located on the right side behind the transparent gaming panel 1100 and the center role 2500 in front view, The left side is located within the frame of the center role 2500. The middle second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the lower third back front right decorative body unit 3810C in front view have a transparent game panel 1100 and a center on the right side from a position closer to the left than the center in the left-right direction. It is located behind the accessory 2500 and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

  In the normal state, the back front right rendering unit 3800 has the shutter unit 3830 in the closed state in each of the three back front right decorative body units 3810, and the back front right decorative body 3813 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

  The game board 5 is directed behind the back unit 3000 in accordance with a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Unit 3100, lower back left production unit 3200, lower back right production unit 3250, lower back middle production unit 3300, back upper production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700 , And the front right production unit 3800 perform a predetermined production (movable production or light emission production).

  Specifically, as an effect using the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 200, by moving the slide guide 3130 downward by the back drive motor 3126, the lock member 3134 Is released, and the back movable ornament 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearing position. This allows the player to see an effect (movable effect) in which the large rear movable decorative body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction falls freely while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous game state (for example, a “big hit” game) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It can be made to think that it is, and it can raise the expectation for the game.

  Although not shown, in the back-side effect unit 3100, after the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is dropped to the appearing position, the slide guide 3130 is moved upward by the back-side drive motor 3126, and the back-side movable decorative body is moved. When returning the 3110 to the retracted position, the forward / reverse rotation of the back drive motor 3126 is appropriately changed, so that the back movable ornament 3110 can be moved up and down on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. It may be made to reciprocate up and down near the center in the direction. As a result, the back movable ornament 3110 moves up and down while blocking the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the up and down direction. Attention can be paid to the movable decorative body 3110, and the movement of the movable decorative body 3110 behind can be enjoyed.

  As an effect of using the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. Is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333. Thereby, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward so as to block a part of the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and is positioned within the frame of the center role 2500, which is favorable from the player side. Since the player can visually recognize the object and rotate, it can give a strong impact to the player and can entertain the player.

  Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with six numeral decorations, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the impression that the roulette is rotating to the player is as if. Can be given. Therefore, when rotating the underside middle rotation decorative body 3310, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image such as “Sugoroku”, and the number of the number decoration of the underside bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310 that has stopped rotating. The "piece" may advance in accordance with. This allows the player to make a "piece" move to a desired "square", and depending on whether or not the rotating underside rotating decoration body 3310 stops rotating at the position of the desired numeral decoration, the player is sharpened. It can be exciting and can entertain the player. Further, the progress of the “piece” can make the player feel like the expectation value is increasing, and the expectation for the game can be increased.

  As an effect of the back unit 3000 using the lower back left rendering unit 3200, the lower back right rendering unit 3250, the back upper rendering unit 3400, the back rear left rendering unit 3500, and the back rear right rendering unit 3600, for example, FIG. As shown, the lower back left rotating decoration body 3201 is rotated by the lower back left driving motor 3205 in the lower back left rendering unit 3200, and the lower back right rotating decoration body is rotated by the lower back right driving motor 3255 in the lower back right rendering unit 3250. 3125 is rotated. Also, in the back-up production unit 3400, the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 is rotated by the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425, and the back up-down decoration body unit 3450 is moved downward from the retreat position by the back-up / down drive motor 3429. At the same time as rotating to the appearance position, the back-upper-back rotation decorative body 3440 is rotated by the back-upper-back rotation drive motor 3454. Further, the back left left decorative body unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper right by the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 in the back rear left rendering unit 3500, and the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is used to move the back left decorative body unit 3520. The left rotating decorative body 3510 is rotated. Also, in the back right lighting unit 3600, the back right decoration unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position slightly upper left by the back right driving motor 3654, and the back right rotation drive motor 3625 drives the back. The right rotation decoration 3610 is rotated.

  Thereby, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, the back-left rotating decoration 3510, and the back-right rotating decoration 3610 can be moved forward of the effect display device 1600 to be visible, and the lower-back left rotating decoration. Since the body 3201, the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, and the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 rotate respectively, By rotating the six decorative bodies, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and to raise the expectation for the game by assuming that something good will happen.

  At this time, the back up / down drive motor 3429, the back up left up / down drive motor 3554, and the back up right up / down drive motor 3654 are rotated forward / reverse as appropriate, so that the back up / down decorative body unit 3450, back back left decoration The body unit 3520 and the back right decorative body unit 3620 may be respectively rocked. Thereby, since the back-upper rotating decoration body 3440, the back-left rotating decoration body 3510, and the back-right rotating decoration 3610 rotate while shaking, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, It can entertain players.

  Further, at this time, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be rotated. Thereby, since the seven decorative bodies rotate around, it is possible to make the player strongly think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “big hit” game) in which the player has an advantage will occur, Expectations for the game can be raised.

  As an effect using the back left production unit 3500 and the back right production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The left decorative body unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the upper right second appearance position, and the back left rotating decorative body 3510 is rotated by the back left rotating drive motor 3525. Also, in the back right lighting unit 3600, the back right decoration unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the upper left second appearance position by the back right lifting drive motor 3654, and the back right rotation drive motor 3625 is used. The rotating decorative body 3610 is rotated. As a result, the two decorative bodies rotate with the eyes of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and at a position approximately at the height, and there is something good to surprise the player. It can be made to think that it is not, and the expectation for the game can be raised.

  At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the rear right rotating decorative body 3610 of the second appearance position are based on the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1). An effect image may be displayed such that it is the position of the eye of the face of the predetermined character along (the world view of the game board 5). As a result, it is possible to show the player an effect in which the eyes of the character are spinning around, and it is possible to entertain the player.

  As an effect using the back front left production unit 3700 and the back front right production unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 204, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 controls the shutter unit 3730 in the back front left production unit 3700. The shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the front right driving solenoid 3817 in the front right effect unit 3800 from the closed state to the open state. With this, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 become visible from the player side. The decoration of the decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

  In addition, as the production using the back front left rendering unit 3700 and the back front right rendering unit 3800, each has three back front left decorative units 3710 and three back front right decorative units 3810. The shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed, and a combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 to be opened and closed. Thereby, a variety of effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be hardly bored.

The back production unit 3100, the back bottom left production unit 3200, the back bottom right production unit 3250, the back bottom middle production unit 3300, the back top production unit 3400, the back rear left production unit 3500, and the back right production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 205, all decorative bodies and the like may be moved. This allows
By moving all the decorative bodies, it is possible to convince the player that a favorable gaming state (for example, a “big hit” gaming state) will occur, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the advantageous gaming state. Note that, in this case, the back left effect unit 3500 and the back right effect unit 3600 move the back left decorative unit 3520 and the back right decorative unit 3620 from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the rear movable movable body 3110 is avoided.

  In the above description, the movement of each decorative body has been described. However, when each decorative body is moved, the LED of the decorative board provided at the rear is appropriately made to emit light, so that the light emitting effect of the decorative body is provided to the player. It can be shown, and the interest of the player can be further attracted.

  Further, in the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described movable effect and the light-emitting effect can be appropriately combined, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. This makes it possible to present a variety of pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining the light-emitting effect, the movable effect, the display effect, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[5-11. Main effects of gaming board]
Next, main functions and effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment having the above-described configuration will be described. The game board 5 according to the present embodiment has a game panel 1100 provided with a game area 5a on the front side, a penetrating opening 1112, and a game area 5a in which a game ball B can circulate. The front end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 formed as a shape along the inner periphery of the opening portion 1112 partitioned into an impossible non-flow area has its front end protruded forward from the front surface of the gaming panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, it is probable that the outside of the peripheral wall 2501 becomes a flow area and the inside becomes a non-flow area. Then, a flat support portion 2503 thinner than the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 extends from the same position in the front and rear direction of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501 from the same position in the front-rear direction to the non-distribution area side (inside). At the same time, a flange 2502 is provided to abut on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the portion of the peripheral wall 2501 where the support 2503 is not provided to the distribution area side (outside), so that the peripheral wall 2501 is provided. Nothing is extended to the flow area side of the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided, so that the obstacle nail N can be implanted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. And a substantial distribution area can be set up to a position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, which is substantially more effective than the conventional pachinko machine. It can be increased Do distribution area. That is, even if the non-distribution area (within the frame of the center role 2500) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 is increased, the substantial distribution area is not reduced unlike the conventional pachinko machine. . Therefore, the non-circulation area defined by the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500 is increased while the distribution area in which the game ball B circulates in the game area 5a is suppressed from being substantially reduced. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 as the effect device provided behind the area, the movable body and the decorative body of the effect unit, etc. can be more easily seen, and the game ball B in the distribution area and the non-distribution area It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain any of the effects of the present invention.

  In the center role 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-flow area side (inside) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall portion 2502 is provided at a portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. The portion 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution area side (outside), and the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved by attaching the center role 2500 to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a contacts (contacts) a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained by the support portion 2503 and the like. The deformation and breakage of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (the center role 2500) can be prevented.

  Further, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role item 2500 can be increased by attaching to the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, the game panel 1100, and the like, the peripheral wall portion 2501 when the game ball B abuts. Can be prevented from elastically deforming and playing the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B flowing in the game area 5a from making an unusual movement different from the conventional one by abutting on the peripheral wall portion 2501, thereby giving a player an uncomfortable feeling. Can be prevented, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the center role 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, the support portion 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-distribution area side can be made hard to see, and the support portion 2503 (center Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as the effect device provided at the rear through the accessory 2500) and the movable body or decorative body of the effect unit provided in the back unit 3000 can be seen, the non-distribution area Of the effect image provided by the effect device, the movable body, the decorative body, and the like can be enlarged, and the effect of the effect device can be more easily exerted. Because the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the visible range of the movable body and the decorative body are large, the pachinko machine 1 is It can stand, can be pachinko machine 1 high appeal against the player.

  In addition, since the center role 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, the transparent portion is provided for the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the pachinko machine 1. Since light from the light emitting means (such as the LED and the effect display device 1600) can be reflected, refracted, diffused, and transmitted, transparent portions such as the support portion 2503 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be illuminated. It is possible to make the appearance look good, improve the appearance and enhance the appeal to the player. At this time, a step, a notch, or the like may be provided in the transparent support portion 2503 to further enhance the diffusion effect.

  Furthermore, since the center role 2500 including the support part 2503 is made transparent, it is provided on a movable body (for example, a back front left production unit 3700 or a back rear left production unit 3500) provided behind the support part 2503. The above-described effects can be obtained by the light emission of the light emitting means (LED), and the player can recognize the presence of the movable body by the transparent support portion 2503.

  In addition, since the transparent support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape smaller than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the front and rear direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is formed as a game panel. The lens effect by the support part 2503 can be reduced as compared with the case where the support part 2503 is extended with the same thickness as that of the support part 1100, and the support part 2503 is provided with the back front left decorative body 3030 and the effect device (effect display device 1600). ), The lens effect by the transparent support portion 2503 is further reduced, and a portion (design) behind the support portion 2503 in the back front left decorative body 3030, the effect image of the rendering device, the movable body, the decorative body, and the like. ) Can be improved, and the back front left decorative body 3030, the effect image, and the like can be more easily seen.

  Furthermore, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, a portion of the tip side of the support portion 2503 having a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is used. Because a line different from the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be shown due to the tip side of, it is difficult to see a single design as compared with the case where the shape is along the peripheral wall portion 2501, and it is difficult to see the details. The pachinko machine 1 having a deep design can be provided.

  Further, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant at the corresponding portion of the support portion 2503, and is different. Therefore, by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 on the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be improved.

  Further, since the support portion 2503 extends from the same position in the front and rear direction of the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. The illusion can be made as if it were, and the presence of the support portion 2503 can be made hard to notice.

  In addition, the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and extends from the middle (in the middle) of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the front-rear direction. As compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is extended from the end side, the reduction of the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 on the distal end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reduced, so that the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be sufficiently increased. The peripheral wall portion 2501 (the center role 2500) can be prevented from being deformed or damaged even when the game medium abuts.

  Furthermore, since the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500 is formed along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112, the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 is formed. The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or made hard to see by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

  In addition, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500 is formed along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, when the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall 2501 is It looks like it protrudes forward from the periphery of the opening 1112, and it is possible to give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall 2501 (center role 2500) and the game panel 1100, and a good-looking slingshot in the game area 5a. Machine 1 can be provided.

  In addition, since the center role 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, even if the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque, it is defined by the peripheral wall 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided behind the non-distribution area, the movable body and the decorative body of the effect unit, and the like can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) satisfactorily. Thus, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exhibiting the effect of the effect of the present invention.

  Furthermore, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role item 2500 projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed obliquely, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is located forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This makes it easier for the player to notice the existence of the peripheral wall 2501 and also makes it easier for the player to recognize the distribution area and the non-circulation area defined by the peripheral wall 2501.

  Further, a flange 2502 extending toward the distribution area (outside) is provided in a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and in a portion where the flange 2502 is provided. Does not have the support portion 2503 extending to the non-distribution area side (inside), the support portion 2503 does not interfere with the visibility of the rendering device (the rendering unit 1600 or the rendering unit of the back unit 3000). However, the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the area where the movable body of the effect unit can be seen can be enlarged, the effect of the effect by the effect device can be more easily exhibited, and the effect device is provided to the player. And the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the center role product 2500, since the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be kept equal to that of the conventional product by the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502, the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the support portion 2503 are integrally formed by resin molding. It is possible to prevent deformation of the molded product when the molded product is removed from the mold.

  Further, since the support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center role 2500 is integrally formed of synthetic resin, only the portion of the support portion 2503 is in contact with other portions. An increase in the difference in the amount of shrinkage can be avoided, and deformation of the center role 2500 during molding can be prevented.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the frame-shaped front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the flat game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 from the rear. Behind the game panel 1100, the rear rear left vertical drive motor 3554 and the rear right rear drive of the rear right directing unit 3600 as functional parts of the rear left directing unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000, respectively, The motor 3654 is disposed such that at least a part thereof is outside the game area 5a in a front view, and between the game panel 1100 and the back left and right up and down drive motor 3554 and the back and back right up and down drive motor 3654, A game is performed from within the game area 5a so as to cover at least a portion within the game area 5a of the elevating drive motor 3554 and the rear right elevating drive motor 3654. Since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided so as to extend outside the region 5a, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 allow the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back. It becomes possible to cover and hide at least a part of the rear right elevating drive motor 3654, and from the player side to the rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the rear side through the transparent front component 1000, the game panel 1100 and the game area 5a. The right elevating drive motor 3654 can be made difficult to see, and the overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being degraded. In addition, the rear rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the rear rear right elevating drive motor 3654 are replaced with a front side. By seeing the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be improved, Can be pachinko machine 1 is enhanced appeal against skill person.

  In addition, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundary of the game area 5a defined by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 is difficult to understand, so that the outer periphery of the game area 5a is not defined. The appearance can give a sense of openness, and even if the gaming area 5a is the same size as a conventional pachinko machine, the gaming area 5a can be made to look larger. Therefore, since the game area 5a looks larger than the conventional pachinko machine, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the expectation for the game with the present pachinko machine 1 can be increased, and the player can play the game. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more appealing to the player.

  Also, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are made to cover at least a part in the game area 5a in front of the functional components such as the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. Since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 prevent the functional components from being visible in the game area 5a, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to providing the same operation and effect as described above, the functional component can be made difficult to see even when viewed obliquely from the center of the game area 5a.

  Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have a continuous decoration over the entire surface, and the front front extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a in front view. Since the decorations of the left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a can be made harder to understand by the continuous decoration, and a sense of openness is given to the game. The size of the area 5a can be made larger than the actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by decorating the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040. It can be made more prominent and appealing to the player.

  Moreover, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are made opaque, the back back left effect unit 3500 provided on the rear side through the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 and The back right production unit 3600 and the like can be prevented from being seen, and the back left production unit 3500 and the back right production unit 3600 and the like can be seen from the player side through the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100. Of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In addition, at least a part of the rear left and right vertical drive motor 3554 and the rear right and right vertical drive motor 3654 as functional components are arranged outside the game area 5a when viewed from the front (in the rear left vertical drive motor 3554, Since the rear left and right vertical drive motor 3554 and the rear right and right vertical drive motor 3654 are disposed (completely (entirely) located outside the game area 5a), the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a are arranged to arrange the rear rear right / left drive motor 3654. Even if the space between them is not increased, the rear left / lower elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear right / right elevation drive motor 3654 can be arranged, and the rear rear left / lower elevation drive motor 3554 and the rear right right / lower elevation drive motor 3654 can be arranged. By taking the balance, it is possible to prevent the space of the game area 5a from being reduced. In other words, since a part of the back right driving motor 3654 is arranged in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, the space between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is reduced. This makes it possible to relatively increase the space of the game area 5a, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can further exert the above-described effects. In addition, by providing a part of the drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the accessory movable in the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space in the game area 5a can be enlarged. The width of the effect performed in the game area 5a increases. All the driving sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) of the movable objects in the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

  Further, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the illumination light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 1600, and the like. Can be transmitted, reflected, refracted, and diffused, so that it is possible to make it appear as if the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are emitting light. Appearance can be improved. Although the opaque decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042 are applied to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the base 3031 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, respectively. And the base 3041 (which may include the decorative seal 3032 and the decorative seal 3042) is formed of a transparent member, so that light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 can receive light from the back front left decorative body 3030 or the back. It is possible to give the impression that the front left decorative body 3030 and the rear right decorative body 3040 reach the front right decorative body 3040 and emit light. It can be said that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged at positions where light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 reaches.

  In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the rear left and right elevating drive motor 3554 as a functional part, it is understood that the functional part is covered by covering it to some extent without covering the whole. It becomes spicy and can look like part of a decoration. Therefore, even if the back front left decorative body 3030 is not sized to cover the entire back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, the same operation and effect as described above can be achieved, and the back front left decorative body 3030 The game area 5a can be made to look large while reducing the cost required for 3030. In addition, although the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, the part is a pachinko machine. It is desirable to set a portion closer to the center of 1 (a portion closer to a boundary dividing the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). In addition, a predetermined location where there is no drive source outside the game area 5a (a location at the lower left in FIG. 131, that is, a location at the lower left corner of the game board 5) extends from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. By providing the decorative body, the game area 5a can be made to look large.

  In addition, the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a is closed from behind by a transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided behind the gaming area 5a. Therefore, in front view, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from behind by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from inside the game area 5a to outside the game area 5a. The same effect can be achieved, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, so that the game in the game area 5a can be smoothly performed. And the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in front view, the back front left decorative body inside the door window 101a. It is possible to make the back and rear left rendering unit 3500 and the back and rear right rendering unit 3600 behind the 3030 and the back right decoration 3040 invisible, so that the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to such an extent that a part inside the door window 101a of the back left vertical drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the back front left decorative body 3030 moves up and down. Even if the entire drive motor 3554 is not covered, the uncovered portion can be covered by the frame-shaped door frame 3, so that the back front left decorative body 3030 can be prevented from being unnecessarily long, The cost of the back front left decorative body 3030 (the pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100 at the two general winning openings 2001 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5. On the other hand, in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the front wall 2101 forming the front face is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front face is decorated with translucency. Since the sticker is attached, the front surface of the first starting port 2002 faces forward (toward the player), so that the first starting port 2002 can be more conspicuous than the general winning port 2001. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be more easily directed to the first starting port 2002 than to the general winning port 2001, so that the number of the game balls B accepted in the first starting port 2002 decreases (or the first starting port). The player's consciousness is concentrated on the general winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002), and the lottery of the first special lottery result performed by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 , It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the player and to suppress the decrease in interest, and it is possible to surely recognize the position of the first starting port 2002 which the player should aim at, and aim the player at the first starting port 2002. You can entertain the game.

  Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is accepted by the first starting port 2002, the player can be made harassed. In addition, when the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2002, Depending on whether or not a winning (for example, a "big hit") in which an advantageous gaming state occurs due to the lottery of the first special lottery result, the player can be thrilled and excited, thereby increasing the expectation for the game. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. Thereafter, when the winning is determined by the lottery of the first special lottery result, an advantageous gaming state in which the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern occurs, so that the player is greatly enjoyed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. At this time, when the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002 is accepted in the general winning opening 2001, the lottery of the first special lottery result is not performed, but the game ball B is paid out as a privilege. In addition, the player is not disappointed, and can continue to enjoy the game, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Also, the first front wall 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the gaming panel 1100, and the front wall 2101 of the first starting opening 2002 is made parallel to the surface of the gaming panel 1100. Since the form (appearance) of the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are greatly different, a sticker is attached to the front of the first starting opening 2002 and a sticker is applied to the front of the general winning opening 2001. Even if the player does not attach the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from having an uncomfortable feeling, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being deteriorated. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the game balls B received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002, and to fully enjoy the joy of having been accepted. This can suppress a decrease in interest. Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 are formed of transparent members, the light of the illumination in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emission provided in the pachinko machine 1 Since it is possible to reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from the means (the LED of the decorative substrate), the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 can be made to look brilliant, and the appearance can be improved. As a result, the appeal to the player can be enhanced.

  Further, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the received game balls B are passed through the general winning opening. Since the game ball B is guided backward later than the game ball B received in 2001, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is set in the general winning port 2001. Since the player can be guided backward at a later timing than the accepted game ball B, the player can view the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is accepted at the first starting port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (feeling of superiority) due to the game ball B being accepted at the first starting port 2002 is given to the general prize. It is possible to make the player taste the game ball B for a longer time than when the game ball B is received in the mouth 2001, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately moved backward ( (The game panel 1100 side), and can be discharged faster than the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. Therefore, it is unnecessary to receive the game ball B in the general winning opening 2001. Can be suppressed for a long period of time, the player's interest can be directed to the next game ball B, and the game can be promoted crisply, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined with respect to the game panel 1100, and a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in a front view. Depending on the player, it can be illusioned that the game ball B is accepted in the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted into the general winning opening 2001, and it can be considered as an illusion. Therefore, even if the benefit (lottery of the first special lottery result) is not subsequently provided, it is possible to avoid distrust of the pachinko machine 1 or the game hall side, and to the player It is possible to keep the game entertained and to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the gaming panel 1100, the amount of the material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced, and the general winning can be achieved. Decoration such as a seal can be omitted on the front surface of the mouth 2001. Therefore, since the cost required for the general winning opening 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player can be provided by turning the cost to an effect device or the like.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the under-back middle decoration unit 3320 of the under-back middle production unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the rotating under-back middle rotation having a plurality of (here, six) stop positions at even-numbered positions. The decorative body 3310 is provided with an area detection piece 3325 having a length that is half of the stop position, and a plurality (six in this case) of position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position. (Here, three) consisting of a plurality of (three in this case) area specifying sensors 3330 each consisting of half of the stop positions for detecting the position detection piece 3326 and one position specifying sensor 3331 detecting one of the position detecting pieces 3326. When the under-back middle rotation decorative body 3310 rotates, the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 that detect the area detecting pieces 3325 are provided in the rotation direction. Repeatedly increasing and then decreasing from one side, and the current rotational position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is roughly grasped by the combination of the area specifying sensor 3330 detecting the area detecting piece 3325. be able to.

  More specifically, in the case of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, three aligned stop positions where the area detection pieces 3325 are half the number , And the minimum number of the area specifying sensors 3330 required for detecting the movement to an arbitrary stop position is three half of the number of the stop positions. The three area specifying sensors 3330 are, in the rotating direction, a first area specifying sensor 3330a, a second area specifying sensor 3330b, and a third area specifying sensor 3330c, and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the first stop position. At the time of (the position of the decorative numeral “3”), only the first region specifying sensor 3330a is detecting the region detecting piece 3325. When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the second stop position (the position of the decorative numeral “2”) from this state, the first area specifying sensor 3330a and the second area specifying sensor 3330b detect the area detecting piece 3325. I do. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the third stop position (the position of the decorative numeral of "1"), the first area specifying sensor 3330a, the second area specifying sensor 3330b, and the third area specifying sensor 3330c are connected. The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

  Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral of “6”), the first area specifying sensor 3330a is not detected, and the second area specifying sensor 3330b and the third area specifying are not performed. The sensor 3330c detects the area detection piece 3325. Furthermore, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral of “5”), the second area specifying sensor 3330b is not detected, and only the third area specifying sensor 3330c is the area detecting piece. 3325 is detected. Then, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decorative numeral of “4”), the third area specifying sensor 3330 c is also not detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 are set to the area detecting pieces 3325. Is not detected. After that, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 further rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decorative numeral of “3”), and only the first area specifying sensor 3330a detects the area detecting piece 3325. In this state, the detection / non-detection of the area specifying sensor 3330 as described above is repeated with the rotation of the lower back middle rotary decoration 3310.

  As described above, since the area detection piece 3325 having a length extending to half of the number of stop positions is provided, the combination of the detection of the area detection piece 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 allows the lower-side middle rotation decoration. Since the rotation of the body 3310 can be detected, and all the area specifying sensors 3330 do not become undetected until the underside rotating decoration body 3310 rotates to the next stop position, The current position of the middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

  And, since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality of (here, six) position detecting pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the plurality of area specifying sensors 3330 determine the area detecting pieces 3325. After roughly detecting the rotation of the underside rotating decoration body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by the detection, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position specifying sensor 3331. In addition, it is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back inside rotary decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions while minimizing the shift of the stop position.

  In addition, since the stop position of the under-the-bottom rotating decoration 3310 can be accurately grasped, the under-the-bottom rotating decoration 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the stop position shifts to play a game. It is possible to prevent giving a sense of incongruity (discomfort) to the person, and to enjoy the production (movable production) by the under-the-riddle rotating decorative body 3310, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest, and It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of realizing the operation of the movable body (the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310) that does not cause discomfort to the player.

  Furthermore, since the stop position of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the shift of the stop position can be suppressed, and By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotating speed) of the lower lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is more compared to the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 reciprocates. Can be faster. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player by the under-the-rack rotating decoration 3310 that rotates quickly, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotating surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 faces the player side in front, and it is optional after the round rotation. It is possible to show the player a roulette-like effect that stops rotating at the stop position, so that the player can be excited by whether or not the underside rotating decoration body 3310 stops rotating at the desired stop position. This makes it possible to entertain the movable effect by the lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is an even number, the stop position that can be handled by the minimum number of sensors (region specifying sensors 3330) necessary for detecting movement to an arbitrary stop position. And the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 are the same, and the ability (grasping of the stop position) by a plurality of sensors (region specifying sensor 3330 and position specifying sensor 3331) is maximized. It is possible to entertain the player with the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 having more stopping positions, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that, in the above-described embodiment, the lower back middle rotating effecting body 3310 in the back lower middle rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 has six stop positions. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Four to ten stop positions may be provided.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable body having the plurality of stop positions (the lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310) is described as a rotating body. As an example, a “circulating object”, a “linear moving object”, a “circular moving object”, a “curved moving object”, and the like may be used.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is assigned. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310, and the effect image display on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511. And an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout of the game balls B and the like, and a firing control unit 633b for controlling the firing of the game balls B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is housed in the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear face of the board holder 1200, and for explanation, faces the rear face of the board holder 1200 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. The surface opposite to the front side of main control board 1310 (that is, the surface on the rear side) may be referred to as “the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310” on which electronic components are mounted. Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game has a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) (hereinafter, referred to as a main coating substrate). A green resist layer may be formed simply by “solid green resist”.) A ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data are built in. The main control MPU which is a microprocessor, a main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are inputted, and various solenoids are driven. RAM having a main control solenoid drive circuit for performing the operation, and a pressing operation section for completely erasing information stored in the RAM incorporated in the main control MPU. Includes a A switch, the. The main control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like. On the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, in addition to the RAM clear switch, the attribute of the front-side electronic component such as the component number of the front-side electronic component and an area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged (further, The front side notation indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component may be included). On the other hand, it is printed by silk printing on a solid-colored green resist with a white paint that is conspicuous. The RAM clear switch is exposed from the transparent main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310. Since the main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the game board 5, it is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 3052 for detecting a game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, a gate sensor 2801 for detecting a game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003, and a second sensor. A second starting port sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B received in the starting port 2004, a general winning port sensor 3051 for detecting a game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, and a first winning port 2005. First big winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting game ball B, second big winning opening sensor 2601 for detecting game ball B received at second big winning opening 2006, and detecting game ball B received at out opening 2010 Out port sensor 3053, first sub-out port sensor 2403 for detecting game ball B received in first sub-out port 2011, second sub-out port The detection signals from the second sub-out mouth sensor 3054 for detecting the game ball B received at 012 and the magnetic sensors 1111, 404, 2602, and 3055 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are respectively controlled by the main control I. Input via the / O port.

  The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid 2612, etc., a drive signal is output, a status indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special symbol number display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port. The drive signal is output to a display, a second special symbol display, a second special reserved number display, a round display, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3052, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first big winning opening sensor 2402, the second big winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening sensor 3053 are not provided. While a contact-type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the general winning port sensor 3051, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 are provided with contact-type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches. Using a switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the gate unit 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

  Further, when an advantageous game state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball B frequently enters. The detection of the game ball B by the first winning port sensor 2402 and the second winning port sensor 2601 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first special winning opening sensor 2402 and the second special winning opening sensor 2601. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball B does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3051 does not frequently occur. For this reason, as the general winning opening sensor 3051, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used.

  Further, since the game ball B frequently enters the out port 2010, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the out port sensor 3053. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 have a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Is used.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, and shapes the various commands and transmits the commands to the peripheral control unit 1511, which will be described in detail later.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, as will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. To be described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages fall below the power failure warning voltage. This power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game balls B and the like is housed in a payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the transparent power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the surface opposite to the front side of the payout control board 633 facing the rear surface of the power supply board cover 631 (that is, the surface on the rear side) is the surface of the payout control board 633 on which electronic components are mounted. Mounting surface) ". The payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of the game balls B and the like has a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface). A green resist layer is formed, and a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a firing control by the firing solenoid 542, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 are performed. A launch control unit 633b for performing ball feed control, an error LED display for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1, and an error release switch having a pressing operation unit for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display. At the time of maintenance, the game ball B in the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 is snapped. And discharged to the outside of the handset 1 (upper tray 201), and a, and the ball disconnect switch for starting the sphere unshift operation. On the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633, in addition to the error release switch, the attribute of the front side electronic component such as the component number of the front side electronic component, an area indicating the position where the front side electronic component is arranged, and the like (further, The front side notation indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component may be included). On the other hand, it is printed on a solid green resist by silk printing with a white paint that is conspicuous. The error release switch is exposed from the transparent payout control board box 632 that houses the payout control board 633. Since the error release switch is provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, it is located at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the error release switch.

[6-2a. Dispensing control section]
Although not shown in detail, a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a microcontroller having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. The payout control MPU has a built-in ROM and RAM as well as a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or receives the main control board 1310 In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch pressing operation unit via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection is performed. Detection signals from the sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to a payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via a payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

  Further, detection signals from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and a body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. When detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch, the payout control MPU transmits a door frame opening command to that effect to the main control board 1310, When the release of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected based on the detection signal from the switch, a main frame release command notifying the fact is transmitted to the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 that has received such a command transmits predetermined information (a format for transmitting a command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) to a door frame opening command for notifying that the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4. A predetermined information (a command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 by adding the Is added to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 that has received such a command controls, for example, the light emission mode of the door frame 3 to the notification mode. In addition, based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the body frame opening switch, either one of the opening of the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 and the opening of the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 or When both are detected, a frame release command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310 as a unified command. In this case, the main control board 1310 adds predetermined information (information for adjusting the format for transmitting the command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510) to the frame release command and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 that has received the frame opening command controls, for example, the light emission mode of the door frame 3 to the notification mode.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port and indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 through the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by ascertaining the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following are the contents displayed and notified by the error LED display. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 and Is notified that the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 633 is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it is "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number “2” is displayed, it is “ball watching” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, that the game ball B has caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number “3” is displayed, “Count (Specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed, " "Retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full". (Specifically, based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full and the number "7" is displayed.) Sometimes, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (that the electrical connection has been cut off from anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and sent to the payout control MPU. Is entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls lent out of the game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input to the ball lending display unit of the operation unit 220 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to firing are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal. A launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the launch ball; a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on the launch reference pulse; A ball feeding solenoid driving circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are fired toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the generated reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number, and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 for detecting whether a palm or a finger is in contact with the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal, and is input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of the game ball B to be launched toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182 is input to a firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength appropriate for the rotational position of the handle 182, based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, and the launch reference pulse. The input is output to the firing solenoid 542 as a trigger. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, and thereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Is controlled.

  The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 1510 has a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution to the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “solid green resist”). 206), a green resist layer is formed, and as shown in FIG. 206, a peripheral control unit 1511 for performing effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and control data from the peripheral control unit 1511 And an effect display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the effect display device 1600 based on the information. On the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, in the vicinity of the plurality of electronic components constituting the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512, the component number of the electronic component, an area indicating the position where the electronic component is arranged, and the like. Of the electronic component (including the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction of the electronic component (mounting direction), and the type of the electronic component). Each of them is printed on a solid green resist by silk printing with a white paint that is conspicuous.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. And a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to each decorative board of the game board 5. A game board-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to a drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motor of the game board 5 or For transmitting a drive signal to a drive solenoid or outputting a drive signal to an operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, an operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the like. Door-side drive light emission comprising side drive data and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is effected from the serial I / O port for the display control unit. In addition to transmitting to the display control unit 1512 and outputting a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

  The detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the effect display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the effect display control unit 1512 We are monitoring the operation.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker provided on the door frame 3, the body frame 4, and the like. The control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matched to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, and the like. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume that projects rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is stored. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the body frame 4 are provided with an acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, Signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watch dock timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watch dock timer) built in the peripheral control MPU. A diagnosis is made as to whether or not the own system is running away by using the WDT together.

  A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed through a serial input / output port. In the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) bits per second (hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / flashing command, the game board side lighting / flashing command, the movable body driving command, and the like output from the peripheral control MPU to the game board 5 side are transmitted through a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

[6-3b. Effect display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP for displaying and controlling the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of a screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM for transferring and copying various data stored in the image ROM. Have.

  The display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw on the effect display device 1600. Control. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. The display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs an interrupt process when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be rendered on the effect display device 1600, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, control data (display command) for the schedule data. A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines a screen configuration in a time-series manner, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured such that when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM, the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order is arranged in chronological order. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which various kinds of data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM from the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 in accordance with the progress of the schedule data is defined in advance.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the same to the VDP. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. As described above, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

  When screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to effect display device 1600. In addition, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an in-execution signal notifying the fact to the display control MPU. The VDP adopts a line buffer system. The “line buffer method” means that one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and the one line of drawing data held in the line buffer is transferred to the effect display device 1600. Output to the

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data which is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in a compressed state in the image ROM.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". Thus, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites will be used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting a background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 with the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition order”).

  Note that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular regions each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six sprite characters arranged in 2 × 3 are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be represented using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1600 repeatedly performs a main scan for setting a display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. And the sub-scan to be performed. When the rendering data for one line output from the rendering display control unit 1512 is input, the rendering display device 1600 sequentially performs one-line rendering from left to right as viewed from the front of the rendering display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the image is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The contents of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Is struck between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more the balls are rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger they can be hit. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The falling speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that is rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided above the upper left side unit 2300 and to the left of the center role 2500.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest point in front view, it contacts the plurality of obstacle nails N, It flows down in the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2511 opened in the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from a central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the central discharge part 2513a at the center of the stage 2513 into the game area 5a, the central discharge part 2513a is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that the first discharge port 2513a has a high probability. It is received in the starting port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, advantageous game states (for example, “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probable change)”, “time reduction (time reduction)” A special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating “hit” is performed.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2513 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center in the left and right direction by the shelf 2301 and the obstacle nail N of the upper left side unit 2300, and the side unit 2200 May be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B hit on the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center role 2500, the guide of the center role 2500 is provided. A plurality of the plurality of gas discharged from above the gate portion 2003 through one of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After abutting on the obstacle nail N, it passes through the gate 2003 with a certain probability.

  The guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500 has a first guide passage 2521 having an entrance opened near the stop 1006, and an entrance opened at an interval leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. And a second guide passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts against the stop portion 1006 (so-called right-handed), the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521 and has a strength that does not touch the stop portion 1006 (right-handed). If the player hits the game ball B with a certain level of strength, the ball enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center role 2500 circulates through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when flowing through the second guide passage 2522 than with the first guide passage 2521. Further, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521.

  When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result obtained is “normal hit”, the first attacker unit is set. The closed second starting port 2004 in 2400 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0). .01 to 600 seconds, usually also referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. Note that the normal fluctuation time from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result is set to a relatively long time (600 seconds in this example) during normal times (non-time saving state), In the time saving state, the time is changed in a short time. As a result, during the time reduction (time reduction state), the normal lottery result is frequently derived, and as a result, the second starting port 2004 is frequently opened. As described above, the second starting port 2004 is frequently opened in the time reduction (time saving state), so that a game (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at entering a game ball into the second starting port 2004 is performed. Will do.

  Note that if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period from when the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 to when the normal lottery result is suggested, it is not possible to start suggesting the normal lottery result. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to four, and if more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  The game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of the middle right side unit 2700 due to the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the gate portion 2003 and the middle right side unit 2700. Of the side right middle unit 2700 is occasionally accepted in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, or rarely accepted in the second sub-out opening 2012. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out similarly to the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012, the ball is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without a chance to be received in the second winning port 2006, the second starting port 2004 or the first winning port 2005. .

  The game ball B passing through the right side of the gate section 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning opening 2001, the second big winning opening 2006, and the second winning opening 2006 of the side right middle unit 2700. There is no opportunity to be accepted in the starting opening 2004 or the first winning opening 2005, and the game is discharged out of the game area 5a.

  As described above, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. It is possible to prompt a driving operation such that the game ball B cannot be received at the mouth 2012. In this embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center role 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of receiving the game ball B at the second sub-out port 2012 than the first guide passage 2521. Thus, the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522 can be prompted. In other words, it is possible to prompt a driving operation that requires a delicate adjustment in the rotation operation of the handle 182, rather than a “right hit” in which the game ball B comes into contact with the stop portion 1006. The main game of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed.

  The game ball B passing through the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500.

  At this time, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and “small hit” is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is accepted with a high probability in the second big winning opening 2006. When the game ball B is received in the second special winning opening 2006 while the second special winning opening 2006 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or more) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201.

  The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the second big winning opening 2006 is left on the first shelf 2412a, the second starting door 2414, and the second shelf 2412b. After rolling to the left, it is released to the left, and further rolls to the left on the third shelf 2412c, the first winning opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d to enter the gaming area 5a. Released.

  When the game ball B is rolling on the second starting port door 2414, the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate unit 2003 is "normal hit", and the second starting port door is set. When the game ball 2414 is retreated, the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, advantageous game states (for example, “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probable change)”, “time reduction (time reduction)” A special lottery result (first special lottery result) for generating “hit” is performed.

  When the game ball B is rolling on the first winning opening door 2417, the special lottery result (the first lottery result) obtained by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 If the one special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are special lottery results (for example, "big hit") that generate an advantageous gaming state, the first special winning opening 2005 is set to a predetermined opening / closing pattern after the elapse of the special fluctuation time. Thus, the game ball B can be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first special winning opening 2005 while the first special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or more) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game ball B, by allowing the first special winning opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, it is possible to pay out many game balls B, and the player You can entertain.

  When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit”, A special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probability change)”, “time reduction (time reduction)” is performed, and the selected special lottery result is It suggests to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time) Note that the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 accept the game ball B, and the lottery is performed. Special lottery results include "losing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probable change (probability change)", "time saving (time reduction)", " Probably variable time saving " Per "," the second big hit ", and the like.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the second big winning opening 2006 is set to the open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). Then, the opening / closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first big winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, or If any one of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B into the winning opening 2005 is satisfied, the opening and closing pattern for closing the game ball B to be unacceptable (one open / close pattern is set to 1) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for “2R jackpot”, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot” are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In addition, in the "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as a "big hit" is drawn ("probable change") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed. ("Time savings").

  When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is “second big hit”, after the first special winning opening 2005 can accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, the special game state is set to ST (special).・ Time). This ST is to maintain a state of certainty and time saving during a predetermined number of times of change.

  In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery to the indication of the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first starting port 2002 and the When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is not started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Suspended. The number of reserved special lottery results to be retained is up to four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is such that the pattern rows composed of a plurality of pictures are displayed side by side in the left and right direction, and each of the pattern rows is fluctuated. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed such that the patterns of the three pattern rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three picture rows are stopped and each picture is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a “small hit” game, a “big hit” game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  In addition, the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the image sequence fluctuates and the final image is displayed). (The time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for indicating the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by lottery. A player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate, vibrate, assist the rotation operation, and inhibit the rotation operation by the operation ring drive motor 342. With 367, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, Bottom left production unit 3200, Ura lower right production unit 3250, Ura lower middle production unit 3300, Ura upper production unit 3400, Ura rear left production unit 3500, Ura rear right production unit 3600, Ura front left production unit 3700, Ura front It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a display effect, and the like by appropriately using the right effect unit 3800, etc., and to entertain the player even with various effects, and to reduce the player's interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in a player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, when a player makes a mistake in an operation to be performed or does not perform the operation, a correct operation is performed. To the player. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354. The effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[8. Independent support member]
Next, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 207 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting auxiliary member. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted between a lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 and a table 8 of an island facility in a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed (attached), the pachinko machine 1 assists independence and is prevented from falling down. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed in a block shape. The self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is formed using at least one of hard foamed resin, plastic, corrugated paper, wood, pulp mold and the like.

  Although not shown in detail, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the lower surface of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3. On the other hand, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a mounting portion mounted on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200. In this embodiment, the plate unit 200 is provided with a groove extending forward and backward as a mounting portion, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a ridge inserted into the groove of the plate unit 200 as a mounted portion. ing. Thereby, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is slid in the front-rear direction with respect to the plate unit 200, and the mounted portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is inserted into the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, whereby the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is attached to the plate unit 200. 7 can be attached (mounted). Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the island facility with the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 mounted on the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 can be easily removed by sliding the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 forward. . When the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island facility is removed, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily attached by sliding in the direction opposite to the direction in which the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 was removed.

  The mounting (mounting) between the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 and the mounted portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, but may be performed by “inserting a projection into a hole”, It may be "locked", "magnetized by magnet", "surface fastener", "adsorber", "peelable adhesive", or the like. Further, the position at which the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 is provided is not limited to the lower surface of the plate unit 200 as described above, but may be “inside”, “at least one of the left and right side surfaces”, “front surface”, and the like. .

  After the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, stored at the game hall side, and when the pachinko machine 1 is removed from the island facility, It is mounted on the unit 200 and used. When the pachinko machine 1 is shipped from the manufacturer to the game hall, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be attached to the dish unit 200 in advance, or may be attached at the time of installation.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the door frame 3 includes the plate unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 that protrude greatly forward, the door frame 3 moves forward. Although the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the lower mounting portion on the lower side of the plate unit 200, the pachinko machine 1 can be assisted in independence and can be prevented from falling forward. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is attached to the attachment portion of the dish unit 200, so that the gap between the dish unit 200 and the table 8 of the island facility is established. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from tipping over by the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 located at the position (1), so that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from tipping over. The pachinko machine 1 does not need to be installed, and the installation work is easy.

  Further, by mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from overturning. The pachinko machine 1 is capable of reducing the burden on the side.

  Further, since the attachment unit for attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 to the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is attached to the attachment unit of the plate unit 200 to assist the pachinko machine 1 independence. Can be prevented from falling forward, thereby making it possible to increase the size of the effect device, decoration member, and the like provided on the door frame 3 and make the decoration member and the like protrude further forward. The pachinko machine having a significantly different appearance from the machine can be easily configured, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to a player can be provided. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 1, the plate unit 200 and the like are greatly protruded forward in the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 has high appealing power.

  In the above embodiment, the self-supporting member 7 can be detached from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 by sliding the self-supporting member 7 in the front-rear direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it attach / detach by sliding in the left-right direction with respect to the plate unit 200 of the frame 3.

  In addition, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is made detachable with respect to the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and a functional member (for example, the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202) detachably provided on the door frame 3 , Door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side unit 410, door frame top unit 450, etc.). Thus, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island facility, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the pachinko machine 1 1 to be able to stand alone in a stable state. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame 3 as a functional member, so that a part of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. It can function as a functional member to be configured. Specifically, for example, when the door frame left side unit 400 swelling forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 as a functional member also serving as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 The frame left side unit 400 can function as the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 by being attached to the lower side of the plate unit 200, and can be removed from the lower side of the plate unit 200 and attached to the left side of the door window 101a to function as a functional member. be able to. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable, there is no need to separately store the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the trouble of managing the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall can be reduced.

  Alternatively, after making the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 detachable from the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), a functional member (for example, “substrate cover that covers the substrate”, “wiring”) provided detachably on the main body frame 4 , A wiring holding member for holding the game, a protective cover for protecting the rear of the effect display device or the movable decorative body, a storage tank for storing the game media, a guide member for the game media to flow, etc.) You may make it double. Thereby, when attaching the pachinko machine 1 to the island equipment or removing it from the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the main frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and the pachinko machine 1 is stabilized. Be able to stand alone in a state where it was done. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the door frame 3 is attached to a predetermined portion of the main body frame 4 to function as a part of the pachinko machine 1. It can function as a member. For this reason, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachable, there is no need to separately store the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7, and the trouble of managing the detached self-supporting auxiliary member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall can be reduced. When the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided on the main body frame 4, when the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4, the player touches the detachable functional member. Since it is not possible to do so, it is possible to prevent the functional member from coming off due to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 does not give the player any discomfort.

  Further, when the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is also used as a functional member provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 is compared with a case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not used as a functional member. Therefore, the number of components can be reduced, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Further, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be provided so as to be accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3. Thereby, when it is not necessary to attach the pachinko machine 1 to the island facility and stand alone, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 so that the pachinko machine 1 looks good due to the existence of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7. And the self-supporting assisting member 7 can be prevented from interfering with the game. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or detached from the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can stand on its own. Thus, the work of installing and removing the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. Further, in this case, there is no need to store the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 as compared with a case where the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detached and stored separately, and it is troublesome to manage so that the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 having the mounted portion attached to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Is also good.

  In addition, although the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 that can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is built in the plate unit 200 (door frame 3). When installed in the island facility, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 may be made to protrude downward and abut on the table 8. Thereby, after the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, there is no need to remove the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 and store it separately, and it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for the management of the gaming hall.

[9. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The decorative body 3111, the decorative sheet 3112, and the light guide radiating plate 3113 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 in the rear-side rendering unit 3100 of the present embodiment are the decorative member of the present invention, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment. Is the decorative plate of the present invention, the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is the radiation plate of the present invention, the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is the peripheral wall portion of the present invention, , The first and second LEDs 3114a and 3114b in the present embodiment correspond to the LED of the present invention, and the first LED 3114a in the present embodiment corresponds to the specific LED of the present invention. ing.

[10. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-side movable decorative body 3110 of the back-side effect unit 3100, on the front side of the back-side decorative board 3114 on which the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b are mounted. Since the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiating plate 3113 that constitute the decorative member are arranged, and the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front side of the decorative body 3111, the back decorative board 3114 and the metal decorative board 3114 are provided. Since the decorative sheet 3112 and the light guide radiating plate 3113 are located between the decorative body 3111 and the metal decorative part 3111d between the decorative part 3111d and the decorative part 3111d, the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative part 3111d is reduced to the metal decorative part. It is possible to prevent linear discharge from the part 3111d to the back decoration board 3114. In addition, even if the static electricity of the metal decoration portion 3111d tries to discharge to the rear decoration substrate 3114, the static electricity cannot pass through the interior of the decoration 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the like. Of the flange 3113b projecting rearward from the light guide radiating plate 3113, bypassing the rear end of the flange 3113b, and flowing into the inside of the flange 3113b (toward the back decoration board 3114). Instead, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration part 3111d to the back decoration board 3114 can be sufficiently obtained by the decoration body 3111, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the like.

  At this time, since the outer periphery of the back-side decorative substrate 3114 is formed smaller than a predetermined size with respect to the outer periphery of the decorative body 3111 and the like so as to be surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the flange portion 3113b It is necessary for the static electricity diverted inward to flow along the rear surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 by an amount corresponding to the small size of the back decoration board 3114, and further increase the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back decoration board 3114. And discharge to the back decoration substrate 3114 can be suppressed. Therefore, since the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be prevented from being discharged to the back decoration board 3114, the first LED 3114a mounted on the back decoration board 3114 by discharge (spark). And the second LED 3114b and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d is reliably light-emitting-decorated by the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration board 3114. This makes it possible for the player to enjoy the light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit in the back decoration board 3114 is provided a predetermined distance SL inward from the outer periphery of the board main body 3114c, static electricity is generated from the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 by the copper. Even if it is attempted to discharge to the foil 3114d, the creepage distance EL can be further increased by a predetermined distance SL from the outer periphery of the substrate main body 3114c to the copper foil 3114d, and is discharged to the back decoration board 3114 (copper foil 3114d). Can be suppressed. Accordingly, static electricity can be prevented from being discharged from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back decoration board 3114, and the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decoration board 3114 by discharge (spark) can be prevented. The second LED 3114b can be prevented from being damaged, and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, since the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 is provided on the light guide radiation plate 3113, when the decoration body 3111 is viewed from the front, the flange portion 3113b protrudes outside the decoration body 3111. Without doing so, the appearance of the decorative body 3111 can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, both sides of the back decoration board 3114 in the back movable decoration 3110 of the back production unit 3100 are provided with the decoration 3111, the decoration sheet 3112, the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the decoration. Since it is covered with the body base 3115, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from a direction perpendicular to the surface of the back decoration board 3114. Further, in the back decoration board 3114, a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b as electronic components are mounted on the front surface of the board body 3114c, and a copper foil 3114d forming a circuit on both sides of the board body 3114c is used. , The front surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 is provided with the decoration 3111, the decoration sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 (light guide radiation plate). 3113a), the rear surface of the back decoration board 3114 is covered with a cover plate 3115a of the decoration base 3115, and furthermore, the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is moved from the back decoration board 3114 to the back. The flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the base member 3115a extends rearward from the cover plate portion 3115a of the decorative body base 3115. Since the flange portions 3115b surrounding the outer periphery of the 3114 are respectively extended forward, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the surface of the decorative body 3111 on the opposite side to the rear decorative substrate 3114 allows the rear decorative substrate 3114 to be formed. The route of the creepage distance EL at which the static electricity is discharged to the copper foil 3114d of the above is advanced to the rear side outside the flange portion 3113b, and turned back inside the flange portion 3113b at the front end (rear end) of the flange portion 3113b. The copper foil of the back decoration board 3114 extends from the metal decoration part 3111d to the meandering route such that it advances forward between the 3113b and the flange part 3115b, and turns back inside the flange part 3115b at the front end (front end) of the flange part 3115b. The creepage distance EL up to 3114d can be made sufficiently long. That would be discharged to the substrate 3114 can be suppressed. Therefore, since the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d can be prevented from being discharged to the back decoration board 3114, the plurality of the third mounting parts mounted on the back decoration board 3114 by the discharge (spark) can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the one LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like from being damaged, and the decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d can be replaced with the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second The two LEDs 3114b can reliably emit light, and the player can enjoy the light decoration (light emission effect) of the decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 (the back movable decoration 3110), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. .

  Further, since a coating film (not shown) is provided on the surface of the back main body 3114c on which the copper foil 3114d is provided, the static electricity is also discharged to the copper foil 3114d by the coating film. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-described effects.

  In addition, the leg 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the projection 3115e of the decorative body base 3115 are brought into contact with a portion of the back decoration board 3114 where the copper foil 3114d is not provided. In other words, the copper foil 3114d is not provided in a portion of the back decoration board 3114 where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 abut. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d from being discharged to the copper foil 3114d along the portion of the back decoration substrate 3114 where the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 are in contact. And the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the portion of the back decoration board 3114 where the light guide radiating plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115 abut, the vibration in the pachinko machine 1 and the movement of the back movable decoration 3110 are prevented. Even if friction occurs between the light guide radiation plate 3113 or the decorative body base 3115 and the back decoration board 3114 due to the vibration due to the movement, the copper foil 3114d does not wear or peel off due to the friction. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a problem that the circuit connecting the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b, the electronic components 3114e, and the like is disconnected or the circuit is short-circuited by the peeled copper foil 3114d. Thus, the electronic component 3114e and the like can be made to function reliably and the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, as described above, by covering both sides of the back decoration board 3114 with the light guide radiating plate 3113 and the decoration base 3115, electrostatic discharge from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the back decoration board 3114 is prevented. Therefore, the discharge resistance performance of the coating film can be reduced, the coating film can be made as thin as possible, and the cost of the coating film can be reduced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decoration board 3114 of the back movable decorative body 3110 of the back production unit 3100 emit light, the first LED 3114a turns back from the first LED 3114a. The light emitted in the direction along the front surface of the rear decoration substrate 3114 faces the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a on the inner surface of the first LED housing 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 in which the first LED 3114a is housed. The light enters the main body 3113a from the part where it is present, is reflected forward by the plurality of reflectors 3113e provided on the rear surface of the main body 3113a, and is radiated from the front surface of the main body 3113a. The light-transmitting decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the front side of the And thus to be decorated. At this time, since the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113 are formed in a flat plate shape, the thickness in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back decorative board 3114 can be reduced. The thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced. Also, since the leg portion 3113f is projected rearward from the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 so as to be continuous with a portion of the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c where light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated. Since the light receiving portion 3113i of the light guide radiating plate 3113 that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be widened, more light from the first LED 3114a can be made to enter the inside of the main body 3113a and emitted forward. The decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be made to emit brighter decoration by increasing the amount of light. Then, in the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, since the light in the direction along the front surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflection portions 3113e, the first LED 3114a is moved forward. The distance from the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to the front portion where the light in the light guide radiating plate 3113 is radiated forward is longer than that in the case of irradiating the light toward the first LED 3114a. Light can be widely diffused and emitted forward. Therefore, the entire decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be brightly and luminously decorated without unevenness, and the appearance of the luminescent decoration in the decorative body 3111 and the like is not impaired, and the effect of the decorative body 3111 and the like can be sufficiently exhibited. be able to. As described above, since the dimension (thickness) of the back movable ornament 3110 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the back movable ornament 3110 in the pachinko machine 1 can be increased. It is possible to dispose the back movable ornamental body 3110 in a part that is not arranged in the pachinko machine of the above, and the rear movable ornamental body 3110 is arranged in an unexpected part, thereby strongly attracting the interest of the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected by the player as a pachinko machine to be played, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided.

  In addition, since the plurality of first LEDs 3114a on the front surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 are housed in the first LED housing portion 3113c penetrating the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiating plate 3113, the first LED 3114a receives The heat can be diffused into the first LED housing 3113c, and the temperature rise of the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Also, since a leg 3113f projecting rearward from the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 forms a gap between the main body 3113a and the back decoration board 3114, the gap is formed through the gap. The heat from one LED 3114a can be discharged, and the accumulation of heat from the first LED 3114a can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the light emission of the first LED 3114a becomes unstable or damaged due to the heat accumulated between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back decoration board 3114, and the first LED 3114a Light emission can be reliably performed as intended, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (the back movable decorative body 3110) can be reliably light-emitting decorated by the first LED 3114a, and light emission by the back movable movable body 3110 can be achieved. The decoration (light emission effect) can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the auxiliary reflection portion 3113g which can reflect the light from the first LED 3114a forward on the side opposite to the first LED housing portion 3113c in the leg portion 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 has an auxiliary reflection. By the part 3113g, light incident from the inner surface side of the first LED housing part 3113c in the leg part 3113f is radiated out of the leg part 3113f (main body part 3113a) from the opposite surface, and light from the first LED 3114a is emitted. Since it is possible to reduce the amount of light passing through the leg 3113f, more light from the first LED 3114a can be made to enter the inside of the main body 3113a, and the above-described operation and effect can be reliably achieved.

  Further, a copper foil 3114d constituting a circuit for emitting a plurality of first LEDs 3114a (and second LEDs 3114b) is provided on substantially the entire front and back surfaces of the back decoration board 3114, and the copper foil 3114d is provided. Is excellent in thermal conductivity, so that the heat from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused through the copper foil 3114d and can be radiated from the copper foil 3114d, so that the heat from the first LED 3114a is not easily accumulated. As a result, the above-described functions and effects can be reliably exhibited.

  Moreover, on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114, the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f that is depressed rearward on the light emitting surface side of the first LED 3114a by not providing the copper foil 3114d is provided. Since the legs 3113f constituting a part of the light receiving portion 3113i for receiving light from the first LED 3114a mounted on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 are in contact with the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light guide radiation The amount of protrusion of the leg 3113f to the rear can be increased without widening the gap between the main body 3113a of the plate 3113 and the back decoration board 3114, so that more light from the first LED 3114a can be obtained. 3113a can be made to enter, and the decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 (the back movable decoration 3110) can be made brighter. It is possible to light decoration.

  In addition, since the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f that is recessed rearward from the front surface of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 is provided, the angle of irradiation from the first LED 3114a to the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f is adjusted. Since the angle can approach the front surface vertically, the light from the first LED 3114a can be easily reflected forward by the bottom surface of the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, and the decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 can be made brighter. The same operation and effect as described above can be obtained by luminous decoration.

  Further, since a part of the light from the first LED 3114a is reflected forward by the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f which is recessed rearward in the back decoration board 3114, the first LED 3114a on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is used. The shadow of the projection due to the light from the first LED 3114a falls on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 and the portion of the shadow becomes darker than the case where the reflection projection protrudes forward on the light emitting surface side of Instead, the whole of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be illuminated with uniform brightness.

  In addition, since the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f of the back decoration board 3114 is formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, when forming a circuit for emitting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, Since the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f can be formed together, the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f can be easily formed as compared with the case where the substrate main body 3114c is physically dented by cutting, pressing, or the like. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the machine 1.

  Further, the leg 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is made to abut within the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f formed by not providing the copper foil 3114d, and the leg 3113f is made of copper on the back decoration board 3114. Since there is no contact with the foil 3114d, even if friction occurs between the leg portion 3113f and the light reflection assisting region 3114f due to vibration in the pachinko machine 1, the copper foil 3114d (and the coating film) is worn by the friction. It does not drip or peel. Therefore, it is possible to avoid such a problem that a circuit for causing the first LED 3114a or the like to emit light is broken or a circuit is short-circuited by the peeled copper foil 3114d, and the first LED 3114a or the like is caused to emit light without fail. The desired light emission effect can be shown to the player.

  Further, since the white coating film is provided on the front and rear surfaces of the rear decoration substrate 3114, the light applied to the front side of the rear decoration substrate 3114 is reflected forward by the white of the coating film. This makes it possible to brighten the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 to make the decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 (the back movable decoration body 3110) emit light more brightly.

  Further, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b provided on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114, the circuit pattern, and the like are formed by the white coating film through the decoration body 3111, the decoration sheet 3112, and the light guide radiation plate 3113. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the decoration of the rear movable movable body 3110, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently exhibiting the decorative effect.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a flat plate-shaped member provided between the decoration 3111 (decoration sheet 3112) of the movable decoration 3110 behind the back of the rear production unit 3100 and the decoration substrate 3114 behind the rear. Since the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided with the penetrated first LED housing portion 3113c and second LED housing portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 are inserted. The first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are formed as compared to the case where the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are formed into a bottomed concave shape that does not penetrate the first LED housing portion 3113c and the second LED housing portion 3113d. Can increase the volume (heat volume) of the space into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114a are inserted. It is possible to diffuse the heat from the 114b. At this time, since the adjacent (approaching) first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other, the volume (heat volume) of the space into which the first LED 3114a is inserted can be further increased. The heat from the LED 3114a can be easily diffused. Therefore, since heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be hardly accumulated, light emission of the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b becomes unstable due to the accumulated heat, or the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b Breakage can be reduced, the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be reliably emitted as intended, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b allow the decorative body 3111 (the back movable decorative body). 3110) can be reliably light-emitting decorated, and the light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) by the back movable movable body 3110 can be enjoyed by the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the light guide radiation plate 3113 is arranged so as to be continuous with the inner surface irradiated with light from the first LED 3114a in the first LED housing portion 3113c into which the first LED 3114a that irradiates light in the direction along the front surface is inserted. The leg 3113f projecting rearward from the main body 3113a is brought into contact with the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c of the back decoration board 3114, so that the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the board main body 3114c of the back decoration board 3114. Is formed between them, the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be discharged through the gap. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b from being accumulated and to reduce the unstable light emission or the breakage of the light emission. As described above, it is possible to reliably emit light, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be reliably light-emitting decorated by the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, and the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) by the rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided. Can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Also, since the back decoration board 3114, the light guide radiating plate 3113, and the decoration 3111 are provided on the back decoration 3110, moving the back decoration 3110 causes wind to be generated. Since the front and rear sides of the back and back decorative board 3114 can be ventilated to release heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like is less likely to be accumulated. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the accumulated light causes unstable light emission of the first LED 3114a or the second LED 3114b or damage the first LED 3114a or the second LED 3114b. Action and effect can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the electronic component 3114e for causing the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b to emit light is mounted on the rear surface of the board main body 3114c, the heat from the electronic component 3114e affects the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. It is possible to prevent the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b from being damaged by the heat from the electronic component 3114e, and to achieve the same operation and effect as described above.

  In addition, since the adjacent (approaching) first LED housing portions 3113c are connected to each other, a thin portion is formed between the first LED housing portions 3113c in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Can be avoided, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 can be hardly damaged.

  Further, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c correspond to the respective light guide radiation plates 3113. By inserting it into the first LED housing portion 3113c or the second LED housing portion 3113d, the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 (main body portion 3113a) and the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c can be made as close as possible. The dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the decorative body 3111 from the front surface to the rear surface of the back decorative substrate 3114 (the back movable decorative body 3110) can be reduced.

  In addition, since the electronic component 3114e is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate main body 3114c, even if a dark color such as black is used as the electronic component 3114e, the electronic component 3114e can be seen from the front through the decorative body 3111 and the light guide radiation plate 3113. The appearance of the decorative body 3111 (the back movable decorative body 3110) can be prevented from being degraded, and the appearance of the back movable movable body 3110 can be improved and the decorative effect can be sufficiently exhibited. .

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal) surround the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c in the decorative body 3111 of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the rear effect unit 3100. The first LED 3114a is mounted on the back decoration board 3114 with the first LED accommodation section 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 behind the decoration section 3111d), and the metal decoration section 3111d can be seen from the front to the back. The first LED 3114a and the first LED housing 3113c can be made difficult to see from the front by the metal decoration portion 3111d, and the first LED 3114a and the first LED housing from the front (player side). When the part 3113c is visible, the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 (the movable movable body 3110 behind the back) is impaired, and the appearance is deteriorated. It is possible to avoid Ukoto, decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be reliably exhibited, the reduction of interest to delight decoration decorative body 3111 the player can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the first LED housing 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is formed along the first decoration protrusion 3111a of the decoration 3111, even if the first LED housing 3113c can be seen through the decoration 3111, Since the first LED housing portion 3113c is along the first decoration protrusion 3111a, the first LED housing portion 3113c looks like a part of the decoration by the first decoration protrusion 3111a, and is provided to the player. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the first LED housing portion 3113c, to prevent the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 from being impaired and to deteriorate the appearance, and to ensure the decorative effect by the decorative body 3111. And a pachinko machine 1 having the same functions and effects as described above can be provided.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the third decorative protrusion 3111c is surrounded by the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d), the metal decorative portion 3111d acts as a frame to make the third decorative protrusion 3111c stand out. be able to. Then, the plurality of first LEDs 3114a are mounted so as to irradiate light to a portion of the main body 3113a of the light guide radiating plate 3113 behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the first LED 3114a is provided with the light guide radiating plate 3113. In order to irradiate light into the main body 3113a in the direction along the front surface, and to radiate light in the direction along the front surface, which is illuminated inside by the plurality of reflection portions 3113e of the main body portion 3113a, forward. The light from the first LED 3114a can be diffused as widely as possible in a region behind the third decorative projection 3111c in the main body 3113a and then radiated forward. A wide range of the decorative projection 3111c can be illuminated and decorated with uniform brightness, and the metal decorative portion 31 in the decorative body 3111 can be illuminated. The third decorative projection 3111c surrounded by 1d can be made more prominent, so that the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be further exhibited, and the player can enjoy the decoration of the decorative body 3111 (the back movable movable body 3110). In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. At this time, since the light is emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, the point light source of the first LED 3114a can be seen from the front through the decoration 3111. Can be reduced. For this reason, the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be light-emission-decorated evenly, so that the player can enjoy the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body 3111, and the game is interesting. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111 is illuminated and decorated by the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, the first decorative substrate 3114 on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED housing 3113c of the light guide radiating plate 3113 is formed. Since the leg 3113f projecting rearward is provided at the position where the light from the LED 3114a is irradiated, the area (light receiving portion 3113i) where the light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated by the leg 3113f is increased. Therefore, more light from the first LED 3114a can be made to enter the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Therefore, the light from the first LED 3114a can be emitted more forward by the main body 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, so that the third decorative projection 3111c of the decorative body 3111 can be brightly illuminated. This makes it possible to show a light-emitting decoration with a higher effect to the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided on the rear side of the metal decoration portion 3111d so as to extend along the metal decoration portion 3111d in the front-rear direction. In addition, the brightness of the light-emitting decoration can be made different between the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c (metal decoration portion 3111d). More specifically, when light traveling in the direction along the front surface reaches the portion (inner peripheral surface) of the first LED housing portion 3113c penetrating back and forth inside the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113, A part of the light is reflected toward the inside of the main body 3113a by the inner peripheral surface, and the rest is radiated to the inside of the first LED housing 3113c. When the light radiated inside the first LED housing portion 3113c reaches the inner peripheral surface on the opposite side of the first LED housing portion 3113c, a part of the light is radiated inside the first LED housing portion 3113c by the inner peripheral surface. And the rest enters the inside of the main body 3113a. Accordingly, when light in the main body 3113a is going to pass through the first LED housing 3113c, the amount of light is greatly reduced and the light is guided to the opposite side, and the opposite side of the first LED housing 3113c becomes dark. . For this reason, when the first LEDs 3114a are provided on both sides of the first LED housing section 3113c, if only the first LED 3114a on one side emits light, one side becomes brighter than the first LED housing section 3113c. At the same time, the other side becomes darker, and when only the first LED 3114a on the other side emits light, the other side becomes brighter and darker than the first LED housing part 3113c, and when both the first LEDs 3114a emit light, the first LED housing part 3113c is emitted. Both sides become bright. Since the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c are provided on the rear side of the metal decoration portion 3111d, as described above, the first LED 3114a appropriately emits light, so that the first LED 3114a is separated from the metal decoration portion 3111d. It is possible to make only one side brighter, only the other side brighter, or both sides brighter, so that a variety of luminous effects can be shown to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and lowering interest. Can be suppressed.

  Since each of the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c is surrounded by the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a), the first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided between the third decorative protrusions 3111c. The first LED receiving portion 3113c of the light guide radiating plate 3113 provided at the rear of the portion receives light from the first LED 3114a for causing the other third decorative protrusion 3111c to emit light. Since it can be made difficult, only the predetermined third decorative protrusion 3111c (the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112) can be luminously decorated in a good state. Accordingly, the plurality of third decorative protrusions 3111c can be illuminated and decorated in a predetermined order, or the special third decorative protrusion 3111c can be illuminated and decorated to suggest a predetermined message to the player. Therefore, it is possible to show a variety of light emission effects to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get tired of the game.

  When the second LED 3114b of the back decoration board 3114 emits light, the light passes directly through the second LED accommodating portion 3113d of the light guide radiating plate 3113 to the rear surface of the decoration 3111 (decoration sheet 3112). As a result, the portion of the decorative body 3111 to which the light from the second LED 3114b is irradiated can be made to emit light in a point-like shape brighter than the portion to be light-emission decorated by the first LED 3114a. Therefore, since the part that is decoratively illuminated by the first LED 3114a and the part that is decoratively illuminated by the second LED 3114b can be shown to the player, the luminous decoration of the decorative body 3111 can be sharpened. Thus, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the effect of the luminous decoration can be enhanced, so that the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, since the first LED 3114a and the first LED housing portion 3113c can be hardly seen from the front by the metal decoration portion 3111d, the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decoration body 3111 to the rear surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 can be obtained. Even if the size (thickness) of is reduced, the decorativeness of the decorative body 3111 (and the decorative sheet 3112) is not impaired, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be sufficiently exhibited. Accordingly, the dimension (thickness) in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the rear surface of the back decorative board 3114 in the back movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, so that the back movable movable body in the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The degree of freedom of arrangement of 3110 can be increased.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the transparent decorative body 3111 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 of the rear-side rendering unit 3100, the first decorative projection 3111a that protrudes most forward and the first decorative projection. Three decorative projections each having a curved front surface, including a second decorative projection 3111b projecting smaller than the projection 3111a, and a third decorative projection 3111c projecting smaller than the second decorative projection 3111b. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a by foil pressing in the portion, the portion where the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided remains transparent. In other words, since one decorative body 3111 having the metal decorative portion 3111d and the transparent portion (translucent decorative portion) is provided, the metal decorative portion and the translucent decorative portion are assembled as in the related art. Since there is no necessity and there is no assembly structure, it is possible to suppress an increase in the size in the front-rear direction, and as a result, it is possible to reduce the thickness in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the degree of freedom in arranging the decorative body 3111 (the rear movable decorative body 3110) in the pachinko machine 1 can be increased, it is possible to arrange the decorative body 3111 in a portion that is not arranged in the conventional pachinko machine. Since the decorative body 3111 is arranged in an unexpected portion, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can easily select the pachinko machine as a game, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 with high power can be provided.

  In addition, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the three decorative protrusions of the decorative body 3111, and the metal decorative portion is formed following the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Since the 3111d is curved, the light in the pachinko machine 1 and the light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reflected in various directions, and the metal decoration portion 3111d is made to glitter. In addition to being able to shine, the three-dimensional effect of the metal decoration portion 3111d (first decoration protrusion 3111a) can be emphasized, and the metal decoration portion 3111d having a three-dimensional effect imparts a sense of quality (premium feeling) to the player. Interest can be strongly attracted.

  When the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided in both the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b, a portion having different metallic luster in the front-rear direction can be seen in the decoration of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, the sense of depth can be further increased with respect to the decoration, and the three-dimensional decoration can more easily attract the interest of the player.

  In addition, the transparent decorative body 3111 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c having different forward protrusion amounts, and is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided, three-dimensional effect can be given to the decoration of the decorative body 3111 by three decorative protrusions having different protrusion amounts. Thereby, a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth can be shown to the player, so that even if the thickness (dimension in the front-rear direction) of the decoration 3111 is reduced, the decoration effect is not reduced, and the decoration 3111 is not reduced. Can be reduced in the front-rear direction, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the decorative body 3111 can be increased, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 3111 can be sufficiently exerted, thereby strongly attracting the player's interest. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of performing the above-described operations can be provided.

  In addition, the metal decoration 3111d is provided on the first decoration projection 3111a, which protrudes most forward in the decoration projection of the decorative body 3111. Since the metal decoration 3111d has the most forward projection, the metal decoration 3111d is provided. The portion 3111d can be made more conspicuous, and the apparent drop between the metal decoration portion 3111d and a portion other than the metal decoration portion 3111d can be made to appear large, so that the decoration of the decoration 3111 can be given a more three-dimensional effect. Can be. Therefore, even if the size of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction is reduced, a three-dimensional decoration can be shown. Therefore, the size of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and the above-described operation and effect can be reliably achieved. The pachinko machine 1 which can be played can be easily realized.

  Further, as described above, since the degree of freedom in arrangement can be increased by reducing the size of the decorative body 3111 in the front-rear direction (by reducing the thickness), the effect members can be provided on the front side and the rear side of the decorative body 3111. Since it can be provided, by providing many effect members, various effects can be presented to the player, and it is difficult for the player to get bored, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d, the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c having no metal decorative portion 3111d protrude forward. Due to the lens effect, a sense of depth is given to the decoration pattern of the decoration sheet 3112 provided at the rear, and the decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 show the decoration with a more three-dimensional effect to the player. be able to. In addition, since the decorative sheet 3112 has a sheet shape, even if the decorative sheet 3112 is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, an increase in the thickness (dimension) in the front-rear direction can be suppressed. From this, it is possible to provide an effect member (the back movable decorative body 3110) including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a small thickness in the front-rear direction, and the pachinko machine having the same operation and effect as described above. It can be 1.

  Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 having the auxiliary decorative portions (the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b) is provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b form the decorative sheet 3112. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the rear side of the decorative body 3111 through the transparent side surface of the one decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, even when the decorative body 3111 is viewed obliquely from the front, the rear side of the decorative body 3111 can be hardly seen by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, so that the decoration of the decorative body 3111 has a poor appearance. Can be avoided, and the decoration effect of the decoration 3111 can be sufficiently exhibited.

  Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 provided on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b, the first decorative portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b allow the first decorative protrusion 3112b. The player can be illusioned as if the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the 3111a. In addition, since the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided outside the metal decorative portion 3111d in a front view, the metal contour portion is formed by the first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b. 3111d can be seen widely. Therefore, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 allow the player to show a decoration with a higher decorative effect to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 with a high appealing power that can strongly attract the player's attention. Can be provided.

  Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by foil stamping, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed as compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is immersed in a plating tank or vaporized metal is deposited. In addition, an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the hot stamping device for foil-pressing the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided with a flat hot plate having elasticity, the hot plate contacts the front surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a of the decoration 3111. Upon contact, the surface of the hot plate is elastically deformed to have a shape following the front surface of the curved first decorative projection 3111a, and the metal foil of the transfer sheet is moved to the curved front surface of the first decorative projection 3111a. Can be transferred (foil-pressed) in good condition so as to be in close contact with the substrate. In addition, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by foil pressing using a hot stamping device, the transfer sheet having the metal foil first contacts the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, whereby the transfer sheet is pulled. Wrinkles are less likely to occur, the metal foil can be transferred cleanly without wrinkles, and the metal decorative portion 3111d can have a good appearance.

  In addition, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 side is a flat surface having elasticity, the transfer sheet can be transferred without replacing the hot plate even if the shape of the first decorative protrusion 3111a is different. Can be transferred. Therefore, it is possible to easily respond to a model change, a design change, and the like, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

  Furthermore, since the surface of the hot plate facing the decorative body 3111 has elasticity, the hot plate is moved to the decorative body 3111 side, that is, the hot plate is moved to the first decorative projection. The amount (depth) of the first decorative protrusion 3111a to be immersed in the hot plate can be varied according to the strength of pressing against the hot plate 3111a. Can be widened or narrowed. That is, it is possible to freely change the range in which the decorative body 3111 (the decorative projection projecting forward) is pressed by the foil. Thus, when it is desired to change the range in which the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided due to a model change or a design change, the range of the metal decoration portion 3111d can be easily changed by changing the relative movement amount of the hot plate. it can.

  Further, as described above, the elastically pressed surface of the hot plate can freely change the range in which the hot stamping is performed on the decorative body 3111 (the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the like). When the metal decoration 3111d is also provided on the decoration 3111b, the color of the metal decoration 3111d can be made different between the first decoration 3111a and the second decoration 3111b. More specifically, in the related art, when it is attempted to form a metal decorative portion having a different color on one member (decorative body), for example, after forming a metal layer of the first color on the whole, a masking process is performed. By forming a metal layer of the second color on the whole and removing the masking, the color can be made different between the masked portion and the non-masked portion. Alternatively, after forming a metal layer of the first color as a whole, a metal layer of the second color is formed thereon, and a part of the metal layer of the second color is separated by laser peeling or the like, The color can be made different between the part that has been peeled off and the part that has not been peeled off. However, the use of any of the above-described techniques requires time and effort to manufacture the decorative body, and causes a problem of increased cost. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the elastically pressed surface of the hot plate can freely change the range in which the hot stamping of the decorative body 3111 with respect to the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the like is performed. Using a transfer sheet having a metal foil of the first color, the hot plate is moved so as to be immersed to the front surface of the second decorative projection 3111b, and the metal foil of the first color is moved to the second decorative projection 3111b and the first decorative projection 3111b. The image is transferred to the decorative projection 3111a, and then, using a transfer sheet having a metal foil of the second color, only the first decorative projection 3111a is immersed without making contact with the front surface of the second decorative projection 3111b. The hot plate is moved to transfer the metal foil of the second color to the first decorative projection 3111a. Thereby, the metal decorative portions 3111d of different colors can be easily formed by the first decorative protrusions 3111a and the second decorative protrusions 3111b, and an increase in cost can be suppressed, and the decorativeness is more excellent. The decorative body 3111 can be provided, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided.

  Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by foil pressing, the metal foil is left unremoved in a portion other than the metal decorative portion 3111d as compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is left using laser peeling. It is possible to reduce the deterioration of the appearance of the decorative body 3111. More specifically, when laser peeling is used, if the decorative body 3111 to be peeled has irregularities such as the first decorative protrusions 3111a on the front surface, the focal length of the laser depends on the position of the decorative body 3111. Therefore, the metal layer may not be sufficiently peeled off at a position separated (or approached) from the focal length by a predetermined distance or more, and there is a possibility that the peeling remains and the appearance deteriorates. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only at a necessary portion by foil pressing, and it is not necessary to peel off the metal foil after the foil pressing to form a transparent portion, and the appearance is good. The decorative body 3111 can be formed.

  In addition, as described above, since the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the degree of freedom in arrangement can be increased, so that the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be placed at the standby position (evacuation position) invisible from the player side. Position) and the back movable ornamental body 3110 movable between the appearance position visible from the player side, and by moving the back movable ornament body 3110 to the appearance position, the metal decoration portion 3111d is provided. The appearance of the movable backside decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111), which has high decorativeness, makes it possible for the player to think that there is something good, and makes the player expect the game. Can be suppressed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the rear movable decoration 3110 of the rear production unit 3100, the flat light guide radiation plate is added to the flat decoration 3111 having the metal decoration 3111d on the front. After providing the base plate 3113 and the back decoration board 3114, a flange portion 3113b surrounding the circumference of the back decoration board 3114 is extended backward from the outer periphery of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the rear side of the back decoration board 3114 is provided. Since the flange portion 3115b extends forward from the covering decorative body base 3115 to the outer periphery of the back decoration substrate 3114 from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back decoration substrate 3114. The route of the creepage distance EL advances rearward outside the flange portion 3113b, and a flange is formed at the rear end of the flange portion 3113b. It turns back inside 3113b, advances forward between the flange portion 3113b and the flange portion 3115b, and forms a meandering route that turns back inside the flange portion 3115b at the front end of the flange portion 3115b. The creepage distance EL to the decorative substrate 3114 can be made sufficiently long (10 mm or more, or a distance capable of blocking a discharge voltage of at least 10 kV). At this time, a decoration body 3111 having a metal decoration part 3111d on the front surface, a back decoration board 3114 on which a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and a second LED 3114b for light-emitting decoration of the decoration body 3111 are mounted, Since the decorative body base 3115 covering the rear side of the back decorative board 3114 is provided on the back movable decorative body 3110 where static electricity is likely to be generated by moving in the vertical direction, the back movable decorative body 3110 The static electricity is easily accumulated, and when the static electricity is accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3111d, the accumulated static electricity is discharged at a stretch because of high conductivity, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are increased by increasing the discharge voltage. However, as described above, the back decoration board 311 may be moved from the metal decoration portion 3111d. Creepage distance EL can be made sufficiently long, so that static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d can be reliably prevented from being discharged to the back decoration board 3114, and By preventing breakage of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like mounted on the decorative board 3114, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having the metal decorative portion 3111d can be reliably light-emitting and decorated. The user can enjoy the light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 (the back movable movable body 3110), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Also, in the decorative body 3111 of the rear movable movable body 3110, a metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a projecting forward so as to form a predetermined decoration. Since the metal decoration portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the portion 3111a, the creepage distance EL from the metal decoration portion 3111d to the back decoration substrate 3114 is reduced by the length of the side surface of the first decoration protrusion 3111a in the front-rear direction. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can be made longer and can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, since the rear side of the back decoration board 3114 is covered with the decoration base 3115, it is possible to prevent static electricity from being discharged from the metal decoration portion 3111d of the decoration body 3111 to the rear surface of the back decoration board 3114. In addition, it is possible to prevent static electricity accumulated in another member (for example, the effect display device 1600) provided behind the decorative body base 3115 from being discharged to the back decorative board 3114. It is possible to more reliably prevent damage to the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the like of the back decoration board 3114 by the discharge of static electricity.

  Furthermore, since the copper foil 3114d forming the circuit pattern in the back decoration board 3114 is prevented from abutting on the light guide radiation plate 3113 (the leg 3113f thereof) by the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, the metal decoration section is used. The creeping distance EL from 3111d to the copper foil 3114d of the back decoration board 3114 can be lengthened as much as possible, and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  Further, since the copper foil 3114d of the back decoration board 3114 is provided so as not to contact the leg 3113f of the light guide radiation plate 3113 by the light reflection auxiliary area 3114f, vibration from inside and outside of the pachinko machine 1 acts. However, friction does not occur between the leg 3113f and the copper foil 3114d, and the friction does not cause the copper foil 3114d to wear and break the circuit. It is possible to prevent a problem that the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b do not emit light, and the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 can be illuminated and decorated to reliably exhibit a desired effect.

  Further, the decorative body 3111 includes a metal decorative portion 3111d, and a second decorative protrusion 3111b and a third decorative protrusion 3111c that transmit light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back decoration board 3114. Therefore, a high-grade feeling can be given by the brightness of the metal of the metal decoration portion 3111d, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the second decoration projection can be provided by the light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b. To provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the decorative body 3111 (the back movable movable body 3110) can be made to stand out by illuminating and decorating the portion 3111b and the third decorative projection 3111c, thereby attracting the player's interest strongly. Can be.

  Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a projecting forward in a predetermined decorative shape, a three-dimensional effect is given to the metal decorative portion 3111d. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can make the decorative portion 3111d more conspicuous, further enhance the sense of quality by the metal decorative portion 3111d, and can strongly attract the player's interest.

  Further, since the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 is doubly surrounded by the flange 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange section 3115b of the decoration base 3115, the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 is formed by the flange. It can be hidden by the player side by being hidden by the 3113b and the flange portion 3115b, and the appearance of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the light guide radiating plate 3113 for diffusing light is provided in the rear movable movable body 3110, the light from the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b of the rear rear decorative substrate 3114 is diffused, and Can be applied to the metal decorative portion 3111d, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111, so that the entire decorative body 3111 (decorative sheet 3112) is illuminated with uniform brightness. It is possible to improve the appearance of the luminous decoration, and to further enhance the effect of the luminous effect of the back movable ornamental body 3110, to thereby delight the player and suppress a decrease in interest. .

  In addition, since the flange portion 3113b surrounding the outer periphery of the back decoration board 3114 extends rearward from the light guide radiating plate 3113 which diffuses light from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b and radiates the light forward, A part of the light incident on the inside of the light emitting plate 3113 is radiated to the outside from the flange portion 3113b, so that the flange portion 3113b can also be illuminated and decorated. It can be made more difficult for the player to see, and the luminous decoration of the flange portion 3113b can also enhance the appearance of the luminous decoration of the rear movable ornamental body 3110, thereby making the player entertain and entertaining. The decrease can be suppressed.

  The same function and effect as described above can be obtained in the back movable decorative body 3160, the back movable decorative body 3170, and the back movable decorative body 3180.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-side movable decorative body 3110 in the back-side effect unit 3100, transparent light-guide radiation is provided behind the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. A plate 3113 and a back decoration board 3114 are provided, and mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 in each of the plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c formed on the back surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The first LED 3114a of the side view type is inserted so as to be accommodated. When the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back decoration board 3114 emit light, light from the first LEDs 3114a is transmitted from the inner surface of the first LED housing portion 3113c to the surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 within the plate thickness. Irradiating in the direction along, and is reflected forward by a plurality of reflectors 3113e formed on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and is radiated forward from the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Become. The light radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 is radiated forward through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 constituting the decorative member, whereby the transparent portion provided with the decorative portion 3150 is provided. The decorative members having light properties (decorative body 3111 and decorative sheet 3112) are to be luminously decorated.

  At this time, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflectors 3113e within the plate thickness of the light guide radiating plate 3113, and the decorative body is formed. Since the 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112 are made to emit light, the light of the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 as compared with the case where the first LED 3114a emits light forward. The distance until the light is emitted forward can be lengthened, and the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused and emitted forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113. Accordingly, when the first LED 3114a emits light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused, and it can be suppressed that the first LED 3114a seems to emit light in a dot-like manner. The sheet 3112 can be evenly illuminated and decorated so that the sheet 3112 looks beautiful, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the back movable decorative body 3110, since the back decorative board 3114 is provided behind the flat decorative member (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) and the light guide radiation plate 3113, the dimension in the front-rear direction is thin. And it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back, and to arrange other directing members (the front rotating decorative body 3410, the rear rotating decorative body 3440, etc.). It is possible to easily provide a pachinko machine 1 that can make a player more enjoyable by providing various effect members.

  Further, the decorative member (the rear movable decorative body 3110) provided with the decorative portion 3150 has relief portions such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since it is composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a, the embossed portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the decorative portion 3150, and the embossed portion allows the embossed portion to be embossed. The sense of depth can be given to the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear by the lens effect. Therefore, the three-dimensional decoration (decoration part 3150) having a sense of depth can be shown to the player by the relief portion of the decoration body 3111 and the pattern of the decoration sheet 3112. Therefore, the thickness of the back movable decoration body 3110 ( Even if the front-back direction dimension) is reduced, the decorative effect does not decrease, it is possible to attract and entertain the player's interest, and the back-side movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner, The above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as a first contour portion 3112a behind a decorative body 3111 having a relief portion such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since the 3112 is provided, the decorative body 3111 can be seen to be colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 without coloring the transparent decorative body 3111, and the cost of the decorative body 3111 can be reduced. Can be done. In addition, by changing the pattern of the decoration sheet 3112, the decoration (decoration part 3150) of the decoration 3111 (the back movable decoration 3110) can be easily changed. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled.

  In addition, the first contour portion 3112a of the decoration sheet 3112 has a hologram portion where a part of the pattern as the decoration portion 3150 is displayed by interference fringes of light, and the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 is provided. , The light from other LEDs provided on the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 1600, etc., the light in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the like are holograms of the first contour portion 3112a. , A predetermined hologram can be shown by light interference fringes, so that the hologram can improve the appearance of the decorative portion 3150, and can strongly attract the player's interest, and By this, a three-dimensional effect can be given to a part of the decorative portion 3150 of the back movable movable body 3110, and the back movable movable body 3110 can be made thin. And it is possible to ensure that does not feel as thin player also.

  Further, since a part of the pattern in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is configured by a hologram, the hologram is composed of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion. Since it can be seen through the transparent decorative body 3111 having an embossed portion such as 3111c, a sense of depth can be imparted to a pattern such as a hologram by a lens effect of the embossed portion, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Possible decorations 3150 can be shown to the player. Further, since the hologram portion is provided in the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, thereby suppressing an increase in cost.

  In the decorative member including the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened, and the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is the same as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The outer periphery of 3111 can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, and since there is no such thing as a frame on the outer periphery of the decoration (decoration part 3150), a feeling of openness is given to the decoration of the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back. As well as make the decoration look bigger. Therefore, the decoration of the movable back body 3110 (the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, and the decoration effect of the movable back body 3110 can be sufficiently exhibited, and the movable back body 3110 can be fully exhibited. The decoration of 3110 can strongly attract the interest of the player, and can provide the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player.

  In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flat, the decorative sheet 3112 comes into contact with (abuts) the rear surface of the decorative body 3111. Is not diffusely reflected, and the pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be more easily seen through the transparent decorative body 3111, so that the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be sufficiently exhibited. In addition, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat, the dimension of the decorative member formed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 in the front-rear direction can be made as small as possible. The thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of realizing the above-described operational effects can be provided.

  Furthermore, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, and it is possible to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the back movable movable body 3110 (decorative body 3111) with the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, by making the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the back-side movable decorative body 3110 continuous with the decoration of the back-side movable decorative body 3110, a large decoration with a sense of unity is provided to the player. It is possible to show the player, give a visual impact to the player, and make the player pay attention. At the same time, it is possible to entertain a large decoration, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  In addition, since the light guide radiating plate 3113 has a plurality of first LED housing portions 3113c in which the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 is housed from behind, the first LED housing of the light guide radiating plate 3113 is provided. By housing the first LED 3114a from the rear in the portion 3113c, the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 can be made as close as possible, and the front and rear of the back movable decoration 3110 can be obtained. The thickness in the direction can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 exhibiting the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Also, the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 is housed in the first LED housing 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated from the inner surface of the first LED housing 3113c into the plate thickness. Therefore, as compared with the case where light is irradiated from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, a portion (for example, a central portion) of the light guide radiation plate 3113 where light from the outer peripheral surface is difficult to reach. However, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in the part and irradiating light from the inner surface, the part can be made to emit light brightly, and the back movable decorative body 3110 (the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3111) 3112) can be illuminated without unevenness.

  Furthermore, since the first LED 3114a of the back decoration board 3114 is of a side view type, only the first LED 3114a is accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide radiation plate 3113 to emit light. Light can be emitted from the inner surface of the portion 3113c (the light receiving portion 3113i) in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects is reliably realized. be able to.

  Further, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113, and light can be radiated to substantially the entire decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112. Even if the decoration (decoration part 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, it is not necessary to change the reflection part 3113e, and it is possible to easily cope with the change in the decoration of the decoration 3111 and the decoration sheet 3112. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can easily respond to a model change, a design change, and the like.

  The same function and effect as described above can be obtained in the back movable decorative body 3160 and the back movable decorative body 3170.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first decorative projection 3111a, the second decorative projection 3111b, the third decorative projection 3111c, and the metal decorative part 3111d of the decorative body 3111 are used as the decorative part 3150 of the back movable decorative body 3110. , And the decoration sheet 3112 is composed of the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d. It does not do. For example, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 may be used as one decorative member, and the decorative member 3150 may be applied to the decorative member.

  Note that a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a receiving area (a general winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening (a variable starting opening, a large starting opening, a large winning opening) capable of receiving a game medium in a game area into which the game medium is driven by a player's operation. Winning prize opening, role winning prize opening), V winning prize opening, etc.), and when a game medium is received in the reception, a privilege (payout of the game medium, opening / closing operation of the variable winning opening, etc.) is given to the player. And so on, so that the player can enjoy the operation of driving the game medium so that the player can receive the game medium into a desired reception slot. ing. As a gaming machine of this type, a decorative member in which a metal plate is provided on the surface and a notch that penetrates forward and backward is closed by a transparent lens portion, and a decorative member provided on the rear side of the decorative member and extends forward through the lens portion And a decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-223485). According to the technique of this document, the appearance of the decorative member can be improved by the radiance of the metal plating on the decorative member, and the decoration member (lens portion) can be illuminated and decorated by the light emission of the LED, so that the interest of the player can be improved. Can be attracted and entertained. By the way, in a decorative member having a metal decorative portion formed by metal plating on the surface as in the technology of this document, when static electricity is accumulated on the surface of the decorative member, the metal decorative portion has high conductivity at the site of the metal decorative portion. As a result, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface is discharged at a stretch, and the discharge (spark) voltage (discharge voltage) becomes high. In the technique of this document, since the decorative substrate is provided on the rear side of the metal-plated decorative member, the metal plate and the decorative substrate are as close as possible. Static electricity accumulated in the metal plating may be discharged between the metal plating) and the decorative substrate, and a spark may be generated. Therefore, a spark (discharge) is generated between the metal plating and the decorative substrate, so that the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is damaged, and it becomes impossible to perform the light emission decoration (light emission effect) of the decoration member. As a result, the player cannot be entertained, and there is a fear that the interest of the player may be reduced.

[Electrical connection method between main frame and game board 5]
Next, an electrical connection method between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a front perspective view (a) and a rear perspective view (b) of the drawer connector mounted on the relay board provided in the main body frame. The drawer connector is a connector that can automatically make an electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, and is arranged at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game board 5. A game board side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board side relay board, and a main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the main body frame side relay board disposed at a predetermined position on the front surface of the main body frame 4. Is provided.

  When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, a game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 (not shown) is guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 to play the game on the game board 5. Each terminal of the board-side drawer connector (convex type) and each terminal PN of the body frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 are electrically connected.

  For example, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 will be described. The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is formed of a non-conductive resin and has a rectangular opening on the front side. In addition, a box-shaped main body DCNa that is long in the left-right direction is provided, and a plate-shaped base body DCNb that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear side of the box-shaped main body DCNa, and has a shape that is formed in the letter T as a whole. I have.

  Around the opening portion DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa, a drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 of the game board 5 is provided over a predetermined distance from the front surface of the opening portion DCNaa toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa. Inclined portions DCNaaaa for guiding toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa are formed. A game board side drawer connector of the game board 5 is provided at a central portion (one place) of the inner upper surface of the opening DCNaa of the box-shaped main body DCNa and right and left portions (one place on the left part and one place on the right part) of the inner upper surface. The (convex type) prevents the drawer connector (concave type) DCN from being turned upside down, which is different from the normal direction, to be inserted into the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. Left and right positions of the game board drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN when inserted into the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN in a regular orientation A groove DCNaab that prevents displacement and enhances fitting of the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side of the game board 5 (convex type) and the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side has an opening D in the box-shaped main body DCNa. It is formed toward the front near the Naa to the bottom surface of the box-like body DCNA.

  On the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body DCNa, each pin-type terminal PN is arranged in two rows in the left-right direction in a direction perpendicular to the bottom surface (six pin-type terminals PN are arranged in one row in the left-right direction). .) Penetrates the box-shaped main body DCNa and the base body DCNb.

  Mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba are formed on the left and right sides of the base body DCNb, respectively. When the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted on the main body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209), the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is first mounted in the mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba. Each of the rivets (not shown) is inserted from the front, and the end of the back surface (solder surface) of the main frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) is caulked and plastically deformed. As a result, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209).

  In addition, when the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted on the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) on the back surface of the base body DCNb, the body frame side drawer is mounted on the body frame side relay board. A cylindrical protrusion DCNbb is formed so that the connector (concave type) DCN is mounted in a normal direction.

  The body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) includes a body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and a DIP (Dual) electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. A small connector of an Inline Package type is mounted, and is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via a wiring (harness) not shown. When the game board 5 is mounted on the body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game frame 4, and the game board side drawer connector (convex type). (Type) and each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN are electrically connected to each other through a small DIP type connector and a wiring (harness) (not shown). A control signal line for transmitting various control signals by the main control board 1310 provided in the device 5 and the payout control board 633 provided in the main body frame 4 is formed.

  The main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN electrically connects the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided on the main body frame 4 and supplies various powers from the power board 630. It is electrically connected to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) for supplying to various boards provided in the game board 5, and another one is shown separately from the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side. A body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ′ not to be provided is provided on a body frame side relay board KB ′ (not shown) different from the body frame side relay board KB. The body frame side relay board KB 'is a DIP (Dual Inline Package) electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN' in addition to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN '. A small type connector is mounted, and is electrically connected to each decorative board, various sensors, and the like provided on the door frame 3 via wiring (harness) not shown. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, another game board side different from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 electrically connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The drawer connector (convex type) is guided by a body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN '(not shown) of the body frame 4, and each terminal of another game board side drawer connector (convex type) and a body frame side drawer connector (not shown). (Concave type) By electrically connecting each terminal PN of DCN ', a peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 via a small DIP type connector and a wiring (harness) not shown, and a door Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals and detection signals by the decorative boards, various sensors, various speakers, and the like provided in the frame 3 are formed. The structure of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN 'not shown is the same as the structure of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN', and the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN 'not shown. The method of fixing the drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the body frame side relay board KB (not shown) is fixed to the body frame side relay board KB (not shown) using a rivet. I have.

  Also, a method of fixing the game board 5 drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 to a game board side relay board (not shown). The other game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN 'is another game board side relay board (not shown) of this other game board side drawer connector (convex type). (This is different from a game board side relay board (not shown) on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is mounted.) The fixing method to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is the same as the fixing method to the main frame side relay board KB (the fixing method using rivets).

  When the drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main frame is fixed to the relay board KB (refer to FIG. 209) of the main frame, the rivet is used. Although the electric connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be automatically performed simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the drawer side of the game board 5 is connected to the drawer. Since a large force may be applied from the connector (convex type) to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, this large force may cause a pin type in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. This is to prevent the soldered surface of each terminal PN from peeling off on the back surface (solder surface) of the body frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209). The case where the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side is fixed to the main frame side relay board KB (see FIG. 209) using bolts and nuts, and the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board side are illustrated. In the case where the game board 5 is not fixed to the game board side relay board, there is a disadvantage that the nut may be loosened when the game board 5 is mounted on or removed from the main body frame 4.

  In the present embodiment, a pin-type terminal is used as each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. However, if a bellows type using terminals and contacts is used, there are the following problems. For example, when each terminal of the drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 of the game board 5 is a terminal and each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the main body frame 4 is a contact, the pachinko machine 1 When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 with the power turned on, a contact between the terminal and the contact (specifically, a large current (rush current) flows at the various power supply line contacts) is welded. Becomes If the game board 5 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 4 in the welded state to mount it, the contacts of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the main body frame side are bent or broken, or the game board 5 is connected to the main body frame 4. When the contact is removed from the main frame, the contact is peeled from the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and is damaged, so that the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN cannot be used.

  In addition, if the terminal and the contact are welded, various control boards may malfunction or the electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to the damage of the connector. The problem of having to provide.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described problem does not occur at all by using a pin-type terminal as each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. That is, even if the worker mistakenly mounts the game board 5 on the main body frame 4 with the pachinko machine 1 powered on, each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 and the main body The terminals PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side of the frame 4 are not welded, and there is no need to provide a dedicated circuit for preventing the welding.

[Solder short circuit prevention]
Next, prevention of solder short-circuit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a diagram (a) to (c) for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is a DIP type electrically connected to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type). (D)-(f) for preventing solder bridging of each terminal of the small connector. In FIG. 209, various wiring patterns and a substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “beta land”) are omitted from the viewability of the drawing. In FIG. 209, the arrow indicated by the solid line indicates the direction in which the solder flows when the substrate flows into the solder bath, and the arrow indicated by the dashed line indicates the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath.

  As described above, in addition to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is disposed at a predetermined position on the front surface of the body frame 4. (Recessed type) A small DIP type connector electrically connected to DCN is mounted. The terminals of the DIP type small connector are pin-type terminals arranged in two rows. The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is provided with mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba formed in the base body DCNb of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the same straight line in the horizontal direction on the body frame side relay board KB. And the cylindrical protrusion DCNbb is arranged (predetermined position for the drawer connector), the small connector of the DIP type is in the vertical direction on the main frame side relay board KB, that is, the DIP type The terminals arranged in two rows of the small connectors are arranged so as to be rotated by 90 degrees with the terminals PN arranged in two rows of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN (predetermined position for small connectors). .

  When the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, each of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN The terminal PN is inserted through a through-hole KTH1 having a land (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “land KTH1”), and the cylindrical projecting portion DCNbb of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is provided with a positioning hole. The mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN inserted into the body frame side and the mounting holes KBa, KBa formed at positions corresponding to the mounting through holes DCNba, DCNba communicate with the main body. A rivet (not shown) is inserted from the front of the frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN to the mounting through holes DCNba and DCNba. End is fixed is caulked on the rear surface (the solder surface) KBy of inserted in the body frame side relay board KB Re respectively. When the small connector of the DIP type is placed at the predetermined position for the small connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, each terminal of the small connector of the DIP type has a land through hole KTH2. (Hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “land KTH2”).

  When the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB, the drawer connector becomes a two-stage vertically and a first stage from the bottom. Six terminals PN in one row and six terminals PN in a second row, which is the second row from the bottom, are arranged in parallel. On the other hand, when the small DIP type connector is placed at the predetermined position for the small connector on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, the small connector becomes six stages vertically and the first stage from the bottom. Two terminals PN in one row, two terminals PN in a second row that is the second row from the bottom, two terminals PN in a third row that is the third row from the bottom, and a fourth row from the bottom. The two terminals PN in the fourth row, the two terminals PN in the fifth row in the fifth row from the bottom, and the two terminals PN in the sixth row in the sixth row from the bottom are arranged in parallel. Becomes

  In the main frame side relay board KB, the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is placed at a predetermined position for the drawer connector on the surface (mounting surface) KBx, and the small DIP type connector is placed at the predetermined position for the small connector. When placed, the terminals PN of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame and the terminals of the small connector of the DIP type protrude from the back surface (solder surface) KBy. In this state, the main frame-side relay board KB is flowed through its back surface (solder surface) KBy to the solder bath to connect each terminal PN of the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN and each land KTH1 to the main frame-side relay. It is possible to solder to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the substrate KB, and to solder each terminal of the small DIP type connector and each land KTH2 to the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB. Can be.

  The direction in which the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder bath is from the bottom of the second row of six terminals PN, which is the second stage from the bottom of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. The direction is toward the first row of six terminals PN, which is the first row, and the first row is from the bottom of the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom of the DIP type small connector. The direction is toward two terminals in the first row. That is, in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the last row, and in the DIP type small connector, they are the first row from the bottom. The two terminals in the first row are the final stage terminals.

  When the back surface (solder surface) of the board flows into the solder bath, the solder bath is arranged in a state where pin-type ones are aligned, such as terminals of a drawer connector (concave type) DCN or a small DIP type connector on the body frame side. When flowing to the terminal, there is a possibility that a solder bridge is generated along the flowing direction, and in particular, a solder bridge is generated between a terminal at a final stage and a terminal at a stage before the terminal. Therefore, a solder escape pattern is formed on the terminal of the last stage.

  In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as described above, the six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the last row. Each land KTH1 is connected to a solder escape pattern KNP1 having a rectangular shape which is long in the vertical direction and whose width is the outer diameter of the land KTH1 (that is, each of the six terminals PN in the first row). The lands KTH1 and the solder relief patterns KNP1 are formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB so that each of the solder relief patterns KNP1 is electrically connected to each other.

  As described above, in the small connector of the DIP type, since the two terminals in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, are the terminals in the last row, each land KTH2 of the two terminals PN in the first row, The solder escape patterns KNP2 having a rectangular shape that is long in the direction and whose width is the outer diameter of the land KTH2 are connected to each other (that is, each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern of the two terminals in the first row). KNP2 are electrically connected to each other) on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB.

  As described above, by forming the solder escape pattern on the terminal of the final stage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the solder bridge at the terminal of the final stage and to contribute to the prevention of solder short-circuit. May occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of solder bridges, a method of printing horizontal lines at the boundaries of each step by silk printing on the resist (measures 1 by silk printing), A method in which horizontal lines are printed on the boundaries of each step by silk printing, and vertical lines are printed on the boundaries of the lands of the terminals adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction and the solder escape pattern (measures 2 by silk printing). A method of surrounding the land and the solder escape pattern of each terminal with a predetermined figure by printing and painting out the area (measure 3 by silk printing) can be cited.

[Countermeasure 1 by silk printing]
First, as a method for suppressing the occurrence of the solder bridge, a method of printing horizontal lines on the resist by silk printing at the boundaries of the respective steps (measure 1 by silk printing) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (a), in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, six terminals PN in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom, and the second row, which is the second row from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the six terminals PN and the six terminals PN. That is, since the horizontal line KSH1 is printed by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, when viewed from the resist surface, the horizontal line KSH1 is a vertical wall like a mountain range. Are connected. Accordingly, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB flows into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and flow over a vertical wall such as a mountain line called a horizontal line KSH1, so that From the second row of six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the second row and the first row of six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the first row from the bottom, such as a mountain line such as a horizontal line KSH1. A solder separating force is exerted by the solder remaining on the resist due to the wall, so that a solder bridge can be suppressed at each of the terminals PN and the land KTH1 which are vertically adjacent to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (d), each terminal of the DIP type small connector has two terminals in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the fifth row, which is the fifth row from the bottom, and the four rows from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals in the fourth column serving as the eye, and the fourth column from the bottom is formed. The horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two terminals of the third frame and the two terminals of the third row, which is the third row from the bottom, Two terminals in the third row, the third row from the bottom, and the second row, the bottom row A horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the two rows of the two terminals and the two rows of the second row of the second row from the bottom. A horizontal line KSH2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the first terminal and the two terminals in the first row, which is the first row from the bottom. That is, since the horizontal line KSH2 is printed by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, when viewed from the resist surface, the horizontal line KSH2 is a vertical wall like a mountain range. Are connected. Thus, for example, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over a vertical wall such as a mountain line called a horizontal line KSH2. , A horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and the land KTH2 in the sixth row, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and the two terminals and the land KTH2, the fifth row which is the fifth row from the bottom. Since the solder separates due to the solder remaining on the resist due to the wall, a solder bridge can be suppressed at each of the vertically adjacent terminals. A horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the fifth row of two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fifth row from the bottom and the fourth row of two terminals and lands KTH2 in the fourth row from the bottom, and a fourth row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the second terminal and the land KTH2 in the third row from the third row and the third terminal from the third row in the third row from the bottom. The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals and the land KTH2, which is the second row from the bottom, and the two terminals and the land KTH2, which is the second row from the bottom The horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the first row of two terminals and the land KTH2, which is the first row from the bottom, also has the sixth row of two terminals and the land KTH2, which is the sixth row from the bottom, and 5 steps Similarly to the horizontal line KSH2 at the boundary between the two terminals in the fifth row and the land KTH2, the solder separating force due to the solder trying to stay on the resist by the vertical wall such as a mountain line of the horizontal line KSH2 increases the solder separation force. By working, solder bridges can be suppressed at the terminals and the land KTH2 that are vertically adjacent to each other.

[Countermeasure 2 by silk printing]
Next, as a method that can suppress the occurrence of solder bridges, a horizontal line is printed on the resist by silk printing at the boundary of each step, and a vertical line is printed on the land of each terminal adjacent to the left and right and the solder escape pattern. The method of printing on each of the boundaries (measures 2 by silk printing) will be described. The countermeasure 2 by silk printing is different from the countermeasure 1 by silk printing described above in that a vertical line is printed by silk printing on the land of each terminal adjacent in the left-right direction and the boundary of the solder escape pattern adjacent in the left-right direction. Therefore, description of the measure 1 by silk printing is omitted.

  In the drawer connector (concave type) DCN on the body frame side, in addition to the horizontal line KSH1 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. 209 (a), as shown in FIG. Of the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the first row, and the six terminals PN and lands KTH1 in the second row, which is the second row from the bottom, the terminals PN and lands KTH1 adjacent in the left-right direction; A vertical line KSV1 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the solder escape patterns KNP1 adjacent in the left-right direction. That is, since the vertical lines KSV1 are printed on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB by silk printing, the vertical lines KSV1 look like mountains in the resist surface. Vertical walls are connected. Accordingly, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder bath, the solder can flow on the resist and flow along the vertical wall KSV1 such as a vertical wall such as a mountain range. Solder flowing on a vertical wall such as a mountain line of vertical line KSV1 tries to stay on the resist by flowing to the left of the vertical wall or to the right of the vertical wall with the vertical wall such as the mountain line of vertical line KSV1 as a boundary. As a result, a solder bridge can be suppressed in each of the terminals PN and the land KTH1 adjacent in the left-right direction and the solder escape pattern KNP1 adjacent in the left-right direction.

  In each terminal of the DIP type small connector, in addition to the horizontal line KSH2 printed by silk printing shown in FIG. 209 (d), as shown in FIG. The terminals and lands KTH2 adjacent in the left-right direction and the solder adjacent in the left-right direction from the two terminals in one row and the land KTH2 in the sixth row from the bottom to the two terminals in the sixth row and the land KTH2. A vertical line KSV2 is printed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB by silk printing on the boundary between the escape pattern KNP2 and the escape pattern KNP2. That is, since the vertical line KSV2 is printed by silk printing on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, the vertical line KSV2 looks like a mountain range when viewed from the resist surface. The vertical walls are connected. Thus, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB flows into the solder bath, the solder can flow on the resist and flow along the vertical wall KSV2, such as a mountain range. Solder flowing on a vertical wall such as a mountain range of the vertical line KSV2 flows to the left of the vertical wall or to the right of the vertical wall with the vertical wall such as the mountain range of the vertical line KSV2 as a border, and attempts to remain at the resist. As a result, a force for separating the solder acts, so that solder bridges can be suppressed in the terminals and lands KTH2 adjacent in the left-right direction and the solder escape patterns KNP2 adjacent in the left-right direction.

[Countermeasure 3 by silk printing]
Next, as a method of suppressing the occurrence of the solder bridge, a method of surrounding the land of each terminal and the solder escape pattern with a predetermined figure on the resist by silk printing and filling the area (measure 3 by silk printing). explain.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (c), in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, a land KTH1 through which each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and a solder escape pattern KNP1. Are surrounded by a rectangular shape long in the left-right direction by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, and, among the area KSA1 surrounded by the rectangular shape, each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 Is printed so as to fill the area excluding. That is, among the regions KSA1 in which each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 are surrounded by a silk print on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, each land KTH1 and each land KTH1 Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP1 is printed so as to be filled out, when viewing each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1 from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA1, each land KTH2 and each solder The relief pattern KNP1 is a depressed area, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1 is an area of a small plateau. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay substrate KB flows into the solder bath, the solder must flow over the resist and flow over a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1. The amount of solder flowing over the printed area KSA1 can be suppressed, and the solder is formed on each land KTH1 and each solder relief pattern KNP1, which are recessed areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1. When flowing, the solder separating force is exerted because each land KTH1 that becomes a depressed area and each solder escape pattern KNP1 cannot get over a small plateau called a silk-printed area KSA1 and tries to stay there. The terminal PN and the land KTH1 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and the solder escape adjacent in the horizontal direction A turn KNP1, solder bridges in can be suppressed, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (f), each terminal of the small DIP connector has a land KTH2 through which each terminal of the small DIP connector is inserted and each solder escape pattern KNP2, and a main frame side relay board KB. The rear surface (solder surface) KBy is surrounded by a vertically long rectangular shape by silk printing, and an area excluding each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 among the area KSA2 surrounded by the rectangular shape is painted out. Print. In other words, in the area KSA2 in which each land KTH2 and each solder relief pattern KNP2 are surrounded by a silk print on the resist on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KBy, each land KTH2 and each land KTH2 Since the area excluding the solder escape pattern KNP2 is printed so as to be painted out, when viewing each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 from the surface of the silk-printed area KSA2, each land KTH2 and each solder The relief pattern KNP2 is a depressed area, and when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2 is a slightly elevated plateau area. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay substrate KB flows into the solder bath, it is necessary for the solder to flow over the resist and to flow over a small plateau called a silk-printed area KSA2. The amount of solder flowing on the printed area KSA2 can be suppressed, and the solder is formed on each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2 which are concave areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2. When flowing, the solder is separated from the land KTH2, which is a depressed area, and the solder printed pattern KNP2, and the solder is separated from the small plateau, which is a silk-printed area KSA2. Each terminal and land KTH2 adjacent in the horizontal direction, the solder escape pattern KNP2 adjacent in the horizontal direction, It is possible to suppress the Oite solder bridge respectively.

  The connector on which measures 1 to 3 are applied by silk printing as described above has a silk printed portion that is extremely conspicuous compared to a connector on which measures 1 to 3 are not applied by silk printing. When performing an operation of visually confirming whether or not the occurrence has occurred, the operator can quickly turn his or her eyes because it is a mark as to where to look on the substrate.

[Modification]
In the present embodiment, when the substrate is caused to flow into the solder bath, measures 1 to 3 described above by silk printing are performed to prevent the occurrence of solder bridges and to prevent solder short-circuiting. Measures 1 to 3 can also be used as markers indicating which connectors are directly soldered to the board by the operator.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the substrate is caused to flow into the solder bath, the above-described countermeasure 3 by silk printing is performed. In each of the enclosed area KSA1 and each terminal of the DIP type small connector, the occurrence of the solder bridge is prevented by the area KSA2 enclosed by the rectangular shape shown in FIG. Instead of the rectangular shape, solder bridging may be prevented by preventing the solder bridge from being generated by a region surrounded by another shape. FIG. 210 is a diagram (a) showing a modification of FIG. 209 (c) and a diagram (b) showing a modification of FIG. 209 (f). Note that the same reference numerals in FIG. 210 denote the same components as in FIG. 209. In FIG. 210, the arrow indicated by the solid line indicates the direction in which the solder flows when the substrate flows into the solder bath, and the arrow indicated by the alternate long and short dash line indicates the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath.

  In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 210 (a), a land KTH1 through which each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and a solder escape pattern KNP1. Are surrounded by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB with a shape that is about three times larger than the respective shapes of the lands KTH1 and the respective solders in the region KSA1 'surrounded by this shape. Printing is performed so as to fill the area excluding the escape pattern KNP1. In addition, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA1 'is an area of a small plateau. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB flows into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over a small plateau called a silk-printed area KSA1 '. The amount of solder flowing on the silk-printed area KSA1 'can be suppressed, and each land KTH1 and each solder escape pattern KNP1, which are depressed areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA1', When the solder flows through the lands KTH1 and the solder relief patterns KNP1, which are depressed areas, the solder is separated without trying to stay over a small plateau called a silk-printed area KSA1 '. Due to the action of the force, the terminals PN and the land KTH1 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions are adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction. A field relief pattern KNP1, solder bridges in can be suppressed, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 210 (b), each terminal of the small DIP connector has a land KTH2 into which each terminal of the small DIP connector is inserted and a solder escape pattern KNP2. It is surrounded by silk printing on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the body frame side relay board KB with a shape that is about three times larger, and in the area KSA2 'surrounded by this shape, each land KTH2 and each solder relief pattern KNP2 are excluded. And print it to fill the area. In addition, when viewed from the resist surface, the silk-printed area KSA2 'is an area of a small plateau. As a result, when the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB flows into the solder bath, the solder needs to flow over the resist and flow over a small plateau, which is a silk-printed area KSA2 '. The amount of solder flowing over the silk-printed area KSA2 'can be suppressed, and each land KTH2 and each solder escape pattern KNP2, which are concave areas formed on a small plateau called the silk-printed area KSA2', When the solder flows, the solder is separated from the land KTH2 and the solder relief pattern KNP2, which are depressed areas, by the solder trying to stay on a small plateau called a silk-printed area KSA2 '. The terminals and lands KTH2 adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions and the solder escape patterns KN adjacent in the horizontal direction 2, solder bridges in can be suppressed, respectively.

  In the above-described embodiment, the terminal of the last stage and the solder escape pattern are connected to each other and formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, but are separated by a predetermined distance. Alternatively, it may be formed. FIG. 211 is a view showing a modification in which the terminal of the last stage and the solder escape pattern are formed with a predetermined distance therebetween.

  In the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), the land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the last stage of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted is longer in the vertical direction. A solder escape pattern KNP1 ′ having a rectangular shape whose width is the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1 (a side may have a square shape having the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH1) is a predetermined distance ( For example, they are formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB at a distance of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). Is also good. This solder escape pattern KNP1 'is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta lands, and is in an insulated state.

  In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (a), the land KTH2 through which the terminal of the last stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the outer diameter of the land KTH2 which is long in the left-right direction and has a width. A solder escape pattern KNP2 ′ having a rectangular shape (a side may have a square shape having the size of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) and a predetermined distance (for example, 分 の of the outer diameter of the land KTH2) It may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB at a distance of one half of the length). This solder escape pattern KNP2 'is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns and beta lands, but is insulated.

  Further, in the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, as shown in FIG. 211B, a land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the last stage of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and a vertical direction. And a solder relief pattern KNP1 ″ having a semi-circular shape on the opposite side to the land KTH1 and a rectangular shape having a width equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1 (a square shape whose one side is the outer diameter of the land KTH1). And may have a semicircular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). ) May be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB. This solder escape pattern KNP1 '' is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns and beta lands, and is in an insulated state.

  In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (b), the land KTH2 through which the terminal of the last stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted, and the outer diameter of the land KTH2 which is long in the left-right direction and has a width. Solder escape pattern KNP2 ″ having a rectangular shape and having a semicircular shape on the opposite side to land KTH2 (having a square shape with one side being the outer diameter of land KTH2 and having a semicircular shape on the opposite side to land KTH2) The rear surface of the main frame side relay board KB is separated from the main frame side relay board KB by a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH2). (Solder surface) It may be formed on the copper foil surface of KBy. This solder escape pattern KNP2 ″ is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns and beta lands, and is in an insulated state.

  As shown in FIG. 211 (c), the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN has a land KTH1 through which the terminal PN of the last stage of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted, and a vertical direction. A solder relief pattern KNP1 '' 'having a rectangular shape having a width equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1 and having a triangular shape on the opposite side to the land KTH1 (a square shape having one side equal to the outer diameter of the land KTH1). And may have a triangular shape on the side opposite to the land KTH1) and a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH1). Alternatively, they may be formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB with only a separation. This solder escape pattern KNP1 ″ ″ is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns or beta lands, and is in an insulated state.

  In the DIP type small connector, as shown in FIG. 211 (c), the land KTH2 into which the terminal of the last stage of the DIP type small connector is inserted and the outer diameter of the land KTH2 which is long in the left-right direction and has a width. Solder escape pattern KNP2 ′ ″ having a rectangular shape and having a triangular shape on the opposite side to land KTH2 (having a quadrangular shape with one side being the outer diameter of land KTH2 and having a triangular shape on the opposite side to land KTH2) May be separated by a predetermined distance (for example, a length of one third to one half of the outer diameter of the land KTH2). (Solder surface) It may be formed on the copper foil surface of KBy. This solder escape pattern KNP2 "" is not electrically connected to various wiring patterns and beta lands, and is in an insulated state.

  In the above-described embodiment, the rectangular solder escape pattern KNP1 (KNP2) is connected to the land KTH1 (KTH2) through which the terminal of the final stage is inserted. The shape of the solder escape pattern on the other side that is not provided may be a semicircular shape (see the semicircular shape in FIG. 211B) or a triangular shape (see the triangular shape in FIG. 211C).

  In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 209, the direction in which the substrate flows into the solder bath (that is, the direction of the dashed line arrow in FIGS. 209 (a) to 209 (c)) is determined in advance. If the substrate can be flowed in the opposite direction to this direction in addition to the direction (that is, when the substrate can be flowed into the solder bath from both directions), measures 1 to 3 described above by silk printing are performed. Alternatively, the occurrence of solder bridges may be prevented to prevent solder short circuit. In this case, a rectangular solder escape pattern is connected to the land through which the terminal of the last stage is inserted depending on the direction of the flow. Note that the shape of the solder escape pattern on the opposite side that is not connected to the terminal in the final stage is a semicircular shape (see a semicircular shape in FIG. 211B) or a triangular shape (a triangular shape in FIG. 211C). See also). Further, the terminal of the last stage and the solder escape pattern may be formed with a predetermined distance therebetween. The above-described solder escape pattern may be formed at both ends of the connector with respect to the direction in which the board flows into the solder bath. If it is not known from which direction the substrate is to be flowed at the time of designing the substrate, the above-mentioned solder escape pattern is formed in both directions so that the substrate may be flowed from either direction.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a main control board for controlling a game progress and a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling an effect performed in accordance with the progress of a game, an image control board for performing a display control of an image display device, etc. A gaming machine in which a substrate is disposed on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, as in the gaming machine described in this document, the terminals of the components are soldered by flowing various substrates into a solder bath, but a short circuit due to solder occurs due to the formation of a solder bridge at adjacent terminals. was there.

[Prevention of peeling due to over-resist]
Next, prevention of peeling by over-resist will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, the over-resist applied to each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN will be described first, and the over-resist applied to the housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector will be described. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram (a) of the over-resist applied to each terminal of the drawer connector (concave type) on the body frame side, and is a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line XX in (a). FIG. 213 is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the surface mount type connector is mounted, and is a schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. FIG. 214 is a continuation of FIG. 213, and is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 213 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an over-resist applied to a housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector; It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the YY line in c). In some of FIGS. 212 to 214, various wiring patterns and substrate grounds (GND) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "beta land") are omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

[Over-resist applied to each terminal of drawer connector (concave type) on body frame side]
The over-resist applied to each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN will be described. As shown in FIGS. 212 (a) and (b), a through hole KTH1 having a land (hereinafter simply referred to as a “land”) is used. KTH1 ”may be described.) Means that a through hole is formed in the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay board KB, the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, A land having an outer diameter KTHD1 is formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB are determined. It has the same size as the outer diameter KTHD1.

  Although a resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main frame side relay substrate KB to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr, the surface (mounting surface) side A surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed in a region of the resist layer KBxr corresponding to the land KTH1. Although a resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB to form the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr, the back surface (solder surface) is formed. In a region of the side resist layer KByr corresponding to the land KTH1, a back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 is formed.

  In the present embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front side (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KBrD1 of the back side (solder surface) side resist opening KByrD have the same size. The board ground (GND) (that is, the tag land) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the board ground formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB. (GND) (that is, beta land) is electrically connected to the same ground (GND) by a through hole (not shown).

  As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, a region corresponding to the land KTH1 in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr has an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra having the shape of the land KTH1 is formed, the outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1. Is given. This allows the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 to be covered with the resist on the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB, so that high peel strength can be applied to the load from multiple directions on the land KTH1. Can be uniform.

  In the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, a region corresponding to the land KTH1 in the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KByr has an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1. Since the back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KBra is formed, an over-resist in which the outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 toward the center of the land KTH1 is applied. Have been. This allows the resist to cover the entire outer peripheral portion of the land KTH1 on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay substrate KB, so that a high peel strength can be applied to the load on the land KTH1 from multiple directions. Can be uniform.

  Although the front and back surfaces of the base material KBo of the main body frame side relay substrate KB are formed by bonding the copper foil surface, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface is compared with the bonding between the base material KBo and the copper foil surface. And soldering are stronger.

  By the way, when the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is fixed to the main body frame side relay board KB, rivets are used as described above. This is because although the drawer connector is used, the electric connection between the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 can be automatically performed only by mounting the game board 5 on the main body frame 4. When the frame-shaped drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the game board 5 is attached to the frame 4, a large force may be applied to the box-shaped main body DCNa of the body frame-side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. This is for preventing the pin-type terminals PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN from being peeled off by a large force on the back surface (solder surface) of the body frame side relay board KB.

  However, by using the drawer connector, an external force is applied to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, so that the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the body frame side relay board KB and the body. The land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the back side (solder surface) KBx of the frame-side relay board KB is peeled off from the base material KBo, and various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface are peeled off from the base material KBo together with the land KTH1. Or you may.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main frame side relay substrate KB and the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main frame side relay substrate KB, the land KTH1 is further over-resisted and copper By increasing the peel strength so that the copper foil formed on the foil surface does not peel off from the base material KBo, the drawer connector is used, so that the drawer connector (concave type) DCN for the body frame side by attaching and detaching the game board 5 is provided. Even if an external force is applied, the land KTH1 formed on the copper foil surface of the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main frame side relay substrate KB and the back surface (solder surface) KBx of the main frame side relay substrate KB is used as the base material. It is possible to reliably prevent peeling from the KBo and various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface from the base material KBo together with the land KTH1. There.

  The outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1 on which the over-resist is applied includes a region where each terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is inserted into the land KTH1 and soldered. It is larger than the outer diameter of the land on which no over-resist is applied. This is because when the terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is soldered to the land KTH1 on which the over-resist is applied, the joint area is the terminal PN of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN. Is to be equal to or larger than the bonding area when soldered to a land where no over resist is applied. Thereby, the bonding strength to the land KTH1 on which the over-resist is applied can be made equal to or higher than the bonding strength to the land KTH1 on which the over-resist is not applied.

  Also, depending on the presence or absence of over-resist, even if the outer diameter of the land into which the terminal is inserted is the same, even if the over-resist is not applied, a land having a normal size outer diameter, and if the over-resist is applied, It is necessary to prepare a land having an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the normal size at the board design stage, and if the designer mistakenly arranges a land to be over-resisted on a land to be over-resisted, a terminal There is a problem that the bonding between the metal and the land is insufficient and a solder defect may occur.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of the over-resist, a board (for example, the main body frame side relay board KB) on which at least one land to which the over-resist is applied is applied to all the lands. The same land as the land on which the over-resist is applied is arranged as the land on which the over-resist is not applied. As a result, the connection between the terminal and the land is sufficient, and the occurrence of solder failure can be reliably prevented.

  A land board (not shown) on which a game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 is mounted. Is applied to the over-resist described above. In addition to the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN, another body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN 'not shown is provided separately from the body frame side relay board KB (not shown). The land is also provided with the above-described over-resist also on the main body frame side relay board KB ′ (not shown). Further, another game board drawer connector (convex type) guided by a body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN ′ (not shown) of the main body frame 4 (other game board drawer connectors (convex type) Another game board side relay board (not shown) on which a game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 electrically connected to the side drawer connector (concave type) DCN is mounted. The other game board side relay board is a game board side relay (not shown) on which a game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN of the body frame 4 is mounted. Also, the over-resist is applied to the lands.

  In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KBy of the main body frame side relay board KB are determined. The outer diameter KTHD1 is the same size as the outer diameter KTHD1, but is smaller than the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) KBx of the main body frame side relay board KB. The outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KBy may be increased or decreased. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter KBrD1 of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KByr are the same size. The opening diameter KByrD1 of the back side (solder surface) side resist opening KByrD1 may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter KBxrD1 of the front side) resist opening KBxrD1.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of the over-resist, a substrate (for example, the main body frame side relay substrate KB) on which at least one land to which the over-resist is applied exists, Therefore, the same land as the land on which the over-resist is applied is arranged as the land on which the over-resist is not applied. However, when the over-resist is not applied, a land having an outer diameter of a normal size (that is, the over-resist is not applied). (A land having an outer diameter of a normal size smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the land KTH1). In other words, lands to which over-resist is applied and lands having a normal outer diameter when no over-resist is applied may be mixed. In this case, depending on the presence or absence of the over-resist, even if the outer diameter of the land into which the terminal is inserted is the same, if the over-resist is not applied, the land having the outer diameter of a normal size and the over-resist is applied. It is necessary to prepare a land having an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the normal size at the board design stage.

[Over-registration applied to housing fixing land of surface mount type connector]
213 (a) and (b) and FIGS. 214 (c) and (d) show the over resist applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF of the surface mount type connector KCN mounted on the substrate KC. As described above, each of the terminals (for example, having six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN is soldered to the pad KSP having a vertically elongated rectangular shape, various wiring patterns respectively connected to each pad KSP, Both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing parts provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are soldered and fixed to the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate KC, and are vertically long rectangles. The housing fixing pad KSPF having a shape is formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, thereby forming each pad KSP and each pad KSP. Various wiring pattern connected with the de KSP, each casing fastener pad KSPF are formed. The housing of the surface mount type connector KCN is formed of a non-conductive resin. Metal housing fixing portions are provided on both sides (left side and right side) of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN.

  Each of the pads KSP and the periphery KCxa of various wiring patterns connected to each of the pads KSP are formed on a substrate ground (GND) (that is, a tag land) by removing a copper foil from a copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. ) Is insulated without being electrically connected. On the other hand, the four corners of each casing fixing pad KSPF in the periphery of each casing fixing pad KSPF are fixed to each casing by removing the copper foil on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. A thermal pattern KCxb in which the pad KSPF is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) (that is, a beta land) via a cross-shaped pattern is provided. By this thermal pattern KCxb, both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side, respectively) are fixed to respective housing fixing pads of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. When soldering to the KSPF, heat for melting the solder can be prevented from being taken from the outer periphery of each housing fixing pad KSPF. It should be noted that both sides of the housing of the housing of the connector KCN of the surface mount type (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides, respectively) are fixed to the housing fixing pads KSPF of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. By soldering, the surface mount type connector KCN can be more securely fixed to the board KC as compared with a case where each terminal of the surface mount type connector KCN is simply soldered to the board KC. The two sides of the housing of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left side and the right side, respectively) are electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) of the substrate KC, and are surface mounted. It is also possible to enhance the shielding effect for signals connected to each terminal of the type connector KCN.

  On the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, a resist solution is applied to form a surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr, but the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr Of these, a pad surface (mounting surface side) side resist opening having the same shape as each pad KSP is formed in a region corresponding to each pad KSP, and a region corresponding to each housing fixing pad KSPF. On the other hand, a front surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra for a housing fixing pad having an opening rectangular shape smaller than the rectangular shape of each housing fixing pad KSPF is formed. On the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, a resist solution is applied to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr.

  The substrate ground (GND) (that is, land land) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the substrate ground (GND) (that is, land land) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC ) Are electrically connected by a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

  As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, in the region corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF in the front (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr, the opening rectangle smaller than the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF. Since the surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra for the casing fixing pad having the shape is formed, the casing fixing pad is formed from the rectangular outer periphery of the casing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the casing fixing pad KSPF. The over-resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the KSPF is covered with the resist. Thereby, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the entire outer peripheral portion of each of the housing fixing pads KSPF can be covered with the resist. Can be uniform for loads from

  Although the front and back surfaces of the substrate KCo of the substrate KC are formed by bonding the copper foil surface, each pad KSP and each housing formed on the copper foil surface are compared with the bonding between the substrate KCo and the copper foil surface. The bonding between the body fixing pad KSPF and the solder is stronger.

  By the way, in this embodiment, as the board KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN is mounted, for example, boards such as a main control board 1310 and a payout control board 633 can be cited. Various wirings and harnesses connected to various connectors provided on the board such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are used for removing dust and cigarette dust accumulated on the pachinko machine 1, performing various inspections, and the like. After being removed by a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall, the connection is made again after the work. However, clerks such as clerks in a game hall performing such operations are often unfamiliar with the handling of boards, when removing various wires and harnesses from connectors, and when connecting various wires and harnesses to connectors. In some cases, with brute force (ie, with excessive force).

  Then, among the plurality of connectors provided on the board KC such as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, there are DIP type connectors and surface mount type connectors. When the board is mounted on the board KC and a staff member of a game hall or the like performs the above-described operation, a force generated when the harness is inserted into or removed from the surface-mounted connector KCN is applied to the surface-mounted connector KCN. Because of this large force, the both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided on the left and right sides) by this large force are the copper foil of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. Each housing fixing pad KSPF formed on the surface KCxp is separated from the base material KCo, and accordingly, the surface (mounting surface) KC of the substrate KC is removed. Peeled off the pad KSP from substrate KCo formed of a copper foil surface KCxp, there are cases where various wiring patterns formed on copper foil surface KCxp is peeled off from the substrate KCo with each pad KSP.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, over-resist is applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp does not peel off from the base material KCo. By increasing the peel strength, even if a force accompanying the insertion and removal of the harness to the surface mount type connector KCN is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN, it is formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. The pad KSP formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC does not peel off from the substrate fixing member KSPF. It is possible to reliably prevent various wiring patterns formed on the copper foil surface KCxp from peeling off from the base material KCo together with the respective pads KSP. Going on.

[Modification]
In the present embodiment, the above-described over-resist is applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF of the board KC on which the surface mount type connector KCN to which an external force is applied is mounted. When a surface mount type connector to which various wirings and harnesses are inserted and removed is mounted in addition to a board such as the control board 633, a peripheral control board 1510, a power supply board 630, an interface board 635, various decoration boards, various relays. The above-described over-resist may be applied to the case fixing pad of the substrate such as the substrate and various driving substrates, or the substrate may be provided on a movable body that is operated by driving an electric driving source. When a load due to wiring or harnesses that are electrically connected to the movable body substrate due to the movement of the body is applied to the movable body substrate, The above-described over-resist may be applied to the housing fixing pad of the movable body substrate on which the mounting type connector is mounted, or various switches having a pressing operation unit, and the surface of the substrate (mounting surface) In the case of a surface mounting type mounted on the substrate, the above-described over-resist may be applied to the housing fixing pad of the substrate for fixing various switches, or some external force is applied to the substrate. In this case, the above-described over-resist may be applied to pads of a substrate to which various terminals of lead-type or surface-mount type electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, transistors, and ICs are soldered. .

  In the above-described embodiment, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, a region corresponding to the housing fixing pad KSPF in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr has the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF. Since the surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra for the housing fixing pad having a smaller opening rectangular shape is formed, from the outer periphery of the rectangular shape of the housing fixing pad KSPF toward the inside of the housing fixing pad KSPF. The over-resist in which the outer peripheral portion of the casing fixing pad KSPF is covered with the resist is applied. However, the over-resist is not applied to the casing fixing pad KSPF, and a through hole having a land around the casing fixing pad KSPF. May be formed, and an over-resist may be applied to each land. FIG. 215 is a schematic diagram (a) of the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) side of the substrate on which the surface-mount type connector according to the modification is mounted, and is a schematic diagram (b) of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. is there. 216 is a continuation of FIG. 215 and is an enlarged view of a portion B in FIG. 215 (b), and is a schematic view (c) of an over-resist applied to a housing fixing land of the surface mount type connector; It is a schematic diagram (d) of the cross section of the ZZ line in c). In FIGS. 215 and 216, various wiring patterns and substrate grounds (GND) (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “beta tags”) may be omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

  A description will be given of a modified example in which a plurality of through holes having lands are formed around the housing fixing pad KSPF without applying the over-resist to the housing fixing pad KSPF and the over-resist is applied to each land. FIG. As shown in (b), and FIGS. 216 (c) and (d), a vertically elongated rectangular shape to which each terminal (for example, having six terminals) of the surface mount type connector KCN is soldered is used. Pads KSP, various wiring patterns respectively connected to the pads KSP, and both sides of the housing of the surface mount type connector KCN (metal housing fixing portions provided respectively on the left and right sides) on the surface of the substrate KC ( A housing fixing pad KSPF having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction, which is soldered and fixed to the mounting surface), and a plurality of through holes having lands. The CTAG (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “land KCTH”), the wiring pattern for connecting the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the tag land is a surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. By removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface KCxp, each pad KSP, various wiring patterns connected to each pad KSP, each housing fixing pad KSPF, each land KCTH, and each land land connection wiring pattern are formed. . Each land KCTH is formed by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC. In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC have the same size. Note that the land pattern connecting wiring pattern for connecting the housing fixing pad KSPF, the land KCTH, and the land land also has a function as a thermal pattern of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

  With respect to the right casing fixing pad KSPF, three lands CKTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction, and two rows are arranged so as to be adjacent to the right of the casing fixing pad KSPF. With respect to the left housing fixing pad KSPF, three lands CKTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, and two rows are arranged so as to be adjacent to the right of the housing fixing pad KSPF.

  Although the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr is formed by applying a resist liquid on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr In a region corresponding to the land KCTH, a surface (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed. A resist solution is applied on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr, but the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr In the region corresponding to the land KCTH, a back surface (solder surface) side resist opening KCyra having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is formed. In this modification, the opening diameter of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KCxra and the opening diameter of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KCyra are the same size. The substrate ground (GND) (that is, land land) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the substrate ground (GND) (that is, land land) formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC ) Are electrically connected by a through hole (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

  As described above, in the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC, a region (mounting surface) having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH is provided in a region corresponding to the land KCTH in the surface (mounting surface) side resist layer KCxr. Since the (3) side resist opening KBxra is formed, an over-resist in which the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the land KCTH toward the center of the land KCTH is applied. In the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC, a region corresponding to the land KCTH in the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer KCyr has a back surface (solder surface) having an opening diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the land KCTH. Since the resist opening KCyra is formed, an over-resist is applied so that the outer peripheral portion of the land KCTH is covered with the resist from the outer periphery of the land KCTH to the center of the land KCTH. This makes it possible to apply an over-resist to each land KCTH and increase the peel strength so that the copper foil formed on the copper foil surface KCxp does not peel off from the base material KCo.

  As described above, the right case fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at regular intervals along the vertical direction, and is adjacent to the right side of the right case fixing pad KSPF. And the left housing fixing pad KSPF has two rows in which the three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, as described above. It is arranged so that it may be adjacent to the left of. Thus, even though the over-resist is not applied to the housing fixing pad KSPF, since the over-resist is applied to each land KSTH, the housing fixing pad KSPF and each of the lands KCTH are connected by the above-mentioned land land connection wiring pattern. By being connected, even if a force accompanying the insertion and removal of the harness to the surface mount type connector KCN is applied to the surface mount type connector KCN, it is formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. When the housing fixing pad KSPF to be separated from the base material KCo is to be peeled off, the peeling strength of each land KCTH formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC is increased accordingly. This makes it difficult for the casing fixing pad KSPF to peel off from the base material KCo.

  In this modification, the outer diameter of the land formed on the front surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC and the outer diameter of the land formed on the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC are the same. However, the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) KCy of the substrate KC is smaller than the outer diameter of the land formed on the copper foil surface KCxp of the surface (mounting surface) KCx of the substrate KC. May be increased or decreased. In the present modification, the opening diameter of the front (mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra and the opening diameter of the back (solder surface) side resist opening KByra are the same size. The opening diameter of the back side (solder surface) side resist opening KByra may be larger or smaller than the opening diameter of the side resist opening KBxra.

  Further, in this modification, the right housing fixing pad KSPF includes two rows in which the three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the vertical direction, as described above, in the right housing fixing pad KSPF. And two rows in which three lands KCTH are arranged at equal intervals along the up-down direction on the left casing fixing pad KSPF, as described above. The left housing fixing pad KSPF is disposed adjacent to the left side of the left housing fixing pad KSPF, but instead or together with the right housing fixing pad KSPF, two lands are provided at regular intervals along the vertical direction. Two rows in which the KCTH is arranged may be arranged so as to be adjacent above and / or below the right housing fixing pad KSPF, or may be arranged on the left housing fixing pad KSPF along the vertical direction. Two at equal intervals Column 2 rows command KCTH is arranged, it may be arranged so as to be adjacent to the upper or / and lower left casing fastener pad KSPF.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a main control board for controlling a game progress and a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling an effect performed in accordance with the progress of a game, an image control board for performing a display control of an image display device, etc. A gaming machine in which a substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). Since the connector provided on the board is subjected to a load due to the insertion and removal of the wiring, for example, when a person unfamiliar with the handling of the board removes the wiring from the connector or connects the wiring to the connector with excessive force There has been a problem that the copper foil on the substrate peels off due to the load on the connector.

[Configuration of peripheral control unit]
Next, the entire configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219. FIG. 217 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 218 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 219 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. In FIG. 218, the terminals of the various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the terminals of the various connectors are connected to the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510. , But are omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

  As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the peripheral control unit 1500 has a cover 1501 having a box shape that is open at the rear and is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on a command from the main control board 1310, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510 A liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that is connected to the main body, and a base body 1502 that closes an opening of the cover body 1501. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. Thus, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) including the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is configured.

[Cover body]
Peripheral data that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the peripheral control board 1510 is provided on various substrates attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two-thirds when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back, and is arranged on the left side of the cover 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged such that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape, and On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape twice larger than the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and is disposed on the lower right side of the cover 1501.

  The board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to each other and have the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. I have.

  The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded into an opaque black color. When viewed from the front, the top and left sides of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are formed on the lower side and the right side to project rearward (front side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air-cooling fan FAN at a position slightly above and to the right of the center when viewed from the front side and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are respectively formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave part 1501aa, at the positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air-cooling fan FAN having a square shape, a predetermined cylindrical shape inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 is provided. Guide projections 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 each having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN) are formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. By forming the slit 1501aaa in the shape of the arc, it is possible to prevent various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from being illegally removed from the peripheral control board 1510.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 formed diagonally near the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooling fan FAN is mounted by being pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan screw (not shown) having a shape integrally formed with a pan head and a flat washer is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan screw with the seat, comes into contact with the front of the air cooling fan FAN and the front of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN jumps out of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance shorter than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). ), A wiring extraction recess 1501ab is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN can be pulled out from the wire pull-out recess 1501ab.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is provided with connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a volume control switch attached to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof when viewed from the front. The position corresponding to the connector 1510d is a closed substantially horizontally elongated rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area having the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 as an upper part and the connectors CN2 to CN7 as a lower part). 1501ac faces the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). It is formed to protrude. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are provided at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d, respectively. Is formed. Note that the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac substantially occupies a lower right region when the cover plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a measure against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume control are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. It is a position that does not interfere with the hole 1501ac8, and two vertically extending reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed to protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. The connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the sound volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are exposed.

  When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a is positioned along the lower side thereof at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A position where the connector concave portion 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa as two closed horizontally long rectangular regions (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa). The bottom of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac are formed on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 become connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. From each other.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side when viewed from the front. The mounting recess 1501af for mounting the horizontally long rectangular wiring cover body 1503 which communicates with the wiring drawing opening 1501ae and can close the wiring drawing opening 1501ae is smaller than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is provided at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503 at a predetermined height of a columnar shape inserted into the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than a distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). A projection 1501afa having a dimension (dimensions) is formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting holes 1501afb1 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2, respectively.

  When the wiring cover 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover 1503 and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring flat opening 1501ae is closed, and the flexible flat cable (FFC (Flexible Flat)) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530x. In the flexible flat cable, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600 are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects)) from touching. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing polycarbonate and carbon, and is molded in opaque black.

  When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-like guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb are formed near the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left cover side wall 1501c and project upward and downward at predetermined intervals in the center. In addition, a hinge hook 1501cc disposed above the guide 1501ca and protruding outward and a hinge hook 1501cd disposed below the guide 1501cb and protruding outward are formed, respectively. A chamfer is formed on the rear side of the left end of each of the guides 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea that protrudes outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 on the right cover side wall 1501e.

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed to protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Around the four through-holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1510rf1 having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 and soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 each having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed. , 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface thereof is not exposed.

  When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to face the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. Are in contact with each other, and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Become. Further, the shaft (screw part) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan screw. Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. Thus, the cover 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the cover 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan screw, the cover 1501 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected, and become the same ground (GND).

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan-head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 open the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged inside (i.e., do not protrude outside the open side end faces).

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to four through-holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protruding portions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are formed diagonally from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions where the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are formed. Have been. The periphery of the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) having a circular shape on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. 1520 rf 1 to 1520 rf 4, and soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1520 rb 1 to 1520 rb 4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1520 y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are formed, respectively. The wiring patterns of 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. The lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface is not exposed.

  When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a through hole formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. 1520r1 and 1520r3 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Then, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501i1 and 1501i2 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. ) And mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2, respectively, and land 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The seat surface of the metal pan screw is in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan screw. Lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 to be electrically connected. As a result, the cover 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Of the peripheral control board 1510 by being electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw. The ground (GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected, and become the same ground (GND).

  When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of a metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the cover flat plate. The back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface side of 1501a is arranged on the same plane.

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to four through-holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At a position, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed to project diagonally from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through-holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1530rf1 to a circular surface is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. 1530rf4, and soldering copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 each having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed. , 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 have wiring patterns formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively. The lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil on the surface is not exposed.

  When attaching the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is directed to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed. Is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface of the 1501a. In this state, the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 are in contact with each other, and lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530; And the bearing surface of the pan screw made of the same are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan screw. 1530rf1 to 1530rb4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4. As a result, the cover 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is the same. Since the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan screw, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. (GND) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected to each other and become the same ground (GND).

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of a metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 and screwed into the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. And the rear surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged inside the inner end surface (that is, so as not to protrude outside the open end surfaces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e). A back surface (solder surface) 1510y of peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back surface and a back surface (solder surface) 1520y of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed to the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane. It is supposed to be.

  As described above, when various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the front surfaces of the various substrates (cover flat plate 1501a A space having a predetermined distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed between the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, a gap having the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimension (2.3 mm in the present embodiment) is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Is formed.

  In the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az are formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the space inside the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings, thereby controlling the periphery. By taking in air from outside the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the space inside the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, there is a gap between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501. At the same time, a gap is formed between the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed on the cover 1501. When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed. For this reason, when the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blade. In addition, air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az described above, and the above-mentioned gaps (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the seven The clearances formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the volume adjustment switches 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the gaps formed in the volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 Two connectors CN8 provided And CN9, via the two connector hole 1501ac9,1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The sum (total area) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN attachment recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the plurality of cover flat plates 1501a of the cover body 1501. The clearances described above (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) and the volume control switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 , A volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap formed in the cover body 1501, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac1 formed in the cover body 1501. If is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, it was added to the. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, when air is taken in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The flow velocity of the air flowing into each can be reduced.

  When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. When air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 Although the flow velocity of the air flowing into the fan can be suppressed to a small value, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotate, the air is sucked through the wings by the rotation to rotate around the periphery. To send air to control IC 1510a It may be. In other words, the main purpose of the air-cooling fan FAN may be to simply air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without using the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[Base body]
A base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing polycarbonate and carbon, is molded in opaque black, and has a horizontally-long rectangular base plate 1502a when viewed from the front thereof. Base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed on the left side, the lower side, and the right side so as to protrude toward the front (the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) to form a box shape having an opening. The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Accordingly, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are provided inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Are fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

  When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a is spaced apart from the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals along the lower side (that is, the peripheral control board The terminals of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the 1510 are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 The peripheral control board 1510 warps due to the force when a connector for connecting wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7 is inserted into a position where the peripheral control board 1510 does not interfere with each of the protruding terminals because the terminal protrudes from the terminal 1510y. Vertically elongated disconnection that prevents the electrical wiring pattern formed on the control board 1510 from being disconnected Stop rib portion 1502aa1~1502aa3 are formed.

  When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left base side wall 1502c. The engaging portion 1502ca has guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

  The plate-like guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa, 1502cab, and the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502cae, 1502caf. The L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover 1501 are inserted. The L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping around, the L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. It can be engaged.

  In the center of the right base side wall 1502e, a base-side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is formed. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for mounting the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[Various connectors]
On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501, the peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding various ROM functions) and the effect display control unit 1512 (functions of various ROMs) are provided. ), And a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as “SATA controller”), and various I / O interfaces. Peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on one semiconductor chip, various programs that can control the progress and demonstration of a game effect (demonstration performed while waiting for a player), and various schedule data that defines the progress of the effect Control to memorize in advance The OM 1510b (including the function of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above and the function of the display control ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above) and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are stored. An SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 that can transfer and store various types of control information (peripheral data); A backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is turned off, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and various connectors Is provided with a N1~CN7, the. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

  The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

  Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / Os and various parallel I / Os. Various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

  In the present embodiment, UART communication is employed as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), and various boards provided on the game board 5 side and various boards provided on the door frame side For example, SPI communication or I2C communication is employed as a communication method for transmitting control data to the communication device (a communication is performed via a corresponding one of the connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

  In the present embodiment, an electrical drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, which communicates via the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 side, and a door frame using SPI communication and I2C communication. The drive data is transmitted to a drive control IC that drives an electric drive source (for example, various motors and various solenoids, and communicates via a connector CN3) provided on the 3 side, and the game board 5 side For a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN7) provided for the LED control IC and a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN3) provided for the door frame 3 to the LED control IC. Or receives signals from various sensors (communicating through the connector CN6) provided on the game board 5 as detection data, and receives various signals (connectors) provided on the door frame 3 side. Communicating via the N3. The signals from) and receives as the detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer speed by the SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer speed by the I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

  Various parallel I / Os include GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general-purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air-cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air-cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of the controlled object and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), or a control signal for the controlled object (not shown) provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the GPIO (to the connector CN6). And outputs a signal from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  In the present embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , UART communication is assigned to the connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to the connector CN6 (that is, the connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and SPI communication is assigned to the connector CN7. Is assigned.

  The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (corresponding to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various kinds of control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed in accordance with an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , And SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

  The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) and can realize a high data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  A special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the board and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the board are further provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Have. The surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board. The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board.

  The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of a plurality of types of video signals. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal systems include a plurality of types such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a Mobile Industry Processor Interface (MIPI) system, an Embedded Display Port (eDP) system, and a clockless system. In this system, four systems (a total of four systems) are adopted: one system for the RGB system, two systems for the LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and the MIPI system. In the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. A peripheral control board that employs, for example, the eDP system instead of the MIPI system, and uses one system for the RGB system, two systems for the LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one system for the eDP system 1510 can also be created.

  The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 further includes an LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, an LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, an LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and an LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. , Is provided. Various voltages (DC +37 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510. The LED ML1 confirms (monitors) a state in which DC +5 V is supplied, and maintains the lighting state in a state in which DC +5 V is supplied. The LED ML2 is for confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +12 V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state where DC +12 V is supplied. The LED ML3 is for confirming (monitoring) a state where DC + 37V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state where DC + 37V is supplied. The LEDML4 is for confirming (monitoring) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surfaces of the various substrates (covers) A space having a predetermined distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed between the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The space formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 being turned on.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 The special connectors SCN4 provided are connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and connectors CN8 to CN8 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 in that they have a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from CN10. Each of these connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing in a plug of the corresponding connector in a direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 do not move vertically when viewed from the front when they are fitted.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively. (Mounting surface) The special connectors SCN4 provided in the 1530x are sockets.

  The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and is pushed in. Are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is in the front-rear direction (pachinko machine) when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. A floating mechanism is provided, which can absorb an error in the front-rear direction generated when the user pushes by moving a predetermined distance range toward the rear and front sides of the machine 1). The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and fixed. When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 is A gap is formed between the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to contact the back surface of the cover 1501a.

  The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and is pushed in. Fit. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is in the front-rear direction (pachinko machine 1). (In the direction between the back and the front of the vehicle), a floating mechanism capable of absorbing an error in the front-rear direction caused when the user pushes in by moving a predetermined distance range is provided. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is in a state where the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is mounted and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front face (upper face) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is the back face of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so as not to come into contact with the cover.

  Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is used for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is used for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a peripheral data ROM 1520a (a function of the image ROM of the effect display control unit 1512 described above) capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. ). As various control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image, a character image, and a design image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 Light emission data defining the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishment, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on the vehicle, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc., the door frame 3 and the game board 5 Driving data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effectors provided can be given.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory, is inexpensive, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed as compared with a NOR flash (non-volatile) memory. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

  As described above, by adopting a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to suppression of power consumption, and read out various stored data at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can reduce power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is easily affected by noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is not adopted in which the boards between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 and the control board 1510 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, the influence of noise that enters the board-to-board transmission path is reduced.

  The procedure for attaching various boards in the internal space of the cover 1501 will be described later. However, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 connects the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1520x to the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 ( After inserting and pushing in the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the mounting surface 1510x, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, together with the peripheral control board 1510, need to be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By employing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front-rear direction caused when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 is absorbed. By using the plug and To prevent damage to the connection terminals formed in a plurality of numbers in a preparative, can a transmission path between the substrate and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be reliably formed.

  Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by employing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing an error in the front-rear direction generated at the time of connection, damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket is prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. It can be formed reliably.

  The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control substrate 1510 from the connector CN10, so that the effect display device 1600 progresses the game effect (for example, for a player). Image that informs that a big hit gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state occurs, an image that informs that the big hit gaming state does not occur, and a state where the big hit gaming state occurs although the big hit gaming state does not occur This is an important board on which images such as an image indicating that the user is approaching or a demonstration (demonstration performed in a waiting state for a player) are displayed as images. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected to each other via wiring (harness) between the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510. By adopting a configuration in which 1510 and 1510 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector, the influence of noise that enters the board-to-board transmission path is reduced.

  The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later. The liquid crystal output board 1530 connects the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on its own surface (mounting surface) 1530x to the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (mounting surface). After inserting and pushing in the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface) 1510x, it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By using the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the floating mechanism described above, it is possible to absorb an error in the front-rear direction generated when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. In the plug and socket To prevent breakage of the connection terminals the number formed can a transmission path between the substrate and the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530 can be reliably formed.

  Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing an error in the front-rear direction generated at the time, damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket is prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is reliably formed. Can be formed.

  When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the rear surface and the rear surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control substrate 1510 with respect to the front surface. Compared to the case of performing the three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) can be reduced, so that, for example, a large movable production unit (operating a movable production body) Electrical drive source and drive mechanism, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and operating position) It can contribute to ensuring the order in the depth direction of the distance dimension.

[Assembly method of peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface ( The mounting surface 1520x and the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 face the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are positioned on the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a. Inserted into the formed mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2, and inserted through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. That. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 have an arrangement corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are formed. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed at the bottom.

  Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. To fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a pan-head screw made of a screw and screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As described above, among the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, thereby restricting the movement in the up, down, left and right directions. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restricted by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side, the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restricting in the vertical and horizontal directions. The protrusion is not formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the vertical and horizontal directions. When fixed to the back side of 1501a, the through-holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a have dimensional dimensions. This is because it can be absorbed by a sufficient margin.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are formed. The guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cab. It is inserted into the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. In a state in which the base body 1502 is wrapped around the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1502 and the base body 1502 is directly covered with the cover body 1501, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is made of a metal (not shown). The metal one-way screw into which the anchor rivet is inserted is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the distal end surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby forming the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. And the base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in an inscribed (surface contact) state, and the base body 1502 The front surfaces of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 are in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y. Accordingly, since the cover 1501 and the base 1502 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover 1501 and the base 1502 are in a conductive state. In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to discover the unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent to the illegal operation of the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

  Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn from the wire drawing recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A pan screw with a metal seat (not shown) (a screw having an integrated pan head and flat washer) is screwed into the drawer and the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. Accordingly, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5, the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front and the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500). Is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100, and through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 form a metal pan screw (not shown). And screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100 to fix the game panel 1100.

  In the above-described assembling method, in the procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is placed at the above-described predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. (The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of the cover 1501 when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back.) And the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. After fixing the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 at the above-described predetermined position (the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is located on the lower right side of the cover 1501 when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back), the surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed. (Mounting surface) The special connector SCN3 socket provided for 1520x is The connector of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the substrate 1510, and the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 ( The peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the mounting surface 1510x and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is packed on the left side of the cover body 1501 with the cover body 1501 viewed from the back. (It is arranged.). Even in such a mounting procedure of various substrates, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, by absorbing the error in the front-rear direction generated at the time of pushing, the plug and the socket can be connected. Of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 can be reliably formed, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the periphery can be prevented. A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

  By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines having different game specifications. In the present embodiment, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. And the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine. Are stored depending on the game specification of the game board by storing the peripheral data corresponding to the game data, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board dependent on the type of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

  Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board, and does not depend on the type of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 including a peripheral data ROM 1520a in which peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored, and a peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-described inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

  As a method of a video signal input to a display device such as an effect display device, for example, as described above, there are a plurality of types of systems such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types are electrically connected by the above-described board-to-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced according to the type of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the method of the video signal (LVDS method) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-described inter-board connector.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the sides by metal pan head screws, these substrates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the same. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) to remove the noise. (Hereinafter referred to as a “peripheral control board board made of conductive resin”). There is a case to be described as anti-noise effect "by box 1505). Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide dedicated filters for removing such noises on various substrates, which can contribute to cost reduction of various substrates.

  Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az can air-cool the inside space of the cover body 1501, and also have a function of confirming whether there is any illegality.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 219, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The product number or model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x and the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually recognized, that is, the angle in multiple directions. In order to be able to confirm the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins from the control ROM 1510b, they are separately arranged so as to be larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. Thus, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Further, the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b keeps the lighting state in a state where the DC +5 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and therefore the LED ML1 is originally supplied with the DC + 5V. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. Can be contributed to.

  Also, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. An area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) Further, the product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, So that you can see They are arranged distributed and so that the large area almost can check the condition of the surface and the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM1520a from time. Thereby, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be performed in a plurality of circular shapes. Can be confirmed through the ventilation hole 1501az having the following. Further, the LED ML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where DC +37 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. A special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a function provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, although having a function of checking (monitoring) the state of supply. A special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 also have a spotlight function of illuminating the board-to-board connector with the special connector SCN3. ) Special connector for 1520x And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to the SCN 3.

  Also, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed. An area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530) Are arranged in a distributed manner. Accordingly, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be achieved by changing a plurality of circular shapes. It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having the same. In addition, since the LEDML4 arranged near the special connector SCN2 is kept lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally checked (monitored). Although it has a function, a special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 illuminate the board-to-board connector brightly. By having a function as a spotlight, a special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can visually recognize the inter-board connector. Contributes to improving It has to be able to bet.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with a product number printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be visually recognized, that is, the states of the IC pins and the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed from multiple angles. Each of them is dispersed and arranged so as to be a region larger than the shape of 1510c2. Thus, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Further, since the LEDML2 disposed near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is kept turned on when DC +12 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, Although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +12 V is supplied, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2) is further provided with a spotlight function of illuminating the SDRAM 1510c brightly. And the state of the IC pins can be improved.

  In addition, a gap between the blades of the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN (specifically, a gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN). From this, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not an illegal board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

  In this embodiment, the LEDs ML1 to ML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounting type LEDs having a wide angle of about 120 degrees and weak directivity types. It is also suitable for lighting applications. When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surfaces of the various substrates (covers) A space having a predetermined distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed between the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. By illuminating the LEDs ML1 to ML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 which is also suitable for use as illumination, it is possible to illuminate the space thus formed brightly.

  Also, the LEDML1 to LEDML4 are emitted to the area on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the periphery thereof, which face the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Reflecting portions (not shown) are formed to reflect the reflected light and return to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflection portions (not shown) may be glossy color paints in addition to bright color paints such as white, or a glossy metal sheet may be attached.

  Further, in the vicinity of the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged beside the game board 5, so that a ball path constituted by these is provided. In this case, the game balls rub against each other and become charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game balls. Further, since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, other pachinko machines may be affected by noise as a noise source. As described above, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data A configuration in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND) is employed. Accordingly, noise that enters through the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the like. The noise can be removed by flowing to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 or the like.

[Partial foil removal of beta tagland]
By the way, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 has a wiring (pattern) for transmitting a control signal, a wiring pattern for supplying power, and a region other than a region where various land patterns are formed as a ground (GND). , A so-called beta land (substrate ground) (also referred to as “solid ground”), and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 also has a wiring pattern for transmitting control signals and a wiring pattern for supplying power. The ground (GND) is a region other than the region where various land patterns are formed, and is formed as a so-called beta land (substrate ground) (also referred to as “solid ground”). The land land (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the land land (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 are the peripheral control substrate. Holes (copper) penetrating through holes (both surfaces (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of a plurality of through holes (surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) formed on both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of 1515 The same ground (GND) is obtained by being electrically connected by the (plated holes)).

  Further, as described above, the base plate 1502a does not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined interval along the lower side when viewed from the front. Positions (that is, the terminals of the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are inserted from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y. 1510y, which protrudes from the back surface (solder surface) and does not interfere with each of the protruding terminals (at a position that does not interfere with these protruding terminals). It is possible to prevent the electric wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control substrate 1510 from breaking due to the control substrate 1510 being warped. Elongated disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa1~1502aa3 in the vertical direction are formed respectively.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled and the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502 are sealed, as described above. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in inscribed (surface contact), and the disconnection prevention rib portion 1502aa1 formed on the base body 1502. 1502aa3 comes into contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the sides by metal pan head screws, these substrates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the same. Since it is configured to be a ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) to remove the noise. You can do it.

  By the way, the front surfaces of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. Although the land (land surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the contacted portion was formed with the land and covered with the resist, the peripheral control at the contacted portion was tested in the noise resistance test. A bottom land is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the substrate 1510 and covered with a resist, and a back land (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 at the contacted portion is covered with a resist without forming a land. When a test was conducted on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at the abutted portion, the one covered with a resist without forming a land was found to have higher noise resistance. .

  When electromagnetic noise enters through the base body 1502, a high voltage is applied to a portion where the front surface of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and enters the solid brand. When electromagnetic wave noise enters through such an unexpected route, an electronic component susceptible to the electromagnetic wave noise and a wiring pattern electrically connected to the electronic component are formed on the base body 1502 to prevent disconnection ribs. If the front surfaces of the parts 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are adjacent to a portion that is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, it may cause malfunction or damage.

  In addition, the electromagnetic noise passes through the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with any of the disconnection preventing rib portions on the front surface of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. Since it is impossible to predict whether or not the electronic component will penetrate, it is difficult to place an electronic component susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise and a wiring pattern electrically connected to the electronic component at a distance from a specific disconnection prevention rib portion.

  Since a high voltage is applied to a portion where the front surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, electromagnetic noise passes through the resist and becomes solid. When the breakage prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 and the beta-grant are in contact with each other via the resist to penetrate the brand, high voltage due to electromagnetic wave noise penetrating the base body 1502 is applied to the contacting portion. Thus, it is considered that unnecessary loop wiring in which electromagnetic wave noise enters from the disconnection prevention rib portion into the beta run is formed.

  Here, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 at a portion where the front surface of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 is in contact with the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 The shape of the ground will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 is a view showing the shape of the beta land at the portion where the front surface of the disconnection preventing rib portion formed on the base body is in contact with the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate, and the rear surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate. FIG. 2A is a schematic view of the copper foil surface of FIG. 1A, and FIG.

  As described above, the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 have an elongated shape in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 220 (a), the corresponding positions and their surroundings have a vertically long rectangular foil punching area 1510ya having a left-right distance dimension dgw and a vertical distance dimension dgh, and a copper foil surface. 1510 yp. In other words, a region where a part of the beta flake is removed (removed) from the foil is formed on the lower side of the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board.

  These foil removal regions 1510ya are such that the distance dimension dg0 between the left side thereof and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the horizontal dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. The distance dimension dg0 between the left side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the left side surface of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0, which is the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dg0 between the left side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the left side surface of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Is 1.5 times the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw.

  In addition, in these foil removal regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side thereof and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. The distance dimension dg1 between the right side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0, which is the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension dg1 between the right side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the right side surface of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Is 1.5 times the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw.

  Further, in these foil removal regions 1510ya, the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side thereof and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is longer than the horizontal dimension (width dimension) drw of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Each is formed. As the length dg2 of the distance dimension dg2 between the upper side of the foil removal area 1510ya and the upper side surface of the disconnection prevention rib sections 1502aa1 to 1502aa3, the distance dimension (width dimension) drw in the left-right direction of the disconnection prevention rib sections 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is 1.0. In the present embodiment, the distance dg2 between the upper side of the foil removal region 1510ya and the upper side surface of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 is equal to the length of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. Is 1.5 times the horizontal distance dimension (width dimension) drw.

  That is, since the foil removal area 1510ya is formed on the copper foil face 1510yp on which the tag land is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, the foil removal area 1510ya is not electrically connected to the tag land, It is an insulated area.

  When the resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board, as shown in FIG. 220 (b), the resist solution is also applied to the foil removal region 1510ya to form the resist layer 1510yr. Is formed. The disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 come into contact with the resist layer 1510yr on the foil-cut region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board. Note that a beta land is formed on the copper foil surface on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board corresponding to the foil removal region 1510ya on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate. No foil removal area of the same shape is formed at all.

  As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and are provided on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are respectively fixed by pan-head screws made of metal, they are electrically connected to these grounds (GND) and are connected to the same ground (GND). GND). For this reason, in the present embodiment, the noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is controlled from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 through the foil removal area 1510ya. A "route through which noise does not escape" is formed that cannot enter the beta land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the board, and the noise that has entered the cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 is described above. By forming a “route through which noise passes” flowing to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via a metal pan screw, noise can be removed.

[Reuse of peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specification of the game board, and does not depend on a method of a video signal input to the effect display device 1600. It can be reused (reused).

  As described above, the periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 has a circular soldering copper foil (so-called “ Lands) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, and a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed, respectively. When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is directed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and formed on the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 to mount the mounting boss holes. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. Therefore, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the pan portion of the metal pan screw (the seat surface of the head) are in contact with each other.

  In this manner, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw come into contact with each other. By reusing the peripheral control board 1510, lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by repeated screwing and removing with a metal pan screw. The boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are rubbed against the mounting surface (boss surface) and peeled off from the base material of the peripheral control substrate 1510, or the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control substrate 1510 Peripheral control board 151 rubs against the seat surface of the screw pan (head seat surface) Or the copper foil of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4y on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is exposed. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to reuse the peripheral control board 1510 due to oxidation and poor electrical connection.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are the front surfaces. Each is soldered so that the copper foil is not exposed. This solder electrically connects the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition to being connected so as to be connectable, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw are electrically connected. Covered to be connectable. This prevents the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 from rubbing against the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. And the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from coming off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. Of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. Land 1 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of peripheral control board 1510 The copper foil portions of 10rb1 to 1510rb4 are not exposed and can be prevented from being oxidized, and are formed on the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The electrical connection in the state where the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are in contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) can be improved, and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 due to the viscosity of the solder. The electrical connection in a state where the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the side are in contact with the seat surface of the pan portion (head seat surface) of the metal pan screw can be improved.

  Thus, even if the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, noise that has entered the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transferred to the board ground (ground (GND) of various boards) via a metal pan screw. ), The above-mentioned “route through which noise is removed” is reliably formed, so that the noise control effect of the peripheral control board box 1505 made of a conductive resin can be stably maintained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. The copper foil as the surface is soldered so as not to be exposed. As described above, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the rear surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 because the seat surface of the metal pan screw is in contact with the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. If the thickness is not uniform (that is, if there is a portion where the solder is raised), the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are There is a problem that the contact area decreases and electrical connectivity deteriorates. As described above, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 are connected to the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 must be uniform in thickness (that is, if there is a portion where the solder is raised) unless the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil as the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is uniform. The contact area between the land 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the side and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a is reduced, resulting in poor electrical connectivity. There's a problem. If the thickness of the copper foil on the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is not uniform (that is, if there is a raised portion of the solder), the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan head screw into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, The control board 1510 may be distorted, which may cause disconnection of various wiring patterns.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is used for the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 with which the seat surface of the metal pan screw contacts. A metal mask is placed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y, and the solder paste is spread on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula). By placing the back surface (solder surface) 1510y in a reflow oven and drying the solder paste by heat, the thickness of the solder applied to the copper foil on the surfaces of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 is made uniform as the thickness of the metal mask. Can be. Further, copper which is a surface of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on a surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of cover flat plate 1501a. The foil is formed on the metal mask by placing a metal mask on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and spreading the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula). It is applied from a hole, and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is put into a reflow furnace and the solder paste is dried by heat, so that the thickness to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 is reduced. The thickness of the metal mask can be made uniform.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 have the same surface. Although the copper foil was soldered so as not to be exposed, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 contacting the seat surface of the pan portion of the metal pan screw (head surface). The surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the side, and which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. (Mounting surface) Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf on 1510x side The copper foil is a surface of the may be covered by applying a resist solution. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, is also applied when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is applied with the resist liquid. You. Even with such a configuration, a metal pan screw is inserted into the through-holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing in, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 were electrically connected via a metal pan screw. State. Also, copper which is the surface of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of cover flat plate 1501a. By coating and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thicknesses of the resist layers in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 have the same thickness, and thus the through holes 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw into the base plate 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the land 1510rf1 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 that comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil that is the surface of 1510rf4, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the solder paste is spread on the metal mask using a squeegee (such as a spatula). The solder paste is applied from a hole formed in the metal mask and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow furnace to dry the solder paste by heat. ) May be flowed into a solder bath and soldered. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a abut. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the soldering is prevented from being partially formed on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Must be uniform. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing the shape of the resist with respect to the land when the peripheral control board is caused to flow into the solder bath.

  For example, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist liquid is formed. It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as a “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is applied to a copper foil on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 on the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), a shape in which a plurality of circles having a width are formed concentrically (a resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically), and as shown in FIG. A chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined length are annularly arranged around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. 221 (c), a vertical line in which the resist has a predetermined width. (A shape in which a plurality of resists are formed in a vertical direction having a predetermined width and separated by a predetermined distance dimension, or a resist is formed in a grid pattern) 221 may have a shape in which a plurality of lines are formed only in a horizontal direction having a predetermined width and separated by a predetermined distance.), And as shown in FIG. 221 (d), lines having a predetermined width in the resist are separated by a predetermined distance. Although not shown, a shape in which a plurality of lines inclined upward to the right are formed diagonally (a line in which the resist has a predetermined width is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines inclined downward to the right are formed diagonally) is not shown. An example is a collection of small circular shapes.

  In this manner, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with the resist solution to form the resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, Since the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, can be suppressed (in other words, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (the mounting surface) which is coated with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Accordingly, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder soldered in this manner includes mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 so as to be electrically connectable.

  In addition, a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is used as a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 which is in contact with the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. It may be performed on the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. When the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into a solder bath and soldered, a copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution. In this case, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be uniform.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. However, the metal pan screw is provided with a flat washer, a spring washer, and a tooth. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a washer (also referred to as a "chrystry washer").

  In the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the conductive resin cover 1501, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover flat plate 1501a The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 come into contact with each other, and lands 1510rb1 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. The cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via the metal pan-head screw by bringing into contact with each of the metal pan head screw and the seat surface of the metal pan-head screw. Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 The cover 1501 is electrically connected, and the cover 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected to each other. Cover 1501 '. In this case, the base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501 may be made of a conductive resin, or may be made of a metal instead of the conductive resin. The wiring cover body 1503 that closes the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae may be made of conductive resin or metal.

  An amplifier board having a circuit for amplifying various sounds consumes large power and generates heat. Therefore, the amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or attached to a metal partial case. When the amplifier substrate is housed in a metal substrate box, the air heated by the heat generated by the amplifier substrate and the heat of the amplifier substrate itself are efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal substrate box. When the amplifier board is attached to the metal partial case, the heat of the amplifier board itself can be efficiently radiated to the outside air by the metal partial case.

  The amplifier board is housed in a metal board box composed of a metal cover body and a metal base body, or attached to a metal partial case. Noise may enter the partial case. Therefore, like the above-described peripheral control board 1510 (that is, the cover body 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected to each other), the plurality of amplifier boards are formed on the amplifier board. The lands and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the plurality of mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the metal cover body or the metal partial case of the metal substrate box are in contact with each other. When a plurality of lands formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the amplifier board and the seat surface of the metal pan screw come into contact with each other, the metal lands through the metal pan screw. The metal cover body or the metal partial case of the metal substrate box is in a state of being electrically connected to the plurality of lands formed on the amplifier board, and the metal cover body or the metal Part case and amplifier board ground and (GND) can be a state of being electrically connected. Further, the heat of the amplifier substrate itself is transmitted from the ground (GND) of the amplifier substrate to the metal cover body or the metal partial case of the metal substrate box via a metal pan screw to efficiently radiate heat to the outside air. You can also.

  In the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan screw. Thus, the cover 1501 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 are in a state of being electrically connected to each other. it can. For example, a plurality of lands of the parent substrate are electrically connected to a ground (GND) of the parent substrate, a plurality of lands of the child substrate are electrically connected to a ground (GND) of the child substrate, and a plurality of lands of the parent substrate are formed. And the plurality of lands of the child board are screwed at both ends of the metal support (spacer), respectively, so that electricity is transmitted through the plurality of lands of the parent board, the plurality of lands of the child board, and the metal support (spacer). Connected state. Thus, the ground (GND) of the parent substrate and the ground (GND) of the child substrate can be the same ground (GND) via the metal support (spacer).

  In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is housed in the conductive resin-made peripheral control board box 1505. However, the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are housed. If the payout control board box 632 is made of a conductive resin, the main control board box 1320 and the payout control board box 632 need to be transparent according to the rules, and a conductive resin box is used. Although it is not possible, the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the peripheral control board box while being configured of a conductive resin for the board box that houses the power supply board and various relay board boxes that house various relay boards. You may make it fix by the same method. By doing so, the same effect as the noise suppression effect by the above-described peripheral control board box 1505 made of a conductive resin can be exerted on the board box that houses the power supply board and the various relay board boxes that house the various relay boards. it can.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the fifth gaming panel 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the rear unit 3000), the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. A ball-to-board connector including a special connector SCN1 and a special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special board connector including a special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. By disposing it near the center of 552, the tank rail 553 So that the can be placed apart al. As described above, the tank rail 553 is provided with a metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through a plurality of cutouts 553aa formed on a lower side thereof (a lower side of a rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front). Can be dropped. Therefore, by arranging the above-described inter-board connector away from the tank rail 553, the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the above-described inter-board connector can be prevented. Can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the inter-board connector including the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided. The board-to-board connector provided by the special connector SCN4 is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In the state where the power supply 1500 is attached, as shown in FIG. 217, by arranging it vertically long, the area above the inter-board connector can be reduced, so that dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. The area of attachment can be minimized. In addition, when the above-described inter-board connector is arranged to be long in the left-right direction, the area on the upper side of the inter-board connector becomes large, so that the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, etc. adheres is extremely increased. Become. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged long in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. And the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property or the like adheres is extremely increased, but as described above, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac The protruding wall of the cover plate 1501a prevents the plug from being protruded from the surface of the cover plate 1501a in a hidden state even when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN9 are inserted. Dust attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the flat plate 1501a, Even powder or the like having a sex may fall from the cover side wall 1501b, thereby making it possible to prevent from adhering to the connector CN1～CN9. As described above, the direction in which the above-described inter-board connector is arranged and the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged so that dust, powder having any metallic property, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electric terminal. Is selected.

  In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with plugs for the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a socket for the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a socket for the special connector SCN4. However, they may be arranged so that the direction in which information and signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information or signals can be correspondingly a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, since various types of control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data The ROM board 1520 is on the transmitting side and the peripheral control board 1510 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector serving as a plug (or a special connector serving as a socket), and correspondingly, a peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a plug and a special connector) serving as a socket. Special connector). Further, in the above-described embodiment, since a plurality of types of video signals are output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is on the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector serving as a plug (or a special connector serving as a socket), and correspondingly, a liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector (or serving as a plug) as a socket. Special connector).

  In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover 1501. Except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed singly or in combination. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side. . Even with this configuration, foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game balls B) drops toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. Thus, it is possible to prevent an electrical trouble due to a foreign object falling on various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to a foreign object falling from the tank rail 553. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is formed through the ventilation hole 1501az. When foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B) which falls on the inside of the game ball B falls and enters, the foreign matter dropped on the various substrates of the peripheral control board box 1505 is electrically connected. This is because the probability of occurrence of trouble increases.

  In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, the cover side walls 1501b to 1505b provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501 are provided. Of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. In this way, by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, it is possible to contribute to suppressing a rise in the temperature of the peripheral control board box 1505. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the ventilation hole 1501az is formed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game balls B (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game balls B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 and falls into the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because the probability that an electrical trouble due to a foreign matter will occur increases.

[Other noise measures by peripheral control unit]
As described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 that constitute the peripheral control board box 1505 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin made of polycarbonate and carbon. When various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) by metal pan-head screws, Since it is configured so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the various substrates and become the same ground (GND), noise that has entered from the cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 can be removed from the various substrates. To the ground (GND) to eliminate noise. It has become so that (hereinafter, referred to as "configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment"). Another configuration of the present invention in which a noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box capable of removing noise that has entered the peripheral control board box 1505 (hereinafter, “the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments” This will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 241. In FIGS. 222 to 241, the same reference numerals as those of the various members in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment shown in FIGS. The description of the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments will be omitted except for a part.

  In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, as described above, the wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive material containing carbon in polycarbonate. In contrast to the configuration made of resin, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fifth embodiments, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503 is transparent. In the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second to fourth embodiments, a metal shield plate is housed in the peripheral control board box, In the configuration of the noise control using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, a metal shield plate is provided in the peripheral control board box. Not content.

  FIGS. 222 to 226 show a configuration for noise suppression using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, in which the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is covered with a metal shield plate. FIG. 222 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, with a part of the shield plate abutting on the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via a conductive elastic member. 223 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, FIG. 224 is a front view of the peripheral control unit according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 225 is an X in FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 226 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X-X, and FIG. 226 is a view as viewed from the direction indicated by the arrow A in FIG. 224 according to the second embodiment.

  FIGS. 227 to 230 show the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, which further enhances the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment. FIG. 227 shows a configuration in which an area of the back surface (solder surface) such as 1510 where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 further contact via a conductive elastic member. FIG. 228 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, FIG. 228 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 229 is an arrow A in FIG. 224 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 230 is a perspective view, and FIG. 230 shows a ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate and a lug on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate for improving the contact between the conductive elastic member and the ground. FIG. 4 is a view showing a method of taking out a ground (GND), and is a schematic diagram of a copper foil surface on a back surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control substrate (an example of a bare surface) and a schematic diagram of a rear surface (solder surface) of a peripheral control substrate; Stripping example (b)), schematic view of copper foil surface on back surface (solder surface) of peripheral control substrate (example (c) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged), outline of rear surface (solder surface) of peripheral control substrate It is a figure (example (d) in which a plurality of through holes having lands are arranged).

  FIGS. 231 to 235 show a configuration for noise suppression using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment. The surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is covered with a first metal shield plate. A back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is covered with a second metal shield plate, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are sandwiched between the first metal shield plate and the second metal shield plate. FIG. 231 shows a configuration in which a part of the first metal shield plate and a part of the second metal shield plate are electrically connected to ground (GND) such as the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 232 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment, FIG. 232 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 233 is a perspective view of a peripheral control board and the like according to the fourth embodiment. Diagram showing installation procedure FIG. 234 is a diagram (a) showing a land formed around a through hole on the surface (mounting surface) side of a peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment, and a diagram (b) showing a foil removal region. 235 is a diagram showing a land formed around a through hole on the back surface (solder surface) side of a peripheral control board or the like according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 235 is a diagram showing a land and a screw designation symbol (b). FIG. 4C is a diagram illustrating a foil removal region. In FIG. 227, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate that can be in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is omitted from the viewability of the drawing, and in FIG. The conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate which can be contacted is shown by a two-dot chain line for easy viewing of the drawing.

  FIGS. 236 to 241 show a configuration for noise suppression using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, in which the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the like are formed of a metal shield plate. Among the various substrates accommodated in the peripheral control substrate box, which are not covered at all, the region where a part of the ground (GND) of the specific substrate is exposed and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via the conductive elastic member. 236 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, FIG. 237 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 7A is a partial perspective view of a rear surface of a peripheral control unit according to a fifth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 239 is a view showing a part of the rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit taken along the line CL in FIG. 213, and FIG. 239 is a continuation of FIG. 238, wherein the conductive elastic member is made of metal of the effect display device 1600. FIG. 240 is a view (c) showing a part of a rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit in which a part of the peripheral control unit is cut out so as to be deformed by being pressed against the back cover, and FIG. FIG. 241 is an enlarged front view of a cover body constituting a peripheral control unit having an opening through which a device can be inserted and brought into contact. FIG. 241 shows a ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) side of a specific substrate and a conductive material. It is a figure which shows the extraction method of the ground (GND) of the back surface (solder surface) side of a specific board | substrate which makes favorable contact with an elastic member, and the schematic diagram of the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific board | substrate ( Stripping (A)), a schematic view of the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (exposed example (b)), a schematic diagram of a copper foil surface on the back surface (solder surface) of a specific substrate (a through hole having a land). It is an example (c) of a plurality of arrangements, and a schematic diagram of an underside (solder surface) of a specific substrate (an example (d) of an arrangement of a plurality of through holes having lands).

[Comparison between the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503, as described above, is made entirely of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When each is fixed by screws, it is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates and become the same ground (GND).

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise control using the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, a box shape having an opening at the rear and longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction is used. Peripheral control that can control the progress of the production based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game, and a cover body 1501 that is formed of a transparent non-conductive resin. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520; And a metal that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 A shield plate 1540, a conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined portion of the metal shield plate 1540, and a base body formed of a transparent non-conductive resin that closes an opening of the cover body 1501. 1502. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540 in the internal space of the cover body 1501, thereby forming a metal shield. The plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502, whereby a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) including the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is configured. ing.

[Cover body of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501ag1, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. So that Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are replaced with the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the metal shield. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 of the plate 1540 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged so as to match with the peripheral control board 1510. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In addition, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. 1540 will be connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 ground (GND). As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

  When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In this state, the land 1520rf4 of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540. At the same time, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3 correspond to the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1. At the same time, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the seat surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 This is connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. 1530 ground (GND). As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630.

  When attaching the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged to match the boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 abut against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501am2. At the same time, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

  Accordingly, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. It will be connected to 1530 ground (GND). As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 ground (GND). As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630.

  By mounting various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the metal shield plate 1540 is mounted. When sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. A gap (2.3 mm) having the following is formed.

  The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is, as described above, a plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The area defined by the area 1501az and the clearances described above (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) and the peripheral control board 1510 A gap formed in the volume control switch 1510d provided, a volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and two formed in the cover body 1501. Connector hole 1501ac9 And 1501Ac10, is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, was added to the. For this reason, when the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blade. Air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is supplied to a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and to a metal shield plate 1540 housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When the air is taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be reduced.

[Base of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
The base flat plate 1502a is located on the right side when viewed from the front, and at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, at an L-shaped circuit connection piece. A rectangular through-hole 1502ab that is slightly longer than the back surface of the 1540d and that is long in the vertical direction is formed.

  Note that, on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, regions corresponding to the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are one size smaller than the outer shape of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 each having a larger peripheral shape are formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil removal regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are grounded on the peripheral control board 1510 so that noise (electromagnetic noise) can be prevented from entering the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic noise) cannot enter the beta land of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A route through which noise does not escape is formed.

[Metal shield plate of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
The metal shield plate 1540, which can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. L-shaped bent rearward by a predetermined distance (in the second embodiment, 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) at the upper center on the left side and the lower center on the left side of the shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). Attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 are formed respectively.

  When viewed from the front, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension on the upper right side and the lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) (the second embodiment). In this example, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by 12 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed respectively, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). An L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d bent backward by a predetermined distance (in the second embodiment, 21 mm from the back surface of the shield plate 1540a) is formed between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (adhered) from the upper end to the lower end of the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d.

  The shield flat plate 1540a has cutouts formed therearound so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially located at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa and the wiring drawing concave portion 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. Accordingly, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield plate 1540a, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover plate 1501a and The wiring extraction recess 1501ab is inserted without contacting the opening 1540aa of the shield plate 1540a.

  The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane. The back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 and the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed so as to be parallel to each other. In the second embodiment, the distance from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 project from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as described above. One mounting boss hole of a pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, as described above. One of the formed pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are located at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. And two mounting boss holes out of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed to protrude.

  Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the cover plate 1501 is attached. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the substrate and various substrates, a distance dimension of a predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (this In the second embodiment, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing the metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

  The two spaces have a distance of a first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (In the second embodiment, 12 mm) between a first space 1505a (see FIG. 225) having a space and a front surface of a shield plate 1540a of a metal shield plate 1540 to be described later and a back surface of the cover plate 1501a. A second space 1505b (see FIG. 225) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (in the second embodiment, 1.6 mm).

  In the first space 1505a, various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real-time clock IC not shown, backup power supply 1510e, power supply creation circuit not shown, resistor not shown, not shown) Capacitors, LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1, SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connectors SCN3, etc.), and a liquid crystal output board 1530 Various electronic components and the like (eg, a resistor (not shown), a capacitor (not shown), a special connector SCN4, and the like) are housed in the second space 1505b, while various electronic components and the like are housed at all. No. This is because various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) can be accommodated in the first space 1505a to take measures against the noise (electromagnetic noise), and can be installed in the second space 1505b. This is because heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not containing various electronic components and the like that generate heat. . That is, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic noise).

  In the shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540, ventilation holes 1540az having the same shape are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, like the ventilation hole 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. I have. When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa of the cover 1501 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to blow out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. Thereby, air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the space inside the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[Conductive Elastic Member of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Second Embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning (elasticity), and includes a conductive covering portion 1545a, It is composed of a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive covering portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1545b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be given. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when attaching (adhering) the conductive coating portion 1545a to another member.

  Note that the conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular cross section (having a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm) (see FIG. 226), and has a conductive adhesive tape 1545c. Has a rectangular shape (see FIG. 226) having a width of about 2 mm and a height of about 0.035 mm.

[Assembly method of peripheral control board box according to second embodiment]
A method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are connected to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through-hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is disposed so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the rear side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arranged to match the hole 1501ah2 and made of metal A through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 are arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 have an arrangement corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are formed. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed at the bottom.

  Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. To fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. Thus, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is attached. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  Subsequently, since the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, they are directly or finely adjusted. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the mounting plate holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted on the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a at predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is covered. The body 1501 and the various substrates are sandwiched and fixed.

  As described above, among the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, thereby restricting the movement in the up, down, left and right directions. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restricted by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side, the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restricting in the vertical and horizontal directions. The protrusion is not formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is reduced by the peripheral control board 1510. When fixed to the back side of the 1501a, the dimensional dimensions provided in the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. It can be absorbed by a sufficient margin.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are formed. The guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cab. It is inserted into the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Then, the base body 1502 is turned around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502, and covers the base body 1502 as it is. When the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d is put on the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d projects from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Inserted metal one-way screw Screwed toward the base side sealing section 1502ea formed on the base member 1502 Te. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the distal end surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby forming the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. And the base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in a state of inscribed (surface contact). In this sealed state, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 projects from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the back surface of the base body 1502. Has a distance dimension (projection length) of 2.7 mm to the back surface.

  In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to discover the unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent to the illegal operation of the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

  Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn from the wire drawing recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A pan screw with a metal seat (not shown) (a screw having an integrated pan head and flat washer) is screwed into the drawer and the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. Accordingly, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  Subsequently, the peeling paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. The 1545 adhesive tape 1545c is attached (adhered).

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600, behind the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box is inserted by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it toward a mounting hole that forms a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of.

  The effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. The frame-shaped metal frame houses a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a driving circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected, It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box having non-conductivity (the above-described protective cover 1601). The effect display device 1600 is controlled by a peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the effect display device 1600, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as a peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. Thus, the same ground (GND) is obtained. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, an L-shaped circuit connecting piece of a metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. 226d passes through a through-hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and contacts the metal back cover of the effect display 1600 via the conductive elastic member 1545 as shown in FIG. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the second embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), thereby causing a dimensional tolerance or an assembly error. The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. Thus, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected securely, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected. Since the ground (GND) line such as 1510 can be electrically connected to the same ground (GND), an environment that is strong against noise (electromagnetic noise) can be set in the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, Built around peripheral data ROM board 1520, various substrates such as liquid crystal output substrate 1530) and peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, various substrates such as liquid crystal output substrate 1530) can do. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

  The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment are formed by being molded from a transparent non-conductive resin. , A peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. When fixed, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Connected. Therefore, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading the effect display device 1600 are transmitted to the substrate via the metal shield plate 1540. A "route through which noise passes" can be formed, which is guided to ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and removed. Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise) on various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630), and the cost of various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

  Here, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 are provided. Will be described. As described above, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az can not only cool the space inside the cover 1501 but also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 224, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa are connected to the peripheral control board. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b included in the control ROM 1510, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number) , Pin numbers, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing are checked from multiple angles. So that the area is larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. It is. Thus, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed via the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. . Further, the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b keeps the lighting state in a state where the DC +5 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and therefore the LED ML1 is originally supplied with the DC + 5V. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the operation state, it also has a spotlight function of illuminating the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. , And the visibility of the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing can be improved.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 respectively (for example, , Connector pin count, IC (Direction, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, silk printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Are distributed so as to form a large area where the contents can be almost confirmed from angles in multiple directions. Accordingly, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition to the corresponding relationship, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Further, the LED ML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where DC +35 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the state of supply, it is used as a spotlight for brightly illuminating the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by silk printing, respectively. The visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to a special connector SCN3 provided in special connectors SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 provided.

  In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The area between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board is larger than the area of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530). 1530 and 1530, so that the contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, etc.) printed on the silk screen can be visually recognized. Thereby, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the content printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are displayed. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed via a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. In addition, since the LEDML4 arranged near the special connector SCN2 is kept lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally checked (monitored). Although having a function, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a function as a spotlight for brightly illuminating an inter-board connector with the special connector SCN4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The visibility of the contents printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 by silk printing is improved, and the visibility of the inter-board connector is improved by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  Further, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az disposed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with the product number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1 and SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pin 1510c2 and the content (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And the state of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing are distributed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, respectively, so that the areas can be confirmed from various angles. Are located. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can be. Further, since the LEDML2 disposed near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is kept turned on when DC +12 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, Although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +12 V is supplied, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2) is further provided with a spotlight function of illuminating the SDRAM 1510c brightly. , The visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be improved.

  In addition, among a plurality of blades constituting the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN, a gap between the blades (specifically, a gap between the blades when an inspector rotates the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN). The user can confirm the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not an illegal board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

  In addition, as the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a surface-mount type LEDML1 having a wide angle of about 120 degrees and a weak directivity type is adopted, so that it is used for illumination. Are also suitable. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the cover plate 1501 is attached. As described above, in a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the substrate and the various substrates, a predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the second embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. . As described above, the two spaces have the first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 224) having a distance dimension of 12 mm (in the second embodiment, 12 mm) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 224) having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (in the second embodiment, 1.6 mm). As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the like. ing. The first space 1505a thus formed can be brightly illuminated by the LEDs ML1 to ML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is also suitable for use as illumination.

  In addition, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a gloss, and a region on the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, which faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. In addition, it also has a function as a reflection unit that can reflect light emitted from the LEDML1 to the LEDML4 and return the light to the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflective portions may be configured to further apply a glossy colored paint.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls are rubbed against each other in the ball path formed by these units, and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby serving as a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment which is affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise (electromagnetic noise). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and transparently molded as described above. In the space, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is fixed to the cover body 1501 and the various boards. A configuration was adopted in which the metal shield plate 1540 was electrically connected to grounds (GND) of various substrates by being sandwiched and fixed. In the second embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. And the same ground (GND) by electrically connecting to the ground (GND) line.

  Thereby, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic noise) that has entered from the body 1502 is guided to ground (GND) of various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal shield plate 1540. Can be removed. In other words, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 can be guided to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via a metal shield plate 1540 and removed.

  In the second embodiment, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with a metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, when shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between cover body 1501 and various substrates, the surface between the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of cover flat plate 1501a A space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (in the second embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. The two spaces correspond to the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the metal shell. A first space 1505a having a first predetermined distance (12 mm in the second embodiment) between the shield plate 1540 and the rear surface of the shield plate 1540a, and a shield plate of the metal shield plate 1540. A second space 1505b having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the second embodiment) between the front surface of the cover 1540a and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. In other words, the distance dimension at the first predetermined height is formed larger than the distance dimension at the second predetermined height. In the case where a large-sized production unit (an electric drive source and a drive mechanism capable of operating a movable production body, and various sensors for detecting an origin position and an operation position) is arranged on the game board 5, the depth direction is If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension at the first predetermined height and the distance dimension at the second predetermined height may be configured as the same distance dimension at the predetermined height. The distance dimension at the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension at the first predetermined height. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise by housing various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space 1505a, and to take measures against the electromagnetic wave noise. The heat generated from various electronic components in the first space 1505a is efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not containing various electronic components that generate heat in the first space 1505a. Can be.

  Further, in the second embodiment, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az are formed in the metal shield plate 1540, and are printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Visually check the product number or model (or management number), the state of the IC pins in the control ROM 1510b, and the contents (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510. Also, the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, IC Orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) and peripheral data RO The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the substrate 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the silk-printing on the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively. (E.g., the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) of the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the shield plate 1540 of FIG. Note that, in addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540 so that the periphery thereof can be visually recognized. . Also, the shape of the connector between the boards (special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the board of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) can be checked so that the connection state of the connector between the board and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. A rectangular opening may be provided at a position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to a larger area than the area formed by the special connector SCN3, or a peripheral control board 1510 and a liquid crystal output board. The shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector with the 1530 can be confirmed. At the position of the metal shield plate 1540 corresponding to the large area It may be configured to provide an opening in the shape.

  In the second embodiment, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to pass through the wings to the peripheral control unit 1500. By extruding outward, air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in the air through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be reduced. Although it is possible to do so, the FAN mounting recess 1501a When the vane portion of the attachment is cooling fan FAN is rotated through the blade portion by the rotation may inhale air toward the peripheral control IC1510a to feed the air. In other words, the main purpose of the air-cooling fan FAN may be to simply air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without using the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  In the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. For the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow furnace, and the solder paste is dried by heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flowed into a solder bath and soldered. . In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a abut. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the soldering is prevented from being partially formed on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Must be uniform.

  For example, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist liquid is formed. It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as a “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), a shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (the resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically). A chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are annularly arranged around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. (A resist may have a shape in which a plurality of resists are formed only in a vertical direction having a predetermined width and separated by a predetermined distance dimension, A plurality of lines having a predetermined width may be formed only in a horizontal direction having a predetermined width apart from each other by a predetermined distance.), And as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines that are separated upward and rise to the right are formed in a diagonal shape (a shape in which a line having a predetermined width of the resist is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines that decrease in the right direction are formed in a diagonal line) is illustrated. Although not shown, a small circular shape may be used.

  In this manner, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with the resist solution to form the resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, Since the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, can be suppressed (in other words, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (the mounting surface) which is coated with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Accordingly, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder soldered in this manner includes mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 so as to be electrically connectable.

  In addition, a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is used as a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 which is in contact with the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. It may be performed on the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. When the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into a solder bath and soldered, a copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution. In this case, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be uniform.

  Also, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as a "chrystry washer").

  Further, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected to each other and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are separately molded. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded with the transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503, as described above, is made entirely of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When each is fixed by screws, it is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates and become the same ground (GND).

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is further strengthened. A structure in which a region of a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the above and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 further abuts via a conductive elastic member is adopted.

[Metal shield plate of peripheral control board box according to third embodiment]
Specifically, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 228, as a countermeasure against noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering from cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover plate of the cover body 1501, each side of the shield plate 1540a is moved backward. The side walls 1540ae are formed by bending (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). These side walls 1540ae have no ventilation holes 1540az formed at all. In the state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the side surfaces of the side walls 1540ae are predetermined from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Since they have a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm) and are separated from each other, they are not in contact with each other and are not in contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates. Since the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar to the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment described above, Detailed description is omitted.

[Base of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
The base 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the base 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, and includes a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output. A conductive material for a substrate capable of contacting a metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 at a position corresponding to a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the substrate 1530. A plurality of insertion openings 1502az having a square (a shape having both a vertical distance dimension and a horizontal distance dimension of about 8 mm) into which the elastic member 1507 is inserted are formed in the base plate 1502a. Although these insertion ports 1502az are formed to protrude forward and rearward of the base plate 1502a, the front end face of each insertion port 1502az has a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like. Are formed so as to have a predetermined distance (for example, 1.5 mm) so as not to be in contact with the back surfaces (solder surfaces) of the various substrates, and the rear end surface of each insertion port 1502az is made of a metal shield plate. It is formed so as to be arranged on the same plane as the back surface of the 1540 L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d.

  There are seven regions ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed, and seven insertion holes 1502az are formed in the base plate 1502a at positions corresponding to the regions ROP. There is one region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the substrate 1520 is exposed, and one insertion opening 1502az is formed in the base plate 1502a at a position corresponding to the region ROP. There are two regions ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) is exposed, and two insertion holes 1502az are formed in the base plate 1502a at positions corresponding to these regions. That is, a total of 11 regions ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed are provided on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The base plate 1502a is provided with a total of eleven insertion openings 1502az at positions corresponding to the respective regions ROP. In addition, serial numbers 1 to 11 are formed on the back side of the base plate 1502a and near each of the insertion openings 1502az. The serial number indicates the order (work procedure) in which the manufacturer's worker inserts the conductive elastic member 1507 for a board. Since the base body 1502 is molded as a transparent non-conductive resin as described above, the serial numbers 1 to 11 can be visually recognized from the front side of the base plate 1502a. The base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment is similar in shape to the base body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

[Conductive Elastic Member for Substrate of Peripheral Control Substrate Box According to Third Embodiment]
In the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, in addition to the conductive elastic member 1545 that can electrically connect the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board box further includes a peripheral device. A region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. A conductive elastic member for a substrate 1507 that can be electrically connected is provided. The conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate is a conductive member having cushioning property (elasticity), and includes a conductive covering portion 1507a and a rectangular foam 1507b as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1507a. , Is composed of. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1507a include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1507b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance.

  The conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate has a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-rear direction (when viewed from the right side, the conductive elastic member 1507 for a substrate in FIG. 228 has a width of about 11 mm, a depth of about 8 mm, and a height of about 8 mm) have. When the board conductive elastic member 1507 is inserted into the above-mentioned insertion opening 1502az of the base body 1502, it is guided by the inner wall of the insertion opening 1502az, and the board conductive elastic member 1507 has a cushioning property (elasticity). By pressing the inner wall of the insertion opening 1502az, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the board is hard to come off from the insertion opening 1502az.

[Partially Exposed Area of Ground on Various Boards of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Here, the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be described. Regions ROP formed on a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 have the same structure. The region ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) will be described. As shown in FIGS. 230A and 230B, a region ROP formed in a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 is formed so that a part of the board ground (GND) (that is, beta land) formed on the copper foil surface 1510yp of the 1510y is exposed in a shape larger than the front shape of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the board. A resist liquid is applied on the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510yr.

  Note that a method using a through hole without exposing the land land as the region ROP may be adopted. For example, as shown in FIGS. 230 (c) and (d), the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the tag land on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. A plurality of through holes to be connected are arranged in the up-down direction and the left-right direction, respectively, and the copper is formed on the copper foil surface 1510yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 so that lands are formed around each through hole. A resist solution is applied on the foil surface 1510yp to form the back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1510yr.

[Method of Assembling Peripheral Control Board Box According to Third Embodiment]
Since the method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 is basically the same as the method of assembling the peripheral control board box according to the second embodiment, the procedure for inserting the conductive elastic member 1507 for a board will be described. The manufacturer's worker attaches the peripheral control unit 1500 to an attachment portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600, behind the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5. Then, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the board is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az of the base body 1502 in the longitudinal direction and pushed in in order from the serial number 1 to the serial number 11, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the like. An operation is performed in which a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is brought into contact with a region ROP where a part of the ground is exposed.

  As described above, effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. The frame-shaped metal frame houses a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a driving circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected, It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 as described above, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. To the same ground (GND).

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, an L-shaped circuit connection piece of a metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. 229d passes through a through-hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and contacts the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 via the conductive elastic member 1545 as shown in FIG. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm). The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. Thus, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected to each other, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected. It is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 so that the same ground (GND) can be obtained.

  In addition, a conductive area for each substrate, one of which is in contact with a region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed. As shown in FIG. 229, the other of the elastic elastic members 1507 passes through through holes (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the corresponding transparent synthetic resin box, and comes into contact with a metal back cover of effect display device 1600. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the third embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), so that the dimensional tolerance is reduced. In addition, a dimensional deviation due to an assembly error can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate. Thus, the state in which an external force is applied in the longitudinal direction of the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is maintained, and the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate is used as a repulsive force by the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. And a contact surface of the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with a region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed, a contact surface with a metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, And a state where the electrical connection is good is maintained, and the ground (solder surface) of the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is maintained. GND) and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected to each other, and the peripheral control unit 1500 accommodates the peripheral control unit 1500. Ground, such as a substrate 1510 (GND) line and is electrically connected, it can be the same ground (GND). Therefore, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 and noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading the effect display device 1600 are further reduced in addition to the metal shield plate 1540. Through the conductive elastic member 1507 for the substrate, a "route through which noise passes" can be formed, which is guided to a substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) and removed. Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise) on various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630), and the cost of various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

  In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 are also used. The lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered so that the copper foil, which is the surface thereof, is not exposed, but comes into contact with the seating surface (seat surface of the head) of the metal pan screw. The mounting surfaces (bosses) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a are soldered to copper foils, which are the surfaces of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. Surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 in contact with the surface (mounting surface) The copper foil is a surface 510x side of the land 1510rf1~1510rf4 may be covered by applying a resist solution. The copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, is also applied when the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is applied with the resist liquid. You. Even with such a configuration, a metal pan screw is inserted into the through-holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, and toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the cover body 1501 were electrically connected via a metal pan screw. State. Also, copper which is the surface of lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of cover flat plate 1501a. By coating and covering the foil with a resist solution, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 can be made uniform. As a result, the thicknesses of the resist layers in the portions corresponding to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 have the same thickness, and thus the through holes 1510r1 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. When fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan screw into the base plate 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The distortion of the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

  In the third embodiment, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to pass through the wings to the peripheral control unit 1500. By extruding outward, air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in the air through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be reduced. Although it can be done, the FAN mounting recess 1501a When the vane portion of the attachment is cooling fan FAN is rotated through the blade portion by the rotation may inhale air toward the peripheral control IC1510a to feed the air. In other words, the main purpose of the air-cooling fan FAN may be to simply air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without using the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  Also, in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. For the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow furnace, and the solder paste is dried by heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flowed into a solder bath and soldered. . In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a abut. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the soldering is prevented from being partially formed on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Must be uniform.

  For example, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist liquid is formed. It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as a “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), a shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (the resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically). A chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are annularly arranged around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. (A resist may have a shape in which a plurality of resists are formed only in a vertical direction having a predetermined width and separated by a predetermined distance dimension, A plurality of lines having a predetermined width may be formed only in a horizontal direction having a predetermined width apart from each other by a predetermined distance.), And as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines that are separated upward and rise to the right are formed in a diagonal shape (a shape in which a line having a predetermined width of the resist is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines that decrease in the right direction are formed in a diagonal line) is illustrated. Although not shown, a small circular shape may be used.

  In this manner, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with the resist solution to form the resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, Since the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, can be suppressed (in other words, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (the mounting surface) which is coated with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Accordingly, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder soldered in this manner includes mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 so as to be electrically connectable.

  In addition, a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is used as a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 which is in contact with the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. It may be performed on the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. When the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into a solder bath and soldered, a copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution. In this case, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be uniform.

  Also, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as a "chrystry washer").

  Further, in the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the third embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected to each other and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are separately molded. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded with the transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503, as described above, is made entirely of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When each is fixed by screws, it is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates and become the same ground (GND).

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 231 and 232, a box shape having an opening at the rear and longer in the left-right direction than in the vertical direction is used. Peripheral control that can control the progress of the production based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game, and a cover body 1501 that is formed of a transparent non-conductive resin. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520; And noise (electromagnetic wave noise) entering various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be reduced (suppressed). Attachment (adhesion) to a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 disposed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the various substrates to be cut and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 (adhesion) The conductive elastic member 1545 and various substrates capable of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A metal backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 disposed on the backside (solder side) side, and a base body 1502 molded of a transparent non-conductive resin that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 Have. In the internal space of the cover 1501, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 include a metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate rear surface. (Solder surface) A peripheral control board box formed by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by being sandwiched by the side shield plate 1555 and attached to a predetermined position of the cover body 1501 and closing the opening of the cover body 1501 by the base body 1502. 1505 (sealing substrate box) is configured.

[Cover Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
First, in the cover 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. Are formed as mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah4 on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively, and on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment. The difference is that the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 to be formed are formed as mounting boss holes 1501am3 and 1501am4 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. Further, in the cover 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 even when the power is turned off is supplied from a holder (not shown). In order to prevent the power supply to the not-shown real-time clock IC from being cut off, a protrusion preventing portion 1501aw having a cylindrical shape is formed to project from the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1502 toward the front side of the backup power supply 1510e. This is different from the cover 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment in that Note that the end face of the protrusion prevention unit 1501aw is arranged at a predetermined distance (for example, 1 mm) from the backup power supply 1510e.

  When various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted on the back surface side of the cover body 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral A metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted directly into through holes (excluding those into which the mounting boss protruding portions are inserted) of various substrates such as the data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a is inserted. A peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board are provided on the back side of the cover 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment. When mounting various boards such as the 1530, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1 20, and a plurality of through holes in various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a metal pan screw (not shown) is directly inserted into a specific through hole and screwed into a mounting boss hole formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. After performing the first fixing method for fixing the substrate, the metal back surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is covered. Each through-hole formed in the L-shaped mounting piece of the (shielding surface) side shield plate 1555 is formed by excluding specific through-holes in various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The base plate 1502a is arranged so as to match the corresponding through hole among the through holes, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed with the base body 1502. Insert a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through hole of the mounting boss formed on the front surface side, and form each through hole formed in the L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the like are fixed by screwing into respective mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through other through holes in various boards. 2. Perform the fixing method.

  In the first fixing method, when the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. The holes 1540c2a are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The holes 1540c1a, the through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged so as to correspond to the periphery. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  In the first fixing method, when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of a metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. 1540b1a is arranged so as to match mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 to 1501ah4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  In the first fixing method, when attaching the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of a metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 described later. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, the through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501an1 to 1501an4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Then, by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 as specific through holes among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. The substrate 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into contact with the metal pan screw seats.

  Then, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 as specific through holes among the through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501ah3 and 1501ah2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Accordingly, the lands 1520rb1, 1520rb4 of the lands 1520rb1, 1520rb2, and 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are in contact with the seat surface of the metal pan screw. Becomes In addition, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby making the metal board. The board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and has the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal. To the ground (GND) of the output substrate 1530. The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, thereby being connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. Become.

  Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through-holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 as specific through-holes among the through-holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and an attachment formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing the boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am4. Accordingly, the land 1530rb1, 1530rb3, and 1530rb4 of the lands 1530rb1, 1530rb3, and 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are brought into contact with the seat surfaces of the metal pan-head screws. Become. Further, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield is formed. The plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and has the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data This is connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. .

  After the first fixing method, in the second fixing method, a metal control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid-crystal output board 1530, and the like, which will be described later, are made of metal so as to cover the back surfaces (solder surfaces) of the substrates. The through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 on the rear surface (solder surface) of the substrate are respectively provided with various types of peripheral control substrate 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control substrate 1510, the through holes 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the through holes 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as the corresponding through holes other than the specific through holes in the substrate. To fit the cover 1501 The mouth is closed by a base body 1502, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 described later formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1502a, and the metal substrate back surface (solder Surface) The through holes 1555b1a to 1555b4a respectively formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 of the side shield plate 1555, and the specific control on various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through-holes other than the through-holes correspond to the through-holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through-holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through-holes 1530r2 and 1530 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Fixed by screwing respectively 0r3 to mounting boss hole 1501ag1,1501ag4,1501ah1,1501ah4,1501am3,1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through respectively.

  By performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method in this order, the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal-side board (mounting surface) -side shield plate 1540 by the metal. The state is sandwiched between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 on the rear surface (solder surface) of the substrate. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Are brought into contact with each other, and lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the L-shaped attachment of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are formed. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. Thus, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. In this state, the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface). The L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the side shield plate 1555 are made of metal by being electrically connected to lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The backside (solder side) side shield plate 1555 of the board is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 The be continued. The ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and has the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Accordingly, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected. The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, so that the power supply This is connected to the ground (GND) line of the substrate 630.

  Further, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the shield on the back surface (solder surface) of the metal substrate are formed. The plate 1555 comes into contact with the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the rear (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same ground. (GND), the metal back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and thereby the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. And the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to be connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. Become.

  Further, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, a land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and a metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate The surface of the 1555 L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 is in contact with the surface. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. By this, the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and has the same ground (GND). Therefore, the metal back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data This is connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. .

  In addition, by sequentially performing the first fixing method and the second fixing method, the conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined portion of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is made of metal. Is pressed against the front surface side of the back plate (solder surface) -side shield plate 1555 of the product. As a result, the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected.

  Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with a metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A gap (2.3 mm) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa.

  The sum of the areas of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is, as described above, a plurality of ventilation holes formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The area defined by the area 1501az and the clearances described above (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501) and the peripheral control board 1510 A gap formed in the volume control switch 1510d provided, a volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and two formed in the cover body 1501. Connector hole 1501ac9 And 1501Ac10, is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, was added to the. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. Air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a metal substrate surface (mounting) housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in air via a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the (surface) side shield plate 1540, the flow velocity of air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to a small value. I can do it.

[Base Body of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
At the front side of the base plate 1502a of the base body 1502, through holes 1502ag1 are provided at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 each having a thickness of 1502ag6 to 1502ag6. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 and screwed in, and the base 1502 is fixed to the cover body 1501.

  Note that, on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, regions corresponding to the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are one size smaller than the outer shape of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 each having a larger peripheral shape are formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil removal regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are grounded on the peripheral control board 1510 so that noise (electromagnetic noise) can be prevented from entering the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic noise) cannot enter the beta land of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A route through which noise does not escape is formed.

[Metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate of peripheral control board box according to fourth embodiment]
The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are disposed on the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering various substrates. When viewed from the front, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance between the upper left center and the lower left center of a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). In the fourth embodiment, L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 that are bent backward by only 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed.

  When viewed from the front, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is a predetermined distance above the right side and below the right side of a horizontally long rectangular shield plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent rearward by a dimension (in the fourth embodiment, 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) are formed, and a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: L-shaped circuit that is bent backward by a predetermined distance (in the fourth embodiment, 9.9 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a) above the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1. A connection piece 1540d is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (adhered) from the upper end to the lower end of the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d.

  The shield flat plate 1540a has cutouts formed therearound so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially located at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa and the wiring drawing concave portion 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. Accordingly, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring leading recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a are placed in the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a. It is in a state of being inserted without contact.

  The metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is bent so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane. In addition, the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 and the surface of the shield plate 1540a are formed so as to be parallel to each other. In the fourth embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above.

  Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above.

  In a state where various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Is a space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is disposed in this space, so that two spaces are formed.

  The two spaces have a distance of a first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (In the fourth embodiment, a distance of a second predetermined height between a first space having a length of 12 mm) and a surface of a shield plate 1540a of a metal shield plate 1540 and a back surface of the cover plate 1501a to be described later. A second space having a dimension (in the fourth embodiment, 1.6 mm).

  In the first space, various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c, real-time clock IC not shown, backup power supply 1510e, power supply creation circuit not shown, resistor not shown, capacitor not shown) , LEDML1 to LEDML4, special connectors SCN1, SCN2, etc.), various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a, a resistor not shown, a capacitor not shown, a special connector SCN3 etc.), and a liquid crystal output board 1530 Various electronic components and the like (a resistor (not shown), a capacitor (not shown), a special connector SCN4, and the like) are accommodated, whereas the second space does not accommodate various electronic components at all. This is because various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) can be accommodated in the first space 1505a to take measures against the noise (electromagnetic noise), and can be installed in the second space 1505b. By not storing various electronic components that generate heat, heat generated from various electronic components in the first space is transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. This is for efficient communication. That is, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic noise).

  The shield plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has the same shape at a position corresponding to a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A ventilation hole 1540az is formed. That is, like the ventilation hole 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. I have. When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa of the cover 1501 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to blow out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. Thereby, air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the space inside the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

  In addition, noise entering the shield plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 from the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover plate of the cover body 1501 respectively. As a measure against (electromagnetic wave noise), each side of the shield plate 1540a is bent backward (toward the surface (mounting surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). Side walls 1540ae are formed. These side walls 1540ae have no ventilation holes 1540az formed at all. In the state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the side surfaces of the side walls 1540ae are predetermined from the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Since they have a distance dimension (for example, 3.9 mm) and are separated from each other, they are not in contact with each other and are not in contact with various electronic components mounted on various substrates.

  Further, the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 has a circular shape through which a projection preventing portion 1501aw having a cylindrical shape formed to protrude from the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1502. Is formed.

[Metal Board Back Side (Solder Side) Side Shield Plate of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
A peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are disposed on the back surface (solder surface) of various substrates that can reduce (suppress) noise (electromagnetic noise) entering various substrates. When viewed from the front, the metal substrate back side (solder side) side shield plate 1555 is formed of an upper left, lower left, upper right, and lower right of a horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1555a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). On the sides, L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 bent backward by a predetermined distance (2.3 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1555a in the fourth embodiment) are formed, respectively. These L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 to 1555b4 are formed so as to be bent such that their respective surfaces are arranged on the same plane.

  Notch portions 1555aa1 to 1555aaa3 are formed in shield plate 1555a so as not to interfere with disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on base body 1502, respectively. Also, the shield flat plate 1555a includes, among the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a of the base body 1502, mounting bosses 1502af4 which come into contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520; Notch portions 1555aa5 are formed so as not to interfere with the mounting bosses 1502af5 that come into contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively. In addition, on the front side of the shield flat plate 1555a, electric power other than ground (GND) on various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is formed so as to correspond to the shape of the shield flat plate 1555a. A transparent insulating sheet (not shown) for preventing short circuit due to electrical connection is attached (adhered). Further, the shield flat plate 1555a has no side wall 1540ae formed on the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and no ventilation hole 1540az.

  In the lower region of the notch 1555aa5 on the front surface side of the shield flat plate 1555a, it is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed on the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. This is an area where the conductive elastic member 1545 is pressed (adhered) and is brought into contact with it.

  In a state in which a metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is attached to cover the rear surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, By disposing a metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 near the rear surface (solder surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, The various substrates absorb heat generated from various electronic components and the like, and the various substrates can be efficiently cooled by removing the absorbed heat from the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. In other words, the metal backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) noise (electromagnetic noise).

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled, the back surface of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is in a state of contact with the surface of the base plate 1502a of the base body 1502.

[Conductive Elastic Member of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached to (adhered to) the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity). The conductive cover 1545a includes a conductive body 1545a, a foamed body 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive cover 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive cover 1545a. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1545a include those in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1545b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be given. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when attaching (adhering) the conductive coating portion 1545a to another member.

  The cross-sectional shape (shape) of the conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape having a width of about 5 mm and a height of about 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a width of about 2 mm. , The height of which is approximately 0.035 mm.

[Method of Assembling Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
A method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal board front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is required. The through-hole 1540c1a formed on the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is provided. The through-hole 1540c2a formed on the bottom surface of the cover flat plate 1501a is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is disposed. A through hole 1540b1a is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match with the mounting boss hole 1501am1.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and are formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, 1520r3, and 1520r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged. 1530r2, 1530r3, and 1530r4 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501am1, 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 233, by a first fixing method, a metal pan (not shown) directly from the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A screw is inserted and screwed into various mounting boss holes formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a to fix the cover plate 1501a. According to the first fixing method, a screw fixing instruction mark and a serial number near the screw fixing instruction mark are printed on the back surfaces (solder surfaces) of the various substrates as silk printing with respect to the through holes to be fixed. The serial number indicates an order (operation procedure) in which a manufacturer's worker inserts, screws in, and fixes a metal pan screw (not shown). The color in which the screw fixing instruction mark and the serial number are printed in the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark as silk printing is the surface (mounting surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The area indicating the position (including the designation of the direction) where the various electronic components to be mounted in (1) are arranged and the part numbers thereof are the same color (here, white) as the color printed by silk printing.

  Specifically, in the through hole 1520r1 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a thread fixing instruction mark DTH1 surrounding the periphery of the land 1520rb1 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 with a solid white solid line is printed by silk. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH1, a white serial number 1 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing. Further, in the through hole 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH2 surrounding the periphery of the land 1520rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by a solid white solid line is printed as silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH2, a white serial number 2 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing.

  In addition, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH3 that surrounds the periphery of the land 1530rb1 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with a thick solid white line is printed on the through hole 1530r1 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH3, a white serial number 3 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing. In addition, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH4 surrounding the periphery of the land 1530rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with a thick solid white line is printed on the through hole 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 as silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH4, a white serial number 4 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing.

  Also, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH5 surrounding the periphery of the land 1510rb2 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a solid white solid line is printed in the through hole 1510r2 of the peripheral control board 1510 as silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH5, a white serial number 5 is printed as a silk print surrounded by a rectangular white line. Further, a screw fixing instruction mark DTH6 surrounding the periphery of the land 1510rb3 on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 with a solid white solid line is printed on the through hole 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510 as silk printing. In the vicinity of the screw fixing instruction mark DTH6, a white serial number 6 is surrounded by a rectangular white line and printed as silk printing.

  By performing the operation of inserting and screwing in a metal pan screw (not shown) in order from the serial number 1 to the serial number 4 by the manufacturer, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are There is a case where the cover boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a are slightly displaced. Even in such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a to restrict the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restriction is reduced. When the control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Since it can be absorbed by the dimensional allowances provided respectively, the position of the peripheral control board 1510 is finely adjusted so that the through-holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are covered with the cover flat plate 1501a. Mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side It can be matched.

  An operator of the manufacturer inserts and inserts a metal pan screw (not shown) in the order of serial number 1 and serial number 2 in order to fix it on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 to be brought into contact with the seat surface of the metal pan screw, respectively. The L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to a land 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Accordingly, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  The operator of the manufacturer inserts and inserts a metal pan screw (not shown) in the order of serial number 3 and serial number 4 in order to fix it, thereby forming the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 on the back surface (solder surface) side. The lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 are in contact with the metal pan screw seats. Further, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield is formed. The plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  The operator of the manufacturer inserts and inserts a metal pan screw (not shown) in the order of the serial number 5 and the serial number 6 to fix it, thereby forming the peripheral control board 1510 on the back surface (solder surface) side. Lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other.

  In addition, when the manufacturer's worker performs the work of inserting and screwing in a metal pan screw (not shown) in order from the serial number 1 to the serial number 6, the manufacturer's worker sequentially performs the serial number 1 to the serial number 6. When the work of inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) and screwing it in and fixing it by randomly inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into it and performing the work of fixing it, any of serial numbers 1 to 6 can be used. There is a case where a mistake occurs in which a metal pan-head screw (not shown) is inserted and screwed into what is indicated by the serial number, and forgets to fix it. If such an error occurs, the peripheral control board box 1505 (peripheral control unit 1500) will be shipped with the metal pan screw not shown incompletely fixed.

  Also, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the through holes 1510r2 and One or more of through holes other than 1510r3, that is, one or more of through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 of liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of peripheral control substrate 1510. Even if the base body 1502 is put on the cover body 1501 after the metal pan head screw (not shown) is erroneously inserted directly into the through hole and screwed into the mounting boss hole formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a and fixed. , Base plate 1502 Of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the front side of the boss, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss corresponding to the erroneously inserted metal pan head screw and the head of the erroneously inserted metal pan head screw Since the cover 1501 always interferes with the portion, a gap is formed between the base 1502 and the cover 1501, so that the cover 1501 cannot be completely closed by the base 1502.

  As described above, among the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the L of the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is covered so as to cover the rear surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The through holes 1555b1a and 1555b2a formed in the V-shaped mounting piece 1555b1 are arranged so as to match the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the L-shaped mounting of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is performed. The through-hole 1555b3a formed in the piece 1555b3 is arranged so as to match the through-hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield board 1555 on the metal back surface (solder surface). Align the through hole 1555b4a with the through hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is placed so that. In this way, the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is arranged so as to cover the rear (solder surface) side of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Then, since no holes such as ventilation holes are formed in the shield flat plate 1555a of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, the above-described screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and serial numbers 1 to 1 are provided. The serial number 6 is also covered by the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and is difficult to see. In other words, the assembled peripheral control board box 1505 molded as a transparent non-conductive resin is viewed from various angles through various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Even if it is embedded, the point that various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed by the above-described first fixing method is that the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side. The shield plate 1555 does not allow the user to know it, so that the security of the peripheral control board box 1505 can be improved.

  Subsequently, the peeling paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member 1545 is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connecting piece 1540d of the metal substrate front side (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Is attached (adhered).

  Subsequently, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engagement portions 1502ca of the base body 1502, and formed on the cover body 1501. The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd are inserted into the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502. .

  Subsequently, the L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. With the base body 1502 wrapped around the opening side of the cover body 1501 so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1502, the mounting boss formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502 a by the second fixing method in a state where the base body 1502 is covered over the cover body 1501 as it is. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of 1502af1 to 1502af6 and screwed in to fix them.

  Specifically, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag1 of a mounting boss 1502af1 formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1502a to insert an L-shaped shield plate 1555 on the metal substrate rear surface (solder surface). The through hole 1555b1a formed in the mounting piece 1555b1, the through hole 1510r1 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. It is fixed by being screwed into a mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In addition, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag2 of a mounting boss 1502af2 formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1502a to insert an L-shaped mounting piece of a metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. The cover passes through the through hole 1555b2a formed in the 1555b2, the through hole 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. It is fixed by screwing into a mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the flat plate 1501a. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is formed by the L-shaped mounting plates 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the L-shaped of the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the surfaces of the mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Are brought into contact with each other, and lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the L-shaped attachment of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are formed. The surfaces of the pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 are in contact with each other. That is, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. By being connected, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side The L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal board is formed. The back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 It is the thing.

  Also, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag3 of a mounting boss 1502af3 formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1502a to insert an L-shaped mounting piece of a metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. The through-hole 1555b3a formed in 1555b3 and the through-hole 1520r2 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 respectively pass through the mounting boss hole 1501ah1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to be fixed. As a result, the land 1520rb2 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 abut. It will be in the state of having done. That is, the L-shaped attachment piece 1555b3 of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1520rb2 formed on the back (solder surface) side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Accordingly, the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  In addition, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag4 of a mounting boss 1502af4 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a, and passes through the through hole 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. It is fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole 1501ah4 formed. Also, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through hole 1502ag5 of the mounting boss 1502af5 formed on the front surface side of the base flat plate 1502a, and is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through the through hole 1530r2 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is fixed by screwing it into the mounting boss hole 1501am3.

  In addition, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into a through hole 1502ag6 of a mounting boss 1502af6 formed on the front surface side of the base plate 1502a, and an L-shaped mounting piece of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is inserted. The through-hole 1555b4a formed in 1555b4 and the through-hole 1530r3 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are respectively passed through and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the land 1530rb3 formed on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 contacted. State. That is, the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected to the land 1530rb3 formed on the back (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As a result, the metal back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  According to this second fixing method, when a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted and screwed into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag6 of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a, and fixed by screwing. The (conductive surface) conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is pressed against and contacts the surface side of the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. As a result, the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in the fourth embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm). The dimensional deviation can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. Accordingly, a metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 sandwiching various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and a metal substrate rear surface (solder surface). A state in which the side shield plate 1555 is electrically connected reliably, and the periphery sandwiched between the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 Since the ground (GND) lines of various substrates such as the control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected to each other and can be set to the same ground (GND), noise (electromagnetic waves) The peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, Can be constructed with various substrate) such as a liquid crystal output board 1530 peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, near the data ROM substrate 1520, and with respect to the periphery of the various substrates) such as a liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

  Subsequently, a metal one-way screw into which a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted is inserted into a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501, and toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. Screw it in. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the distal end surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby forming the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. And the base-side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in a state of inscribed (surface contact).

  In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to discover the unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent to the illegal operation of the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

  Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn from the wire drawing recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A pan screw with a metal seat (not shown) (a screw having an integrated pan head and flat washer) is screwed into the drawer and the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover 1501. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. Accordingly, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600, behind the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box is inserted by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it toward a mounting hole that forms a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of.

  The cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment are formed by molding as a transparent non-conductive resin. , A peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, and various other substrates are made of a metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. When it is attached by being sandwiched between, the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. It is configured. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Connected. For this reason, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is transferred to the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface). It can be guided to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via the side shield plate 1555 and can be removed. Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise) on various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630), and the cost of various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

  Here, the arrangement of a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the plurality of shield flat plates 1540a formed on the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are described. The arrangement of the ventilation holes 1540az having a circular shape will be described. As described above, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az can not only cool the space inside the cover 1501 but also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are formed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510. And the model number (or management number) printed on the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) So that the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be checked from multiple angles. They are distributed and arranged so as to be larger than the shape of the ROM 1510b. Thus, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed via the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. . Further, the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b keeps the lighting state in a state where the DC +5 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and therefore the LED ML1 is originally supplied with the DC + 5V. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the operation state, it also has a spotlight function of illuminating the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. , And the visibility of the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing can be improved.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 respectively (for example, , Connector pin count, IC (Direction, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, silk printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Are distributed so as to form a large area where the contents can be almost confirmed from angles in multiple directions. Accordingly, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the content silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition to the corresponding relationship, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Further, the LED ML3 arranged near the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where DC +35 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the state of supply, it is used as a spotlight for brightly illuminating the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by silk printing, respectively. The visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to a special connector SCN3 provided in special connectors SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 provided.

  In addition, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The area between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board is larger than the area of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530). 1530 and 1530, so that the contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, etc.) printed on the silk screen can be visually recognized. Thereby, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the content printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are displayed. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed via a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. In addition, since the LEDML4 arranged near the special connector SCN2 is kept lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally checked (monitored). Although having a function, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a function as a spotlight for brightly illuminating an inter-board connector with the special connector SCN4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The visibility of the contents printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 by silk printing is improved, and the visibility of the inter-board connector is improved by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  Further, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az disposed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with the product number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1 and SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pin 1510c2 and the content (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And the state of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing are distributed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, respectively, so that the areas can be confirmed from various angles. Are located. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can be. Further, since the LEDML2 disposed near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is kept turned on when DC +12 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, Although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +12 V is supplied, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2) is further provided with a spotlight function of illuminating the SDRAM 1510c brightly. , The visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be improved.

  In addition, among a plurality of blades constituting the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN, a gap between the blades (specifically, a gap between the blades when an inspector rotates the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN). The user can confirm the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not an illegal board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

  In addition, as the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a surface-mount type LEDML1 having a wide angle of about 120 degrees and a weak directivity type is adopted, so that it is used for illumination. Are also suitable. Various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed by a metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. In the state of being sandwiched and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the predetermined height is set between the front surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. (In the fourth embodiment, 14.8 mm) is formed, and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) -side shield plate 1540 is disposed in this space to form two spaces. A space is formed. As described above, these two spaces are between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. A first space having a distance dimension of a first predetermined height (12 mm in the fourth embodiment), a surface of a shield plate 1540 a of a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a cover plate. And a second space having a distance dimension of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the second space 1501a and the rear surface of the first space 1501a. As described above, the first space accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, as described above. I have. The first space formed in this manner can be illuminated brightly by the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is also suitable for use as illumination.

  In addition, since the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is made of metal, the metal substrate has luster and faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510, respectively. A reflection portion that reflects the light emitted from the LEDML1 to the LEDML4 and returns the light to the peripheral control board 1510 to the region on the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the periphery thereof. It also has the function of These reflective portions may be configured to further apply a glossy colored paint.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls are rubbed against each other in the ball path formed by these units, and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby serving as a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment which is affected by noise (electromagnetic noise) due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities of the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise (electromagnetic noise). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and transparently molded as described above. In the space, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are connected to a metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate rear surface (solder surface) side. By being attached while being sandwiched by the shield plates 1555, the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 can be grounded on various substrates. And a configuration that electrically connects to it. In the fourth embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. And the same ground (GND) by electrically connecting to the ground (GND) line.

  Thereby, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base The noise (electromagnetic wave noise) invading from the body 1502 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data via the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. It can be guided to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and removed. In other words, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered from the body 1502 is transmitted to the substrate ground (ground of various substrates) via the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. (GND)).

  In the fourth embodiment, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are made of a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a metal substrate. In a state of being sandwiched by the back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 and attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the cover flat plate 1501a A space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in the fourth embodiment) is formed between the back surface and the rear surface, and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is formed in this space. Are arranged, two spaces are formed, and these two spaces are formed on the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a). A first space having a first predetermined height distance dimension (12 mm in the fourth embodiment) between the shield plate 1540a of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a; Distance of a second predetermined height between the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a (1.6 mm in the fourth embodiment) And a second space having: In other words, the distance dimension at the first predetermined height is formed larger than the distance dimension at the second predetermined height. In the case where a large-sized production unit (an electric drive source and a drive mechanism capable of operating a movable production body, and various sensors for detecting an origin position and an operation position) is arranged on the game board 5, the depth direction is If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension at the first predetermined height and the distance dimension at the second predetermined height may be configured as the same distance dimension at the predetermined height. The distance dimension at the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension at the first predetermined height. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise by housing various electronic components and the like which are easily affected by noise (electromagnetic wave noise) in the first space, and to take measures against the electromagnetic wave noise in the second space. By not storing various electronic components that generate heat, heat generated from various electronic components in the first space is efficiently transferred to the second space via the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Can communicate well.

  In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az are formed in the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 to control the peripheral control substrate 1510. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) ), And the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510. (Eg, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) Also, the part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are included. Although the contents printed by silk printing (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, the peripheral data ROM 1520a, A rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the corresponding metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening is provided at the position of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 so that the periphery thereof can be visually recognized. It can also be configured as follows. In addition, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520) can be checked so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. In addition, a rectangular opening may be provided at a position of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 corresponding to an area larger than the area formed by the special connector SCN3). The shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed. Metal substrate corresponding to the larger area) It may be configured to provide a rectangular opening at the position of (the mounting surface) side shield plate 1540.

[Around Through Holes of Various Boards of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fourth Embodiment]
Here, the periphery of the through holes formed in the various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box according to the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 234 (a), on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510, the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side Lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 that are in contact with and electrically connected to the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the shield plate 1540 are formed. The surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through hole 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) as shown in FIG. ) A land 1520rf4 that is in contact with and electrically connected to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the side shield plate 1540 is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r1 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side. A land 1530rf1 that is in contact with and electrically connected to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 is formed.

  These lands 1510 rf 1, 1510 rf 4, 1520 rf 4, and 1530 rf 1 are in contact with and electrically connected to the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540 c 1, 1540 c 2, 1540 b 1, and 1540 b 2 of the metal board (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Therefore, a “route through which noise is removed” is formed in which noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates). Note that the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 have mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a. , 1501am1 come into contact with each other. For this reason, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated from the mounting boss holes 1501ag1, 1501ag4, 1501ah2, and 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. , 1540c2, 1540b1, 1540b2 and the lands 1510rf1, 1510rf4, 1520rf4, 1530rf1, the noise (electromagnetic noise) that has flowed flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates).

  As shown in FIG. 234 (b), the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The foil removal areas NR5 and NR6 each having a circular shape that is slightly larger than the outer shape circle of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 are formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 has the foil removal area NR5. , NR6 respectively. As shown in FIG. 234 (b), the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through holes 1520r1, 1520r2, and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has the cover flat plate 1501a. Foil-cut areas NR7, NR8, NR9 each having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer shape circle of mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4 formed on the back side are formed, and mounting of mounting boss holes 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4. The surfaces (boss surfaces) are in contact with the foil removal regions NR7, NR8, and NR9, respectively. As shown in FIG. 234 (b), the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r2, 1530r3, and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has the rear surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Are formed, the foil removal regions NR10, NR11, and NR12 each having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer shape circle of the mounting boss holes 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4. The boss surface) comes into contact with the foil removal regions NR10, NR11, and NR12, respectively.

  These foil removal regions NR5 to NR12 prevent noise (electromagnetic noise) from entering from mounting boss holes 1501ag2, 1501ag3, 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2, and 1501am4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. To be separated from the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In other words, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated from the mounting boss holes 1501ag2, 1501ag3, 1501ah3, 1501ah1, 1501ah4, 1501am3, 1501am2, 1501am4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, through the foil removal regions NR5 to NR12, and to the peripheral control. A “route through which noise does not escape” that cannot enter into the land of various substrates such as the substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed.

  On the other hand, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control substrate 1510 around the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 is, as shown in FIG. (Solder surface) Lands 1510rb1 and 1510rb4 that are in contact with and electrically connected to the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1 and 1555b2 of the shield plate 1555 are formed. As shown in FIG. 235 (a), the back surface (solder surface) of the metal data substrate 1520r2 around the through hole 1520r2 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a metal substrate back surface (solder surface). ) A land 1520rb2 which is in contact with and electrically connected to the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b3 of the side shield plate 1555 is formed. As shown in FIG. 235 (a), the back surface (solder surface) of the metal substrate is formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A land 1530rb3 that is in contact with and electrically connected to the surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b4 of the shield plate 1555 is formed.

  These lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, and 1530rb3 abut against and are electrically connected to the surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, and 1555b4 of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. Therefore, a “route through which noise is removed” is formed in which noise (electromagnetic noise) that has entered the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates). The back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1555b1, 1555b2, 1555b3, and 1555b4 of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 have mounting bosses 1502af1, 1502af2, and 1502af3 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of 1502af6 are in contact with each other. For this reason, noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is generated from the mounting bosses 1502af1, 1502af2, 1502af3, 1502af6 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a from the L-shaped mounting piece 1555b1, Even if it invades the 1555b2, 1555b3, 1555b4, and the lands 1510rb1, 1510rb4, 1520rb2, and 1530rb3, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered flows to the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates).

  As shown in FIG. 235 (b), a metal pan screw (not shown) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. The lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 that are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 that surround the lands 1510rb2 and 1510rb3 with solid white solid lines are printed as silk printing. As shown in FIG. 235 (b), a metal pan (not shown) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. The lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 into which the screws are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 which surround the lands 1520rb1 and 1520rb4 with white solid lines are printed as silk printing. Further, on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, as shown in FIG. The lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 that are directly inserted and screwed are formed, and the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 that surround the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4 with solid white solid lines are printed as silk printing.

  In addition, even if a metal pan screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 are in the area of the solid white solid line part. Although the area near the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 overlaps the head of a metal pan screw (not shown), the outer peripheral portion of the solid white solid line area of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 has a metal pan (not shown). Since the head of the screw is formed larger than the outer shape of the screw, the head of the metal pan screw (not shown) is noticeable by the solid white solid line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6. It can contribute to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) of inserting a pan screw and screwing it in and forgetting to fix it. It has become to so that. Further, even if a metal pan screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the area indicated by the solid white solid line area of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 is not changed. Although the area close to the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 overlaps the head of a metal pan screw (not shown), the outer peripheral part of the solid white solid line area of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 is made of metal (not shown). Since the head of the pan screw is formed larger than the outline of the head of the pan screw, the head of the metal pan screw (not shown) is noticeable by the solid white solid line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2, and the metal not shown is made of metal. Contributes to the prevention of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) of forgetting to insert and screw in the pan screw It has to be able to bet. Further, even if a metal pan screw (not shown) is directly inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 have the white thick solid line area. Although a region near the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 overlaps the head of a metal pan screw (not shown), the outer peripheral portion of the solid white solid line region of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 has a metal pan (not shown). Since the screw head is formed larger than the outer shape of the screw head, the head of the metal pan screw (not shown) is noticeable by the solid white solid line of the screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4. It can contribute to the suppression of mistakes (inadvertent mistakes) of inserting a pan screw and screwing it in and forgetting to fix it. It has become to so that.

  As shown in FIG. 235 (c), the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 around the through hole 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a. A foil punching area NR13 having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer shape circle of the mounting boss 1502af4 to be formed is formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss 1502af4 abuts on the foil punching area NR13. As shown in FIG. 235 (c), a surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through hole 1530r2 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a. A foil punching area NR14 having a circular shape slightly larger than the outer circle of the mounting boss 1502af5 is formed, and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss 1502af5 abuts on the foil punching area NR14.

  These foil removal regions NR13 and NR14 are connected to grounds (GND) of various substrates so that noise (electromagnetic noise) can be prevented from entering from mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a. Is isolated from In other words, noise (electromagnetic noise) is transmitted from the mounting bosses 1502af4 and 1502af5 formed on the front side of the base plate 1502a to the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the bottom land of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the foil removal areas NR13 and NR14. A "route through which noise cannot pass" that cannot enter is formed.

  In this manner, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 surrounded by solid white solid lines are printed as silk printing, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 and the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are through holes fixed to the cover body 1501 by directly inserting and screwing a metal pan screw (not shown). On the other hand, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 where no screw fixing instruction mark is printed as silk printing, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r3 formed in the substrate 1530 are formed by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1502ag1 to 1502ag of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a of the base body 1502. When the cover 1501 and the base 1502 are fixed by screwing, the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting bosses 1502af1 to 1502af6 formed on the surface side of the base plate 1502a of the base 1501, and the cover plate of the cover 1501. 150 The mounting surface of the mounting boss hole 1501ag1,1501ag4,1501ah1,1501ah4,1501am3,1501am2 formed on the back side of a with (a boss surface), a through hole is fixed fastened together is sandwiched.

  That is, a metal pan-head screw is directly inserted into a plurality of through holes provided in various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and is screwed and fixed to the cover body 1501. If the through-hole and the through-hole, which is clamped and fixed together when fixing the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, are mixed, the worker of the manufacturer may attach a silk screen to the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 printed as printing, screw fixing instruction marks DTH3 and DTH4 printed as silk printing on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and screw fixing instruction marks DTH5 and DTH6 printed as silk printing on the peripheral control board 1510. By visually observing the cover body 150, a metal pan screw is directly inserted and screwed into the cover body 150. The through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 The through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 of the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r3 of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the through holes of the liquid crystal output board 1530, which are through holes that are clamped and fixed together when fixing the 1530r2 and 1530r3, the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 of the peripheral control board 1510, which are through holes fixed to the cover body 1501 by directly inserting and screwing a metal pan screw, the peripheral data ROM Substrate 152 Through holes 1520r1,1520r4, (operation of fixing by screwing) screwing work into the through-hole 1530r1,1530r4 LCD output board 1530 can be performed smoothly. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement of work efficiency.

  In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal board front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal board back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected. In addition to being connected, it is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and a metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield. One or both of the plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display 1600 and are not electrically connected. In this case, it is in an electrically floating state with respect to various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Since the electrically floating metal may function as an antenna to pick up noise and become a noise source, the electrically floating metal may be used as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like. It is necessary not to make it for various substrates. Therefore, in the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 are illustrated. In addition to the case where the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the above-mentioned metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 by a not-shown wiring, other than the case where the wiring is not electrically connected. As described above, the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 300 to provide rigidity. It is electrically connected to the above-mentioned frame ground board 559 via a ground wire. The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility in the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown).

  In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the metal substrate back side (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530. As described above, the shield plate 1555a of the metal-made substrate backside (solder surface) side shield plate 1555a is provided with holes such as vent holes, when it is disposed so as to cover the back surface (solder surface) side of various substrates such as. Since they are not formed at all, the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are also covered with the metal substrate back side (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, making it difficult to view them. A plurality of holes may be formed in the shield plate 1555a of the shield plate 1555 on the rear surface (solder surface) of the substrate. This allows the manufacturer's worker to determine whether various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed through the plurality of holes by the first fixing method described above (that is, Whether or not a metal pan-head screw is inserted and fixed in a portion where the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 are located) can be visually confirmed.

  Further, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 around the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is illustrated in FIG. Screw fixing instruction marks DTH5, DTH6 surrounding the lands 1510rb2, 1510rb3, which are directly inserted and screwed with a metal pan screw (not shown) shown in FIG. Further, a metal pan screw (not shown) shown in FIG. 235 (b) is provided on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 around the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Land 1520 which is inserted and screwed directly Screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 and DTH2 enclosing the periphery of b1 and 1520rb4 with solid white lines are printed as silk printing, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 around the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. 235b, a metal pan screw (not shown) shown in FIG. 235 (b) is directly inserted and screwed around the lands 1530rb1 and 1530rb4, each of which is surrounded by a solid white solid line. The marks DTH3 and DTH4 are printed as silk printing, but may be replaced by white thick solid lines (single-dot chain lines, two-dot chain lines) instead of the solid white thick lines.

  Further, in the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the colors in which the screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 are printed as silk printing are the peripheral control board 1510, The area indicating the position (including the designation of the direction) where various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the component numbers are represented by silk printing. The same color (white) as the color to be printed, but an area indicating the position (including the designation of the orientation) where various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the various substrates and their component numbers May be different from the color printed as silk printing. For example, when the area indicating the position (including the designation of the direction) where various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of various substrates are to be arranged and the component number is printed in silk printing, the color is white. The screw fixing instruction marks DTH1 to DTH6 and the serial numbers 1 to 6 may be yellow or black as colors printed as silk printing so that the colors are different from the white color.

  Further, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) The L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the side shield plate 1540 are brought into contact with the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, respectively. A land 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and a metal substrate (Mounting surface) The rear surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the side shield plate 1540 is in contact with the surface, and a land 1530rf1 formed on the front surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530; The front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is brought into contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540. However, instead of this, the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is formed on the land 1510rf1 formed on the surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510. , 1510 rf 4, without being in contact with the surface of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555, and the L-shaped mounting of the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. The back surface of the piece 1540b1 does not contact the land 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, but contacts the front surface of the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. And the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 is connected to the front surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 ( Without contact with the land 1530rf1 formed Sunda surface) may be configured so as to contact the metallic substrate rear (solder side) side surface of the shield plate 1555. This is a state in which the metal substrate front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back surface (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 are electrically connected by the above-described conductive elastic member 1545. Because it can be.

  In such a configuration, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the It is configured so as not to contact with various substrates such as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In addition, through-holes formed on the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 are formed on the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, 1540b2a, respectively. The base body 1502 has through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, and 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. The through-holes are formed at the positions corresponding to each other. Also, on the back side of the cover body 1501, through holes 1540c1a, 1540c2a, 1540b1a, 1540c2a, 1540c2a, 1540b2 formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540, respectively. Screw holes are respectively formed at positions corresponding to 1540b2a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2, 1540b1, and 1540b2 of the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the surface of the metal substrate rear (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 contacted. The cover body in a state (that is, a state where the electrical connectivity between the metal substrate front (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and the metal substrate back (solder surface) side shield plate 1555 can be improved). Screw holes formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into through holes formed in the base body 1502 so as to be sandwiched and fixed between the base body 1501 and the base body 1502. Each can be screwed toward and fixed.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to pass through the wings to the peripheral control unit 1500. By extruding outward, air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is accommodated in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 when being taken in through the plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the metal substrate surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540. Can be kept low, but FA When the vane portion of the cooling fan FAN attached to the mounting recess 1501aa is rotated through the blade portion by the rotation may inhale air toward the peripheral control IC1510a to feed the air. In other words, the main purpose of the air-cooling fan FAN may be to simply air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without using the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  234 (see FIG. 234), which is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board front surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 also in the configuration for noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment. With respect to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control substrate 1510 shown in a), a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Spread the solder paste on the metal mask using a squeegee (like a spatula) to apply it from the holes formed in the metal mask, put the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 into a reflow furnace, Is used to dry the solder paste. It may be put da. In this case, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 correspond to each other. In order to prevent the contact area from being reduced and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, soldering is prevented from being partially formed on the copper foil on the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Need to be uniform.

  For example, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape by applying a part of the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is formed by applying a resist liquid. Soldering is performed on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4, which has a predetermined shape in the copper foil. Specifically, as a “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is applied to the copper foil on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 on the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), a shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (the resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically). A chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are annularly arranged around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. (A resist may have a shape in which a plurality of lines are formed only in a vertical direction having a predetermined width and separated by a predetermined distance dimension, A plurality of lines having a predetermined width may be formed only in a horizontal direction having a predetermined width apart from each other by a predetermined distance.), And as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines that are separated upward and rise to the right are formed in a diagonal shape (a shape in which a line having a predetermined width of the resist is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines that decrease in the right direction are formed in a diagonal line) is illustrated. Although not shown, a small circular shape may be used.

  In this way, a part of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with the resist liquid to form the resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, The surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil on the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 can be suppressed (in other words, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (the mounting surface) is coated with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Accordingly, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil that is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder soldered in this manner is a back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal board surface (mounting surface) side shield plate 1540 and a land 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. , 1510rf4 so as to be electrically connectable.

  A predetermined figure formed by such a resist may be formed on a copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into a solder bath and soldered, a copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is applied with a resist solution. In this case, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 may be made uniform.

  Also, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as a "chrystry washer").

  Further, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fourth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected to each other and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are separately molded. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded with the transparent synthetic resin box.

[Comparison between the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the noise suppression by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, as described above, in addition to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, the wiring cover body 1503, as described above, is made entirely of polycarbonate and carbon. Various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When each is fixed by screws, it is configured to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates and become the same ground (GND).

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Peripheral control that can control the progress of the production based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game, and a cover body 1501 that is formed of a transparent non-conductive resin. A substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control substrate 1510, and a transparent non-conductive material that covers an opening of the cover 1501. And a base body 1502 molded of a resin. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. Thus, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) including the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is configured.

  In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, in addition to the fact that the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a transparent non-conductive resin, The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is such that the substrate conductive elastic member 1508 is fitted on the rear surface side of the base plate 1502a so that a portion of the substrate conductive elastic member 1508 having a character shape projects from the rear surface of the base body 1502. Is provided on the back surface (solder surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the ground (GND) test pad of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The probe is in contact with the test pad on the cover body 1501. It constitutes a difference of the noise countermeasure in that the opening is formed by the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment that.

[Base of peripheral control board box according to fifth embodiment]
The base 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment is substantially similar in shape to the base 1502 of the peripheral control board box according to the first embodiment, and is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. At a position corresponding to the region ROP where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed, a conductive elastic member for a substrate 1508 that can be in contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is fitted. The rib portion 1502aw is formed to protrude forward from the surface of the base flat plate 1502a with a predetermined distance dimension (a distance dimension that does not make contact with the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530). An insertion opening 1502az having a square (8 mm on a side) is formed in the base plate 1502a at the center in the vertical and horizontal directions of the rectangular rib 1502aw. The conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a T-shape is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity), and has a conductive coating portion 1508a and a T-shape as a core material covered by the conductive coating portion 1508a. And a foam 1508b having the same. Examples of the conductive coating portion 1508a include those in which a copper and nickel metal coating is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a copper and nickel conductive layer is formed on a polyimide film. As the foam 1508b, for example, a polyurethane foam having heat resistance can be given. The T-shaped foam 15808b has a base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the vertical direction (when viewed from the right side, the T-shaped foam 15808b in FIG. 237 has a width of about 3.5 mm and a depth of about 3.5 mm. When viewed from the right side, a protrusion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is long in the front-rear direction from the center of 8 mm and height of about 16 mm (the T-shaped foam 15808b in FIG. 237) has a width of about 11. 5 mm, a depth of about 8 mm, and a height of about 8 mm). The conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 is assembled after the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled. (A method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 is the same as the method of assembling the peripheral control substrate box according to the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.) ), A base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape long in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 having a T-shape is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502, and is pushed and fitted in the vertical direction. As a result, as shown in FIG. 238 (a), the projecting portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 having a T-shape projects rearward from the back side of the base plate 1502a. It will be in the state of having done.

  When the base having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped long in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member for substrate 1508 having a T-shape is inserted and pushed into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base 1502 as shown in FIG. As shown in), the front surface of the base portion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped elongated in the up-down direction is pressed against and brought into contact with the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed. In addition, the upper and lower back sides and the lower back side of the base portion having the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular parallelepiped (that is, the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular parallelepiped to which the protruding portion having the shape of the elongated rectangular parallelepiped is not connected) Are fixed to the front surface of the base plate 1502a.

  As described above, the substrate conductive elastic member 1508 is formed in a T-shape, and the rib 1502aw is formed in the base plate 1502a of the base body 1502 and the insertion opening 1502az is formed at the center of the rib 1502aw in the vertical and horizontal directions. When the conductive elastic member 1508 for a board is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az and pushed and fitted, as described above, the base portion of the conductive elastic member 1508 for a board having a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the up-down direction as described above. The upper and lower back sides (that is, the back surfaces of the base portions having a vertically long rectangular parallelepiped shape to which the protruding portions having the long rectangular shape in the front-rear direction are not connected) are respectively engaged with the surface of the base plate 1502a. In this state, the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate is not easily detached from the insertion opening 1502az. Good sounding and hand treatment is to be able to.

  Note that, on the rear surface (solder surface) side of the peripheral control board 1510, regions corresponding to the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 are one size smaller than the outer shape of the disconnection preventing rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3. The foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 each having a larger peripheral shape are formed, and the front surfaces (contact surfaces) of the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 abut on the foil removal regions NR1, NR, and NR3, respectively. These foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3 are grounded on the peripheral control board 1510 so that noise (electromagnetic noise) can be prevented from entering the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502. GND). In other words, noise (electromagnetic noise) cannot enter the beta land of the peripheral control board 1510 from the disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 via the foil removal regions NR1, NR2, and NR3. A route through which noise does not escape is formed.

  As described above, effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. The frame-shaped metal frame houses a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a driving circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame and the metal back cover are electrically connected, It is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, a rectangular parallelepiped long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for the board projecting from the back surface of the base body 1502. (In the fifth embodiment, the protrusion having the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is long in the front-rear direction of the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate in the fifth embodiment) is pressed against the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. The portion is collapsed approximately 4.5 mm in the front-rear direction and spreads in the vertical direction), and the conductive elastic member 1508 for a substrate having a T-shape is deformed into an H-shape. The conductive elastic member 1508 has a contact surface with a region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed, And a contact surface with the metal back cover of the device 1600, maintaining a state in which good electrical connection is maintained, and a ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. And the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are securely connected electrically, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530) accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided. GND) is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.), and can be the same ground (GND). Thereby, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the peripheral control board via the conductive elastic member 1508 for the board). 1510 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520.) and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the like housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. Since it is electrically connected to the line and can be set to the same ground (GND), an environment that is resistant to noise (electromagnetic noise) can be controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, Various substrates such as a liquid crystal output substrate 1530) and a peripheral control unit 1500 (a peripheral control substrate 1510, Can be constructed edge data ROM substrate 1520, and with respect to the periphery of the various substrates) such as a liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

  The cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 in the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment are formed by being molded from a transparent non-conductive resin. After various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are respectively mounted at predetermined positions, a rectangular parallelepiped conductive elastic member 1508 having a T-shape is formed. When the base portion having the shape is inserted into the insertion opening 1502az formed in the base body 1502, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is connected to the liquid crystal output via the conductive elastic member 1508 for the substrate. The ground (GND) line of the plate 1530 (the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520). Is configured. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Connected. Therefore, the noise (electromagnetic wave noise) that has entered the effect display device 1600 is guided to and removed from the substrate ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. An "exit route" can be formed. Accordingly, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated filter for removing such noise (electromagnetic wave noise) on various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630), and the cost of various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630) can be reduced. Can contribute.

  The surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is provided with a ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 () (a ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 ()). (Not shown) is provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As shown in FIG. 240, the cover 1501 has a tip portion of a contact probe (hereinafter simply referred to as a “contact probe”) with respect to a test pad (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. An opening 1501at into which a “test lead” for checking the conduction of a so-called “tester” may be inserted and contacted is formed. By bringing the contact probe into contact with the test pad, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a game hall, the metal back cover of the effect display 1600 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected. An inspection company can easily perform the inspection work of whether or not the connection is made.

[Partially Exposed Area of Ground on Various Boards of Peripheral Control Board Box According to Fifth Embodiment]
Here, the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 where a part of the ground (GND) is exposed will be described. As shown in FIGS. 241A and 241B, a region ROP formed on a part of the ground (GND) on the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is the back surface (solder surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A portion of the substrate ground (GND) (that is, beta tag land) formed on the copper foil surface 1530yp of 1530y is larger than the front surface of the base portion having a rectangular parallelepiped shape elongated in the vertical direction of the conductive elastic member for substrate 1508. The resist solution is placed on the copper foil surface 1530yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be disposed inside the rectangular rib portion 1502aw formed on the surface of the base plate 1502a and exposed. Is applied to form a back side (solder side) side resist layer 1530yr.

  Note that a method using a through hole without exposing the land land as the region ROP may be adopted. For example, as shown in FIGS. 241 (c) and (d), the region ROP on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the tag land on the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A plurality of through holes to be connected are arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions, respectively, and the copper is formed so that lands are formed around the through holes on the copper foil surface 1530yp of the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A resist liquid is applied on the foil surface 1530yp to form a back surface (solder surface) side resist layer 1530yr.

  In the fifth embodiment, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to pass through the wings to the peripheral control unit 1500. When the air is taken out from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the air flows into the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Although the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the formed ventilation holes 1501az can be suppressed to a small value, when the blade of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotates, the rotation causes the blade to rotate. Through the air to the peripheral control IC 1510a. It may be to send out air me. In other words, the main purpose of the air-cooling fan FAN may be to simply air-cool the peripheral control IC 1510a without using the main purpose of exchanging air in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  In the configuration of the noise countermeasure using the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 which comes into contact with the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. For the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, a metal mask is placed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a squeegee The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is placed in a reflow furnace, and the solder paste is dried by heat. However, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 may be flowed into a solder bath and soldered. . In this case, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a abut. In order to prevent the area from decreasing and the electrical connectivity from being deteriorated, the soldering is prevented from being partially formed on the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Must be uniform.

  For example, a resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape by coating a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, with a resist liquid is formed. It is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, as a “predetermined shape”, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), a resist is applied to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), a shape in which a plurality of circles having a predetermined width are formed concentrically (the resist may be a shape in which a single circle having a predetermined width is formed concentrically). A chrysanthemum shape in which a plurality of rectangular shapes having a predetermined width and a predetermined length are annularly arranged around the centers of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, as shown in FIG. (A resist may have a shape in which a plurality of resists are formed only in a vertical direction having a predetermined width and separated by a predetermined distance dimension, A plurality of lines having a predetermined width may be formed only in a horizontal direction having a predetermined width apart from each other by a predetermined distance.), And as shown in FIG. A shape in which a plurality of lines that are separated upward and rise to the right are formed in a diagonal shape (a shape in which a line having a predetermined width of the resist is separated by a predetermined distance and a plurality of lines that decrease in the right direction are formed in a diagonal line) is illustrated. Although not shown, a small circular shape may be used.

  In this manner, a part of the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is coated with the resist solution to form the resist layer 1510xr formed in a predetermined shape, Since the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1510 is soldered to a region having a predetermined shape of copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, can be suppressed (in other words, the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (the mounting surface) which is coated with a resist solution and has a predetermined shape. The amount of solder to be soldered to the copper foil on the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 Effect as long as the can demonstrate that it is possible to win). Accordingly, when the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into the solder bath and soldered, the copper foil which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered. The attachment can be made uniform so that it does not rise partially. The solder soldered in this manner includes mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a and lands 1510rf1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510. 1510rf4 so as to be electrically connectable.

  In addition, a predetermined figure formed by such a resist is used as a land on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 which is in contact with the seat surface (head seat surface) of the pan portion of the metal pan screw. It may be performed on the copper foil which is the surface of 1510rb1 to 1510rb4. The solder thus soldered electrically connects the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface (head seat surface) of the metal pan screw. It is covered so that it can be connected to. When the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510 is flowed into a solder bath and soldered, a copper foil, which is the surface of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 on the surface (mounting surface) of the peripheral control board 1510, is applied with a resist solution. In this case, the thickness of the resist layer applied to the surfaces of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 may be uniform.

  Also, in the configuration of the noise countermeasure by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a metal pan screw is used. The peripheral control board 1510 may be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a through a metal washer such as a flat washer, a spring washer, and a toothed washer (also referred to as a "chrystry washer").

  Further, in the configuration of the noise control by the peripheral control board box according to the fifth embodiment, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by the metal back cover, so that the frame-shaped metal frame is fixed. And the metal back cover are electrically connected to each other and housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The transparent synthetic resin box and the base body 1502 are separately molded. However, the base body 1502 may be integrally molded with the transparent synthetic resin box.

  By the way, conventionally, a main control board for controlling a game progress or a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling an effect performed in accordance with the progress of a game, a board such as an image control board for performing a display control of an image display device or the like. (For example, JP-A-2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, as in the gaming machine described in this document, the gaming machines are arranged in a plurality of rows facing the back of the hall, so that the effect of noise generated from the facing gaming machine is reduced by the substrate on which the electronic components are mounted. Under such an environment, the substrate may malfunction due to noise.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine including a ROM in which image data of patterns, various background images, characters, characters, and the like are stored, and an effect control board on which a CPU or the like that controls a display device that displays various images is mounted. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall to the gaming machine are charged with static electricity by rubbing the game balls when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the battery.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine including a ROM on which image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, and characters are stored, and a board on which electronic components such as a CPU that controls a display device that displays various images are mounted. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, since some substrates provided in the gaming machine are accommodated in the substrate box, it is necessary to perform an operation for accommodating the substrates in the substrate box, and an improvement in operation efficiency has been demanded.

[Attaching flexible flat cable]
Next, a flexible flat cable connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 242 is a front perspective view of the flexible flat cable, and FIG. 243 is a diagram (a) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to a connector on the back side of the effect display device. It is a figure (b) which shows the state electrically connected with the connector of the output board, and is a partial enlarged view of the B part shown in (a) and the C part shown in (b), and a flexible flat cable is shown. FIG. 244 is a view (c) showing a state electrically connected to each connector through a cutout portion, and FIG. 244 shows a state where the flexible flat cable is not electrically connected to the connector on the back side of the effect display device normally. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is not electrically connected to the connector of the liquid crystal output board normally. A. In FIG. 243 (c), the direction of the connector CN10 shown in FIG. 243 (b) is shown as being rotated by 90 degrees counterclockwise.

[Shape of flexible flat cable]
The flexible flat cable LFC electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600 arranged in parallel. In addition, the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator, and the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring is one third to five times smaller than that of the normal round electric wiring. As shown in FIG. 242, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba having a predetermined width are provided on the upper end side of a vertically long band-shaped main body LFCa on the back side of the main body LFCa. A rectangular shape having a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body LFCa and having a predetermined length on the surface side of the main body LFCa and having a length longer than a predetermined length of the exposed plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba. While a reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba to be formed is formed, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb have a predetermined length at the lower end side of the main body LFCa on the back side of the main body LFCa. A reinforcing plate LFCcb, which is disposed in a bare state and has a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body LFCa and has a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the plurality of stripped flat conductor electrodes LFCbb, is provided. Is formed.

  The plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa are connected to a connector 1600ca of a control board 1600c provided on a metal back cover 1600b that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 243). (See (a).) In contrast, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa are electrically connected to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Is electrically connected to the connector CN10 provided in the first embodiment.

  The flexible flat cable LFC has a straight bent portion LFCd which rises to the right by being bent 90 ° to the left at a portion having a predetermined vertical dimension from the upper end of the main body LFCa (the predetermined vertical dimension is: This is the distance dimension from the upper end of the main body LFCa to the center point of the straight line rising to the right.), And a predetermined distance dimension in the left-right direction from the bent portion LFCd (the center point of the straight line rising to the right) (in this embodiment, the predetermined distance dimension in the vertical direction). (A distance dimension 1.5 times larger than the above) is formed. A bent portion LF Ce is formed which is smoothly bent in the front direction and is smoothly bent in the right direction as it is, and is formed so as to be parallel in the front-rear direction (depth direction). ing.

[How to attach a flexible flat cable to an effect display device]
A plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are, as shown in FIG. 243 (a), a control board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600. Is electrically connected to the connector 1600ca. The control board 1600c restores drawing data transmitted from the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to restore various types of electronic components for displaying an image on the liquid crystal panel 1600a and LEDs (backlights) of the liquid crystal panel 1600a. Alternatively, various electronic components for adjusting the luminance of the cold cathode tube are mounted.

  Since the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba and the plurality of flat conductors In some cases, contact failure may occur between the electrode LFCba and the corresponding electrode of the connector 1600ca, and the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may be connected to the connector 1600ca. , The one electrode LFCba of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba is connected to the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to the one electrode LFCba, and the other electrode adjacent to the electrode LFCba, To control board 1600c There is a case where various electronic components mounted on the control substrate 1600c is damaged.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally attached to the connector 1600ca on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. As a mark for insertion, in the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the left side of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The long solid line guide line G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction and the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) (Right outside) straight up and down And Bill long solid guidelines G1R, are engraved. These guidelines G1L and G1R are stamped by a press machine using a metal back cover 1600b.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally provided on the connector 1600ca on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. After the insertion, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may come off the connector 1600ca, or the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In order to prevent the short-circuit between the flat conductor electrode LFCba and the electrode of the connector 1600ca corresponding to each electrode LFCba obliquely and in contact with another adjacent electrode, the flexible flat cable LFC is made of a metal back. Fix to the back side of lid 1600b As a region to which the fixed seal SFC having a rectangular shape long in the right direction is to be attached, guide brackets G2 in the form of brackets (“) are respectively engraved at positions slightly away from positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal SFC. These four brackets (") -shaped guide lines G2, G2, G2, and G2 are stamped by a pressing process on a metal back cover 1600b using a press machine. The posture of the flexible flat cable LFC can be fixed by being fixed to the back side of the metal back cover 1600b by SFC.

[How to attach flexible flat cable to LCD output board]
As shown in FIG. 243 (b), a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are connected to a connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Electrically connected. The liquid crystal output board 1530 has mounted thereon, in addition to the connector CN10, the connectors CN8 and CN9 described above, a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board, and the like. As the special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the special connector SCN2 of the peripheral control board 1510 and electrically connected thereto, as described above, the display of the effect display device from the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Drawing data of an image to be drawn on the device is input to the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the special connector SCN2 from the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the flexible flat cable is supplied from the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The data is input to the control board 1600c via the LFC and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600.

  Since the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted into the inside of the connector CN10, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb and the plurality of flat conductors In some cases, contact failure may occur between the electrode LFCbb and the corresponding electrode of the connector CN10, and a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may be connected to the connector CN10. Is inserted obliquely with respect to one electrode LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb, the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to this one electrode LFCbb, the other electrode adjacent to this electrode, , Each of which is short-circuited, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 or the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 There is a case where various electronic components mounted around the control board 1510 which is electrically connected may be damaged.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In the horizontal direction in the vicinity of a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the upper end side of the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guide line G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and a portion near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ), A long solid line extending linearly in the left-right direction And guidelines G3L, but it has been printed by the silk-screen printing.

  In the present embodiment, no through hole is formed in the area where the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC is arranged. This is because even when the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC rubs against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed, This is to prevent the mold conductor from being short-circuited by the through hole.

[Relationship between reinforcing plate of flexible flat cable and connector]
When inserting the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600, The electrode LFCba of the mold conductor faces the electrode of the connector 1600ca and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, whereas the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is on the front side of the flexible flat cable LFC. Become. As a result, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC normally extend to the back of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship where they coincide with each other in the front-rear direction and overlap. It should be noted that the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600. In other words, when the pushing amount is insufficient, the periphery of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is exposed from the connector 1600ca.

  Also, when inserting the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the flat conductor The electrode LFCbb is opposed to the electrode of the connector CN10 and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable LFC, whereas the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is on the front side of the flexible flat cable LFC. As a result, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are properly inserted to the back of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this case, as shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship where they coincide with each other in the front-rear direction. Note that the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not inserted deep into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, that is, the amount of pushing. Is insufficient, the periphery of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb is exposed from the connector CN10.

[The state where the flexible flat cable is not connected properly]
The plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600. As shown in FIG. 244 (a), the left end of the main body LFCa cannot be seen over the guide line G1L extending linearly in the vertical direction, and the right end of the main body LFCa is The guide line G1R, which extends linearly in the vertical direction, is inclined, and the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the electrode LFCba is inclined with respect to the lower edge of the connector 1600ba. A part of the reinforcing plate LFCca for reinforcing the connector is In a state of being exposed from 600ba. As described above, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are formed on the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 by the guidelines G1L, G1R and the reinforcing plate LFCca. It can be easily visually determined whether or not the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c to be covered is properly inserted to the back. Thereby, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator places a plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC on the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600. When the electrode LFCba is inserted into the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the connector 1600ca, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode LFCba has been properly inserted into the connector 1600ca. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the efficiency of the checking operation.

  Further, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are not properly inserted to the depth of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and are oblique. 244B, the upper end of the main body LFCa cannot be seen over the guide line G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction, as shown in FIG. And the left side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the electrode LFCbb (the lower end of the reinforcing plate LFCcb in FIG. 243 (c)) is the left end of the connector CN10. 243 (c), the electrode LF is inclined. Some of the reinforcing plate LFCcb for reinforcing the bb is in a state of being exposed from the connector CN10. As described above, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are attached to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by the guidelines G3U and G3L and the reinforcing plate LFCcb. It can be easily visually determined whether or not the connector CN10 is properly inserted to the back. Accordingly, in the assembly line of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine, the operator attaches the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. When the electrode LFCbb is inserted correctly into the connector CN10, it can be easily determined visually whether or not the electrode LFCbb is properly inserted into the connector CN10. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the efficiency of the checking operation.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) extend in the left-right direction. The guide line G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and a portion near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ), A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction was printed by silk printing. However, the inside of a rectangular area having the guideline G3U on the upper side and the guideline G3L on the lower side is solid-printed by silk printing. May be. Even with such a configuration, the upper side of the solid-colored rectangular area can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the solid-colored rectangular area can function as the guideline G3L. Furthermore, even when the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC rubs against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 The resist is prevented from being peeled off due to the peeling of the silk print in the rectangular area where the solid 1530x is painted, and the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 covered with the resist is not exposed. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC from being short-circuited.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) extend in the left-right direction. The guide line G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and a portion near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ), A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is printed by silk printing, but a liquid crystal corresponding to a rectangular area having the guideline G3U on the upper side and the guideline G3L on the lower side and the inside thereof. Of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the output substrate 1530 It may be formed foil vent region in foil surface. Even with such a configuration, the upper side of the stripped rectangular area can function as the guideline G3U, and the lower side of the stripped rectangular area can function as the guideline G3L. Further, even if the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC rubs against the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is exposed, the surface (mounting surface) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 Even if the resist of 1530x is peeled off, the copper foil surface does not exist in the first place, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is exposed, so that the exposed flat conductor of the flexible flat cable LFC is short-circuited. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) extend in the left-right direction. The guide line G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and a portion near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ), A long solid line guideline G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is printed by silk printing, but the copper foil in a partial area on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is removed. Guide lines G3U and G3L may be formed by pulling out Power board 1530 of a surface (mounting surface) guidelines by not applying a partial region of a resist solution in the case of applying the resist solution on the copper foil surface of 1530x G3U, it may be G3L is formed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are normally inserted into the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. After that, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC may be disengaged from the connector CN10, or the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCbb formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. The flexible flat cable LFC is connected to the liquid crystal output board 1530 in order to prevent the short circuit by contacting the electrode LFCbb of the mold conductor and the electrode of the connector CN10 corresponding to each electrode LFCbb obliquely with another electrode adjacent thereto. Fix to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x It may be adhered to the fixed seal having a rectangular shape elongated in the downward direction. In this case, as a region to which a fixed seal is attached on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, for example, a bracket (“)” is provided at a position slightly outward from a position corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal. The guide lines may be formed by printing by silk printing, respectively, or may be formed in a partial area on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. By removing the copper foil, a guide line in the form of a bracket (") (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed, or a resist may be formed on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. When the liquid is applied, a guideline in the form of a bracket ("may be a line, a symbol, or the like) may be formed by not coating a part of the region with the resist liquid. By flat cable LFC is fixed to the surface (mounting surface) 1530x LCD output board 1530 by fixing the seal, it is possible to fix the orientation of the flexible flat cable LFC.

  In the above-described embodiment, the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c covering the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected using the flexible flat cable LFC. However, when a substrate is provided on a movable body that is operated by driving of an electric driving power, a flexible flat cable is used as electric wiring for electrically connecting the substrate and the driving substrate. Is also good. Since a load is applied to the movable body by electric wiring due to the operation of the movable body, the load may be so large that it cannot be ignored. Therefore, by using a flexible flat cable instead of a wiring or a harness as the electric wiring, the load on the movable body due to the operation of the movable body due to the operation of the movable body is suppressed, and the overload of the electric drive source is reduced. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) extend in the left-right direction. The guide line G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and a portion near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ) Is printed by silk printing with a long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction, so that in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, the operator can attach the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC to the lower end side. Multiple flat conductor electrodes to be formed When FCbb was inserted into the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, it was possible to visually determine easily whether the electrode LFCbb was correctly inserted into the connector CN10. However, for example, the standby position (original position) of the movable body is indicated on the substrate near the standby position (original position) of the movable body as an indication of the standby position (original position) of the movable body that is operated by the drive of the electric driving power. A figure such as a line or a symbol shown may be printed by silk printing. In this way, when a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall inspects the pachinko machine, the movable body is manually moved to the standby position (original position) without turning on the power of the pachinko machine. It can be. Further, even when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, it can be used as a determination as to whether or not the movable body has deviated from the standby position (original position). You can also.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the vertical direction is set near the left of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left outside of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guide line G1L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and near the right side of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the right side of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, and at a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. Near the top (that is, flexible A long solid line guide line G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction on the upper side near the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the rat cable LFC, and the lower vicinity of the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 (that is, a lower outer side near the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). Alternatively, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the vertical direction is set near the left of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left outside of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guide line G1L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and near the right side of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the right end of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, but corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. Near the right of the position (ie flexible A guide line G1L of a long solid line extending linearly vertically in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the rat cable LFC, and the left vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. (I.e., a long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction on the left side inside the vicinity of the position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) and the back surface of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. It may be formed on the side. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) extend in the left-right direction. The guide line G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and a portion near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). ), A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Cable LFC body LFCa A long solid line guide line G3U extending linearly in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the lower end side of the position corresponding to the upper end side and the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction may be formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 (on the upper side near the position corresponding to the lower end side of the main body LFCa). In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the vertical direction is set near the left of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left outside of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). The guide line G1L, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and near the right side of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, near the right end of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LCCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ), A long solid line guideline G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction is formed on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600, but corresponds to the left end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. Long extending linearly up and down in position A line guide line G1L and a long solid line guide line G1R extending linearly in the vertical direction at a position corresponding to the right end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are provided on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display 1600. It may be formed. That is, the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guide line G1L are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlap, and the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guide line G1R are aligned in the front-rear direction. The positional relationship is overlapped. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used. In the above-described embodiment, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the upper and lower sides of the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) extend in the left-right direction. The guide line G3U, which is a long solid line extending linearly, and a portion near the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, a position near the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A long solid line guide line G3L extending linearly in the left-right direction is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, but extends linearly in the left-right direction at a position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. Long solid line guideline G3U and flexi And long solid guidelines G3L extending linearly in the lateral direction at a position corresponding to Le flat cable LFC body LFCa the lower side, but may be formed on the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530. That is, the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guide line G3U coincide with each other in the front-rear direction and overlap, and the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC and the guide line G3L coincide with each other in the front-rear direction. The positional relationship is overlapped. In this case, instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the insertion direction may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are connected to the connector 1600ca of the control board 1600c that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display 1600. 243c, the lower end of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower end of the connector 1600ca are arranged in a positional relationship in which the lower end of the connector 1600ca and the lower end of the connector 1600ca coincide with each other in the front-rear direction, as shown in FIG. As a result, the distance between the upper end and the lower end of the reinforcing plate LFCca was the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCba was properly inserted to the back of the connector 1600ca. Further, in a state where the electrodes LFCbb of a plurality of flat conductors formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC are properly inserted to the back of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As shown in FIG. 243 (c), the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower end side of the connector CN10 are arranged in a positional relationship in which the lower end side of the connector CN10 coincides and overlaps in the front-rear direction, so that the upper end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. The distance between the lower end and the lower end was the same as the length (insertion length) where the electrode LFCbb was properly inserted to the back of the connector CN10.

  As described above, in the above-described embodiment, the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is the same as the length (insertion length) in which the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca. When the distance dimension between the upper end side and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca is longer than the length (insertion length) where the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the end of the connector 1600ca, in other words, the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC When the plurality of flat conductor electrodes LFCba formed on the upper end side of the control board 1600c of the control board 1600c covering the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel 1600a in the effect display device 1600 are properly inserted, the reinforcing plate LFCca The lower end side and the lower end side of the connector 1600ca do not match in the front-rear direction and the reinforcing plate LF When the lower edge of the ca is arranged in a positional relationship parallel to and separated from the lower edge of the connector 1600ca, the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower edge of the connector 1600ca are separated, so that the electrode LFCba is separated. It is difficult to determine whether or not the connector 1600ca has been properly inserted to the back using the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca and the lower edge of the connector 1600ca. Similarly, the distance between the upper edge and the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb is the same as the length (insertion length) of the electrode LFCbb normally inserted to the depth of the connector CN10, but the upper edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. When the distance between the electrode LFCbb and the lower end side is longer than the length (insertion length) of the electrode LFCbb normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10, in other words, it is formed on the lower end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC. In a state where the electrodes LFCbb of the plurality of flat conductors are normally inserted to the inside of the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb, the lower edge of the connector CN10, Do not match in the front-back direction, and the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb is arranged in a positional relationship parallel to and separated from the lower end side of the connector CN10. In this case, it is determined whether the electrode LFCbb is properly inserted to the depth of the connector CN10 by separating the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb and the lower edge of the connector CN10 from the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb. , And the lower edge of the connector CN10.

  Therefore, in such a case, in a state where the electrode LFCba is normally inserted to the depth of the connector 1600ca, as a guideline indicating the position of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca, it is on the extension of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca. A solid line linearly extending leftward in the vicinity of the left of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the left outside of the position corresponding to the left end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) ( Instead of the solid line, a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line may be used, or an arrow line indicating the position of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCca may be used. The guideline G1L ′ (this guideline G1L ′ is described above) It may intersect with the guideline G1L, or may be an L-shape integrally formed with the guideline G1L described above. To the right side of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC (that is, the right outside of the position corresponding to the right end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). A guide line G1R ′ (this guideline G1R) of a solid line extending in a shape (a solid line or a two-dot chain line may be used instead of the solid line, or an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCca). 'May intersect with the above-described guideline G1R, or may be an L-shape integrally formed with the above-described guideline G1R.) Is stamped on the back side of the metal back cover 1600b in the effect display device 1600. It is preferred that

  Further, in a state where the electrode LFCbb is normally inserted to the back of the connector CN10, as a guideline indicating the position of the lower edge of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb, the flexible flat cable A solid line extending straight upward (instead of the solid line) above and near the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the LFC (that is, near and above the position corresponding to the upper end side of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC) , A one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line, or an arrow line indicating the position of the lower end side of the reinforcing plate LFCcb.) This guideline G3U ′ intersects with the above-described guideline G3U. Or an L-shape integrally formed with the guideline G3U described above. A rectangular shape having the vertical distance dimension of the drain G3U ′ and the horizontal distance dimension of the guideline G3U described above (the interior may be solid-printed by silk printing) and flexible. A solid line linearly extending downward (in the solid line) below and near the position corresponding to the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flat cable LFC (that is, lower and outer near the position corresponding to the lower end of the main body LFCa of the flexible flat cable LFC). Instead, it may be a one-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line, or may be an arrow line indicating the position of the lower edge of the reinforcing plate LFCcb.) The guideline G3L ′ (the guideline G3L ′ is the guideline G3L described above). And may be an L-shape integrally formed with the above-described guideline G3L. The rectangular shape having the vertical distance dimension of the in G3L ′ and the horizontal distance dimension of the guideline G3L described above (the interior may be solid-printed by silk printing) may be used. It is preferable that the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 be printed by silk printing.

  It should be noted that guidelines G3U ′ and G3L ′ can be obtained by removing a part of the copper foil on the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 instead of the silk printing as in the above-described modification. The guide lines G3U ′ and G3L ′ may be formed by applying a resist solution to the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 by not coating a part of the region with the resist solution. You may. Further, as in the above-described modification, the copper foil in a partial area is removed from the copper foil surface of the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the distance dimension in the vertical direction of the guideline G3L 'and the above-described guideline G3L The guide lines G3U and G3L, and the guide lines G3U ′ and G3L ′ are formed by forming a rectangular shape having the distance dimension in the left-right direction (the copper foil inside the rectangular shape may be removed). You may.

[Connector connection method]
Next, a connection is made to a relay board that relays various wirings to the peripheral control board 1510, a relay board that relays various wirings to the main control board 1310, and a connector provided on the relay board that relays various wirings to the payout control board 633. The wiring and the connector of the harness will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 is a diagram (a) illustrating the arrangement of the connectors on the relay board, and a diagram (b) illustrating a state in which the wiring and harness connectors are normally connected to the connectors on the relay board, and FIG. FIG. 5C is a diagram showing a state in which the wiring and the connector of the harness are not normally connected.

  By the way, when the wiring or the harness connector is not properly inserted into the connector of the relay board, a contact failure may occur between the electrodes of the connector, and the wiring or the harness connector may be inclined with respect to the connector of the relay board. In such a case, the adjacent electrodes of the connector come into contact with each other to cause a short circuit, and various electronic components mounted on the relay board and various control boards electrically connected to the relay board may be damaged.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 245 (a), the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD includes a wiring and a connector SCK on the socket into which the connector PLG on the plug side of the harness KDCBL is inserted. I have. The connector SCK on the socket side is of a right angle type (also referred to as a “side type”), and has a box-like shape in which an opening SCKb is formed on a lower surface SCKaa of a main body SCKa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. Is formed. The plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into the opening SCKb. The lower side surface SCKaa where the opening of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is disposed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The plug-side connector PLG has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction, and has a smaller size than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension as the left-right distance dimension of the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction is formed integrally. As described above, the lower surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed has a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD, and the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board KD. In the present embodiment, the predetermined distance dimension dw1 is the vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG in the present embodiment.

  When the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted to the end of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the entire upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa is connected to the socket-side connector. A state is brought into contact with the lower surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the SCK is formed. In this state, as shown in FIG. 245 (b), the surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug side connector PLG (that is, the main body of the plug side connector PLG). The lower side PLGbb of the PLGb and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are arranged in a positional relationship in which they are aligned in the front-rear direction and overlap.

  In this manner, the socket-side connector SCK is disposed with the vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG as the predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. Therefore, in a state where the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is properly inserted to the end of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the PLGb (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD (that is, the substrate end of the relay substrate KD) are in the front-rear direction. And are arranged in an overlapping positional relationship. Thereby, in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, when the operator inserts the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG normally to the back of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the operator touches the finger of the operator. A surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, a lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG) and a lower end side of the relay board KD. By touching the KDeg (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) with the hand, the plug section PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is placed in the opening of the socket-side connector SCK by the tactile sensation that it is arranged on the same plane. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the SCKb is properly inserted into the back, and it is also possible to determine whether or not the SCKb is properly inserted. When inspecting the pachinko machine, the staff such as a worker also uses the tactile sensation of being placed on the same plane as described above to open the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG to the opening of the socket-side connector SCK. It can be easily determined whether or not the part SCKb is properly inserted to the end. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the efficiency of the checking operation.

  In a state where the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not properly inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK and is inserted obliquely, as shown in FIG. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG of the connector PLG is the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, , And a portion protruding from the end of the relay board KD). Thereby, the worker in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk in the game hall performing the inspection work of the pachinko machine, the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side by the amount of protrusion dSP is connected to the lower end of the relay board KD. By protruding from the side KDeg, the surface of the opposite side of the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is applied to the finger of a staff member such as an actor or a clerk of the game hall (that is, The lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side and the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (that is, the board end of the relay board KD) are touched by the tactile hand that a step is formed. The plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is correctly inserted into the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side. It is possible to easily determine that you are not.

[Modification]
In the embodiment described above, the socket-side connector SCK has a vertical distance dimension (thickness) dcw of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG as the predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. In a state where the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is properly inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the plug portion PLGa is formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG. A surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) and the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD (that is, the substrate end of the relay substrate KD) are front and rear. Although it was arranged so as to match the direction and overlap, the parts of the connector SCK on the socket side The component placement line indicating the position is printed by silk printing with a solid line larger than the outer shape of the socket-side connector SCK, and the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normal to the depth of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK. And the surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG). And the lower side of the component arrangement line indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side may be arranged so as to match. FIG. 246 is a modified example of FIG. 245, and is a diagram (a) showing the arrangement of connectors on the relay board and the component part arrangement lines, and the wiring and harness connectors are normally connected to the connector on the relay board. It is a figure (b) which shows a state, and is a figure (c) which shows a state where a connector of wiring and a harness is not normally connected to a connector of a relay board.

  For example, on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), wiring and a connector SCK on the socket side into which the connector PLG on the plug side of the harness KDCBL is inserted are arranged. The connector SCK on the socket side is formed in a box shape in which an opening SCKb is formed with respect to a lower surface SCKaa of the main body SCKa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction. The plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG is inserted into the opening SCKb. The lower surface SCKaa in which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed has a first distance dimension dw2 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD (for example, the connector SCK on the socket side shown in FIG. KDx, which is about twice as large as the distance dimension arranged with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the KD and has at least 5 mm). Are located in

  The reason why the lower surface SCKaa where the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed is separated from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD by the first distance dimension dw2 will be briefly described. When mounting a component or flowing a board into a solder bath, it is necessary to form a so-called “disposable plate (a range where electronic components cannot be mounted)”. Electronic components cannot be mounted over the entire range (range from each edge of the board to its periphery). In the case where electronic components are mounted without forming the discard plate (that is, when electronic components are mounted in a range from each edge of the board to the periphery thereof), a jig for fixing the board and prevention of board warpage are provided. Although it is necessary to use a jig, even in this case, the area of the substrate sandwiched by the gripping jig and the substrate warpage prevention jig cannot be arranged with the electronic components about 5 mm inward from the edge of the substrate. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the first distance dimension dw2 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD, the socket-side connector SCK shown in FIG. 245 (a) has a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. It is about twice as large as the distance dimension arranged at least, and has at least 5 mm. Thereby, when the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is properly inserted into the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is formed. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is disposed above the lower end side KDeg of the relay substrate KD, so that it is disposed inside the relay substrate KD. Will be done.

  Around the connector SCK on the socket side, a rectangular component arrangement line DSLK indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side is provided with at least a lower side surface SKaaa on which the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side is formed, and a socket. The lower side DSLKeg of the component arrangement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the side has a second distance dimension dw3 and is printed on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD by silk printing. The plug-side connector PLG has a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction, and has a smaller size than the opening SCKb with respect to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb having the same distance dimension as the left-right distance dimension of the main body SCKa. A plug portion PLGa having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction is formed integrally. As described above, the rectangular component arrangement line DSLK indicating the component position of the connector SCK on the socket side and at least the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side are formed around the connector SCK on the socket side. The lower side SCKaa and the lower side DSLKeg of the component placement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side are printed by silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) KDx of the relay board KD with the second distance dimension dw3. In the present embodiment, the second distance dimension dw3 is the distance dimension at which the socket-side connector SCK shown in FIG. 245 (a) is disposed with a predetermined distance dimension dw1 from the lower end side KDeg of the relay board KD. The same distance dimension (that is, the vertical distance dimension (thickness) dc of the main body PLGb of the plug-side connector PLG. Has become).

  When the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is normally inserted to the end of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK, the entire upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa is connected to the socket-side connector. The opening SCKb of the SCK is brought into contact with the lower surface SCKaa of the opening SCKb to be in surface contact therewith. In this state, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), the surface opposite to the upper side surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG (that is, the main body of the plug-side connector PLG). The lower side PLGbb) of the PLGb and the lower side DSLKeg of the component arrangement line DSLK of the connector SCK on the socket side are arranged so as to match. Thereby, a worker in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk in the game hall performing the inspection work of the pachinko machine can connect the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side to the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side. It can be easily visually determined whether or not the insertion has been properly performed to the back. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the efficiency of the checking operation.

  In a state where the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG on the plug side is not correctly inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the connector SCK on the socket side and is inserted obliquely, as shown in FIG. The surface opposite to the upper surface PLGba of the main body PLGb formed integrally with the plug portion PLGa of the connector PLG (that is, the lower surface PLGbb of the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side) is the component arrangement line of the connector SCK on the socket side. An arrangement is made with the amount of protrusion dSP protruding from the lower side of the DSLK. Thus, the worker in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer or a clerk in the game hall performing the inspection work of the pachinko machine can connect the main body PLGb of the connector PLG on the plug side to the part placement line DSLK by the amount of protrusion dSP. By protruding from the lower side DSLKeg, it can be easily visually confirmed that the plug portion PLGa of the plug-side connector PLG is not properly inserted to the depth of the opening SCKb of the socket-side connector SCK.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a main control board for controlling a game progress and a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling an effect performed in accordance with the progress of a game, an image control board for performing a display control of an image display device, etc. A gaming machine in which a substrate is arranged on the back side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2). Some connectors provided on the board have wires that are inserted and removed, and connectors that have one end electrically connected to the wires are inserted and removed. In the connection work, it was necessary to check the electrical connection to the connector, and the check work was time-consuming.

[Wiring groove]
In the present embodiment, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front side in a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, as described above, the payout is provided on the left back surface of the game board 5 with a predetermined distance dimension therebetween. The left back plate portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the base unit 550 is arranged. A ball guiding unit 570 attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e is disposed on the upper left side of the game board 5 and attached to the rear surface of the left back plate 551e at the center of the left rear surface of the game board 5. A payout device 580 is disposed, and an upper full tank path unit 600 attached to the rear surface of the left back plate portion 551e is disposed below the left rear surface of the game board 5.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the left back surface 551e of the game board 5 is spaced apart from the rear left surface of the game board 5 by a predetermined distance, so that the left back surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the back board left portion 551e are formed. A space is formed. In this space, as shown in FIG. 110 and FIG. 113, a plurality of protective covers 1601 made of a non-conductive transparent resin are formed to cover except for the display area of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5. The formed L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a is arranged along the up-down direction of the protective cover body 1601, and various wirings are locked by the L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a.

  The game balls B are polished in the island facility of the game hall, or rubbed against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and emit electromagnetic wave noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. Therefore, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the area where the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 capable of retaining the game ball B are mounted. .

  That is, since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left back plate portion 551e, the front surface of the left back plate portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 are provided. The formed space (hereinafter, referred to as “wiring routing space”) is in an environment that is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  The various electric wires routed to the wiring routing space include, for example, wires for transmitting control signals and wires for supplying various power sources, and a plurality of various wires are mixed in the wiring routing space. Wiring for transmitting control signals is susceptible to noise and is subject to troubles caused by electromagnetic wave noise (for example, normal data is changed to other data and is garbled, or signals are output even though they are not originally output) Signal, etc.), the wiring is susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise, whereas the wiring for supplying various power sources is strong against noise and hardly affected by electromagnetic wave noise.

  Then, among the various wirings routed to the wiring routing space, it is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise that can avoid problems due to electromagnetic noise for wiring that transmits control signals that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise. On the other hand, there is no need to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise in wiring that supplies various power sources that are not easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise.

  Therefore, a configuration in which wiring grooves for routing various wirings are provided on the left rear surface of the game board 5 (hereinafter, referred to as “wiring grooves according to the first and second embodiments”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 247 to 252. I do. FIG. 247 is a partial perspective view of the game board for explaining an area where the wiring groove is to be attached, as viewed from behind (a), and a view showing the state where the wiring groove according to the first embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board (b). 248 is a continuation of FIG. 247, and is a view (c) showing a state in which the wiring groove according to the second embodiment is mounted on the back side of the game board, and FIG. 249 relates to the first embodiment. FIG. 250 is a perspective view showing a state of various wirings when the wiring groove is mounted on the back side of the game board and the game board is viewed from behind, and FIG. FIG. 251 is a perspective view showing a state of various wirings when the game board is viewed from the front in a state where it is mounted on the back side of FIG. 251. FIG. 251 shows a wiring groove according to the second embodiment mounted on the back side of the game board. State of various wiring when the game board is viewed from behind in the state FIG. 252 is a perspective view showing a state in which the wiring grooves according to the second embodiment are mounted on the back side of the game board and various wirings when the game board is viewed from the front. . In FIGS. 247 (b) and 248 (c), only the flexible flat cable is shown as the wiring routed to the wiring grooves for the first and second electromagnetic wave noise countermeasures, and other various wirings are omitted from the viewability of the drawings. . In FIGS. 249 to 252, the game board is omitted from the viewability of the drawings.

[Area to attach wiring groove]
In the above-described embodiment, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front side in a state where the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the left back plate disposed at a predetermined distance away from the rear left rear surface of the game board 5. The space is formed between the left back surface of the game board 5 and the front surface of the left back plate portion 551e by the portion 551e. In this space, various kinds of wirings, which are locked by an L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed on a protective cover body 1601 formed on the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5, are provided with various kinds of wirings. 1601 along the vertical direction. In the wiring grooves according to the first and second embodiments, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), an L-shaped wiring processing piece 1601a formed on the protective cover body 1601 is replaced with a mounting boss hole in the protective cover body 1601. 1601d are formed on the upper side and two on the lower side, respectively.

[Wiring groove according to first embodiment]
The wiring groove according to the first embodiment is a metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity, as shown in FIGS. 247 (b), 249, and 250, and is a thin metal flat plate (plate thickness 2) that is long in the vertical direction. (2.0 mm to 2.6 mm) are bent by pressing to form a groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section, and the left and right walls of the groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section are formed as follows: L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed on the upper and lower sides by bending by press working, respectively. L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed by press working on the upper and lower sides of the left side wall of the groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section, so that a notch 1605c is formed in a portion corresponding to the L-shaped mounting piece 1605b. Are formed, and L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b are formed by press working on the upper and lower sides of the right side wall of the groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section, so that the L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b and Notch portions 1605c are respectively formed in corresponding portions. In addition, a notch hole 1605bb is formed at the tip of the mounting surface 1605ba of the L-shaped mounting piece 1605b by press working.

  The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) via wiring (not shown), and is the same ground (GND) as the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. ). This prevents the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity from being electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided on the game board 5. That is, the electrically floating metal functions as an antenna that picks up noise and may become a noise source. Therefore, the electrically floating metal is not formed on various substrates provided in the game board 5. .

  The notch holes 1605bb formed in the mounting surface 1605ba of the four L-shaped mounting pieces 1605b in the metal wiring groove 1605 are respectively arranged so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601. After the mounting boss holes 1601d are respectively inserted into the notch holes 1605bb (the height dimension (distance in the depth direction) of the mounting boss hole 1601d is the same as or smaller than the plate thickness of the notch hole 1605bb). In a state where a metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed from the notch hole 1605bb to the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the metal wiring groove 1605 have a U-shaped cross section 1605a. A space outside the groove is formed between the bottom outer surface 1605d and the bottom outer surface 1605d. When the game board 5 to which the metal wiring groove 1605 is fixed is mounted on the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1605 a having the U-shaped cross section in the metal wiring groove 1605 pays out the payout base unit 550. By being closed by the front surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the base 551, an in-groove space is formed in the groove portion 1605a of the metal wiring groove 1605 having a U-shaped cross section.

  In other words, the space between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 is formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the metal wiring groove 1605. A space outside the groove between the front surface of the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section and a space inside the groove within the groove portion 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 can be formed. Has become. In other words, the space outside the groove formed between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the front surface of the groove portion 1605a having the U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 is a space that does not face the source of electromagnetic noise. On the other hand, in the metal wiring groove 1605, the space in the groove 1605 a having a U-shaped cross section is a space facing the electromagnetic wave noise generation source side. Note that the height dimension (distance in the depth direction) H1 of the space outside the groove is larger than the height dimension (distance in the depth direction) H2 of the space inside the groove.

  Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left back plate 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the left back plate 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The wiring space, that is, the wiring routing space, is susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but since the metal wiring groove 1605 has conductivity, the electromagnetic wave noise is transferred from the space in the groove to the groove. The metal wiring groove 1605 can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion into the outer space.

  Accordingly, troubles due to the electromagnetic noise can be avoided by routing the wiring for transmitting the control signal that is easily affected by the electromagnetic noise to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, and the influence of the electromagnetic noise can be reduced. Wiring for supplying various powers that are difficult to receive can be routed to the space in the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

  For example, in addition to the effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a sub-effect display device (not shown) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In such a case, a flexible flat cable 1606 (abbreviated to FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The flexible flat cable transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub effect display device (not shown). The flat conductors are arranged in parallel, and the flat conductors are covered with an insulator.)) Are repeatedly bent and folded three times to form a three-dimensional shape. And transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub-effect display device (not shown). Metal wiring grooves to prevent troubles such as the effect image displayed on the sub-effect display device (not shown) being disturbed or an image like a sandstorm when affected by electromagnetic noise. It is led to the space outside the groove formed by 1605. Also, various wirings for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the above-described peripheral control unit 1500, twisted pair cables for transmitting control signals via plus-side wiring and minus-side wiring, and a peripheral control board for the peripheral control unit 1500 Various wirings to which detection signals from various sensors input to 1510 are transmitted have conductors (single or stranded wires) covered with an insulating material. The normal data output by the control board 1510 changes to other data and is garbled and received (input) at the output destination, or output as a signal that is output despite being a signal that is not originally output. Or the detection signals from various sensors were accurately received (input) by the peripheral control board 1510. Routed into the groove outside the space formed by the metallic wiring groove 1605 to prevent troubles. Twisted pair cables and various wires routed in the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 are routed upward or downward along the space outside the groove.

  On the other hand, the wiring that supplies various powers (may include a ground (GND)) such as +24 V, +12 V, and +5 V created by the power supply board 630 described above is a conductor (a single wire or a stranded wire). Is covered with an insulating material, and the voltage of various power supplies (including the ground (GND)) is in a stabilized state. , The fluctuation of the voltage due to this effect is extremely weak and hardly affected by electromagnetic noise, so that the voltage can be led to the space in the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

  Various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are supplied to the game board by various power supply lines electrically connected from the above-described main frame side drawer connector (concave type) via the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5. To the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity so that the various wirings which are supplied to the game board 5 and supply various power from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 are not arranged close to the flexible flat cable 1606. The metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 through cutouts 1605c formed on the right side wall and the left side wall of the groove part 1605a having a U-shaped cross section. The game board 5 is drawn from the upper end of the metal wiring groove 1605 to the upper part of the metal wiring groove 1605. It is routed to a variety of substrates provided.

  In this way, the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity makes the space for passing the wiring (the space for arranging the wiring) a space outside the groove for arranging the wiring for transmitting the control signal which is easily affected by the electromagnetic noise, and the space for the electromagnetic noise. Since it can be configured as a two-story structure divided into a space inside a groove for routing various power sources that are hardly affected by the power supply, the front surface of the left back portion 551 e and the game board 5 Noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in a space (wiring routing space) formed on the left back surface can be improved.

  Here, the flexible flat cable 1606 will be described. In the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data (control signal) to a sub effect display device (not shown) are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator. The liquid crystal of the peripheral control unit 1500 has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. It is formed by repeating a mountain fold and a valley fold a plurality of times from the output board 1530 toward a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5 to be three-dimensionally formed. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba having a predetermined length are barely disposed on the back side of the main body 1606a on the upper end side, which is the left side of the main body 1606a that is long in the direction. On the other hand, a reinforcing plate 1606ca for reinforcing a rectangular electrode 1606ba having a predetermined thickness and having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of a plurality of stripped flat conductor electrodes 1606ba is formed on the surface side of the substrate 06a. On the lower end side of the main body 1606a, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb are barely arranged on the back side of the main body 1606a with a predetermined length, and have a predetermined thickness on the front side of the main body 1606a. A reinforcing plate 1606cb for reinforcing the electrode 1606bb having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the exposed plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb is formed.

  A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1606a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1606bb formed at the lower end of the main body 1606a are provided with a metal back (not shown) that covers the upper rear surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) mounted below the game board 5. It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the lid.

  A capacitor called a decoupling capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown) is provided between a power supply line and a substrate ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. Is mounted, and by reducing the power supply impedance, the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, a power supply line and a board ground (GND) of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers an upper rear surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1606 is electrically connected. Between them, a capacitor called a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor (not shown) for power supply is mounted, and by reducing the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is reduced. Is improving.

  The flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 described above. It is drawn around the space formed by the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 passing between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the display area except for the display area, and guided downward along the space outside the groove. Then, it is routed into the substrate holder 1200 attached to the back of the game board 5 as it is, and is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover that covers the upper rear surface of the liquid crystal panel in the sub effect display device (not shown). Is done.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display of the game board 5 as described above. The protective cover body 1601 covers the display area of the device 1600 except for the display area, and is drawn to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity. Further, in the effect display device 1600, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is covered with the metal back cover, as described above. Thus, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 extends between the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display 1600. It can function as a shield member that can prevent electromagnetic wave noise that enters the flexible flat cable 1606 in the area where the cable passes.

[Modification]
The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground as the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. (GND). Alternatively or additionally, the bottom of the groove 1605a of the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity is pressed by an L-shaped connecting piece toward the protective cover body 1601. In addition, by providing a connection piece opening in the protective cover body 1601, the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece is made to pass through the connection piece opening provided in the protection cover body 1601 in the protection cover body 1601. The L-shaped connection piece may be provided with a conductive elastic member by connecting the L-shaped connection piece with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 and the surface of the conductive elastic member (attached to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece) in the protection cover body 1601 through the connection piece opening provided in the protection cover body 1601. The surface opposite to the surface may be abutted and electrically connected (in other words, the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece is connected to the protection cover body 1601 through the connection piece opening provided in the protection cover body 1601. (It may be in an electrically contacted state with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 in the 1601 via the conductive elastic member). The conductive elastic member is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity), and is attached to the conductive covering portion, a rectangular foam as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion, and the conductive covering portion. And a conductive adhesive tape. Examples of the covering portion include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film. Examples of the foam include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. Examples of the conductive pressure-sensitive adhesive tape include a conductive double-sided pressure-sensitive adhesive tape using an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive. The surface of the conductive pressure-sensitive adhesive tape is protected by peel paper until used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion is attached (bonded) to the connection surface of the L-shaped connection piece.

  Further, the wiring for transmitting the control signal output from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner when the gaming board 5 is viewed from the front is provided outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605. It may be arranged to be routed to the space and to be routed upward along the space outside the groove. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance of the wiring to the function display unit 1400 against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  The metal wiring groove 1605 is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground as the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. (GND), even if the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity electrically floats with respect to various substrates provided in the game board 5, it functions as an antenna for picking up noise and functions as a noise source. When there is no possibility that the electromagnetic wave noise from the noise source is negligible, the metal wiring groove 1605 is not electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown). Alternatively, it may be in an electrically floating state.

  The conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate that is long in the vertical direction, but has a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605 having the same shape as the metal wiring groove 1605. '. In this case, conductive plating (for example, noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating) is applied to the entire front and back surfaces of the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ′, and the conductive plated portion is provided. Is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown), and is the same ground (GND) as the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of various substrates provided in the game board 5. Even with such a configuration, the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ′ plated with the conductive plating has the same effect as the above-described conductive metal wiring groove 1605 (that is, the electromagnetic noise is reduced). (It can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion from the space inside the groove toward the space outside the groove.) It should be noted that even when the conductive plating resin-made wiring groove 1605 'having a conductive plating is electrically floating with respect to various substrates provided in the game board 5, it functions as an antenna for picking up noise. When there is no risk of becoming a noise source, or when the electromagnetic noise from the noise source is negligibly small, the conductive plating is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) via a wiring (not shown). Instead, it may be in an electrically floating state.

  The conductive metal wiring groove 1605 is formed by pressing a thin metal flat plate that is long in the vertical direction, but has a conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ′ having the same shape as the metal wiring groove 1605. '. Even with this configuration, the conductive resin wiring groove 1605 ″ has the same effect as the above-described conductive metal wiring groove 1605 (that is, the electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted from the space inside the groove to the space outside the groove). (Which can function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion toward the outside).)

  In the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but between the flat conductors, a flat conductor electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) is provided. May be arranged so that flat conductors for transmitting control signals and flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance of the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  In the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel. However, the flexible flat cable 1606 transmits a control signal that is particularly susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise (that is, easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise). A flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter, referred to as a “flat conductor weak to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise”) is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) so as to be adjacent to the flat conductor weak to the effect of electromagnetic wave noise. A flat conductor that is electrically connected is arranged so that the flat conductor that is weakly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise is sandwiched and arranged by the flat conductor that is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). You may. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to the flat conductor that is weakly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

  Also, in the flexible flat cable 1606, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting control signals are arranged in parallel, but in addition to the flat conductors for transmitting control signals, as these plurality of flat conductors, This is a case in which a flat conductor electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power sources are included, and the substrate ground (GND) and the power source are arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, when the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the resistance rises sharply and the overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor suppresses the current. An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit having a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. The polyswitch has a relationship between element resistance and element temperature). The resistance value rapidly increases from a specific temperature, and the main body generates heat, and the heat reduces the conductivity, interrupts the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns.) Therefore, it is preferable that priority is given to what is supplied. This is because, as described above, the flexible flat cable 1606 has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. The over-current protection circuit and the over-current protection circuit can prevent the short circuit of the flexible flat cable 1606 from being short-circuited when an over-current flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, thereby ensuring safety. This is because it can be avoided.

[Wiring groove according to second embodiment]
The wiring groove according to the second embodiment is a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 as shown in FIGS. 248 (c), 251 and 252, and has a vertically long U-shaped cross section. A groove 1608a is formed, and mounting pieces 1608b projecting upward and downward outward are formed on the left and right walls of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section, and are integrally molded. The mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b is formed in the same plane as the bottom outer surface 1608c of the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section, and a mounting hole 1608bb is formed at the tip of the mounting piece 1608b. Have been. When viewed from the opening side, the groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section is provided with a wiring insertion notch 1608d substantially at the center of the left side wall. The resin wiring groove 1608 may be molded of a transparent non-conductive resin, or may be molded of a colored non-conductive resin such as black. The thickness of the resin wiring groove 1608 having a U-shaped cross section is 2.0 mm to 2.6 mm, and the height of the mounting piece 1608 b of the resin wiring groove 1608 is 4.0 mm to 5.0 mm. is there.

  The mounting holes 1608bb formed in the mounting surface 1608ba of the four mounting pieces 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 are respectively arranged so as to correspond to the four mounting boss holes 1601d formed in the protective cover body 1601, and are formed in the mounting holes 1608bb. After each of the mounting boss holes 1601d is inserted (the height dimension (the depth dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting boss hole 1601d) is smaller than the height dimension (the depth dimension in the depth direction) of the mounting piece 1608b. In a state in which a metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed from the mounting hole 1608bb to the mounting boss hole 1601d and fixed, a groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608. The bottom outer surface 1608c of the protective cover 1601 is in contact with the bottom outer surface 1608c. A mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b is state abuts. When the game board 5 to which the resin wiring groove 1608 is fixed is mounted on the main body frame 4, the opening side of the groove portion 1608 a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 pays out the payout base unit 550. By being closed by the front surface of the left back portion 551e of the base 551, a space in the groove is formed in the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608.

  The height (distance in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1608ba of the mounting piece 1608b in the resin wiring groove 1608 to the opening side surface of the left and right walls of the groove 1608a, and the L-shape in the metal wiring groove 1605 The height dimension (distance in the depth direction) from the mounting surface 1605ba of the mounting piece 1605b to the opening side surface of the left side wall and the right side wall of the groove 1608a is the same dimension (distance in the depth direction). It has the same height. The height (distance in the depth direction) H3 of the space in the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 is determined by the outside space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the above-described first embodiment. (A distance dimension in the depth direction) H1 and a height dimension (a distance dimension in the depth direction) H2 of a space in the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 in the wiring groove according to the above-described first embodiment. , Plus the length.

  Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left back plate 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the left back plate 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The wiring space, that is, the wiring routing space is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, and the resin wiring groove 1608 is non-conductive. The resin wiring groove 1608 cannot function as a shield member that can prevent intrusion toward the space in the groove formed by the above.

  For example, in addition to the effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a sub-effect display device (not shown) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image is attached to the lower side of the game board 5. In such a case, the flexible flat cable 1609 (abbreviated to FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The flexible flat cable transmits drawing data (control signal) to a sub effect display device (not shown). The plurality of flat conductors are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator.)) Is repeatedly bent and folded three times to form a three-dimensional shape. And a flexible flat cable in the wiring groove according to the first embodiment described above. It has the same shape as the cable 1606, and is an important wiring for transmitting drawing data (control signal) for a sub-effect display device (not shown). When affected by electromagnetic noise, it is displayed on the sub-effect display device (not shown). The resulting effect image is distorted or a problem such as an image like a sandstorm occurs.

  Therefore, among the flat surfaces of the flexible flat cable 1609, a shield wire 1610 braided in a net shape is provided on one entire surface, and a special structure of covering the shield wire 1610 with a transparent resin is adopted. The shield wire 1610 is electrically connected to a ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the board to which the upper end of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected, and is connected to a ground (board) of the board to which the lower end of the flexible flat cable 1609 is connected. Ground (GND)).

  When the flexible flat cable 1609 is bent and formed three-dimensionally by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times, a wire insertion notch formed in a groove portion 1608 a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. It is drawn to the space in the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 through the portion 1608d, and extends from the lower end of the space in the groove by a predetermined distance from the bent portion toward the lower end of the space in the groove. In the portion extending to the portion, the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided is formed so as to face the opening side of the groove portion 1608a. That is, of the inner space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608 and the surface on which the shielded wire 1610 is provided on the flexible flat cable 1609. A space formed between the flexible flat cables 1609 (that is, a small space where the flexible flat cable 1609 is disposed) does not face the electromagnetic wave noise generation source side. The space formed from the surface on which is provided to the opening side of the groove 1608a is a space facing the electromagnetic wave noise generation source side.

  Since the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 are attached to the back surface of the left back plate 551e, they are formed on the front surface of the left back plate 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5. The space, that is, the wiring routing space, is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, but the flexible flat cable 1609 faces the surface on which the shield wire 1610 is provided in a direction in which the electromagnetic wave noise enters. Are formed so as to oppose to each other.

  In addition, wiring for supplying various powers (may include a ground (GND)) of +24 V, +12 V, and +5 V created by the above-described power supply board 630 includes a conductor (single wire or stranded wire) around the conductor. It is covered with an insulating material, and the voltage of various power supplies (may include ground (GND)) is in a stabilized state. Even if it is received, the fluctuation of the voltage due to this effect is extremely weak, and it is hard to be affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

  Since the flexible flat cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various power sources coexist in the space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 without the shield wire 1610 is removed. A groove having a U-shaped cross-section in the resin wiring groove 1608 is directed toward the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove 1608a having the U-shaped cross-section in the resin wiring groove 1608 and the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610. 1608a toward the opening side. Then, various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shield wire 1610 is provided.

  Various power supplies from the power supply board 630 are supplied to the game board by various power supply lines that are electrically connected to the drawer connector (concave type) on the main body frame side via the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5. 5, various wirings for supplying various power from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 are arranged along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610. The groove in the groove formed by the resin wiring groove 1608 from below the groove portion 1608 a having a U-shaped cross section of the resin wiring groove 1608 while being drawn toward the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608. And is drawn upward along the space in the groove to draw from the upper end of the resin wiring groove 1608 to various substrates provided in the game board 5. It is wound.

  In this way, the wiring groove 1608 made of non-conductive resin shields the space through which the wiring is passed (the space where the wiring is routed) from the flexible flat cable 1609 which is a wiring for transmitting a control signal which is easily affected by electromagnetic noise. The wire 1610 is provided, and the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 on which the shield wire 1610 is not provided is directed to the bottom inner surface 1608e of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608, and the shield wire 1610 is provided. A space formed between the front surface of the left back plate portion 551e and the left back surface of the game board 5 by directing the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 toward the opening side of the groove portion 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in the resin wiring groove 1608. Electrostatic discharge from the game ball B in the (wiring routing space) It is possible to improve noise resistance due for electromagnetic noise.

  Also, by arranging various power supplies from the power supply board 630 along the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shielded wire 1610, a flexible flat wire for transmitting a control signal which is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise is provided. The cable 1609 and various wirings for supplying various powers which are hardly affected by electromagnetic noise can be coexistently arranged in the space formed by the resin wiring groove 1608.

  The wiring groove 1608 having non-conductivity, which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment, is different from the metal wiring groove 1605 having conductivity, which is the wiring groove according to the second embodiment. Various wirings for transmitting various control signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, twisted pair cables for transmitting control signals by plus side wiring and minus side wiring, and input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 Various wirings to which detection signals from various sensors are transmitted cannot be routed using the resin wiring groove 1608 itself.

  Here, the flexible flat cable 1609 will be described. In the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting drawing data (control signals) to a sub-effect display device (not shown) are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of flat conductors are covered with an insulator. And has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring. Among the flat surfaces of the flat cable 1609, a shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape is provided on one entire surface, and the shield wire 1610 is covered with a transparent resin so as to cover the shield wire 1610. The flexible flat cable 1609 is bent by repeating a mountain fold and a valley fold a plurality of times from the liquid crystal output board 1530 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5 to be three-dimensional. A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba having a predetermined length are exposed on the back side of the main body 1609a on the left upper end side of the main body 1609a having a predetermined width and extending in the left-right direction and having a predetermined width. And a reinforcing plate 1609ca for reinforcing an electrode 1609ba having a predetermined thickness and a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the stripped flat conductor electrodes 1609ba is formed on the surface side of the main body 1609a. On the other hand, the lower end of the main body 1609a has a plurality of flat conductors on the back side of the main body 1609a. An electrode 1609bb is disposed barely having a predetermined length, and has a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body 1609a, and has a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the plurality of stripped flat conductor electrodes 1609bb. A reinforcing plate 1609cb is formed for reinforcing.

  The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and are not shown. While the shield line 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the connector, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers an upper surface of a back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) of a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5; The shield line 161 is connected via a connector of a control board provided on the metal back cover (not shown). There ground control board (substrate ground (GND)) to be electrically connected.

  A capacitor called a decoupling capacitor such as a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown) is provided between the power supply line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected and the board ground (GND). Is mounted, and by reducing the power supply impedance, the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. In addition, a power supply line and a board ground (GND) of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers an upper surface of a back surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) to which the flexible flat cable 1609 is electrically connected. Between them, a capacitor called a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor (not shown) for power supply is mounted, and by reducing the power supply impedance, noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is reduced. Is improving.

  The flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 described above. Through a wiring insertion notch 1608d formed in a groove 1608a having a U-shaped cross section in a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 passing between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 and covering the display area except for the display area. To the space inside the groove, guided downward along the space inside the groove, and directly drawn into the substrate holder 1200 attached to the back surface of the game board 5 to return the back surface of the liquid crystal panel in the sub effect display device (not shown). It is electrically connected to the connector of the control board provided on the metal back cover that covers the upper side.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 1609 electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display of the game board 5. A wiring insertion notch formed in a groove 1608 a having a U-shaped cross section in a non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 passing therethrough between the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering except for the display area of the device 1600. It can be drawn around to the space in the groove formed in the resin wiring groove 1608 via 1608d. Further, in the effect display device 1600, the entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is covered with the metal back cover, as described above. Thus, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 extends between the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover 1601 that covers the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display 1600. It can function as a shield member that can prevent electromagnetic wave noise that enters the flexible flat cable 1609 in a region where the cable passes.

[Modification]
Note that a flexible flat cable 1609 provided with a shield wire 1610 braided in a net shape on one entire surface is formed by repeating a belt-shaped main body 1606a having a predetermined width, which is long in the left-right direction, by repeating mountain folds and valley folds a plurality of times. However, the shield wire 1610 woven in a net shape may be provided on one surface of a short flexible flat cable 1609 ′ in which the band-shaped main body 1606 a is folded once or mountain-folded once. For example, when two boards are arranged in an environment affected by electromagnetic wave noise, a short flexible flat cable 1609 ′ provided with a shield wire 1610 braided in a mesh between one of the two boards between the two boards. By electrically connecting, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. In addition, the upper end of the flexible flat cable 1609 'is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of one of the two substrates, and the lower end of the flexible flat cable 1609' is connected to the shield line 1610. The two substrates are electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the other substrate.

  Further, the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 passes between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover member 1601 covering the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600. In such a region, it can function as a shield member that can prevent electromagnetic wave noise that enters the flexible flat cable 1609. In this region, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 is formed so as to face the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, by combining the flat fold and the valley fold of the flexible flat cable 1609 before and after this area, the surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 where the shield wire 1610 is not provided is combined with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 in this area. The flexible flat cable 1609 provided with the shield wire 1610 may be formed so as to face the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 while facing the same. In this way, in a region passing between the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the back surface of the protective cover body 1601 covering the display panel of the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 except for the display region, the shield line 1610 is formed. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 that is not provided can prevent electromagnetic wave noise that intrudes toward the flexible flat cable 1609 by a shield, which is a metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and is provided with a shield wire 1610. The surface of the flexible flat cable 1609 can be shielded by a shield wire 1610 to prevent electromagnetic noise entering the flexible flat cable 1609.

  Also, the protective cover 1601 that covers the display panel 1600 of the game board 5 except for the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the non-conductive resin wiring groove 1608 are formed separately. If it is made of non-conductive resin, the protective cover body 1601 and the resin wiring groove 1608 may be integrally molded.

  The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba formed on the upper end side of the main body 1609a of the flexible flat cable 1609 are electrically connected to a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 described above. In addition, a shield line 1610 is electrically connected to a ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a connector (not shown), and a plurality of shield wires 1610 are formed on the lower end side of the main body 1609a of the flexible flat cable 1609. The flat conductor electrode 1609bb is electrically connected to a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) that covers an upper surface of a back side of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) in a sub effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. Connected and this metal back cover not shown Shielded line 1610 through the control board connector provided has been electrically connected to the ground of the control substrate (board ground (GND)). Therefore, for example, among the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 1609ba arranged in parallel, the flat conductors arranged at both ends may be electrically connected to the shield line 1610, respectively. Even with this configuration, the shield line 1610 is electrically connected to the ground (substrate ground (GND)) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a connector (not shown) provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Of the control board via a connector of a control board provided on a metal back cover (not shown) which covers the upper rear surface of a liquid crystal panel (not shown) of a sub-effect display device (not shown) attached to the lower side of the game board 5. It can be electrically connected to a ground (substrate ground (GND)).

  In the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel. May be arranged so that flat conductors for transmitting control signals and flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance of the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  In the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel. However, the flexible flat cable 1609 transmits a control signal that is particularly susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise (that is, susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise). A flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter, referred to as a “flat conductor weak to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise”) is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) so as to be adjacent to the flat conductor weak to the effect of electromagnetic wave noise. A flat conductor that is electrically connected is arranged so that the flat conductor that is weakly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise is sandwiched and arranged by the flat conductor that is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). You may. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to the flat conductor that is weakly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

  Further, in the flexible flat cable 1609, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel. However, in addition to the flat conductor for transmitting a control signal, as the plurality of flat conductors, In a case where a flat conductor electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power sources are included, the substrate ground (GND) and the power source are arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, when the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the resistance suddenly rises and the overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor suppresses the current. An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit having a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. The polyswitch has a relationship between element resistance and element temperature). The resistance value rapidly increases from a specific temperature, and the main body generates heat, and the heat reduces the conductivity, interrupts the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns.) Therefore, it is preferable that priority is given to what is supplied. This is because the flexible flat cable 1609 has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring as described above. The over-current protection circuit and the over-current protection circuit can prevent the short circuit of the flexible flat cable 1609 when an over-current flows through the flat conductor that supplies power, thereby ensuring safety and preventing damage. This is because it can be avoided.

[Other decoration devices]
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the back effect unit 3400 is provided in the upper part of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5. Here, a case where a light emitting effect unit 5000 is provided instead of the back upper effect unit 3400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 253 to 259. FIG. 253 is a perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as viewed from the front, FIG. 254 is a perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as viewed from behind, and FIG. 255 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 256 is an exploded perspective view of the light emitting effect unit as viewed from behind, in which the light emitting effect unit is disassembled, FIG. 257 is a front view showing an arrangement relationship between the LED bear chip and the light guide plate, and FIG. FIG. 259 is a front view showing the diffused sheet, and FIG. 259 is a view (a) showing a state in which the flexible flat cable is electrically connected to the connector of the LED board, and is an enlarged view of a Z portion shown in FIG. FIG. 2B is a view showing a state in which insertion of the flexible flat cable into the connector of the LED board is normal, and FIG. 2B is an enlarged view of the Z section shown in FIG. A diagram (c) showing the state not normal for insertion is insufficient to ED board connectors. 253 to 256 and FIG. 259 show only the lower end side of the flexible flat cable and omit other parts for easy viewing of the drawings.

[Light emitting unit]
As shown in FIGS. 253 to 258, the light emitting effect unit 5000 includes a light emitting effect main body 5010 having a circular shape, a T-shaped main body mounting portion 5020 for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to an upper portion in the back box 3010, A control signal output from the effect drive board 1720 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is guided along the back side of the main body mounting portion 5020 into the light emitting effect main body 5010 and emits light. A flexible flat cable 5030 (an abbreviation of FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) which is transmitted to the main body 5010. The flexible flat cable is formed by repeating a mountain fold and a valley fold a plurality of times and is bent and formed three-dimensionally. The conductor is covered with an insulator.)). Here, first, the light emitting effect main body 5010 will be described, and a method of assembling the main body mounting portion 5020, the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emitting effect unit 5000 will be sequentially described.

[Lighting effect body]
The light emitting effect main body 5010 is processed from a decorative body 5040 molded of a circular transparent resin, and a thin circular transparent resin plate housed inside the decorative body 5040 and having a cutout at an upper part. A diffusion sheet 5050 to be molded and a conductive sheet molded from a transparent resin having a circular shape having a cutout in a part of the upper side while being accommodated inside the decorative body 5040 while being arranged on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050. A light plate 5060, an LED substrate 5070 having a circular shape having a cutout in a part of an upper side and being accommodated inside the decoration body 5040 while being arranged on the back surface 5060 y side of the light guide plate 5060, and a rear opening of the decoration body 5040. And a lid 5080 molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape and having a cutout at an upper part thereof.

[Decorative body]
At the center of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 molded of a transparent resin having a circular shape, a convex portion 5040a conforming to the outer shape of the character projects forward, and the character is printed on the entire surface of the convex portion 5040a. I have. Of the surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040, the outer periphery of the convex part 5040a excluding the entire surface on which the character of the convex part 5040a is printed, and the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 excluding the convex part 5040a include the world view of the character. Is printed on a background pattern (not shown), which is designed to show. Although the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is printed with a character or a background pattern, the light emission mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040 is changed from the front of the light emitting effect unit 5000 (that is, the pachinko machine 1) according to the light emission of the LED board 5070. (A player sitting in front of the decorative body 5040) can easily recognize the change in the light emission mode of the entire surface 5040x of the decorative body 5040.

  On the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040, a member accommodating concave portion 5040b that has a circular shape having a cutout in an upper part and that accommodates the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 is formed on the back surface 5040y side. ing. A reverse placement preventing piece for preventing the front and back surfaces of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED substrate 5070 from being turned upside down is provided on the upper left side of the member accommodating recess 5040b when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from behind. 5040c is formed to protrude from the inner surface of the bottom of the member accommodating recess 5040b toward the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension. Further, a lid body that regulates the positions of the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED board 5070 and closes the member accommodating recess 5040b is provided on the upper right, left, and lower sides of the member accommodating recess 5040b when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from behind. A mounting boss hole 5040d for fixing 5080 to the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 protrudes from the inner surface of the bottom of the member accommodating recess 5040b toward the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 with a length of the first distance dimension, and is formed. (A total of three mounting boss holes 5040d). In addition, mounting boss holes 5040e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are provided on the left and right sides on the back surface 5040y side of the decorative body 5040 when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from behind, and the second distance dimension from the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 toward the rear. (A total of two mounting boss holes 5040e).

[LED board]
The LED board 5070 having a circular shape with a cutout on the upper part has a cutout 5070a formed at a position corresponding to the reverse placement preventing piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040, and the decorative body 5040. Through holes 5070b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b.

  A plurality of LED bare chips are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. The LED bare chip (also referred to as “LED element”) is enclosed in a package such as a surface mount type, a chip-on-board type, and a shell type, and is an extremely small electronic component. In the present embodiment, instead of mounting the LED package in which the LED bare chip is sealed on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the LED bare chip sealed in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. A configuration that directly mounts on the device is adopted.

  As a method of electrically connecting the electrode of the LED bare chip to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, wire bonding, flip chip bonding, and the like can be mentioned. In the present embodiment, flip chip bonding is used. It was adopted. In this flip chip bonding, the electrodes of the LED bare chip are not electrically connected to the predetermined electrodes on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 by using wires as in the wire bonding. Is formed and electrically connected to a predetermined electrode on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. This connection portion is reinforced with solder, resin, or the like.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, five rows of LED rows in which a predetermined number of LED bear chips 5075 are arranged in a row at a predetermined distance are provided in the vertical direction, and the first row 5070c1 from the bottom. In the fifth row 5070c5 from the bottom, six LED bear chips 5075 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction, and in the second row 5070c2 from the bottom and the fourth row 5070c4 from the bottom, LED bear chips 5075 are lined up in the horizontal direction. In the third row 5070c3 from the bottom, eight LED bare chips 5075 are arranged in a line in the left-right direction.

  On the center line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, an LED row of the third stage 5070c3 is arranged. A fourth stage which passes through a substantially middle point between the center line and the upper side of the LED substrate 5070 and is located on an intermediate line parallel to the center line and the upper side of the LED substrate 5070 and which is one level higher than the LED row of the third stage 5070c3. 5070c4 LED rows are arranged. Then, on an intermediate line that passes through substantially the midpoint of the center line and a straight line that is parallel to the center line and passes through the lowermost point of the circumference of the LED board 5070 and that is parallel to the center line and the straight line described above, respectively. The LED row of the second stage 5070c2, which is one lower than the LED row of the third stage 5070c3, is arranged. On the vertical straight line passing through the midpoint of the distance between the first LED bear chip 5075 and the second LED bear chip 5075 from the left in the third row 5070c3, one of the fourth row 5070c4 LED rows The second LED bear chip 5075 is arranged, the first LED bear chip 5075 of the second row 5070c2 LED row is arranged, and the eight LED bear chips 5075 of the third row 5070c3 LED row and the fourth row are arranged. The seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of 5070c4 are arranged so as not to be aligned in the vertical direction, and the eight LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the third row 5070c3 and the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the second row 5070c2 are arranged. So that two LED bare chips 5075 do not line up and down It is location. Note that seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fourth row 5070c4 and seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the second row 5070c2 are vertically arranged in a row.

  On the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070, the fifth row 5070c5 LED row which is one upper side from the fourth row 5070c4 LED row on the upper side of the LED board 5070 and below the two through holes 5070b. Are arranged, and the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 which is one lower from the LED row of the second row 5070c2 is arranged above the one through hole 5070b on the lowermost point side of the circumference of the LED board 5070. Have been. A vertical straight line passing through the midpoint of the distance between the first LED bear chip 5075 and the second LED bear chip 5075 from the left in the fourth row 5070c4 LED and one from the left in the second row 5070c2 LED row The straight line in the vertical direction passing through the midpoint of the distance dimension between the second LED bear chip 5075 and the second LED bear chip 5075 coincides, and the first LED from the left in the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 on this straight line A bare chip 5075 is arranged, and a first LED bear chip 5075 from the left in the first row 5070c1 LED row is arranged. Seven LED bear chips 5075 and a fifth row 5070c5 of the fourth row 5070c3 LED row are arranged. So that the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row do not line up and down In addition, the seven LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the second stage 5070c2 and the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 are displaced so as not to be aligned in the vertical direction. . Note that, on the straight line described above, the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the fifth row 5070c5 LED row and the first LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the first row 5070c1 LED row are arranged. Furthermore, since the second LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the LED row of the third stage 5070c3 is also arranged, the six LED bare chips 5075 of the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 and the LED row of the third row 5070c3 are arranged. Among them, the second to seventh LED bear chips 5075 and the six LED bear chips 5075 in the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 are arranged in a line in the up-down direction.

  On the other hand, on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, a connector 5070d that transmits a control signal for controlling a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is mounted. The lower end of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into the connector 5070d, and is electrically connected. The upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into a connector (not shown) of the effect driving board 1720 and is electrically connected. The control signal output from the effect driving board 1720 is transmitted to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030, and the light emitting mode of the LED bare chip 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 is controlled. Is done.

  Note that a green resist solution is applied to the surface (mounting surface) 5070x and the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 except for various lands and through holes. The entire surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is printed by white silk printing except for various lands and through holes. That is, while the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white, the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is green, and the colors of the front surface and the back surface are the same even though the same substrate is used. Is different. The reason why the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white is that the light emitted from the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is refracted by another member. When returning to the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the function as a reflection sheet capable of efficiently refracting the returned light forward is provided by the surface of the LED substrate 5070 (mounting surface). 5070x.

[Modification]
The LED board 5070 drives a plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070 by inputting a control signal from the effect driving board 1720 via the flexible flat cable 5030. I was That is, in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect drive board 1720 is controlled by an electronic component for LED control (eg, an IC such as an LED driver and a gradation control driver) mounted on itself. The signal was output to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030. The electronic components for LED control mounted on the effect drive board 1720 may be mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. Since the connector 5070d is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, any electronic component for LED control having a height dimension (distance in the depth direction) substantially equal to the height of the connector 5070d is used. Even if this electronic component for LED control is mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, it can be used without changing the dimensions of the decorative body 5040 and the lid 5080. This can contribute to downsizing of the effect drive board 1720. Further, with this configuration, a control signal is output from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to the LED board 5070 via the flexible flat cable 5030 to drive the LED bare chip 5075. You can also.

  In addition, although flip chip bonding is employed as a method of electrically connecting the electrodes of the LED bare chip to predetermined electrodes on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, wire bonding may be employed instead of flip chip bonding. Good.

[Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 5060 formed of a transparent resin having a circular shape and having a cutout at an upper part has a cutout 5060a formed at a position corresponding to the reverse placement preventing piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. At the same time, through holes 5060b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040.

  The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of abutting on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. On the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, a cutout is provided in a part of the upper side so as to cover the LED bear chip 5075 at a position corresponding to the plurality of LED bear chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. It has a cylindrical shape (hereinafter, referred to as a “semi-cylindrical shape”), and the axis of the semi-cylindrical shape is slightly inclined downward with respect to the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, so that the curved surface of the semi-cylindrical shape is inclined. Each of the incident concave portions 5060c is formed. The bottom of the incident concave portion 5060c does not penetrate the surface 5070x of the light guide plate 5060, but remains in the light guide plate 5060. When the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state where the back surface 5060y contacts the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the LED bear chip 5075 is arranged on the axis of the semi-cylinder. At the same time, the LED bare chip 5075 is sealed in the incident recess 5060c.

  On the back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, a flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape is formed from the opening side of the incident concave portion 5060c in a section from the center point through which the axis of the semi-cylinder passes through to a concentric position separated by a predetermined distance dimension. A notch is formed in an upper part of the cylindrical flat surface 5060d, and the cylindrical flat surface 5060d and the opening side of the incident concave portion 5060c are similar.

  When the rear surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 crosses a section formed by a flat surface 5060d having a cylindrical shape from a center point where the axis of the semi-cylinder passes, a prism pattern having a substantially triangular cross-section is formed concentrically, A prism portion 5060e is formed in which the distance between the prism patterns having a substantially triangular cross section increases as the distance from the center point through which the axis of the semicircular column passes. The distance dimension in the left-right direction of the prism part 5060e is a linear distance dimension (hereinafter, referred to as a “block reference distance in the left-right direction”) connecting the center points of adjacent LED bear chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. Dimensions ”).) On the other hand, the vertical dimension of the prism part 5060e is one step below the step of the LED bear chip 5075 sealed in the main concave part 5060c from the notch formed in the upper part of the cylindrical flat surface 5060d. The distance dimension to the last-stage prism pattern passing through the center point of the LED bear chip closest to the next step (hereinafter, may be referred to as “vertical block reference distance dimension” in some cases).

  On the rear surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060, the incident concave portion 5060c, the flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape, and the prism portion 5060e are provided at positions corresponding to the LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. Are formed, and each has a prism surface. The distance dimension in the left-right direction of the single prism block 5060f is the block reference distance dimension in the left-right direction, and the vertical dimension of the single prism block 5060f is the block reference distance dimension in the vertical direction. Among the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x, those closest to the left and right outer peripheral portions of the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 (the LED row of the first stage 5070c1 to the LED of the fifth stage 5070c5) The first LED bare chip 5075 from the left of each of the rows, the first row 5070c1 and the sixth row of the LED bare chips 5075 from the left among the LED rows of the 5th section 5075c2, the second row 5070c2, and the left of the fourth row 5070c4 7th LED bare chip 5075 from the third stage For the eighth LED bare chip 5075 from the left in the ED row, the distance dimension in the left-right direction of the single prism block 5060f does not become the block reference distance dimension in the left-right direction, and the last-stage prism pattern is formed on the back surface of the light guide plate 5060. It is formed to extend to the outer peripheral end of 5060y.

  On the other hand, on the front surface 5060x side of the light guide plate 5060, a plurality of single prism blocks 5060f are formed on the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, but the surface is flat without any processing. ing.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is not mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, but the LED bare chip encapsulated in the LED package is mounted on the surface of the LED substrate 5070. (Mounting surface) A configuration for directly mounting on 5070x was adopted. As a result, the thickness of the light guide plate is compared with the thickness of the light guide plate when the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, such as a surface mount type, a chip-on-board type, and a shell type. Can be reduced by the depth distance dimension of the package, and the size of the depth distance dimension of the light emitting effect main body 5010 of the light emitting effect unit 5000 is ensured to be larger to contribute to the three-dimensional formation of the light emitting effect main body 5010. be able to. In addition, since the LED bare chip is an extremely delicate electronic component, even if an impact caused by a player hitting the door frame 3 or the like is directly transmitted to the door frame 3, the light emitting effect unit 5000 provided on the game board 5 is docked. Is weakened, and it is less likely that the plurality of LED bare chips 5075 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 will be damaged by such a shock.

[Modification]
In this embodiment, instead of mounting the LED package in which the LED bare chip is sealed on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, the LED bare chip sealed in the LED package is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the LED substrate 5070. ) Although the configuration of directly mounting on the 5070x was adopted, if the depth distance dimension of the light emitting effect main body 5010 of the light emitting effect unit 5000 does not hinder the three-dimensional shaping of the light emitting effect main body 5010, instead of the LED bare chip, a side type is used. May be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. In this case, the dimension distance of the single prism block 5060f including the incident concave portion 5060c, the cylindrical flat surface 5060d, and the prism portion 5060e increases, and the plate thickness of the light guide plate also increases. The light emitting surface of the LED package having the side surface mount type does not face the diffusion sheet 5050, but faces the lower side of the incident concave portion 5060c, and light emitted from the light emitting surface passes through the prism portion 5060e from the prism portion 5060e. Proceed to the front diffusion sheet 5050.

[Diffusion sheet]
Diffusion sheet 5050 formed by processing from a thin circular transparent resin plate having a cutout on the upper part thereof is cut out at a position corresponding to reverse placement preventing piece 5040c formed in member accommodating recess 5040b of decorative body 5040. A portion 5050a is formed, and a through hole 5050b is formed at a position corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. The diffusion sheet 5050 is coated with a white paint on the back side and processed into a satin shape having fine irregularities. When the light is incident through the light guide plate, the incident light can be diffused.

  The back surface 5050y of the diffusion sheet 5050 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of being in contact with the front surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060 molded of a transparent resin. The back surface 5060y of the light guide plate 5060 is accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 in a state of contacting the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. On the back surface 5060y side of the light guide plate 5060, as described above, the incident concave portion is formed so as to cover the LED bear chip 5075 at a position corresponding to the plurality of LED bear chips 5075 mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070. 5060c are respectively formed.

  As described above, on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070, five rows of LED rows in which a predetermined number of LED bare chips 5075 are arranged at a predetermined distance from each other are provided in a vertical direction. The LED bare chips 5075 of the row of LED rows are respectively sealed in the incident concave portions 5060c formed on the back surface 5060y side of the corresponding light guide plate 5060. When the light-emitting surface of the LED bare chip 5075 emits light, the space of the incident concave portion 5060c is illuminated brightly, so that the LED of each row of LED columns sealed in each incident concave portion 5060c compared with the region where the incident concave portion 5060c is not formed. Light from the bare chip 5075 passes through the light guide plate 5060 formed of a transparent resin, exits from the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060, and the brightness of the light emitted from the space of each incident recess 5060c increases. Then, the region where the space of each incident concave portion 5060c exists is arranged like a point light source, and it is difficult to uniformly illuminate the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060.

  Therefore, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 each having a long band shape in the left-right direction applied with a white paint are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bear chips 5075 of the LED rows in each stage. At the same time, a diffusion region 5050d for diffusing light is formed by spraying a white paint in a dotted manner on the region excluding these five regions 5050c1 to 5050c5. The portion applied with the white paint becomes an opaque region in which the rear or front cannot be visually recognized through the diffusion sheet 5050. Note that no paint is applied to the surface 5050x side of the diffusion sheet 5050.

  Specifically, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, a white band region 5050c1 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first row 5070c1 of the LED board 5070, and the LED row of the second row 5070c2 of the LED board 5070 is formed. A white band region 5050c2 is formed at a position corresponding to the above, and a white band region 5050c3 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED line of the third stage 5070c3 of the LED substrate 5070, and corresponds to the LED line of the fourth stage 5070c4 of the LED substrate 5070. A white band region 5050c4 is formed at a position corresponding to the white line region 5050c4, and a white band region 5050c5 is formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the fifth stage 5070c5 of the LED substrate 5070.

  The vertical distance dimension of the white band areas 5050c1 to 5050c5 has the same distance dimension. For example, the vertical distance dimension of the white band area 5050c1 is at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. Each of the light guide plates 5060 has a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d that constitutes the single prism block 5060f. Further, among the horizontal distances of the white belt regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the horizontal distances of the white belt regions 5050c1 and 5050c5 have the same distance, for example, the horizontal width of the white belt region 5050c1. Has a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d that constitutes the single prism block 5060f of the light guide plate 5060 formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the first stage 5070c1. are doing. In addition, among the horizontal distances of the white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the horizontal distances of the white band regions 5050c2 and 5050c4 have the same distance, for example, the horizontal direction of the white band region 5050c2. Has a distance dimension that covers the entire cylindrical flat surface 5060d that constitutes the single prism block 5060f of the above-described light guide plate 5060 formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the second stage 5070c2. are doing. Further, among the horizontal distances of the white belt regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, the horizontal distance of the white belt region 5050c3 is the above-described light guide plate 5060 formed at a position corresponding to the LED row of the third stage 5070c3. Has a distance dimension that covers the entire flat surface 5060d having a columnar shape and constituting the single prism block 5060f.

  As described above, on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 each having a long band shape in the left-right direction applied with white paint are formed at positions corresponding to the LED bear chips 5075 of the LED rows in each stage. By doing so, the light emitted from each of the incident concave portions 5060c can be refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 and directed to the light guide plate 5060, so that the region where the space of each of the incident concave portions 5060c exists is like a point light source. Light emission can be reduced.

  In addition, since the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is white as described above, it is refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, passes through the light guide plate 5060, and passes through the surface of the LED substrate 5070 ( Light that has returned toward the mounting surface 5070x can be efficiently refracted forward again.

  The light emitted from the prism portion 5060e constituting the single prism block 5060f is diffused by the diffusion region 5050d. In other words, the light emitted from each of the incident concave portions 5060c is refracted by the five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5, and the region where the space of each of the incident concave portions 5060c exists emits light like a point light source toward the light guide plate 5060. At the same time, the light returning toward the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED substrate 5070 is refracted by the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the white LED substrate 5070, and is emitted efficiently forward again. Since the light can be diffused by the diffusion region 5050d through the portion 5060e, it is possible to contribute to a mode of uniformly illuminating the surface 5060x of the light guide plate 5060. This can contribute to uniformly illuminating the surface (the surface 5060x) of the light guide plate 5060 facing the diffusion sheet 5050, so that it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable due to the light emission effect of the decorative body 5040. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the light emission effect.

[Lid]
The lid 5080 formed of a transparent resin having a circular shape and having a cutout at an upper part thereof has a cutout 5080a formed at a position corresponding to the reverse placement preventing piece 5040c formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. At the same time, through holes 5080b are formed at positions corresponding to the three mounting boss holes 5040d formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040.

  The lid 5080 is formed with a plurality of long ventilation holes 5080c extending in the left-right direction arranged vertically and horizontally, and has a flexible flat cable 5030 at a position corresponding to the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface 5070y of the LED board 5070. A wiring opening 5080d through which the wire passes is formed.

  Further, mounting boss holes 5080e for fixing the main body mounting portion 5020 are provided at the left and right sides of the center on the rear surface 5080y side of the lid 5080 when the lid 5080 is viewed from the rear, and a third distance dimension from the rear surface 5080y of the lid 5080 toward the rear. (A total of two mounting boss holes 5080e). The outer diameters of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 are the same as those of the two mounting bosses formed on the upper and left sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. It has the same outer diameter as the hole 5040e.

[Main body mounting part]
The T-shaped main body mounting portion 5020 for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part in the back box 3010 has a T-shaped groove portion whose side wall is formed rearward except for the upper left and right ends of the T-shaped flat plate. A base body 5020a having two left and right symmetrical metal L-shaped plates 5020b that reinforce the base body 5020a along side walls excluding the upper and lower sides of a T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a; 5020b, and a metal plate 5020c that reinforces the base body 5020a along the upper side wall of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a.

  At the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5040e formed on the upper and left sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010, and the light emitting effect main body 5010 A through hole 5020d is formed at a position corresponding to two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right of the center of the back surface 5080y of the cover 5080. Further, when the base body 5020a is viewed from behind, a plurality of metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and a plurality of metal plates 5020c for fixing the two metal L-shaped plates 5020c are formed on the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. Mounting boss holes 5020e are formed to protrude rearward from the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a with a length of a fourth distance dimension (total of 11 mounting bosses). Hole 5020e). The outer diameters of the mounting boss holes 5020e are determined by the outer diameters of the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed at the center left and right of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 (the upper left and right sides of the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010). (Outer diameters of the two mounting boss holes 5040e) formed about two times.

  Two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b attached to the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a have two upper and lower sides formed on the back 5040y of the decorative body 5040 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. Through holes 5020ba are formed at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 5040e and at positions corresponding to the two mounting boss holes 5080e formed on the left and right of the center of the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 of the light emitting effect main body 5010. In addition, through holes 5020bb are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed on the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a. The metal plate 5020c attached to the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a has a through hole at a position corresponding to the plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed in the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove. Holes 5020ca are respectively formed.

  When the base body 5020a is viewed from behind, a flexible flat cable 5030 is provided between the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a and the lower side wall of the base body 5020a connected to the bottom. A wiring opening 5020f through which the wiring is formed is formed. At the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a, although not shown, a plurality of through holes for attaching the light emitting effect main body 5010 to the upper part in the back box 3010 are formed.

  Further, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are electrically connected to a board ground (GND) via wiring (not shown), and grounds of various boards provided in the game board 5 are provided. This is the same ground (GND) as (substrate ground (GND)).

[Flexible flat cable]
In the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal output from the effect driving board 1720 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are arranged in parallel with each other. Are covered with an insulator, and have a thickness (diameter) of one-third to one-fifth of a normal round electric wiring as compared with a normal round electric wiring. Although not shown, it is formed three-dimensionally by bending and repeating a mountain fold and a valley fold a plurality of times from the effect driving substrate 1720 to the light emitting effect main body 5010, and furthermore, the main body mounting portion 5020 Metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and a metal plate 5020c along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of FIG. Of the main body 5030a having a predetermined width and being elongated in the left-right direction. Although not shown, a plurality of flat conductor electrodes having a predetermined length are exposed on the back side of the main body 5030a on the upper end side, and the plurality of flat conductor electrodes having a predetermined thickness are exposed on the front side of the main body 5030a. A reinforcing plate for reinforcing an electrode having a rectangular shape longer than a predetermined length of the electrode of the flat conductor is formed, whereas a plurality of flat plates are provided on the lower side of the main body 5030a on the back side of the main body 5030a. The electrode 5030bb of the mold conductor is disposed barely having a predetermined length, and the electrodes 5030bb of the plurality of flat conductors having a predetermined thickness on the surface side of the main body 5030a are exposed. Reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb having a long rectangular shape than fixed length of is formed.

  A plurality of flat conductor electrodes (not shown) formed on the upper end side of the main body 5030a are electrically connected to connectors (not shown) provided on the effect drive board 1720, whereas electrodes on the lower end side of the main body 5030a are formed. The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb are electrically connected to a connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 of the light emitting effect main body 5010.

  A capacitor called a decoupling capacitor (not shown) or a bypass capacitor (not shown) between the power supply line and the board ground (GND) in the effect drive board 1720 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected. Is mounted, and by reducing the power supply impedance, the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved. A decoupling capacitor (not shown) and a power supply bypass capacitor (not shown) are provided between the power supply line and the board ground (GND) of the LED board 5070 of the light emitting effect main body 5010 to which the flexible flat cable 5030 is electrically connected. A capacitor called a bypass capacitor is mounted, and by reducing the power supply impedance, noise resistance to electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B is improved.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 is bent three-dimensionally and is routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. There is also a portion where the cable 5030 is routed. As described above, the game balls B are polished in the island facility of the game hall, or rubbed against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and emit electromagnetic noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. . Therefore, when the game ball B flows down the game area 5 a of the game board 5, the back surface of the game panel 1100 and the vicinity thereof are in an environment susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. ing. The flexible flat cable 5030 that transmits the control signal to the light emitting effect main unit 5010 is susceptible to noise and is subject to trouble due to electromagnetic noise (for example, normal data is changed to other data and is garbled, or a signal that is not originally output). In spite of the above, the output panel may be susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise due to the occurrence of the signal, but as described above, the vicinity of the back surface of the gaming panel 1100 susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise. There are also parts that are routed around.

  Therefore, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, both ends in the width direction of the flexible flat cable 5030 facing the source of electromagnetic wave noise (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the both ends”). ), The ground (GND) line is used as a power supply line so that the power supply line is arranged. Thereby, the electrodes other than the electrodes of the flat conductors on the both ends of the plurality of flat conductors are separated from the game ball B by the ground (GND) line, which is the electrode of the flat conductors on the both ends. The ground (GND) line is arranged between the source of the electromagnetic noise due to the electrostatic discharge of the above and the other electrodes (electrodes including the control signal) except the electrodes of the flat conductor on both ends at the end, With respect to other electrodes (electrodes including a line for transmitting a control signal) other than the flat conductor electrodes on the both ends at the extreme ends, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball B. .

  In addition, of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030, the ground (GND) line is used as a power supply line so that the power supply line is disposed at both ends of the flat conductor electrodes on both ends. A power supply line (for example, a + 5V line) is arranged on the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the flat conductor on both sides. Since the power supply line (for example, the + 5V line) is strong in noise and hardly affected by electromagnetic wave noise, it may be arranged on the electrode near the outermost electrode on both ends of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030. preferable. Of the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductors on the outermost ends, the electrode adjacent to the electrode of one of the outermost flat conductors and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the other outermost flat conductor A power supply line is disposed on one of the electrodes, or on both the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the one endmost flat conductor and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the other endmost flat conductor.

  Further, among the electrodes of the plurality of flat conductors of the flexible flat cable 5030, the electrodes of the flat conductors at both ends are both used as ground (GND) lines, and in addition to the electrodes of the flat conductors at both ends. However, two metal L-shaped plates are formed along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 of the light emitting effect main body 5010 in a portion routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100. The wires are routed so as to pass between the metal plates 5020b and 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. That is, in the flexible flat cable 503, a portion routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is easily affected by electromagnetic noise, is shielded by the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. In addition, the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B can be improved.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030 has a plurality of flat conductors covered with an insulator. The color of this insulator is white, and the entire flexible flat cable 5030 is white. The reason for adopting the white color is that the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed inside the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, and is therefore mounted on various decorative boards provided in the back unit 3000. By functioning as a reflection plate that reflects the light emitted by the LED itself, light that escapes behind the back unit 3000 is suppressed even slightly, contributing to a reduction in the effect of the light emission effect by the light emitted by the LED. is there.

[Modification]
In order to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to the electrostatic discharge from the game ball B, a power supply line is connected to the electrodes of the flat conductors on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 among the electrodes of the flat conductors. Although a ground (GND) line is used as a power supply line to be arranged, a power supply line (for example, a +5 V line) may be used as a power supply line so that a power supply line is arranged instead of the ground (GND) line. This is because a power supply line (for example, a +5 V line) is strong in noise and is hardly affected by electromagnetic noise. In this case, of the electrodes adjacent to the electrodes of the flat conductor on the outermost ends, the electrode adjacent to the electrode of one of the outermost flat conductors and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the other outermost flat conductor A ground (GND) line is disposed on one of the electrodes, or on both the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the one endmost flat conductor and the electrode adjacent to the electrode of the other endmost flat conductor. ing.

  Further, the main body mounting portion of the light emitting effect main body 5010 in a portion where the flat conductor electrodes on the both ends at the end of the plurality of flat conductor electrodes of the flexible flat cable 5030 are routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100. Along the inner surface of the bottom of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the base 5020, it is routed so as to pass between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c. However, at least one of the flat conductor electrodes on both ends of the flexible flat cable 5030 is routed along one metal L-shaped plate 5020b of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b. May be performed. In this case, the flexible flat cable 503 is formed such that a portion routed near the back surface of the game panel 1100, which is easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise, is routed along the metal L-shaped plate 5020b. It is shielded by 5020b and can contribute to improvement of noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from game ball B.

  In the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but a flat conductor electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) is provided between the flat conductors. May be arranged so that flat conductors for transmitting control signals and flat conductors electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND) are alternately arranged. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance of the plurality of flat conductors that transmit the control signal against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B.

  In the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel. However, the flexible flat cable 5030 transmits a control signal that is particularly susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise (that is, easily susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise). A flat conductor to be transmitted (hereinafter, referred to as a “flat conductor weak to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise”) is electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) so as to be adjacent to the flat conductor weak to the effect of electromagnetic wave noise. A flat conductor that is electrically connected is arranged so that the flat conductor that is weakly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise is sandwiched and arranged by the flat conductor that is electrically connected to the substrate ground (GND). You may. By doing so, it is possible to improve the noise resistance against electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball B with respect to the flat conductor that is weakly affected by the electromagnetic wave noise.

  Further, in the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors for transmitting a control signal are arranged in parallel, but in addition to the flat conductors for transmitting a control signal, as the plurality of flat conductors, This is a case in which a flat conductor electrically connected to a substrate ground (GND) and a flat conductor for supplying various power sources are included, and the substrate ground (GND) and the power source are arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, when the temperature rises and reaches a certain temperature, the resistance rises sharply and the overcurrent protection element such as a thermistor suppresses the current. An overcurrent protection circuit that cuts off the circuit when a current is reached (for example, a circuit having a polyswitch as a resettable fuse. The polyswitch has a relationship between element resistance and element temperature). The resistance value rapidly increases from a specific temperature, and the main body generates heat, and the heat reduces the conductivity, interrupts the current, and when the main body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns.) Therefore, it is preferable that priority is given to what is supplied. This is because the flexible flat cable 5030 has a thickness of about one third to one fifth of the thickness (diameter) of the normal round electric wiring as compared with the normal round electric wiring as described above. The over-current protection circuit and the over-current protection circuit prevent the flexible flat cable 5030 from being short-circuited when an over-current flows through the flat conductor that supplies power. This is because it can be avoided.

[How to assemble the light emitting unit]
Next, a brief description will be given of a method of assembling the light emitting effect unit 5000. First, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED board 5070 are sequentially arranged in accordance with the reverse placement preventing piece 5040c and the mounting boss hole 5040d formed in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040. A lid 5080 for closing the housing recess 5040b is arranged. In this state, the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 and the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080 are arranged on the same plane to be flush, and the end face of the reverse placement preventing piece 5040c and the end face of the mounting boss hole 5040d are covered. The first distance dimension described above is set in advance so as not to protrude from the back surface 5080y of the body 5080 and to fit between the front surface 5080x and the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080. Then, a pan screw (not shown) made of metal is screwed from the through hole 5080b formed on the back surface 5080y side of the lid 5080 toward the mounting boss hole 5040d and fixed. As a result, the diffusion sheet 5050, the light guide plate 5060, and the LED board 5070 are arranged and accommodated in the member accommodating recess 5040b of the decorative body 5040 when the decorative body 5040 is viewed from the front.

  Subsequently, the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c are connected to a plurality of mounting boss holes 5020e formed in the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. A metal pan-head screw (not shown) is screwed from the through-hole 5020bb formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b toward the mounting boss hole 5020e and fixed. A pan screw is screwed in from the through hole 5020ca formed in the metal plate 5020c to the mounting boss hole 5020e and fixed. The end surfaces of the mounting boss holes 5020e do not protrude from the back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b, and 5020c, and the front and back surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b, and the metal plate 5020c. The fourth distance dimension described above is set in advance so as to fall within the range.

  Subsequently, the lower end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 through the wiring opening 5080d formed in the lid 5080. Then, the upper end side of the flexible flat cable 5030 is passed through a wiring opening 5020f formed in the main body mounting portion 5020. The method of attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED board 5070 will be described later.

  Subsequently, the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020 is arranged in accordance with the mounting boss hole 5040e formed on the back surface 5040y of the decorative body 5040 and the mounting boss hole 5080e formed on the back surface 5080y of the lid 5080. Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is screwed into the mounting boss holes 5040e and 5080e from the through holes 5020ba formed in the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b and 5020b and fixed. The end faces of the mounting boss holes 5040e, 5080e do not protrude from the rear surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b, but fit between the front and rear surfaces of the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b. The second distance dimension and the third distance dimension are set in advance.

  Subsequently, the flexible flat cable 5030 is connected between the two metal L-shaped plates 5020b, 5020b and the metal plate 5020c along the bottom inner surface of the T-shaped groove formed in the base body 5020a of the main body mounting portion 5020. The assembly is completed by assembling the light emitting effect unit 5000.

  By the way, conventionally, a main control board for controlling a game progress or a game profit, a sub-control board for controlling an effect performed in accordance with the progress of a game, a board such as an image control board for performing a display control of an image display device or the like. A game machine has been proposed in which various wiring members are routed while being arranged on the back side (for example, JP-A-2017-217381 (paragraph [0051] and FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall to the game machine are drawn to the game machine because the game balls are charged with static electricity by rubbing each other when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball for various wirings.

[How to attach flexible flat cable to LED board]

  Here, a method of attaching the flexible flat cable 5030 to the LED board 5070 will be described with reference to FIG. The plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070 and inserted to the back. It is electrically connected.

  Since the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not properly inserted into the inside of the connector 5070d, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb and the plurality of flat conductors In some cases, contact failure may occur between the electrode 5030bb and the electrode of the corresponding connector 5070d.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 259 (a), a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are connected to the connector 5070d on the surface (mounting surface) 5070x of the LED board 5070. In the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) so that the mark can be properly inserted and inserted. A long solid line guide line G4U extending linearly in the left-right direction (upper and outer sides) and a lower portion near a lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, a lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). Corresponding position And a reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. A solid guide line G4V extending linearly and coinciding with the vertical straight line of the left end side 5030cba is printed by silk printing.

  Note that no through hole is formed in the area where the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 is arranged. This is because even when the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed. This is to prevent the conductor from being short-circuited by the through hole.

[Relationship between reinforcing plate of flexible flat cable and connector]
When inserting and inserting a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 into the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, The conductor electrode 5030bb faces the electrode of the connector 5070d and is on the back side of the flexible flat cable 5030, whereas the reinforcing plate 5030ca for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb is on the front side of the flexible flat cable 5030. . As a result, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are properly inserted to the back of the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. In the inserted state, as shown in FIG. 259 (b), the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb and the guide line G4V are arranged in a positional relationship where they coincide with each other in the up-down direction. It should be noted that a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not inserted to the depth of the connector 5070d provided on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070, that is, the insertion amount ( When the push-in amount is insufficient, as shown in FIG. 259 (c), the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing the electrode 5030bb by the insufficient insert amount SRT is separated from the guide line G4V. As described above, in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, the operator attaches the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 to the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. When the electrode 5030bb is inserted and inserted into the connector 5070d mounted on the connector 5070d, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode 5030bb is correctly inserted to the depth of the connector 5070d. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the efficiency of the checking operation.

  Note that the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are not properly inserted to the back of the connector 5070d mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. In the state of being inserted obliquely, the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a cannot be seen over the guide line G4U extending linearly in the left-right direction, and the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a extends linearly in the horizontal direction. It becomes a state having an inclination with respect to the guide line G4L. Thus, the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 by the guide lines G4U, G4L and the reinforcing plate 5030cb. It can be easily determined visually whether or not the connector 5070d is properly inserted to the back. Thus, in the assembly line of the pachinko machine manufacturer, the operator places a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED board 5070. When the electrode 5030bb is inserted into the mounted connector 5070d, it can be easily visually determined whether or not the electrode 5030bb has been properly inserted into the connector 5070d. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the efficiency of the checking operation.

[Modification]
The flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a at a position corresponding to the upper side of the lower end side (that is, the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guide line G4U and the lower right and left sides of the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower and outer sides near the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) Although the long solid line guide line G4L extending linearly is printed by silk printing, the rectangular area having the guide line G4U on the upper side and the guide line G4L on the lower side may be solid printed by silk printing. . Even with such a configuration, the upper side of the solid-colored rectangular area can function as the guide line G4U, and the lower side of the solid-colored rectangular area can function as the guide line G4L. Furthermore, even when the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, even if the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed, the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed. The resist is prevented from peeling off due to the peeling of the silk print in the solid-painted rectangular area, and the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 covered with the resist is not exposed, but is exposed. The short circuit of the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 can be prevented.

  Further, the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a at a position corresponding to the upper side thereof (that is, the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guide line G4U and the lower right and left sides of the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower and outer sides near the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) A long solid line guide line G4L extending linearly is printed by silk printing, but the back surface of the LED substrate 5070 corresponding to a rectangular area having the guide line G4U as the upper side and the guide line G4L as the lower side, and the inside thereof. (Solder side) 5070y It may be formed foil vent region in copper foil surface. Even with such a configuration, the upper side of the foil-cut rectangular area can function as the guide line G4U, and the lower side of the foil-cut rectangular area can function as the guide line G4L. Furthermore, the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 rubs against the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070, so that the flat conductor of the flexible flat cable 5030 is exposed and the resist on the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070 is removed. Since the copper foil surface does not exist even if it is peeled off, that is, only the non-conductive base material of the LED substrate 5070 is exposed, it is possible to prevent the flat conductor of the exposed flexible flat cable 5030 from being short-circuited. it can.

  Further, the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a at a position corresponding to the upper side thereof (that is, the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guide line G4U and the lower right and left sides of the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower and outer sides near the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) And a long solid line guide line G4L extending in a straight line is printed by silk printing. However, the guide line G4U is formed by removing a part of the copper foil on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 5070. , G4L may be formed. Guidelines by not applying a partial region of a resist solution in the case of applying the resist solution on the copper foil surface of the back (solder surface) 5070Y of D substrate 5070 G4U, may G4L is formed.

  After the plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 are properly inserted into the connector 5070d on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700, A plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030, or a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030; In order to prevent each electrode 5030bb and the corresponding electrode of the connector 5070d from being obliquely displaced and coming into contact with another adjacent electrode to prevent a short circuit, the flexible flat cable 5030 is connected to the back surface (solder surface) 5070 of the LED substrate 50700. It may be adhered to the fixed seal having a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction to secure the. In this case, for example, a hook-and-bracket (") shape is formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700 as a region to which the fixed seal is attached, at a position slightly away from positions corresponding to the four corners of the fixed seal. (Graphs such as lines, symbols, etc.) may be printed and formed by silk printing, respectively, or a copper foil in a partial area on the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700 , A guide line in the form of brackets (") (a figure such as a line or a symbol may be used) may be formed, or a resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface of the back surface (solder surface) 5070y of the LED substrate 50700. In this case, a guideline in the form of a bracket (") (which may be a figure such as a line or a symbol) may be formed by not coating a part of the region with the resist solution. Disability By flat cable 5030 is fixed to the rear surface (solder side) 5070Y of the LED substrate 50700 by static seal, it is possible to fix the orientation of the flexible flat cable 5030.

  Further, the flexible flat cable 5030 linearly extends in the left-right direction in the vicinity of the upper side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a at a position corresponding to the upper side thereof (that is, the upper side of the position corresponding to the upper side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030). The long solid line guide line G4U and the lower right and left sides of the position corresponding to the lower side of the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030 (that is, the lower and outer sides near the position corresponding to the lower side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030) And a long solid line guide line G4L extending linearly, and a vertical direction of a left end side 5030cba of a reinforcing plate 5030cb for reinforcing a plurality of flat conductor electrodes 5030bb formed on the lower end side of the main body 5030a of the flexible flat cable 5030. Straight line The matching solid line guide line G4V extending linearly is formed on the LED substrate 5070, but may be replaced by a single-dot chain line or a two-dot chain line instead of the solid line, and the guide lines G4U and G4L may be inserted in the insertion direction. May be an arrow line, or the guideline G4V may be an arrow indicating the position of the left end side 5030cba of the reinforcing plate 5030cb.

[Each decorative board for door frame]
Next, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 75 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 260 to 264. FIG. 260 is a block diagram illustrating electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame, FIG. 261 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a decorative substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. 262 is an LED. FIG. 263 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a decorative substrate including two constant current driving circuits, FIG. 263 is a schematic diagram illustrating an arrangement method of the LED constant current driving circuits, and FIG. FIG. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub relay board provided in the door frame 3 will be described, an outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, the decorative board including the LED constant current drive circuit, and the LED constant current. A method for arranging the driving circuits will be described.

  First, as described above, the door frame 3 surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, so that the upper left decorative member 271, the upper right decorative member 276, the upper central decorative member 312a, the left side decorative door member 404, The side window decoration part 410b of the window decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are arranged, respectively, and the plate upper left decoration body 271, the plate upper right decoration body 276, and the plate Below the upper middle decorative body 312a, a lower left decorative body 281, a lower right decorative body 286, and a lower middle decorative dish 312b are arranged, respectively.

  The upper left dish decoration 271 is provided with a left upper decoration board 273 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the upper left dish 271, and is mounted on the upper left decoration board 273 behind the upper left decoration 271. Light-emitting decoration is performed by a full-color LED (six in this embodiment). The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a dish upper right decorative board 278 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the dish upper right decorative body 276 behind the dish upper right decorative board 278. Light-emitting decoration is performed by a full-color LED (five in this embodiment). On the dish center upper decorative body 312a, a dish center upper decorative board 314 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape is arranged along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center upper decorative board is arranged. The light emitting decoration is performed by a plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on the 314.

  The left side door decorative body 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the left side door decorative body 404 behind the door frame left side decorative body 402b. And a plurality of full-color LEDs (in the present embodiment, left upper decorative board 402a in this embodiment) mounted on left upper decorative board 402a and lower left lower decorative board 402b. 5 and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has 10). The side window interior decoration portion 410b is provided in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decoration member 412, and a rear side thereof is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the side window interior decoration member 412. The decorative portion decorative board 413 in the window is arranged, and is illuminated and decorated by a plurality of full-color LEDs (12 in this embodiment) mounted on the decorative portion decorative substrate 413 in the side window. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed at the rear thereof in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative body 419. The upper right side decorative board 418a and the lower right side decorative board 418b. And a plurality of full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, right upper decorative substrate 418a in this embodiment) mounted on right upper decorative substrate 418a and lower right decorative substrate 418b. , And the right side lower decorative board 418b has 10).

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is provided with a door frame top central decorative board 455 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 at the rear thereof. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the left side portion of the top decorative body 453 is disposed, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. Door frame top right decorative board 457 formed in the shape of an elongated strip-shaped plate is arranged, and a plurality of door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457 are respectively mounted in plurality. Light-emitting decoration by full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 11 on the door frame top center decorative board 455, 7 on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and 6 on the door frame top right decorative board 457) It is.

  In the lower left dish decoration 281, a lower left dish decoration board 283 formed in an elongated band shape extending left and right along the lower left dish decoration 281 is arranged behind the decoration 281. Light-emitting decoration is performed by a full-color LED (six in this embodiment). The lower right decorative plate 288 is disposed behind the lower right decorative substrate 288 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the lower right decorative body 286. The light-emitting decoration is performed by a plurality of full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment) mounted on the LCD. The dish center lower decorative body 312b is provided with a dish center lower decorative board 316 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b behind the dish center lower decorative board. Light-emission decoration is performed by a plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on the 316.

  The effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 provided on the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 includes the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 formed in a form in which the ring is divided into front and rear as described above, The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 includes a front decorative substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a front semi-circular shape, and a rear decorative substrate 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having a rear semi-circular shape. , Is composed of. The rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 53 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in this embodiment) mounted on the front decorative board 352a and a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in the present embodiment) mounted on the rear decorative board 352b. In the present embodiment, the light-emitting decoration is 9).

  As described above, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is formed in an elongated strip shape. Thus, by increasing the distance dimension in the vertical and horizontal directions of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, and the like can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large display device, or the like can also be provided.

[Electrical connection between each decorative board and frame door sub relay board]
Plate upper left decorative substrate 273, plate upper right decorative substrate 278, plate center upper decorative substrate 314, left side upper decorative substrate 402a, left side lower decorative substrate 402b, side disposed on various decorative bodies and decorative portions provided in door frame 3 Decorative part decorative board 413 in the window, upper right decorative board 418a, lower right decorative board 418b, door frame top central decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, dish lower left decorative board 283, the lower right decorative plate 288, the lower central decorative plate 316, the front decorative substrate 352a, the rear decorative substrate 352b, etc., and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. The electrical connection with the provided door frame sub relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a serial data output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. The SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1, and the light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are input independently. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to a +12 V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. ) Is electrically connected to the line and grounded to ground (GND).

[Door frame side first serial system]
The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the plate unit relays of the plate unit 200 shown in FIG. The signal is input to the board 214 and is input to the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

  The first serial system on the door frame side (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the plate unit relay board 214 are the lower left decorative board 283, the lower right decorative board 288, 54, and are input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the lower left dish plate 283 are input to the upper left decor substrate 273, respectively. That is, the lower left dish plate 283 serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the upper left dish plate 273. The decorative substrate 283 and the upper left decorative plate 273 are electrically connected in a rosary. The first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the lower left decorative board 283 serving as a bridge board. And an unshown input connector for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the upper left plate 273. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper left decorative plate 283 electrically connected to the lower left decorative substrate 283 (that is, the lower stage decorative substrate 283 is the rear stage and the last stage) is illustrated by the lower left decorative substrate 283. Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors, are input. .

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the lower right plate decoration board 288 are input to the upper right decoration board 278, respectively. That is, the lower right plate decorative board 288 serves as a bridge board for transmitting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the upper right plate decorative board 278. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the upper right decorative substrate 278 are electrically connected in a rosary. The first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the lower right decorative board 288 serving as a bridge board. An input connector (not shown) is provided, and is shown for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper right decorative board 278, respectively. No output connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper right decorative plate 278 electrically connected to the lower right decorative plate 288 (that is, the lower right decorative substrate 288 which is the latter stage of the lower right decorative substrate 288) has the lower right decorative plate. Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame-side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) which are respectively output from the output connector 288 (not shown) are provided. ing.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the rendering operation unit 300 are provided on the plate center decoration board 314 and the plate. The information is input to the lower center decorative substrate 316 and the front decorative substrate 352a of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, respectively.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the front decorative board 352a are input to the rear decorative board 352b. In other words, the front decorative board 352a serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the rear decorative board 352b. And the rear decoration substrate 352b are electrically connected in a rosary. On the pre-decoration board 352a serving as a bridge board, the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the operation unit relay board 392 of the staging operation unit 300 are respectively provided. An input connector (not shown) for inputting is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the rear decoration board 352b. (Not shown) is provided. On the other hand, an output connector (not shown) of the front decorative substrate 352a is provided on the rear decorative substrate 352b electrically connected to the front decorative substrate 352a in a daisy chain (that is, a rear stage and a final stage after the front decorative substrate 352a). Only the input connector (not shown) to which the first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), respectively, which are respectively output from the door frame are provided.

  Here, for example, the lower left decorative board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the dish unit relay board 214 will be briefly described. Then, the bottom left decorative board 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat distribution circuit 283c, and sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are six full-color LEDs. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 283x that can supply a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting that can set the maximum current of the current flowing to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. And a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x performs control to supply a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate unit relay board 214. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 283x is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 283x can be distributed by part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x by the heat distribution circuit 283c.

  Also, for example, the upper left decorative substrate 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the lower left decorative substrate 283 will be briefly described. The upper left decorative board 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat distribution circuit 273c, and six full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283, and is a sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 273x that can supply a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6. , And a maximum current setting circuit 273y that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the suLED1 to the suLED6. The constant current drive circuit 273x controls the supply of a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left decorative board 283. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the suLED1 to the suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x is handled by the heat distribution circuit 273c, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dispersed.

[Second serial system on door frame side]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the lower left side decoration of the door frame left side decoration board 402. While being input to the substrate 402b, the decorative portion decorative substrate 413 in the side window, the lower right decorative substrate 418b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. Are entered respectively.

  DC + 12V and ground (GND) input to the lower left side decorative substrate 402b of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are input to the upper left side decorative substrate 402a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are the door frame top right decorative board. 457.

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are input to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is a bridge substrate that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455. Thus, the door frame top right decorative board 457 and the door frame top center decorative board 455 are electrically connected in a daisy chain. The door frame top right decorative board 457 serving as a bridge board includes a door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, DC + 12V, and ground. (GND) is provided, and an input connector (not shown) is provided. The second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are connected to the door frame top center. An output connector (not shown) for outputting to the decorative board 455 is provided. Also, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457). And a not-shown input connector to which a door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from output connectors, are provided. , An output connector (not shown) for outputting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. .

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 are input to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, respectively. ing. In other words, the door frame top center decorative board 455 becomes a bridge board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456. Thus, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are in a state of being electrically connected in a rosary. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 that is electrically connected to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 in a daisy chain (that is, is a stage after the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and the final stage) has a door. Door frame-side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from an output connector (not shown) of the frame top center decorative board 455, are respectively input. Only the connector for the device is provided.

  Here, for example, the door frame left side decorative board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the door frame sub relay board 105 is input. Briefly describing the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes two LED constant current driving circuits 402ba, 402bb, a heat dispersing circuit 402bc, and ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left decorative board 273, and supplies a constant current to hdLED1 to hdLED8. And a maximum current setting circuit 402bay that can set the maximum current flowing through the hdLED1 to the hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax supplies a constant current to eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub relay board 105. Perform control.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left decorative board 273. The sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 402bbx, which allows a constant current to flow through the hdLED10 and the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper left side decorative board 402a, and the hdLED9, hdLED10, and left And a maximum current setting circuit 402bby that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED5 of the upper side decorative substrate 402a. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, and is used to mount the self-mounted board (left side lower decorative board 402b). Control is performed to supply a constant current to the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5 of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through huLED1 to huLED8. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed by taking part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax by the heat distribution circuit 402bc. Further, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be distributed by the heat distribution circuit 402bc and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative board 402a. ing.

  As described above, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dissipated by only the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the board (the lower left side decorative board 402b) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted. On the other hand, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent substrate in addition to the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the substrate on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted (the lower left side decorative substrate 402b). Heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative board 402a.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to pass a constant current to huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left upper decorative board 402a, which is a succeeding substrate, across the board on which it is mounted (the lower left decorative board 402b). Have been. For this reason, the work of electrically connecting between the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a is always involved. The operator who performs this operation may use the finger of the connector of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the connector of the upper left side decorative board 402a, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the lower left side decorative board 402b, or the heat of the upper left side decorative board 402a. In order to touch the distribution circuit 402ac, it is necessary to prevent the lower left decorative board 402b and the upper left decorative board 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat dissipating circuit 402bc of the lower left decorative board 402b and the heat dispersing circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative board 402a have the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, It also has a function that can prevent electronic components from being damaged.

  As described above, the upper left decorative board 402a receives the DC + 12V and the ground (GND) from the lower left lower decorative board 402b, and also has five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. Lines through which current flows are input. As described above, the upper left side decorative substrate 402a includes the heat dispersing circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat distribution circuit 402ac has a function of dispersing heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx, and also has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

[Emission data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for specifying a light emission mode, and include ID information and floor information. Key information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current driving circuits provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation is designated from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127.

[Overview of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, an outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit. Therefore, here, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided on the dish left lower decorative board 283 will be described. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets a sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 283x that can supply a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6, and sets the maximum current of the current flowing to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. And a maximum current setting circuit 283y.

[Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels, and can output a current for each channel. In this embodiment, an output channel LR is provided for an LED element emitting red (R), an LED element emitting green (G), and an LED element emitting blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. , LG, and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in this embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. Can be done.

  The constant current driving circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit 283xi. It is mainly composed.

[Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit capable of receiving an input of + 12V DC from a + 12V power supply line and generating and supplying an internal power supply Vreg (in this embodiment, + 5V DC) used in the constant current drive circuit 283x. The internal power supply Vreg generated by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit. 283xi, and a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit 283xi. Is supposed to work.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 95, and independently generates + DC5V as the internal power supply Vreg to generate the constant current drive circuit. 283x. This is because if a + 5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is used, this + 5V power supply line is used by laying out electric wiring, so that the length of the + 5V power supply line supplying DC + 5V is reduced. It becomes longer and the noise easily enters. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the + 5V power supply line and DC + 5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, there is a possibility that the LED may flicker under the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line supplied (output) from the power supply board 630 is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the + 12V power supply line having extremely high noise resistance as compared with the + 5V power supply line is fixed. The linear power supply 283xa of the current drive circuit 283x independently generates +5 V DC as the internal power supply Vreg.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using the internal power supply Vreg only in the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate. Since it can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. This stabilizes the internal power supply Vreg, thereby contributing to preventing flickering of the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 due to external noise. Therefore, it is possible to increase resistance to external noise. In addition, the input electric wiring and the external transmission electric wiring for the + 5V power supply line are not required, which can contribute to downsizing of the connector.

[Reset part]
The reset unit 283xb generates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, outputs the signal to the constant current driving circuit 283x, initializes the constant current driving circuit 283x, and operates the constant current driving circuit 283x. It is a so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi start operating.

  For example, the reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 206 is not input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, and the constant current drive circuit 283x independently generates a reset signal as the internal reset signal RST and uses the internal reset signal RST in the constant current drive circuit 283x. I have. For example, when a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter, referred to as a “reset signal transmission line”) is used, the reset signal transmission line may be used by routing electric wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal becomes longer, so that noise easily enters. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current driving circuit 283x, the constant current driving circuit 283x is reset by the influence of the external noise and the LED may be turned off. Thus, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the reset signal transmission line is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, and the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently generates a reset signal as the internal reset signal RST. did.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external substrate, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current driving circuit 283x to another substrate, and only in the constant current driving circuit 283x. By using this, external noise can be made difficult to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, so that the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. Thus, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, This can contribute to prevention of unexpected turning off and flickering of the LED elements constituting the full-color LED corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it is possible to increase resistance to external noise. Also, the need for the input electric wiring and the external transmission electric wiring for the reset signal transmission line is eliminated, which can contribute to downsizing of the connector.

[buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc transmits a serial data (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) from outside the constant current drive circuit 283x (hereinafter, referred to as a “data line”). Is a circuit capable of shaping the waveform of a signal to which serial data is input and transmitting the serial data and outputting the waveform to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd transmits a clock signal (here, a clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from outside the constant current drive circuit 283x (hereinafter, referred to as a "clock line"). Is a circuit capable of receiving a clock signal, shaping the waveform of the clock signal, and outputting the waveform to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x.

  As described above, the data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards. For this reason, the lengths of both the data line and the clock line are increased, so that noise easily enters. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current drive circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or the clock line immediately before input to the constant current drive circuit 283x is provided. In such a manner that the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd shape the waveforms so that the signal is not transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent substrate.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when both the data line and the clock line are long, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line that are resistant to noise. As a result, signal transmission resistant to noise can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to increase resistance to external noise.

[Address setting section]
The address setting unit 283xe sets 64 addresses as IDs (IDs that can identify an individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa by using three ID resistors (not shown). You can do it.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ID that can identify the individual of the constant current drive circuit 283x is set in advance by the address setting unit 283xe by a hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not set appropriately by receiving data by software.

[Oscillator, logic processing unit]
The logic processing unit 283xg outputs serial data from the outside of the constant current driving circuit 283x (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd. The shaped clock signal (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) based on the address which is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. In some cases, the gradation information is fetched from the serial data, and the gradation of the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on a signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so that the gradation information becomes the fetched gradation information. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in the serial data is not taken in and set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current content.

[PWM part]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation) of the LED in each output channel from the unlit state to the lit state (maximum luminance) in a total of 128 levels from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127. That is, the gradation is controlled by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown) for one output channel. That is, the PWM unit 283xh includes the PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the gradation is set, each of the PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 controls the constant current driving unit 283xi so that a current having the set gradation is passed.

[Constant current driver]
The constant current drive unit 283xi has one constant (not shown) for one output channel so that the gradation is set to the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 included in the above-described PWM unit 283xh. The current driver allows a constant current to flow through the LED elements constituting the full-color LED. That is, the constant current driver 283xi includes the constant current drivers 1 to 24 individually (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation controllers 1 to the PWM gradation controller 24.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 include one end of a resistor Rr for setting a maximum current flowing through a red (R) light emitting LED element constituting a full color LED in eight output channels LR1 to LR8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to ground (GND). The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 include one end of a resistor Rg for setting a maximum current flowing through a green (G) light-emitting LED element forming a full-color LED in eight output channels LG1 to LG8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to ground (GND). The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 include one end of a resistor Rb for setting a maximum current flowing through a blue (B) light emitting LED element forming a full color LED in eight output channels LB1 to LB8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to ground (GND).

  The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element which constitute full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line, and receives a direct current of + 12V.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat spreading resistors. 1 to a constant current driver 8) so that a constant current flowing through a red (R) LED element constituting a full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8, respectively. Has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 9 to the constant current driver 16), so that a constant current flowing through the green (G) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 17 to the constant current driver 24), so that a constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24, respectively. ing.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively draw constant currents flowing through the individually set red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LED, thereby forming the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LED Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 respectively draw a constant current flowing through the individually set green (G) LED elements forming the full-color LED, and thereby the green (G) LED elements forming the full-color LED Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 respectively absorb the constant current flowing through the individually set full-color LED blue (B) LED elements, thereby forming the full-color LED blue (B) LED elements. Can emit light.

  As described above, the LED constant current driving circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting 24 LED elements, that is, eight full-color LEDs with individually set constant currents. Thus, it is possible to perform turning off, lighting with one gradation, blinking with one gradation, and the like.

[Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes the above-described resistor Rr for setting the maximum current flowing through the red (R) LED element constituting the full-color LED in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8, and the output channels LG1 to LR8. A resistor Rg for setting the maximum current flowing through the green (G) light emitting LED element constituting the full-color LED in eight output channels up to LG8, and a full-color LED in eight output channels LB1 to LB8. And a resistor Rb for setting a maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits blue (B) light.

  As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 provided in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). I have. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 included in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). I have. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 included in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND). I have.

[Decorative board with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a decorative board including an LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 and 262. Here, a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decorative board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. Note that the above-described LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is configured as the same circuit. For this reason, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals in FIGS. 261 and 262 for convenience of description.

[Decorative board with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. 261, a lower left decorative board 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, A distribution circuit 283c is provided.

  As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes the light emission data SDAT1 which is the door frame side first serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , A clock signal SCLK1. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line of the power board 630 to input DC + 12V, and electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power board 630. Connected and grounded to ground (GND).

  As described above, the dish lower left decorative board 283 has the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) of the dish unit 200 from the door frame sub-relay board 105. It is input via the plate unit relay board 214. The DC +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, and constitutes sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, an anode terminal of a red (R) LED element, an anode terminal of a green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. Drivers 1 to 6) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6, respectively. The driver 9 is electrically connected to the constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current driving circuit 283a (the above-described constant current, The driver 17 is electrically connected to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (the light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 283a starts the light emission data SDAT1. The gradation information is fetched, and the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled and lighted so that the fetched gradation information is obtained.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (sink) type, it generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is covered by the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6 that constitute the heat dispersion circuit 283c. Thus, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) can be dispersed.

  In addition, the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is decorated on the upper left of the plate via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the constant current drive circuit 283x described above). The DC +12 V and the ground (GND) are input to the board upper left decorative board 273 via the dish lower left decorative board 283 while being input to the board 273. This prevents noise that has entered the data line or clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x) from being transmitted to the upper left dish decoration board 273 that is the subsequent board. The waveform can be shaped in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd provided in the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x).

  The DC +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and constitutes suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, an anode terminal of a red (R) LED element, an anode terminal of a green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, respectively. Drivers 1 to 6) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistors suRg1 to suRg6, respectively. The driver 9 is electrically connected to the constant current driver 14). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistors suRb1 to suRb6, respectively. The driver 17 is electrically connected to the constant current driver 22). The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 273a starts the light emission data SDAT1. The gradation information is fetched, and the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are individually controlled and lighted so as to become the fetched gradation information.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is a sink (sink) type, it generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the suLED1 to the suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is covered by the heat dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 273c. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (accurately, the constant current drive circuit 273x).

  In addition, as a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, besides the lower left decorative board 283 and the upper left decorative board 273, the lower right decorative board 288, the upper right decorative board 278, and the upper left decorative board 456 , And a door frame top right decorative substrate 457.

[Decorative board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 262, the left side lower decorative board 402b is an LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, 402bb, and hdLED1 which is 10 full-color LEDs. To hdLED 10 and a heat distribution circuit 402bc.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is, as described above, the emission data SDAT2 which is the door frame side second serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. , And a clock signal SCLK2. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line of the power board 630 to input DC + 12V, and electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power board 630. Connected and grounded to ground (GND).

  As described above, the left side lower decorative board 402b receives the input of the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay board 105. I have. The DC + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and constitutes the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element and the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element. , And blue (B) LED elements.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. It can be controlled. For this reason, among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the light emission mode is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba for the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, and the remaining two LEDs are controlled. The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb controls the light emission mode for the hdLED9 and hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs. Further, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the upper left side decorative substrate 402a, which is a succeeding substrate across the substrate on which it is mounted (that is, the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b). The light emission mode of huLED1 to huLED5 is controlled.

  Of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to sdLED8 are the same as the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, respectively. The heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (the above-described constant current drivers 1 to 8) of the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (the above-described constant current drivers 9 to 16) via the heat dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. And electricity , And the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are output channels LB1 to LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via heat dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. It is electrically connected to the above-described constant current drivers 17 to 24).

  Among ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10 are different from the two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10, respectively. The heat-dissipation resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the constant current driver 1 and the constant current driver 2 described above). The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the above-described constant current driver 9 and constant current driver 1) via heat dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. ), And the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that constitute the full color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are output channels of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. LB1 and LB2 (the constant current driver 17 and the constant current driver 18 described above) are electrically connected.

  Also, for the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the red color configuring the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 ( The cathode terminal of the LED element R) is connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistances huRr1b to huRr5b on the upper left side decorative substrate 402a and the heat dispersion resistances huRr1a to huRr5a on the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (the constant current drivers 3 to 7 described above) and constitute the huLED1 to huLED5 that are full-color LEDs are respectively Decoration on left side The output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the above-described constant current drivers 11 to LG7) via the heat dispersion resistances huRg1b to huRg5b in the plate 402a and the heat dispersion resistances huRg1a to huRg5a in the lower left decorative board 402b. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the driver 15) and that constitute huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, are heat dissipating resistances huRb1b to huRb5b and left, respectively, on the upper left side decorative substrate 402a. Electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (the above-described constant current drivers 19 to 23) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors huRb1a to huRb5a in the lower side decorative substrate 402b. To have. Note that the output channels LR8, LG8, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba starts the light emission data SDAT2. Gradation information is fetched, and among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are individually controlled and lighted so that the fetched gradation information is obtained. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (light emission data) input via the data line buffer 402baxc and the clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402ba constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on the SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2), the gradation information is fetched from the light emission data SDAT2, and the gradation information is set so as to be the fetched gradation information. Of the two full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are individually controlled and turned on, and the left side, which is a substrate subsequent to the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, is used. Upper decorative substrate 40 Is the five independent control huLED1~huLED5 a full-color LED of and turned dimming implemented in a.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is of a sink (sink) type, it generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through eight hdLED1 to hdLED8 among the ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. I do. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is covered by the heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, and hdRb1 to hdRb8 which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax).

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is of a sink (sink) type, the constant current flowing through two hdLED9 and hdLED10 among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is absorbed by the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb. Heat is generated by drawing in a constant current flowing through five full-color LEDs, huLED1 to huLED5, mounted on the left upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the lower side decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is transferred to two hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of the ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Five pieces of heat dissipating resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, hdRb10, which constitute the heat dispersing circuit 402bc, and are mounted on the left upper decorative board 402a, which is the subsequent board of the left lower decorative board 402b For the huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, the heat dispersion resistors huRr1a to huRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc in the lower decorative board 402b on the left side, and upper left side. The heat dissipating resistors huRr1b to huRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, and huRb1b to huRb5b, which constitute the heat dissipating circuit 402ac in the decorative board 402a, serve as the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current driving circuit 402bbx). The heat can be dissipated.

  Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the lower left decorative board 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative board 402a are the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the device, the device also has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  Note that, in addition to the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, a plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a plate center lower decorative substrate 316, a side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413, and a right side There is a lower decorative substrate 418b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455.

  In addition to the left upper decorative board 402a, there is a right upper decorative board 418a as a decorative board without any LED constant current drive circuit.

[Method of Arranging LED Constant Current Drive Circuit]
Next, an arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit as described above. Here, a description will be given as an electronic component in which the constant current driving circuit configuring the LED constant current driving circuit is integrated on one semiconductor chip. As a type of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit, a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square planar shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). ), So-called VQFN. Of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuit, one end side is the input side, and the remaining three end sides are the output side 1 to the output side 3, respectively. In FIG. 264, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for clarity of the drawing.

  As described above, each decorative board of the door frame 3 in this embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and has one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. There is. Since the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuits on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is substantially the same, here, the left side formed in a vertically elongated strip-shaped plate having two LED constant current drive circuits is provided. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape will be described.

[Left side lower decorative board]
As shown in FIG. 263 (a), the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba, 402bb, ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb are The pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b which is the back side. A connector LDUCN for connecting the upper left decorative board 402a and the electric wiring is mounted on the upper side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b, and the LED is not mounted on the lower left lower decorative board 402b. On the lower side of the surface 402by, a connector LDLCN for connecting the door frame sub relay board 105 and the electric wiring is mounted.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, connectors, through holes, test pads, A white resist layer is formed in the entire area excluding lands and the like by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). Have been. In the present embodiment, the reflectivity of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) is generated by the solid color white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Can be enhanced.

  On the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are shown. The area is not printed at all as silk printing. Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the board management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

  This is because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b due to the light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is reduced by the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged. Is preventing that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b on the LED mounting surface 402bx from being reduced due to the light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

  Further, the door frame left side decorative body 404 shown in FIG. 75 provided on the door frame 3 is attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side inner lens 403 as described above. A left side inner lens 403 is attached to the rear of the door frame left side decorative body 404. As described above, the left side inner lens 403 is formed so as to be transparent, subjected to lens cutting (formed into a polyhedron), and capable of irregularly refracting light. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 disposed behind the front panel are difficult to clearly see from the player side. When the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his / her head (face), his / her line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). Even in the case where the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface 402bx, in the first place, the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED1 Since the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk-screen printing, they correspond to full-color LEDs that have no relation to the game for the player at all. The part number and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are prevented from being visually recognized by the player. It is. Therefore, a number specifying the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10) and an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, a full color LED) An area indicating a position where a certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 is arranged) can be made difficult for a player to visually recognize.

  In addition, on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged are completely printed as silk. Not printed. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN that has no relation to the game and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged.

  As described above, a white resist layer is formed from the solid white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as the white), and the connector LDUCN has a housing whose white is a natural color (also referred to as a natural color. Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Also, the board management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is printed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in a form of a foiled character (that is, a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed). The character is formed as a pattern, and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form a blank character). The white character that is solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is used to form the character. Covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. Note that the board management number of the lower left lower decorative board 402b is obtained by replacing the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b with the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative board 402b with a foiled character (that is, a wiring pattern). May be formed on a layer (copper plane) in which a character is formed by a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil may be removed to form a character. On the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, a character with a foil-cut character (that is, a character is formed by a wiring pattern of copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed). (A blank character formed by removing a copper foil). Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a solid ground, as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the left side lower decorative board 402b is determined by using a foil-cut character (that is, forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) and removing the surrounding copper foil. Instead of a solid character formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx and a solid earth on the LED non-mounting surface 402by, the character is formed as a character with a character cut out on one or both surfaces. May be.

  On the other hand, on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit 402bay constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are provided. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, Rg and various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing using solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and electronic components are provided near these areas. Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the area indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 264 (a)) as a silk print, and a lower left lower decorative substrate. IC1 which is printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of the area LSLKa and above (FIG. 264 ( a) is printed as a silk print on a white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with a solid yellow line (or a black solid line). The area indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is printed in yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd as silk printing (see FIG. 264 (a)). Are printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the maximum current is set near and to the right of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd. The component numbers R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 264 (a)) corresponding to the resistances Rr, Rb, and Rg of the circuit 402bay are yellow (or black) by silk printing and are LEDs on the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The non-mounting surface 402by is printed on a solid white resist, respectively.

  In addition, on a white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, there are corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The areas to be printed are silk-printed by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (FIG. 264 (a) shows only the full-color LEDs hdLED4 and hdLED5 and the corresponding chain lines LSLK4 and LSLK5, respectively). Part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 near and above or below these areas LSLK1 to LSLK10 (FIG. 264 (a) shows the full color LEDs hdLED4, hdLED5 and Corresponding A part number LED 4, LED 5 only expressed respectively.) Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

  Note that, on a white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is arranged. Is printed with a yellow dashed line (or black dashed line) not shown as silk print, and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk print near this area. ing.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has any one of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectivity due to light emission of full-color LEDs, the LED non-mounting surface Has been implemented.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, (One LED element emitting red (R), an LED element emitting green (G), and an LED element emitting blue (B) constitute one full-color LED.) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. Silk printing is performed on a white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the substrate 402b. Yellow not shown Te (or black) it is printed with. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thereby, when the worker performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the content of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  In the embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and a connector that does not have a white color have a low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED. Since the reflectance on the mounting surface was reduced, the LED was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all. However, of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, the area corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance in the above, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, or connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk print by a yellow dashed line (or a black dashed line) on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface. At the same time, in the vicinity of this area, a component number corresponding to the electronic component or the connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a so-called solid earth that grounds a region other than a land pattern and a wiring pattern of electronic components and connectors to the ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). I have.

  As described above, since the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically, as seen from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, The width from the left end 402beg1 to the right end 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width from the left end to the right end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx. For this reason, when the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the left edge 402beg1 or the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is extremely short, the wiring pattern will be drawn from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, since the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are limited by the minimum distance, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the end side. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged in a state of being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The configuration was adopted.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the lower right end of the four ends of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx is input. The terminal on the input side is arranged near the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b so as to be the terminal on the left side, and the terminal on the input side is the second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. ), +12 V DC, ground (GND), and the resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby are input, and the lower left side, the upper left side, and the upper right side are mainly the terminals of the output side 1 to the output side, respectively. 262. The terminals of the output side 1 to the terminals of the output side 3 are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 shown in FIG. LG8, LB1~LB8, and door frame side second serial line (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) to output the like. Note that the terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, 402bby is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which ground (GND) is input. I have.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being arranged in a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the minimum distance dimension from the respective lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are limited. Also, all the wiring patterns can be drawn out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn from the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, a group 1 including four full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED4 among eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current driving circuit 402bax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of the hdLED5 and the hdLED8, when the wiring pattern from the constant current driving circuit 402bax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed, the length thereof is increased. Can be formed uniformly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring patterns to the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened to one of the group 1 and the group 2. Efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in a work can be increased.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is connected to the central portion in the up-down direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (the hdLED6 which is a full-color LED in FIG. 263 (a), the constant-current drive circuit 402bbx can be arranged at the center in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (FIG. 263 (a)). (The portion where the hdLED 6 which is a full-color LED is disposed) is closer to the upper side, and can be disposed above the hdLED 8 which is a full-color LED configured in the group 2 whose emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax. . Thus, a region for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 can be secured on the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx 262. The area for routing the wiring pattern to the two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 and the five left-side upper decorative boards 402a shown in FIG. 402b.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are a surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are in a so-called EIA format 0805 (2012 by name, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length). : 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are compared with the sizes of the constant current driving circuits 402bax, 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb have one ends in the longitudinal direction at the left end of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The capacitor (not shown) is disposed so as to be parallel to 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2, and has one end in the longitudinal direction perpendicular to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each edge of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx arranged such that the edge of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively, so as to be non-parallel.

  In addition, as described above, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is such that the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is set at 45 degrees with respect to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative board. The door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453, which are arranged in an inclined state and are almost the same, are doors. Unlike the other decorative substrates of the frame 3, when the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, Since the width from the upper edge to the lower edge is large, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is divided into the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top. It is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper side and lower side of the right decorative substrate 457. That is, in the present embodiment, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate, and the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is non-parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate. And are mixed. In the present embodiment, the door frame top center decorative board 455 includes, in addition to the eleven full color LEDs provided therein, another center decorated board on which five not shown full color LEDs are mounted. Two LED constant current drive circuits (a first LED constant current drive circuit (a first constant current drive circuit, a first maximum current setting circuit), a second LED constant current drive circuit (a second constant current drive circuit, Illustrated by one LED constant current driving circuit (here, a second LED constant current driving circuit (second constant current driving circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)). Not provided with two heat-distribution circuits (a first constant-current drive circuit is a first heat-distribution circuit (heat-distribution resistor), and a second constant-current drive circuit is a second heat-distribution circuit (heat dispersion resistance)) Light emission control directly through the door frame top The left decorative board 456 includes, in addition to the seven full-color LEDs provided therein, another left decorative board on which one full-color LED (not shown) is mounted, and one LED constant current drive circuit (constant) provided therein. The light emission is directly controlled by a current driver circuit and a maximum current setting circuit via one heat dispersing circuit (heat dispersing resistor) included in the self-illustrating device (not shown), and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 includes six full-color LEDs included in itself. In addition, another right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted is connected to oneself (not shown) by one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided for itself. Light emission is controlled directly via one provided heat distribution circuit (heat dispersion resistance). The other central decorative substrate is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative substrate is formed on the left side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other right decorative substrate is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. It is necessary to provide a heat spreading circuit (heat spreading resistance) on each of the other center decorative boards, other left decorative boards, and other right decorative boards. As described above, the heat dispersing circuit (here, the second heat dispersing circuit (heat dissipating resistance)) provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455 itself and the heat dispersing circuits of the other central decorative boards are different from each other. In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (more precisely, the second constant current drive circuit) provided on the center decorative substrate 455 itself, it also prevents damage to electronic components due to static electricity. It also has the ability to do so. Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided on the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself and the heat distribution circuit provided on the other left decorative board itself are the LED constant current drive circuit (accurately provided on the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself). Has a function of dispersing heat generated by the constant current drive circuit) and a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity. In addition, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided on the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself and the heat distribution circuit provided on the other right decorative board are the LED constant current drive circuit (accurately provided on the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself). Has a function of dispersing heat generated by the constant current drive circuit) and a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  In addition, the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and ten full-color LEDs are arranged. When viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are closer to the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b and along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are located closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative board 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b. L of lower left side decorative substrate 402b Adopting a configuration of placing the D non-mounting surface 402By. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are of a sink (sink) type, and generate heat by sucking a constant current flowing through each LED element. For this reason, also in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, by separating the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx from the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, The heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less likely to be affected by the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

  In addition, by arranging the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx at a 45-degree angle with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit is provided. One in which the ends of the land patterns 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end and the right end of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top center decorative board 455 of the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative) In comparison with the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the decorative substrate in which the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative substrate is used. Can be further reduced in width from the left end side to the right end side. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension of the game board 5 in the left-right direction.

[Decorative plate on plate center]
As shown in FIG. 263 (b), the dish center decoration board 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, ten full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the like. While hLED1 to hLED10, which are ten full-color LEDs, are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, which is the upward side of the rendering operation unit 300, the LED constant current drive circuit 314a , 314b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, which is on the upper side of the effect operation unit 300. In addition, when the dish center upper decorative board 314 shown in FIG. 263 (b) is rotated to the left by 90 degrees (that is, the dish center upper decorative board 314 is actually arranged along the dish center upper decorative body 312a). On the right side along the upper edge 314eg1 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decoration board 314, a connector HCN for connecting the operation unit relay board 392 and the electric wiring is mounted.

  An electrode (so-called pad) for soldering electronic components such as a full-color LED, a resistor, an IC, a connector, a through hole, a test pad, and the like are provided on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. A white resist layer is formed in the entire area excluding lands and the like by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). Have been. In this embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is solid-coated with a white resist, so that hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, emit light forward (i.e., toward the upward side of the rendering operation unit 300). Can be increased in reflectance.

  Part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and positions at which hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are shown on a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The area is not printed at all as silk printing. Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

  This is because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 due to the emission of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 is reduced by the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged. Is preventing that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the dish from decreasing due to the emission of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

  In addition, as described above, the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 provided in the door frame 3 has the dish center upper inner lens 313 attached from the rear inside the dish center upper decorative body 312a. Below the dish center inner lens 313 (or behind), a dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is attached. As described above, the plate center upper decorative body 312a is formed transparent because the unit front cover 312 is formed transparent. As described above, the dish center inner lens 313 is formed so as to be transparent, is subjected to lens cutting (formed in a polyhedron), and is capable of irregularly refracting light. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 disposed below (or behind) the lens 313 are clearly hard to visually recognize from the player side. When the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves his / her head (face), his / her line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). Even when the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314, a full-color LED is first placed on the solid white resist coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 above the center of the plate. Since the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, the player has no relationship with the game at all. Make sure that the part number corresponding to the LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are visible to the player. It is sealed. Therefore, a number (that is, a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full color LED) that specifies hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full color LED and an auxiliary line that indicates a mounting position of hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full color LED (that is, a full color LED) (A region indicating a position where certain hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged) can be made difficult for a player to see.

  Note that, on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the part number corresponding to the connector HCN and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged are completely printed as silk-screened. Not printed. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector HCN that has no relation to the game for the player and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged.

  In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color; Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the present embodiment, electronic components (not shown) such as resistors and capacitors not shown in white and connectors not having white are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Also, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is a foiled character (that is, a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. It is formed as a blank character formed by forming a character with a pattern and removing the surrounding copper foil), and the foil-cut character is formed by a white resist solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. Note that the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is obtained by replacing the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 with the LED non-mounting face 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 with foil-cut characters (that is, the wiring pattern). May be formed in a layer (copper plane) in which a character is formed by a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil may be removed to form a character. On the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314 on the center of the plate, a character with a foil pattern (that is, a character is formed by a wiring pattern of copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). Each of them may be formed as a cut character formed by extracting a copper foil. Further, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a solid ground, as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is determined by using a foil-cut character (that is, a character is formed by a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) and the surrounding copper foil is removed. Instead of a solid character formed on the LED mounting surface 314x and a solid earth on the LED non-mounting surface 314y. It may be.

  On the other hand, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit 314ay constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are provided on a white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing (not shown) by a solid yellow line (or black solid line), respectively, and in the vicinity of these areas. The component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  Also, on a white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314, hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are supported. The area to be printed is printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) as silk printing, respectively, and part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are provided near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  Note that, on a white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314, an area indicating a position where the connector HCN mounted on the LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is arranged. Is printed with a yellow dashed line (or black dashed line) not shown as silk printing, and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (or black) not shown as silk printing near this area. ing.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance of the full-color LED due to light emission decreases.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, (One LED element emitting red (R), an LED element emitting green (G), and an LED element emitting blue (B) constitute one full-color LED.) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is displayed near the plurality of check pins. On a white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the substrate 314, yellow (not shown) is printed as silk printing. , It is printed in black). The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thereby, when the worker performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a so-called solid earth that grounds an area excluding a land pattern and a wiring pattern of electronic components and connectors to ground (GND). The solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center decoration board 314 and the solid earth formed on the LED non-mounting face 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). I have.

  In this embodiment, the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED is reduced. Electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, emit light by the full-color LED. Since the reflectivity on the LED mounting surface was reduced, the LED mounting surface was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectivity of the surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk print by a yellow dashed line (or a black dashed line) on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface. At the same time, in the vicinity of this area, a component number corresponding to the electronic component or the connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  As described above, the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in an elongated band shape having a semicircular arc shape, and thus the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 shown in FIG. 263 (b) is rotated to the left by 90 degrees. When viewed (that is, the state in which the decorative plate 314 on the center of the dish is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish), the upper edge 314eg1 to the lower edge 314eg2 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the center of the dish. Is only about 1.78 times the width from the left end to the right end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. For this reason, if the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the land of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or the lower edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 becomes extremely short, let's draw the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, since the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are limited by the minimum distance, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the end side. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The configuration was adopted.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration board 314 on the center of the plate, the lower left end of the four ends of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is input. The terminal on the input side is arranged on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) shown in FIG. ), DC +12 V, ground (GND), and the resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left end, the upper right end, and the lower right end are mainly terminals of the output side 1 to the output side, respectively. 3, the output side 1 to the output side 3 are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and The door frame side first serial line (emission data SDAT1, clock signals SCLK1) to output the like. Note that the terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, 314by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which ground (GND) is input. I have.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the dish center upper decorative board 314. In addition to being arranged in a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the lower end side 314eg2 of the decoration substrate 314 above the center of the dish. As a result, from the respective lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the minimum distance dimension are restricted to the interval between adjacent wiring patterns. Also, all the wiring patterns can be drawn out. Therefore, it is possible to secure an area where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular shape.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, a group 1 including four full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4 among eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current driving circuit 314ax can be arranged between the group 2 including the hLED5 and the hLED8, when the wiring pattern from the constant current driving circuit 314ax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed, the length thereof is increased. Can be formed uniformly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring patterns to the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened to one of the group 1 and the group 2. Efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in a work can be increased.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, when the decorative plate 314 above the plate center shown in FIG. 263 (b) is rotated to the left by 90 degrees (that is, the decorative substrate 314 above the plate center is The state in which the constant current drive circuit 314ax is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a) and the constant current drive circuit 314ax is a full-color LED in a semi-circular center portion of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (FIG. 263 (b)). The hLED 6 can be arranged closer to the right side than the hLED 6 is arranged, and the constant current drive circuit 314bx is provided at the semi-circular center portion (FIG. 263 (b)) on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314. ), Which is closer to the left side than the portion where the hdLED 6 which is a full-color LED is disposed, and whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314ax. It can be arranged on the left of hLED8 a full-color LED configured to 2. Thus, a region for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 can be secured on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and the constant current drive circuit 314bx An area for routing wiring patterns to the two full-color LEDs hLED9 and hLED10 can be secured on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are a surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are in a so-called EIA format 0805 (2012 by name, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length). : 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are compared with the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. For this reason, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb have one ends in the longitudinal direction at the upper end of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The capacitor (not shown) is disposed so as to be parallel to 314eg1 and the lower side 314eg2, and one end in the longitudinal direction is perpendicular to the upper side 314eg1 and the lower side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each end of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx arranged such that the edge of the land pattern is inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the upper center plate 314, Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end of the capacitor (not shown) in the longitudinal direction are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 so that they are not parallel to each other.

  In addition, the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end 314eg1 and the lower end 314eg2 of the upper plate 314, and ten full-color LEDs are provided. When viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, hLED1 to hLED10 are closer to the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative board 314 and formed in a semicircular shape of the LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. In contrast, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are located closer to the upper end side 314eg1 of the dish center upper decorative board 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. In this case, a configuration is adopted in which the light emitting device is disposed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are of the sink (sink) type, as described above, as in the case of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Fever. For this reason, even in the upper center decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are separated from the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 by separating them. Heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be made less likely to be affected by the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

  In addition, the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged such that the edges of the land patterns are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the upper plate 314. One in which the ends of the land patterns 314ax and 314bx are arranged to be parallel to the left end and the right end of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top center decorative board 455 of the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative) Compared with the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the decorative substrate in which the edges of the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative substrate is used. Can be further reduced in width from the left end side to the right end side. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction and the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the effect operation unit 300, so that the large effect operation unit 300 can be provided on the door frame 3 and the effect operation unit can be provided. A light emission effect by 300 can be performed.

[A pad on the bottom of the IC package of the constant current driver]
As described above, the IC packages of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the lower left decorative board 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are flat as described above. It is a surface mount type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, an IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the lower left decorative substrate 402b will be described with reference to FIG.

  A metal pad FP is exposed at the center of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called Exposed Pad (hereinafter referred to as "EPad") is formed. This IC package is configured so that heat dissipation and bonding properties can be improved by being soldered to a substrate.

  In the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, a land pattern EP for EPad having a square shape is provided in addition to each lead pad. The land pattern EP for EPad is electrically connected to the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative board 402b. In the area of the EPad land pattern EP, nine thermal vias TV are arranged in a formation lattice. These thermal vias TV electrically connect the land pattern EP for EPad and the solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. For this reason, it is impossible to draw out the wiring pattern from each lead pad into the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transmitted from the EPad to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b via the EPad land pattern EP. By diffusing, it is possible to dissipate heat in the entire left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  The relationship between the land pattern EP for EPad and the nine thermal vias TV will be briefly described. The junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit is soldered to the land pattern EP for EPad has a constant current. The number and diameter of the thermal vias TV are selected so as to be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit. Thereby, the junction area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit and the land pattern EP for EPad are soldered is not too large to prevent the occurrence of voids, and this junction area is not too small and stable. It is possible to obtain an improved bonding strength. The land pattern EP for EPad may be divided into a lattice shape. In this case, too, in order to prevent the generation of voids and obtain a stable bonding strength, as described above, the constant current driving circuit (The metal pad FP) must be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

  Further, in contrast to the case where the ends of the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current driving circuits 402bax, 402bbx When the edge of the land pattern is arranged at a 45 degree angle with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the heat dissipation effect of the constant current drive circuit 402bax against heat generation is high. Become. When the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the EPad land pattern EP is similarly set to the left. In the case where the side edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged in parallel with the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower side decorative substrate 402b so as to be inclined by 45 degrees. , EPad land patterns EP are also arranged in a state inclined at 45 degrees. When the edge of the EPad land pattern EP is arranged in parallel with the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the edge of the EPad land pattern EP and the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged. The distance dimension between the left end side 402beg1 or the right end side 402beg2 and the distance dimension to the substrate end side are reduced, in other words, the room for heat radiation on the substrate is reduced. . On the other hand, the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b when the end side of the land pattern EP for EPad is arranged at a 45 degree angle with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Alternatively, the distance dimension between the right end side 402beg2 and the distance between the vertex of the EPad land pattern EP and the substrate side is a shorter portion, but the two sides in contact with the vertex are not parallel to the substrate side. Since the room for heat dissipation on the substrate is large, it can be said that the heat dissipation effect is higher than when the edge of the EPad land pattern EP and the edge of the substrate are parallel.

  As described above, each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and has one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In the present embodiment, as an example, as described above, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b provided with two LED constant current driving circuits and formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically, and a semicircle The upper plate center decorative plate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having an arc shape will be described, and a part number corresponding to the full-color LED and an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged will be described. A part number corresponding to a full-color LED that can prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from decreasing and has no relation to the game for the player at all. And a region indicating where to place a full-color LED has been described in detail that it is taken measures such reflectance decrease that can be prevented from being viewed by the player.

  Here, other configurations of the present invention in which a measure such as a decrease in reflectance is taken (hereinafter, referred to as “a configuration of a measure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second to fifth embodiments”) are shown in FIGS. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 265 shows a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. FIG. 266 shows a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment. FIG. FIG. 269 is an enlarged view of the D ″ part of FIG. 266 or the D ″ part of FIG. 270 as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface. FIG. 268 shows a configuration of a measure against a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 270 is an enlarged view of a portion D ′ ″ in FIG. 268 viewed from the LED non-mounting surface, and FIG. 270 is a configuration of a measure for reducing a reflectance according to the fifth embodiment. 265 to 270 have the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 263 and 264 (hereinafter, described as a configuration for measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment). Are denoted by the same reference numerals. Further, in FIG. 267, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for clarity of the drawing. Further, in FIG. 269, various electronic components are omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, the center button decoration substrate 376, and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 in the effect operation unit 300 and the handle decoration substrate 184 in the handle unit 180 have the reflection according to the first embodiment described above. Configuration of countermeasures such as a reduction in the rate (a part number corresponding to the full-color LED and an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged can prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the emission of the full-color LED, and A countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance that prevents a player from seeing a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all and a region indicating a position where the full-color LED is arranged, to the player. Has been adopted), but the second Configuration measures the reflectance decreases and the like according to the embodiment to the fifth embodiment may be employed.

[Comparison of configuration of countermeasures such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment with configuration of countermeasures such as reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the hdLED1 to the full-color LED are placed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the region indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current driving circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit which constitute the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba are formed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as the 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing with a yellow solid line (or black solid line), respectively, and in the vicinity of these areas. The component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The areas corresponding to the hdLED1 to the hdLED10 are printed as silk prints by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines), respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to the hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs are printed in the vicinity of these areas as silk prints. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the full-color LED is provided on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit which constitute the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are formed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314a. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as the resistors 314ay Rr, Rb, Rg and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (or a black solid line) (not shown). In the vicinity, a component number corresponding to the electronic component is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper dish center decorative substrate 314. The areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed as silk prints by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. On the upper side, a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which is a full-color LED, and an area indicating a position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs are arranged are printed as silk printing, respectively. Specifically, the area indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be arranged is a silk printed solid yellow line LSLK1 to LSLK10 on a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In the vicinity of these areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs, are located in the left or upper direction, and are yellow as silk-screen printing in the lower left side. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the decorative substrate 402b is printed on a solid white resist.

  On the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (not shown), In the vicinity of this area, a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  As described above, a white resist layer is formed from the solid white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as the white), and the connector LDUCN has a housing whose white is a natural color (also referred to as a natural color. Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. Silk printing on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of 402b It is printed at the indicated no yellow. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thereby, when the worker performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the content of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  Here, a white color is used as the color of the resist liquid solid-coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and a white resist is solid-colored on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. A description will be given of an area indicating positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged on the upper side of the silk-screen printing, and the reason why yellow is adopted as the silk-printing paint of the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white coating. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, when the background is white, the red color is conspicuous, the area indicating the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, and the part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 When silk-printing on a white resist solid-coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b with red paint, a full-color LED silk-printed with red paint on the white resist is used. A region indicating a position where a certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 is arranged, and a part number corresponding to the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 are conspicuous, but a combination of white and yellow (measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment) Configuration), yellow is noticeable when the background is white Instead, the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be arranged, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 were solid-filled with yellow paint on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b. In the case of silk-printing on a white resist, a region indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, which is silk-printed with a yellow paint on the white resist, corresponds to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 The part number to be used is not noticeable. In addition, the area | region which shows the position where hdLED1-hdLED10 which is a full-color LED is arrange | positioned, and the component number corresponding to hdLED1-hdLED10 which is a full-color LED are the front side electronic components mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b. Is a front-side notation part (which may be simply referred to as a “notation part”) which can specify the part number of the front-side electronic component and the position at which the front-side electronic component is arranged. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the area indicated (including the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the type of the front-side electronic component. ).

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light emission effect by illumination with a plurality of light emitting units such as LEDs mounted on each decorative board, the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are full color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. Yes, the light emission mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (light emission) or turned off. For this reason, as described above, electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, connectors, through holes, test holes, and the like are provided on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b. A white resist layer is formed over the entire area except for the pads, lands, and the like by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). Is formed, furthermore, on the solid-colored white resist, it is possible to specify a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors, a region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED1. The hdLED10 and the corresponding part number are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. When the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, a white resist is silk-printed with a yellow paint, a region indicating a position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, and the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. In addition to making the corresponding part numbers inconspicuous, when a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (light emission), a solid white resist having a high reflectance and a white An area indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged, which is printed by silk printing with a yellow paint very close to the reflectance, and a combination of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the corresponding part numbers, left Side lower decorative substrate 402b It is possible to maintain a high reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402Bx.

  In addition, when yellow is adopted as the paint for the silk printing, the yellow printed by the silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to the variation of the printing machine, or it may appear orange. In some cases. Ink companies that supply silk printing paint also have a yellow color range (yellow to the light side, yellow to the dark side). Even if yellow is specified, the color is not exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make the color exactly the same), and the color has a wide range of yellow.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 267, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba has a maximum current on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing with a yellow solid line (or black solid line), respectively, and these areas are also printed. In the vicinity, a component number corresponding to the electronic component is printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, a region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 267 (a)) as a silk print and a lower left lower decorative substrate. IC1 which is printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax near and above this area LSLKa (FIG. 267 ( a) is printed as a silk print on a white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with a solid yellow line (or a black solid line). The area indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is printed by silk solid yellow lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 267 (a)). Are printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the maximum current is set near and to the right of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd. The component numbers R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 267 (a)) corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the circuit 402bay are yellow (or black) as silk prints and are LEDs on the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The non-mounting surface 402by is printed on a solid white resist, respectively.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has any one of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectivity due to light emission of full-color LEDs, the LED non-mounting surface Has been implemented.

  In the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectivity and the like according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are formed of a solid white resist with a white resist. A layer is formed. Accordingly, the solid-state white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b increases the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). You can do it.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. The part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 and the areas indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing, respectively. Specifically, the area indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be arranged is printed on a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 with a solid yellow line HSLK1 to HSLK10 as silk printing. And LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10, and are yellow as silk prints on the plate center decoration board. The LED mounting surface 314x 314 is printed on a solid white resist.

  In addition, on the white resist solid-filled on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, an area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (not shown), In the vicinity of this area, a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color; Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the plate center. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, lighting inspection is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute two full-color LEDs). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. On a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the LED 314, a yellow color (not shown) is printed as silk printing. To have. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thereby, when the worker performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  Here, a white color is adopted as the color of the resist liquid solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and the solid color of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is adopted. A description will be given of an area indicating positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged on the upper side of the silk printing, and the reason why yellow is adopted as the silk printing paint of the part number corresponding to the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. First, the reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas the reflectance decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectivity is very close to the white reflectivity compared to the red reflectivity, and the red reflectivity is very far from the white reflectivity to the yellow reflectivity. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white coating. For this reason, in the combination of white and red, when the background is white, red becomes conspicuous, the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 In the case of silk-printing on a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate with a red paint, a full-color LED silk-printed with a red paint on the white resist is used. A region indicating a position where a certain hLED1 to hLED10 is arranged, and a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are conspicuous, but a combination of white and yellow (measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment) Configuration), the yellow is not noticeable when the background is white, and the full-color LED A region indicating a position where a certain hLED1 to hLED10 is arranged, and a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are placed on a white resist solid-filled on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 with yellow paint. In the case of silk printing, the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, which is silk-printed with a yellow paint on the white resist, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 stand out. hard. In addition, the area | region which shows the position which arrange | positions hLED1-hLED10 which is a full-color LED, the part number corresponding to hLED1-hLED10 which is a full-color LED is the surface side electronic component mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration board 314 on the plate center. Is a front-side notation part (which may be simply referred to as a “notation part”) which can specify the part number of the front-side electronic component and the position at which the front-side electronic component is arranged. Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as the area indicated (including the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the type of the front-side electronic component. ).

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light emission effect by illumination with a plurality of light emitting units such as LEDs mounted on each decorative board, hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors. Yes, the light emission mode changes variously depending on whether the light is turned on (light emission) or turned off. For this reason, as described above, electrodes (so-called pads) for soldering electronic components such as full-color LEDs, resistors, ICs, connectors, through holes, test holes, and the like are provided on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314 above the plate. A white resist layer is formed over the entire area except for the pads, lands, and the like by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). Is formed, furthermore, the full-color LED capable of specifying full-color LEDs capable of emitting multi-colors on the solid-colored white resist can be specified. Multi-color emission is possible by printing the part number corresponding to hLED10 by silk printing with yellow paint. When the full-color LED is turned off, the white resist is silk-printed with yellow paint, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED hLED1 to hLED10 is arranged, and the part number corresponding to the full-color LED hLED1 to hLED10 In addition to being able to be inconspicuous, when a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is lit (during light emission), a solid white resist having a high reflectance and a very high white reflectance are obtained. Decorative board 314 on the center of the dish by a combination of areas indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be arranged by silk printing with a near yellow paint, and part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs. High reflectivity of LED mounting surface 314x It can be maintained.

  When yellow is used as the paint for silk printing, the silk printing may become light yellow or dark yellow due to the variation of the printing machine, it may appear orange, The ink company that supplies the printing paint also has a yellow color (yellow to the light side, yellow to the dark side), so yellow is specified as the silk printing paint for the same board manufacturer or multiple board companies. However, the color is not exactly the same yellow (it is difficult to make the color exactly the same), and the color has a wide range of yellow.

  On the other hand, a constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a and a resistance Rr of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are formed on a white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314y. Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as Rb, Rg, various dispersion resistors, etc. are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing (not shown) by a solid yellow line (or a black solid line), respectively. The corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  In the second embodiment, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current driving circuit 314ax ( 314bx) has a package made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance of the full-color LED due to light emission decreases.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate are also formed by a white resist which is a solid white resist. A layer is formed. Accordingly, the solid color white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 reflects light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the rendering operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are provided on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The corresponding part numbers and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk-screen printing, and are solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the area indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, Part numbers (yellow letters and numbers) corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and full-color LEDs are provided on a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Regions (solid yellow lines) indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to the hdLED10 are to be arranged are printed as silk printing, respectively, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the dish is solid-coated on a white resist. The part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and regions (solid yellow lines) indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged, respectively, are silk-printed. They differ in that they are printed.

  With the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, it is possible to increase the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). It has become. In addition, a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is used to reflect the light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the staging operation unit 300). Can be enhanced. For this reason, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged are printed in black as silk printing on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In the case of printing, the silk printing printed in black reduces the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, and causes a problem that the emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Also, various decorations provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decoration 271, the lower left decoration 281, the upper right decoration 276, the lower right decoration 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75). The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Since the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes according to the direction of the head (face). In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative boards provided. Then, there arises a problem that the player sees the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player at all and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed. By printing on a white resist solidly colored on the LED mounting surface in yellow, which is a bright color different from black, on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface, an auxiliary indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED It can be difficult to find a line (that is, a region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) or find a number that specifies the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED).

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged are silk-printed, which is different from black and light yellow. By printing on a solid white resist coated on the LED mounting surface, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the emission of the full-color LED.

  The configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment can provide the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment. In other words, a number specifying the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) are made difficult for the player to see. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the emission of the full-color LED.

  In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged is silk-printed, and is different from black and light-colored). When printing on a white resist with a yellow solid color on the LED mounting surface, the symbol representing the polarity of the full-color LED (the symbol used in the circuit diagram (the symbol that can distinguish the anode terminal and the cathode terminal)) Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a symbol used in the circuit diagram (a symbol in which the anode terminal and the cathode terminal can be distinguished) may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  In the second embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and the connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED. Is not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED. However, in the LED mounting surface by full-color LED emission, the region corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, an area indicating the position where electronic components and connectors are arranged is printed as a silk print on a solid white resist that is solidly coated on the LED mounting surface with a yellow solid line (not shown), and in the vicinity of this area, The part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts and connectors are printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged has a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED, and is printed on the LED mounting surface with a solid yellow line as silk printing. Although it was configured to be printed on a solid white resist, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged has a shape smaller than the outer shape of the full-color LED (for example, a square shape smaller than the full-color LED main body; (Thick line) and printed on a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface with a solid yellow line as silk printing. With this configuration, when the full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED printed by silk printing is arranged is covered by the full-color LED main body. The solid line disappears, which can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

[Comparison of configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to the first embodiment with configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to third embodiment]
In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the hdLED1 to the full-color LED are placed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the region indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current driving circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit which constitute the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba are formed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as the 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing with a yellow solid line (or black solid line), respectively, and in the vicinity of these areas. The component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The areas corresponding to the hdLED1 to the hdLED10 are printed as silk prints by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines), respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to the hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs are printed in the vicinity of these areas as silk prints. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the full-color LED is provided on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit which constitute the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are formed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314a. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as the resistors 314ay Rr, Rb, Rg and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (or a black solid line) (not shown). In the vicinity, a component number corresponding to the electronic component is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper dish center decorative substrate 314. The areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed as silk prints by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. -HdLED10 is a foil-cut character (that is, a blank character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil ( In FIG. 266 (c), only the foil-colored character LED7 is shown as a part number corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED.)), And an area indicating a position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged. A foil extraction area excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a wiring pattern is formed In the (copper plane), a region excluding each terminal and a wiring pattern is formed by extracting a copper foil (FIG. 266 (c) shows only a foil-extracted region LSLK7 as a region corresponding to hdLED7 which is a full-color LED). )), And the foil-removed area and the foil-removed letters are respectively covered with a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Specifically, regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b as foil removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, respectively. In the vicinity of the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b as left characters. The foil-printed area and the foil-printed characters are respectively covered with a white resist solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut character is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is a foil-cut region (not shown) except for each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). Layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a region where copper foil is removed), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is not shown near this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil).

  As described above, a white resist layer is formed from the solid white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as the white), and the connector LDUCN has a housing whose white is a natural color (also referred to as a natural color. Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1 (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided near the plurality of check pins (not shown). In other words, the wiring pattern formed of copper foil on the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed is written. It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil around make. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thereby, when the worker performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the content of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 267, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba has a maximum current on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing with a yellow solid line (or black solid line), respectively, and these areas are also printed. In the vicinity, a component number corresponding to the electronic component is printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, a region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 267 (a)) as a silk print and a lower left lower decorative substrate. IC1 which is printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax near and above this area LSLKa (FIG. 267 ( a) is printed as a silk print on a white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with a solid yellow line (or a black solid line). The area indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is printed by silk solid yellow lines (or black solid lines) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 267 (a)). Are printed on a solid white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the maximum current is set near and to the right of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd. The component numbers R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 267 (a)) corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the circuit 402bay are yellow (or black) as silk prints and are LEDs on the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The non-mounting surface 402by is printed on a solid white resist, respectively.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has any one of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectivity due to light emission of full-color LEDs, the LED non-mounting surface Has been implemented.

  In the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectivity or the like according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are formed by a solid white resist. A layer is formed. Accordingly, the solid-state white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b increases the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). You can do it.

  In the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectivity or the like according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 266 (b), hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are provided on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The corresponding part number is formed as a foil-cut character (that is, a cut character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil). In addition, a region indicating a position at which hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged is a terminal area (not shown) except a wiring pattern (not shown). And the wiring pattern, excluding the copper foil). WHITE resists areafill to D mounting surface 314x and its foil vent area and the foil outline characters are covered respectively. Specifically, regions indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 as foil removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are formed in the vicinity of the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 to the right and are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 as blank characters, respectively. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed character are respectively covered by a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative substrate 314. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut character is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, an area indicating a position where the connector HCN is arranged is a foil-cut area (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). Layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a region where copper foil is removed), and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is not shown near this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil).

  In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color; Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, lighting inspection is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements emitting red (R), the LED element emitting green (G), and the LED element emitting blue (B), which constitute two full-color LEDs). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided near the plurality of check pins (not shown). In other words, characters are formed on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thereby, when the worker performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, a constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a and a resistance Rr of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are formed on a white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314y. Regions indicating positions where electronic components such as Rb, Rg, various dispersion resistors, etc. are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing (not shown) by a solid yellow line (or a black solid line), respectively. The corresponding part numbers are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  In the third embodiment, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax ( 314bx) has a package made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance of the full-color LED due to light emission decreases.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate are also formed by a white resist which is a solid white resist. A layer is formed. Accordingly, the solid color white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 reflects light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the rendering operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are provided on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. And the corresponding part numbers and the regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is solid-painted. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the areas indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment, On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the component numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are the characters without foil (that is, the wiring that is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). Characters are formed in a pattern, and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form a cut character), and a region indicating a position where hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is arranged includes terminals (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). It is formed as a removed foil area (that is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, except for each terminal and wiring pattern, an area formed by removing the copper foil), and the left side lower decorative substrate The foil is formed by a white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the 402b. Area and its foil-cut characters are respectively covered, and further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed with the foil-less characters (that is, the wiring pattern). Is formed as a character in a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) in which is formed, and the surrounding copper foil is removed as a cut character), and hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs are arranged. A region indicating the position is formed by removing a copper foil except for each terminal and the wiring pattern in a foil removal region excluding each terminal and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). Area), and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate is solid-painted. The difference is that the foil-removed area and the foil-removed character are respectively covered with a white resist.

  With the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, it is possible to increase the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). It has become. In addition, a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is used to reflect the light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the staging operation unit 300). Can be enhanced. For this reason, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged are printed in black as silk printing on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In the case of printing, the silk printing printed in black reduces the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, and causes a problem that the emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Also, various decorations provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decoration 271, the lower left decoration 281, the upper right decoration 276, the lower right decoration 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75). The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Since the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes according to the direction of the head (face). In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative boards provided. Then, there arises a problem that the player sees the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the measure such as the reflectance reduction according to the third embodiment, a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player is formed as a foil-cut character, and the game is completely for the player. By forming an area indicating a position where a full-color LED having no relationship is arranged as a foil-cut area, and covering the foil-cut character and the foil-cut area with a white resist solid-painted on the LED mounting surface, respectively, the An LED wiring pattern, a foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged), a number specifying the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED), Is made of copper foil to make the same color, and the white color formed on the LED mounting surface By being covered by the dist, a foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) is found, or a number specifying the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) ) Can be difficult to find.

  Further, in the configuration of the measure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player is formed as a foil-cut character, and the game is completely for the player. By forming an area indicating a position where a full-color LED having no relationship is arranged as a foil-cut area, and covering the foil-cut character and the foil-cut area with a white resist solid-filled on the LED mounting surface, respectively, It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being reduced due to the emission of the LED.

  The configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the third embodiment can provide the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number specifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the foil-cut area that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the emission of the full-color LED.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectivity or the like according to the third embodiment, the step of silk printing on the LED mounting surface can be omitted. Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

  Note that, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment, the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed as the foil-cut area). , A symbol representing the polarity of a full-color LED (a symbol used in a circuit diagram (a symbol capable of distinguishing an anode terminal and a cathode terminal)) or a symbol used in a circuit diagram (a symbol capable of distinguishing an anode terminal and a cathode terminal) may be used. (Simplified ones) may be added to indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and the connectors that do not have a white color, whose reflectance is reduced on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, emit light of the full-color LED. However, the LED was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface was reduced, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED was the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, or connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is to be arranged is a foil-cut region (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). ), Except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a copper foil-extracted area), and near this area, a part number corresponding to an electronic component or a connector (not shown) is a foil-cut character (not shown). That is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, a character is formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the character is formed as a cut character formed by removing the surrounding copper foil.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment, the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed as the foil-cut area). , Which has a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED. However, the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed as the foil-cut area). It may be configured to have a shape smaller than the outer shape of the full-color LED (for example, a square shape smaller than the full-color LED body). In this case, the blank characters and the foil blanking regions are not connected and are formed in mutually independent regions. With this configuration, when the full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the foil-cut area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged is covered by the full-color LED main body. Thus, the reflectance of the LED mounting surface can be further increased.

[Comparison of configuration of countermeasures such as reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment with configuration of countermeasures such as reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the hdLED1 to the full-color LED are placed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the region indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current driving circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit which constitute the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba are formed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as the 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing with a yellow solid line (or black solid line), respectively, and in the vicinity of these areas. The component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The areas corresponding to the hdLED1 to the hdLED10 are printed as silk prints by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines), respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to the hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs are printed in the vicinity of these areas as silk prints. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the full-color LED is provided on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit which constitute the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are formed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314a. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as the resistors 314ay Rr, Rb, Rg and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (or a black solid line) (not shown). In the vicinity, a component number corresponding to the electronic component is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper dish center decorative substrate 314. The areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed as silk prints by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 268 (a), the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED is providedレ ジ ス ト hdLED 10 is a white resist-extracted character using a twice-coated white resist (FIG. 268 (c) shows only a white resist-extracted character as a component number corresponding to hdLED7 which is a full-color LED). ), And a region indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be arranged is a white-resist removal region using a twice-coated white resist (FIG. 268 (c) shows a full-color LED hdLED7). And only the white resist removal region LSLK7 is shown as a region corresponding to. It has been made. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is made of a white resist as the first of two coats of white resist, and the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is made of white resist. The white resist is applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first of the two-coat white resists. Then, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an area indicating the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged as the second time of the twice-coated white resist (the arrangement of the predetermined pin numbers is As shown in FIG. 268 (c), in the white resist removal area LSLK7, the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED is included as an area corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED. A notch portion is formed at a position corresponding to the designated notch mark.) Is masked as white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, and near the white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 and leftward. Or hdLED1 to hd, which are full color LEDs above In a state where the ED10 with a corresponding part numbers LED1~LED10 is masked as a white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist is formed. The entire area is covered except for the area masked by the resist, so that the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are white resist removal areas LSLK1 to LSLK10. While being formed, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are formed as characters without white resist.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b are the same. Because of the adoption, shading occurs in the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b passes through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the underlayer (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the second layer white resist is overlapped with the second layer white resist and the first layer white resist. The first layer of white resist is applied to the second layer in the region where the second layer of white resist and the first layer of white resist do not overlap due to masking, Exposed without being covered with white resist White resist the first layer is to appear lighter by the. That is, when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the characters without white resist in the first layer of white resist can be identified. ing.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided near this region. The number is formed as a white resist-cut character (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist is the same as the transmittance of the second-layer white resist. When shading occurs between the white resist of the layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the second layer In a region where the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, the white resist of the second layer looks dark, whereas the white resist of the second layer is In a region where the first-layer white resist does not overlap, the first-layer white resist is not covered with the second-layer white resist and is exposed, so that the first-layer white resist looks pale. It will be. Thus, when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second-layer white resist, the white resist-extracted region in the first-layer white resist can be identified. Has become.

  In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist and the second resist are removed. The refractive index of light from the white resist of the layer changes. Thus, when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. You can do it.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as the white), and the connector LDUCN has a housing whose white is a natural color (also referred to as a natural color. Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided near the plurality of check pins. It is formed as. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thereby, when the worker performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the content of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 269, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 269, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba and the resistances Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, An area indicating a position where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are to be arranged is formed as a white resist removal area using a twice-coated white resist similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition, in the vicinity of these regions, the component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are formed as white resist removal characters using a twice-painted white resist similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b. . Specifically, first, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the twice-coated white resists, and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white. The resist is covered with the resist (that is, the white resist liquid is applied to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first of the two-coat white resists). The LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is, for example, a region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is to be disposed (the predetermined pin number arrangement) In the white resist removal region LSLKa as a region corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax shown in FIG. 269, the first pin and the 36th pin of the constant current drive circuit 402bax are provided. A notch is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark indicating the arrangement.) Is masked as a white resist cutout area LSLKa, and a constant current is provided near and upward to these white resist cutout areas LSLKa. IC1 (see FIG. 269 (a)) which is a part number corresponding to the driving circuit 402bax is a white resist. In a state that is masked as can characters, the whole of the LED non-mounting surface 402by the left under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, a two-layer white resist is formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in the same manner as the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The entire area is covered with the white resist and the entire area is covered except for the area masked with the second layer of white resist, so that the masked area is depressed as a recess, and corresponds to the constant current drive circuit 402bax. In addition, a white resist removal area LSLKa is formed as an area to be performed, and a part number IC1 corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax is formed as a white resist removal character.

  Note that the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is a white resist (not shown) in which an area indicating a position where electronic components such as the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged. In the vicinity of this area, the part numbers corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b have white resist removal characters R1, R2 (not shown). R3 is formed, and a part number corresponding to electronic parts such as various resistances such as a dispersion resistance and a capacitor (not shown) is formed as a character without white resist (not shown). On the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted region (not shown), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided near this region. It is formed as a character (not shown) without white resist.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are the same. , The shading occurs between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the LED non-mounting surface of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b passes through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the underlayer of 402by (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the second layer white resist in the region where the second layer white resist overlaps the first layer white resist The white resist of the first layer appears dark, whereas the white resist of the first layer is applied to the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap due to the masking. Peel off without being covered by the second layer of white resist First layer of the white resist by an out so that the look faint. Accordingly, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist formed characters formed on the first layer of white resist can be identified. And a white resist removal area can be identified.

  Further, since the white resist is coated twice on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist, The refractive index of light of the second layer of white resist changes. Thus, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. You can do it.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has any one of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectivity due to light emission of full-color LEDs, the LED non-mounting surface Has been implemented.

  Note that, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are formed of a white resist by a solid white resist. A layer is formed. Accordingly, the solid-state white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b increases the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). You can do it.

  In the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 268 (b), hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are provided on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The corresponding part number is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a twice-coated white resist, and a region indicating the position where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged uses the double-coated white resist. It is formed as a white resist removal area. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is the first time of the twice-coated white resist, and the entire LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is made of white resist. The white resist liquid is applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 as the first of the two-coat white resists. The LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is an area indicating a position where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be arranged (the arrangement of the predetermined pin numbers is the second time) of the twice-coated white resist. For example, in the white resist removal area HSLK7 as a region corresponding to the hLED7 which is a full-color LED, a notch mark for instructing the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hLED7 which is a full-color LED is included. Notches are formed at corresponding positions.) Are masked as white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, and hLED1 which is a full-color LED near these white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 and to the right. LED which is a part number corresponding to ~ hLED10 ~LED10 is in a state of being masked as white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the disc center on the decorative substrate 314 is covered by a white resist. Thus, although a two-layer white resist is formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the entire surface is covered with the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist is formed. The entire area is covered except for the area masked by the resist, so that the masked area is depressed as a concave part, and the areas indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are white resist removal areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. The LED1 to LED10, which are formed and are part numbers corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs, are formed as characters without white resist.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center decoration board 314 are the same. Because of the adoption, shading occurs between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the underlayer, the white resist of the second layer looks dark in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap. In an area where the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered with the white resist of the second layer and is exposed, so that the first layer is exposed. That the white resist on the eyes looks pale That. That is, when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, characters without white resist in the first layer of white resist can be identified. ing.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, a region indicating a position where the connector HCN is arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector HCN is provided near this region. The number is formed as a white resist-cut character (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist is the same as the transmittance of the second-layer white resist. Shading occurs between the white resist of the layer and the white resist of the second layer. When the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the second layer is formed. In a region where the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, the white resist of the second layer appears dark, whereas the white resist of the second layer is masked by masking. In a region where the white resist of the first layer does not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is exposed without being covered with the white resist of the second layer, so that the white resist of the first layer looks pale. It will be. Accordingly, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, a white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist can be identified. Has become.

  In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the white resist removal character and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist and the second resist are removed. The refractive index of light from the white resist of the layer changes. Thus, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. You can do it.

  In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color; Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, lighting inspection is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute two full-color LEDs). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins, with a white resist removal character not shown. It is formed as. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thereby, when the worker performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 has a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersion resistors not shown. Similarly to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate 314, a region indicating the position at which electronic components are to be disposed is formed as a white resist removal region using a twice-coated white resist. In the vicinity, a component number corresponding to the electronic component is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a twice-coated white resist, similarly to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 are the same. , The shading occurs between the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist, and the LED non-mounting surface of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate is passed through the second layer white resist. Looking at the base of 314y, the white resist of the second layer looks dark in the region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer overlap, but it is masked by the mask. In a region where the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the first layer do not overlap, the white resist of the first layer is not covered with the white resist of the second layer and is exposed. The first layer of white resist looks faint To become. Thus, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the characters without white resist formed on the first layer of white resist can be identified. And a white resist removal area can be identified.

  In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer of white resist, The refractive index of light of the second layer of white resist changes. Thus, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. You can do it.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of black resin. As described above, the electronic components such as the resistor and the capacitor having no white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate are each formed of a white resist which is a solid white paint. A layer is formed. Accordingly, the solid color white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 reflects light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the rendering operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are provided on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The corresponding part numbers and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk-screen printing, and are solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the area indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed as white resist removal characters using a twice-coated white resist. An area indicating a position where a certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 is arranged is formed as a white resist-exposed area using a twice-coated white resist. Further, a full-color LED is provided on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center decoration board 314. HLED1 to hLED10 are formed as white resist removal characters using a twice-painted white resist, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be arranged is painted twice. Uses white resist Was is different in that it is formed as a white resist vent area.

  With the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, it is possible to increase the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). It has become. In addition, a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is used to reflect the light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the staging operation unit 300). Can be enhanced. For this reason, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged are printed in black as silk printing on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In the case of printing, the silk printing printed in black reduces the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, and causes a problem that the emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Also, various decorations provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decoration 271, the lower left decoration 281, the upper right decoration 276, the lower right decoration 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75). The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Since the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes according to the direction of the head (face). In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative boards provided. Then, there arises a problem that the player sees the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal character using a white resist in which a part number corresponding to a full-color LED having no relation to the game at all and a corresponding part number is applied twice. By forming a region indicating a position where a full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, at all, as a white resist removal region using a twice-coated white resist, the mounting position of the full-color LED is formed. It is difficult to find out a white resist removal area indicating the full color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged) or find a number specifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED). Can be.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-exposed character using a white resist in which a part number corresponding to a full-color LED having no relation to the game for the player and a corresponding part number is applied twice. By forming a region indicating a position where a full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player at all, is arranged as a white resist-extracted region using a twice-coated white resist, the light emission of the full-color LED It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, a number specifying a full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) or a white resist-extracted area using a twice-painted white resist indicating a mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, a position where the full-color LED is arranged) ) Can be made difficult for a player to visually recognize, and the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED can be prevented from lowering.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, since the steps of silk printing can be omitted on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface, respectively, the printing cost of the silk printing and the manufacture of the substrate can be eliminated. The reduction in the number of steps can contribute to lowering the substrate manufacturing cost.

  In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal region using a twice-coated white resist indicating a mounting position of a full-color LED (that is, a position where a full-color LED is arranged is shown). When forming the (region), a symbol representing the polarity of the full-color LED (a symbol used in a circuit diagram (a symbol capable of distinguishing an anode terminal and a cathode terminal)) or a symbol used in a circuit diagram (anode terminal and a cathode terminal) may be used. (A symbol that can be distinguished from the full color LED) may be added to specify the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  In the fourth embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and the connectors that do not have a white color have lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED. Is not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED. However, in the LED mounting surface by full-color LED emission, the region corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, a region indicating a position where electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor (not shown) to be mounted on the LED mounting surface and a connector are arranged is formed as a terminal (not shown) and a white resist removal region (not shown). In addition, a component number corresponding to an electronic component such as a resistor and a capacitor (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface or a connector is formed as a white resist-free character (not shown).

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist, The entire area is covered except for the area masked by the second layer of white resist, so that the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED and the connector are arranged is formed as a white resist-free area. Although the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LED and the connector are formed as the white resist-exposed characters, the white resist-extracted region and the white resist-extracted characters may be formed by using another method. . For example, after the white resist is solid-coated once or plural times on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, before the white resist is dried, a region indicating a position where a full-color LED or a connector is arranged. A method of forming a white resist removal area by pressing a plate, and forming a white resist removal character by pressing a plate indicating a part number corresponding to a full-color LED or a connector, an LED mounting surface of a decorative board and After the white resist is solid-coated once or more than once on the LED non-mounting surface, the white resist is dried, and then, by laser irradiation, an area indicating a position where a full-color LED or a connector is arranged is defined as a white resist-extracted area. Form the part number corresponding to the full color LED and connector And a method of forming as outline characters.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal area using a twice-coated white resist indicating a mounting position of a full-color LED (that is, a position where a full-color LED is arranged is shown). When forming the full-color LED, the region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is configured to have a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED. It may be configured to have a shape smaller than the outer shape (for example, a square shape smaller than the full-color LED main body, simply one thick line). In this case, when the full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged is covered by the full-color LED main body, and the periphery of the full-color LED main body is also the white layer of the second layer. Since the resist and the first layer of white resist overlap each other to make the second layer of white resist darker, it can contribute to further increasing the reflectance of the LED mounting surface.

[Comparison of configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to the first embodiment with configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the hdLED1 to the full-color LED are placed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the region indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current driving circuit 402bax and the maximum current setting circuit which constitute the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba are formed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as the 402-bay resistors Rr, Rb, Rg, and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed by silk solid printing with a yellow solid line (or black solid line), respectively, and in the vicinity of these areas. The component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The areas corresponding to the hdLED1 to the hdLED10 are printed as silk prints by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines), respectively, and the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to the hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs are printed in the vicinity of these areas as silk prints. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the full-color LED is provided on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 and the area indicating the positions where hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. Then, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the maximum current setting circuit which constitute the LED constant current drive circuit 314a are formed on the white resist solidly painted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314a. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as the resistors 314ay Rr, Rb, Rg and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (or a black solid line) (not shown). In the vicinity, a component number corresponding to the electronic component is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing. Further, as described above, a full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is provided on the white resist solidly coated on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper dish center decorative substrate 314. The areas corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 are printed as silk prints by yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown), and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs near these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 270 (a), the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED is provided on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. ＨhdLED 10 near the position corresponding to the No. 1 terminal among the No. 1 to No. 6 terminals, the reference symbol of the foil-extracted terminal (that is, the reference is made by the wiring pattern which is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). A circle symbol is formed as a terminal symbol, and a foil extraction reference terminal symbol formed by extracting a copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol (FIG. 270 (c) shows the first to sixth terminals of hdLED7 which is a full-color LED). Of these, only the foil reference terminal symbol PRO is shown near the position corresponding to the first terminal.)) And hdLED1 to hdLED, which are full-color LEDs, are formed. A region indicating the position where 0 is placed is a foil-cut region excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). (FIG. 270 (c) shows only the foil-cut region LSLK7 as a region corresponding to the hdLED7 that is a full-color LED) in FIG. 270 (c). The foil-removed area and the foil-removed reference terminal symbol are respectively covered with a white resist solid-painted on the mounting surface 402bx. Specifically, regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b as foil removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, respectively. In the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, near the position corresponding to the first terminal of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b as foil extraction reference terminal symbols, respectively. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed reference terminal symbol are respectively covered with a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the decorative substrate 402b. The wiring pattern forming the foil extraction reference terminal symbol is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. It should be noted that the foil extraction reference terminal symbol is not formed in a region indicating the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged (that is, in the foil extraction regions LSLK1 to LSLK10), but is formed on a so-called beta land (substrate ground). In such a case, the circle symbol itself is formed as a foil.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is a foil-cut region (not shown) except for each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). Layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a region where copper foil is removed), and within this region, the first terminal of each terminal of the connector LDLCN A circle symbol is formed as a reference terminal symbol in a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed near the position corresponding to the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol (A reference symbol for a foil-extracted terminal) formed by extracting the same.

  As described above, a white resist layer is formed from the solid white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as the white), and the connector LDUCN has a housing whose white is a natural color (also referred to as a natural color. Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all. Also, there is no area printed by silk printing on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1 (For each of the LED elements emitting red (R), the LED element emitting green (G), and the LED element emitting blue (B), which constitute two full-color LEDs). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thereby, when the worker performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the content of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, regarding the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the fifth embodiment, the reflectance reduction etc. according to the third embodiment shown in FIG. The configuration is the same as the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in the configuration of the countermeasure described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the fifth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are formed of a white resist which is a solid white resist. A layer is formed. Accordingly, the solid-state white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b increases the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). You can do it.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 270 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 has hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. In the vicinity of the position corresponding to the first terminal among the first to sixth terminals, a foil-pulled reference terminal symbol (that is, a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) is used as a reference terminal symbol. Each of the terminals (not shown) has an area indicating a position where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged. Each terminal and the wiring pattern in a foil-extracted area excluding a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, in a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed) Excluding the area where the copper foil is removed), the foil removal area and the reference symbol for the foil removal reference terminal are formed by a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate 314x. And are each covered. Specifically, regions indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 as foil removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively. In the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10, near the position corresponding to the first terminal of hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration board 314 on the center of the dish as foil-free reference terminal symbols. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed reference terminal symbol are respectively covered with a white resist which is solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314. The wiring pattern forming the foil extraction reference terminal symbol is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. It should be noted that the foiling reference terminal symbol is not formed in a region indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged (that is, in the foiling regions HSLK1 to HSLK10), but is formed on a so-called beta land (substrate ground). In such a case, the circle symbol itself is formed as a foil.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, an area indicating a position where the connector HCN is arranged is a foil-cut area (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). Layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a region where copper foil is removed), and within this region, the first terminal of each terminal of the connector HCN A circle symbol is formed as a reference terminal symbol in a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed near the position corresponding to the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol (A reference symbol for a foil-extracted terminal) formed by extracting the same.

  In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color; Color) which is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all. In addition, there is no area printed by silk printing on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, lighting inspection is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements emitting red (R), the LED element emitting green (G), and the LED element emitting blue (B), which constitute two full-color LEDs). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thereby, when the worker performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, regarding the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment described above. The configuration is the same as the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 in FIG.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate are formed by a white resist which is a solid white resist. A layer is formed. Accordingly, the solid color white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 reflects light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the rendering operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are provided on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The corresponding part numbers and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk-screen printing, and are solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. On the white resist, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the area indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are not printed at all as silk printing In the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, no part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed at all, and near the positions corresponding to the first terminals of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. The reference symbol is a foil-extracted reference terminal symbol (that is, a circle symbol is formed as a reference terminal symbol with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed. And a region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is a foil-extracted region excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). Layer (copper plane), excluding each terminal and wiring pattern , A region formed by removing the copper foil), and the foil-removed region and the foil-removed reference terminal symbol are formed by a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Further, no part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, and one of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, respectively. In the vicinity of the position corresponding to the No. 1 terminal among the No. 1 to No. 6 terminals, a foil-extracted reference terminal symbol (that is, a circle symbol as a reference terminal symbol in a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) To form a foil extraction reference terminal symbol formed by extracting the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol). Regions indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are the full-color LEDs, are arranged are not shown, except for the terminals and the wiring pattern (not shown). In the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, each terminal and the wiring pattern Excluding the copper foil), and a foil-removed area and a foil-removed reference terminal thereof by a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314x. The difference is that each symbol is covered.

  With the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, it is possible to increase the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). It has become. In addition, a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is used to reflect the light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the staging operation unit 300). Can be enhanced. For this reason, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged are printed in black as silk printing on the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In the case of printing, the silk printing printed in black reduces the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, and causes a problem that the emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Also, various decorations provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decoration 271, the lower left decoration 281, the upper right decoration 276, the lower right decoration 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 75). The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Since the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes according to the direction of the head (face). In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surface of the various decorative boards provided. Then, there arises a problem that the player sees the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player is not formed at all, and the player has no relation to the game at all. A region indicating a position where a full-color LED having no LED is arranged is formed as a foil-cutting area, and a white resist which is solid-coated on the LED mounting surface forms a foil-cutting area (in the foil-cutting area, as described above, By covering a foil-less reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to the first terminal of the full-color LED, the wiring pattern of the full-color LED and the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the full-color LED) An area indicating the position where the LED is to be disposed), a foil extraction reference terminal symbol formed near the position corresponding to the first terminal of the full-color LED, By being made of copper foil, the color is the same, and by being covered with a white resist formed on the LED mounting surface, a foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the position at which the full-color LED is to be arranged) It can be difficult to find the area indicated by the reference numeral) or to find the foil extraction reference terminal symbol formed near the position corresponding to the first terminal of the full-color LED.

  Further, in the configuration of the measure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player is not formed at all, and has no relation to the game for the player. By forming a region indicating a position where a full-color LED is to be arranged as a foil-exposed region and covering the foil-exposed region with a white resist solid-filled on the LED mounting surface, the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED is reduced. It can be prevented from lowering.

  The configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the fifth embodiment can provide the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number specifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the foil-cut area that indicates the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area that indicates the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the emission of the full-color LED.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the step of silk printing on the LED mounting surface can be omitted. Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, a foil extraction reference terminal symbol (that is, a foil extraction reference terminal symbol) is provided near the position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals (the first to sixth terminals) of the full-color LED. In a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, a circle symbol is formed as a reference terminal symbol with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and a foil extraction reference terminal symbol formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol) By forming, the mounting direction of the full-color LED on the LED mounting surface can be instructed. In addition, in the vicinity of a position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals of the connector, a reference symbol of a foil-extracted terminal (that is, a circle symbol as a reference terminal symbol in a wiring pattern of a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). To form a foil extraction reference terminal symbol formed by extracting the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol), it is also possible to indicate the mounting direction of the connector on the LED mounting surface.

  Here, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 are each a full-color LED. In the vicinity of the position corresponding to the No. 1 terminal among the terminals (No. 1 to No. 6 terminals), the reference terminal symbol of the foil removal reference (that is, the reference terminal is a copper foil wiring pattern in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) A brief description will be given of the point that a circle symbol is formed as a symbol, and a foil extraction reference terminal symbol formed by extracting a copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol).

  When a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the LED mounting surface of the decoration substrate such as the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate becomes Need to be arranged near the full-color LED, such as LED1, LED2,..., LED50, as part numbers corresponding to the plurality of full-color LEDs.

  However, the more full-color LEDs are mounted on the LED mounting surface of the decorative board, the more part numbers corresponding to the plurality of full-color LEDs such as LED1, LED2,. It is necessary to secure an area for arranging the reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to the first terminal among the (first terminal to sixth terminal), and it is difficult to secure this area. Therefore, a notation method in which a part number corresponding to the plurality of full-color LEDs and a reference terminal symbol near a position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals (the first to sixth terminals) of the plurality of full-color LEDs are used. .., LED50, etc., near the position corresponding to the terminal 1 among the terminals (terminals 1 to 6) of the full-color LED, as foil reference terminal symbols. , LED1, LED2,..., LED50 and the like, and the wiring pattern must be separated from the wiring pattern so as not to be in contact with and electrically connected thereto. It is necessary to route the wiring pattern (bending the wiring pattern, providing through holes, etc.) so as to avoid the foil extraction reference terminal symbol. So that the subject to limited.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, each terminal of the full-color LED is provided on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left lower lower decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. In the vicinity of the position corresponding to the No. 1 terminal among the (No. 1 to No. 6 terminals), the reference terminal symbol is a foil-extracted reference terminal symbol (that is, the reference terminal symbol is a copper foil wiring pattern in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). By forming a circle symbol as above and forming a foil extraction reference terminal symbol formed by extracting the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol), the area for arranging the foil extraction reference terminal symbol is kept small, so that the foil extraction standard Since the necessity of laying out wiring patterns to avoid terminal symbols is suppressed, artworks are designed (designed) so that wiring patterns are not easily restricted. Door can be. This eliminates the necessity of providing unnecessary through holes on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314, thereby suppressing a reduction in the area to which the white resist solution is applied. This can contribute to increasing the reflectance of the full-color LED toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 or the side of the staging operation unit 300 facing upward).

  In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the fifth embodiment, in the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed as the foil-cut area). , A symbol representing the polarity of a full-color LED (a symbol used in a circuit diagram (a symbol capable of distinguishing an anode terminal and a cathode terminal)) or a symbol used in a circuit diagram (a symbol capable of distinguishing an anode terminal and a cathode terminal) may be used. (Simplified ones) may be added to indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  In the fifth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and a connector that does not have a white color, whose reflectance is reduced on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED, emit light of the full-color LED. Is not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED. However, in the LED mounting surface by full-color LED emission, the region corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is to be disposed is a foil-cut region (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). ), Except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a region formed by extracting copper foil), and in this region, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals of the electronic component and the connector is included. In the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, a circle symbol is formed as a reference terminal symbol on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and a copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed. The formed foil extraction reference terminal symbol) is formed.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed as the foil-cut area). , Which has a shape larger than the outer shape of the full-color LED. However, the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed as the foil-cut area). It may be configured to have a shape smaller than the outer shape of the full-color LED (for example, a square shape smaller than the full-color LED body). In this case, a circle symbol is formed as a reference terminal symbol with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and a copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed. The formed foil extraction reference terminal symbol) and the foil extraction area are not connected to each other and are formed in mutually independent areas. With this configuration, when the full-color LED is mounted on the LED mounting surface, the foil-cut area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged is covered by the full-color LED main body. Thus, the reflectance of the LED mounting surface can be further increased.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectivity or the like according to the fifth embodiment, a foil extraction reference terminal symbol was formed on the LED mounting surface near the position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals of the full-color LED. However, the mounting directions of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface are substantially the same (that is, the mounting directions of the plurality of full-color LEDs are the same for the mounting operator or the automatic machine (the mounting direction is opposite). Does not exist) if a rule is provided in advance), the foil extraction reference terminal symbol is located near the position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals of any one of the plurality of full-color LEDs on the LED mounting surface. (E.g., the first terminal out of the first to sixth terminals of the hdLED 7 which is a full-color LED shown in FIGS. 270 (a) and (c)). In the vicinity of a corresponding position, a foil-less reference terminal symbol PRO is formed on the LED mounting surface near a position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals of one or more predetermined full-color LEDs. (For example, a foil-less reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to the first terminal among the first to sixth terminals of the hdLED1, hdLED2, hdLED9, and hdLED10 that are the full-color LEDs shown in FIG. 270 (a)) .

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the foil mounting reference terminal symbol and the connectors are provided on the LED mounting surface in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals of the full-color LED. A foil extraction reference terminal symbol was formed near the position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals. That is, the same foil extraction reference terminal symbol was formed. This foil-extraction reference terminal symbol is formed by forming a circle symbol as a reference terminal symbol in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed with a copper foil wiring pattern and removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol. Was. Therefore, a circle symbol is used as a reference terminal symbol in a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed in the vicinity of a position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals of the full-color LED as a foil removal reference terminal symbol. And a layer on which a wiring pattern is formed as a foil extraction reference terminal symbol in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals of the connector, while the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is extracted and formed. In the (copper plane), a square symbol may be formed as a reference terminal symbol in a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the copper foil around the outside of the square symbol may be removed. In this case, the part number of the full-color LED or the part number of the connector may be included in the foil reference terminal symbol.

  For example, each foil removal reference formed near the position corresponding to the first terminal of hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b illustrated in FIG. 270 (a). For terminal symbols, from the lower side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative board 402b to the upper side, for 10 full-color LEDs, the part numbers of the full-color LEDs are numbered from 1 to 10. Be arranged inside each circle symbol. That is, the numbers are circled. In this case, an area around the outside of the circle symbol, a region extending from a portion inside by a predetermined distance along the outer circumference of the circle symbol to an outer circumference of a numeral having a predetermined size, and a part necessary for forming the numeral ( For example, in the case of the numeral 8, the upper and lower two round holes are formed by removing the copper foil. Also, for the connector LDLCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the numeral 1 is arranged inside the square symbol inside the square symbol. That is, the number is enclosed by a square. In this case, the area around the outer side of the square symbol, the area extending from the inner side by a predetermined distance along the outer circumference of the square symbol to the outer circumference of the numeral having the predetermined size, and the part necessary for forming the numeral ( For example, in the case of the numeral 8, the upper and lower two round holes are formed by removing the copper foil. Note that alphabets A to Z (upper case) or alphabets a to z (lower case) may be used instead of numbers. In the case of the alphabet, a maximum of 26 part numbers can be indicated by one character, which can contribute to minimizing the area of the foil reference terminal symbol. On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b adopting this mode, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b ( For example, for one LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green light (G), and an LED element that emits blue light (B) that constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) that can be formed are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a foil extraction reference corresponding to each of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is formed near the plurality of check pins. Terminal symbols are formed. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thereby, when the worker performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, a foil extraction reference terminal symbol is formed on the LED mounting surface near a position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals of the full-color LED. As a foil extraction reference terminal symbol, a circle symbol was formed as a reference terminal symbol with a wiring pattern being a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern was formed, and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol was removed. . Instead of this circle symbol, for example, from the lower side to the upper side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b shown in FIG. It may be a serial number of ten. In this case, the copper foil is removed from the outer periphery of the numeral (serial number) and a portion necessary for forming the numeral (for example, in the case of numeral 8, a hole having two upper and lower round shapes). It is formed. In this case, the serial number can indicate the location of the first terminal among the terminals of the full-color LED, and can indicate the part number that specifies one of the ten full-color LEDs. Note that alphabets A to Z (upper case) or alphabets a to z (lower case) may be used instead of numbers. In the case of the alphabet, a maximum of 26 part numbers can be indicated by one character, which can contribute to minimizing the area of the foil reference terminal symbol. On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b adopting this mode, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b ( For example, for one LED element that emits red (R) light, an LED element that emits green light (G), and an LED element that emits blue light (B) that constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) that can be formed are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a foil extraction reference corresponding to each of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is formed near the plurality of check pins. Terminal symbols are formed. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thereby, when the worker performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct, and various inspections can be performed.

  Further, in the configuration of the measure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative board 402b is the same as the measure of the measure such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the third embodiment. The configuration is the same as the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in the configuration, and the configuration of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is the same as that of the third embodiment described above. The structure of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the above is the same, and the LED non-mounting face 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the LED non-mounting face of the dish center upper decorative board 314. In the area 314y, an area indicating the position where the electronic component is to be arranged is printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (or a solid black line). With part number and the corresponding electronic components in these areas near it is respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. On the other hand, for example, five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402a of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a are, as described above, the LED non-mounting surface of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb mounted on 402by controls the constant current to flow, and no LED constant current drive circuit is mounted.

  For this reason, the LED mounting surface of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a in the configuration of the measure for reducing the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment is provided with the lower left side decoration in the configuration of the measure for reducing the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment. Similar to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the vicinity of the position corresponding to the first terminal among the first to sixth terminals of huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, respectively. And a region indicating the position where the huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, are to be arranged is formed as a foiled region excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). The white area of the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate 402a is solid-coated with a white resist so that A vent reference terminal symbols are covered, respectively. In the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, the LED mounting surface of the upper decorative board 402a on the left side has a foil removal reference near the position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals of the connector (not shown). Terminal symbols are respectively formed.

  That is, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit is not mounted on the LED non-mounting surface of the upper left decorative substrate 402a in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment. Even if huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, are mounted on the LED mounting surface of the upper left decorative substrate 402a in the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the embodiment, the first to sixth terminals huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, respectively. A foil extraction reference terminal symbol is formed near the position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminal Nos., Or a foil extraction reference terminal symbol is formed near the position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals of the connector (not shown). However, routing of wiring patterns for huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector (not shown) is complicated. Hardly become such, foil vent reference terminal symbol hardly becomes a hindrance of the wiring pattern routing.

  Further, a white resist layer made of a solid white resist is formed on the LED mounting surface of the upper left-side decorative substrate 402a in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment. The huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs, each have a package made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white). , White (natural color). In other words, the LED mounting surface of the upper left-side decorative substrate 402a in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment has the same color (same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HuLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, which are electronic components having a package of a color recognized as a certain color, and the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). And a connector (not shown) having a housing.

  Since the plurality of heat spreading resistors constituting the heat spreading circuit 402ac do not have a white color, they are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface of the upper left side decorative board 402a in the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment. Have been. Unlike the huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, the plurality of heat spreading resistors constituting the heat spreading circuit 402ac have no polarity. Therefore, the decorative board on the left side in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment. On the LED non-mounting surface of 402a, no foil extraction reference terminal symbol is formed in the vicinity of each position of the plurality of heat dispersion resistors, and the part numbers corresponding to the plurality of heat dispersion resistors are printed in yellow (or , Black) are not printed at all.

  That is, there is no area printed by silk printing on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment. As a result, the step of silk printing can be omitted, so that the cost of manufacturing the substrate can be reduced by reducing the cost of the silk printing plate and the number of manufacturing steps of the substrate.

  Also, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fifth embodiment, a white resist layer made of a solid white resist is provided on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the upper left decorative board 402a. Is formed. Thereby, the reflectivity of the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) is increased by the solid white resist applied to the LED mounting surface of the upper left decorative board 402a. Can be done.

  Note that the LED mounting surface of the upper left decorative board 402a in the configuration for measures against a decrease in reflectivity or the like according to the fifth embodiment corresponds to the first terminal among the terminals of huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs. And a foil extraction reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals of the connector (not shown). That is, the same foil extraction reference terminal symbol is formed. This foil-pulled reference terminal symbol is formed by forming a circle symbol as a reference terminal symbol in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol. I have. Therefore, in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the No. 1 terminal among the terminals of huLED1 to huLED5 which are full-color LEDs, a foil-cut reference terminal symbol is used as a reference in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, with the wiring pattern being a copper foil. A round symbol is created as a terminal symbol, and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is removed and formed. In a layer (copper plane) in which is formed a square symbol as a reference terminal symbol in a wiring pattern made of copper foil, the copper foil around the outside of the square symbol may be removed. In this case, the part number of the full-color LED or the part number of the connector may be included in the foil reference terminal symbol.

  For example, for the respective foil-pulling reference terminal symbols formed near the positions corresponding to the first terminals of huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface of the upper left decorative board 402a, From the lower side to the upper side of the LED mounting surface of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a, for the five full-color LEDs, the serial numbers of the numbers 1 to 5 are arranged inside the circle symbols, respectively. To be done. That is, the numbers are circled. In this case, the area around the outside of the circle symbol, the area extending from the inside part by a predetermined distance along the circumference of the circle symbol to the circumference of the numeral having a predetermined size, and the part necessary for forming the numeral ( For example, in the case of the numeral 4, one of the triangular holes) is formed by removing the copper foil. For a connector (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a, the numeral 1 is arranged inside the square symbol inside the square symbol. That is, the number is enclosed by a square. In this case, the area around the outer side of the square symbol, the area extending from the inner side by a predetermined distance along the outer circumference of the square symbol to the outer circumference of the numeral having the predetermined size, and the part necessary for forming the numeral ( For example, in the case of the numeral 4, one of the triangular holes) is formed by removing the copper foil. Note that alphabets A to Z (upper case) or alphabets a to z (lower case) may be used instead of numbers. In the case of the alphabet, a maximum of 26 part numbers can be indicated by one character, which can contribute to minimizing the area of the foil reference terminal symbol.

  Further, the LED mounting surface of the upper left decorative board 402a in the configuration of the measure for reducing the reflectance according to the fifth embodiment corresponds to the first terminal among the terminals of the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. And a foil extraction reference terminal symbol near the position corresponding to the first terminal among the terminals of the connector (not shown). That is, the same foil extraction reference terminal symbol is formed. This foil-pulled reference terminal symbol is formed by forming a circle symbol as a reference terminal symbol in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol. I have. Therefore, in place of the circle symbol, for example, serial numbers from 1 to 5 may be assigned to five full-color LEDs from the lower side to the upper side of the LED mounting surface of the upper left decorative board 402a. In this case, the copper foil is removed from the outer periphery of the numeral (serial number) and a portion necessary for forming the numeral (for example, a portion of one triangular hole in the case of numeral 4). You. In this case, the serial number can indicate the location of the first terminal among the terminals of the full-color LED, and can indicate the part number that specifies one of the five full-color LEDs. Note that alphabets A to Z (upper case) or alphabets a to z (lower case) may be used instead of numbers. In the case of the alphabet, a maximum of 26 part numbers can be indicated by one character, which can contribute to minimizing the area of the foil reference terminal symbol.

  In the above-described embodiment, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is almost the same, and as shown in FIG. 264, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is A configuration is adopted in which the left side edge 402beg1 and the right edge side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees, and a predetermined number of full-color LEDs are divided into groups 1 and 2. Although the configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, the present invention can be applied to a long and thin plate-shaped decorative board provided in the game board 5. Examples of the elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 include a decorative board provided in various effect units of the game board 5.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 controls the light emission by flowing a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs. , Red, green, yellow, orange, blue, green and the like. Monochromatic LEDs can also be used. In this case, one LED constant current drive circuit can control the emission of up to 24 single-color LEDs.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the DC terminal +12 V supplied (output) from the power supply substrate 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by the linear power supply provided in the constant current drive circuit (the linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 261) is set to the allowable current range of the linear power supply. It may be used as a voltage for lighting the LED. For example, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the above-described constant current drive circuit, at most one single-color LED (for example, within the allowable current range of the linear power supply for one output channel) (for example, When an LED other than a red LED is electrically connected, an internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5 V) created by a linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the single-color LED, and the single-color LED is The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat spreading resistor of the heat spreading circuit described above. In addition, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the above-described constant current drive circuit, up to two single-color LEDs (for example, within the allowable current range of the linear power supply for one output channel) (for example, When red LEDs are electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by a linear power supply is configured to be input to the anode terminal of the first-stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last-stage LED is connected to the anode terminal of the first-stage LED. It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat spreading resistor of the above-described heat spreading circuit. The decorative board configured as described above can be applied to a decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  In the above-described embodiment, the DC terminal +12 V supplied (output) from the power supply substrate 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 and the output channel of the constant current drive circuit is provided. Of the LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8, the cathode terminal of the LED element constituting one full-color LED for one output channel is electrically connected to the output terminal via the heat dispersion resistor of the heat dispersion circuit described above. However, a plurality of full-color LEDs may be electrically connected in series to one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is two or three. When it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, the power supply substrate 630 supplies (outputs) instead of the DC +12 V supplied (outputs) from the power supply substrate 630. DC +35 V may be used as the voltage for lighting the LED. The decorative board configured as described above can be applied to a decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are the door frame top center decorative board 455 and the door. When the frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the upper edge to the lower edge of the decorative board is large. Although the edge of the land pattern is arranged to be parallel to the upper and lower edges of the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, the door Of the frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, any one decorative board and any two decorative boards The end side of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit, may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the upper side and lower side of the decorative substrate. The door frame top right decorative board 457 directly controls the light emission of, for example, the other right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs are mounted, in addition to the full color LED provided therein, by the LED constant current drive circuit provided therein. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative board 456 may directly connect, in addition to its own full-color LED, another left decorative board on which one full-color LED is mounted, by its own LED constant current drive circuit. Light emission may be controlled.

  In the above-described embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are provided on the door frame 3. Although the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided in each decorative body are solid-coated with white resist, they may be printed by white silk printing instead. In this case, after the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative substrates are entirely printed by white silk printing, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged, are used as silk printing. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the various decorative boards provided in the decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 such as the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. On the LED non-mounting surface, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates were printed as silk prints with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines), respectively. (In other words, when printing the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed as a silk print with a yellow dashed line (or a black dashed line)), a symbol indicating the polarity of the full-color LED (used in the circuit diagram) (A symbol for distinguishing between an anode terminal and a cathode terminal) or a symbol used in a circuit diagram (anode terminal and a cathode terminal). May be configured to explicitly implement facing full LED discrimination can sign) by adding even be) a simplification.

  In the above-described embodiment, each of the decorative boards provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205 (for example, the back-side decorative board 3114 provided in the back-side movable decorative body 3110, the back-side provided in the lower back left rendering unit 3200) Bottom left decorative substrate 3203, Bottom right right decorative substrate 3253 provided in Bottom right decoration unit 3250, Bottom lower first decorative substrate 3322 and Bottom lower second decorative substrate 3329 provided in lower back middle decorative unit 3320, Upper back Decorative board 3422 and back decorative board 3452 of back up and down decorative body unit 3450 provided in effect unit 3400, back left back decorative board 3522 and back right decorative body unit 3620 provided in back and back decorative body unit 3520 Back right decorative board 3622, back front left decorative board 3714, back front right decorative unit provided in back front left decorative body unit 3710 The front and rear right decorative substrate 3814 provided in the base plate 810 includes a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). A white resist layer is formed, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are formed on a solid white resist on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate. Notation parts, such as a part number corresponding to the full-color LED and a region indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, which can be specified, are printed by silk printing with yellow paint, and the reflectance is reduced according to the above-described second embodiment. Configuration of countermeasures such as (LED mounting by full-color LED emission according to the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) Can be prevented from decreasing, and a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player and a region indicating a position where the full-color LED is arranged are visually recognized by the player. Of the decorative board provided on the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205 (back face). ), Electronic components such as ICs, resistors, and capacitors are mounted on a white resist solidly painted on the rear surface (rear surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. In addition, areas indicating the positions where the electronic components are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing using solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and the areas corresponding to the electronic components are near these areas. Part numbers may be printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing, respectively, or a modification of the above-described configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment may be adopted. . Further, for each decorative board provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205, the above-described configuration (including modified examples) for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, and a third embodiment. Configuration of countermeasures such as reduction in reflectance according to the embodiment (including modified examples), configuration of countermeasures such as reduction in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment (including modified examples), and reflectance according to the fifth embodiment Any one of the configurations (including modified examples) for measures such as a reduction may be adopted.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there have been proposed gaming machines provided with various substrates that can be supplied with power from a power supply substrate and control illuminations (for example, JP-A-2006-1921989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, in a gaming machine, a line for transmitting power and a line for transmitting a control signal to various boards are routed, and as the length of the lines becomes longer, various boards may be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine having a front frame configured so as to cover a window which is opened frontward and rearward with a see-through protective plate on a gaming board (for example, JP-A-2006-1921989 (paragraph [0014]). , And FIG. 1)). By the way, by enlarging the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides of the front frame is reduced, so that the decorative board accommodated in the left and right sides also has a strip shape. In addition, since the display device and the movable body are provided on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board is increased, so that the decorative board provided on the game board also has a strip shape. However, when the light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided on the strip-shaped decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure an area for drawing out the wiring from the light emission control means to the light emitting means.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory device which is arranged in a standby manner in front of and below a display screen of an effect display device and operates at the time of an effect (for example, JP-A-2015-058064). Gazette (paragraph [0040], FIG. 4, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9). In the movable accessory device, a decorative substrate on which a light emitting unit facing the back surface of the light emitting unit (lens) on the design surface is mounted. However, there is a risk that the player may visually recognize a number specifying a light emitting unit mounted on a decorative board that has no relation to the game, an auxiliary line indicating a mounting position of the light emitting unit, or the like through the light emitting unit.

  In addition, a game machine to which a decorative board on which a light emitting unit is mounted has been conventionally proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). A variety of effects using the light emitting effect by such light emitting means are provided to the player. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the mounting surface of the decorative board, the reflectance is reduced due to a number specifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative board, an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, and the like. It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light emitting surface.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a decorative board on which electronic components such as a light-emitting body (light-emitting means) facing a back surface of a light-emitting unit (lens) are mounted is provided on a frame side or a game board side (for example, JP-A-2005-058064 (Paragraph [0011], Paragraph [0040], FIG. 1, FIG. 2, FIG. 4, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9). However, there is a possibility that a player may visually recognize an auxiliary symbol for specifying an electronic component mounted on a decorative board that has no relation to the game through the light emitting unit.

[Silk printing with a light-colored paint on a white coating film formed on the surface of each decorative board provided on the game board and door frame]
Next, as shown in FIG. 107 to FIG. 107, a case where each decorative substrate is provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 by printing with a light-colored paint on a white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate. Each decorative board provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 205 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “each decorative board provided on the game board 5”) and countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment described above. Each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 adopting the above configuration will be described.

[Silk printing with a light-colored paint on a white coating film formed on the surface of each decorative board provided on the game board]
First, as the decorative boards provided in the game board 5 shown in FIGS. 107 to 205, for example, the back decorative board 3114 provided in the back movable decorative body 3110 shown in FIG. 145, and the lower back left effect shown in FIG. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 provided in the unit 3200, the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 provided in the lower right right rendering unit 3250 shown in FIG. 159, and the lower back middle first provided in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 shown in FIG. The decorative substrate 3322 and the second lower decorative substrate 3329 under the back, the back upper decorative substrate 3422 provided in the back upper effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. 171, and the back-up and down decorative body unit provided in the back upper effect unit 3400 shown in FIG. The back upper left decorative substrate 3452 provided in the back upper left decorative body unit 3520 shown in FIG. The back right decoration board 3622 provided in the back right decoration unit 3620, the back left decoration board 3714 provided in the front left decoration unit 3710 shown in FIG. 193, and the back right decoration unit 3810 shown in FIG. 197. There is a back front right decorative substrate 3814 and the like, and as described above, a white coating film (hereinafter simply referred to as “solid white”) formed by applying a white resist solution on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface). Of the decorative board provided on the game board 5, and a plurality of LEDs ( Notation parts such as the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are made of yellow paint so that the full-color LED capable of multicolor emission can be specified. It has been printed by the torque printing. In other words, each decorative board provided in the game board 5 has the same configuration as the configuration of the measure such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment described above, and has the same configuration as the countermeasure according to the second embodiment described above. Due to the effect of the configuration of the above measure, that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED from decreasing. At the same time, there is an effect that the player can prevent the player from seeing the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged. (Measures such as a decrease in reflectance are taken).

  Here, the members arranged in front of the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 will be briefly described. The front surface (front surface) of the back decorative substrate 3114 provided in the back movable decorative body 3110 is illustrated in FIG. As shown at 145, a light guide radiation plate 3113 in the form of a transparent flat plate, a decorative sheet 3112 in the form of a sheet having a light-transmitting portion (region) and a transparent portion (region), and transparent. They are arranged in the order of a flat decorative body 3111, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as a light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and a decorative body 3111. As shown in FIG. 159, the front (front side) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 provided in the lower back left rendering unit 3200 is directed forward to a transparent lower back left decorative body 3202, and a transparent lower back left rotation. The decorative bodies 3201 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as a lower back left decorative body 3202 and a lower back left rotating decorative body 3201. As shown in FIG. 159, the front (front side) of the lower back right decorative board 3253 provided in the lower back right effecting unit 3250 has a transparent lower right decorative body 3252, and a transparent lower right rotation, as shown in FIG. The decorative bodies 3251 are arranged in that order, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as a lower right back decorative body 3252 and a lower back right rotating decorative body 3251.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 165, the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 provided in the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is a transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 toward the front, and They are arranged in the order of a transparent underside rotating decoration 3310, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as an inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 and a underside rotating decoration 3310. As shown in FIG. 165, a transparent lower middle decoration 3328 is arranged on the front surface (front surface) of the lower middle second decoration substrate 3329 provided in the lower middle decoration unit 3320, and the lower middle decoration 3328 is provided. And the like. As shown in FIG. 171, the front surface (front surface) of the back upper decorative board 3422 provided in the back upper effect unit 3400 is directed forward to the transparent back upper decorative body 3421 or the transparent back upper decorative body. 3421 and a transparent back-upper rotary decoration 3410, and are covered with a game board-side transparent member such as a back-upper decoration 3421 and a back-upper rotary decoration 3410. As shown in FIG. 173, the front surface (front surface) of the back-upper decorative substrate 3452 of the back-up-and-down decorative body unit 3450 provided in the back-up effect unit 3400 has a transparent back-upper decorative body 3451 facing forward. And it is arrange | positioned in order of the transparent back upper decoration body 3440, and is covered with the game board side transparent members, such as a back upper decoration body 3451 and a back upper rear rotation decoration body 3440.

  As shown in FIG. 181, the front surface (front surface) of the back left decorative board 3522 provided in the back back left decorative body unit 3520 is a transparent back back left decorative body 3521 and a transparent back. It is arranged in the order of the rear left rotating decorative body 3510, and is covered with a game board side transparent member such as the back rear left decorative body 3521 and the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510. As shown in FIG. 188, the front (front side) of the back right decoration board 3622 provided in the back right decoration body unit 3620 is directed to the front, the rear right decoration 3621, and the back right right, as shown in FIG. They are arranged in the order of the rotating decorative body 3610, and are covered with the game board side transparent members such as the back right decorative body 3621 and the back right rotating decorative body 3610. As shown in FIG. 193, as shown in FIG. 193, the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 provided in the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is a transparent flat front back left decorative body 3713 and a frame-shaped shutter. A support member 3712, a shutter unit 3730, and a frame-shaped front cover 3711 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as a back front left decorative body 3713 and the like. As shown in FIG. 197, the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 provided in the back front right decorative unit 3810 is a transparent flat front back right decorative body 3813 and a frame-shaped shutter facing forward. A support member 3812, a shutter unit 3830, and a frame-shaped front cover 3811 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as a back front right decorative body 3813.

  As described above, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is covered with the game board side transparent member. As described above, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are mounted. ing. That is, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, which is covered by the game board side transparent member.

  Since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant light emission effect by illumination with a plurality of light emitting units such as LEDs mounted on each decorative board, a plurality of pachinko machines mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 are provided. An LED (a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) changes its light emission mode variously when turned on (emit light) or turned off. For this reason, in a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the player can visually recognize the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 through the game board side transparent member, and the player can enjoy the game. It is inefficient that there is a possibility that interest may be reduced, and that the effect member provided with the decorative substrate on which the LED to be turned off is mounted cannot contribute to the progress of the effect at all.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, each decoration provided on the game board 5 in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decoration board provided on the game board 5 are turned off. The white paint film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate allows the game board side transparent member to look as if it were a white member. Thus, when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 effectively reflects external light. The pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) concept (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) emits external light of various colors from the transparent member on the game board side to the outside because View) is difficult to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, since the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is covered with the game board side transparent member, a plurality of LEDs ( In a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white board formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 makes it possible for the game board side transparent member to be a white member. It is visible. Thereby, when each decoration board provided in the game board 5 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player, even when a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the game board 5 can effectively reflect and emit external light, external light of various colors is transmitted from the game board side transparent member. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is unlikely to be distorted by issuing to the outside. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  As described above, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, and is covered with the game board side transparent member. Among the game board side transparent members, the decorative sheet 3112, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, the lower back right decorative body 3252, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, Back upper front decoration 3410, back upper decoration 3421, back upper decoration 3440, back upper decoration 3451, back left rotation decoration 3510, back left decoration 3521, back right rotation decoration As described above, the body 3610 and the back right decorative body 3621 are formed transparent and have a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. In accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)), so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) from the center to the periphery. Predetermined color (book The facilities form a plurality of dots of pink) is applied by printing. In other words, of the game board side transparent members, the decorative sheet 3112, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, the lower back right decorative body 3252, the lower back middle rotating decoration Body 3310, back-upper rotating decoration 3410, back-upper decoration 3421, back-upper rotating decoration 3440, back-upper decoration 3451, back-left rotating decoration 3510, back-left left decoration 3521, back The right rotation decorative body 3610 and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are formed to be transparent, and a shaded area having a pink color is formed. Thereby, in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 becomes a white background. From this white background, a shaded area having a pink color rises, and the decoration sheet 3112, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, the lower back right decorative body 3252, the lower back Middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back upper rear decorative body 3451, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear left decorative body 3521 , The back right rotating decoration 3610 and the back right decoration 3621 can provide the player with a three-dimensional modeling beauty.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the metal decorative portions (gold material) such as the metal decorative portion 3111d, the metal decorative portion 3310a, the metal decorative portion 3711a, and the metal decorative portion 3811a are formed by hot stamping a gold metal foil. A white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate disposed behind each decorative body on which such a metal decorative portion (gold material) is formed, while being formed by foil pressing. On the upper side, a front side notation portion capable of specifying a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is printed by yellow printing with silk printing. Gold is a color like gold and is a color that shines yellow like gold, so the yellow of the front side notation is a color similar to the gold of the metal decoration 3111d. In the amusement machine, as a gold material, in addition to the obstacle nail N using brass and the metal decorative portion formed by the above-described hot stamping foil stamping, for example, a yellow material (for example, transparent A member on which a yellow resin having a light property, a yellow print) is placed, a gold print, and the like.

[Example of arranging a gold material (metal decoration portion) in front of a decorative sheet having a transparent region and the like arranged in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and surrounding the transparent region with a gold material (metal decoration portion) ]
In addition, as each decoration board provided in the game board 5, for example, a back back decoration board 3114 provided in the back back movable decorative body 3110, a back bottom middle decoration board 3322 provided in the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320, and a back bottom middle board As described above, the front surface (front surface) of the second decorative substrate 3329, the back front left decorative substrate 3714 provided in the back front left decorative body unit 3710, and the front right decorative substrate 3814 provided in the back front right decorative body unit 3810 has white as described above. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”) formed by applying the resist solution of The notation on the front side, which enables the identification of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors on a white resist, is printed by silk printing with a yellow paint, and gold with metallic luster in the vicinity Decorative portion is disposed. As described above, the front side notation section allows the front side electronic component mounted on the front surface (front side) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 to be specified, and the component number of the front side electronic component. , Attributes of the front-side electronic component such as a region indicating a position where the front-side electronic component is arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, It may include the type of the front-side electronic component.)

  For example, the back decoration substrate 3114 provided in the back movable decorative body 3110 will be described. As shown in FIG. 145, the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114 provided in the back movable decoration 3110 faces forward. A light guide radiation plate 3113 in the form of a transparent plate, a decorative sheet 3112 in the form of a sheet having a part (region) having a light transmitting property and a transparent part (region), and a decorative body 3111 in the form of a transparent plate. Then, it is covered with a game board side transparent member such as a light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-like decorative sheet 3112, and a decorative body 3111. The decoration body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for a metal decoration part 3111d having a metallic luster. The metal decorative portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and is printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114. Since the front side notation that allows identification of a possible full-color LED has yellow, the color (yellow) of the front side notation is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration 3111d. I have.

  Note that a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114 corresponding to the metal decoration portion 3111d of the transparent flat decoration body 3111 provided in the back back movable decoration body 3110. On the other hand, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the rear decorative substrate 3114 corresponding to the transparent region of the transparent flat decorative body 3111 excluding the rear decorative substrate 3114.

  When the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114 is transparent except for the metal decoration part 3111d having the metallic luster of the decoration body 3111. Although it can be visually recognized through the area indicated by, the white coating formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 has a white background, so that the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d has The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration 3111 by the attractiveness of the back. This attracts the eyes to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114. Because it is possible, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) does not easily collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  When the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 is replaced with the metal decoration portion 3111d having the metallic luster of the decoration body 3111. Although it can be seen through the transparent area excluding, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 has a white background, so that the color of the metal decoration portion 3111d ( The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration body 3111 by the attractiveness of gold. Thereby, even when the back decoration board 3114 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, the eyes are attracted to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration 3111. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) View) is difficult to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  Further, in a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors that is printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114 is used. The front side notation portion having a yellow color that can be specified can be visually recognized through a transparent region excluding the metal decoration portion 3111d having a metallic luster in the decoration body 3111, but the back side decoration substrate 3114 Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) has a white background, the decorative body 3111 is provided from the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative part 3111d to be formed (formed), the surface side notation part is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decorative part 3111d. It is printed by silk screen printing in yellow to, and is capable of obscuring the presence of the yellow silk printing.

  Further, through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114. The through holes, lands, and the like are prominent from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed, but the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the (surface) to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, the eye is attracted to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111. Therefore, the existence of through holes, lands, etc. can be made difficult to understand, so when performing the work of drawing the wiring pattern of the back decoration board 3114, the position, size and number of the through holes and lands are restricted. It is not necessary to do so, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of drawing the wiring pattern of the back decoration board 3114, and to perform the work of the artwork. It may also contribute to reducing the time required.

[Example of arranging a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent lens arranged in front of a substrate printed in yellow silk]
The lower middle lower decorative board 3322 and the lower middle lower decorative board 3329 provided in the lower middle decorative body unit 3320 will be described. The front of the lower middle lower decorative board 3322 provided in the lower middle decorative body unit 3320 ( 165, the transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 and the transparent lower middle rotating decoration 3310 are arranged in this order in the forward direction, as shown in FIG. , And a game board side transparent member such as a lower middle rotating decoration 3310. As shown in FIG. 165, a transparent lower middle decoration 3328 is arranged on the front surface (front surface) of the lower middle second decoration substrate 3329 provided in the lower middle decoration unit 3320, and the lower middle decoration 3328 is provided. And the like. The entire lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is formed transparent except for a metallic decorative part 3310a having a metallic luster. The metal decorative portion 3310a has a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment), and has a solid white color on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower back middle decorative substrate 3329. Since the front side notation portion that enables the specification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolors printed on the resist by silk printing has yellow, the color (yellow) of the front side notation portion is the metal decoration portion 3310a. The color is similar to the color (gold) of the color.

  It should be noted that a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is not mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the first lower back middle decoration substrate 3322 corresponding to the metal decoration portion 3310a of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310, while the metal decoration portion is not provided. A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the first lower back middle decoration substrate 3322 corresponding to the transparent region of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 excluding the 3310a.

  In a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 has a metallic luster of the lower middle rotating decoration 3310. Although visible through the transparent area excluding the metal decorative portion 3310a, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower first lower decorative substrate 3322 has a white background. Due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3310a, a line of sight is drawn from the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle decoration substrate 3322 to the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310. You will be guided naturally. As a result, the metal decoration part 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is attracted to the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322. Can be made difficult to visually recognize. In a state in which the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 is visually recognized through the transparent lower back middle decoration 3328. Although it can be performed, since the metal decoration part 3310a having a metallic luster is provided (formed) in front of the under-back middle decoration 3328, the under-back middle rotation decoration 3310 is arranged, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3329 has a white background, the front surface (front surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329 is formed by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a. ) Is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. As a result, the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower middle rotating decoration 3310 attracts the eye, and the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower middle second decorative substrate 3329 Can be made difficult to visually recognize. For this reason, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) does not easily collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  When the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (the front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 is replaced with the metallic luster of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. The white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back can be seen through a transparent region excluding the metal decoration portion 3310a having the white background. Then, the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) from the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 to the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3310a. The gaze is guided naturally. Thereby, even when the lower back middle decoration board 3322 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the back lower middle decoration body 3310 is formed. By attracting the eyes, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back can be made difficult to see. In a state in which the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 is visually recognized through the transparent lower back middle decoration 3328. Although it can be performed, since the metal decoration part 3310a having a metallic luster is provided (formed) in front of the under-back middle decoration 3328, the under-back middle rotation decoration 3310 is arranged, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3329 has a white background, the front surface (front surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329 is formed by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a. ) Is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3310a provided (formed) in the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. Thereby, even when the lower back middle decoration board 3329 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 is provided. As the eyes are attracted, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329 can be made difficult to see. For this reason, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) does not easily collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  In addition, in a state where the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is turned off, multicolor light emission that is printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 is possible. Although the front side notation having yellow that enables the full-color LED to be identified can be visually recognized through the transparent area excluding the metal decoration part 3310a having a metallic luster in the lower middle rotating decoration 3310. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decoration substrate 3322 has a white background, the lower back middle first decoration is performed by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3310a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3322 to the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower middle rotation decoration body 3310, the front surface side writing portion It is printed by silk screen printing in yellow similar to the color (gold) metal escutcheon 3310a, and is capable of obscuring the presence of the yellow silk printing. When the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the multicolor emission capable of being printed by silk printing on a solid white resist on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329 is possible. Although the front side notation portion having yellow color capable of specifying a full-color LED can be visually recognized through the transparent underside decoration 3328, a metal decoration portion having a metallic luster in front of the underside decoration 3328. Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 in which the 3310a is provided (formed) is arranged, a white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 becomes a white background. Then, due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3310a, the metal decoration portion 3310a is provided (formed) from the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle decoration substrate 3329 to the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310. Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3310a, even if the front side writing portion is printed by yellow printing similar to the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a by silk printing, this yellow silk printing It is becoming possible to make the existence difficult to understand.

  In addition, a through hole, a land, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the first lower decorative substrate 3322. The through holes, lands, and the like are exposed from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed, but the first decorative substrate under the lower surface is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the 3322 to the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back rotating decoration body 3310, it is provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310. Since the presence of through-holes, lands, and the like can be made difficult to understand by attracting the eyes to the metal decorative portion 3310a, when performing the work of the artwork for routing the wiring pattern of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back. It is not restricted by the position, size, and number of through holes and lands, and the degree of freedom of routing the wiring pattern of the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back is enhanced. Preparative it is also possible to contribute to shortening the time required for the work of the artwork. Further, through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the second lower decorative substrate 3329. The through-holes, lands, and the like are prominently present from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed, but the second decorative substrate under the bottom is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3310a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the 3329 to the metal decoration portion 3310a provided (formed) on the lower back middle decoration body 3310, it is provided (formed) on the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310. Since the eyes are attracted to the metal decorative portion 3310a, it is possible to obscure the existence of through holes, lands, and the like. Therefore, when performing the work of the artwork for routing the wiring pattern of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. It is not restricted by the position, size, and number of through holes and lands, and the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern of the second lower decorative substrate 3329 is improved. Preparative it is also possible to contribute to shortening the time required for the work of the artwork.

[Example of arranging a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent decoration body arranged in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and surrounding the transparent decoration body with a gold material (metal decoration part)]
193. The front left decorative board 3714 provided in the front left decorative body unit 3710 will be described. The front (front side) of the front left decorative board 3714 provided in the front left decorative body unit 3710 is, as shown in FIG. Toward, a game board such as a transparent front left decorative body 3713, a frame-shaped shutter support member 3712, a shutter unit 3730, and a frame front cover 3711 are arranged in this order. It is covered by the side transparent member. On the front surface of the frame-shaped front cover 3711, a metal decorative portion 3711a having metallic luster is formed. The metal decorative portion 3711a has a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment), and is printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. Since the front side notation that enables the specification of a full-color LED capable of emitting light has yellow, the color (yellow) of the front side notation is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3711a. ing.

  In addition, on the front surface (front surface) of the front left back decoration board 3714 corresponding to the metal decoration section 3711a of the back front left decorative body unit 3710, a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is not mounted, while the metal decoration section 3711a is mounted. A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 corresponding to the region inside the frame of the removed frame-shaped front cover 3711.

  In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730, the front left back decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 becomes visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the front left decoration 3713 is formed behind the rear left decoration 3713 because the front left decoration 3713 is formed transparent. Although the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3714 can be visually recognized through the front left back decoration 3713, the frame of the shutter support member 3712, and the frame of the shutter unit 3730, the white front surface is visible. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3714 has a white background, the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. Accordingly, the metal decoration portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711 is attracted to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) does not easily collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, in the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 becomes visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the front left decoration 3713 is formed behind the rear left decoration 3713 because the front left decoration 3713 is formed transparent. Although the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3714 can be visually recognized through the front left back decoration 3713, the frame of the shutter support member 3712, and the frame of the shutter unit 3730, the white front surface is visible. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3714 has a white background, the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. Thus, even when the back front left decorative board 3714 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eyes are attracted to the metal decorative portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) can make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714. Is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  When the full color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off in the open state where the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the shutter unit 3730, the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 is solid-painted. A front side notation portion having a yellow color that can specify a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolors printed on a white resist by silk printing is provided on the back front left decorative body 3713, the frame of the shutter support member 3712, and the shutter unit. Although it is visible through the frame of 3730, the white coating formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 provides a white background, so that the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a is provided. Is provided on the front cover 3711 from the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative board 3714 by the attractiveness of Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decoration portion 3711a, even if the front side notation portion is printed by silk printing in yellow similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3711a, the presence of this yellow silk printing is not considered. It can be made harder to understand.

  In addition, through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. The through-holes, lands, and the like are prominent from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed, but the through-holes and lands of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3711a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) to the metal decoration portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711, the eyes are attracted to the metal decoration portion 3711a provided (formed) on the front cover 3711. This makes it difficult to recognize the existence of through holes and lands. Therefore, when performing the work of drawing the wiring pattern of the front left front decorative board 3714, the position, size, and number of through holes and lands are determined. And the wiring pattern of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 can be more freely routed, and It may also contribute to reducing the time required for the click operation.

[Example of arranging a gold material (metal decoration part) in front of a transparent decoration body arranged in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and surrounding the transparent decoration body with a gold material (metal decoration part)]
The front right decorative board 3814 included in the front right decorative body unit 3810 will be described. The front (front side) of the front right decorative board 3814 included in the front right decorative body unit 3810 is, as shown in FIG. Toward, a game board such as a transparent front right decorative body 3813, a frame-shaped shutter support member 3812, a shutter unit 3830, and a frame front cover 3811 are arranged in this order. It is covered by the side transparent member. On the front surface of the frame-shaped front cover 3811, a metal decorative portion 3811a having a metallic luster is formed. The metal decorative portion 3811a has a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment), and is printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. Since the front side notation that enables the specification of a light-emitting full-color LED has yellow, the color (yellow) of the front side notation is similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration part 3811a. ing.

  In addition, on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 corresponding to the metal decorative portion 3811a of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, the metal decorative portion 3811a is not mounted while the full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor is not mounted. A full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 corresponding to the region within the frame of the frame-shaped front cover 3811 that has been removed.

  In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830, the front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 can be viewed from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the front right decoration 3813 is formed transparent, and thus the front right decoration disposed behind the front right decoration 3813. Although the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3814 can be visually recognized through the front right back decoration 3813, the frame of the shutter support member 3812, and the frame of the shutter unit 3830, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3814 has a white background, the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. This attracts the eyes to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. Therefore, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) does not easily collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In the open state in which the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the shutter unit 3830, the back right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 becomes visible from the front. In this open state, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the front right decoration 3813 is formed transparent, and thus the front right decoration disposed behind the front right decoration 3813. Although the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3814 can be visually recognized through the front right back decoration 3813, the frame of the shutter support member 3812, and the frame of the shutter unit 3830, Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 3814 has a white background, the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a. The line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. Thereby, even when the back front right decorative board 3814 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the eyes are attracted to the metal decorative portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) can make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814. Is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  When the shutter unit 3830 opens the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 and the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 is solid-filled. A front side notation portion having a yellow color that can specify a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolors printed on a white resist by silk printing is provided on the front front right side decorative body 3813, the frame of the shutter support member 3812, and the shutter unit. Although visible through the frame of 3830, the white coating formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 has a white background, so that the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a has Is provided on the front cover 3811 from the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative board 3814 by the attractiveness of Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decoration portion 3811a, even if the front side notation portion is printed by yellow printing similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3811a by silk printing, the presence of this yellow silk printing is determined. It can be made harder to understand.

  In addition, through holes, lands, and the like are formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. The through holes, lands, and the like are prominent from the white coating film because the copper foil is exposed, but the through-holes and lands of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3811a. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) to the metal decoration portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811, the eyes are attracted to the metal decoration portion 3811a provided (formed) on the front cover 3811. By doing so, it is possible to make the existence of through holes and lands difficult to understand, so when performing the work of drawing the wiring pattern of the right front decorative substrate 3814, the position, size, and number of through holes and lands are required. And the wiring pattern of the right front decorative substrate 3814 can be more freely routed, and It may also contribute to reducing the time required for the click operation.

[Example of disposing a transparent decorative body placed in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate between a gold material (metal decoration part) and a gold material (metal decoration part)]
In the game area 5a of the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 111, a lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 shown in FIG. 163 is located at a standby position (original position). 171 is arranged on the upper side thereof, and the back front left decorative body unit 3710 of the back front left rendering unit 3700 shown in FIG. 193 is arranged on the left side thereof, and on the right side thereof. A back front right decoration unit 3810 of the back front right production unit 3800 shown in FIG. 197 is arranged, a back bottom left production unit 3200 shown in FIG. 159 is arranged on the lower left side, and FIG. The shown lower right effect unit 3250 is arranged.

  A lower back middle decoration body 3310 of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 arranged below the game area 5a of the game board 5, a back front left decoration body unit 3710 arranged on the left side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 Metal decorations 3310a, 3711a, and 3811a are provided (formed) on the front cover 3711 of the front panel 3711 and the front cover 3811 of the rear right decoration unit 3810 disposed on the right side of the game area 5a of the game board 5. All have gold color.

  On the other hand, the back upper front decorative body 3421 and the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 of the back upper staging unit 3400 arranged above the game area 5a of the game board 5 are formed transparent, and the back upper front decoration. The front side notation that enables the specification of a full-color LED capable of multicolor emission printed by silk printing on a solid white resist on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3422 has yellow, and the front side notation The color (yellow) of the part is arranged on the metal decoration portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 arranged on the left side of the back upper presentation unit 3400, and on the right side of the back upper presentation unit 3400. It has a color similar to the gold color of the metal decoration portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration unit 3810. In other words, the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 having the yellow front side notation similar to the gold color includes the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the front front left decorative body unit 3710 and the front cover of the rear front right decorative body unit 3810. 3811a and the metal decoration part 3811a of the front cover 3711 of the front back left decoration body unit 3710 and the metal decoration part 3811a of the front cover 3781 of the back front right decoration unit 3810. In the case where the color (yellow) of the front-side notation can be visually recognized through the back upper front decorative body 3421 or the back upper front decorative body 3421 and the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410. However, the presence of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 can be determined by the attractiveness of the metal decorative portions 3711a and 3811a having a gold color. Comb, it is possible to obscure the presence of the surface-side shower unit.

  The lower back left decorative body 3202 and the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 arranged on the lower left side of the game area 5a of the gaming board 5 are formed transparent, and the lower back left decorative board is provided. The front side notation has a yellow color to indicate a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors printed by silk printing on a white resist solid-coated on the front surface (front side) of 3203, and has a front side notation. The color (yellow) of the metal decoration portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 arranged on the upper left of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower right of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 It has a color similar to the gold color of the metal decoration portion 3310a of the under-back middle decoration body 3310 of the under-back middle decoration body unit 3320. In other words, the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 having the yellow front side notation similar to the gold color corresponds to the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the lower back of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320. Since it is interposed between the metal decoration portion 3310a of the middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the metal decorative portion 3711a of the front cover 3711 of the front left decorative body unit 3710 and the lower middle rotating decoration of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320. Since the color (yellow) of the front-side notation can be visually recognized through the lower back left decorative body 3202 and the lower back left rotary decorative body 3201 (because it is disposed close to the metal decoration part 3310a of the body 3310). Even if it is, the presence of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is difficult to understand due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored metal decorative portions 3711a and 3310a. It is possible to obscure the presence of the indicating section.

  In addition, the lower right back decoration 3252 and the lower right rotation decoration 3251 of the lower back right rendering unit 3250 arranged on the lower right side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 are formed transparent, and the lower back right decoration. The front side notation that allows the specification of a full-color LED capable of multicolor emission printed by silk printing on a solid white resist on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate 3253 has yellow, and the front side notation The color (yellow) of the part is located on the metal decoration part 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 arranged on the upper right of the lower back right rendering unit 3250, and on the lower left of the lower back left rendering unit 3200. The color is similar to the gold color of the metal decoration portion 3310a of the under-back middle rotation decorative body 3310 of the under-back middle decoration body unit 3320 to be arranged. In other words, the lower right back decoration board 3253 having the yellow front side notation similar to the gold color corresponds to the metal decoration portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the back front right decoration unit 3810 and the lower back of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320. Because it is interposed between the metal decoration portion 3310a of the middle rotation decorative body 3310 and the metal decoration portion 3811a of the front cover 3811 of the front right decoration body unit 3810 and the lower middle rotation decoration of the lower middle decoration unit 3320. Since the color (yellow) of the front side notation can be visually recognized through the lower back right decorative body 3252 and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251) (because it is disposed close to the metal decoration part 3310a of the body 3310). Even if it is, the presence of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is difficult to understand due to the attractiveness of the metal decorative portions 3811a and 3310a having a gold color. It is possible to obscure the presence of the indicating section.

[Example of disposing nails near a transparent decoration placed in front of a yellow silk-printed board]
As described above, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is formed such that the outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is a transparent flat plate-like panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. As described above, the front component 1000 is formed to be transparent together with the game panel 1100. Thus, the presence of various members arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized through the game panel 1100 from the front of the front component 1000 (that is, the front of the game board 5) (hereinafter, referred to as “below”). "Transparent gaming panel 1100" may be described.)

  As described above, the front unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100 has the center role 2500 formed in a transparent frame shape, the starting port unit 2100 formed of a transparent member, and the side unit 2200 formed of a transparent member. The upper left unit 2300 is formed transparent, and the unit base 2411, the front cover 2412, and the rear cover 2413 of the first attacker unit 2400 are formed of transparent members. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 111, for example, the presence of the lower back left rendering unit 3200, the lower back right rendering unit 3250, and the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be determined by using a transparent gaming panel. 1100 and through various transparent members of the front unit 2000.

  For example, in the lower back left rendering unit 3200, behind the transparent game panel 1100, a transparent decoration body such as a lower left rotation decoration body 3201 and a lower back left decoration body 3202 is arranged. At the rear, the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 will be arranged. A plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203. In this way, behind the transparent game panel 1100, a transparent decoration body of lower back left rotating decoration body 3201, lower back left decoration body 3202, and lower back left decoration board 3203 are arranged in this order. On the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, a white resist solution is applied to form a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). A white resist layer is formed. On the white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, the surface number of the surface-side electronic components such as a plurality of full-color LEDs, the surface indicating the position where the front-side electronic components are arranged, and the like. The attributes of the side electronic component (which may further include the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component). The front side notation is printed in yellow (a color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N (in this embodiment, brass is used)) by silk printing.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N (in this embodiment, brass is used) in contact with the game balls and having a predetermined gauge arrangement and having a gold color are provided on a transparent game panel 1100. Since it is planted, the attractiveness of the plurality of obstacle nails N having a golden color can be used. That is, since a plurality of gold nails N are implanted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the plurality of gold nails N are arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 by the attractiveness of the plurality of gold nails N. Even if the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 can be visually recognized through transparent decorations such as the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 This contributes to making it difficult to understand the presence of the yellow surface-side notation portion (color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N) printed by silk printing on a white resist that is solid-coated.

  Similarly to the lower back left rendering unit 3200, the lower back right rendering unit 3250 also has a point that it contributes to making the presence of the front side notation part difficult to understand. That is, since a plurality of gold nails N are implanted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the plurality of gold nails N are arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 by the attractiveness of the plurality of gold nails N. Viewing the front surface (front surface) of the lower back right decoration board 3253 of the lower back right rendering unit 3250 through transparent decorations such as the lower back right rotating decoration 3251 and the lower back right decoration 3252 of the lower back right rendering unit 3250. Even if possible, yellow (color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N) is printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly painted on the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 of the lower back right rendering unit 3250 ) Contributes to making the presence of the front side notation difficult to understand.

  In addition, similarly to the lower back left rendering unit 3200, the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 also contributes to making it difficult to understand the presence of the front side notation. That is, since a plurality of gold nails N are implanted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the plurality of gold nails N are arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100 by the attractiveness of the plurality of gold nails N. The front (front surface) of the first lower decorative substrate 3322 of the lower back middle production unit 3300 is passed through a transparent decoration body called the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 and the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 of the lower back middle production unit 3300. Even if it can be visually recognized, or through the transparent decorations of the lower back middle decoration unit 3300 and the lower back middle decoration 3328 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 arranged behind the transparent game panel 1100. Even if the front (front side) of the second lower decorative board 3329 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 can be visually recognized, the lower back right performance Yellow (color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N) printed on a white resist solidly painted on the lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower middle second decorative substrate 3329 of the unit 3250 by silk printing ) Contributes to making the presence of the front side notation difficult to understand.

  Further, for example, in a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decoration board 3203 of the lower back left effect unit 3200 are turned off, the front surface of the back lower left decoration board 3203 is turned off. The front-side notation formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the back is formed as a transparent decoration such as the lower back left decoration 3202 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower back left rotating decoration 3201. Although it is visible through the body and the transparent gaming panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 becomes a white background, so that the front surface of the lower lower left decorative substrate 3203 can be seen. The obstruction nail N having a gold color from the surface of the lower back left decorative board 3203 by the attractiveness of the obstruction nail N having a gold color implanted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 disposed in So that the line-of-sight is induced with nature. Accordingly, even when the lower back left decorative board 3203 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, the obstruction nail N having a gold color attracts the eyes, and thus the surface of the lower back left decorative board 3203 is attracted. Since it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the game machine, the world view of the gaming machine is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  Similarly to the lower back left rendering unit 3200, the lower back right rendering unit 3250 is also capable of suppressing a decrease in decorativeness. That is, in a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back right decoration substrate 3253 of the lower back right effect unit 3250 are turned off, the light is formed on the surface of the lower back right decoration substrate 3253. The front side notation portion formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film to be formed, a transparent decoration body of the lower back right decoration unit 3252 of the lower back right rendering unit 3250, and the lower back right rotation decoration body 3251, Then, although it becomes visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 has a white background, and thus is disposed in front of the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253. The gaze from the surface of the lower right back decoration board 3253 to the gold-colored obstacle nail N by the attractiveness of the gold-colored obstacle nail N implanted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 to be seen The be induced with nature. Thus, even when the lower back right decorative board 3253 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, the obstruction nail N having the gold color attracts the eyes, and the lower back right decorative board 3253 has a front surface. Since it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the game machine, the world view of the gaming machine is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  In addition, similarly to the lower back left effect unit 3200, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 is also capable of suppressing a decrease in decorativeness. That is, in a state where the plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 are turned off, the lower back middle lower decorative substrate 3322 is turned off. The front-side notation formed in yellow similar to gold on a white coating formed on the surface of the lower surface is referred to as the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower middle rotating decoration 3310. Although it becomes visible through the transparent decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back lower first decorative substrate 3322 becomes a white background, and the lower lower back first First decorative substrate 3322 under the back due to the attractiveness of gold obstruction nail N implanted on the surface of transparent gaming panel 1100 disposed in front of the surface of decorative substrate 3322 Gaze from the surface to the nails N having a gold color is to be derived naturally. In a state in which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the second back decoration board 3329 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 are turned off, the lower back middle second decoration board 3329 is turned off. The front side notation formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower part is a lower back middle decoration body 3328 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and a lower back middle rotation decoration 3310. Although it becomes visible through the transparent decorative panel and the transparent gaming panel 1100, the white coating formed on the surface of the lower back lower second decorative substrate 3329 becomes a white background, and thus the lower back lower second decoration. Due to the attractiveness of the obstruction nail N having a gold color implanted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 disposed in front of the surface of the substrate 3329, the surface of the second lower decorative substrate 3329 has a gold color due to the attractiveness. To nails N line of sight is to be induced and natural that. Thereby, even when the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower back middle decorative substrate 3329 are used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player, the obstruction nail N having the gold color is attracted to the eyes. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329, so that the world view of the gaming machine is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  A plurality of obstacle nails N having a gold color are planted on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1100. Instead, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is pasted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The sheet has a portion designed in gold (the same color as the gold possessed by the plurality of obstacle nails N or a color close to the gold). The lower back left decoration board in the lower back left rendering unit 3200 through transparent decorations such as the lower back left rotating decoration body 3201 and the lower back left decoration body 3202 in the lower back left rendering unit 3200 arranged at the rear of the drawn part. Even when the front surface (front surface) of 3203 can be visually recognized, the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 in the lower back left rendering unit 3200 is solid-painted. Contribute to obscuring the presence of the surface representation of the yellow (color similar to gold with the portion designed cell sheets) printed by silk printing on a white resist. In a state in which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back left decorative board 3203 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 are turned off, they are formed on the surface of the back lower left decorative board 3203. A front side notation formed in yellow similar to gold on a white coating film is a transparent decoration body of a lower back left decoration body 3202 of a lower back left rendering unit 3200 and a lower back left rotation decoration body 3201 and a transparent decoration body Although it becomes visible through the simple game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 has a white background, and is arranged in front of the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203. Due to the attractiveness of the gold-colored part of the cell sheet affixed to the surface of the transparent game panel 1100, the surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is connected to the cell sheet. Gold to the design portion in the line of sight is to be induced and natural that. With this, even when the lower back left decorative board 3203 is used as a kind of decoration visible to the player, the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet is attracted to the lower back left decorative board. Since the white coating film formed on the surface of the 3203 can be made hard to visually recognize, the world view of the gaming machine is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  Also, similarly to the lower back left rendering unit 3200, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is pasted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the cell sheet is gold (the same color as the gold of the plurality of obstacle nails N or the same color). There is a part designed in a color close to gold), and the lower back right production unit 3250 arranged behind the part designed in gold due to the attractiveness of the part designed in gold also causes a decrease in decorativeness. Can be suppressed. That is, in a state where a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back right decoration substrate 3253 of the lower back right effect unit 3250 are turned off, the light is formed on the surface of the lower back right decoration substrate 3253. The front side notation portion formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film to be formed, a transparent decoration body of the lower back right decoration unit 3252 of the lower back right rendering unit 3250, and the lower back right rotation decoration body 3251, Then, although it becomes visible through the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 has a white background, and thus is disposed in front of the surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3253. Of the cell sheet pasted on the surface of the transparent game panel 1100 to be drawn, the celsi from the surface of the lower right bottom decorative substrate 3253 by the attractiveness of the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet. Line-of-sight to the design portion in gold is to be induced and natural in the door. Thus, even when the lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet is attracted to the lower back right decorative substrate. Since the white coating film formed on the surface of the 3253 can be made hard to visually recognize, the world view of the gaming machine is hard to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  Further, similarly to the lower back left rendering unit 3200, a cell sheet having a predetermined shape is pasted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the cell sheet is colored gold (the same color as the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N or the same color). There is a part designed in a color close to gold), and the lower back middle production unit 3300 arranged behind the gold-designed part due to the attractiveness of the gold-designed part also reduces the decorativeness. Can be suppressed. That is, in a state where the plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 are turned off, the lower back middle lower decorative substrate 3322 is turned off. The front-side notation formed in yellow similar to gold on a white coating formed on the surface of the lower surface is referred to as the inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and the lower middle rotating decoration 3310. Although it becomes visible through the transparent decorative body and the transparent game panel 1100, the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back lower first decorative substrate 3322 becomes a white background, and the lower lower back first The lower part of the cell sheet affixed to the surface of the transparent gaming panel 1100 disposed in front of the surface of the decorative substrate 3322 is attracted by the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet, and the lower part is under the back. So that the line of sight from the surface one decorative substrate 3322 to nails N with gold is derived naturally. In a state in which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the second back decoration board 3329 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 are turned off, the lower back middle second decoration board 3329 is turned off. The front side notation formed in yellow similar to gold on the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower part is a lower back middle decoration body 3328 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 and a lower back middle rotation decoration 3310. Although it becomes visible through the transparent decorative panel and the transparent gaming panel 1100, the white coating formed on the surface of the lower back lower second decorative substrate 3329 becomes a white background, and thus the lower back lower second decoration. The second decorative substrate 332 under the lower back due to the attractiveness of the gold-designed portion of the cell sheet attached to the surface of the transparent gaming panel 1100 disposed in front of the surface of the substrate 3329 Surface line of sight to the nails N having a gold color is to be derived naturally from. Thus, even when the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower back middle decorative substrate 3329 are used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, the gold-colored portion of the cell sheet can be seen. Is attracted, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the surface of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 and the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329, so that the world view of the gaming machine is hard to collapse. . Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

[Silk printing with a light-colored paint on a white coating film formed on the surface of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame]
On the other hand, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the above-described second embodiment (hereinafter, may be referred to as “various decorative boards included in the door frame 3”). For example, a handle decoration board 184 provided in the handle unit 180 shown in FIG. 38, a dish upper left decoration board 273 provided in the dish upper left decoration unit 270 shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, and a dish upper right shown in FIGS. The upper right decorative plate 278 provided in the decorative unit 275, the lower left decorative substrate 283 provided in the lower left decorative unit 280 shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, and the right plate provided in the lower right decorative unit 285 shown in FIGS. The lower decorative board 288, the upper dish center decorative board 314 provided in the effect operating unit cover unit 310 of the effect operating unit 300 shown in FIG. 54, the effect shown in FIG. 54 The decoration board 316 below the center of the plate provided in the production operation unit cover unit 310 of the production unit 300, the production operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided in the production operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 54, and the production operation button of the production operation unit 300 shown in FIG. The central button decoration board 376 provided in the unit 360, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 60, and the door frame left side provided in the door frame left side unit 400 shown in FIG. The decorative board 402, the decorative portion decorative board 413 in the side window provided in the door frame right side unit 410 shown in FIG. 70, the door frame right side decorative board 418 provided in the door frame right side unit 410 shown in FIG. 70, and FIG. Door frame top center decorative board 455 provided in the illustrated door frame top unit 450, figure There is a door frame top left decorative board 456 provided in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 4, a door frame top right decorative board 457 provided in the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. 74, and the like. ) And a white coating film formed by applying a resist liquid having a white back surface (back surface) (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”) to form a white resist layer. And a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) can be specified on a white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. Since the notation such as the part number and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is printed by yellow printing with the yellow paint, the reflectance is reduced according to the above-described second embodiment. With the effect of the configuration of the countermeasure such as the above, that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged can prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from lowering due to the emission of the full-color LED. At the same time, there is an effect that the player can prevent a part number corresponding to a full-color LED having no relation to the game at all and a region indicating a position where the full-color LED is arranged from being visually recognized by the player. (Measures such as a decrease in reflectance are taken).

  Here, the members arranged on the front (front side) or the upper side (front side) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 will be briefly described. The front side (front side) of the handle decorative board 184 provided in the handle unit 180 is 38, the transparent inner lens 185a and the transparent handle cover 185 are arranged in this order in the order of the front, and are covered by the door frame side transparent members such as the inner lens 185a and the handle cover 185. ing. As shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the front (front surface) of the dish upper decoration board 273 provided in the dish upper decoration unit 270 is a transparent dish upper inner lens 272 and a transparent dish upper decoration as shown in FIGS. 271 and are covered by a door frame side transparent member such as an upper left dish inner lens 272 and an upper left dish decoration 271. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front (front surface) of the dish upper right decorative board 278 provided in the dish upper right decorative unit 275 is a transparent dish upper right inner lens 277 and a transparent dish upper right decoration. 276, and are covered by a door frame side transparent member such as a dish upper right inner lens 277 and a dish upper right decorative body 276. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front surface (front surface) of the lower left dish decoration substrate 283 provided in the lower left dish decoration unit 280 is directed forward with a transparent lower left inner lens 282 and a transparent lower left decorative body. 281, and are covered with a door frame side transparent member such as a lower left dish inner lens 282 and a lower left dish decoration 281. As shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the front (front) surface of the lower right decorative plate 288 provided in the lower right decorative unit 285 has a transparent lower right inner lens 287 and a transparent lower plate. They are arranged in the order of the lower right decorative body 286, and are covered by a door frame side transparent member such as a lower right inner plate 287 of the dish and a lower right decorative body 286.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (front surface) of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 provided in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 has a transparent dish center upper lens 313 and a transparent dish center. They are arranged in the order of the upper decorative body 312a, and are covered with a door frame side transparent member such as the inner lens 313 above the dish center and the upper decorative body 312a above the dish. As shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (front surface) of the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 provided in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 is a transparent dish center lower inner lens 315 and a transparent dish lower center decoration. They are arranged in the order of the body 312b, and are covered by a door frame side transparent member such as a dish center lower inner lens 315 and a dish center lower decorative body 312b. As shown in FIG. 54, the upper surface (front surface) of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided in the effect operation unit 300 includes a transparent decoration substrate cover 353, a transparent ring mounting base 331, and a transparent rotation operation unit 302. , And is covered with a door frame side transparent member such as the decorative board cover 353, the ring mounting base 331, and the rotation operation unit 302. As shown in FIG. 60, a transparent center button cover 375 is disposed on the upper surface (front surface) of the central button decoration board 376 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and a door frame such as the center button cover 375 is provided. It is covered by the side transparent member. As shown in FIG. 60, the upper surface (front surface) of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 has a transparent outer substrate cover 378, a transparent outer decoration inner lens 379, and a transparent outer decoration inner lens 379. The outer peripheral button cover 380 is arranged in this order, and is covered with a door frame side transparent member such as the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative inner lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 67, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame left side decorative board 402 provided in the door frame left side unit 400 is directed forward with a transparent left side inner lens 403 and a transparent door frame. They are arranged in the order of the left side decorative body 404, and are covered by the left side inner lens 403 and the door frame side transparent member such as the door frame left side decorative body 404. As shown in FIG. 70, the front side (front surface) of the decorative portion decorative board 413 in the side window provided in the door frame right side unit 410 faces forward with a transparent inner lens 414 and a transparent side window decoration. The parts are arranged in the order of the part 410b, and are covered by the inner frame inner lens 414 and the door frame side transparent member such as the side window decoration part 410b. As shown in FIG. 70, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame right side decorative board 418 provided in the door frame right side unit 410 is directed forward with a transparent right side inner lens 415 and a transparent door frame right side. The decorative members 419 are arranged in this order, and are covered with the door frame side transparent members such as the right side inner lens 415 and the door frame right side decorative member 419.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 74, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 provided in the door frame top unit 450 has a transparent top center inner lens 458 and a transparent door frame top as shown in FIG. The decorative members 453 are arranged in this order, and are covered by a door frame side transparent member such as the top center inner lens 458 and the door frame top decorative member 453. As shown in FIG. 74, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 provided in the door frame top unit 450 is directed forward, with a transparent top left inner lens 459 and a transparent door frame top decorative body. 453, and are covered by a door frame side transparent member such as a top left inner lens 459 and a door frame top decorative body 453. As shown in FIG. 74, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame top right decorative board 457 provided in the door frame top unit 450 is directed forward to a transparent top right inner lens 460 and a transparent door frame top decorative body. 453, and are covered by a door frame side transparent member such as a top right inner lens 460 and a door frame top decorative body 453.

  As described above, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is covered with the door frame side transparent member. As described above, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are mounted. ing. That is, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film, which is covered with the door frame side transparent member.

  Since the pachinko machine 1 performs a brilliant luminous effect by lighting with a plurality of light emitting units such as LEDs mounted on each decorative substrate, a plurality of pachinko machines mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. An LED (a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors) changes its light emission mode variously when it is turned on (emit light) or turned off. For this reason, in a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the player can visually recognize the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the door frame 3 through the door frame side transparent member, and the player can enjoy the game. It is inefficient that there is a possibility that interest may be reduced, and that the effect member provided with the decorative substrate on which the LED to be turned off is mounted cannot contribute to the progress of the effect at all.

  In view of this, in each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 which adopts a configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the decorative board is mounted on the front surface (front surface) or upper surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. When a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) are turned off, a white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is transparent on the door frame side. The members are made to look as if they were white members. Thereby, even when the light emission effect by a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) is not progressing, the light emitting effect is formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. Since the white coating film can effectively reflect and emit external light, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be achieved by emitting external light of various colors from the transparent member on the door frame side to the outside. That is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is unlikely to collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, in each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 that adopts the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 is a door. Since it is covered by the frame-side transparent member, a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 are turned off. In this state, the door frame side transparent member looks like a white member by the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. This is a case in which each decoration board provided on the door frame 3 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, and a state in which a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) does not progress light emission. However, since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 can effectively reflect and emit external light, various colors can be used. The concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is hardly broken by emitting the outside light from the door frame side transparent member to the outside. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  Further, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 adopting the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment is coated with a white resist solution as described above. As a result, a white coating film is formed and covered with the door frame side transparent member. Among the door frame side transparent members, the handle cover 185, the upper left decoration 271, the upper right decoration 276, the lower left decoration 281, the lower right decoration 286, the upper decoration 312a, and the lower decoration 312b are provided. , The rotation operation unit 302, the center button cover 375, the outer peripheral button cover 380, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative part 410b, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 are as described above. Thus, it is formed transparent. On the other hand, among the transparent members on the game board side covering the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 described above, the decorative sheet 3112, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the back Lower left decorative body 3202, lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, lower back right decorative body 3252, lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back upper decoration 3451, the back left rotation decoration 3510, the back left decoration 3521, the back right rotation decoration 3610, and the back back right decoration 3621 include the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The difference is that a plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in the present embodiment) along the concept (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) are printed.

  Briefly describing this, the pachinko machine 1 can provide the player with an effect having a different world view by replacing the game board. In order to suppress the manufacturing cost of various substrates provided on a door frame or a game board, inexpensive green color is generally used as a resist liquid applied to various substrates. However, when providing a brilliant effect to the player by the cooperation of the light emitting effect by the game board and the light emitting effect by the door frame, in a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame is turned off. The green color of the resist solution applied to the game board may be visually recognized as it is, which may disturb the world view of the game board without matching the world view of the game board, which may cause the player to wake up and the interest of the game to deteriorate.

  In view of this, in each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 which adopts a configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the decorative board is mounted on the front surface (front surface) or upper surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. When a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) are turned off, a white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is transparent on the door frame side. The members are made to look as if they were white members. Thereby, in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is variously changed. By using a white background that is easy to be dyed in various colors, the world view of the game board can be easily dyed and the world view of the game board can be hardly collapsed. In other words, even if the game board is replaced with the door frame 3 installed in the game hall, as described above, it is mounted on the front surface (front surface) or upper surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3. When the plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the door frame side transparent member formed on the front surface (front surface) or upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is a white member. The appearance as if it is, it is possible to keep the world view of the replaced game board from being inconsistent.

  Further, as described above, a white resist solution is applied to the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. A white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed in this manner (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”), and is covered by the door frame side transparent member. Among the door frame side transparent members, for example, a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by a player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by a player are formed to be transparent, and a rendering operation unit The surface (mounting) of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided in the effect operation unit 300, the center button decoration substrate 376 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 ) Are disposed at positions easily visible to the player through the corresponding door frame side transparent members. The reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas it decreases as the color approaches black. The yellow reflectance is lower but higher than the white reflectance of the white coating. For this reason, in the combination of white and yellow (the configuration of the present embodiment), the yellow is inconspicuous when the background is white, and when the surface side notation is yellow, the yellow surface side Notation part is hard to stand out. As described above, the front side notation allows the front side electronic component mounted on the front side (front side) or the top side (front side) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 to be specified. Attributes of the front-side electronic component, such as the component number of the electronic component, an area indicating the position where the front-side electronic component is arranged, and the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, and the mounting orientation of the front-side electronic component (Mounting direction), which may include the type of the front-side electronic component.)

  On the other hand, the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply board 630 or the main control board 1310 is, as described above, a green coating film formed by applying a green resist solution (hereinafter simply referred to as “solid green coating”). Of the front-side electronic component, such as a part number of the front-side electronic component, a region indicating a position where the front-side electronic component is to be arranged, and the like. The front side notation indicating the shape of the front side electronic component, the size of the front side electronic component, the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front side electronic component, and the type of the front side electronic component may be included). It is printed by silk printing on solid green resist with paint. The power supply board 630 is housed in a transparent power supply board cover 631 and provided with a power switch 630a for turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and is exposed from the transparent power supply board cover 631. The main control board 1310 is housed in a transparent main control board box 1320, is provided with a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM, and is exposed from the transparent main control board box 1320. The power switch 630a is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, so that it is located at a position that is difficult for the player to see. The RAM clear switch is located on the rear side of the game board 5, so that the game is played. It is located at a position that is difficult to see from the user.

  The reflectance increases as the color approaches white, whereas it decreases as the color approaches black. For this reason, if the background is a color that is closer to black than white, white will be conspicuous, and in the combination of green and white, white will be conspicuous if the background is green, and the surface side notation will be white In this case, the green surface side notation is noticeable with respect to the green resist. That is, a white front side notation portion (white back side notation portion for a green resist) stands out for a green resist solidly painted on the surfaces (mounting surfaces) of the power supply board 630 and the main control board 1310. .

  In other words, since the power switch 630a and the RAM clear switch are arranged at positions that are difficult for the player to visually recognize, the white color of the paint printed by silk printing with respect to the green color of the resist liquid is a combination that is easily visible. Also, the front side notation such as the electronic part number which has no relation to the game for the player does not have to be visually recognized by the player through the transparent power supply board cover 631 and the transparent main control board box 1320. On the other hand, a transparent rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player are arranged at positions easily visible to the player, and the resist solution Because the yellow color of the paint printed by silk printing is a combination that is not easily visible against the white color, the rotary operation unit where the front side notation part such as electronic part number etc. that has nothing to do with the game for the player is transparent It is possible to make it harder for a player to visually recognize through the 302 and the transparent pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  In addition, the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided in the effect operation unit 300, the center button decoration substrate 376 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 Even if the decorative substrate such as is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player, the transparent rotary operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and the transparent pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player Is located in a position that is easily visible to the player, and the yellow color of the paint printed by silk printing against the white color of the resist liquid is a combination that is not easily visible to the player, so it is completely related to the game for the player The front side notation such as the electronic part number that does not have a transparent rotation operation unit 302 It can be hardly viewed by the player in. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

[White coating film formed on the surface of each decorative board provided on the game board and door frame]
By the way, when the player plays a game, the pachinko machine 1 accidentally hits the obstacle nail with another game ball when the game ball fired toward the game area 5a of the game board 5 is flowing down. It may become clogged. In this state, when the player hits the game balls one after another toward the game area 5a, the game balls are further stacked on the packed game balls, and the state is such that the game balls are gathered in a grape shape. In order to eliminate the state in which the game balls are gathered in a grape shape, the player calls a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall to have the grape balls gathered in the game hall to be removed. A clerk, such as a clerk of a game hall, called by the player opens the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, the pachinko machine 1 applies the decorative board to the game board 5. In addition to performing control to turn off a plurality of LEDs to be mounted, all the movable members provided on the game board 5 are controlled so as to be maintained at the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether or not they are operating. Of the game board at the time. " Along with or instead of controlling the game board at the time of opening, a specific LED (for example, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469) among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration substrate provided in the door frame 3 When the door frame 3 is provided with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether or not the movable body is operated, while performing control for lighting a plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the door frame 3. "Control of the door frame at the time of opening" is performed.

  Also, when the game balls are clogged in the nose for supplying game balls of the island equipment in the game hall, the game balls from the island equipment in the game hall are not supplied to the pachinko machine 1, and the game balls are not paid out to the player, When the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the like shown in FIG. 77 are clogged with balls and the game balls are no longer paid out to the player, the player moves to the game hall. A clerk, such as a clerk, is called to have the ball cleared. A clerk such as a clerk of a game hall called by a player opens the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. At this time, when the pachinko machine 1 detects the opening, the pachinko machine 1 applies the decoration board to the game board 5. As described above, control is performed to turn off all the plurality of mounted LEDs, and control is performed so that each movable body provided in the game board 5 is maintained at the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether or not it is operating. "Control of the game board at the time of opening" is performed. Along with or instead of controlling the game board at the time of opening, a specific LED (for example, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469) among a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decoration substrate provided in the door frame 3 When the door frame 3 is provided with a movable body, the movable body is maintained at the position at the time of opening, regardless of whether or not the movable body is operated, while performing control for lighting a plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the door frame 3. The above-described “control of the door frame at the time of opening” is performed.

  When the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4 or when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 (that is, when the front frame is opened), control and / or opening of the game board at the time of opening. When controlling the door frame at the time, a plurality of LEDs mounted on each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and / or a specific LED ( For example, all the lights are turned off except for the plurality of LEDs 469a) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469. In a state where the plurality of LEDs are turned off, the player can use the decorations provided on the game board 5 The front surface (front surface) of the board can be visually recognized through the game board side transparent member, and / or a specific LED (for example, a plurality of LEDs 469 a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469). Except for the decorative board provided on the door frame 3 to be mounted, the front surface (front surface) of each of the other decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 can be visually recognized through the door frame side transparent member, and the player can enjoy the game. There is a possibility that interest may be reduced, and when the door frame 3 is opened to the main frame 4 or when the main frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 (that is, when the front frame is opened). Even in a state in which the effect is progressing along the schedule data, the player cannot visually recognize the state in which the effect is progressing at all, but the game is performed by the effect member provided with the decorative board on which the LED to be turned off is mounted. Cannot tell the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) to the user, and experience the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). Play a period during which you cannot Fear also that this may create in.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, each decoration provided in the front frame (front surface) of each decoration substrate provided in the game board 5 and each door provided in the door frame 3 which adopts a configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. A plurality of LEDs (full-color capable of emitting multiple colors) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the substrate (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3”) When the (LED) is turned off, the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member are white members due to the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. It looks like it. Accordingly, in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emits external light. Since it can be effectively reflected and emitted, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (i.e., that the outside light of various colors is emitted from the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member to the outside) The pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) world view) can be transmitted to the player to experience the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5).

  In a state where the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on, a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off. However, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. Formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 and the door frame 3 in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolors) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate are turned off. The game board-side transparent member and the door frame-side transparent member are made to look as if they are white members by the white coating film. Accordingly, in a state where a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) are turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emits external light. Since it can be effectively reflected and emitted, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (i.e., that the outside light of various colors is emitted from the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member to the outside) The pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) world view) can be transmitted to the player to experience the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5).

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as “door frame 3”). The front cover (front surface) or the top surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the above.) The handle cover 185 and the upper left decorative plate 271 of the door frame side transparent member that covers the white coating film formed on the , Dish upper right decorative body 276, dish lower left decorative body 281, dish lower right decorative body 286, dish center upper decorative body 312a, dish center lower decorative body 312b, rotary operation section 302, center button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door The frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative part 410b, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 are formed transparent, whereas each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is provided. Front (surface Among the transparent members on the game board side that cover the white coating film formed on the game board, the decorative sheet 3112, the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, and the lower back right decorative body 3252 , Lower-back middle rotating decorative body 3310, back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back upper rear decorative body 3451, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear left The decorative body 3521, the back right rotating decorative body 3610, and the back right decorative body 3621 have a predetermined color according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). The difference is that a plurality of dots (in this embodiment, pink) are formed by printing. Among the door frame side transparent members, the handle cover 185, the upper left decorative member 271 and the upper right decorative member 276 are provided. , Plate lower left decorative body 81, lower right decorative piece 286, upper central decorative piece 312a, lower central decorative piece 312b, rotary operation section 302, central button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door frame left side decorative body 404, side window decoration The part 410b, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 have predetermined colors according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). A plurality of (pink in this embodiment) dots may be applied by printing.

  That is, among the door frame side transparent members that cover the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3, the handle cover 185, the upper left decorative member 271 and the upper right decorative plate Body 276, lower left decorative body 281, lower right decorative body 286, upper central decorative body 312 a, lower central decorative body 312 b, rotation operation section 302, central button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, left side door frame decoration The game that covers the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the body 404, the decorative portion 410 b in the side window, the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame, the top decorative body 453 of the door frame, and each decorative board provided in the game board 5. Among the board-side transparent members, decorative sheet 3112, lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, lower back left decorative body 3202, lower back right rotating decorative body 3251, lower back right decorative body 3252, lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, Top front rotating decorative body 3410, back upper front decorative body 3421, back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back upper rear decorative body 3451, back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, back rear left decorative body 3521, back rear right rotating decorative body The same predetermined color (pink in this embodiment) according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is applied to the 3610 and the back right right decorative body 3621. ) May be applied by printing. By doing so, the connection between the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is made one, so that the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) is further improved. Can be expressed. In other words, the color related to the door frame side transparent member and the game board side transparent member (associative color) is in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)). (Eg, colors with gradations, colors about the sea, sky, space, colors about animals and plants, colors about vehicles, colors about sports, colors about fire, colors about fire, colors about rain, snow, Christmas, New Year, summer vacation, winter vacation, spring vacation , Beaches, hot springs, ski resorts, etc.) or the same color is applied to make the connection between the door frame 3 and the game board 5 one, and the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, , The world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be expressed more.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as “door frame 3”). Door-side transparent member (for example, handle cover 185, dish upper left decorative body 271) covering a white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the above. , Dish upper right decorative body 276, dish lower left decorative body 281, dish lower right decorative body 286, dish center upper decorative body 312a, dish center lower decorative body 312b, rotary operation section 302, center button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door The frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative part 410b, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are formed to be transparent, however, the outline of the door frame side transparent member. With metallic luster Metal decoration (gold) or metal decoration with a metallic luster (gold) with a flat design or three-dimensional design on the surface of the door frame side transparent member. Is also good. In this way, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is replaced with the door frame side transparent member. Although it can be seen through, the white coating formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 has a white background, so that the color ( The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 to the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member by the attractiveness of gold). Becomes As a result, the metal decoration portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member attracts an eye, and thus the white color formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 The coating film can be made difficult to see. For this reason, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) does not easily collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as “door frame 3”). Door-side transparent member (for example, handle cover 185, dish upper left decorative body 271) covering a white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the above. , Dish upper right decorative body 276, dish lower left decorative body 281, dish lower right decorative body 286, dish center upper decorative body 312a, dish center lower decorative body 312b, rotary operation section 302, center button cover 375, outer peripheral button cover 380, door The frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative part 410b, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are formed to be transparent, however, the outline of the door frame side transparent member. With metallic luster Metal decoration (gold) or metal decoration with a metallic luster (gold) with a flat design or three-dimensional design on the surface of the door frame side transparent member. Is also good. In this way, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 is replaced with the door frame side transparent member. Although it can be seen through, the white coating formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 has a white background, so that the color ( The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 to the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member by the attractiveness of gold). Becomes Thereby, even when each decorative board provided on the door frame 3 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, the metal decorative portion provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member attracts attention. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. For this reason, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) does not easily collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  When the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, silk-screen printing is performed on a solid white resist applied to the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3. The front side (front side) or top side of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 can be visually recognized through the door frame side transparent member, while the front side notation having yellow color that can specify a full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors can be visually recognized. The front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 due to the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decorative part, because the white coating film formed on the (front surface) has a white background. Since the line of sight is naturally guided to the metal decorative part provided (formed) on the door frame side transparent member from the above, the front side notation part is printed by silk printing in yellow similar to the color (gold) of the metal decorative part. hand Even, so that it is possible to obscure the presence of the yellow silk printing.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal decoration portion 3111d (the decoration provided (disposed) in front of the decoration 3111) in the decoration 3111 of the back movable decoration 3110 shown in FIGS. 149 (a) and (b). The hologram portion in the first contour portion 3112a of the sheet 3112 is included.), The metal decoration portion 3310a of the middle back decoration 3310 shown in FIG. 163, and the front cover of the back front left decoration unit 3710 shown in FIG. 193. The metal decorative portions 3711a in 3711, and the metal decorative portions in each decorative body provided on the game board 5 such as the metal decorative portions 3811a in the front cover 3811 of the front right decorative body unit 3810 shown in FIG. Although the metal decoration portion of each decoration body provided on the game board 5 has a predetermined color, It may be configured to have an opaque gold color, may be configured to have a translucent (translucent) gold color as a predetermined color, or may have an opaque gold color as a predetermined color It may be composed of a mixture of a material and a material having a translucent (translucent) gold color. In the modified examples described below, the same applies, and the metal decorative portions are all configured to have a gold color as the predetermined color. All the colors may be configured to have an opaque gold color, the predetermined colors may be configured to have a translucent (translucent) gold color, or the predetermined colors may be opaque. It may be configured to have a mixture of a material having a gold color and a material having a translucent (translucent) gold color.

[Deformation in which a gold material (metal decoration portion) is arranged in front of a decorative sheet having a transparent region or the like arranged in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and the transparent region is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration portion) Example 1]
In the above-described embodiment, the back decoration board 3114 provided in the back movable decoration 3110 will be described as the decoration board provided in the game board 5, for example, the back decoration board 3114 provided in the back movable decoration 3110. As shown in FIG. 145, the front surface (front surface) of the sheet has a transparent flat light guide / radiation plate 3113, a sheet having a translucent portion (region) and a transparent portion (region) toward the front. A decorative sheet 3112 and a transparent flat decorative body 3111 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as a light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and a decorative body 3111. The decoration body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for a metal decoration part 3111d having a metallic luster. The metal decorative portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment). As described above, the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). A), a white resist layer is formed, and the surface-side notation that enables the multicolor light-emitting full-color LED to be printed on the solid white resist by silk printing is yellow. Have. For this reason, the color (yellow) of the front side notation was similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration 3111d. Then, furthermore, by forming a metal decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster on the outer peripheral portion of the decorative body 3111, the entirety excluding the metallic decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster is formed to be colorless and transparent. You may comprise so that an area may be surrounded.

  In this case, a metal decorative portion 3111d having a metallic luster is formed around the outer peripheral portion of the decorative body 3111, and the entire area excluding the metal decorative portion 3111d is surrounded by a colorless and transparent region as shown in FIG. The sizes and arrangements of the metal decorative portions 3111d of the shaded portions shown in FIGS. 149 to 149) and other members related to the metal decorative portions 3111d may be changed as appropriate.

  Even in this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 has a metallic luster of the decoration body 3111. Although it can be visually recognized through the transparent area except for the metal decoration part 3111d, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 has a white background, so that the metal decoration is achieved. The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration 3111 by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the portion 3111d. This attracts the eyes to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114. Because it is possible, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) does not easily collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Even in this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 is made to have a metallic luster in the decoration body 3111. Can be visually recognized through a transparent region except for the metal decoration portion 3111d having the following, but the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 has a white background, The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration 3111 by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Become. Thereby, even when the back decoration board 3114 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, the eyes are attracted to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration 3111. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) View) is difficult to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  In addition, even in this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, it is printed by silk printing on a solid-colored white resist on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114. The front side notation portion having yellow color that can specify a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light can be visually recognized through a transparent region of the decoration 3111 excluding the metal decoration 3111d having metallic luster. However, since the white coating formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 has a white background, the front surface of the back decoration substrate 3114 is attracted by the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Since the line of sight is naturally guided from the (front surface) to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, the front side notation is changed to the metal decorative portion 31. Even 1d of being printed by silk screen printing in yellow similar to the color (gold), it can be difficult to understand the existence of this yellow silk printing.

[Deformation in which a gold material (metal decoration portion) is arranged in front of a decorative sheet having a transparent region or the like arranged in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and the transparent region is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration portion) Example 2]
In the above-described embodiment, the back decoration board 3114 provided in the back movable decoration 3110 will be described as the decoration board provided in the game board 5, for example, the back decoration board 3114 provided in the back movable decoration 3110. As shown in FIG. 145, the front surface (front surface) of the sheet has a transparent flat light guide / radiation plate 3113, a sheet having a translucent portion (region) and a transparent portion (region) toward the front. A decorative sheet 3112 and a transparent flat decorative body 3111 are arranged in this order, and are covered with a game board side transparent member such as a light guide radiation plate 3113, a sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112, and a decorative body 3111. The decoration body 3111 is entirely colorless and transparent except for a metal decoration part 3111d having a metallic luster. The metal decorative portion 3111d has a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment). As described above, the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 is coated with a white resist solution to form a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). A), a white resist layer is formed, and the surface-side notation that enables the multicolor light-emitting full-color LED to be printed on the solid white resist by silk printing is yellow. Have. For this reason, the color (yellow) of the front side notation was similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration 3111d. Therefore, in addition to the front side notation, for example, a solid white color is applied to the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 so as to surround the metal decoration portion 3111d by a thick solid line or a figure having another shape. You may comprise so that it may be printed in yellow by silk printing on a resist.

  In this case, a thick solid line or a figure having another shape is printed in yellow by silk printing on a solid white resist on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 so as to surround the metal decoration portion 3111d. As described above, the sizes and arrangements of the metal decorative portions 3111d of the shaded portions shown in FIGS. 147 to 149) and other members related to the metal decorative portions 3111d may be changed as appropriate.

  Even in this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the rear back decoration substrate 3114 has a metallic luster of the decoration body 3111. Although it can be visually recognized through the transparent area except for the metal decoration part 3111d, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 has a white background, so that the metal decoration is achieved. The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration 3111 by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the portion 3111d. This attracts the eyes to the metal decorative portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decorative body 3111, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114. Because it is possible, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) does not easily collapse. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

  Even in this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 is made to have a metallic luster in the decoration body 3111. Can be visually recognized through a transparent region except for the metal decoration portion 3111d having the following, but the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 has a white background, The line of sight is naturally guided from the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration 3111 by the attractiveness of the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d. Become. Thereby, even when the back decoration board 3114 is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, the eyes are attracted to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration 3111. Since the white coating film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114 can be made difficult to see, the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (that is, the world of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) View) is difficult to collapse. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  In addition, even in this configuration, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, it is printed by silk printing on a solid-colored white resist on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration board 3114. In addition to the surface-side notation having yellow that enables identification of a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor, a thick solid line or a figure having another shape is excluded from the decoration 3111 except for the metal decoration 3111d having a metallic luster. Although visible through the transparent region, the white coating formed on the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 has a white background, so that the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d has ) Naturally attracts the line of sight from the front surface (front surface) of the back decoration substrate 3114 to the metal decoration portion 3111d provided (formed) on the decoration 3111. Therefore, even if a figure having a thick solid line or another shape is printed with a yellow color similar to the color (gold) of the metal decoration portion 3111d in addition to the front side notation portion, the yellow silk printing Can be difficult to understand.

[Modified example in which a gold material (metal decoration part) is arranged at the joint of the transparent frame side transparent members arranged in front of the yellow silk-printed substrate]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface (front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 that employs the configuration of measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, referred to as “door frame 3”). The front frame (or front surface) or the upper surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the above. Body 276, lower left decorative body 281, lower right decorative body 286, upper middle decorative body 312 a, lower central decorative body 312 b, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top The decorative body 453) is formed transparent, but is a joint between the left side of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the upper side of the door frame left side decorative body 404 (the left side of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the left side of the door frame). So that the upper side of the decorative body 404 is connected A metal decorative part (gold) having a metallic luster is provided (formed) on the lower part of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the left side of the dish upper left decorative body 271 in a part designed to be obtained. A metal decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster is provided on the eyes (a portion designed so that the lower side of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the left side of the upper left plate decorative body 271 are connected to each other) ( The joint between the right side of the upper left plate decorative body 271 and the left side of the upper center plate decorative body 312a (so that the right side of the upper left plate decorative body 271 is connected to the left side of the upper center plate decorative body 312a). A metal decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster is provided (formed) on the portion designed to be visible so that the right side of the plate center upper decorative body 312a and the left side of the plate upper right decorative body 276 are joined ( Right of the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate And a metal decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster is provided (formed) so as to appear to be connected to the left side of the plate upper right decorative body 276. A joint between the right side and the lower side of the door frame right side decorative body 419 (a part designed so that the right side of the dish upper right side decorative body 276 and the lower side of the door frame right side decorative body 419 are connected to each other) A metal decorative part (gold) having a metallic luster is provided (formed) on the upper side of the door frame right side decorative body 419 and the right side of the door frame top decorative body 453 (door frame right side decorative body). A metal decorative part (gold) having a metallic luster may be provided (formed) so that the upper side of the upper part 419 and the right side of the door frame top decorative body 453 are connected to each other. . In addition, a joint between the right side of the lower left plate decorative body 281 and the left side of the lower center plate decorative body 312b (the design is made such that the right side of the lower left plate decorative body 281 and the left side of the lower center plate decorative body 312b appear to be connected to each other. Is provided (formed) with a metallic decoration portion (gold) having a metallic luster, and a joint between the right side of the lower plate center decorative body 312b and the left side of the lower right plate decorative body 286 (lower center of the plate) A metal decorative part (gold) having a metallic luster is provided (formed) so that the right side of the decorative body 312b and the left side of the lower right decorative body 286 are connected to each other. Is also good. In this way, a metal decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster is provided as a joint between the door frame side transparent members (a portion designed so that the adjacent door frame side transparent members seem to be connected to each other). By forming (forming), the joint can be blindfolded.

[Modified example in which a gold material (glossy sheet member) is arranged in front of a transparent game panel board arranged in front of a substrate printed in yellow silk]
In the above-described embodiment, the center accessory 2500 projects from the outer periphery of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame), and is a flat flange that contacts the front surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The flange portion 2502 is provided with a glossy sheet member having a glitter that shines in a particle shape (in a color of gold or a mixture of gold colors) on the front surface of the flange portion 2502, and a rear side of the glossy sheet member. In addition, a decorative substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors may be mounted on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate is arranged parallel to the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Regarding the positional relationship between the decorative substrate and the glossy sheet member, the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is viewed from the front, and even if the glossy sheet member is arranged so as to cover all or a part of the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate. It may be arranged in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction without covering the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate at all, or may have a distance dimension of about 5 mm to 10 mm, for example, in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. They may be arranged apart from each other. On the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). A part number corresponding to a full-color LED and an area indicating a position at which the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) on a white resist that is formed and solid-painted. Are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N which are in contact with the game balls and have a predetermined gauge arrangement and have a gold color are planted. As described above, in front of the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate, the glossy sheet member having the glitter that shines in the form of particles (gold or a mixed color of gold) and the plurality of gold obstacle nails N are arranged. Therefore, the presence of the decorative board is made difficult to recognize by the luster sheet member having the glitter that glitters in the form of particles (gold or a mixture of gold) and the attractiveness of the plurality of gold nails N. Even if the color (yellow) of the front side notation can be visually recognized through the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, silk printing is performed on a white resist solid-painted on the decorative substrate. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the presence of the front side marking portion of yellow (color similar to the gold color of the glossy sheet member or the obstacle nail N) to be printed.

[Modified example in which a golden material (metal decoration part) is arranged in front of a transparent game panel board arranged in front of a substrate printed in yellow silk]
In the above-described embodiment, a decorative board on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors is mounted is arranged on the rear face of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the rear face of the transparent panel board 1110 and the decorative board are arranged. An inner lens three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member may be arranged between the inner lens and the inner lens. The surface of the inner lens is configured such that a lens cut is applied to a part of a specific area or to the entire area (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the area where the lens cut is applied This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decoration substrate disposed behind the inner lens. In addition, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate is arranged parallel to the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Regarding the positional relationship between the decorative substrate and the inner lens, the inner lens may be arranged to cover all or a part of the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate when the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is viewed from the front. On the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). A part number corresponding to a full-color LED and an area indicating a position at which the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) on a white resist that is formed and solid-painted. Are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N which are in contact with the game balls and have a predetermined gauge arrangement and have a gold color are planted. A plurality of obstruction nails N having a golden color are arranged in front of the front surface (front surface) of the decorative board, but yellow (obstruction nail N) printed by silk printing on a white resist solidly painted on the decorative board. Has no relationship with the decorative portion on the surface side of the surface (not shown). The presence of the decorative substrate can be made difficult to understand by the attractiveness of the plurality of obstruction nails N having a golden color, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the front side notation can be determined by the area where the inner lens is lens-cut. It can be difficult to understand.

[Modification 1 in which a gold material (metal decoration portion) is arranged in front of a transparent member arranged in front of a substrate printed with yellow silk and a transparent region is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration portion)]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the logo decoration body (logo decoration movable body) having the logo may be provided on the game board 5 so as to operate. The logo decoration body is configured such that a transparent inner lens is disposed behind a transparent front decoration body, a decoration substrate is disposed behind the inner lens, and a base member and the like are disposed behind the decoration substrate. is there. In the front decorative body, a logo area (for example, an area of a character portion of “ABC”) is formed transparent, and other areas except the logo area are formed as a metal decorative part (gold) having metallic luster. I have. That is, the logo area is surrounded by a metal decoration part (gold) having a metallic luster. The surface of the inner lens is configured such that a lens cut is applied to a part of a specific area or to the entire area (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the area where the lens cut is applied This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decoration substrate disposed behind the inner lens. On the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). A part number corresponding to a full-color LED and an area indicating a position at which the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) on a white resist that is formed and solid-painted. Are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. The presence of the decorative substrate can be made difficult to understand due to the attractiveness of the metal decoration portion having a metallic luster due to the gold color, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the surface side notation portion is subjected to lens cutting on the inner lens. Area can make it more difficult to understand.

[Variation 2 in which a gold material (metal decoration portion) is arranged in front of a transparent member arranged in front of a yellow silk-printed substrate and a transparent region is surrounded by the gold material (metal decoration portion)]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 may be provided so that a figure decoration body (a figure decoration movable body) having a predetermined figure operates. The figure decorative body is configured such that a transparent inner lens is disposed behind a transparent front decorative body, a decorative substrate is disposed behind the inner lens, and a base member and the like are disposed behind the decorative substrate. is there. The front decorative body has a metallic decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster on an outer peripheral portion thereof, and a metallic decorative portion having a metallic luster on an outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, a central portion). (Gold) is formed. Then, in this one area (for example, a central part), in addition to a figure area (for example, an eyelid part, a human body mouth part, a human body ear part of a human eye, a character, a number, a graphic, and a symbol) Such characters, numbers, figures, symbols, and the like are appropriately formed as a metal decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster. Further, the front decorative body has a metallic luster formed on an outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, a central portion) from the inside of the metallic decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion. The region extending to the outside of the metal decoration portion (gold) held is transparently formed. In addition, the front decorative body has a metallic luster in one region (for example, the central portion) from the inside of a metal decorative portion (gold) having metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, the central portion). The region extending to the outside of the outer peripheral portion of the region where the graphic region is formed as a metal decorative portion (gold) having the pattern is transparently formed. The surface of the inner lens is configured such that a lens cut is applied to a part of a specific area or to the entire area (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the area where the lens cut is applied This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decoration substrate disposed behind the inner lens. On the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). A part number corresponding to a full-color LED and an area indicating a position at which the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) on a white resist that is formed and solid-painted. Are printed by silk printing with yellow paint.

  In other words, the front decorative body has a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, the central portion) from the inside of the metallic decorative portion (gold) having the metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion. A region extending to the outside of the held metal decoration portion (gold) is formed transparent, and a metal decoration portion (gold) having a metallic luster formed on the outer peripheral portion of one region (for example, the center portion). Since the region extending from the inside to the outside of the outer peripheral portion of the region where the graphic region is formed as a metal decorative portion (gold) having metallic luster in one region (for example, the central portion) is formed transparently, The transparent area is surrounded by a metal decoration part (gold) having a metallic luster. In this way, the presence of the decorative substrate can be made difficult to recognize by the gold attractiveness of the metal decorative portion having a metallic luster, and the presence of the color (yellow) of the front side notation portion can be used as the lens for the inner lens. The region where the cut is made can be made harder to understand.

[Modified example in which a gold material (metal decoration portion) is arranged in front of a transparent member arranged in front of a substrate printed with yellow silk and surrounds the gold material (metal decoration portion)]
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 may be provided so that a figure decoration body (a figure decoration movable body) having a predetermined figure operates. The figure decorative body is configured such that a transparent inner lens is disposed behind a transparent front decorative body, a decorative substrate is disposed behind the inner lens, and a base member and the like are disposed behind the decorative substrate. is there. In the front decorative body, a graphic area (for example, the eyelid part, the mouth part of the human body, the ear part of the human body, a hexagon or an octagon) is formed in one area (for example, the center part). It is formed as a metal decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster, and a region surrounding this partial region is formed transparent. That is, the metal decorative portion (gold) having metallic luster is surrounded by the transparent region. When the front decorative body is formed as a graphic area in one area (for example, a center part) and as an eyelid among eyeballs of the human body, a metal decorative part (gold) having metallic luster is formed on the upper and lower eyelids. It becomes an eyelid, the upper eyelid opens from the lower eyelid, and this opened part and the other area except the upper eyelid and the lower eyelid are formed transparently. In other words, the upper and lower eyelids, which are metal decorative portions (gold) having a metallic luster, are surrounded by a transparent region. When the front decorative body is formed as a graphic region in one region (for example, a central portion) and as a mouth of a human body, a metallic decorative portion (gold) having metallic luster becomes an upper lip and a lower lip, and an upper lip. Is opened from the lower lip, and the opened portion and the other area except the upper lip and the lower lip are formed to be transparent. In other words, the upper lip and the lower lip, which are metal decorative portions (gold) having a metallic luster, are surrounded by a transparent region. When the front decorative body is formed as a graphic region in one region (for example, a central portion) as a human body, a hexagonal shape, or an octagonal shape, a metal decorative portion (gold) having a metallic luster is used. (The inner region of the ear may be formed to be transparent, may be formed to be translucent by a predetermined color (red, blue, black) or may be formed to be opaque). Hexagonal outer peripheral portion (the hexagonal inner region may be formed to be transparent, may be formed to have a light-transmitting property by a predetermined color (red, blue, black), or may be formed to be opaque. ), The outer peripheral portion of the octagon (the inner region of the octagon may be formed transparent, may be formed with a predetermined color (red, blue, black) to have translucency, or may be formed opaquely And other regions except the ears, hexagons, and octagons of the human body are formed transparently. In other words, the ears, hexagons, and octagons of the human body, which are metal decorative portions (gold) having metallic luster, are in a state of being surrounded by a transparent region. The surface of the inner lens is configured such that a lens cut is applied to a part of a specific area or to the entire area (formed in a polyhedron) so that light can be irregularly refracted, and the area where the lens cut is applied This makes it difficult for the player to clearly recognize the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decoration substrate disposed behind the inner lens. On the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”). A part number corresponding to a full-color LED and an area indicating a position at which the full-color LED is arranged, which enables the specification of a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) on a white resist that is formed and solid-painted. Are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. In other words, since the metal decorative part (gold) with metallic luster is surrounded by a transparent area, the metal decorative part (gold) with metallic luster is solid-painted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative board. It is in a state surrounded by the white color of the white resist. As described above, the presence of the decorative substrate can be made difficult to understand by the gold attractiveness of the metal decorative portion having the metallic luster. The region where the cut is made can be made more difficult to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 shown in FIG. 163 is arranged at the standby position (original position) below the lower side. As shown in FIG. 201, in a state in which the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is moved to the raised position, the region where the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is arranged at the standby position (original position) includes the decoration board. Eliminating the existence makes it impossible to perform a light emission effect in this region. Therefore, in the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is arranged at the standby position (original position) and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is arranged at the standby position (original position), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 are arranged. In order not to interfere, the front (front) surface of the decorative board may be arranged toward the front of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) behind the back-and-under middle rotary decorative body 3310. On the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate, a white resist layer is formed by a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “solid-coated white resist”). A part number corresponding to a full-color LED and a region indicating a position at which the full-color LED is to be arranged, which enables a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) to be specified on a solid-coated white resist. Are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. When the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is at the standby position (original position), the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate is covered by the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310, so that when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, The presence of the decorative substrate is not known at all.

  However, as the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the ascending position, the decoration substrate disposed behind the lower back middle decoration body 3310 gradually appears and becomes visible. Therefore, control is performed such that a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board emit light during a period from the start of moving the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 to the ascending position to returning to the standby position (original position) again. Is done. As a result, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative board emit light, and the presence of a yellow surface-side notation portion printed by silk printing on a solid white resist applied to the front surface (front surface) of the decorative board can be understood. Can be difficult. Also, the yellow front side notation printed on the white resist solid-painted on the front surface (front surface) of the decoration substrate by silk printing is a metal of the lower back middle decoration body 3310 of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320. It has a color similar to the gold color of the decorative portion 3310a, and furthermore, even if the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is moved to the ascending position, the front surface (front surface) of the decoration substrate is the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310. Since the metal decoration portion 3310a can be placed in the vicinity of the metal decoration portion 3310a, the attractiveness of the metal decoration portion 3310a having a gold color causes the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 to start moving to the ascending position and the decoration substrate can be visually recognized. Even if it is in such a state, the yellow printed on the white resist solid-painted on the decorative substrate by silk printing (the metal decorative portion 3310a has It is possible to obscure the presence of the surface-side representation of the colors) similar to the color. Further, in the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of gold nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in contact with the game balls, so that the plurality of gold nails N are attracted. Even when the decoration substrate is started to move to the ascending position by moving the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 to a state in which the decoration substrate is visible, the decoration substrate is printed on the solid-colored white resist by silk printing. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the presence of the front side notation portion of yellow (color similar to the gold color of the plurality of obstacle nails N).

[Avoidance of arrangement concentration of front side display part printed by silk printing]
Next, avoidance of concentration of the front side display unit printed by silk printing will be briefly described with reference to FIG. FIG. 271 shows a method of arranging a front surface display unit capable of specifying a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface (front surface) of a decorative substrate and LEDs respectively corresponding to the plurality of LEDs. In the case of concentrated arrangement (part 1) (a), FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a distributed arrangement (No. 1) and (b). Note that pads, through holes, lands, and the like are omitted in FIGS. 271 (a) to (d). In addition, the decorative substrates KC in FIGS. 271 (a) to (d) are the same as the decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 and the door frame 3 which employs the above-described countermeasures such as a reduction in the reflectance according to the second embodiment. This is shown as an example of each decorative substrate provided.

  On the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC, a white resist solution is applied to form a white coating film (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”) to form a white color. Corresponds to a full-color LED that has a resist layer formed on it and allows multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of multicolor emission) to be specified on a white resist solidly painted on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC Of the electronic component such as the component number to be placed, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged, and the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting direction of the electronic component (mounting direction), and the type of the electronic component Is printed by silk printing with yellow paint.

  First, let us consider a case where four full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front (front) KCx of the decorative board KC. Four full-color LEDs are arranged on the front (front) KCx of the decorative board KC. The areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions and the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are printed by silk printing with yellow paint, for example, as shown in FIG. 271 (a). FIG. 271 (b ), All the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged are surrounded. The outside, as in the case of distributed that arranged distributed without concentrating part numbers KCn1~KCn4 corresponding to four full-color LED, try to consider.

  In addition, in the case of the concentrated arrangement, the positions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC, and the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KC in the case of the distributed arrangement. It is assumed that the positions where the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged in KCx are the same.

  In both the centralized arrangement and the distributed arrangement, areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating positions where four full-color LEDs are arranged, part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs, and other electronic parts (resistance, capacitor, And a connector may be included in addition to the IC), and are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. Therefore, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KC in a region printed by silk printing with yellow paint, respectively. ) The ratio to KCx (hereinafter referred to as “yellow occupancy”) is the same.

  In addition, a region except for a region printed by silk printing with yellow paint (that is, a white resist solid-painted on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC is printed by silk printing with yellow paint, respectively). Of the decorative substrate KC with respect to the front surface (front surface) KCx (hereinafter, referred to as “white occupancy”) of the decorative substrate KC is larger than the yellow occupancy. As described above, the white occupation ratio of the white color occupying the surface of the decorative substrate KC due to the white coating film formed by applying the white resist solution is such that the yellow color is indicated by the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 and the like. ) Since the yellow occupancy ratio occupying KCx is larger than that of the decorative substrate KC (white coating film), even when the decorative substrate KC (white coating film) is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, the decorative substrate KC is printed by silk printing. Compared with the yellow color of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4, the white color of the white paint film, which is a kind of decoration visible to the player, is more likely to be noticed by the player and makes it difficult to notice the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. Can be contributed to. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  In the case of the centralized arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are concentrated in an area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged. Specifically, in the case of the centralized arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 is arranged below the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED 1 is arranged, and below the area KCp2 indicating the position where the full-color LED 2 is arranged. A part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged, a part number KCn3 corresponding to the full-color LED 3 is arranged above a region KCp3 indicating the position where the full-color LED 3 is arranged, and above a region KCp4 indicating the position where the full-color LED 4 is arranged. The part number KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LED 4 is arranged.

  As described above, in the case where the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are locally arranged in an area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, Although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, it has a high reflectance, but a reflectance reduction region where the reflection efficiency is reduced is formed. Also, since the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are locally concentrated in the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn1 The presence of KCn4 is conspicuous.

  That is, in the case of the centralized arrangement, in a local area, which is an area surrounding all of the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to 4 are arranged, the white color of the white coating film, which is a kind of decoration visible to the player, is used. In comparison, the yellow of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 is more likely to be noticed by the player and the player can easily notice the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. Therefore, decorativeness may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of the distributed arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are dispersed without being concentrated outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the four full-color LEDs are arranged. It is arranged. Specifically, in the case of the distributed arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 is arranged at the upper left of the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED 1 is arranged, and the upper right of the area KCp2 indicating the position where the full-color LED 2 is arranged. On the other hand, the part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged, the part number KCn3 corresponding to the full-color LED 3 is arranged at the lower left of the area KCp3 indicating the position where the full-color LED 3 is arranged, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED 4 is arranged A part number KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LED 4 is arranged at the lower right of KCp4.

  As described above, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are not locally arranged at all in the area surrounding the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to 4 are to be arranged. When the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are distributed and arranged outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the LEDs 4 are arranged, the part numbers corresponding to the four full-color LEDs are arranged. Since the above-described reflectance-reduced regions formed by arranging KCn1 to KCn4 in a concentrated manner are not formed at all, the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, but the yellow part numbers KCn1 to KCn1 are not formed. High reflectivity due to KCn4 can be maintained. In addition, since the four full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 are dispersed and arranged outside the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged, the presence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 Is not noticeable.

  In other words, in the local area, which is the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to 4 are to be arranged, the yellow occupancy is higher in the case of the centralized arrangement than in the case of the distributed arrangement. (In the area of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 printed by silk printing with the yellow paint, respectively, by the ratio to the local area of the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative board KC). The yellow occupancy rate (the local area of the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative board KC in the area of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 printed by silk printing with the yellow paint, respectively, is adopted in comparison with the case of the centralized arrangement. By the ratio of As described above, in the local area, which is the area surrounding all the areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to 4 are to be arranged, the case where the distributed arrangement is adopted is compared with the yellow of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. The white color of the white coating film, which is a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player, is more likely to enter the eyes of the player, making it difficult to notice the presence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  Even if the case of the distributed arrangement is adopted, four full-color LEDs correspond to other electronic components in a region surrounding all the regions KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to 4 are to be arranged. In some cases, one or two of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 must be arranged, but even in this case, the yellow occupancy rate is higher in the case of the centralized arrangement than in the case of the distributed arrangement ( In the regions of the component numbers KCn1 to KCn4 printed by silk printing with yellow paint, respectively, the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC is increased by the ratio to the local region.

  In the case of the distributed arrangement, the following rules may be provided as an arrangement method of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn4 corresponding to the full-color LEDs. For example, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), for example, one of the four full-color LEDs is selected based on one full-color LED (other electronic components may be used), and the width of the selected one full-color LED is selected. Use dimensions and height dimensions. When a part number KCn3 corresponding to the full-color LED 3 having the width dimension Nw and the height dimension Nh is selected as a reference, the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged are defined as areas KCp1 to KCp4 indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs 1 to LED4 are arranged. First, the full-color LED 3 is arranged so as to be outside the surrounding area, and then the full-color LED 1 is arranged above the full-color LED 3 at a first distance Ph that is a predetermined number times the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 3, The LED 4 is disposed to the right of the full-color LED 3 with a second distance Pw that is a predetermined number times the width Nw of the full-color LED 3 and a first distance that is a predetermined number of times the height Nh of the full-color LED 3. Ph and the width Nw of the full-color LED 3 multiplied by a predetermined number. Distance Pw spaced placed right above the full-color LED 3. In addition, the position where LED1, LED2, and LED4 are arranged may be the same value as the predetermined number of times described above, or may be individually changed. What is necessary is just to select so that it may be outside the area | region surrounding all the area | regions KCp1-KCp4 which show the position where the full-color LED1-LED4 is arrange | positioned.

  Next, considering a case where two full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC, two adjacent full-color LEDs are disposed on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC. KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where are arranged, and the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two adjacent full-color LEDs are printed by yellow printing with silk printing, for example, as shown in FIG. 271 (c). As shown in the figure, the part numbers KCn1 and KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are arranged above the areas KCp1 and KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, that is, the parts KCp1 and KCp2 and the parts are arranged. FIG. 2 shows a case where the numbers KCn1 and KCn2 are concentrated in the vicinity and As shown in FIG. 1 (d), the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are distributed and arranged at positions away from regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged. Let's consider the case of the distributed arrangement.

  In addition, in the case of the centralized arrangement, the positions KCp1 and KCp2 indicating the positions where the two full-color LEDs are arranged on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC, and the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KC in the distributed arrangement It is assumed that the positions where the regions KCp1 and KCp2 indicating the positions where the two full-color LEDs are arranged in KCx are the same.

  In both the centralized arrangement and the distributed arrangement, areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating positions where two full-color LEDs are arranged, part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs, and other electronic parts (resistance, capacitor, And a connector may be included in addition to the IC), and are printed by silk printing with yellow paint. Therefore, the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate KC in a region printed by silk printing with yellow paint, respectively. ) The ratio to KCx (hereinafter referred to as “yellow occupancy”) is the same.

  In addition, a region except for a region printed by silk printing with yellow paint (that is, a white resist solid-painted on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative substrate KC is printed by silk printing with yellow paint, respectively). Of the decorative substrate KC with respect to the front surface (front surface) KCx (hereinafter, referred to as “white occupancy”) of the decorative substrate KC is larger than the yellow occupancy. As described above, the white occupation ratio in which the white color occupies the surface of the decorative substrate KC by the white coating film formed by applying the white resist liquid is such that the yellow color is indicated by the component numbers KCn1 to KCn2 and the like. ) Since the yellow occupancy ratio occupying KCx is larger than that of the decorative substrate KC (white coating film), even when the decorative substrate KC (white coating film) is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, the decorative substrate KC is printed by silk printing. Compared with the yellow color of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2, the white color of the white coating film, which is a kind of decoration visible to the player, is more likely to be noticed by the player and makes it difficult to notice the existence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2. Can be contributed to. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  In the case of the centralized arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are arranged above the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, that is, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn1. KCn2 is concentrated. Specifically, in the case of the centralized arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 is arranged above the vicinity KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED 1 is arranged, and the position at which the full-color LED 2 adjacent to the full-color LED 1 is arranged. A part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged above and near the area KCp2 shown.

  As described above, when the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are respectively arranged above and in the vicinity of the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions at which the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged, the parts corresponding to the two full-color LEDs Since the numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are locally concentrated, the reflectance of yellow is lower than that of the white coating film, but the reflection efficiency is reduced even if it has a high reflectance. A rate-decreasing area is formed.

  In other words, in the case of the concentrated arrangement, in a local area above and near the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two full-color LEDs 1 to 2 adjacent to each other are arranged, a white coating film which is a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by the player is provided. Compared to white, the yellow of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 is more likely to be noticed by the player and the player can easily notice the presence of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2. Therefore, decorativeness may be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of the distributed arrangement, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are dispersed at positions away from the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged. Have been placed. Specifically, in the case of the distributed arrangement, the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 is disposed at the lower left of the area KCp1 indicating the position where the full-color LED 1 is disposed, and the position at which the full-color LED 2 adjacent to the full-color LED 1 is disposed. The part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged at the lower right of the area KCp2 shown.

  As described above, when the two full-color LEDs and the component numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are dispersed and arranged at positions away from the regions KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two full-color LEDs are arranged, two full-color LEDs are Although the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 are not locally concentrated and arranged at all, and the above-described reflectance-reduced regions are not formed at all, although the yellow reflectance is lower than the white reflectance of the white coating film, High reflectance can be maintained by the yellow part numbers KCn1 to KCn2. Further, the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are dispersedly arranged at positions distant from the areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating the positions where the two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged. The presence of KCn2 is inconspicuous. Therefore, a decrease in decorativeness can be suppressed.

  In the case of the distributed arrangement, the following rules may be provided as an arrangement method of the part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LEDs. For example, as shown in FIG. 271 (d), for example, one of the two full-color LEDs is selected based on one full-color LED (or another electronic component), and the width of the selected one full-color LED is selected. Use dimensions and height dimensions. When the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1 having the width dimension Nw and the height dimension Nh is selected as a reference, the positions at which the full-color LEDs 1 and 2 are arranged are defined as areas KCp1 and KCp2 indicating the positions at which the full-color LEDs 1 and 2 are arranged. Part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs are distributed so as to be outside the area surrounding all, that is, at positions distant from areas KCp1 to KCp2 indicating positions where two adjacent full-color LEDs are arranged. First, after arranging the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED1, the part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED2 is multiplied by a predetermined number for the width direction Nw of the full-color LED1 in the left-right direction by a second distance Pw '(the 2 distance Pw 'is at least a full color LED Is greater than or equal to the width dimension Nw of the full-color LED 1 so that the distance of the full-color LED 1 is equal to the minimum character string length of the full-color LED 1). Place it to the right. In addition, a part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is disposed at another location along the vertical direction of the full-color LED 2 disposed to the right of the full-color LED 1 (for example, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED 2 adjacent to the full-color LED 1 is disposed) In the case where the part number KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED 2 is arranged at the upper right of the KCp2), the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 1 is multiplied by a predetermined number for the vertical direction, and the second distance Ph '(the second distance Ph' is at least A relationship that is greater than or equal to the height dimension Nh of the full-color LED 1 is established such that the minimum character string height of the full-color LED 1 is a distance away from the part number KCn1 corresponding to the full-color LED 1. To place. The value of the predetermined number of times for the horizontal direction and the value of the predetermined number of times for the vertical direction may be set to the same value or may be individually changed. The part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs may be selected so as to be dispersed and arranged at a position apart from the position where the LED2 is arranged.

  In the case of the distributed arrangement, the arrangement method of the component numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the full-color LED is, for example, a case where two full-color LEDs are arranged close to each other on the front surface (front surface) KCx of the decorative board KC. Of the two full-color LEDs, with respect to one full-color LED, another full-color LED is arranged at one of the upper right, lower right, upper left, and lower left of one full-color LED. One of the full-color LEDs is selected based on one full-color LED (other electronic components may be used), and the width and height of the selected one full-color LED are used. Since the two full-color LEDs and the corresponding part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 can be arranged apart from each other by the second distance Pw ′ and / or the second distance Ph ′ described above, the position at which the two full-color LEDs are arranged is determined. The part numbers KCn1 to KCn2 corresponding to the two full-color LEDs can be dispersedly arranged at positions away from the indicated areas KCp1 to KCp2.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine provided with a decorative substrate on which a light emitting means is mounted has been conventionally proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-079163 (paragraph [0024] and FIG. 1)). A decorative member for covering the decorative substrate was disposed in front of the light emitting means provided in the gaming machine. By the way, when the decorative member is formed of a transparent material, the color of the resist liquid applied to the surface of the decorative substrate can be visually recognized as it is in a state where the light emitting means is turned off, so that the world view of the gaming machine is destroyed and aroused. There was a risk that the entertainment interest of the game would be reduced.

  In addition, conventionally, a gaming machine including a board provided with an operation unit has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-205304 (paragraphs [0106] to [0112] and FIG. 9)). This substrate was housed in the housing member. By the way, when the housing member is formed of a transparent or translucent material, the electronic component number formed on the surface of the substrate on which the operation unit is provided is visually recognized through the housing member. However, since the electronic part number has nothing to do with the game for the player, there is a possibility that the world view of the gaming machine may be disrupted by the electronic part number being visually recognized through the housing member, thereby reducing the interest in the game. there were.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a substrate on which a part number or the like is indicated by silk printing has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-141683 (paragraphs [0047], [0048], and FIG. 3)). . Some substrates are coated with a resist solution of a predetermined color to enhance the decorativeness to achieve a high reflectance. However, when a substrate is used as a kind of decoration that can be visually recognized by a player, silk printing can also be visually recognized by the player, and there is a possibility that decorativeness may be reduced.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a substrate on which a part number or the like is indicated by silk printing has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-141683 (paragraphs [0047], [0048], and FIG. 3)). . Some substrates are coated with a resist solution of a predetermined color to enhance the decorativeness to achieve a high reflectance. However, if silk printing is provided on a coating film on which a resist solution of a predetermined color has been applied, the reflectance of the substrate may be reduced.

[Structure of magnetic sensor]
Next, a magnetic sensor 1111 attached to the back side of a transparent flat panel panel 1110 in the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 near the starting port unit 2100, a magnetic sensor 2404 provided in the first attacker unit 2400, The magnetic sensor 2602 provided in the second attacker unit 2600 and the magnetic sensor 3055 provided in the back guiding unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 will be described. Here, since the magnetic sensors 1111, 404, 2602, and 3055 have the same structure, the magnetic sensor 1111 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 272 and 273. FIG. 272 is an exploded perspective view of the magnetic sensor as viewed from the front, and FIG. 273 is an exploded perspective view of the magnetic sensor as viewed from the back, as viewed from the front.

  The magnetic sensor 1111 includes a box body 1111a having a rectangular opening 1111aa that is open at the rear and is vertically long, a magnetic sensor substrate 1111b housed in the box body 1111a, and a flat cover that covers the opening 1111aa. And a body 1111c. The outer shape of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is smaller than the outer shape of the box 1111a, and when the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is housed in the box 1111a, the distance dimension between the outer periphery of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b and the inner periphery of the opening 1111aa ( Clearance) is about 0.5 mm to 0.7 mm. The magnetic sensor 1111 is attached so that the front side of the box 1111a comes into surface contact (contact) with another member. As described above, the front side of the box 1111a is connected to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. Are mounted in a state of surface contact (contact) with the back surface side of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 in FIG.

  The box body 1111a is formed of a colorless and transparent resin, and a part of a socket insertion opening of a connector housing MCN mounted on a rear surface (back surface) of a magnetic sensor substrate 1111b described later is formed on an upper side wall of the box body 1111a. A rectangular connector housing insertion hole 1111ab is formed to be exposed. In the left and right walls of the box body 1111a, a vertically long rectangular locking hole 1111ac into which a locking portion 1111caa formed in a pair of mounting pieces 1111ca of the cover body 1111c described later is inserted. Have been. At the four bottom corners of the box 1111a, a front-side electronic component (front-side electronic component) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b and a bottom portion of the box 1111a serve as reinforcement of the box 1111a. Is formed in a triangular prism-shaped spacer 1111ad for preventing the contact between.

  At the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, when the cover 1111c closes the opening 1111aa of the box 1111a in a state where the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is accommodated in the box 1111a, a pair of cover 1111c described later. In order to prevent interference between the mounting piece 1111ca and the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, a pair of cutouts 1111ba are formed.

  On the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, in addition to the magnetic detection element MSD capable of detecting magnetism, a magnetic detection determination result can be output to the outside based on a detection signal from the magnetic detection element MSD. A controller CTR, various resistors, various capacitors, etc. are mounted. Besides the pads to which the front electronic components (front electronic components) such as the magnetic sensing element MSD, the controller CTR, various resistors, various capacitors, etc. are soldered. In addition, a white coating film formed by applying a white resist solution (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “solid-coated white resist”) is formed over the entire area excluding through holes, lands, and the like. Is formed. In the present embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, a region indicating the component number of the front electronic component (front electronic component) and the position where the front electronic component (front electronic component) is to be arranged. Attributes of the front electronic component (front electronic component) such as the shape of the front electronic component (front electronic component), the size of the front electronic component (front electronic component), and the front electronic component (surface The front notation portion (front notation portion) indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component) and the model of the front electronic component (front side electronic component) may be a predetermined color (for example, , Which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white) and is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid-coated white resist.

  On the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, in addition to a connector housing MCN to which electric wiring is connected, various ICs, various resistors, various capacitors, and the like are mounted, and the connector housing MCN, various ICs, various resistors, In addition to pads to which the back-side electronic components (back-side electronic components) such as various capacitors are soldered, a white resist solution is applied over the entire area except for through holes and lands. (Hereinafter, a white resist layer may be simply referred to as a “solid white resist”). In the present embodiment, the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b has, on the rear surface (back surface), an area indicating the component number of the rear electronic component (back surface electronic component) and the position where the rear electronic component (back surface electronic component) is to be arranged. Attributes of the back-side electronic component (back-side electronic component) such as the shape of the back-side electronic component (back-side electronic component), the size of the back-side electronic component (back-side electronic component), and the back-side electronic component (back-side The rear-side electronic component (back-side electronic component) indicating the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the rear-side electronic component (or the mounting direction) and the rear-side electronic component (back-side electronic component) may have a predetermined color (for example, , Which is a light color that is inconspicuous with respect to white) and is not printed at all by silk printing on a solid-coated white resist.

  Four socket insertion holes of the connector housing MCN are formed so as to be parallel to the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b and to be parallel to the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. Are arranged in a line. That is, the connector socket connected to the tip of the electric wiring (harness) inserted into the socket insertion port of the connector housing MCN is parallel to the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. Thus, when the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is housed in the box 1111a and the opening 1111aa of the box 1111a is closed by the cover 1111c, the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is connected to the connector socket inserted into the socket insertion opening of the connector housing MCN. Electrical wiring (harness) can be prevented from covering the rear surface (back surface) and the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b.

  In the controller CTR, a wiring pattern is formed on the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b so as to be electrically connected to the connector housing MCN. , The controller CTR of the magnetic sensor board 1111b and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected. The four terminals of the connector housing MCN include a power supply line (for example, DC +5 V), a ground (GND) line, a signal line 1, and a signal line 2. The controller CTR can output the detection result of the magnetism (the presence or absence of the approach of the magnet) to the main control board 1310 via the signal line 1 and / or the signal line 2 as a detection signal.

  The controller CTR is configured such that the magnetic detection distance of the magnetic detection element MSD is set in advance by various resistors mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. For example, there are a plurality of magnetic sensing distance setting terminals of the controller CTR, and among a plurality of magnetic sensing distance setting terminals of the controller CTR, a magnetic sensing distance setting terminal of a corresponding controller CTR is set so as to have a predetermined magnetic sensing distance. A power supply line electrically connected to a power supply line and one end of the resistor electrically connected to the other end (electrically connected to a so-called “pull-up resistor”); A magnetic detection distance setting terminal of the corresponding controller CTR is electrically connected to a ground (GND) supply line that is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line. The controller CTR may be configured to set the magnetic detection distance of the magnetic detection element MSD based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 via the signal line 1 and / or the signal line 2. Good.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, there is no silk printing on the solid white resist. In this embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) is formed by a copper foil wiring pattern in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. The information for specifying whether each of the electronic components is such an electronic component is not formed by a foil removal foil formed by removing a copper foil around the information, and a rear surface (a rear surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. ) Includes information for specifying what kind of electronic component the rear-side electronic component (back-side electronic component) is in the wiring pattern that is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. Neither is it formed by leaving a foil removal foil formed by removing the surrounding copper foil outside the information. That is, in the present embodiment, the information for specifying what kind of electronic component is the front electronic component (front electronic component) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is stored in the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. No description is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, and the type of the rear electronic component (back electronic component) mounted on the rear surface (rear surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is specified. No information is written on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b.

  The cover body 1111c is molded from a colorless and transparent resin, and the product management number 1111cb (ABC-001) of the magnetic sensor 1111 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c. A pair of flat plate-like mounting pieces 1111ca extend forward from the center of the left side and the center of the right side of (the surface). An engaging portion 1111caa having a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction is formed on the outer side of the tip of the pair of mounting pieces 1111ca. When the cover 1111ca covers the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a, the locking portion 1111caa is inserted in front of a locking hole 1111ac formed in the left side wall and the right side wall of the box body 1111a so as to be smoothly inserted. Is chamfered. The locking portion 1111caa is locked by being inserted into locking holes 1111ac formed in the left side wall and the right side wall of the box body 1111a when closing the cover 1111aa with the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a.

  A pair of locking holes 1111ac formed in the left side wall and the right side wall of the box body 1111a, and a locking portion 1111caa formed in the pair of mounting pieces 1111ca of the cover body 1111c have a rectangular shape that is vertically long. Therefore, when the opening 1111aa of the box 1111a is closed by the cover 1111c, a pair of locking holes 1111ac formed on the left side wall and the right side wall of the box 1111a, and a pair of the cover 1111c. The cover body 1111c is locked with the locking portion 1111caa formed on the mounting piece 1111ca, thereby forming a pair of box bodies 1111a on which the locking portion 1111caa formed on the pair of mounting pieces 1111ca is locked. Can be prevented from rotating about the locking hole 1111ac as a main shaft.

  Here, a method of assembling the magnetic sensor 1111 will be briefly described. First, a surface of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b on which the connector housing MCN is not mounted, that is, a front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is inserted into the opening 1111aa of the box 1111a, and a connector housing insertion hole formed in the box 1111a. The connector housing MCN of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is inserted into the 1111ab, and a part of the connector housing MCN is exposed from the box 1111a. The magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is fed to the bottom of the box 1111a until the formed spacer 1111ad comes into surface contact (contact).

  In a state where the four corners of the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b and the spacers 1111ad formed at the four bottom corners of the box body 1111a are in surface contact (contact), the front side of the box body 1111a and the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b are in contact with each other. The front surface (surface) is in a parallel positional relationship.

  Subsequently, when covering the cover 1111c with the opening 1111aa of the box 1111a, the cover 1111c is inserted into the pair of cutouts 1111ba of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, and the cover 1111c is inserted into the box 1111aa. When the cover 1111a is pushed toward the opening 1111aa, the locking portions 1111caa formed on the pair of mounting pieces 1111ca of the cover body 1111c are inserted into the pair of locking holes 1111ac formed on the left side wall and the right side wall of the box body 1111a. And locked. Thus, the opening 1111aa of the box 1111a is closed by the cover 1111c. In this state, the front surface (front surface) of the cover body 1111c comes into surface contact (contact) with the surface of the connector housing MCN mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, and the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b comes into contact with the cover body 1111c. Is held between the spacer 1111ad and the front surface (front surface) of the cover body 1111c. As a result, the game area 5a of the game board 5 is accommodated in the box 1111a of the magnetic sensor 1111 by vibration caused by the flow of the game ball, vibration by the operation of various electric drive sources (solenoids, motors, and the like). Gravity of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b can be prevented (stabilized).

  When the opening 1111aa of the box 1111a is closed by the cover 1111c, the upper side wall of the box 1111a, the left side wall of the box 1111a, and the left side of the box 1111a constitute the opening 1111aa of the box 1111a. The rear end surface of the lower side wall and the right side wall of the box body 1111a and the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c are arranged on the same plane and are flush with each other.

  By the way, since the magnetic sensor 1111 is important for detecting unauthorized magnetism, if it is tampered with, it cannot transmit the approach of the magnet to the main control board 1310. Even if a magnet goto that leads to the first starting port 2002 of the 2100 and gets a lot of chances for a lottery with a small number of balls is performed, the main control board 1310 cannot detect the misconduct due to the magnet goto. . As described above, the magnetic sensor 1111 has the box body 1111a and the cover body 1111c formed of transparent resin, so that the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is housed in the box body 1111a, and the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a is covered with the cover body 1111c. When attached to the back side of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 in the vicinity of the starting port unit 2100 in a state of being closed by a clerk, such as a clerk of a game hall, The user can visually recognize the state of the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b of the magnetic sensor 1111 from the front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  However, the person who intends to perform the wrongdoing, from the state of the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, particularly, the part number of the front electronic component (front electronic component) printed by silk printing, the front electronic component Attributes of the front-side electronic component (front-side electronic component) such as a region indicating the position where the (front-side electronic component) is to be arranged (further, the shape of the front-side electronic component (front-side electronic component), the front-side electronic component (front-side electronic component) Front side notation section indicating the size of the electronic component), the mounting direction (mounting direction) of the front electronic component (front electronic component), and the type of the front electronic component (front electronic component). From the (front side notation part), there is a possibility that it becomes an information source for identifying the mounted electronic component, grasping the circuit configuration, and modifying the circuit.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, there is no silk printing on the solid white resist. That is, on the front surface (front surface) and the back surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, a front-side notation portion (front-side notation portion) and a rear-side notation portion (back-side notation portion) printed by silk printing are formed at all. Not. In this embodiment, on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, the front side electronic component (front side electronic component) is formed by a copper foil wiring pattern in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. The information for specifying whether each of the electronic components is such an electronic component is not formed by a foil removal foil formed by removing a copper foil around the information, and a rear surface (a rear surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. ) Includes information for specifying what kind of electronic component the rear-side electronic component (back-side electronic component) is in the wiring pattern that is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. Neither is it formed by leaving a foil removal foil formed by removing the surrounding copper foil outside the information. This makes it difficult to identify the electronic components mounted on the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b and grasp the circuit configuration.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the box body 1111a and the cover body 1111c are formed of transparent resin, the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is housed in the box body 1111a, and the magnetic sensor 1111 is formed of the box body 1111a. When the opening 1111aa is closed by the cover body 1111c and attached to the rear side of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 near the starting port unit 2100, the game hall is opened. The clerk, such as a clerk, can visually recognize the state of the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b of the magnetic sensor 1111 from the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall visually checks the state of the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b of the magnetic sensor 1111 from the front surface of the pachinko machine 1, thereby confirming whether or not the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is fraudulent. You can do it. When the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, a clerk such as a clerk at the game hall opens the magnetic sensor substrate by molding (forming) various members constituting the game board 5 with a transparent resin. The state of the rear surface (back surface) of 1111b can be visually recognized. Thereby, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall visually checks the state of the back surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b of the magnetic sensor 1111 from the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 to confirm whether or not there is any fraud on the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. You can do it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1111 is attached to the back side of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 in the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 with the front side of the box body 1111a near the starting port unit 2100. ing. In addition, the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 and the front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 3 adopting a configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment ( Hereinafter, a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) mounted on the “front surface (front surface) of each decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 and the door frame 3” may be turned off. In this state, the white board formed on the front surface (front surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 allows the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member to look as if they were white members. Therefore, the magnetic sensor 1111 also has a transparent film formed on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b of the magnetic sensor 1111 in the vicinity of the starting port unit 2100 and on the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 in the vicinity of the starting port unit 2100. So that the box 1111a to be molded looks as if it were a white member by such tabular colorless transparent resin of the magnetic sensor 1111 is attached to the rear surface side of the panel plate 1110. In other words, the magnetic sensor 1111 can also be prevented from becoming obstructive to the game without interfering with the player's vision by being spilled (assimilated) into the game board side transparent member and the door frame side transparent member.

  In the present embodiment, since the magnetic sensor 1111 is formed of the box body 1111a and the cover body 1111c with a transparent resin, the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is housed in the box body 1111a, and the opening 1111aa of the box body 1111a is covered with the cover body. In a state where the magnetic sensor board 1111b is closed, electric wiring (harness) connected to the connector socket inserted into the socket insertion port of the connector housing MCN does not cover the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. You can do so. Thereby, the magnetic sensor 1111 is attached to the back side of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 near the starting port unit 2100, and the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b and When checking the state of the rear surface (back surface), the electric wiring (harness) does not hinder (obstruct).

  In the above-described embodiment, the front electronic component (front electronic component) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is provided on the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. No information for specifying what kind of electronic component is written on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, and the rear electronic component ( Although no information for identifying what kind of electronic component the rear-side electronic component is is written on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, the board management number of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is set to the magnetic sensor substrate. It may be written on the front surface (front surface) and / or the rear surface (back surface) of 1111b. As a method of indicating the board management number, the board management number may be printed by silk printing with a paint of a predetermined color (for example, yellow, which is a light color that is inconspicuous against white, and black or green, which is easily conspicuous against white). In the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the board management number is formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the board management number in the wiring pattern that is a copper foil. Is also good.

  In the above-described embodiment, the type of the connector housing MCN mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is not indicated at all on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. May be written on the front surface (front surface) and / or the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. As a method of indicating the model of the connector housing MCN, the connector housing MCN is printed by silk printing with a paint of a predetermined color (for example, yellow, which is a light color that is hardly conspicuous against white, and black or green, which is conspicuous against white). Alternatively, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, a type of the connector housing MCN may be formed by removing a copper foil around the outside of the type of the connector housing MCN with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil. It may be formed by leaving a foil.

  In the above-described embodiment, the product management number 1111cb (ABC-001) of the magnetic sensor 1111 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c. The product management number 1111cb (ABC-001) of the magnetic sensor 1111 may be engraved on any of the left side wall, the upper side wall, the right side wall, and the lower side wall of the box body 1111a.

  In the above-described embodiment, the product management number 1111cb (ABC-001) of the magnetic sensor 1111 is engraved on the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c. The management number 1111cb (ABC-001) may be printed directly on the back surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c with a paint of a predetermined color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or a colorless transparent sheet Alternatively, a sheet printed on a colored transparent sheet or an opaque sheet may be attached to the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c. Further, instead of the rear surface (back surface) of the cover body 1111c, the product management number 1111cb (of the magnetic sensor 1111 is provided to any one of the left side wall, the upper side wall, the right side wall, and the lower side wall of the box body 1111a. ABC-001) may be directly printed with a paint of a predetermined color (white, black, red, blue, green, yellow, etc.), or a colorless transparent sheet, a colored transparent sheet, or an opaque sheet may be printed with a magnetic sensor. A product printed with the product management number 1111cb (ABC-001) of 1111 may be pasted.

  In the above-described embodiment, the controller CTR is configured such that the magnetic detection distance of the magnetic detection element MSD is set in advance by various resistors mounted on the front surface (front surface) or the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. However, the magnetic detection distance of the magnetic detection element MSD can be set based on a control signal (a signal transmitted via the signal line 1 and / or the signal line 2) from the main control board 1310. May be configured. In this way, if the approach of the magnet is detected at an earlier stage, the magnetic detection distance can be changed greatly, and the magnet can be changed to the extent that the course of the game ball can be changed when the approach of the magnet is grasped. When it is determined whether or not is approaching, the setting of the magnetic detection distance can be changed to be small. Thereby, the main control board 1310 can grasp the approach state of the magnet by changing the setting of the magnetism detection distance, and in response to the approach of the magnet, first perform a small warning notification (for example, the door frame 3). The full-color LED of the door frame 3 is slowly flashed in red (for example, every second), and the warning notification that is stepwise strengthened is performed (for example, the full-color LED of the door frame 3 is quickly turned red in red (for example, every 0.5 seconds). ) Blinks and a warning sound (for example, a sound such as "Bee, bee, bee") repeatedly flows), and in the final stage, informs that the magnet is a magnet (for example, turns the full color LED of the door frame 3 red). Lights up and announces a warning (for example, a sound such as "A fraudulent activity is occurring" is repeated).

  In the above-described embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1111 is attached to the back side of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 near the starting port unit 2100. Regardless of whether the magnetic sensor 1111 is attached to the front or rear in the region where the movable body operates, or the front or rear near the region where the movable body operates, the box 1111a of the magnetic sensor 1111 may be used. On the front surface (front surface) and the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, no silk printing is present on a solid white resist (that is, the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b). On the back side (back side), the front side notation part (front side notation part) and back side notation part (back side notation part) printed by silk printing are all Not formed), and on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, a front-side electronic component (front-side electronic component) is formed by a copper foil wiring pattern in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed. The information for specifying what kind of electronic component each is not formed by a foil removal foil formed by removing the surrounding copper foil outside the information, and the rear surface of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b ( On the back surface), information for specifying what kind of electronic component the rear-side electronic component (back-side electronic component) is in the wiring pattern that is a copper foil in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. Of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b on the movable body housing is not formed by the remaining foil removal foil formed by removing the copper foil around the information outside. State even though elaborate reflected, knowing the identify and circuitry an electronic component mounted on the magnetic sensor board 1111b from the elaborate reflected content can be difficult.

  In the above-described embodiment, a front side electronic component (front side electronic component) is formed on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b by a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. For identifying each electronic component is not formed by the foil removal foil formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information, and the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b has no information. On the rear surface (back surface), in order to specify what kind of electronic component the rear-side electronic component (back-side electronic component) is in a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed. No information was formed by the foil removal foil formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of the information. That is, in the present embodiment, information for specifying what kind of electronic component is the front electronic component (front electronic component) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is stored in the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. Is not written on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, and to identify what kind of electronic component is the rear electronic component (back electronic component) mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. No information was written on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. Therefore, a circle symbol is formed near a position corresponding to the front-side electronic component (front-side electronic component), and a front surface of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b is formed as a foil-extraction reference terminal symbol formed by extracting a copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol. The front-side (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b may be covered with a white resist which is solid-coated on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. A circle symbol is formed in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the electronic component), and a foil extraction reference terminal symbol formed by extracting a copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is formed on the rear surface (rear surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. A configuration may be employed in which the foil removal reference terminal symbols are respectively covered with a white resist which is solid-painted on the rear surface (back surface) of the substrate 1111b. The wiring patterns that form these foil reference terminal symbols are formed so as to be electrically insulated from the front electronic component (front electronic component) and the rear electronic component (back electronic component). When the surrounding area is a so-called beta tag land (substrate ground), the circle symbol itself may be used as the foil extraction reference terminal symbol. Instead of the circle symbol, the foil extraction reference terminal symbol may be a symbol indicating the polarity of the front electronic component (front electronic component) or the rear electronic component (back electronic component) (used in a circuit diagram). Symbol or a simplified symbol used in a circuit diagram). Further, among the front electronic components (front electronic components) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, the mounting orientation of a specific front electronic component (specific front electronic component) is substantially the same. In some cases (that is, for a mounting operator or an automatic machine, a rule is set in advance in which the mounting direction of a specific front-side electronic component (specific surface-side electronic component) is the same (there is no component mounted in reverse). ) Is near a position corresponding to a terminal of one specific front electronic component (specific front electronic component) of a plurality of specific front electronic components (specific front electronic component). The foil reference terminal symbol may be formed on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, or the terminal of one or more specific front-side electronic components (specific front-side electronic components) may be defined in advance. Near the corresponding position It may be vent reference terminal symbols are formed on the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1111b. Also in this case, instead of the circle symbol, the foil extraction reference terminal symbol may be a symbol representing the polarity of the LED (a symbol used in a circuit diagram, or a symbol used in a circuit diagram (an anode terminal and a cathode terminal). May be simplified). Also, among the rear electronic components (rear electronic components) mounted on the rear surface (rear electronic device) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, the mounting directions of the specific rear electronic components (specific rear electronic components) are substantially the same. In some cases (that is, for a mounting operator or an automatic machine, a rule is set in advance in which the mounting direction of a specific rear-side electronic component (specific rear-side electronic component) is the same (there is no mounting in the opposite direction). ) Is in the vicinity of the position corresponding to the terminal of any one specific rear electronic component (specific rear electronic component) of the specific rear electronic components (specific rear electronic component). May be formed on the rear surface (rear surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, or the terminals of one or more specific rear electronic components (specific rear electronic components) may be defined in advance. Near the corresponding position It may be vent reference terminal symbol is formed on the surface (back surface) after the magnetic sensor board 1111b. Also in this case, instead of the circle symbol, the foil extraction reference terminal symbol may be a symbol representing the polarity of the LED (a symbol used in a circuit diagram, or a symbol used in a circuit diagram (an anode terminal and a cathode terminal). May be simplified).

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the light emitting effect unit 5000 shown in FIG. 255 is provided as a decorative member. The light emitting effect unit 5000 includes an LED substrate 5070 of FIG. 255 as a substrate, a light guide plate 5060 of FIG. 255 as a light guide member, a diffusion sheet 5050 of FIG. 255 as a transparent member, and a decorative body 5040 of FIG. 255 as a decorative body. . The LED substrate 5070 has the LED bare chip 5075 of FIG. 255 mounted thereon as a light emitting means. The light guide plate 5060 is arranged in front of the LED substrate 5070 and can emit light emitted by the LED bare chip 5075 forward. The diffusion sheet 5050 is disposed in front of the light guide plate 5060. Decorative body 5040 is arranged in front of diffusion sheet 5050. The diffusion sheet 5050 has five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 each having a long band in the left-right direction, which is applied as an opaque region on the rear surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 in FIG. Is formed.

  As described above, the light emitted from the LED bare chip 5075 as the light emitting unit is emitted to the diffusion sheet 5050 as the transparent member through the light guide plate 5060 as the light guide member, but is transmitted to the diffusion sheet 5050 as the transparent member. Are formed on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050, which is an opaque region, at a position corresponding to the LED bare chip 5075 as a light emitting means, and five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050c5 each having a long band shape in the left and right direction applied with white paint are formed. Therefore, the position where the LED bare chip 5075 as the light emitting means is mounted is applied with a white paint on the back surface 5050y side of the diffusion sheet 5050 which is an opaque area without being brightly lit in the decorative body 5040 which is a decorative body like a point light source. Five white band regions 5050c1 to 5050 each having a long band shape in the left-right direction. It is adapted to be softened by 0c5. This can contribute to uniformly illuminating the surface 5060x, which is the surface of the light guide plate 5060, which is the light guide member facing the diffusion sheet 5050, which is a transparent member. It is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to the light emission effect.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to play a game, the conductive metal wiring groove 1605 of FIG. 249 as the conductive member, and the conductive wiring groove 1605 of FIG. 249 as the first wiring member. A wiring routed to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 of FIG. 249, and a wire routed to the space inside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 of FIG. . The metal wiring groove 1605 has conductivity, and the wiring routed to the outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is weak against the influence of electromagnetic wave noise. The wiring routed to the space inside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is more resistant to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise than the wiring routed to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605.

  A metal wiring groove 1605 is formed on a bottom inner surface of a groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 in FIG. 249, which is one surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 facing the generation side of the electromagnetic wave noise. The wiring routed in the space inside the groove is arranged and has a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 in FIG. 250 which is the other surface of the conductive member not facing the source of electromagnetic wave noise. On the bottom outer surface 1605d of the groove 1605a, a wiring routed to a space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 is arranged.

  As described above, the first wiring member is formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 as the second wiring member, which is more resistant to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise than the wiring led to the space outside the groove formed by the metal wiring groove 1605. The wiring routed into the space inside the groove is formed on the bottom inner surface of a groove 1605a having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 which is one surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 facing the source of electromagnetic wave noise. The metal wiring groove 1605, which is the first wiring member, is arranged and is less susceptible to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise than the wiring routed into the space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the second wiring member. The wiring routed to the formed space outside the groove is a groove portion 1 having a U-shaped cross section of the metal wiring groove 1605 which is the other surface of the metal wiring groove 1605 which does not face the source of electromagnetic wave noise. By disposing on the bottom outer surface 1605d of the first wiring member 05a, the wiring routed to the outer space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605, which is the first wiring member, in the space affected by the electromagnetic wave noise; The wiring routed into the space formed by the metal wiring groove 1605 as a wiring member can be arranged in a mixed manner. Therefore, noise resistance due to electromagnetic wave noise can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to play a game, and includes the flexible flat cable 5030 of FIG. 254 as a planar wiring member. In the flexible flat cable 5030, a plurality of flat conductors are arranged in parallel as a plurality of conductors including a ground line as a power supply line and a control line and covered with an insulating material. The flat conductors on both ends as the endmost conductors in the width direction of the flexible flat cable 5030 facing the source of electromagnetic wave noise are arranged as ground lines as power supply lines. In other words, among a plurality of flat conductors including a ground line serving as a power supply line and a control line, a ground line serving as a power supply line is disposed between a source of electromagnetic wave noise and the control line.

  As described above, the flexible flat cable 5030, which is a planar wiring member, has a plurality of flat conductors, which are a plurality of conductors including a ground line, which is a power supply line, and a control line, and a power supply line. The ground line, which is a power line, is arranged between a control line and a source of electromagnetic wave noise among a plurality of flat conductors including a ground line, which is a line, and a control line. Noise resistance due to electromagnetic wave noise can be improved with respect to flat conductors other than the flat conductors on the both ends as the outermost conductor. Therefore, noise resistance due to electromagnetic wave noise can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played, and the sound of the door frame 3 of FIG. 10 as the front frame and the sound of the door frame top unit 450 of FIG. It has a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the decorative substrate 469. The door frame 3 is provided so as to be openable and closable, and a plurality of LEDs 469 a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 of the door frame top unit 450 are located at a predetermined position of the door frame 3 at the upper front. It is provided. The door frame top unit 450 is configured to emit light toward the front of the door frame 3 and to emit light toward the rear of the door frame 3.

  Specifically, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 are respectively made of a diaphragm and a vibrating portion such as a center cap made of a resin having translucency. (E.g., a polypropylene having a milky white color), and a magnetic circuit unit such as a magnet and a yoke is formed in a cylindrical shape having a through hole penetrating front and rear. It is held by the body. A plurality of openings are formed in the housing in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the columnar magnetic circuit portion is covered with a center cap disposed at the front, while being opened at the rear. Attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 is a mounting portion formed on four board mounting bent plates (not shown) extending a predetermined distance (about 18 mm in the present embodiment) rearward from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463. The decorative substrate 469 is attached. In a state where the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is a magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. And the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 covers the rear of the magnetic circuit unit of the top side speaker 464.

  When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light passes through the through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the columnar shape of the top side speaker 464, and the light is transmitted from the center cap having translucency. Is emitted, and light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing so that the topside speaker 464 can be illuminated. Has become. Further, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 emit light, the LEDs 469a are reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a columnar shape) and the top surface. The light exits from the rear of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, while repeatedly emitting between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469.

  As described above, the speaker brackets 463 are attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protruding portions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The door frame top base 451 is larger than the outer periphery of the acoustic decorative board 469 so that the acoustic decorative board 469 attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 is exposed at a position corresponding to the position where the left and right speaker brackets 463 are attached. Through holes 451ba each having a shape and penetrating back and forth are formed. When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 emit light, the light is emitted backward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and is then emitted. Out of the door frame top base 451 through a gap defined by the outer circumference of the door frame and the inner circumference of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451.

  The door frame top base 451 is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 as described above. The door frame base 101 has, at positions corresponding to the left and right through holes 451b formed in the door frame top base 451, a shape larger than or the same as the outer periphery of the through hole 451b, and a through hole 101k penetrating back and forth. Are formed respectively. Accordingly, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light is emitted backward from the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469, and the acoustic decoration is performed. The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 passes through a gap defined by the outer periphery of the substrate 469 and the inner periphery of the through hole 451ba formed in the door frame top base 451, and through the through hole 101k formed in the door frame base 101. The light exits behind.

  As described above, the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 of the door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 can emit light toward the front of the door frame 3 and the door frame 3 Can be emitted toward the rear of the door frame 3, and in a state where the door frame 3 is opened, the door frame top unit 450 is separated from the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3. The notification mode by the light emission of the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 can be visually recognized. Thereby, in the game hall, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall passing through the passage side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the passage side facing the rear side of the door frame 3 are provided with the acoustic decorative board of the door frame top unit 450. A notification mode by a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of 469 can be transmitted. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened, the notification mode of the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 from the front side and the rear side of the door frame 3 can be visually recognized.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, it is possible to play a game, the door frame 3 of FIG. 10 as a front frame, the speaker bracket 463 of FIG. It has a speaker decoration unit composed of a side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration board 469, and a transparent plate. The door frame 3 is provided so as to be openable and closable, and the speaker illumination unit is provided on the door frame 3 and can emit light in a mode different from the normal state when an abnormality or trouble occurs in the pachinko machine 1. When the door frame 3 is in the open state, the light emission is provided in the door frame 3 so as to be visible not only from the front of the door frame 3 but also from behind the door frame 3 in a manner different from the normal state. ing.

  Specifically, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of speaker brackets 463 in the door frame top unit 450 are respectively made of a diaphragm and a vibrating portion such as a center cap made of a resin having translucency. (E.g., a polypropylene having a milky white color), and a magnetic circuit unit such as a magnet and a yoke is formed in a cylindrical shape having a through hole penetrating front and rear. It is held by the body. A plurality of openings are formed in the housing in the circumferential direction. The through hole of the columnar magnetic circuit portion is covered with a center cap disposed at the front, while being opened at the rear. Attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463 is a mounting portion formed on four board mounting bent plates (not shown) extending a predetermined distance (about 18 mm in the present embodiment) rearward from the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463. The decorative substrate 469 is attached. As described above, the speaker decoration unit is assembled by mounting the top side speaker 464 on the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and mounting the acoustic decorative board 469 and the transparent plate on the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463. In other words, the speaker decoration unit includes the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, the sound decoration board 469, and the transparent plate. In a state where the top side speaker 464 is attached to the front surface of the speaker bracket 463 and the acoustic decoration board 469 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker bracket 463, the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration substrate 469 is a magnetic circuit portion of the top side speaker 464. And the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 covers the rear of the magnetic circuit unit of the top side speaker 464.

  When the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 emit light, the light passes through the through hole of the magnetic circuit portion formed in the columnar shape of the top side speaker 464, and the light is transmitted from the center cap having translucency. Is emitted, and light is emitted from the light-transmitting diaphragm through a plurality of openings formed in the circumferential direction of the housing so that the topside speaker 464 can be illuminated. Has become. Further, when the plurality of LEDs 469a mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative board 469 emit light, the LEDs 469a are reflected on the back surface of the top side speaker 464 (the back surface of the yoke forming the magnetic circuit portion formed in a columnar shape) and the top surface. The light exits from the rear of the top side speaker 464, that is, from the rear surface (rear surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469, while repeatedly emitting between the back surface of the side speaker 464 and the front surface (front surface) of the acoustic decorative substrate 469.

  The peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, occurrence of ball clogging of the ball tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, the dispensing device 580, etc., detection of fraud, opening of the door frame 3, main body (Opening of frame 4, disconnection of wiring, etc.) or malfunction (malfunction related to operation of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), detection of original position (standby position) of various movable decorative bodies (movable bodies), etc.)) When “abnormality or failure occurs”, the light emission data serving as a notification mode different from the normal mode described above is mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal. To the LED constant current drive circuit (not shown). It should be noted that the light emission mode of the production mode (normal time) is a variety of light emission modes combining lighting, turning off, blinking, gradation lighting, and the like, whereas the notification mode (different from the normal mode) is predetermined. (In the present embodiment, red) in a light emission mode of lighting with maximum luminance.

  In the conventional gaming machine, when the door frame 3, which is the front frame, is in an open state, light emission for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality or a malfunction to the outside can be visually recognized from the direction (front) facing the front side of the door frame 3. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to visually recognize the light emission notifying the occurrence of an abnormality or a problem from the direction (rear) facing the rear side of the door frame 3. In this regard, in the present embodiment, when the door frame 3 is opened, the occurrence of an abnormality or a defect is externally detected from both the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3. The light emission to be notified can be visually recognized (that is, the occurrence of an abnormality or a defect can be notified to the outside in a new mode, that is, in both the direction facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the direction facing the rear side of the door frame 3). ). Thereby, in the game hall, an abnormality or a malfunction occurs in a staff such as a clerk of the game hall from both the passage side facing the front side of the door frame 3 and the passage side facing the rear side of the door frame 3. It can be transmitted quickly, and the work efficiency of the game hall can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the lottery is performed based on the result of the starting condition, the symbol variation display is performed based on the result of the lottery, and the symbol variation display is performed as a result of the symbol variation display. A gaming machine that provides a player with a specific game profit by deriving a hit variation result, wherein the gaming board is provided with a symbol display device on which the symbol variation display is performed, and the gaming board is provided. A frame, a front frame provided to be openable and closable with respect to the frame, detection means for detecting an open / closed state of the front frame, and an open state of the front frame provided on the front frame. And a front frame light emitting means capable of emitting light in a special mode different from the normal mode based on

  Specifically, for example, the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 in FIG. 111 as a start condition, and the main game board 1310 in FIG. For example, a special lottery result that generates “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probability change)”, “time reduction (time saving)” is performed. The main control board 1310 outputs a control signal to the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 111 based on the result of the lottery, and performs a variable display of symbols using a plurality of LEDs based on the control signal. By deriving a predetermined winning variation result as a special lottery result which is a result of symbol variation display, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability" Per change (probable change), and per time (shortening of time) ”). A game board 5 provided with a function display unit 1400 for performing variable display of symbols, a main body frame 4 in FIG. 10 as a frame body on which the game board 5 in FIG. 10, a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 as detecting means for detecting the open / closed state of the door frame 3, and a door frame 3 as shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the open state of the door frame 3, a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, and an acoustic decorative board 469 shown in FIG. And a speaker illumination unit composed of a transparent plate. It should be noted that the light emission mode of the production mode (normal time) is a variety of light emission modes combining lighting, turning off, blinking, gradation lighting, and the like, whereas the notification mode (different from the normal mode) is predetermined. (In the present embodiment, red) in a light emission mode of lighting with maximum luminance.

  In addition, the front frame light emitting means includes a light emitting substrate having a light emitting unit mounted on a substrate surface facing the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitting substrate is configured such that the mounted light emitting unit emits light in the special mode. At least a portion around the light emitting substrate so that the light emitting portion emits light in the special mode not only from the front of the front frame but also from behind the front frame. The light emitting section is arranged to leak light.

  Specifically, for example, the speaker illumination unit including the speaker bracket 463 as the front frame light emitting unit, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration board 469, and the transparent plate is a board facing the front side of the pachinko machine 1. An acoustic decorative board 469 is provided as a light emitting board having a plurality of LEDs 469a mounted thereon as a light emitting section. When the plurality of mounted LEDs 469a emit light in the notification mode as a special mode, The LED 469a emits light in the notification mode from at least a part around the acoustic decorative board 469 so that it can be visually recognized not only from the front of the door frame 3 as the front frame but also from behind the door frame 3 as the front frame. A plurality of LEDs 469a are arranged to leak light.

  Further, the front frame light emitting means, when the open state of the front frame is not detected, performs a predetermined effect light emission based on a fluctuation pattern set when the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, At a position corresponding to the rear of the front door light emitting means when the front frame is in a closed state, a light reflecting portion (white printing portion, metal member) capable of reflecting light leaked from the light emitting portion forward is provided. .

  Specifically, for example, the speaker illumination unit including the speaker bracket 463, the top side speaker 464, the acoustic decoration board 469, and the transparent plate, which are the front frame light emitting means, has the open state of the door frame 3 as the front frame. If it is not detected (when the payout control MPU detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch, it transmits a door frame opening command to that effect to the main control board 1310. Then, when the main control board 1310 does not receive this door frame opening command), the main control board 1310 outputs a control signal to the function display unit 1400, and changes the design using a plurality of LEDs based on the control signal. The main control board 1310 displays a command corresponding to a variation pattern set when the symbol is displayed and the symbol is varied and displayed by the peripheral control board 151. , And the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the door frame top relay board 467 based on the clock signal based on the clock signal based on the clock signal. This is output to an LED constant current drive circuit (not shown) to perform various light emission modes combining lighting, extinguishing, blinking, gradation lighting, and the like. The speaker power when the door frame 3 is closed as a front frame is provided. At a position corresponding to the back of the decoration unit, a reflection sheet 1000a (FIG. 10, which has a high emissivity) shown in FIG. Or a white printed portion having a color close to white), a metal stopper FT (a metal member having a metallic luster), and the like are provided.

  In addition, the covering portion that forms the back side of the light emitting substrate is a transparent member, and light leakage of the light emitting unit is made visible through the transparent member from behind the front frame.

  Specifically, the speaker decoration unit includes a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration board 469, and a transparent plate, and is transparent as a covering part forming the back side of the acoustic decoration board 469 which is a light emitting board. The plate is a transparent member, and the light leakage of the plurality of LEDs 469 a of the acoustic decorative board 469 is made visible from behind the door frame 3 through (through) the transparent plate as the transparent member.

  In addition, a plurality of light emitting boards constituting the front frame light emitting means are provided, and at least one of the plurality of light emitting boards is provided on an open end side of the front frame.

  Specifically, the acoustic decoration board 469 is a pachinko machine 1 as a light emitting board constituting a speaker decoration unit composed of a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration board 469, and a transparent plate as front frame light emitting means. Are provided on the upper left side and the upper right side of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front, and the acoustic decorative board 469 disposed on the upper left side of the door frame 3 and the upper right side of the door frame 3 are provided. At least one of the acoustic decorative boards 469 is provided with an acoustic decorative board 469 disposed on the upper right side of the door frame 3 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, on the open end side of the door frame 3. Thereby, even when the door frame 3 is slightly opened, the light emission on the back side of the door frame 3 can be easily recognized.

  Further, a plurality of the light emitting substrates constituting the front frame light emitting means are provided, and the light reflecting portions are provided corresponding to the plurality of light emitting substrates.

  Specifically, the acoustic decoration board 469 is a pachinko machine 1 as a light emitting board constituting a speaker decoration unit composed of a speaker bracket 463, a top side speaker 464, an acoustic decoration board 469, and a transparent plate as front frame light emitting means. Are provided on the upper left side and upper right side of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front, and the reflection sheet 1000a of FIG. 10 (white printing having a high emissivity or a color close to white) is provided as a light reflection portion. 10), a reflection sheet 1000a is arranged at a position corresponding to the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, in the upper left area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5, and as a light reflection section in FIG. The metal stopper FT arranged in the upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 is opposed to the right acoustic decoration board 469 on the right side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. Metal fasteners FT at a position is located in the upper right side area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5.

  The light reflection unit is a white printing unit provided on the game board and provided outside a game area of the game board.

  Specifically, the reflection sheet 1000a of FIG. 10 (white printed portion having a high emissivity or a color close to white) is provided on the game board 5 and serves as a light reflecting portion outside the game area 5a of the game board 5. This is a white printing unit provided in the printer.

  The white printed portion has a larger area than the light emitting substrate. Specifically, the surface area of the reflection sheet 1000a is larger than the area on the front surface (front surface) or the rear surface (back surface) of the acoustic decoration board 469 on the left side when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front.

  The light reflecting portion is a metal member provided on the frame. Specifically, the metal stopper FT arranged in the upper right area of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in FIG. 10 as a light reflecting portion is made of metal (metal member) and has luster. .

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be performed, and the main control unit shown in FIGS. 113 and 114 is used as a plurality of substrates on which components are mounted and a circuit is formed. The main control board 1310 attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 of 1300, the magnetic sensor board 1111b accommodated in a box 1111a molded of a colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. Have. A transparent main control board box 1320 as a first member arranged at a position where it is difficult for a player to visually recognize among the plurality of boards, and a board attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 On the main control board 1310, a green coating film is formed as a coating film of a green resist solution as a first insulating coating, and a display unit for specifying an electronic component (RAM clear switch or the like) as a component is provided. The part number is formed of a paint (for example, a white paint) printed by silk printing as a second insulating paint on a white paint film which is a paint film. On the other hand, of the plurality of substrates, a box 1111a formed of a colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 as a second member disposed at a position visible to the player, For the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b as a substrate attached (accommodated) to the box body 1111a formed of a colorless and transparent resin, a white coating film (that is, white coating film) using a white resist solution as the first insulating coating material Since only the coating film is formed, compared with the main control board 1310 which is a board attached to the first member arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the electronic component (for example, FIG. In order to make it difficult to estimate the contents of a circuit formed by mounting the electronic components such as the magnetic detection element MSD and the controller CTR). You have me.

  As described above, the green coating film of the green resist solution is formed as the first insulating paint, and the component number as the display unit for specifying the electronic component (RAM clear switch, etc.) is displayed on the green coating film. As for the main control board 1310 formed of a paint (for example, a white paint) printed by silk printing as the second insulating paint, the contents of a circuit formed by mounting electronic components may be estimated. Therefore, it is attached (accommodated) to a transparent main control board box 1320 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, with respect to the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b which makes it difficult to estimate the contents of the circuit formed by mounting the electronic components, the starting port unit 2100 which is a position that can be visually recognized by the player. Is formed of a colorless and transparent resin in a magnetic sensor 1111 which is attached and arranged in a state of surface contact (contact) with the rear surface side of a transparent flat panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game panel 5. Attached (contained) to the box 1111a to be inserted. Therefore, countermeasures against fraud can be taken.

  A box 1111a formed of a colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 as the second member is attached (accommodated) to the box 1111a of the magnetic sensor 1111 formed of a colorless and transparent resin. On the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, which is a substrate, a display unit for specifying the component mounting direction is formed. Specifically, for example, a circle symbol is formed near the position corresponding to the front electronic component (front electronic component) mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b, and the copper foil around the outside of the circle symbol is formed. The foil-pulling reference terminal symbols are respectively formed by a white resist which is formed on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b as a foil-pulling reference terminal symbol formed by being pulled out, and is solid-coated on the front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b. It can be configured to be covered.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control mounted (accommodated) on the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 in FIGS. 113 and 114, for example, as a plurality of boards. The board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. 110, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 107, and the box 1111a molded of a colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. A magnetic sensor board 1111b and the like are mounted, and are mounted (accommodated) on a transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 in FIGS. 113 and 114, for example, as a plurality of main-side boards related to the progress of the game. The main control board 1310 and the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Display substrate, and a magnetic sensor substrate 1111b accommodated in the box 1111a, which is molded by a colorless transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. 113. The main control board 1310 attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 in FIGS. 113 and 114 is provided with a display unit capable of specifying mounted components (first display unit). Main side board). On the other hand, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 107 and the magnetic sensor board 1111b accommodated in the box 1111a molded of a colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. Since no identifiable display section is provided (second main-side board), the main control board 1310 attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 in FIGS. 113 and 114. It is more difficult to externally estimate the contents of the electronic circuit than the (first main-side substrate).

  As described above, the plurality of main-side boards relating to the progress of the game are provided on the transparent main unit of the main control unit 1300 shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, which is the first main-side board having a display unit capable of specifying mounted components. It does not have a main control board 1310 attached (accommodated) to the control board box 1320 and a display part capable of specifying mounted components, and externally estimates the contents of the electronic circuit compared to the first main board. A function display substrate of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 107, which is a second main-side substrate made difficult to perform, a magnetic sensor substrate 1111b housed in a box 1111a molded of a colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. , There is. Thereby, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 of FIG. 107, which is the above-described second main board, is a board that can prevent the contents of the electronic circuit from being externally estimated among the plurality of main boards. By employing the configuration of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b housed in the box 1111a formed of a colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. 113, it is possible to take countermeasures against fraud.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as the plurality of substrates, for example, the function display substrate of the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 107, the box formed of the colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. The magnetic sensor board 1111b accommodated in the body 1111a, the main control board 1310 attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 in FIGS. 113 and 114, and the peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. The peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 in FIG. 110, etc. are mounted, and the transparent main control board box of the main control unit 1300 in FIGS. 113 and 114 which is the main board for the progress of the game. Main control board 131 attached (accommodated) to 1320 107, a function display board of the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 107, a magnetic sensor board 1111b housed in a box 1111a molded of a colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. And a peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. 110 which is a side substrate. A plurality of main-side substrates and a plurality of sub-side substrates are provided, respectively. For example, the main-side substrate includes a function display substrate of the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 107, a magnetic sensor substrate 1111b housed in a box 1111a molded of a colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. 113, FIG. A main control board 1310 or the like attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 114 is provided, and a peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. , An effect drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 in FIG. 110 and the like are provided. The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 shown in FIG. 110, which is a sub-side board, and the rendering drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 shown in FIG. 110 are only boards provided with a display unit capable of specifying mounted components. It is configured. On the other hand, the function display substrate of the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 107 which is the main-side substrate, the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b accommodated in the box 1111a molded of a colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. Of the main control board 1310 attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 113 and FIG. 114, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 of FIG. 107 and the magnetic sensor 1111 of FIG. The magnetic sensor substrate 1111b accommodated in the box 1111a molded of a colorless and transparent resin in FIG. 10 does not have a display unit capable of specifying mounted components, and is a sub-side substrate of the peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. 110. Performance of the peripheral control board 1510 and the drive board unit 1700 in FIG. Compared to the driving substrate 1720 and the like is constructed as a specific main-side substrate which is difficult to estimate the contents of the electronic circuit from the outside. That is, the main-side board has a specific main-side board that makes it difficult to externally estimate the contents of the electronic circuit as compared to the sub-side board, without having a display portion capable of identifying the mounted component. ing.

  As described above, the function display substrate of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 107, which is the main-side substrate related to the progress of the game, and the magnetic sensor housed in the box 1111a molded of a colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 shown in FIG. 113 of the main control board 1310 attached (accommodated) to the transparent main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 of FIGS. 113 and 114. The function display board of the function display unit 1400 of FIG. The magnetic sensor substrate 1111b accommodated in the box body 1111a molded of a colorless and transparent resin in the magnetic sensor 1111 has a sub-side relating to the effect performed during the game without having a display unit capable of specifying mounted components. Peripheral control board 1 of peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. 110 which is a board 10, is configured as a particular main-side substrate which is difficult to estimate the contents of the electronic circuit from the outside compared to the effect driving substrate 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 in FIG. 110. As a result, the function display board of the function display unit 1400 in FIG. 107 and the magnetic sensor 1111 in FIG. 113 are used as a specific main board that can prevent the contents of the electronic circuit from being externally estimated. By adopting the configuration of the magnetic sensor substrate 1111b housed in the box 1111a molded of a colorless and transparent resin, it is possible to take countermeasures against fraud.

[Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 illustrated in FIG. 137 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 279. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 274, and FIG. 276 is an example of the main control-side timer interrupt processing. 277 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process, FIG. 278 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error display process, and FIG. 279 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a set value confirmation display process. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by the operation of an initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, setting value confirmation. The display processing will be described.

[Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used in the game control, a special random number used to determine whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and a hit determination initial value used to determine the initial value of this special random number A determined random number, a reach determining random number used for determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach out of reach) when the jackpot gaming state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 A random number for a variable display pattern to be used for determining a variable display pattern of a special symbol that is variable displayed on the symbol display, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 for generating a big hit game state. A symbol random number to be used for determining a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol (determination of a hit type) derived and displayed by the symbol display, and an initial value of the symbol random number. Big hit symbol for the initial value determination random number or the like for there are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol hit determination for use in determining whether or not to perform an open / close operation of a movable piece capable of accepting a game ball in the second starting port 2004, and this normal symbol hit determination Initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination used for determination of initial value of random number for use, and normal symbol used for determination of variable display pattern of normal symbol variably displayed on normal symbol display of function display unit 1400 A random number for a variable display pattern is prepared.

  Among various random numbers used for such game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built in the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and at a high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU. The other values within the predetermined numerical range are successively extracted, and when all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and the main control is performed. Based on the clock signal input to the MPU, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is supposed to.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for symbol determination is usually updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from a normal symbol determination initial value determination random number toward a maximum value, and then counts up from a minimum value toward a normal symbol determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The initial symbol determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of selecting one value from a fixed numerical value range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

  In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated at the time of turning on the power, or when various types of data stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU in the main control side power-on processing described later are used. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the information as a numerical value and the sum is equal to the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when the main control MPU does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for the symbol hit determination is normally read from the built-in nonvolatile RAM by the main control MPU. An initial value deriving process for extracting an ID code and constantly deriving the same fixed value from a fixed numerical value range of a counter for updating a random number for symbol hit determination based on the extracted ID code. And line, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the same fixed value derived on the basis of the ID code by the execution of the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated as the initial value determination random number for symbol hit determination. As described above, the value set in the initial symbol determination random number for symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU by the manufacturer of the main control MPU. The first security measure is that if the ID code is stored, the ID code will not be rewritten even if an external device is used, and the initial value derivation process is performed when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. By executing the second security countermeasure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by executing the second security countermeasure, the analysis is prevented by taking two-step security countermeasures.

  Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU and using the extracted ID code as an initial value determination random number for ordinary symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person trying to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it, and obtains an ID code previously stored in a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value coincides with the unauthorized acquisition, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is given, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 'provided in the other game board 5'. In other words, in the other game board 5 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is useless at all in the other game board 5 ′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1 ′, and thus the ID code is analyzed by being disassembled. Even if momentary blackouts are generated at predetermined intervals obtained and game balls are passed through the gate unit 2003 at predetermined intervals, the movable piece is opened and closed to allow the game balls to be received at the second starting port 2004. Game state cannot be generated.

[Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU has a circuit configuration so that a stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. It indicates the address on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 274 and 275, the main control-side power-on processing is performed. When the main control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets the RAM access permission (step S10). Update of the main control built-in RAM can be performed by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU performs a power failure clearing process (step S12). In the power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input from the power failure monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of electric power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops. When the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from the time when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). Have been.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S14). In this determination, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear is to be performed when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch is not operated, while determining that the RAM clear switch is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is to be performed, and it is determined that the RAM clear switch is operated. Note that, in the period from the start of the main-control-side power-on process of this routine to the determination in step S14, the operation is extremely short, and therefore, the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch is actually performed. The user turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch.

  When the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch has been operated in the determination of step S14, the main control MPU sets a value 1 to a RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S14, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the main control MPU sets a value 0 to a RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU is in a state in which a RAM clearing process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the game information related to the game such as probability fluctuation, unpaid award balls, and other information (for example, the number of main award balls) stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU. This flag indicates whether or not various types of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) are to be deleted. The flag is set to a value of 1 when various types of information are deleted and a value of 0 when various types of information are not deleted. . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees from an initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) and is turned on by a first ON operation. The setting key 1311a is turned on, and the setting is performed based on the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The main control MPU determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. The main frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b. And / or by determining from the setting key ON signal that the setting key switch 1311a has not been turned on, it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition has not been satisfied.

  In the determination of step S18, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU sets the value 1 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU sets the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is a current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU (an area dedicated to setting values in a specific area described later). Is a flag indicating whether the setting change of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time of the first ON operation is permitted or not, and the setting of the set value is changed. The value is set to 1 when the change is permitted, and set to 0 when the change of the set value is not permitted. The value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the standby time (boot timer) before booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby processing. At the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby processing, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510, so that the payout control board 633 becomes the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). ) Can be received.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When determining in step S24 that the main control MPU determines that a power failure notice signal has been input, the main control MPU returns to step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input. It should be noted that a detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

  When the main control MPU determines in step S24 that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it determines whether or not the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value of 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the setting change of the set value is permitted, and a value of 0 when the setting change of the set value is not permitted.

  In the determination of step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has the value 0, that is, when the setting change setting change is not permitted, the main control MPU determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has the value 0. Is determined (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when various information is erased and a value of 0 when various information is not erased. In the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined not to delete various information, the main control MPU calculates the checksum (step S28). This checksum is for calculating the sum of various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM assuming them as numerical values.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main-control-side power-off process (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). If the main control MPU determines in step S30 that they match, the main control MPU determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains various types of information, game sum information such as a checksum value (sum value) and a value of the backup flag BK-FLG in a main control built-in RAM in a main control side power-off process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the power-off process on the main control side has been completed normally, and is set to a value 1 if the power-off process on the main control side has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. Will be described later in detail.

  In the determination of step S30, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. If (the value is 0), that is, if it is determined that the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally, an error display process is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing has been completed is maintained, the game cannot be advanced at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display processing, a detailed description thereof will be described later. If it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable), an error message is displayed to inform the user. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Note that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is moved from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on after the clockwise turning operation is performed by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed, the main control-side power-on processing of this routine is started again. The main control MPU determines that the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b in the above-described determination in step S18, and sets the main frame according to the setting key ON signal. By determining that the key switch 1311a has been turned on by the setting key, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition has been satisfied, and the value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to 1 in step S20A described above. In step S25, it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has the value 1, that is, it is determined that the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and the setting change in step S37 described later is performed. Subsequent to the process, in a process of step S38 described later, a clear area except for a specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. Release the RAM error has to be able to proceed a game by (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error release method").

  As another method different from the first RAM error canceling method, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch is pressed and operated. , The main control-side power-on process is started. The main control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is operated in the above-described step S14, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in the above-described step S16A. In the determination of S26, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, it is determined that various types of information are to be erased. By clearing the RAM, the game can be proceeded by releasing the RAM error (hereinafter, referred to as "second RAM error releasing method").

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the determination in step S30, the main control MPU determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match, or in the determination in step S32, When the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally, an error display of step S33 is performed and the main control built-in RAM is displayed. When there is a notification that there is an abnormality (or cannot be trusted) in the content stored in the first RAM error release method and the second RAM error release method It can be done by the. Thus, when it is not necessary to change the setting of the set value at all, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1, that is, determines that the main control-side power-off process has been normally completed, the main control MPU determines that the main control The work area of the RAM is set (step S34). In this setting, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and the power recovery time information is set in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU proceeds with the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" refers to the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is turned off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and illegal means (for example, a person who commits wrongdoing The high-frequency output from the hidden high-frequency output device) is applied to the main control board 1310 to reset the main control MPU itself and thereafter return to the original state.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control MPU sets the value of the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, the value of the checksum (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter. If the value 1 is not set in the FLG, as will be described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are cleared.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not the value 0 (is 1), that is, when permitting the setting change of the setting value, the main control MPU executes the setting change process. Perform (step S37). In this setting change processing, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but based on a detection signal from the setting change button of the setting change board 1311, every time the pressing operation part of the setting change button of the setting change board 1311 is pressed, The setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g. When the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is operated from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, the decision key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted. Based on the above, the changed set value is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU.

  In the processing of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, the main control MPU Are cleared except for the specific region in all the regions (step S38). Here, the main control MPU writes the value 0 into a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM). In this embodiment, in addition to when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not the value 0 (it is the value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, and when the setting change process is completed, the main control built-in RAM is always required. Are cleared except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area other than the specific area of the whole area of the main control built-in RAM)). Here, the “specific area” is an area dedicated to setting values in which setting values are stored, and an out port 2010, a first sub out port 2011, and a second sub out port provided in a game area 5 a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. And an area exclusively for out-ball counting, in which the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected in 2012 is stored. The set value dedicated area stores a set value to be changed in the setting change processing described later, and the out ball counting dedicated area stores the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the The counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the two sub-out ports 2012 is stored.

  The main control MPU may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. The main control MPU is used when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch instructs RAM clear and erases various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power supply is turned off. When the processing at the time of disconnection is not completed normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is taken out, and a counter for updating a normal symbol hit determination random number based on the taken out ID code is taken out. Performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range, and uses this fixed value to determine the initial value of the normal symbol hit determination random number as described above. Set to a random number.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control MPU sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value of 0. In addition, the main control MPU proceeds with the game based on the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as “hereinafter, referred to as“ the main control MPU ”) built in the main control MPU to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU is operating normally. WDT control register "). The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register, the main control built-in WDT is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT is started, time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is started, and a watchdog timer clear register (built-in to the main control MPU) (until the measured time reaches the time set by the timer set value). If the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register" below, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and time measurement is started, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this manner, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the time measurement. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S41, the main control MPU performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In the present embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633) and a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU are described. The transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed and the presence / absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is also used to perform initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in a testing machine of the gaming machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various kinds of inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control MPU performs startup setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is stored in a hard random number control register incorporated in the main control MPU in order to be updated by hardware. In addition to the setting of latching and acquiring, the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is started by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted without duplication based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU, and the predetermined values are determined in advance. When all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Are extracted one after another without duplication. The main control MPU outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit when acquiring a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and outputs the latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the obtained random number value as a special random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU performs reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (power recovery). A power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, which are divided into a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. To memorize. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various kinds of information are read out from the game backup information and various kinds of commands corresponding to the various kinds of information are stored. is there. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given of the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. You. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If the main control MPU determines in step S54 that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, the main control MPU performs a non-hit random number updating process (step S56). In this non-hit random number update processing, the above-described random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining a large hit symbol initial value, random numbers for determining a small hit symbol initial value, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-hit random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the hit determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. The above-described random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and the like are also updated by the non-hit random number updating process.

  Subsequent to step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU determines whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. Note that the processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S54, when the main control MPU determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, the main control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the above-described various information including game information and other information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU outputs drive signals output to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, the second attacker solenoid 2612, the base monitor, and the like. It stops (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by assuming that the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, is regarded as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control MPU sets the value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). The setting of the RAM access prohibition prevents access to the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

  Subsequent to step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. Since the main control MPU cannot be performed, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs the main control-side power-on processing again. Note that the processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control-side power-off processing”.

  As described above, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU cannot make the determination in step S54 and cannot perform the main control-side power-off process. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power-off process, and executes the main control side power-on process again. . That is, since the main control-side power-off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main-control-side power-off process immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control-side power-off process is executed when the power is cut off and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the power is reset by the built-in reset circuit and restarted. The value (sum value) must not match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM is always generated. It will be completely erased (cleared).

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs, and performs the main control-side power-on processing by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Then, in step S32, it is determined whether or not the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally. Has been inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether or not the game backup information has been stored due to fraud.

  If the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) in the determination of step S25, that is, if the setting change of the setting value is permitted, the setting change process of step S37 is performed. In the processing of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1). At this time, that is, when it is determined that various types of information are to be erased, the information is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in step S38. As described above, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch), the setting value is changed and determined. When a setting change that can be performed (when the main control MPU performs the setting change process), the main control MPU always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, per probability variation (probability)). , Etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the next business start, and a clerk at the game hall or the like presses the RAM clear switch. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the operation unit. In addition, when the setting value is determined to be changed, if the setting change process is performed, (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value obtained before the setting change process is performed is obtained. It is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information including various information such as game information from the main control built-in RAM, as described above, in addition to changing the set value, Since this key is an important key that can be used to check the set value, etc., possession is limited to a limited number of persons, including the manager of the game hall, and is limited to two or three persons. Is not determined to be changed, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall can store the RAM when the game backup information needs to be erased (cleared). Press the clear switch By performing the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 an operation unit while pressing operation, thereby making it possible to erase from the main control chip RAM game backup information (clear).

  Here, the point that the determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be described. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time standby processing in step S22 and the subsequent processing is advanced Will be described.

  As described above, the power charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, when a power outage or a momentary blackout occurs and the power supply from the island facilities of the game hall is cut off. The voltage is applied as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the power failure or momentary power failure. That is, even when the power from the island facilities of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power outage, the charged electric charge is applied as DC +5 V to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the island of the game hall can be operated. The power-off process on the main control side can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the equipment is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power outage or momentary blackout occurs and an island facility in the game hall is provided. When the power supply from the power supply is shut off, the main control-side power-off processing can be surely completed.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 upon power recovery, a standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment, a system for performing drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (booted). 2.5 seconds is set), and immediately before the standby time is reached, if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, a hardware terminal called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Is charged as DC +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, an interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and thereafter, an interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated after the timer interrupt processing is performed, Kicking it may not be able to complete processing upon the main control side power-off. For this reason, the main control-side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value of the calculated checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control-side power-on process is started at the time of the power recovery this time, and the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. In step S30, a value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is determined to be the same. That is, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, even if the RAM clear switch is operated by a clerk or the like at the game hall when the power is restored and the clerk or the like at the game hall does not indicate that the RAM is cleared, the RAM clear switch is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information is erased (cleared).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input. As a result, the progress of the game cannot be performed. Before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S16A or step S16B, but the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the main value as described above. Since the data is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, the process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step S24). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the progress of the game cannot be performed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating a value of a main award ball number information output determination counter or the like). Can be prevented from being updated, and the calculation result of the checksum does not fluctuate. Accordingly, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the value stored and calculated of the checksum of step S64 match when restarted. Therefore, the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure does not occur is initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs from being initialized.

  Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not interrupted after waiting in the wait time waiting process), when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is performing the game, the pachinko machine 1 Even if the power supply to the main control MPU is cut off, power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the game information on the progress of the game and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) Step which is a backup process for storing various information including information indicating the value of an information output determination counter). The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 because the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing from 58 to step S68 and the main control side power-off processing constituted by the infinite loop. When restarting, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 matches the calculation result of the checksum in the backup process (that is, the value stored and calculated in step S64). Therefore, the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure does not occur is initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has been input, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT to thereby reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Can be restarted again without any update of the main control side, while immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input, As described above, the main-control-side power-off process can be surely completed within a "power-supply-securing period during a momentary power failure or power outage" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is interrupted due to a momentary power failure or power failure during the process of turning on the main control side power when the power is restored, and the main control The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as DC + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) from the occurrence of the power failure or momentary power failure. Therefore, when the main control-side power-off processing cannot be completed within the “shortage of blackout or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the processing immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22 is performed. In step S24, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If the power failure notice signal has been input, the process returns to the determination in step S24 again. As long as it remains input power failure warning signal, by repeating the determination of the step S24, so as not be able to perform the progress of a game.

  By preventing the progress of the game from being performed by such software, the steps subsequent to step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is set in step S52. The content of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, the main prize ball number information output determination) is prevented by setting and preventing the progress to a main control timer interrupt process to be described later. Various types of information including information indicating the value of the counter for the device) can be prevented from being updated. When the power supply from the island facilities of the game hall is cut off due to such a power failure or momentary power failure, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, the main prize ball number information output determination And other information including information indicating the value of the counter for the main control) and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and The other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main award ball number information output determination counter) can be divided into two parts: a part covered by hardware so as not to be changed at all. It is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating a value of a main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. So that the can.

  Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, the power is turned on (power is restored) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. In order to convey, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and the main control is built as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information indicating a driving state of the starting port solenoid 2415 and information indicating a driving state of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. . Here, first, the power-on main control return destination command includes information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2415 and information indicating the driving state of the first attacker solenoid 2418 and the second attacker solenoid 2612. A description will be given of a problem when the command is not set, that is, a problem when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in the power-on main control return command is not performed in step S50.

  For example, the main control board 1310 drives the first attacker solenoid 2418 when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Then, when the first big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member, or when the second attacker solenoid 2612 is driven to open the second big winning opening 2006 by the opening / closing member, an instantaneous blackout or power failure occurs. Thereafter, when power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs an instantaneous power failure or power failure based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Is restored to the game state immediately before the occurrence of the game, the driving of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started, and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed. And thus the transition to a state where the second special winning opening 2006 by driving the state or the second attacker solenoid 2612 is closed is opened from a state that is closed by the opening and closing member by.

  However, when an instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot game state as a game state, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 returns to the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the terminal, the screen can be displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state, and the big hit game state can be returned. It is not possible to display at all which round. In other words, for example, a game ball enters the first special winning opening 2005 and is detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402, and the large winning opening 1 count that conveys the number of balls of the game ball entering the first special winning opening 2005 Even if the main control board 1310 transmits the display command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the display command, the peripheral control board 1510 enters the first big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of played game balls can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state (ie, what round).

  In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the first attacker solenoid 2418 and terminates the first big winning opening 2005 when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state ends, for example. The special winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing that the state changes from the opened state to the closed state (that is, the closing of the first winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 during the round) is mainly performed. When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state from the control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the drive of the first attacker solenoid 2418 is started to start the first big winning opening. 2005 is shifted from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member to the state of being opened (that is, the first grand prize) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the fifth round of the 2005 from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the five rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen according to the probability and the time saving state described above and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  Also, for example, a screen (for example, a message indicating that the movable piece is open) indicating that the game state is in a game state in which game balls can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player. The main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2415 to open the movable piece when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the image on the display area of the effect display device 1600 while the second starting port is being controlled. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the 2004 is open, and the power is restored thereafter, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, so that the starting port solenoid 2415 starts driving to close the movable piece. So that the transition to the state for closing the second start-up port 2004 by work.

  However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, an instantaneous blackout or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and can return, it is in a gaming state in which game balls can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the gaming state is advantageous for the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen to be transmitted in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. There is also a case where the player has forgotten that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state at the time of power restoration is returned to the game state in which game balls can be accepted to the second starting port 2004. Nevertheless, when the power is restored, a screen for instructing a game (that is, a screen for instructing a game to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the game is played. There is also a problem that the player does not know what game to play.

  As described above, in the above two examples, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the power failure or the power failure immediately after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting at the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power failure, and that the pachinko machine has failed. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, the power-on state command is issued). In step S50, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are transmitted in order to transmit the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for output determination of the number of main prize balls is generated and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-described example, in the four rounds of the jackpot gaming state, When an instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs and power is restored thereafter, the main control board 1310 starts driving the first attacker solenoid 2418 to return to the state where the first special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member. The peripheral control board 1510 can inform the peripheral control board 1510 of the transition to the open state, and therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 specifies a screen that indicates that the round has been the jackpot game state (that is, the number of the round this is. Cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but in the big hit game state and the first attacker A screen that starts to drive the solenoid 2418 and informs that the first big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member (for example, “Big hit. The big winning opening is open. Screen that tells the player that a ball should be thrown in.) Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine receives the message It is possible to instruct the player to enter a game ball into the big winning opening 2005, and, for example, in the above-described example, the player enters a gaming state in which the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs in a state where the gaming state is advantageous for the player, and then power is restored, the drive of the starting port solenoid 2415 is started as a return destination of the main control board 1310. Screen that informs that the movable starting piece is opened to open the second starting port 2004 (for example, "The moving piece is open. A screen that conveys the message "Please play the game." To the player is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510, and the second starting after the power is restored to the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine. A game to enter a game ball into the mouth 2004 can be instructed.

  Thus, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and power is restored after that, it is possible to instruct the main control board 1310 in detail where the peripheral control board 1510 should return. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting at the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power outage, and that the pachinko machine has failed. Can be prevented.

  Next, in a main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of a production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the power is first turned on after the main control board 1310 is manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 includes the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, the process proceeds to step S30. In the comparison judgment, the values of the checksums must not match, and in step S38, the values are always cleared except for a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Thereby, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information classified as power-on. A power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball are generated by creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only three commands, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the main control timer interrupt processing described later, a power-on state command is transmitted first, a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted, and then a power-on main prize ball number is transmitted. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is issued from the main control board 1310 as the first command. This is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch is operated and the RAM clear switch is operated when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on and when the power is restored due to the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure). When clearing, the information instructing that, and the power-on (including power-on as well as power recovery when power is restored due to power failure or momentary power failure). Information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return from among the probability saving time state, high probability saving time state, low probability non saving time state, and high probability non saving time state, and the model code of the pachinko machine. And information. Here, a description will be given of a problem when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

  When creating a so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine 1 What kind of game specification (for example, in addition to the game specification that when the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times) ), It is possible to specify whether the game specification (such as a ST machine)) in which a probability fluctuation occurs in the state where the game is performed)).

  In the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker of the production line determines which one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the movies A, B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F), It is not clear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing on the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is manufactured to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the cartoon F). There is an assumption and misunderstanding that it is flowing on the production line.

  For this reason, when the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of works is mixed at the time of manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, the worker of the manufacturing line will It is not possible to confirm which work the copyright of the manufactured main control board 1310 is for, and for any copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, It is not possible to confirm whether the game specification is a game specification (ST type) or a game specification (if a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs).

  Thus, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of the plurality of works is mixed. With the mixture of the 1310s, the game is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery and power recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or an instantaneous power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is used. In step S50, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for output determination of the number of main prize balls is generated and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thus, the worker of the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the power of the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection apparatus Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described Max type indicating the model type, the middle type, And a sweet digital type, a series code for specifying which type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if a probability change occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability fluctuation in the state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited By watching the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the main control board 1310 determines which work is the copyright of the work. It is possible to determine which model type (maximum type, middle type, and sweet digital type) for the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or ST machine in which if a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs.

  Accordingly, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. The worker can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by looking at the inspection monitor, and separates the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work for each of the following main control boards 1310. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by an operation of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt processing will be described. This main control timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the main control power-on processing shown in FIGS. 274 and 275.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 276 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Of the register bank to the register tank. Note that, in the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In the timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are turned on according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, The main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmits the time in which the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the ordinary symbol variation display pattern determined by the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing described later. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal for notifying that the various commands are normally received by the payout control board 633 is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the ordinary symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control MPU performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, for example, the main control MPU detects a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3051, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, and a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401. A signal, a detection signal from the first special winning opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the second special winning opening sensor 2601, an output sensor 3053, a detection signal from the first sub-out opening sensor 2403, and a detection signal from the second sub-out opening sensor 3054, Detection signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, operation signals from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signals from the door frame opening switch, detection signals from the body frame opening switch 4b, setting key switches 1311a , A signal from the setting switch button, and transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. Reading 払主 ACK signal from the dispensing control board 633 to convey the fact that the ball command dispensing control board 633 has normally received, respectively, is stored in the input information storage area of the main control chip RAM as input information. Further, when the detection signal from the first startup port sensor 3052 and the detection signal from the second startup port sensor 2401 are read, respectively, the startup port prize command corresponding to the other is transmitted as transmission information to the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3052, a starting port winning command corresponding to the detection signal is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Is detected, the start port winning command corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  In this embodiment, when the switch input processing is started, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those in which the unused terminal processing is performed). First, each is read as a first time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs), each is read again as a second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, the game ball is treated as having no incoming ball or as ignoring the input.

  As described above, in the switch input processing, the state of inputting to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU (including those subjected to the vacant terminal processing) is performed for the first to third times. By performing the reading twice, that is, the reading twice for comparison by performing the comparison and the reading twice for comparing the second to fourth times, the erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, or the like can be avoided. Since it is possible to perform the detection, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3051, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3052, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, The detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2402, the detection signal from the second special winning opening sensor 2601, the out opening sensor 3053, the first sub out opening sensor 2403, Detection signal from the second sub-out port sensor 3054, detection signals from the magnetic sensors 1111, 2404, 2602, 3055, operation signals from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signals from the door frame opening switch, body frame A payout control for notifying that the payout control board 633 has normally received the detection signal from the release switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switch button, and the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. The reliability of the payer ACK signal from the substrate 633 can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU performs an input terminal failure monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have been subjected to the vacant terminal process is performed based on the information obtained in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as a vacant terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring processing, information obtained in the switch input processing in step S104 as to whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the vacant terminal processing is applied among the input terminals of the various input ports is LOW. Perform based on. When the main control MPU determines that the logic state of the input terminal to which the vacant terminal processing has been performed is not LOW, the main control MPU is divided into a notification display for notifying that a problem has occurred in a peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU performs a hit random number update process (step S106). In the hit random number updating process, the above-described symbol random numbers are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a jackpot symbol initial value, which is updated in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control-side main process and the main control-side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby increasing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random numbers are random numbers related to the hit determination (hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the hit random number updating process is performed. The normal symbol hit determination random number and the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by the hit random number updating process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for determining a symbol hit is a counter of an initial value update type, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from a minimum value to a maximum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit random number update process updates the hit determination initial value determination random number. The initial symbol determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of selecting one value from a fixed numerical value range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

  In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are set in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The update is performed in the hit random number update process and the hit random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process of the present routine, but every time the interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of the present routine becomes uneven, and If the number of times of execution of the non-hit-hit random number updating process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56. .

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU performs a ball number counting process (step S107). In this ball number counting process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, a detection signal is input from the out-mouth sensor 3053 to the game area 5 a partitioned and formed on the game board 5. When the out-mouth sensor 3053 detects a game ball collected by the provided out port 2010, the value 1 is added to the value of a collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010. (Incrementing) the calculation, the detection signal from the first sub-out mouth sensor 2403 is input, and the game ball collected by the first sub-out mouth 2011 provided in the game area 5a defined and formed on the game board 5 is subjected to the first calculation. When the sub-out mouth sensor 2403 detects the count, the counting of the number of game balls collected by the first sub-out mouth 2011 is counted. A calculation is performed to add (increment) the value 1 to the value of the collected ball counter to be counted, and the detection signal from the second sub-out port sensor 3054 is input to the game area 5 a provided in the game area 5 a partitioned on the game board 5. When the second sub-out port sensor 3054 detects a game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012, the value of the collected ball counter for counting the number of game balls collected by the second sub-out port 2012 is set to a value. An operation of adding (incrementing) 1 is performed. That is, in the ball number counting process, the out-port sensor 3053 detects the game ball collected by the out-port 2010, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 detects the game ball collected by the first sub-out port 2011, and When the second sub-out port sensor 3054 detects a game ball collected by the second sub-out port 2012, an operation of adding the value 3 to the value of the collected ball counter is performed. The main control MPU uses the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the count result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the second sub out port 2012, and performs the main control. It is stored in a special area of the built-in RAM in an out-ball counting area, and the output of a lighting signal to be displayed on a base monitor is set and stored as output information in an output information storage area. When the value of the collected ball counter is divisible by 10, that is, the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the second sub out port 2012 reaches 10 balls. Each time, a ball collection command notifying the fact is created and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. When the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (value 65535 in this embodiment) and further adds (increments) only 1 to the value of the collection ball counter, the main control MPU returns the collection ball. The value of the counter overflows to a value of 0, and an operation of adding from this value 0 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S107, the main control MPU performs award ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area to create a prize ball command for paying out game balls based on the input information, or the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, and the like. Or a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the substrates. Then, the created award ball command and the self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the first grand prize entrance 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is 10 balls. , The main prize ball number information output signal is set to be output in order to convey this effect, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. When the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check for confirming a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is performed. For example, a command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

  In the prize ball control process in step S108, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. In this case, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified into other sections, is created to convey the fact, and is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is based on the input information read from the above-described input information storage area and based on the input information, that is, the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, the gate unit 2003, the gate 2003, and the like. Based on gaming balls that have entered one of the various winning ports (hereinafter, referred to as "various winning ports provided on the game board 5") such as the one starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the first winning port 2005. The number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is counted. In the prize ball control process in step S108, the sphere is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. I have. In the prize ball control processing in step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read out. Is read from the input information storage area described above, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added based on the input information, and the value indicating the added number of balls is 10 Is exceeded (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to convey that effect, and the transmission information The value stored in the output information storage area and the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is used as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter as the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It is adapted to store update.

  Subsequent to step S108, the main control MPU performs a frame command receiving process (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to that effect is transmitted to the payout control board 633 and stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, And frame state 2 command)), and are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this cheating detection processing, an abnormal state relating to the prize ball is confirmed. When it is determined that an illegal act due to radio wave irradiation (hereinafter, referred to as “radio wave irradiation goto”) is being performed, the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is incremented by one. The value of this radio wave goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection processing. When the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is an interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection processing is performed by the main control timer interrupt processing). A radio wave irradiation goto notification command, which is classified into a notification display indicating that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, is created and stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when a detection signal is input from the magnetic sensors 1111, 404, 2602, and 3055, fraud using a magnet ( Hereinafter, it is determined that “magnet goto” is performed.), And the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by 1 (increment). The value of the magnet goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that the radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection process, is included in the game backup information, and is initialized when the RAM is cleared. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is an interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection processing is performed by the main control timer interrupt processing. .), A magnet goto notification command classified into a notification display for notifying that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is created and stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information. In this embodiment, by reliably detecting and informing the magnet goto by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall can find the magnet goto at an early stage. Has become.

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the detection from the first special winning opening sensor 2402 or the second special winning opening sensor 2601 is performed when the game is not in the jackpot game state. When a signal is inputted (when a game ball enters the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006) or the like, the occurrence of a special winning opening abnormal winning is classified as an abnormal state and displayed as a notification. A winning abnormality display command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  In the fraud detection processing in step S112, when a radio wave irradiation goto and / or a magnet goto are detected, a value 1 is set to a fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud, while the radio wave irradiation goto and the magnet If no goto has been detected, a value of 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the detection of fraud. The injustice detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and is set to a value 0 (zero) as an initial value when the RAM is cleared. Further, when detecting the occurrence of the special winning opening abnormal winning, the value 1 may be set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as the fraud detection.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control MPU performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this firing permission signal setting process, the logic of a firing permission signal for notifying the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the game ball B is fired is set. Specifically, the main control MPU determines that the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, that no fraud has been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Sometimes, the firing permission signal is set to the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. When it is determined that this is the detection, the firing permission signal is inverted to the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic) as the logic of the firing permission signal, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The main control MPU reads out the input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, receives a detection signal from the door frame opening switch and opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. When the body frame opening switch 4b detects that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 when the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b is input and the body frame opening switch 4b detects Is set as the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic) which is the inverted firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information. The logic of the firing permission signal is, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control timer interrupt process of this routine after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after power is restored). Until it is started, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing permission logic is inverted to the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic).

  Subsequent to step S113, the main control MPU performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and a random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is used as the main signal. It is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the control MPU, and the obtained random number value is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU) matches the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (big hit). It is determined whether or not a game state is to be generated (referred to as "special lottery"), and the value of a counter for updating the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the type of big hit or small hit. It is determined whether any one of the hit type determination values matches (determines the hit type).

  When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first starting port sensor 3052, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are based on the second starting port sensor 2401. If it is due to the special pattern 2, various commands related to the tuning effect are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is illuminated so that the first special symbol display or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is set, various commands (big hit opening command, big win opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1 closing display command, big win opening 1 closing display command) (A winning port 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, the first attacker solenoid 2418 is driven to open and close the opening and closing member. When the signal output is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of times (round) in which the first special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two, the round of the function display unit 1400 is performed. Point to the 2 round indicator lamp to turn on the 2 round indicator lamp on the display The output of the signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. When the number of rounds is 15, the 15 round display lamp of the round display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on so that the 15 round display lamp is turned on. Set the output of the lighting signal, and store it in the output information storage area as output information, and set the output of the lighting signal to the status indicator of the function display unit 1400 so as to light the occurrence of time saving in a predetermined color, It is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and an ordinary winning opening winning process is performed based on the input information. In the normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port based on this determination result, the value of the counter for updating the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and the main control is incorporated as the normal winning opening winning information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

  The normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with a 0th section to a 3rd section (four sections). The 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section are arranged in this order. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening is obtained. The winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

  The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning opening winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information of the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the second winning opening winning information storage of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored. The normal winning prize winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the normal winning prize winning information of the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes a free area after being shifted. For example, when the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information of the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning. The normal winning opening winning information in the second section of the normal winning opening information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage in the 0th section of the normal winning opening storing information, respectively. The two sections and the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage are empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is set as a reserved ball, and the normal number of the function display unit 1400 is set. The output of the lighting signal of the normal hold display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information so that the hold display is turned on, and stored in the output information storage area as the output information.

  Subsequent to the normal winning opening prize processing, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination is taken out from the read normal winning opening winning information to read out the main control. It is determined whether or not it matches a normal symbol hit determination value stored in a built-in ROM in advance (referred to as “normal lottery”). It is determined whether or not the movable piece should be opened and closed based on the result of the determination (the result of the lottery by the normal lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed in this determination, the movable piece is in the opened state, so that the second starting port 2004 is in a game state in which game balls can be received, and a game state advantageous to the player is achieved. The variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern, and various commands classified into the ordinary figure tuning effect-related are created, and the transmission information storage described above as the transmission information is performed. In the area, the output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and the output information In the output information storage area described above.

  Also, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for the normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric winning effect are created and transmitted. While the information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2415 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. When the value of the symbol hit determination random number does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above-described ordinary symbol variation display pattern random number. , Create a variety of commands that are classified as related to the public figure synchronizing production, and store it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined ordinary symbol variation display pattern, and the output information storage area described above as the output information To memorize. In the present example, the winning probability of the ordinary lottery (probability of being a normal hit) is one half.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control MPU performs a set value confirmation display process (step S117). In the setting value confirmation display processing, detailed description thereof will be described later. The detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b and the setting key are inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by a 60-degree turning operation clockwise from the position) and the first ON operation is performed, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by a setting key ON signal. It is determined that the main frame 4 is open with respect to the frame 2 and the setting key switch 1 11a determines that the setting key display ON condition is satisfied, while it determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. 4 is not opened and / or the setting key switch 1311a is determined not to be ON by the signal of the setting key ON, so that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied. Is determined. In the set value confirmation display processing, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. Is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the processing is terminated as it is, and returns to this routine.

  Subsequent to step S117, the main control MPU performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU outputs a main payment ACK signal when normally receiving various commands from the payout control board 633 from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information. Or a movable piece for outputting a drive signal to the first attacker solenoid 2418 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the first big winning opening 2005 when the big hit game state is established, and for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2415 that performs opening and closing operations, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a small hit information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display Various information related to the game (game information), such as an information output signal, an information output signal during time reduction, and a start opening winning information output signal. Output to the payout control board 633, or to the payout control board 633, to output the firing permission signal set to the firing permission logic or the firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic). A display signal is output to a base monitor for displaying the counting result (total number) of the game balls collected by the two sub-out ports 2012, or a setting stored in a dedicated area for a set value in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. For example, a lighting signal for displaying the value on the setting display 1310g is output.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control MPU performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission processing, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data. This transmission information includes various commands that are created in the main-control-side timer interrupt process that is the main routine and that are classified into special figure 1 tuning effects, various commands that are classified in special figure 2 tuning effects, and big hits. (For example, when a game ball entering the first special winning opening 2005 is detected, a special winning opening 1 corresponding to a special winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the first special winning opening sensor 2402). Count display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as general-tune synchronizing effects, various commands classified as normal electric production effects, various commands classified as information display, status display Various commands to be classified, various commands to be related to a test, and various other commands (for example, the main control board 1310 is The main prize ball number information output signal is output as main prize ball number information each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls on the basis of the game balls entering the various prize holes reaches 10 balls. , A main prize ball number information output command for instructing to transmit to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558), and various commands (for example, the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the Each time the number of game balls collected at the second sub-out port 2012 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command notifying the change, a setting change command notifying that the setting value has been changed, and stored in the main control built-in RAM. Error display command for notifying that the contents are abnormal (or unreliable), which will be described later in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. ON operation of the setting key tell that to verify the configuration values stored in the value-only area command, etc.) are stored. In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of three bytes. Specifically, the main serial data has a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by assuming the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, various commands are transmitted as main circumference serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, as a direct current +5 V when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, At least the main serial transmission port built in the main control MPU transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. Is available. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the power is transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 275. Power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output counter Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the main power serial data includes a power-on state command, a status, a mode, and a sum value in the order of: The status, mode, and sum value that are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and subsequently constitute a power-on main control return destination command Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, various kinds of information are read out from the game backup information, and according to the various kinds of information. In some cases, various commands are stored. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information The output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  When a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the player every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the second sub out port 2012 reaches 10 balls, The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the control board 1510 counts the number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub-out port 2011, and the second sub-out port 2012 for each received ball collection command, and is not shown. The ball collection information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (the counted value (that is, the total number of game balls collected at the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011, and the second sub out port 2012) is updated. (Corresponding to date and time) is updated. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the business hours of the game hall are terminated without receiving the ball collection command, the last counted value (that is, the out port 2010, the first sub out port 2011) is consequently obtained. And the ball collection information in which the updated date and time are associated with the total number of game balls collected at the second sub-out port 2012 and the updated date and time are stored and held in a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when starting the business of the gaming hall, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) to the business. The ball collection information is created again from the start date, and the ball collection information is stored and retained in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as ball collection history information. The counted value stored and retained in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as the ball collection information may be a value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values may be used.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting a timer clear set value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU. This clears the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT. Then, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is started again, so that the main control MPU is not forced to be reset by the main control built-in WDT.

  Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the above-described backup for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off during the progress of the game. The power can be cut off on the pachinko machine 1 based on the game information on which the backup processing has been executed as a destination to which the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 should be restored when the power is restored, while the processing can be completed. In this case, a power-on main control return destination command for instructing a driving state of the starting port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418, which are electric driving sources by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine, to the peripheral control board 1510. It can be output. That is, the main control board 1310 sets the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. A power-on state command classified as power-on for notifying that power has been turned on (power recovery) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area. A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, a power-on state command is configured as main serial data, A status, a mode, and a sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the status, a mode, and a sum value. Subsequently, the power supply is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the status, the mode, and the sum value, which constitute the counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls when outputting power.

  Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indicates the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of the power recovery. Can be effected and displayed. With this, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while the player is playing a game, and when power is subsequently restored, the game state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage can be quickly restored after the power is restored. And the effect of the main control board 1310 to return to the progress of the game can be displayed and displayed in the display area of the display unit 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is clumped, that is, in a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a malfunction as seen by the player. Therefore, by returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure immediately after the power recovery, it is possible to prevent a player from being mistaken for a failure.

  Further, in the main control board inspection step, which is an inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, as shown in FIG. At step S38 in the main control-side power-on processing shown above, all the areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. Thus, in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process shown in FIG. 275, if the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only three commands, a status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As the serial data, configure the power-on state command, send to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configure the power-on main control return destination command, The status, mode, and sum value are transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently constitute a counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball information at power-on. The signals are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection step in order. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process forms information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for specifying the type among the max type, the middle type, and the sweet type indicating the model type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification. (For example, in addition to the game specification that when the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of the special symbol changes is limited (ST Machine), etc., based on the game specification code for identifying the It has become.

[Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change processing will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 274.

  When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current installation values as shown in FIG. 277 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the setting value is obtained, the setting value may be read out or taken out. When the setting value is taken out, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

  Subsequent to step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is used to calculate various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and to calculate the sum thereof. Is the same processing as the calculation of.

  Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 275. It is determined whether or not the value of the checksum (sum value) matches (step S204). If the main control MPU determines in step S204 that they match, the main control MPU determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 274, respectively. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG incorporates various types of information, game checksum information such as the value of the checksum (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG into the main control side in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the data has been stored in the RAM. The value is set to 1 when the main control-side power-off process is completed normally, and set to 0 when the main control-side power-off process is not completed normally. Is done.

  In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. If (the value is 0), that is, if it is determined that the main control-side power-off process has not been completed normally, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the “normal range” is a value whose setting value can be changed, and in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value It is preset to a value up to value 6. By proceeding with the flowchart to the determination of step S208, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or when it is determined that the main control-side power-off process has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. Therefore, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM has an abnormality (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU determines that the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM obtained in step S200 are within the normal range. It is determined whether any of the values is within the range, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S208, when the main control MPU determines that the value is not in the normal range, the main control MPU sets the setting value 1 which is the initial value to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination of step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is one of the setting values 1 to 6 in the normal range. However, the main control MPU determines in step S204 that the checksum value (sum value) does not match, without performing the determination in step S208. In this case, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, that the main control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In some cases, the process proceeds to step S210, and the setting value 1 which is an initial value may be set for the setting value acquired in step S200. .

  In the determination in step S206, the main control MPU determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally, or determines in step S208 that the main control When the MPU determines that it is within the normal range, or after step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

  Subsequent to step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and displays the set value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

  Subsequent to step S214, the main control MPU determines whether the setting switching button has been operated (step S216). In this determination, the detection signal from the setting switching button is read, and it is determined whether the detection signal from the setting switching button is input. The main control MPU determines that the setting switching button is operated when the detection signal is input from the setting switching button, and operates the setting switching button when the detection signal is not input from the setting switching button. It is determined that there is not.

  If the main control MPU determines in step S216 that the setting switch button has been operated, the main control MPU updates the set value by adding (incrementing) the value 1 (step S218). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted and set in the predetermined area, Is added (incremented) to the set value set in.

  Subsequent to step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and updates the setting value for the setting display 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

  Subsequent to step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the setting switching button has not been operated, the main control MPU determines whether the enter key has been operated (step S222). ). In this determination, the main control MPU sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The key cylinder is rotated by 120 degrees (that is, the initial position which is the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (that is, the initial position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). By turning the knob 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the (rotational position) and turning it OFF, and then turning it counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it back), the second ON operation causes the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON by the set key switch 1311a. When the decision key ON signal is inputted from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the decision key has been operated, while when the decision key ON signal is not inputted from the setting key switch 1311a. It is determined that the enter key has not been operated.

  When the main control MPU determines in step S222 that the enter key has not been operated, the process returns to step S216 again, and determines whether the setting switch button has been operated. If the main control MPU determines in step S216 that the setting switch button has been operated, it again performs the processing of step S218 and step S220, performs the determination of step S222, and does not operate the enter key. When the setting switch button is operated until the determination key is operated, the set value is incremented by one each time the setting switch button is operated, and the setting display 1310g is updated. Is displayed, and if the setting switching button is not operated, the setting switching button is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored by the time the determination key is determined to be operated in step S222, the set value updated immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure occurs is determined by the main control. Since the setting value is not stored in the dedicated area for the set value in the specific area of the built-in RAM, the setting value stored in the dedicated area for the set value in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU determines that the enter key has been operated, the main control MPU stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the set value is acquired in step S200, if the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted and set in the predetermined area, Is updated with respect to the set value set in the main control built-in RAM, and the updated set value is returned to the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. After the process of step S224 is completed, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored, the updated set value when the enter key is operated before the power failure or the momentary power failure occurs is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Is stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area.

  Subsequent to step S224, the main control MPU determines whether there is an operation of turning off the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU determines the initial position (that is, the setting key) from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the setting key cylinder rotation position where the switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. This is performed based on the OFF signal from the controller. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, but the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a has not been input. Sometimes the setting key is turned off It determined that there is no.

  If the main control MPU determines in step S226 that the setting key has not been turned off, the process returns to step S226 again, and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned off.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S226, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has been turned off, the main control MPU stops outputting the lighting signal for displaying the updated set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S228).

  Subsequent to step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

  Subsequent to step S230, the main control MPU sets a value 0 to a setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is, as described above, the current setting value (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is set to the first ON state) stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. This flag indicates whether the setting change of the set value 1 to the set value 6 at the time of the operation is permitted or not. When the setting change of the set value is permitted. The value 1 is set to the value 1 and the value 0 is set when the setting change is not permitted. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, the setting change of the setting value is not permitted thereafter.

  Subsequent to step S232, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The “normal range” is the same as that determined in step S208, and as described above, in the present embodiment, the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4, the set value 5, and the set value It is preset to a value up to value 6. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU checks whether the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether or not the value is any one of the set values 1 to 6, which are ranges. If the value is determined to be within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that it is within the normal range, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S234), and subsequently creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236). Subsequently, a peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initialization in step S234 is the same as the serial communication initialization in step S44 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 275, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is the same as that in FIG. This is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Here, in the initial setting of serial communication in step S234, prior to the initial setting of serial communication in step S44, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmitting process in step S238 is mainly used. This is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, but this is prioritized prior to the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 275. This is because the setting change command informs the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting has been changed. It should be noted that the setting change command is a command for notifying the changed setting value and the completion of storing the setting value. Upon receiving the setting change command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 updates the setting value history information (information in which the setting value is associated with the date and time) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). I do.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing has been completed is maintained, the game cannot be advanced at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display processing, a detailed description thereof will be described later. If it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable), an error message is displayed to inform the user. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the setting value confirmation display processing will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 276.

  When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. 278 (step S350). The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the set value stored in the dedicated area for the set value in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the value is not displayed for confirmation, the value is set to 0.

  In the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the set value is not confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU determines whether there is an opening operation of the main body frame 4 and an ON operation of the set key. Is determined (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU reads out the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and detects from the body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the input information. The signal and the setting key are inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is moved clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the 60-degree rotation operation and the first ON operation, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the main frame 4 Is open, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. The main frame 4 is not opened to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. By determining and / or determining from the setting key ON signal that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on, it is determined that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied.

  In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU terminates the routine as it is, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the value 1 is set to the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S354), and the current installation value is obtained (step S356). Here, the main control MPU acquires the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S356, the main control MPU determines whether the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process in FIG. 178. As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 2, The values are preset to values 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the determination at step S357, the main control MPU checks the setting value acquired at step S356 (that is, the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. Is determined to be any one of the set values 1 to 6 that are in the normal range, and if it is determined to be in the normal range, the set value is used as it is. I do.

  In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU determines that it is within the normal range, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g, and outputs the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S358).

  Subsequent to step S360, the main control MPU creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360). ), End this routine. The ON operation command of the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control timer interruption processing shown in FIG. 276. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the set value confirmation display processing of this routine has started (that is, the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). It is a command to convey.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ON operation command of the setting key, the ON operation history information of the setting key stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) (Information in which the message and the date are associated with each other).

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the ball collection history information, the setting value history information, the error display history information, and the setting key ON operation history information described above. Thus, a predetermined specific history information display permission condition that the display of the specific history information such as can be permitted is satisfied. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 allows a person who checks the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied to perform the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. Is performed, the display is switched to the specific history information display image for selectively displaying the specific history information from the image that has been displayed so far, and is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not the value 0 (is the value 1), that is, when the set value is displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key is turned off. It is determined whether or not it is (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, inserts the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a, and sets the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key cylinder is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for which the determination key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). Then, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by performing the OFF operation, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. When the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key is turned OFF. While the setting key switch 1311a is Setting key when the signal of the OFF is not input is determined not been OFF operation.

  In the determination of step S362, when the main control MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU terminates this routine as it is. The value 0 is set to the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364). Subsequently, the output of the lighting signal for displaying the set value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped to the setting display 1310g. Then, the acquired setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S366). Subsequently, a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, the setting operation of the setting key OFF operation command is performed (step S368), and this routine ends.The OFF operation command of the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 276. The setting key OFF operation command indicates that the set value confirmation display processing of this routine has been completed (that is, the confirmation of the set value stored in the dedicated set value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). Command.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the above-mentioned predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 is performing control to display the specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image Until then, control is performed to switch to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and restore the image.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs interrupt non-permission setting (step S370). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 276, which has been repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S370, the main control MPU performs an error display process (step S372), and subsequently enters an infinite loop for continuously clearing the main control built-in WDT (step S374). This infinite loop keeps clearing the main control built-in WDT. However, this cannot be stopped once the main control built-in WDT is started. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT starts again, so that the main control built-in WDT makes the main control. The MPU does not have to be forcibly reset. Further, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, the game cannot be advanced at all, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power is turned on again. In this error display processing, a detailed description thereof will be described later. If it is determined that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable), an error message is displayed to inform the user. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[Error display processing]
Next, an error display process will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 274, and is a process performed in step S37 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 274 (FIG. 277). And the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 278.

  When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 279 (step S400). As described above, the firing permission signal indicates that the firing of the game ball B is permitted to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. If the logic is set to the firing permission logic, the firing is permitted. On the other hand, if the logic is set to the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the firing permission logic, it can be transmitted that the firing is stopped (non-permitted). .

  The error display processing of this routine is performed in step S33 of the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 274 or one of the processings performed in step S37 of the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 274. When started as (specifically, the processing performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 277), the main control MPU interrupts step S52 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 275. Since permission setting cannot be performed, the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 276 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting processing in step S113 in the processing cannot be performed. The firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 through the main control output circuit with the reset function. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the firing stop logic (the firing non-permission logic) which is the inverted firing permission logic.

  Therefore, the error display processing of this routine is the processing performed in step S33 of the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 274 or the processing performed in step S37 of the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 274. When started as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 277), in step S400, the main control MPU waits for power to be restored before displaying an error in this routine. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the processing is started, the logic of the fire permission signal is set to fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) and its predetermined output port is set. From the output terminal of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function.

  When the error display processing of this routine is started as the processing performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 278, the main control MPU executes the processing in step S357 in the set value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 278. In the determination, it is determined that the content of the main control built-in RAM is abnormal. Although the main control MPU has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 275, the main control MPU has already shown in FIG. 278 before starting the error display processing of this routine. Since the interrupt non-permission setting has been performed in step S370 in the set value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing of this routine ends, the processing enters the infinite loop as described above. The timer interrupt process cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the process cannot be performed.

  Therefore, when the error display processing of this routine is started as the processing performed in step S372 in the set value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 278, the main control MPU determines in step S400 that the contents of the main control internal RAM are abnormal. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired in a certain state, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It outputs to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with function.

  Subsequent to step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g, and an error is displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

  Subsequent to step S402, the main control MPU performs an error display on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

  Subsequent to step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initial setting (step S406), creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and subsequently sets the error display command in step S406. A peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting the transmission information (error display command) as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S410), and the routine ends.

  The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 277 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 275. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is performed in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 277 and the main control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 276. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display process of this routine is performed in step S33 of the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 274, and the process performed in step S37 of the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 274 (FIG. 277). When the processing is started and completed as the processing performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 27) and the processing performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 278, an infinite loop is entered as described above. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be advanced at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the serial communication initialization in step S406 is performed, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is used as the main control serial data. 1510.

  The error display command is a command for notifying that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the CPU displays the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time of reception) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ) To update.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, a blue background image is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 as "RAM error occurred. Please call a clerk." In addition to performing control to display a message image of white characters, an announcement “RAM error has occurred. Please call a clerk” is adjusted by rotating the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The control is forcibly set so as to be the maximum volume without depending on the volume, and is controlled to flow from various speakers (the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main frame speaker 622, and the like). The process of giving the RAM error notification by the error display command is the process with the highest priority. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command after receiving the command for transmitting another error, the RAM performs the RAM error notification. Error notification is given top priority.

[Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 illustrated in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of turning on the power of the payout control unit. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing at the time of turning on the power of the payout control unit in FIG. 280. FIG. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[Discharge control section power-on processing]
First, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, as shown in FIGS. 280 to 282, a process at the time of turning on the power of the payout control unit is performed under the control of the payout control unit 633 a of the payout control board 633. . When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). In this interrupt mode, the priority order of the interrupts of the payout control MPU is set. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops. . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from the time when the power is turned on to a predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes. In the present embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 has been operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, it is determined that the instruction does not indicate that the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, and when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the instruction indicates that the RAM clear is to be performed. It is determined that the switch has been operated.

  If the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, the payout control MPU sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is set in a state in which the RAM clearing process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the payout control MPU sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, award ball information storage area). And the state of the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area and the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. This flag indicates whether or not the payout information relating to the payout of the existing PRDY signal output setting information) is to be deleted. The flag is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is deleted and a value of 0 when the payout information is not deleted. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting allows access to the payout control built-in RAM, for example, to write (store) or read out payout information.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU sets a stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily indicates a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. It indicates an address on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer is returned to the initial address by reading sequentially from the last stack to the first stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is equal to 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not deleted (step S524). This checksum is to calculate the sum of the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM assuming that the payout information is a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (when the power is turned off) described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and a checksum value has been stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in a power supply cutoff process described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off processing has been completed normally and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally.

  In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has been completed normally, the payout control built-in RAM is determined as power recovery. Is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM (that is, the payout control built-in ROM) built in the payout control MPU, The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prize stored in the prize ball information storage area) are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information on payout of mismatch counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. Note that “power recovery” includes not only the state where the power is turned on after the power is turned off, but also the state where the power is restored after the power failure or the momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not the value 0 (the value is 1), that is, when it is determined that the payout information is to be deleted, or in the determination of the step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (it is the value 0). If it is determined that the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). This clears the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In the present embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set at step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). By setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order, the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Is done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If the payout control MPU determines in step S540 that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, the payout control MPU determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process which is performed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Is set.

  When the payout control MPU determines in step S542 that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 0, that is, determines that 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU receives the power failure notice signal. It is determined whether or not it has been performed.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value of the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to 0 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) relating to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as drive information, awarded ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information to be displayed on an error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on the output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal. In or (embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls.

  Specifically, a prize ball information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball number information is provided. Is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. Is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and updated based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing in step S550 described later.

  In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the read value of the read prize ball information output determination counter exceeds the value of 10 ( In other words, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 has reached 10), and the number of balls that have exceeded the number is displayed. The value is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the value of the award ball number information output determination counter), and a display signal is output to the error LED display.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, It reads a BRDY signal and a CR connection signal, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the main control board 1310 that the various commands transmitted in the command transmission processing described later have been normally received, and inputs them as input information. The information is stored in the information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer updating process, when it is determined whether or not the ball discharge state is caused by the discharge blades 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 is transmitted, the ball discharge determination time set as the determination condition; The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game balls. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the full tank determination time and the detection signal from the ball disconnection detection sensor 574. In addition to performing time management, such as a ball-out determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls that have been paid out and received by the ball container 589b of the payout blade 589, and the actual A determination is made as to whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not payout of inconsistent game balls due to inconsistency with the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 is repeatedly performed. At this time, time management is performed for the determination condition and the mismatch determination reset time set for the mismatch counter. For example, when the ball dust determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the ball dust determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball gazing judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. The payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit based on various signals from the CR unit. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area) Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of PRDY signal output setting information in which the signal logic state is set.

  By this processing, for example, even after a momentary power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, and the like at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values to the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. Thereby, even when the payout device 580 is performing the payout operation of the game balls, the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or power outage, and the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. As a result, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU performs an instantaneous power failure or power outage while exchanging various signals with the CR unit and paying out the game balls to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202. And the exchange of various signals is interrupted, and even if it becomes impossible to continue paying out game balls, when the power is restored, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. The value is restored to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power outage stored as the payout backup information, Exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the power outage or power outage may be continued from the time of power recovery. With wear, so that we can continue to perform the payout of the game ball.

  In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous stop or stop when the power is restored, even if the instantaneous stop or stop occurs. Various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the CR unit are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

  Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, upon power recovery, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the read-out PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out a lending ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is controlled to be paid out. The data is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM and included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, and if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not less than the inconsistency threshold INCH, the retry operation is abnormal. Is determined, that is, it is determined that the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, Set the error status output to the CR unit, for example, when you are not communicating with the CR unit, The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting.

  Thus, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit. As described above, for example, if the operation of paying out the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the instantaneous stop, the state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit. Can be notified that the payout operation of the game ball due to is abnormal. Thus, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball lending request signal, from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on the CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, when the pachinko machine is used. When the power is turned on and the payout control board 633 is electrically connected to the CR unit, PRDY is sent to inform that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is possible. While outputting the logic state of the signal as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, it is informed that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible. For the outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW to CR unit. The state of the logic of the EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. A CR connection signal indicating whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In the full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether or not the game ball is full, or the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the above-described ball guiding unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Or not. For example, whether or not the lower plate 202 is full of the stored game balls is determined by using the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms in the current full and full ball detection processing from the full tank detection sensor 154. The detection signal is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out of ball check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 changes from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, the timer for the above-described full tank determination time is started in the timer update process of step S552. When the full tank determination time reaches the value 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the lower plate 202 is full of the stored game balls, and the full tank information for notifying the fact is stored in the above-described state information storage area. I do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information notifying that the lower plate 202 is not full with the stored game balls is stored in the state information storage area.

  The determination of whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number is also performed by using the timer interrupt cycle 2ms, and checking the current full tank and running out of balls. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is turned ON, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch becomes OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 becomes When the state transitions from OFF to ON, the counting of the above-mentioned ball out determination time is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the ball-out determination time reaches a value of 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is ON in this full and ball-out determination processing. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number, and the ball is informed. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than the predetermined number. The ball breaking information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command receiving process (step S558). In this command reception processing, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When the various commands are normally received, payer ACK information notifying the fact is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when the various commands cannot be received normally, a connection error that indicates that an error has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an error has occurred in the various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control MPU performs a command analysis process (step S560). In the command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, ball lending, ball elimination and ball damage are performed, retry operation determination is performed, and the number of unpaid balls (award ball stock number) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. I do. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not a predetermined number or more, a corresponding action is taken. The display data (in the present embodiment, the display value 1 (the number “1”)) is created, and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission processing, various types of information are read from the above-described status information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame state 2 command) that are divided into status displays are created based on the various types of information. And sends it to main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on the out-of-ball information, if the number of game balls taken into the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not a predetermined number or more, the frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

  After step S568, the procedure returns to step S539, where the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms has elapsed, step S544 is performed. Sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, performs port output processing in step S548, performs port input processing in step S550, and performs step S552. To perform a timer update process, and in step S554 In step S556, a full or missing ball check process is performed, a command reception process is performed in step S558, a command analysis process is performed in step S560, a main operation setting process is performed in step S562, and an LED is determined in step S564. A display data creation process is performed, a command transmission process is performed in step S566, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeatedly performed. Note that the processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. I have. As a result, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so that other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, in the determination at step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, the payout control MPU performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-described rewriting of the payout information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control MPU performs a clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by assuming that the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the value of the checksum calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, is a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). Thus, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

  Subsequent to step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. The processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “dispensing control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs, and performs a power up process of the payout control unit by restoring the power thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the pay-out backup information stored in the pay-out control built-in RAM is normal. Has been inspected. As described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is double-checked to check whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to fraud.

[Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 280 to 282.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to prohibition and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 283 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to a 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapse flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU sets interruption permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 137 will be described with reference to FIGS. 284 to 288. FIG. 284 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, FIG. 285 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 286 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. FIG. 287 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 288 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. . In this embodiment, as the priority of the interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is set highest, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. They are set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

  As described above, in the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, the CPU, the RAM, the VDP, the VRAM, the sound source, the SATA controller, and various I / O interfaces are integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[Processing when the peripheral control unit is turned on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a peripheral control unit power-on process is performed as shown in FIG. 284 under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process for initializing the peripheral control IC itself, a process for determining hot start / cold start, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, a process for transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC is extremely short. Can be initialized. This causes the CPU of the peripheral control IC to enter a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, a command related to the control of the game effect output from the main control board 1310 is output. And a state in which various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the year, month, and day and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

  In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a later-described peripheral control unit steady-state process. Is not set, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed in response to the execution. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), the process returns to step S1006 again to determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. ing.

  In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it determines to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the stationary processing flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times that the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN for counting the number of times, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution number STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the effect operation unit 300 are provided. The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter, referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382. Various kinds of information (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300) that have acquired the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and a pressing operation Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC in which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set. Monitoring the presence or absence of an operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 parts 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects. Specifically, if the volume has been adjusted in the effect operation unit information acquisition processing, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness has been adjusted, the light emission mode has been adjusted according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and brightness is reflected in real time, and the effect proceeds with the adjusted volume and brightness.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, based on a lamp pallet setting table including a specified luminance value, a normal pallet value, and a special pallet value, the luminance of the LED used as the direct light, the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light, Is set respectively. While the effect is in progress, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to perform the first operation. In the case where one specified brightness value from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value which is the maximum brightness is set, the above-described floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set so as to have the set specified brightness value. The key information can be updated.

  Here, the luminance designation value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value that constitute the lamp pallet setting table will be briefly described. As the specified luminance value, one specified luminance value may be set in a range of 32 steps from a specified 0th (zero) luminance value which is the minimum luminance (unlit) to a specified 31st luminance value which is the maximum luminance. The normal pallet value and the special pallet value, which will be described later, are preset in correspondence with the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value. The player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303) to set the 31st luminance which becomes the maximum luminance from the first luminance designated value. One specified luminance value can be set up to the specified value.

  For example, a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 clockwise, and the 0th (zero) luminance designation at which the current luminance temporarily becomes the minimum luminance (extinguished). When the brightness is set to the first brightness specification value at which the brightness is next higher than the value, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear formula) from the first brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value which is the maximum brightness is set. Along with the tone curve or the spline curve tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be high, When the clockwise rotation operation is performed and the current luminance is set to the maximum luminance, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, from the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance to the first luminance designated value) Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is determined. Note that, in the present embodiment, a case where a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) can set the brightness while the effect is in progress is prepared in advance, and at this time, the player (or the clerk of the game hall) And the like) can operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to set a desired luminance. In addition, when a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) operates the rotary operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 while the effect is in progress, the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance By displaying a bar-shaped indicator indicating the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually show as an image how much the desired luminance of the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) is. I can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the fourteenth luminance designated value is set as an initial value (default).

  Normally, the pallet value is such that the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side which are directly irradiated as light is set as the above-mentioned gradation information. is there. As the normal palette value, one of 17 levels is selected from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value, in 5% steps, and one of the 17 levels is selected. In a range of 32 levels from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the designated value, a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation is determined by a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve). , Or a spline-like tone curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is a maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance specification in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance specification value to the 31st luminance specification value which is the above-mentioned luminance specification value. (100%) is a value of 20%, and the values (%) described in parentheses of the other pallet values are also 0th (zero) luminance designation values, which are the above-mentioned luminance designation values. Within the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance designation value, the value is for the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is previously selected as the normal pallet value for various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated directly as light. Of the various decorative boards provided on the game board side which are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and which are radiated as direct light, a specific decorative board (not shown) (LED which is dazzling to the player) is set on the pallet. The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the above-mentioned gradation information.

  In the special pallet value, the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light is set as the above-mentioned gradation information. The special pallet value, unlike the normal pallet value, exists in only one step and is one of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (0th) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the above-mentioned luminance designation value. The palette value corresponding to the luminance designation is set as the above-mentioned gradation information along a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve).

  As described above, if the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the luminance of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special pallet value instead of using the normal pallet value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light by setting the first luminance designated value at which the luminance is next to the 0th (zero) luminance designated value which is the minimum luminance (extinguished). The lowest possible luminance is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth luminance designated value when the normal pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%), and ranges from the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. Among them, the palette value corresponding to one luminance designation value is set along a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the LED used as the indirect light are determined based on the lamp pallet setting table including the specified luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light when the player (or a staff such as a clerk of a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 with respect to the luminance of the LED used as the direct light. While being set along the normal pallet value corresponding to the designated value, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of a game hall) controls the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. The value is set according to the special pallet value corresponding to the designated luminance value by the operation of step 303. Accordingly, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is dazzling, and reduces the brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, the LED is used as the direct light. The luminance of the LED used is set to the minimum luminance (that is, the first luminance specification value at the next higher luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance specification value at which the minimum luminance (turns off)), and in conjunction with this, Therefore, the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is also set to the minimum luminance (that is, the first luminance specification value at which the luminance is next to the 0th (zero) luminance specification value that is the minimum luminance (extinguished)). Also, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth luminance designated value when the normal pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  In addition, the programmer who designs the light emitting mode individually adjusts the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side for the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of the effect is set, and the flow of the effect by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side is set. , The normal pallet value is set to a small pallet value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker luminance can produce a more effective rendering effect), By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the entire light emitting mode can be changed very easily. In other words, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to change the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance. Even if one specified brightness value up to the specified brightness value is set, a small pallet value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one specified brightness value is set for a specific decorative board. Since the one designated luminance value and the corresponding maximum pallet value (100%) are set for the other decorative substrates, the relationship between the mutually set light emission modes (bright or dark) is set. ) Can be very easily adjusted without breaking the relationship.

  Furthermore, although the brightness of the indirect light from the light guide plate is more difficult to adjust than the direct light, the LED used as the indirect light has a special pallet value different from the normal pallet value (that is, independent of the normal pallet value). Can set the luminance. Thereby, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special pallet value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is usually controlled by the pallet value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, in a display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads out image data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and generates one screen generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC. The drawing data of one minute (for one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Thereby, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the VDP drawing capability of the peripheral control IC is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. I have. This makes it possible to prevent a delay in the processing time. However, although a so-called frame drop occurs, the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame by the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to an effect by an effect sound such as music or sound effect matched to various effects from various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter, referred to as “various speakers”).

  Subsequent to step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, in a sound data creation processing described later, a sound source of the peripheral control IC reads out sound data from the SDRAM based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the sound data to various speakers from a set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matched to various effects flow from various speakers.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to indicate the number of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC among the screen data arranged in chronological order constituting the screen generation schedule data. To update the pointer.

  In the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate the order of the emission data from the first emission data among the emission data arranged in time series that constitute the emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

  In the scheduler update process, among the sound command data for indicating sound data of effect sounds such as music and sound effects, sound data of annunciation sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, The pointer is updated in order to indicate the order of the sound command data from the first sound command data to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the order of the drive data from the first drive data is set as the output target. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources, such as motors and solenoids, arranged in time series and constituting the electric drive source schedule data includes a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the motor and the solenoid are driven in accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time its own process is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the drive data is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process so as to instruct the drive data that should originally be instructed.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described below, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the effect. A random number (for example, a random number used for an effect related to prefetching on hold) is updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the received command analysis processing, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes the various commands performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC reads out, from the peripheral control ROM, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like based on the analyzed various commands. (Extracted) Set in RAM of peripheral control IC.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one of the received command analysis processes. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light are based on the above-described lamp pallet setting table including the specified luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. And are set respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and executes a lamp pallet setting process. Then, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) operates the rendering operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to reach the maximum luminance from the above-described first luminance designated value. When one brightness specification value up to the 31st brightness specification value is set, the above-described gradation information may be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so as to have the set brightness specification value. I can do it.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt processing is, for example, a start-up winning command for instructing the start of a start-up winning effect, or a normal symbol. Ordinary symbol storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. The command, a symbol storage command output when the number of start pending changes, and a special winning opening 1 count display command output each time a game ball is accepted to the first special winning opening 2005 are analyzed. It recognizes which game state it is.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the reception command analysis processing, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Performs analysis of various commands. Various commands are classified into various commands related to Toku-zu 1 entrained production, various commands classified into Toku-zu 2 synchronized production, various commands classified into jackpot-related, various commands classified into power-on, and various commands. Various commands classified in the synchronizing production-related, various commands classified in the normal electric role production-related, various commands classified in the notification display, various commands classified in the status display, various commands classified in the test-related and There are various other commands. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process for a notice or the like based on the received command, and based on the lottery result, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, and the electrical The drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Thereby, an effect according to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

  The peripheral control ROM stores in advance a peripheral control unit 1511, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating the light emission mode of various LEDs, and sound for generating effect sounds such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen in a time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured such that light emission mode data that defines the light emission mode of various LEDs is arranged in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. The sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and an output channel number of a plurality of tracks of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. And a track number for designating which track incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 includes various commands classified into notification display, the display is set to an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read out (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the pre-registered priority in descending order of priority, and the abnormality is automatically changed to another abnormal notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is supposed to. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that another abnormality has occurred and one abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality and before resolving the abnormality. Can be.

  Subsequent to step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update processing, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition processing in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. This RCT acquisition information updating process updates the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and is the calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer is displayed in the peripheral control ROM out of the time-series screen data constituting the screen generation schedule data. From the peripheral control IC and output it to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

  When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads out image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. The rendering data for one frame (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing of step S1020, and among the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound instruction data indicated by the pointer is updated. It is read from (extracted from) the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. The output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit regular process is performed), the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is determined based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. Has been identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the sound volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and in the sound data output process of step S1018, the output set in the sound data creation process. The sound data is output from the channel to various speakers. Thereby, sounds such as music and sound effects matched to various effects are played from various speakers.

  Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value 0 to 0 is converted. The value is converted to a value of 1024 levels up to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set so that the volume increases from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the body frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4 are provided. Music and sound effects are played. As described above, music and sound effects flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass of the body frame 4 by the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. It has become.

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of a track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include sound effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume values are included.

  Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-mentioned substrate volume adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch is set as a sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment switch is turned. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the production sound is determined for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. For a fixed period (in this example, the peripheral control unit) to start or stop the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator). 0.5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern after the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, or 0.5 seconds after the display of the decorative pattern is confirmed after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit. ) Can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit ends the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or The fixed symbol display (first special symbol display, the second special symbol display) on the fixed symbol (first special symbol, the second special symbol) for a fixed period of time when starting or stopping (variable in this example 0.5 seconds after the change pattern command is received by the control unit and 0.5 seconds elapse after the start of the change display of the decorative pattern, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed. By operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the staging operation unit 300 except for the time until the time elapses, the resistance at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch in the sound data creation processing is reduced. Is converted into seven levels of board volume 0 to 6, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume control switch is further changed by the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. It has become.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of a channel to be output. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value which is the volume flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and from the body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the body frame 4, and the amplified effect sound is serialized. Output as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the sound is amplified up to the master volume value, so that the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side is obtained. The volume flowing from the top side speaker 464 and the body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the body frame 4 is set to be an allowable maximum volume. More specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. And a volume control switch set as a sub-volume value that is set as a sub-volume value that is adjusted by rotating the volume of the sub-volume. The speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the body frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4 are amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data, and the information sound is output. On the other hand, the sound data of the notification sound embedded in the track to be used and the volume of the notification sound embedded in the track to be used are adjusted. The maximum sound volume is synthesized without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch set as the volume value, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually set to the top center of the door frame 3 side. The speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the master volume value, which is the volume flowing from the body frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4, are amplified, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4, the failure of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine Briefly describing the control for emitting a notification sound to notify the hall clerk or the like of the misconduct with respect to No. 1, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute. The sound data of the incorporated track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track incorporating the notification sound, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound are synthesized. The volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually compared with the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame 4 of the door frame 3. Amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from the main body frame speaker 622 for sound, and outputs the audio data to the amplified effect sound and alarm sound and serialized. That is, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main frame 4. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the body frame 4, but the production sound is as described above. Progressing according to the generated sound generation schedule data.

  In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the bass frame speaker 622 of the bass frame 4 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). After the predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the effect sound that has progressed in accordance with the sound generation schedule data that has been compulsorily set to mute until now is equal to the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch. It is set again as a volume value (at this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub- Volume value), the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame frame So that the flow from mosquitoes 622.

  As described above, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the side of the door frame 3 and the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound of the main body frame 4, the occurrence of malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine When the notification sound flows to notify the clerk of the hall of the misconduct with respect to the machine 1, the volume of the production sound is muted, and the notification sound is transmitted to the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame. Although the sound from the main frame speaker 622 for low tone flows from the bass frame speaker 622, the silenced production sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data. 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame 4 When the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 for the low sound stops flowing, the announcement sound starts to flow. Rather than begin to flow again from the time, so that begins to flow again from where it started to alarm sound to flow proceeded according to the schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume control based on the rotation operation of the volume control switch, and the volume of the sound from mute to the maximum volume is controlled by the CPU of the peripheral control IC by the program. The sound source of the IC can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a staff such as a store clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music and sound effects from various speakers is reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction has occurred or when the player is performing wrongdoing, a notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent a staff such as a clerk of the game hall from becoming difficult to notice the malfunction or the illegal act of the player by the notification sound.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Copy and backup in the backup area for regular processing.

  Subsequent to step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value 0 in the stationary processing flag SP-FLG as completion of the peripheral control unit regular processing (step S1038), and returns to step S1004 again to detect the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value to 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1008 to step S1008. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing in steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit regular processing”.

  In the peripheral control unit steady processing, first, in step S1008, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the routine processing is started by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing is started. , And steps S1014,..., And step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, when the value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal for notifying that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is output from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process (to be described later) that is executed in response to an input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be accepted from the CPU of the peripheral control IC is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 as shown in FIG. 285 (step S1045). As described above, this flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (is a value of 1), that is, determines that the peripheral control unit regular processing is being executed, End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, determines that the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB. -Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050), and end this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady-state processing is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. When the process is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit is performing the regular processing. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is determined that the peripheral control unit routine is to be executed in step S1006 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit normal processing is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the power-on process (peripheral control unit regular process), the routine control unit sets the value 1 in the regular process flag SP-FLG in step S1008 to indicate that the peripheral control unit regular process is being executed. In step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit regular process) in FIG. 284, the value of the flag SP-FLG is set to 0 in the regular process in the peripheral control unit regular process. Is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, and the routine processing flag SP-FLG is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine. It is determined whether or not the value is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed. To have. In other words, this is a process in a case where the peripheral control unit normal processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, and the processing is aborted.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the next time the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. In a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of this time when the processing has failed is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady-state process. However, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state process that has failed as described above exists, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. Instead, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady processing has failed, the consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not guaranteed. It does not collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing is not performed, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

[Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 284 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the number of 1 ms timer interrupts executed STN is less than 33, as shown in FIG. 286 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution frequency STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed at about every 33.3 ms, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, and then the next peripheral control unit regular processing is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs first, and the second,..., And 32 th 1 ms timer interrupts are sequentially performed. Will occur.

  In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, that the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. If it is determined, this routine is terminated. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is set to the peripheral control unit V Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt is started. ing.

  On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1-ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33, it adds 1 to the 1-ms timer interrupt execution count STN by 1 (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the number of times of execution of the 1 ms timer interrupt STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the process of turning on the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 284. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing of this routine is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, a motor and solenoid driving process is performed (step S1104). In the motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer is designated by the pointer in the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and the solenoids arranged in time series which constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In accordance with the drive data to be driven, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid are driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and the solenoid drive process are executed. I do. Thereby, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided on various effect units provided on the game board 5) ) Is driven according to the electric drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors included in various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input, thereby obtaining history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, original information). Position history information, movable position history information, etc.), and set them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, original positions (standby positions) of various movable bodies provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5. The movable position is grasped by setting the position and acquiring the movable position.

  Subsequent to step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in effect operation unit 300 have been input, and thereby history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, rotation operation unit) The rotation (rotation direction) history information of the 302 and the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303 are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. From the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be obtained. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the volume of the effect sound output from the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 by operating the performance operation unit 301. And the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 can be adjusted.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up in a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the SDRAM. The data is copied and backed up in the provided 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area. In this embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM is set to a different area from the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. I have. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt will After the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt is performed. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the effect.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC transmits the main peripheral serial data to the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC by one byte (8 bits). ) Is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is allocated as the first byte, the mode is allocated as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte, and the total is obtained. Is calculated.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the one-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 287 (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer sets a period during which one-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  In the determination of step S1200, when the timer of the 1-byte reception period has not timed out, that is, the 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is determined. If it is determined that it is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented). Step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data is When the value is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially transmitted from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been removed.

  In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the reception counter SRXC has a value other than 3, that is, the mode in which the status is the first byte of the main serial data and the second byte is still the main serial data. If it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has not been sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, the status of the first byte of the main serial data, and then the second byte of the main serial data. When it is determined that a certain mode and the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, an initial value 0 is set in a reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). This calculation is performed by regarding the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, already taken out of the reception buffer in step S1202 as numerical values, and sums them (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facilities of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. It is in a file environment.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are regarded as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Has been determined. Accordingly, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main circumference serial data has changed to a non-regular main circumference serial data under the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Can be determined.

  In the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC matches the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 with the sum value calculated in step S1212. If it is determined that the status has been received, the status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), End this routine.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, the 1-byte (8-bit) of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the time period has elapsed since the information can be received, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202. If it is determined that the sum does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, the routine ends.

[Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing executed when a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2-microsecond timer as shown in FIG. 288 (step S1300), and determines whether the power failure notice signal is input. Is determined (step S1302). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that the power failure notice signal has not been input, the CPU ends the routine as it is.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC has not elapsed for 2 macroseconds, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If it is determined, the routine is terminated as it is, while if it is determined that the power failure notice signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing of this routine is started.

  In the determination of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notification signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing of this routine is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs the power saving processing. Performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motor and the solenoid provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. Thus, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a period during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate.

  Subsequent to step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least a period of 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control IC can receive the command being transmitted. It is designed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

  Subsequent to step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command backup process (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied and backed up to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

  Subsequent to step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S1312). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure notice signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notice signal is not input, or returns to step S1312 again after step S1314, and determines whether the power failure notice signal is input. Is determined. That is, it is determined infinitely whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power failure notice signal has not been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC cannot output the clear signal to the external WDT, While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that the power failure notice signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314. CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 284 is started again.

  As described above, if the input of the power failure notification signal continues in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. So that they do n’t. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure notification signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. Has become. Thus, even if the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting and returning.

[Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of a control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly, the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 289 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for the various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 289, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting port sensor 3052. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter, and this is obtained from the RAM. A first opening opening passage process such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S232). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is replaced with the random number. A second opening opening passage process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S235). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S235A) is executed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode suggesting “15R big hit”, the 15R A process of controlling opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 according to the big hit gaming state is executed. Also, when the mode suggesting "5R big hit" is executed, the process of opening and closing the first big winning opening 2005 is executed according to the 5R big hit gaming state, and the mode suggesting "2R big hit" is obtained. Then, a process of controlling the opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 according to the 2R big hit game state is executed.

  In the big hit control process (step S235A), after performing the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005, the time reduction flag and the time reduction counter are set. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the game is in the time-saving state, and the 2R jackpot game based on the fact that the result of the lottery process when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped during the time-saving state indicates "2R jackpot" Set when ending the state, when ending the 5R jackpot gaming state based on the mode indicating "5R jackpot", or when ending the 15R jackpot gaming state during the time reduction state and the non-time saving state. . Then, when the time saving flag becomes the next big hit or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes “0”, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Reset by processing.

  The time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the number of times the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner as the number of times the time reduction state is continued, and controls the time reduction state after the end of the big hit game state. In this case, when the big hitting game state ends, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. Then, the time saving counter is counted down every time the special symbol change display is executed until the counter value becomes “0”, but the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes “0”. In some cases, the counter is reset in a first special symbol stop process shown in FIG.

  If the jackpot execution flag is not set, the condition is that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is “0”. (Step S237), a first special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S238), and the second special symbol process stored in the second special symbol holding storage area is performed. On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special symbol including a lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process is executed (Step S239). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting port passage processing (step S232).

  Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3052 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 290. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S241.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains, from the main control built-in RAM, a counter value by a first special reserved number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) “4” (step S242). In the process of step S242, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to S243 are performed to newly set the variable display control of the first special symbol to the suspended state. The process of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To store.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the first special symbol change display based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S241. Is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing effect pre-judgment processing for judging pre-judgment information such as the type of the fluctuation pattern) before starting the fluctuation display according to the start winning (step S245), the processing ends.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S242 that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held.

  Further, when the number of the first reserved storages changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number display in the function display unit 1400 is stored in the first reserved storage. In addition to updating the command to correspond to the number of commands, a command (first reserved number designating command 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storing command 0 to 0) for designating the first reserved number in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). 4)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Note that the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 storage commands 0 to 4). It has become.

  FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect pre-judgment process (step S245). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-judgment process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) and the random numbers obtained in step S241, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if a big hit, a type of the big hit, and if not, a reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600. The game production mode type is specified (step S261).

  Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not a big hit, if a big hit, a type of a big hit, and if no big hit, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or Game production mode), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of storages to be held (the value of the number-of-holds counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process related to the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first opening opening process, the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (the (The value of one special reserved number counter) and the first special symbol pre-judgment command corresponding to the value (step S262).

  Then, the preliminary control command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the above-described peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120), and is stored in correspondence with the first start port 2002 in which the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of reserved memories, whether the display result of the special symbol change display based on the generated starting winning is a big hit or not, if a big hit is made, a type of the big hit, and if the big hit is not made, the effect display device 1600 is used. The peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before executing the reach effect as the game effect to be executed or the preliminary determination information such as the type of the game effect to be executed, etc. before starting the variable display according to the starting winning. IC can be grasped.

  When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first hold storage area for storing advance determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

  The first reserved storage area has 1-4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storages, and the peripheral control IC stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command in the first (earliest) storage. Store in order from the area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area When the first variation pattern command notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance variation stored in the first storage area of the first hold storage area according to the received first variation pattern command is stored. The determination information is discarded, and the preliminary determination information stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Shift the stored pre-determination information). Thereby, the preliminary determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to specify the order in which the suspension of the variable display start has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest preliminary determination information.

  When the variable display control is set to the suspended state in this way, despite the fact that the variable display control is maintained in a non-executed state (reserved state), the big hit expectation degree of the variable display control (pseudo winning probability) ) Can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display according to the hold exhaustion. .

  FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting port passage processing (step S234).

  Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2401 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 292. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S251.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reserved stored number is the maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is determined (step S252). In the process of step S252, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to S253 are executed in order to newly set the variable display control of the second special symbol to the suspended state. The processing of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as a process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the processing of step S252 that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held.

  In addition, when the second reserved storage number changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reserved storage. In addition, the command is updated to correspond to the number, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the command (second reserved number designation command 0-1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0) 1)) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 storage commands 0 to 1). It has become.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the upper limit of the first pending storage number based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002 is set to “4”, while the gaming ball is set to the second starting port 2004. The upper limit of the number of second reserved storages based on the entry of the ball is "1". The second starting port 2004 allows a large number of game balls to enter during the time saving state, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than that in the normal state. Even if the upper limit is set to “1”, the period in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not performed continues for a long time, or the period in which the second reserved storage number is the upper limit continues for a long time so that the second starting port 2004 Even if a game ball enters, it is suppressed that the player is not disadvantaged to a chance to win a jackpot lottery.

  FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S238). The first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, Only the first special symbol processing executed in step S238 of the special symbol processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. A first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which a process of determining the mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like is performed (step S282)
4. First special symbol variation process that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S283).
5. The state of the first special symbol when the variation control is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so as to be performed (step S284)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed in the main control-side power-on process (see FIG. 274).

  FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 294, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S301. In the process of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the held state based on the counter value of the first special held number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is the variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, the process proceeds to step S302 to store the variable display control in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is read out from the RAM. . Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stored. The random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the special symbol change display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, if a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a winning start occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. Thus, the order in which the variable display control of the first special symbol is suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the variable display control is released from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension) in order. become.

  Then, thereafter, as a process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the big hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so as to proceed to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is ended.

  FIG. 295 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S305).

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a hit determination table shown in FIG. 185 (A) and a special random number (when the first special symbol normal process is being executed, the first special random number read out in step S302, If the second special symbol normal process is being executed, the second special symbol normal process is compared with the second special symbol normal process (step S311).

  The hit determination table shown in FIG. 296 (A) is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, three types of first special random numbers that match the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit has been won, and are different from the big hit determination value. Each of the first special random numbers is matched so that the first special random number matches the big hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won, and the 315 types of first special random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that the loss has occurred. It is associated (big hit probability; 1/319, small hit probability: 3/319). In this example, in the second special symbol process process, in the hit determination table referred to be compared with the second special random number, a big hit determination value indicating that one kind of second special random number has won a big hit. Loss determination indicating that 144 kinds of second special random numbers that match and are different from the big hit determination value indicate that the small hit has been won, and that 174 kinds of second special random numbers are the above loss. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values (big hit probability: 1/1319, small hit probability: 144/319). That is, in the determination table referred to be compared with the second special random number, compared to the hit determination table referred to be compared with the first special random number, the probability of being determined to be a small hit is configured to be higher. In the case where the variable display of the second special symbol based on the start winning prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed, compared to the case where the variable display of the first special symbol based on the start winning prize to the first starting port 2002 is executed. Is more advantageous to the player.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process). As a result of the comparison with the random number, if it is determined that the hit is a big hit (step S312), a big hit flag indicating that the change is a big hit is set (step S313), and the hit judging process is ended.

  Also, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), If it is determined that the small hit has occurred (step S314), a small hit flag indicating that the variation has won the small hit is set (step S315), and the hit determination processing ends.

  On the other hand, if neither the big hit nor the small hit has been won, that is, if it is determined that a loss has occurred, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is in the time reduction state, and is used when the game state is in the non-time reduction state. A state determination table. In the reach determination table in the time reduction state, the reach is determined so that one type of reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating that reach is possible, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value that indicates that reach is not possible. Random numbers are associated with each other.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the non-hours reduction state, the reach determination value indicating that the reach numbers of five types including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time reduction state reaches the reach determination value, The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that no reach is made. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach determination value indicating the reach in the non-time reduction state is set higher than in the time reduction state.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316). The reach flag indicating the reach is set, and the process ends (step S318).

  FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 297, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The determination of the lottery result is made by determining whether the big hit flag is set (step S321) or whether the small hit flag is set (step S324).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing with the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 296 (B). The type of the big hit is determined according to the above, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is determined (step S322).

In particular,
1. After opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or closing when the first big winning opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005. By repeating the opening / closing pattern to be repeated 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the first big winning opening 2005, and a special symbol (first special) is provided after the big hit game state ends. Until the variable display of the symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened than usual and the high probability time reduction state in which the lottery of the special lottery result is performed with a higher probability than usual. 1. 15R probable big hit to control The first large winning opening 2005 is closed after a long time opening (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large winning opening sensor 2402 detects that ten game balls have been won in the first large winning opening 2005. By repeating the opening and closing pattern five times (5 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 5R big hit game state in which the game ball can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy), and a special symbol (first special symbol) is provided after the big hit game state is completed. , The second special symbol) is executed 77 times, and the execution period of the variable display is shortened more than usual, and a 5R time-saving big hit,
3. The first large winning opening 2005 is closed after a long time opening (for example, 29 seconds) or when the first large winning opening sensor 2402 detects that ten game balls have been won in the first large winning opening 2005. By repeating the opening and closing pattern twice (two rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 2R big hit game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the first big winning opening 2005, and is controlled to a time saving state before the start of the 2R big hit game state. If the big hit game state ends, the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is changed to the time-saving state to be ended if the big hit is not reached until the change display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 77 times. If the non-time saving state is controlled before the start of the jackpot gaming state, the 2R jackpot is controlled to the normal state after the end of the jackpot gaming state,
Any of the three types of jackpots is determined.

In addition, the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the second special symbol (stop symbol of the second special symbol)
In particular,
1. The second large winning opening 2006 is closed for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second large winning opening sensor 2601 detects that ten game balls have been won in the second large winning opening 2006. By repeating the opening / closing pattern to be repeated 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 15R jackpot game state in which the ball can enter (easily) the second big winning opening 2006, and a special symbol (first special) is provided after the jackpot game state is completed. Until the variable display of the symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 77 times, the execution period of the variable display is shortened than usual and the high probability time reduction state in which the lottery of the special lottery result is performed with a higher probability than usual. 1. 15R probable big hit to control The second large winning opening 2006 is closed after a long time opening (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second large winning opening sensor 2601 detects that ten game balls have been won in the second large winning opening 2006. By repeating the opening and closing pattern five times (five rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 5R big hit game state in which the ball can enter (easily) the second big winning opening 2006, and a special symbol (first special symbol) is provided after the big hit game state ends. , The second special symbol) is executed 77 times, and the execution period of the variable display is shortened more than usual, and a 5R time-saving big hit,
3. The second large winning opening 2006 is closed after a long time opening (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second large winning opening sensor 2601 detects that ten game balls have won the second large winning opening 2006. By repeating the opening and closing pattern twice (two rounds), the game ball is controlled to a 2R big hit game state in which the ball can enter (easily) the second big winning opening 2006, and is controlled to a time-saving state before the start of the 2R big hit game state. If the big hit game state ends, the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is changed to the time-saving state to be ended if the big hit is not reached until the change display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 77 times. If the non-time saving state is controlled before the start of the jackpot gaming state, the 2R jackpot is controlled to the normal state after the end of the jackpot gaming state,
Any of the three types of jackpots is determined.

  In addition, the big hit symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number is divided into eight judgment values in the case of a 15R probability variable big hit, and 100 judgment values in the case of a 5R short time big hit. In the case of, 92 determination values are allocated. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, a 15R big hit is obtained with a probability of 4%, a 5R big hit with a 50% probability, and a 2R big hit with a 46% probability. Similarly, the big hit symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number is such that 92 judgment values are sorted in the case of a 15R probability change big hit, and 100 judgment values are sorted in the case of a 5R time change big hit. In the case of a big hit, eight judgment values are sorted. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, a 15R probability variable hit is obtained with a probability of 46%, a 5R big hit with a 50% probability, and a 2R big hit with a 4% probability. . As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the probability of being determined to be a 15R probability variable big hit is higher in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number than in the big hit symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start winning prize to the second starting port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the winning prize to the first starting port 2002, This is in an advantageous state for the player.

  When the type of the big hit is determined, a stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big hit is determined as a mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is determined to be a 2R jackpot, it is determined to be a 2R jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol, when it is determined to be 5R jackpot, it is determined to be a 5R jackpot symbol as a jackpot symbol, and when it is determined to be 15R jackpot, it is a jackpot. The 15R big hit symbol is determined as the symbol.

  When the big hit flag is not set in step S131 and the small hit flag is set (step S324), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 reads out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process. The type of the small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number with the small hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 296 (C), and when the variation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is stopped. (The stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

In particular,
1. The opening and closing pattern for closing and closing the second special winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is executed twice to control the small hitting game state in which the gaming ball can enter (easily) the second special winning opening 2006. First small hit 2. The opening and closing pattern of closing and opening the second special winning opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) is executed nine times to control the small hitting game state in which the gaming ball can enter (easily) the second special winning opening 2006. One of the two types of small hits of the second small hit is determined to be one of the big hits.

  In the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 200 determination values are allocated when the first small hit is determined. That is, if a lottery result of a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, the first small hit is achieved with a probability of 100%, and the second small hit is not won. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table, which is compared with the second symbol random number, 20 determination values are sorted when the first small hit occurs, and 180 determination values are sorted when the second small hit occurs. ing. That is, when the lottery result of the small hit is obtained by the lottery based on the second special random number, the first small hit is obtained with a probability of 10%, and the second small hit is obtained with a probability of 90%.

  When the type of the small hit is determined, a stop symbol corresponding to the type of the small hit is determined as a mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when it is determined to be the first small hit, it is determined to be the first small hit symbol as the small hit symbol, and when it is determined to be the second small hit, it is determined to be the second small hit symbol as the small hit symbol. .

  If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the symbol to be a loss symbol (step S327). Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the lottery result (any of the type of the big hit, the small hit, the out of reach, and the out of place) as the process of step S328. (Which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is set to the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result (step S328). ). Then, thereafter, as the process of step S329, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282), the process ends.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decoration patterns are variably displayed, and the left decoration pattern → the right decoration pattern → middle). The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative symbols (note that the decorative symbols on the left, the middle, and the right may be synchronously displayed in the same symbol in a variable manner and may be stopped and displayed simultaneously). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether a small hit or a 2R big hit is specified from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 stops changing. Is determined to be a small hit symbol ("Final Battle"), and if a 5R HQ jackpot is specified, the 5R HQ jackpot symbol (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same among the symbols "0" to "9") If the combination is determined to be an even-numbered design and the 15R certain-variable big hit is specified, the 15R certain-variable big-hit design (the left, middle, and right decorative symbols will be the same odd-numbered design from "0" to "9") Combination). In addition, when the out-of-reach is specified, the out-of-reach design accompanied by the reach (a combination of the same design in which the left and right decorative designs are “0” to “9” and different middle decorative designs; reach loss) If the outlier is specified and the outlier is specified, it is determined as an outlier with no reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different from among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols) and fluctuates. When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) can be controlled to the time-saving state until the fluctuation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed up to 77 times after the big hit game state. The time saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of big hits after the shift control is performed. Specifically, after the big hit gaming state, the time saving state is controlled, and if a predetermined number of (for example, two) big hits thereafter occur, the time saving state is not controlled after the end of the predetermined number of the big hit gaming states. Alternatively, control may be performed in a normal state. Even when the number of occurrences of the big hit is less than the predetermined number, the non-time saving state may be controlled during the big hit gaming state, and the control of the time saving state may be performed again after the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 298, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag If it has been done (step S341), a large hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the type of big hit determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag is set. Is set (step S343), a small hit variation pattern table (not shown) corresponding to the small hit type determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) If the selection is made (step S346), and neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, if a normal loss (a loss in which no reach effect is performed) is obtained, a fluctuation pattern table at the time of the loss (not shown) Is selected (step S347).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S348). The variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S349). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S350). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the determined fluctuation time.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is included in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table. The variable random numbers are stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. Is obtained from the table, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  In the variation pattern table at the time of reach of the present example, it is set so as to determine the type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. . For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the jackpot game state is increased.

  Further, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as a process of step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time-saving counter for setting the number of continuations of the time-saving state is “0”. I do. If the counter value is not "0", the time-saving counter is counted down (step S352), and it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short-time counter is "0" (step S353). . Then, as a result, if the counter value is "0", a time-saving end flag indicating that the control of the time-saving state (time-saving control) is to be ended is set (step S354).

  If it is determined in step S351 that the counter value of the time-saving counter is “0”, and if it is determined in step S353 that the counter is not “0”, Then, control goes to the process of step S355. Then, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so as to proceed to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is ended.

  In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second in the time saving state is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), In the non-time saving state, the special symbol variation pattern is set in a manner that the special symbol variation time information set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). . That is, in the variation pattern at the time of the off-time selected in the time reduction state, as compared with the variation pattern at the time of the off-time selected in the non-time-saving state, the time required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol is extremely short, The fluctuation time information of the special symbol is set.

  FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol change process (step S283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol change process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 299, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S371. In the processing of (1), the fluctuation timer for setting the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery processing for the fluctuation pattern (step S282) is decremented by one. Then, when the variable time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop process (step S284), this process is ended.

  FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 300, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first executes step S381. As the processing of the above, while performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation and display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S382).

  Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). Thus, when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 77 times), the time-saving control (the control of the time-saving state) is ended and the non-time-saving control is completed. (Control in the normal state) is started.

  When the big hit flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating to start the big hit game (step S387), The standby time until the start (time for displaying the start of the big hit game or the like) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of the big hit to a big hit number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot number counter is decremented by one each time a round is executed in a jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot number counter becomes “0”, it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified round number. Control to end the big hit game. Specifically, in the big hit control processing described later, the big win opening processing (step S401) and the big win opening processing (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the big hit counter reaches “0”, and the big winning is achieved. When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S402), the big hit counter is decremented by 1 and becomes “0”. Then, the process goes to the special winning opening process (step S403) to end the big hit game. Execute the control to make it.

  Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S387, a big hit start command (15R certain variable big hit start command, 5R short time big hit start command, 2R big hit start command) according to the type of big hit (15R certain big hit, 5R short hit big hit, 2R big hit) is set. Thereby, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of the jackpot designated by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Similarly, in the second special symbol processing process of the second special symbol stop processing, a big hit start command (15R certain variable big hit start command, 5R short hit big hit) corresponding to the type of big hit (15R certain big hit, 5R short hit big hit, 2R big hit) A start command and a 2R big hit start command) are set.

  The big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game is being executed is, when the big hit game is finished, specifically, in the big hit control processing (step S235A) after the big win opening process (step S403). The opening / closing control of the first special winning opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the first special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when 10 game balls have won the first special winning opening 2005). The opening / closing pattern to be closed when detected by the first special winning opening sensor 2402 is repeated twice, five times, or fifteen times) and the opening and closing control of the second special winning opening 2006 (for example, the first special winning opening 2005 Opening / closing to be closed after a long time opening (for example, 29 seconds) or when the second big winning opening sensor 2601 detects that 10 game balls have won in the first big winning opening 2005. Turn twice, five times, or is reset to repeat 15 times the opening and closing control) when completed (all round executable jackpot gaming). The big hit execution flag is reset so that the big hit control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the first of the function display unit 1400 A state in which the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 can be executed.

  When the big hit flag is not set (step S386) and the small hit flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. A small hit start command is set (step S391), and a standby time until the start of the small hit game (a time for displaying an indication to start the small hit game) is set in the interval timer (step S392). Then, a small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S393). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of the small hit. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command) corresponding to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit) is set. Thereby, the effect of the small hit game corresponding to the type of the small hit specified by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Likewise, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, first small hit command, 2 small hit start command).

  When the small hitting game is completed, the small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting game is being executed, specifically, during the small hitting control processing (step S236A) to be described later (step S411). ), The opening / closing control of the second winning opening 2006 according to the type of the small hit (for example, the opening / closing control of repeating the opening / closing pattern of closing the second winning opening 2006 for a short time (eg, 80 ms) and then closing it twice or nine times) Reset when exiting. The small hit execution flag is reset so that the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). The first special symbol display on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol on the function display unit 1400 on the second special symbol display can be displayed.

  When the small hit flag is not set, that is, when a loss occurs, a standby time (a time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol change display is started is set in the interval timer. (Step S394), and proceeds to step S395.

  When the processes of steps S386 to S394 are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value. (Step S395), this process ends.

  FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The peripheral control board informs the player of the transition to the big hit game state based on the change of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) at the time of the change display stop to the big hit symbol. Preliminary opening process of opening a special winning opening to wait until performed by 1510 or to start the next round (step S401)
2. Based on the fact that the special symbol change display stop mode is a big hit symbol, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled to be in an open state, or the next round is started. After the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is controlled to be in an open state, after the first special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or 10 game balls enter the first special winning opening 2005. When the first prize opening sensor 2402 detects that a prize has been won, or after the second prize opening 2006 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or 10 game balls are present in the second prize opening 2006 Processing during opening of the special winning opening that is closed when the winning is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2601 (step S402).
3. The big win opening process after waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the player of the end of the big hit game state when all rounds are completed (step S403).

  The big hit process flag is operated to indicate that the big win opening processing (step S401) should be performed in the processing of step S42. Also, in the above-mentioned special winning opening opening process (step S402), at the start of the round for controlling the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 to the open state, a big hit round start command according to the number of rounds is issued. When a round in which the first winning port 2005 or the second winning port 2006 is controlled to be closed ends, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the jackpot game according to the number of rounds designated by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. This is executed by the device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

[Inner lens]
In the conventional pachinko machine 1, a mounting surface of a substrate on which electronic components such as LEDs are mounted is provided so as to face the player, and light emission decoration is performed. The mounting surface of the substrate on which electronic components such as LEDs are mounted is covered with a transparent decorative body, and the LED or the like mounted on the substrate emits light in various colors to make the decorative body colored, The light emission of an LED or the like is visually recognized via the.

  The substrate of the conventional pachinko machine 1 is solidly coated with a green resist, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, the outline on which the electronic components are arranged, and the like are further superimposed on the resist. Are printed in close proximity to electronic components such as LEDs by white or black silk. The information formed on these substrates is hard to be visually recognized by the player when the LED emits light, and is visible to the player when the LED is turned off.

  In addition, in recent pachinko machines 1, a unified design is applied to the whole, and images and the like of the effect display device 1600 are fused to express the world view of characters and animations. Design is a very important factor. However, in the conventional pachinko machine 1, information unrelated to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, is written when the LED is turned off. When viewed visually, there is a possibility that the world view of the pachinko machine 1 is collapsed, the design is reduced, and the gaming interest is reduced.

  In order to solve such a problem, the LED is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) of the board, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, the external line on which the electronic component is arranged, and the like are arranged on the back surface of the board. The information is printed in white or black silk to make the information difficult to see from the player side, or a predetermined color (white in this example, green or After applying a paint (resist or silk, etc., other colors such as black and purple), the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the electronic parts are arranged according to the unevenness and the reflection state of light. In order to make it possible to recognize the information such as the outline, the countermeasures are taken such that the same color is applied twice except for the information portion so as to make the information difficult for the player to see.

  However, when silkscreen printing of information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic components are arranged is performed on the back surface different from the mounting surface of the LED, The LED or the like must be specified by alternately comparing the front surface and the back surface of the substrate, and the workability is deteriorated, and the LED and the information related to the LED are not provided on the same surface. And the information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component are difficult to understand. There is a drawback in that a mistake of specifying by mistake occurs. When information such as the number of pins of a connector, the direction of an IC, a component number, a pin number, and an outline on which an electronic component is arranged is made visually recognizable by unevenness or the state of light reflection, a portion indicating such information is provided. Since the (area) and the other part (area) are of the same color, it is difficult to identify them, and there is a disadvantage that workability during maintenance and inspection is reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the external shape on which the electronic components are arranged are suppressed while suppressing the reduction in workability during maintenance and inspection. This makes it possible to suppress information that is unrelated to the game such as a line from being visually recognized by the player. The details will be described below. As information irrelevant to the game written on the board, any one of the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, and the like is displayed on the surface of the board (LED The following invention is applicable as long as it is described in (Mounting surface).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the inner lens is disposed between the decorative body covering the front of the LED and the substrate on which the LED is mounted. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, the front surface (front surface) of the handle decoration board 184 provided on the handle unit 180 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is covered with a transparent handle cover 185. A transparent inner lens 185a is disposed between the upper decorative plate 184 and the handle decorative substrate 184, and as shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. Is covered with a dish upper left decorative body 271, and a transparent dish upper left inner lens 272 is arranged between the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper left decorative board 273, and is provided in the dish upper right decorative unit 275. The front surface (front surface) of the dish upper right decorative board 278 on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with a dish upper right decorative body 276. A transparent dish upper right inner lens 277 is arranged between the dish upper right decorative body 276 and the dish upper right decoration board 278, and is provided in the dish left lower decoration unit 280 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon. The front surface (surface) is covered with a lower left dish decoration 281, and a transparent lower left inner lens 282 is arranged between the lower left decoration 281 and the lower left decoration board 283, and provided in the lower right decoration unit 285. The front (front surface) of the lower right decorative plate 288 on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with a lower right decorative plate 286, and between the lower right decorative plate 286 and the lower right decorative plate 288. , A transparent lower right inner lens 287 is disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, the upper surface (front surface) of the dish center upper decorative board 314 provided in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is located at the center of the plate. A transparent dish center inner lens 313 is provided between the dish upper decoration body 312a and the dish center decoration board 314, and is provided on the effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300. The upper surface (front surface) of the dish center lower decorative board 316 provided with the plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is covered with the dish center lower decor body 312b. An inner lens 315 below the center of the transparent plate is provided therebetween, and a plurality of LEDs are provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. The upper surface (front surface) of the mounted outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 is covered with an outer peripheral button cover 380, and a transparent outer peripheral decoration inner lens 379 is provided between the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the front surface (front surface) of the door frame left side decorative board 402 provided in the door frame left side unit 400 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is a transparent door frame left side decorative body 404. A transparent left side inner lens 403 is disposed between the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 and provided in the door frame right side unit 410 as shown in FIG. The front side (front surface) of the decorative portion decorative board 413 in the side window on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with a transparent door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame right side decorative body 419 and the inside of the side window. A transparent right side inner lens 415 is disposed between the decorative unit decorative board 413 and the door frame top center unit provided with the door frame top unit 450 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs. The front surface (front surface) of the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is covered with a transparent door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative body. A transparent top center inner lens 458, a top left inner lens 459, and a top right inner lens 460 are disposed between the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. I have.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 165 and 166, the front surface of the lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 provided in the lower lower middle decorative body unit 3320 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is formed by the lower lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. 193. A transparent inner lens (diffusion lens) 3321 is disposed between the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and the lower back middle decoration substrate 3322, and as shown in FIG. 193 and FIG. The front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 provided in the decorative body unit 3710 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon is covered with a front cover 3711, and between the front cover 3711 and the lower back middle first decorative board 3322. A transparent front left decorative body 3713 of a transparent flat plate functioning as an inner lens is provided, and is provided in a front right decorative body unit 3810 as shown in FIGS. The front surface of the back front right decorative board 3814 on which the plurality of LEDs are mounted is covered with a front cover 3811, and a transparent functioning as an inner lens between the front cover 3811 and the back front right decorative board 3814. A flat back right decorative body 3813 is arranged.

  The inner lens has a three-dimensionally formed surface with irregularities so as to make the refractive index non-uniform or diffuse light from the LED irregularly, and is provided at a predetermined interval behind the decorative body. (Provided apart from the decorative body). Then, when visualizing information irrelevant to the game such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, which is written on the mounting surface of the board, via the inner lens, Can be visually recognized in a state in which such information is distorted (out of focus, distorted to the extent that it cannot be recognized as characters or information) due to a three-dimensionally formed surface. Thereby, information irrelevant to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, which is written on the mounting surface of the board, is recognized as information by the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing, thereby suppressing a decrease in designability, and a decrease in gaming interest. The inner lens is not limited to one having a three-dimensional uneven surface, but instead or in addition to this, the thickness of the inner lens is made non-uniform so that the refractive index becomes non-uniform, May be diffused irregularly. In this case as well, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, the outer shape line on which the electronic component is arranged, and the like, which are visually recognized via the inner lens, are unrelated to the game. The information is visually recognized in a distorted state (out of focus).

  The inner lens of this example is formed of a colorless and transparent resin, and transmits the light of the LED. The material is not limited to a colorless and transparent material as long as it is formed of a light-transmitting material (a resin or the like), and may be a colored and transparent material colored so as to be transparent. In addition, the surface of the inner lens of this example is three-dimensionally formed by forming a plurality of small surfaces having different angles, such as diamond cuts. Due to the non-uniformity of the ratio, it has an appearance that it is cloudy in some places.

  Further, the decorative bodies of this example (the handle cover 185, the upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower left decorative body 281, the lower right decorative body 286, the upper central decorative body 312a, and the lower central decorative body 312b) , The outer peripheral button cover 380, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, the door frame top decorative body 453, the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the front cover 3711, and the front cover 3811) are formed of transparent members. It has a relatively smooth surface. Note that, in addition to the inner lens, the front and back surfaces of the decorative body may be three-dimensionally formed in an uneven shape. Thus, it is possible to reliably suppress the information such as the component number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged from being visually recognized by the player. Further, in this case, the degree of unevenness on the surface of the decorative body arranged on the side closer to the player may be made weaker than the degree of unevenness on the surface of the inner lens. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the transparency of the decorative body disposed on the side close to the player from being reduced, and to visually recognize the inner lens having a reduced transparency and cloudy through the decorative body. It becomes possible to realize a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since white is adopted as the resist of the substrate on which the LED is mounted, it is provided between the mounting surface of the substrate and the decorative body, so that it becomes cloudy. The inner lens having an appearance is adapted to the white resist and does not give a feeling of strangeness. That is, the design of the pachinko machine 1 is not reduced.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, white color is adopted as a resist on the surface of the substrate on which the LED is mounted, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the electronic components are arranged on the LED mounting surface. Information such as outlines to be printed is printed in yellow silk. Here, in general, yellow and white have the closest reflectance and lightness compared to other colors, and have little visual difference (contrast). In comparison, even when the board is directly visually recognized, it is difficult to identify information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component. In addition, white may be adopted as a resist only on the LED mounting surface (front surface), and various information may be printed with yellow silk. On the LED non-mounting surface (rear surface), a color other than white (for example, green) is used as a resist. Or black) or various types of information may be printed with silk of a color other than yellow (for example, white or black).

  On the other hand, at the time of maintenance and inspection, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component are written in a color different from the color of the resist on the board. In addition to being able to easily identify and understand the contents of this information, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outer shape line on which the electronic component is arranged corresponds. Therefore, the correspondence between the LED and the information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, and the like can be clarified. .

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an IC, a resistor, a capacitor, a connector, and the like are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface (back surface). That is, only the LEDs are mounted on the surface (LED mounting surface) of the substrate. With this, the LED is mounted so that the emitted light is directed toward the player, and the IC, which is easily recognized by the player due to its color, shape, size, etc. By mounting them on the back side of the board which is hard to be visually recognized by a player without mounting resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc., the presence of ICs, resistors, capacitors, connectors, etc. can be made less noticeable. When a connector or the like formed in the same white color as the resist on the LED mounting surface is used, it may be mounted on the LED mounting surface.

  Further, the degree of unevenness of the surface of the inner lens may be made different depending on the distance between the inner lens and the substrate. Specifically, when the distance between the inner lens and the substrate is short (for example, less than 1 cm), the degree of solid formation of the inner lens is increased, and when the distance between the inner lens and the substrate is long (for example, 1 cm or more). May reduce the degree of three-dimensional formation of the inner lens. This makes it possible to perform optimal obscuring according to the distance from the board, and through the inner lens, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the external shape on which the electronic components are arranged on the mounting surface of the board. Lines and the like can be suppressed from being visually recognized, information that is not related to the game can be suppressed from being recognized by the player as information, and the world view of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being collapsed, and the design quality can be reduced. Deterrence can prevent a decrease in gaming interest. In addition, as a method of changing the degree of three-dimensional formation, the degree of three-dimensional formation is strengthened by making the unevenness of the substrate surface deep, the degree of three-dimensional formation is reduced by making the unevenness of the substrate surface shallow, Increasing the degree of concavity and convexity by reducing the shaping (surfaces with different angles), and weakening the degree of concavity and convexity by increasing the shaping (surfaces with different angles) of the substrate surface.

  In addition, the inner lens may be any one that makes information written on the substrate difficult to see, and is not limited to one that makes all information written on the board difficult to see. Some of the information may be visible to the extent that it is recognizable as information (to the extent that it can be recognized as lines or characters), or some or all of the information written on the substrate Can be recognized, but it is said that it is difficult to recognize the written information as information (to the extent that lines and characters can be visually recognized in an unclear state). It may be difficult to recognize, or the fact that some information is written on all or a part of the information written on the substrate is difficult to recognize (to the extent that lines and characters cannot be viewed at all). May be .

  Further, in the above-described example, a resin molded member whose surface is three-dimensionally formed in an uneven shape is used as the inner lens, but all or all of the information written on the substrate is replaced with or in addition to the resin molded member. A light-transmitting sheet may be used which makes part of the information unclear or makes it difficult to recognize that some or all of the information written on the substrate has some information. For example, a thin circular shape is provided between an LED board 5070 provided in the light emitting effect unit 5000 shown in FIG. 255 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs, and a decorative body 5040 covering the surface of the LED board 5070. A sheet similar to the diffusion sheet 5050 formed by processing from a transparent resin plate may be used, or a sheet having a reduced transparency, such as a frosted glass-like translucent sheet or a crystal-like translucent sheet. May be used. In this case, the space between the mounting surface of the board on which the LED is mounted and the decorative body can be narrowed as compared with the case of using a three-dimensionally formed member, so that the degree of freedom in design is increased.

  Further, in the above-described example, the decorative body and the inner lens are separately provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative body itself may be used as the inner lens. This makes it possible to suppress the design of the pachinko machine 1 at a low cost.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a light emitting member such as an LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is provided except when a game effect is not performed, such as during a period in which the demonstration is performed by the effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state. Among them, a plurality of light-emitting members (LEDs provided on the door frame 3 in this example, the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 in this example) are provided at positions that are always visible to the player. , An LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, an LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3422 of the back upper effect unit 3400, a back bottom right LED mounted on the lower right back decoration board 3253 of the rendering unit 3250, mounted on the lower back left decoration board 3203 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200 ED, a proportion which is lit for each, etc.), is set to be higher than the ratio that is turned off. This makes it possible to lengthen the period during which the light is turned on compared to the period during which the light is turned off. , Information irrelevant to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, etc., can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the player. Further, since the information irrelevant to the game can be made hard to be visually recognized by the player, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being collapsed, and the deterioration of the design can be suppressed. become.

[Covering of board mounted on movable decoration]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear upper and lower rotating decorative body 3440, the rear rear left decorative body 3521, and the rear rear right decorative body 3621 are displayed behind the effect display device 1600. The information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outer shape line on which the electronic component is arranged is also visually recognized by the player on the board provided with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I try to make it difficult. The details will be described below.

  As described above, the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are normally difficult for the player to visually recognize (when not driven). It is housed at a position (standby position), and moves to a position (drive position) visible to a player in front of the effect display device 1600 during an effect (during driving), and becomes visible to the player.

  Therefore, in a normal state (at the time of non-driving), the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and the back rotation back decoration 3440 on the back are provided. A back-upper decorative board 3452 provided with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, a back-left decorative board 3522 provided behind the back left decorative body 3521 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front, and The number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, which is provided on each of the back right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back right decorative body 3621 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face, It is difficult for a player to visually recognize information such as outlines where electronic components are arranged.

  On the other hand, at the time of performing an effect (at the time of driving) in which the back movable movable body 3110, the back upper rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621 are displayed in front of the performance display device 1600. In the drive, the rear movable ornament 3110, the rear upper rotating ornament 3440, the rear left ornament 3521, and the rear right ornament 3621 are driven from the standby position where it is difficult for the player to see. By moving to the position, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration body 3110 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and the back face provided behind the back rotation decoration body 3440 provided on the front. Rear decorative board 3452 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, a rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind the rear left decorative body 3521 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and rear right decorative. Body 3621 The number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outer shape on which the electronic components are arranged are respectively provided on the rear right decoration board 3622 provided on the rear side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. Information such as lines may be visually recognized by the player.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 302 (A), the rear movable decoration 3110, the back upper rotation decoration 3440, the rear left decoration 3521, and the rear right decoration 3621 are rendered and displayed. When exposed in front of the apparatus 1600, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110, the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back decoration body 3440, and the back left. The LED mounted on each of the rear left back decorative board 3522 provided behind the decorative body 3521 and the back right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back right decorative body 3621 is controlled to emit light, and each board is visually recognized. Hard to be done.

  That is, after the display effect is started on the effect display device 1600, the back-side drive motor 3126 is driven to expose the back-side movable decorative body 3110, or the back-top rear-rotation drive motor 3454 is driven to drive the back-side rear rotation. The decoration body 3440 is exposed, the rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is driven to display the rear left decoration 3521, and the rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is driven to rotate the rear right decoration 3621. In the case of exposing, the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is synchronized with the drive timing of the back-side drive motor 3126, the back-top rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back-side left rotation drive motor 3525, and the back-side right rotation drive motor 3625. The back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back, the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back rotation decoration 3440, and the back left back decoration 3521 are provided. The LED mounted on each of the rear back left decorative substrate 3522 and the rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative substrate 3621 is controlled to emit light, and the movable decorative body (the rear movable decorative body 3110, Timing when the movable decorative body has been moved from the driving position to the standby position after the movable effect or the light emitting effect by the upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the rear rear left decorative body 3521, and the rear rear right decorative body 3621 (back rear driving). Motor 3126, the rear upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, the rear rear left rotation drive motor 3525, and the rear rear right rotation drive motor 3625). Substrate 3114, back-upper decorative board 3452 provided behind back-upper rotary decoration 3440, back-left decorative board provided behind back-left decorative body 3521 522, and turns off the LED mounted on each of the back right rear decorative substrate 3622 provided in the rear of the back right rear decorative body 3621.

  As a result, the rear movable decoration 3110, the rear upper rotation decoration 3440, the rear left decoration 3521, and the rear right decoration 3621 are rendered in a state where the LEDs mounted thereon are controlled to emit light. Since the LED is exposed in front of the device 1600, each substrate can be made difficult to be visually recognized by light emitted from these LEDs, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, and the part number written on each substrate By making it difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as the pin numbers, the outlines on which the electronic components are arranged, etc., it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being collapsed and to suppress a decrease in designability. It will be possible to suppress a decline in entertainment interest. In other words, in a situation where the player easily recognizes the board in a state where the board is easily visible, the LED mounted on each board is controlled to emit light so that the player cannot easily see the board.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outer shape line on which the electronic component is arranged is described near the LED on each board. Then, in order to cause the LED to emit light in the vicinity of the information, the light emitted from the LED causes the number of pins of the connector on the board, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, the outline of the electronic component to be arranged, and the like. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the area where the information is written. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the light source (LED) is arranged near information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline in which the electronic parts are arranged, and the light is emitted. By doing so, it is possible to make such information difficult to be visually recognized.

  The timing at which the LEDs are controlled to emit light is not limited to the above-described timing. As shown in FIG. 302B, at least the back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and when the back right decoration 3621 has finished moving to the drive position in front of the effect display device 1600, that is, when it has reached the drive position and stopped moving, it is provided behind the back movable decoration 3110. Back decorative board 3114 provided behind the back and back rotating decorative body 3440, the back back left decorative board 3522 provided behind the back back left decorative body 3521, and the back back right decorative body The LED mounted on each of the rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the 3621 is controlled to emit light, and after the movable effect is completed, the moving from the driving position to the standby position is completed. When starting, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration body 3110, the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back rotation decoration body 3440, and the back decoration left body 3521 provided behind the back decoration body 3440 are provided. The LED mounted on each of the rear left back decorative board 3622 and the rear right back decorative board 3622 provided behind the back right decorative body 3621 may be turned off.

  That is, after the display effect is started on the effect display device 1600, the back-side drive motor 3126 is driven to expose the back-side movable decorative body 3110, or the back-top rear-rotation drive motor 3454 is driven to drive the back-side rear rotation. The decoration body 3440 is exposed, the rear left rotation drive motor 3525 is driven to expose the rear left decoration body 3521, and the rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is driven to rotate the back right decoration body 3621. In the case of being exposed, the back-side movable decorative body 3110, the back-top rear-rotating decorative body 3440, the back-back left decorative body 3521, and the back-back right decorative body 3621 are exposed to the driving position. After the back decorative movable body 3110, the driving of the drive motor 3126, the back rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is stopped. Back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back decoration body 3440 provided behind the back decoration board 3522 provided behind the back decoration body 3521 provided on the back side. The timing at which the LED mounted on each of the rear right decoration board 3622 provided behind the decorative body 3621 is controlled to emit light, and the movable effect is finished and the movement from the driving position to the standby position is started (the rear driving motor 3126, The back-side decorative substrate 3114 provided behind the back-side movable decorative body 3110 in accordance with the back-top rear-side rotation drive motor 3454, the back-side left-side rotation drive motor 3525, and the back-side right-side rotation drive motor 3625. A back-upper decorative board 3452 provided behind the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, a back-left decoration base provided behind the back-left decoration 3521 3522, and LED may be caused to turn off the to be mounted on each of the back right rear decorative substrate 3622 provided in the rear of the back right rear decorative body 3621.

  Thereby, when it is displayed at the drive position in front of the effect display device 1600 and becomes most visible to the player (the back rear drive motor 3126, the back upper rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525). And when the drive of the rear right rotation drive motor 3625 is stopped), the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110 and the back decoration provided behind the back rotation decoration 3440. The LED mounted on each of the substrate 3452, the back left back decoration board 3522 provided behind the back back left decoration body 3521, and the back right decoration board 3622 provided behind the back back right decoration body 3621 is caused to emit light. This makes it difficult for each substrate to be visually recognized. When the LED is off, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110, the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back decoration 3440, and the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the rotating decoration 3440 The back left back decorative board 3522 provided behind the left decorative body 3521 and the back back right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back right right decorative body 3621 are exposed to the player so that they can be easily viewed. However, since the back movable decoration 3110, the back rotation decoration 3440, the back left decoration 3521, and the back right decoration 3621 are moving, the player stares at each board. Because it is difficult to do so, even if each LED is turned off, the information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the outline on which the electronic parts are arranged, etc., written on each board are not displayed. Recognized by player Hardly.

  Note that the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the movable back decoration 3110, the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back rotation decoration 3440, and the back decoration provided behind the back left decoration 3521 are provided. The timing at which the LEDs mounted on each of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 and the rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 are not limited to those described above, but are movable behind the rear. During the movement of the decorative body 3110, the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440, the back-back left decorative body 3521, and the back-back right decorative body 3621 from the standby position to the driving position, for example, the back-back movable decorative body 3110, the back-upper-back rotating decoration The timing at which the body 3440, the back back left decorative body 3521, and the back back right decorative body 3621 are actually visible to the player, the timing immediately before reaching the driving position, and the like. The LED may be caused to emit light, or each LED may be turned on at the timing of starting the movement of the back rear movable decorative body 3110, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left decorative body 3521, and the back rear right decorative body 3621. At the time of the effect of emitting light and the timing at which the back movable decoration 3110, the back upper decoration 3440, the back left decoration 3521, and the back right decoration 3621 reach the driving position and stop driving each motor. The effect of causing each LED to emit light may be executed, that is, one or more of a plurality of timings may be executed in combination.

  Further, in this example, the state in which the LED emits light indicates a state in which light emission is controlled in a predetermined light emission pattern, and is not limited to a state in which the LED continues to be lit, but at least a lighted state and a light-off state. This also includes a blinking state controlled one or more times. In any case, the player can make the LED emit light dazzling, making it difficult for the board to be visually recognized, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, and the pin number on each board. In addition, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as outlines on which the electronic components are arranged, so that the world view of the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from being collapsed, and a decrease in the design can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming entertainment due to the decrease.

  In addition, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110, the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back rotation decoration 3440, and the back decoration provided behind the back left decoration 3521 are provided. When the LEDs mounted on the rear left decorative substrate 3522 and the rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 emit light, high luminance (in this example, the maximum luminance that can be set). Value (100%), which may be half or more (85% or more in this example) of a settable brightness range (70 to 100% in this example), or a brightness higher than the backlight of the effect display device 1600. May be emitted. This allows the LEDs to emit light with higher luminance at a position closer to the player than the effect display device 1600, so that the player can dazzle the light from these LEDs, making it difficult for each board to be visually recognized. In addition, in order to irradiate the player who pays attention to the effect display performed on the effect display device 1600 with intense light equal to or higher than the backlight of the effect display device 1600, a game familiar with the brightness of the effect display device 1600. It is more likely that the user will feel dazzling, and the effect of making each board less visible.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110, the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back decoration 3440, and the back decoration board 3452 The back left left decorative board 3522 provided behind the left decorative body 3521 and the back right right decorative board 3622 provided behind the right back decorative body 3621 each adopt white as a resist on the LED mounting surface (front face). At the same time, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component is arranged on the LED mounting surface. It is printed on yellow silk with low contrast. As a result, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the electronic component are arranged even when the board is visually recognized, as compared with the case of printing with silk of a color other than white or yellow. It becomes difficult to identify information such as outlines. In addition, the present technical idea is that when it is exposed to the front of the effect display device 1600 and becomes most visible, the back decorative board 3114 provided behind the back movable decorative body 3110 and the back-mounted rotary decorative body are provided. The back upper back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back back left decoration body 3521, the back back left decoration board 3522 provided behind the back back left decoration body 3521, and the back back right decoration board 3622 provided behind the back back right decoration body 3621 The LED mounted on each of the LEDs emits light so that each substrate is hardly visually recognized. In addition to this technology, a white resist is used as a resist on the LED mounting surface (front surface), and a yellow silk is formed on the LED mounting surface. Although various effects can be enhanced by printing various types of information, these techniques are not essential for solving the problem.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in the game effect performed by the effect display device 1600, a big hit expectation (a possibility of a big hit) of a running display or a running display (hold display) to be performed in the future is suggested. It is designed to perform an effect suggesting the degree of expectation. In this expected effect suggestion effect, the type of the image of the character or the like displayed on the effect display device 1600, the color, the pattern, and the like indicate the expected hit amount. For example, when the same character is displayed, the big hit expectation suggested as white <blue <yellow <green <red <gold as the color of the character increases.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration body 3110, the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back rotation decoration body 3440, and the back left decoration body 3521 are provided. The number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the like on the LED mounting surface of the back rear left decorative board 3522 provided behind the rear right decorative board 3622 provided behind the back right decorative body 3621 are provided. As a color of silk for printing information such as outlines on which electronic components are arranged, yellow used to indicate the expectation of the big hit is adopted. Therefore, when the back movable ornamental body 3110, the back upper back rotating decorative body 3440, the back back left decorative body 3521, and the back back right decorative body 3621 are visibly exposed, it is unrelated to the game printed on these substrates. Is not clearly identified by the player, but even if it is recognized that there is something yellow, recalling the suggestion of the jackpot expectation and It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that irrelevant information is written.

  In addition, among the colors used to indicate the jackpot expectation, yellow indicating that the jackpot expectation is relatively high is indicated by the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the electronic components on the LED mounting surface. Information, such as outlines, is used as the color of the silk to be printed, so that a player who reminds the user of the jackpot expectation can be made to think that the jackpot expectation is high, thereby suppressing a decline in gaming interest. it can. Also, since the yellow color adopted as the color of the silk has a very high jackpot expectation (70% jackpot expectation), which is similar to the gold color, the back color provided behind the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back is adopted. The rear decoration substrate 3114, the rear upper rear decoration substrate 3452 provided behind the rear upper rotation decoration 3440, the rear left decoration substrate 3522 provided behind the rear left decoration 3521, and the rear right decoration 3621 are provided. A player who merely glances at the back right rear decoration board 3622 provided at the rear may misunderstand that the color is gold, and it is very likely that a big hit will be recognized by recognizing that there is something like gold. It is possible to improve the entertainment interest of the player who has recognized that the game is high. Further, as shown in FIG. 149, the rear movable decorative body 3110 has a transparent part (for example, a part other than the metal decorative part 3111d of the decorative body 3111) and an opaque part (metal decorative part 3111d). Is formed with a gold metal decoration 3111d. Then, when the back movable movable body 3110 is exposed so as to be visible, it is possible to make a player who glances at the metal decorative portion 3111d recognize that the big hit expectation degree is very high. In addition, the metal decoration part 3111d is not limited to the same color as the gold with the high jackpot expectation among the colors indicating the jackpot expectation, but is similar to the color that is apparently recognized as the same as the gold, or similar to the gold. The back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110 and the back decoration provided behind the back rotation decoration 3440 provided on the back of the back movable decoration 3110 may be used. Silk printed on the LED mounting surface of the rear decorative substrate 3452, the rear left rear decorative substrate 3522 provided behind the rear rear left decorative body 3521, and the rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621 Among the colors suggesting the jackpot expectation other than the above-mentioned yellow color, the same color as gold with a high jackpot expectation, or a color similar to the extent that it is recognized as the same as gold at first glance, or a color similar to gold Use It may be so that.

  In addition, as described above, the back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper rotating decorative body 3440, the back left decorative body 3521, and the back right decorative body 3621 of the effect display device 1600 from the standby position where it is difficult for the player to see. It is designed to move to a driving position that can be visually recognized by a player in front, and during this movement, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110 and the back rotation back decoration 3440. Staring at the back-upper decorative board 3452, the back-left decorative board 3522 provided at the back of the back-left decorative body 3521, and the back-right decorative board 3622 provided at the back of the back-right decorative body 3621. Is difficult, so a player who only looks at these boards at a glance has written information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component. Less likely to be recognized that, easily reminded suggestions jackpot expectations. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest due to a decrease in design.

  In addition, the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110, the back decoration board 3452 provided behind the back rotation decoration 3440, and the back decoration provided behind the back left decoration 3521 are provided. A member similar to the above-described inner lens may be provided in front of each of the rear left decorative substrate 3522 and the rear right decorative substrate 3622 provided behind the rear right decorative body 3621. Thereby, even if these boards are visually recognized at the time of light emission of the LED, it is possible to suppress the information irrelevant to the game written on the boards from being recognized as information by the player. It is possible to prevent the world view from collapsing, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the design, and the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described example, the movable decorative body on which the substrate on which the LED is mounted is mounted (the movable decorative body 3110 at the back, the rotating decorative body 3440 at the back, the left decorative body 3521 at the back, and the right decorative body 3621 at the back). Is moved from the standby position, which is difficult for the player to see, to the drive position, which is visible to the player, but by moving the movable decorative body, the decorative body on which the board on which the LED substrate is mounted is mounted can be played. The present technical idea can be applied to a case where the state is changed to a state that is difficult for a player to visually recognize and a state that is visible to a player. For example, the back movable decorative body 3110 whose front is covered by the back upper front decorative body 3421 and which is normally difficult to be visually recognized by the player, is moved by moving the back upper front decorative body 3421 between the raised position and the lowered position, and is movable behind the back. From the state where it is difficult for the player covering the front of the decorative body 3110 to visually recognize it, the front of the back movable movable body 3110 is changed to a state where the front of the decorative body 3110 is opened and visible to the player (exposed state). Even in the case of performing a light emission effect, a movable effect, and the like by the decorative body 3110, the number of pins, the direction of the IC, and the part number of the connector described on the back decorative board 3114 provided behind the back movable decorative body 3110. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to visually recognize information such as a pin number, an outline on which electronic components are arranged, and the like.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 303, after the display effect is started on the effect display device 1600, when the motor is driven to move the back upper decorative body 3421 from the rising position to the lowering position, the back upper front The light emission control of the LED mounted on the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration body 3110 is performed in accordance with the timing of driving the motor for moving the decoration body 3421, and the light emission effect by the back decoration body 3110 is controlled. After the end of the movable effect, the back movable decorative body 3110 is synchronized with the timing when the front upper decorative body 3421 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position (timing to stop the motor for moving the front upper decorative body 3421). The LED mounted on the back decoration board 3114 provided at the back of the LED may be turned off.

  Accordingly, the LED mounted on the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration 3110 is controlled to emit light, so that the back rear decoration 3110 is difficult to visually recognize from the player. It changes to a state in which it can be visually recognized (the LED mounted on the back decoration board 3114 provided behind the back movable decoration body 3110 is displayed so that it can be visually recognized by the player in a state in which light emission is controlled). Therefore, the back decoration board 3114 can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the light emission of the LED mounted on the back decoration board 3114, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, Since the information such as the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged is difficult to be visually recognized by the player, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from being collapsed, and the design is improved. Can suppress below, it will be able to suppress the lowering of game interest.

  The timing at which the LED mounted on the back decoration board 3114 is controlled to emit light is not limited to the above-described timing. The timing may be the timing when the decorative body 3110 is actually visible from the player, the timing immediately before the back upper decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position, or the back upper front decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position. It may be timing. That is, during the movement of the back upper decorative body 3421, the player is distracted by the movement of the back upper front decorative body 3421 and is less likely to pay attention to the back movable movable body 3110. The LED mounted on the back decoration board 3114 may be controlled to emit light at a timing when the state is easily noticed.

  Further, the front movable decorative body movable to the predetermined standby position and the drive position, and the front movable decorative body provided at the standby position behind the front movable decorative body and difficult to visually recognize from the player due to the movement of the front movable decorative body to the drive position. When the state is changed from a state to a state that can be visually recognized by a player and a rear movable decorative body operable in a predetermined mode (rotation, vibration, or the like) is provided, the rear movable decorative body is set to a predetermined position. The information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outer shape line on which the electronic component is arranged is written on the board provided on the back side of the rear movable decorative body by operating in the mode of You may make it difficult for a player to visually recognize.

  For example, the back upper decorative body 3421 is configured to be movable between a rising position and a descending position, and the back upper rotating decorative body 3410 is located behind the back upper decorative body 3421 in the raised position in a state where it is difficult for a player to visually recognize. When the display effect is started on the effect display device 1600 and then the motor is driven to move the back upper front decorative body 3421 from the ascending position to the lowering position, the back upper front decorative body 3421 is provided. In accordance with the timing of driving the motor to move the back upper front rotation drive motor 3425 to rotate the back upper front rotary decorative body 3410, after the end of the light emission effect and movable effect by the back upper front rotary decorative body 3410, In accordance with the timing when the front upper back body 3421 has been moved from the lower position to the upper position (timing to stop the motor that moves the front upper back body 3421). The upper front rotary drive motor 3425 may be stopped.

  Thereby, the back-up front rotary decorative body 3410 is changed from a state that is difficult for the player to visually recognize to a state that is visible to the player in a state where the back-up front rotary decorative body 3410 is operated. It becomes difficult to stare at the back front decorative board 3422 provided behind the front rotating decorative body 3410, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the electronic component described on the front back decorative board 3422 It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the information such as the outlines on which the pachinko machine 1 is arranged, thereby preventing the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being collapsed and preventing a decrease in the design of the game machine. become able to.

  In this example, the state in which the movable decorative body (in this example, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410) is operating indicates a state in which the movable decorative body is driven and controlled in a predetermined operation mode. The present invention is not limited to the state of continuously moving without stopping, but also includes an intermittent operation state in which at least the moving state and the stopped state are controlled at least once.

  The timing at which the back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is operated is not limited to the above-described operation. The timing may be the timing at which the front decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position, or the timing immediately before the decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position, or the timing at which the decorative body 3421 reaches the lowered position. Is also good. That is, during the movement of the back-upper front decoration 3421, the player is distracted by the movement of the back-upper front decoration 3421 and is less likely to focus on the back-upper front rotation decoration 3410. May be operated at the timing when the front decoration member 3410 is moved to a state where the decoration member 3410 is easily noticed.

[Acclusion assistance by surrounding light emitting means]

  Next, an example of an example in which information such as the number of pins of a connector, the direction of an IC, a part number, a pin number, and an outline on which an electronic component is arranged, which is written on a board on which an LED is mounted, is difficult to be visually recognized by a player. A modified example will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined LED is turned off under specific conditions. In this case, since the LED is turned off, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, the electronic There is a possibility that information such as outlines where the components are arranged may be visually recognized by the player. In this example, even when a predetermined LED is turned off under a specific condition, information written on a board on which this LED is mounted is made difficult to be visually recognized by a player. The details will be described below.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a specific reach effect is executed in the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600, the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 are turned off. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 304, when the lifting / lowering arm 3357 is rotated by the lifting / lowering driving motor 3352 to move the decoration unit 3320 from the lowering position to the raising position, the lower back rotation is performed. When the decorative body 3440 is moved to a lower appearance position than the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 is moved to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the right of the back front left rendering unit 3700. In the case of moving, the back right rotating decoration body 3610 is moved to the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the left of the back front right rendering unit 3800, and the back guide drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 downward. In the case where the lock by the lock member 3134 is released by moving and the back movable decoration 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back front left decorative body is used. The LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the knit 3710 (the LED arranged in the area A in FIG. 304) and the LED mounted on the back front decorative board 3422 of the back side effect unit 3400 (FIG. The LED arranged in the area B in 304), the LED mounted on the front right decorative board 3814 of the front right decorative body unit 3810 (the LED arranged in the area C in FIG. 304), and the lower back The LED mounted on the lower right decorative board 3253 of the right effect unit 3250 (the LED arranged in the region D in FIG. 304) and the LED mounted on the lower back left decorative board 3203 of the lower left effect unit 3200 The LED (the LED arranged in the area D in FIG. 304) is turned off.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the movable decorative bodies (the lower-back middle decorative body unit 3320, the upper-back rear-rotating decorative body 3440, the rear-back left-rotating decorative body 3510, and the rear-right rotating in front of the effect display device 1600). When performing the effect of displaying the decorative body 3610 and the back movable movable body 3110), the LED provided around the effect display device 1600 is turned off, so that the effect is displayed in front of the effect display device 1600. The visual effect of the effect performed by the movable decorative body is not obstructed. In the case where the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is not moved from the lower position to the higher position, the LED mounted on the lower back middle decoration board 3322 provided in the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320 is turned off. (LEDs arranged in a region D in FIG. 304).

  When turning off the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600, the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 and the door frame right side decorative substrate 418). The door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, and the dish center upper decorative board 314 are also controlled to emit light. The light emission is controlled. That is, in a situation where the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 are turned off and the board on which the LEDs are mounted is easily visible, the right side of the door frame provided so as to surround the game area 5a of the game board 5 is provided. The LED mounted on the door frame right side decorative board 418 of the side unit 410, the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top of the door frame top unit 450 The LED mounted on each of the central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 controls light emission.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 are located in front of the pachinko machine 1 (player side) with respect to the gaming board 5. It is provided so as to protrude. That is, the LED provided on the door frame 3 is controlled to emit light at a position closer to the player than the game board 5.

  For this reason, when the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 are turned off, they are provided on the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3. By controlling the light emission of the LED, it is possible to control the light emission around the game board 5 at a position closer to the player than the game board 5, so that the light emission of the LED is perceived as being dazzling or at a position close to the player. By performing the light emission control with more emphasis, it is possible to direct the player's attention from the game board 5 to the door frame 3 and to prevent the player from staring in the direction of the pachinko machine 1.

  This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the boards on which the LEDs provided around the effect display device 1600 are mounted, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as outlines on which the electronic components are arranged, it is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being collapsed and to suppress a reduction in design. It will be possible to suppress a decline in entertainment interest.

  In addition, the light emission mode when the LED provided on the door frame 3 is controlled to emit light includes, for example, a state in which the LED is continuously lit for a certain period, a blinking state in which the LED is switched at least once between a lighting state and a non-lighting state. Higher than normal brightness (in this example, the maximum settable brightness (100%), more than half of the settable brightness range (70 to 100% in this example) (85% or more in this example) Or may be higher in luminance than the backlight of the effect display device 1600), and light up (including not only a light that keeps on for a certain period, but also a blinking state and a flash), and the like. Is mentioned. In any case, the emission of the LED provided on the door frame 3 is made dazzling, or the LED provided on the door frame 3 is controlled to emit light by emphasizing the LED more than usual, so that the player's attention is paid to the game board 5. To the door frame 3 around the game board 5 to prevent the player from staring in the direction of the pachinko machine 1 or to make the difference between light and dark clear so that the part that is darker than other areas Since the visual recognition can be made difficult, it is possible to make it difficult for the substrate on which the LED provided on the game board 5 is mounted to be visually recognized. As a result, information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, and the like are recorded on the board on which the LED mounted on the game board 5 is mounted. The pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being visually perceived and the world view of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from collapsing, so that a decrease in the design can be suppressed.

  Further, under specific conditions, an LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710, an LED mounted on the back upper front decorative board 3422 of the back upper effect unit 3400, and The LED mounted on the front right decorative board 3814 behind the front right decorative body unit 3810, the LED mounted on the lower back right decorative board 3253 of the lower right right rendering unit 3250, and the back of the lower lower left rendering unit 3200 Even when the LED mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 3203 and the LED are turned off, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned on. Therefore, the back left front decoration board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the back top front of the back top effect unit 3400 are generated by the light of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the light of the LED provided on the door frame 3. A decorative substrate 3422, a back front right decorative substrate 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, a back lower right decorative substrate 3253 of the back lower right effecting unit 3250, a back lower left decorative substrate 3203 of the back lower left effecting unit 3200; Can be illuminated from the periphery of these substrates by sandwiching them, which can cause light and dark between the region where the substrates are arranged and the periphery of the substrates. Visual recognition can be made difficult.

  In addition, the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 on which the LED is mounted on the front surface, the back front front decorative board 3422 of the back upper effect unit 3400, and the back front right of the back front right decorative body unit 3810 The same member as the above-described inner lens is provided in front of each of the decorative substrate 3814, the lower right lower decorative substrate 3253 of the lower lower right rendering unit 3250, and the lower lower left decorative substrate 3203 of the lower lower left rendering unit 3200. You may do so. Thereby, even if these boards are visually recognized when the mounted LEDs are turned off, information irrelevant to the game written on the boards can be suppressed from being recognized as information by the player, It is possible to prevent the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from collapsing, thereby suppressing a decrease in design, and a decrease in amusement of entertainment.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 on which the LEDs are mounted on the front surface, the back front front decorative board 3422 of the back upper effect unit 3400, and the back Each of the back front right decoration board 3814 of the front right decoration unit 3810, the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right production unit 3250, and the back bottom left decoration board 3203 of the back bottom left production unit 3200 is an LED. The white color is adopted as the resist on the mounting surface (front surface), and information such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the outer shape line on which the electronic component is arranged is reflected on the LED mounting surface. It is printed with yellow silk, which has a close ratio and brightness, and has little visual difference (contrast). As a result, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the electronic component are arranged even when the board is visually recognized, as compared with the case of printing with silk of a color other than white or yellow. It becomes difficult to identify information such as outlines. Note that the present technical idea is to make each board hard to be visually recognized by controlling the light emission around the board on which the LED is mounted in a predetermined mode when the LED is turned off. Although the effect can be enhanced by adopting white as the resist on the mounting surface (front surface) and printing various information with yellow silk on the LED mounting surface, these technologies are used to solve the problem. Not required.

  In addition, under specific conditions, movable decorations (under-back middle decoration unit 3320, back-upper rotation decoration 3440, back-left rotation decoration 3510, back-right rotation decoration 3610, And the effect of displaying the back movable decorative body 3110) is described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710. LED, LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3422 of the back top directing unit 3400, The LED mounted on the lower back right decorative board 3253, the LED mounted on the lower back left decorative board 3203 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200, the movable decorative body (middle back lower) The decoration board unit 3320, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, the back-left rotating decoration 3510, the back-right rotating decoration 3610, and the LED provided on the back-movable decoration 3110) are provided on the game board 5. While the plurality of LEDs provided are turned off, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 and the LED provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light (a state in which the LEDs are not turned off). The present technical concept can be applied even when a door opening error occurs when opening is detected. Further, even under specific conditions, among the light emitting members (lamps, LEDs, etc.) provided on the game board 5, those that display important information related to the game such as the function display unit 1400 are not turned off. Is also good.

[Covering the board mounted on the production operation unit]
Next, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the electronic components are arranged on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided on the effect operation unit 300 and having the LED mounted on the surface. An example will be described in which information such as a contour line to be displayed is hardly visually recognized by a player. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the LED mounted on the effect operation ring decorative board 352 is turned off (the light is not limited to be turned off, and the brightness may be lower than usual). . In this case, since the LED is turned off, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 is visually recognized, so that the number of pins, the direction of the IC, the component number, and the pin number of the connector written on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are displayed. In addition, there is a possibility that information such as an outline on which the electronic component is arranged is visually recognized by the player. In this example, even if the LED mounted on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 is turned off based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, or in the standby lighting state in which the brightness is lower than normal, The information written on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 is made difficult to be visually recognized by the player. The details will be described below.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when performing a player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300, the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. An LED mounted on the surface of the central button decoration substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 provided therein, and an LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330, The central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer decorative lens 379, the outer button cover 380, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are illuminated and decorated.

  Then, when the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is finished, the center button decoration provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 The LED mounted on the surface of the substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when performing the player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300, the effect operation unit 300 is controlled to emit light. Then, the central button cover 375, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are illuminated and decorated. Attention is paid to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the unit 300 to urge these operations.

  On the other hand, in the normal operation when the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is not performed, the center provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 is provided. The LED mounted on the surface of the button decoration substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the player participation type effect is not performed, the surface of the center button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 is formed. When the effect operation unit 300 is operated during normal times when the mounted LED and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off, The LED mounted on the surface of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 is controlled to emit light for a certain period, and the center of the effect operation button unit 360 is controlled. The button cover 375, the outer decorative lens 379, and the outer button cover 380 are illuminated. To.

  This makes it difficult for the center button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 to be visually recognized by the light emitted from the LED, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, Since information such as pin numbers and outlines on which electronic components are arranged is difficult to be visually recognized by a player, the world view of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being disrupted, and the design can be prevented from deteriorating. Can be suppressed. As described above, during the normal time when the player participation type effect for operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is not performed, the effect operation unit 301 is operated to produce the effect. In a situation where attention is paid to the operation unit 301, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer periphery button decoration board 377 are controlled to emit light, and the center button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360 and the outer periphery decoration lens are provided. By decorating the light emitting device 379 with the light, the center button cover 375 and the outer decorative lens 379 to be light-emitted and the light emitted from the LED make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the central button decorative substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377. Become.

  When the effect operation unit 301 is operated in a normal state, the LED mounted on the surface of the center button decoration board 376 is controlled to emit light for a certain period, and the center button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360 emits light. Control to decorate, control to light-emitting the LED mounted on the surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 over a certain period of time, and to emit and decorate the outer peripheral decoration lens 379, and effect operation provided below the effect operation ring 330 One or a combination of two or more of: controlling the LED mounted on the surface of the ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light for a certain period of time and causing the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 to emit light. May be executed). If the effect operation unit 301 is operated again before the certain period elapses, these LEDs may be turned off when a certain period elapses from the operation. That is, these LEDs may be turned off when a period during which the effect operation unit 301 is not operated reaches a predetermined period after the effect operation unit 301 is operated.

  Further, the LED for light emission control may be made different depending on the part of the effect operation unit 300 that is normally operated. For example, when the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit 300 is operated. The central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the LED mounted on the surface of the central button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the 360 are controlled for light emission for a certain period of time. When the rotary operation unit 302 is operated, the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 is turned on for a certain period. By controlling the light emission, the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is decorated with light emission. Good. Thereby, the light emission of the LED provided at the portion of interest of the player can be controlled, and the visibility of the board on which the LED is mounted is suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described example, it is mounted on the surface of the center button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 at the normal time when the player participation type effect is not performed. Although the LED and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are shown as being turned off, the present invention is not limited to the light that is turned off, and it is a player participation type effect. A light emission mode at the time of prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and a light emission mode at the time of standby in which the luminance is reduced compared to the light state at the time of the effect (including not only the lighted state but also the lighted state). The present technical concept can be applied as long as the light emission is controlled by switching.

  Further, since the player participation type effect is not performed, the LED mounted on the surface of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the effect The LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below the operation ring 330 and the light emission control in the standby light emission mode, the normal operation of the effect operation unit 300 when the operation is performed. In addition to or in addition to the process of controlling the light emission by switching from the standby light emission mode to the production light emission mode, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is driven and the pressing operation unit 303 is vibrated for a certain period ( (Up and down) or drive control of the operation ring drive motor 342 to rotate or shake the rotation operation unit 302 for a certain period of time. May be or is (are rotationally alternately to the left and right).

  That is, the center button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 are operated based on the operation of the effect operation unit 300 during the normal time when the player participation type effect is not performed. The board 377 is moved (vibrated in this example) so that it is difficult to stare, or the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is operated so as to overlap the front of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and obstruct the field of view. In the example, it may be rotated or vibrated). Thereby, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, and the electronic components are arranged on the mounting surface of the center button decorative board 376, the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352. Since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize information such as outlines, the appearance of the world of the pachinko machine 1 is prevented from collapsing, so that a decrease in design can be suppressed, and a decrease in amusement of the game can be suppressed.

  In this example, a rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided therein, and a rendering operation ring 302 configured to form a surface of the rendering operation ring 330 and cover the front of the rendering operation ring decoration substrate 352 are provided. Although the rotation operation unit 302 is operated in front of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 at 330, a decoration body provided separately from the effect operation ring 330 is moved in front of the effect operation ring decoration board 352. The operation ring decoration substrate 352 may be operated so as to at least partially overlap with the operation ring decoration substrate 352 (vibration, reciprocating operation, or the like) so that the visual recognition of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 may be blocked, or the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit 300. Without moving the center button decoration board 376 and the outer periphery button decoration board 377 provided in the 360, By vibrating only the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 which cover the surfaces of the button decorative substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, the center button decorative substrate 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 may be difficult to visually recognize. Good.

  The center button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360 is shifted from a normal (non-operating) reference position (origin) by the pressing detection sensor 381 based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 303. When it is detected, the operation of returning the center button cover 375 to the reference position (origin) (origin return operation) may be performed, or the production operation button unit 360 may be pulled by the elevation detection sensor 382 to perform the operation. When it is detected that the effect operation button unit 360 is deviated from the normal (non-movable) lowering position, an operation (origin return operation) of returning the effect operation button unit 360 to the reference position (origin) is performed. It may be performed, or the effect operation button unit 360 is set to the normal (non-movable) lowering position by the elevation detecting sensor 382. When it is detected that the position is a halfway position that is not any of the ascending positions when moving, the effect operation button unit 360 is returned to the reference point (origin) (origin return operation). Good.

  In this case, since the center button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 move with the origin return operation, it becomes difficult to stare at the surfaces of these boards. In addition to the case where the operation button unit 360 is operated, the above-described movable decorative bodies (the rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear upper rotating decorative body 3440, the rear rear left decorative body 3521, and the rear rear right decorative body 3621) are used. Even when the movable decorative body is shifted from the standby position (origin), the movable decorative body may be returned to the standby position (origin) (origin return operation). In operation, the surfaces of the substrates mounted on the movable decorative body can be hardly stared by moving.

  It should be noted that the above-described movable decorative bodies (under-back middle decorative body unit 3320, back-upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, back-back left rotating decorative body 3510, back-back right rotating decorative body 3610, and back-back movable decorative body 3110) Even when it is detected that the state has deviated from the standby position or the drive position due to the influence, the operation of returning to the standby position (origin return operation) may be performed. Lower middle decoration unit 3320, rear upper rotation decoration 3440, rear left rotation decoration 3510, rear right rotation decoration 3610, and rear movable decoration 3110) are moved and mounted on the surface of the substrate. Can be difficult to stare at. That is, in the movable decorative bodies that are difficult to be visually recognized by a player, such as the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440, the back-left rotating decorative body 3510, the back-right rotating decorative body 3610, and the back-moving decorative body 3110, the standby state. In a state where the position of the board is shifted from the position and there is a possibility that the surface of the board mounted may be visually recognized by a player, it is difficult to stare at the surface of the board by operating the movable decorative body and moving the board. At the same time, the state may be changed from a state in which the surface of the substrate is visible to a state in which the surface of the substrate is hardly visible by moving the substrate to the standby position.

  In the above-described player participation type production, the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the production operation unit 301 is valid for a predetermined period of the game production, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation unit 301 or the pressing operation is performed. When the operation unit 303 is operated, the display content of the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 is changed according to the operation. In other words, the execution of the player participation type effect causes the player to pay attention to the effect operation unit 301. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the effect is produced before the start of the period during which the operations of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 are valid in the player participation type effect (operation effective period). The LED mounted on the surface of the central button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the operation unit 300 and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. The LED mounted on the surface is controlled to emit light in a light emission mode for effecting, and the central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, and the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330. , The center button decoration board 376, the outer periphery button decoration board 377, and the Are less likely to be visually recognized the ring decorative substrate 352.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 305, at the timing of starting the player participation type effect before the operation of the effect operation unit 301 becomes effective, a center button provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 The LED mounted on the surface of the decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operating ring decorative board 352 provided below the effect operating ring 330 are controlled by emitting light to effect the effect. The center button cover 375 of the operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380, and the rotary operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 are light-emitting decorated, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 are decorated. When a period during which the operation is valid (operation valid period) has elapsed, these LEDs are turned off. As a result, the center button cover 375, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, the outer peripheral button cover 380 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral button cover 380, before the player recognizes that the player participation type effect is started and pays attention to the effect operation unit 301. In addition, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated, and the center button decoration substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are suppressed from being visually recognized, and It is possible to prevent information related to the game, such as the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged, from being visually recognized.

  The light emission mode of the LED may be changed between before the start of the operation effective period and during the operation effective period. For example, the color to be decorated with the light emission mode before the start of the operation effective period and the light emission mode during the operation effective period Or the brightness of the LED may be changed to determine whether or not the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is valid. That is, the LED mounted on the surface of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 at the timing of starting the player participation type effect, and the effect operation ring The LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 provided below 330 is controlled to emit light in the first effect light emission mode, and during the operation effective period, from the first effect light emission mode to the second effect light emission mode. Light emission control may be performed by switching to the light emission mode. In addition, at the timing when the operation effective period has elapsed, the light emission control is switched by switching from the light emission mode at the second effect to the light emission mode at the first effect, and the light emission control is switched from the light emission mode at the first effect to the light emission mode at the standby after the game effect. You may make it.

  Further, when the player participation type effect is started, a display prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this example, an image similar to the effect operation unit 301 is displayed, and "press a button!" Is displayed to urge the player to press the effect operation unit 301. It should be noted that an expectation suggestion effect that suggests the jackpot expectation degree may be executed by changing a mode (a color or a pattern in this example) of the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed on the effect display device 1600. . As described above, in the present example, the big hit expectation indicating the order of white <blue <yellow <green <red <gold is set to be high, and the image mode of the rendering operation unit 301 is changed to one of these. The color may be used to indicate the jackpot expectation.

  The LED mounted on the surface of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 and the effect operation ring decoration provided below the effect operation ring 330. When the light emission control of the LED mounted on the surface of the substrate 352 is performed in the second effect light emission mode, it is the same as the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed on the effect display device 1600 (not limited to the exact match, but almost the same). The light emission may be controlled in colors (including the same). Accordingly, the effect operation unit 301 can be decorated with light emission in association with the effect indicating the degree of expectation performed by the effect display device 1600, and the sense of realism increases. If the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 is to be decorated with light emission before the timing of displaying the image of the effect operation unit 301 on the effect display device 1600, the image of the effect display unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Until the timing, when the effect operation unit 301 is illuminated and decorated with a light emission color (white in this example) of a normal (the color with the lowest expectation of big hit) and the image of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or the timing. After a predetermined period (e.g., several seconds) has elapsed from the above, the color may be changed to the same color as the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed on the effect display device 1600 to perform light emission decoration.

[Brightness adjustment of lamp and LED]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment operates the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 to rotate the LED provided on the door frame 3 (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative board). 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, and the dish upper left decorative board 273, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface of the dish upper right decorative board 278 and the dish center upper decorative board 314 may be adjustable in brightness.) And LEDs provided on the game board 5 (at least in this example). Door frame right side decorative board 418, door frame left side decorative board 402, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative A plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate 457, mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114, the back top decoration board 3452, the back left decoration board 3522, and the back back right decoration board 3622 mounted on the movable decorative body The brightness of the plurality of LEDs may be adjustable, and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs as a backlight of the effect display device 1600 may be adjustable, but a display for displaying important information related to the game. (For example, the LED provided in the function display unit 1400) is preferably not adjustable in brightness.) And the brightness of the LED is set in 5% steps from 70% to 100%. It can be adjusted.

  Specifically, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise, the brightness of the LED provided on the door frame 3 and the LED provided on the game board 5 is improved, and the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated. When the counterclockwise rotation operation is performed, the brightness of the LED provided on the door frame 3 and the brightness of the LED provided on the game board 5 are reduced.

  When adjusting the brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302, a barometer corresponding to the current brightness is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a certain period, and the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise. When operated, the scale of the barometer is increased until the brightness reaches 100%, and when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise, the scale of the barometer is reduced until the brightness reaches 70%. As described above, when the brightness is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 is provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300 by directing attention to the display content of the effect display device 1600. The center button decoration board 376, the outer periphery button decoration board 37, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 can be suppressed from being visually recognized, and connectors described on these boards can be suppressed. The information such as the number of pins, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline of the electronic component is difficult to be visually recognized by the player. Can be suppressed, and a decrease in gaming interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the player participation type effect is not performed as described above, it is mounted on the surface of the center button decorative board 376 and the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300. When the rotary operation unit 302 is operated in a normal state where the LED and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330 are turned off, the center button decoration board The LED mounted on the surface of 376, the LED mounted on the surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided below the effect operation ring 330. , Light emission control over a certain period of time, and the central button cover 375 of the effect operation button unit 360 and the outer peripheral decoration Emit light decoration and a rotating operation unit 302 of the lens 379 and the staging operation ring 330. Then, when the period during which the effect operation unit 301 is not operated reaches a certain period, the display of the barometer of the effect display device 1600 disappears and the LED of the effect operation unit 300 is turned off.

  As described above, when the brightness is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302, by controlling the light emission of the LEDs provided in the rendering operation unit 300, the central button decoration board 376 on which these LEDs are mounted, The surfaces of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 and the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be made hard to be visually recognized by light emitted from the LED.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the LEDs mounted on the surfaces of the center button decoration board 376 and the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 provided in the effect operation button unit 360 of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower part of the effect operation ring 330. The brightness of the LED mounted on the surface of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 provided cannot be adjusted. That is, the brightness of the LED provided in the rendering operation unit 300 which is provided at a position close to the player and which is easily noticed is not adjusted, and the light emission is controlled at a preset brightness. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 300 is to be light-emission-decorated in the above-described effect light emission mode, the effect operation unit 300 is always mounted on the surface of the center button decoration substrate 376, the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377, and the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 with a certain luminance or higher. LED can be made to emit light, and is illuminated from the LED in a situation where the player pays attention to the staging operation unit 300 (a situation in which the staging operation unit 301 is operated such as a player participation-type staging or volume adjustment is being performed). The central button decoration board 376, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 can be made hard to be visually recognized by the applied light, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, and the components described on these boards are provided. Since information such as numbers, pin numbers, and outlines on which electronic components are arranged is difficult to be visually recognized by the player, the world of the pachinko machine 1 To prevent the watch collapses can suppress deterioration of design property, it can be suppressed lowering of game interest.

  In addition, as described above, the center button decoration board 376, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the effect operation ring decoration board 352 adopt white as a resist on the mounting surface, and the number of connector pins is yellow silk on the mounting surface. Information such as the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, and the outline on which the electronic component is arranged is printed. As described above, in the present example, since such information is printed on the mounting surface of the board with yellow silk, which has a small visual difference (contrast) with respect to white, not only when the LED is turned on, but also when the LED is turned off. However, it is difficult to identify such information.

  Note that the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed for a certain period (for example, for a certain period from when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on to when the peripheral control MPU is activated), before and after the special symbol that is variably displayed is stopped. May be always executable except for one or both of certain periods), or may be a specific condition such as a period during which a demonstration is performed by the effect display device 1600 while waiting for a customer. May be executed only when the condition is satisfied. In addition, the result of the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 may be immediately reflected, or the result of the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 according to the situation (whether or not the variable display is being performed). May be changed immediately and the case where the result of the brightness adjustment is reflected at a timing later than the operation timing of the rotation operation unit 302 may be changed.

  In this example, the brightness adjustment based on the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be executed even when the door frame 3 is opened. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened, the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the LED mounted on the back front front decorative board 3422 of the back upper effect unit 3400 are mounted. LED, LED mounted on the back front right decoration board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, LED mounted on the back bottom right decoration board 3253 of the back bottom right rendering unit 3250, and LED mounted on the back bottom right rendering unit 3200 The LED mounted on the lower back left decorative board 3203, the movable decorative body (the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610, and A plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 such as an LED provided on the back movable movable body 3110) are turned off (not lit) and provided on the door frame 3. LEDs (in this example, at least the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, The upper left decorative board 273, the upper right decorative board 278, and the upper central decorative board 314 may also be controlled to emit light.) The light emission is controlled (lighting enabled state). That is, when the rotation operation unit 302 is operated to adjust the brightness while the door frame 3 is opened, the plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 are turned off. However, it is not possible to determine the luminance based on the light emitting state of the plurality of LEDs.

  On the other hand, in a state where the door frame 3 is not opened (a state where the door frame 3 is closed), the LED mounted on the back front left decorative board 3714 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 and the back upper effect unit 3400 LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3422, LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3814 of the back front right decorative body unit 3810, and mounted on the back lower right decorative board 3253 of the back bottom right rendering unit 3250 LED, the LED mounted on the lower back left decorative board 3203 of the lower back left rendering unit 3200, the movable decorative body (the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the upper back rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back rear left rotating decoration A plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5, such as the body 3510, the back-side right rotating decorative body 3610, and the LED provided on the back-side movable decorative body 3110), are turned off. Not controlled for (lighted state). Therefore, in the state where the door frame 3 is closed, when the brightness is adjusted by operating the rotary operation unit 302, the brightness can be determined based on the light emitting state of the LED provided on the game board 5.

  In addition, as described above, the back front left decorative board 3714, the back front front decorative board 3422, the back front right decorative board 3814, the lower back right decorative board 3253, the lower back left decorative board 3203, the back rear decorative board 3114, the back upper back Also for the decorative substrate 3452, the back-rear left decorative substrate 3522, and the back-rear right decorative substrate 3622, white is adopted as the resist of the mounting surface, and the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the components, and the components are yellow silk on the mounting surface. Information such as numbers, pin numbers, and outlines on which electronic components are arranged is printed. Therefore, even when the door frame 3 is opened and the LEDs mounted on these boards are in a lighting-disabled state, such information can be hardly identified.

[Backside emission of pachinko machine]
Conventionally, on the back side of a pachinko machine, only a control board and the like are mounted, and it is not a part to be recognized by a player. Therefore, no special measures are taken except for countermeasures against fraud. In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment employs a novel configuration that has not existed in the past so that various work efficiencies with respect to the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 306 is a side view schematically showing light from the light emitting decorative body at the standby position when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, and FIG. 307 is in an appearance position when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side. It is a side view which shows the light from a light emission decoration body typically, FIG. 308 is a figure which shows the back decoration board provided with the some hole, FIG. 309 is a light emission area | region on the back side of a pachinko machine. FIG. 310 is a perspective view showing a light emitting region on a side surface of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 311 is a perspective view showing a light emitting region on a side surface of the game board viewed from the left back. It is.

(About the light from the luminous decorative body)
In the gaming board 5 of this example, an effect display device 1600 having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image is provided. The effect display device 1600 is visually recognized from the front side and surrounds the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is provided with a plurality of light-emitting decorations. The back unit 3000 is provided with a back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 and has a box-like shape having an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. In contrast, the effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, while the various units having the light-emitting decorative body are located inside the back box 3010 at a position forward of the effect display device 1600. Installed.

  As the light-emitting decorative body of this example, a back-upper-front rotating decorative body 3410, a back-upper-front decorative body 3421, a back-upper-back decorative body 3451, a back-back movable decorative body 3110, and the like are provided. There is a case where the LED is mounted as a part of an effect when the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a case where the LED is emitted as a decoration of the game board 5 when the symbol is not displayed in a variable manner.

  First, the back upper front decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307. As described in detail above, when visually recognized from the front side of the gaming board 5, a back upper front decorative body 3421 of the back upper effect unit 3400 is provided above the display area of the effect display device 1600, and a back upper front decoration. At the position on the front side of the center of the body 3421, a back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is attached. More specifically, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms, and is composed of a non-light-transmitting part and a light-transmitting lens part. In addition, the back upper front decorative body 3421 has two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 in the center in the left-right direction, and the back petals are overlapped with each other. It is formed in such a shape as to be rotated so as to be located between them, and there is almost no non-light-transmitting portion and almost the entire portion is a light-transmitting lens portion. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light-emitting decoration more vivid when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 306, a back upper decorative board 3422 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the back upper rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421. The back upper front decorative substrate 3422 extends right and left over substantially the entire length of the back upper front decorative body 3421 in the left-right direction. And the back upper front decoration substrate 3422 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light traveling forward from the plurality of LEDs is turned into a lens of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421. By reaching the part, the lens part of the back upper front decoration body 3410 and the back upper front decoration body 3421 can be illuminated.

  In addition, a top-view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 (a surface portion facing the front side facing the player). The top view type LED can emit light toward the front of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 (the player side). For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portions of the front upper back decoration 3410 and the front upper back body 3421 located at the front, and the front upper back decoration 3410 and the front back upper decoration. The lens portion 3421 can be brightly decorated with light.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portions of the back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-upper front decorative body 3421, and the lens portions of the back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-upper front decorative body 3421. Can be brightly illuminated. In addition, the front upper back decoration substrate 3422 passes through the lens portion of the rear upper front rotation decorative body 3410 and the rear upper front decoration body 3421, especially when the LED is in a non-emission state, and the front surface of the rear upper front decoration substrate 3422 is a player. It may be visible from the side. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 with a coating film made of a white solder resist, even through the lens portions of the rear upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the rear upper front decorative body 3421, From the player's side, the lens portion can be recognized only in white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 being visible.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the rear surface (the rear surface facing the rear surface of the gaming machine) of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 of this example. As the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422, top view type LEDs are mounted, and the rear side of the back upper front decorative board 3422 (opposite to the player side; in other words, pachinko machines). (A back side of the machine 1).

  In addition, the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on a surface portion excluding a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components, not only on the front surface but also on the rear surface. are doing. As described above, the coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, light can be efficiently emitted toward the rear of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422.

  As shown in FIG. 306, in the state where the back-upper back decoration body 3440 and the back-upper back decoration body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back-upper back rotation decoration is placed behind the left-right portion of the back-upper front decoration board 3422 in the left-right direction. Since the body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451 are located, light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper front decorative board 3422 emits light from the rear-upper-back rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451. To be irradiated. A part of such light is reflected by the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451, and the back-upper decoration board 3422 (the back-upper rotating decoration 3410 and the back-upper decoration 3421). And a state in which light leaks out from the gap between the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451, and such leaked light (leakage light) can be visually recognized by a player. Become. In this way, not only the back-upper rotating decoration 3410 and the back-upper decoration 3421 emit light, but also light leaks out on the rear side of the back-upper rotating decoration 3410 and the back-upper decoration 3421. Therefore, it is possible to execute a light emission effect that makes the player feel a sense of depth.

  Further, in a state where the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451 are in the retracted position, the back-upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440 The rear decoration 3451 is not located. In addition, in a state where the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is not located behind an upper portion in the vertical direction of the back-top front decorative substrate 3422. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper part of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 in the vertical direction. From this, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper decorative board 3422 is removed from the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, the back-upper decoration 3451, the back-movable decoration 3110, Without being blocked by the effect display device 1600, the light is directly emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further passes through the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting area L1 near the part can be visually recognized brightly.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 307, in a state where the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 are in the appearing position, the back-upper front decoration board 3422 is behind the back-side all parts in the left-right direction. The rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper decorative body 3451 are not located. In addition, in a state where the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is in the appearance position, the back-side movable decorative body 3110 is not located behind the upper part in the vertical direction of the back-top front decorative substrate 3422. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper part of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 in the vertical direction. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper decorative board 3422 is reflected by the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, the back-upper decoration 3451, the back-movable decoration 3110, the effect display device. Irradiation is performed toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 without being blocked by 1600. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further passes through the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting area L1 near the part can be visually recognized brightly.

  Next, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307. As described above in detail, the back upper and lower decorative body 3451 is provided with a back upper and lower decorative body 3451 behind the back upper and lower decorative body 3421, and a position on the front side of the back and upper rear decorative body 3451 is provided. , A back decoration 3440 is attached. More specifically, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms, and includes a non-light-transmitting portion and a light-transmitting lens portion. In addition, the back-upper decorative body 3451 overlaps two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 so that the back petals are located between the front petals. The lens is formed in such a shape as to be rotated, and there is almost no non-light-transmitting portion, and almost the entire portion is a light-transmitting lens portion. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light-emitting decoration more vivid when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 306, a rear upper back decoration board 3452 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the rear upper decoration body 3440 and the rear upper decoration body 3451. The back upper decoration substrate 3452 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light traveling forward from the plurality of LEDs is applied to the lens portion of the back upper rotation decoration 3440 and the back upper decoration 3451. At this point, the lens portions of the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 can be illuminated.

  In addition, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 can move from the evacuation position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In a state in which the back-upper back decoration body 3440 and the back-upper back decoration body 3451 are in the retracted position, they are located behind the back-upper front decoration body 3421 and are invisible to the player. At this time, while the tank rail 553 is located behind the upper back rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper decorative body 3451, the back upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper decorative body 3451 are located. The effect display device 1600 is located at the rear in the lower part of. In addition, in a state where the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 have moved to the appearance position, they are located in front of the effect display device 1600 and are visible to the player.

  In addition, a top-view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) of the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452. The top-view type LED can irradiate light toward the front (player side) of the back upper back decoration board 3452. For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portion of the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451 located in front, and the back-upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body The 3451 lens portion can be brightly illuminated.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the front surface of the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portions of the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451, and the lens portions of the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451. Can be brightly illuminated. In addition, the back-upper decorative board 3452 passes through the lens portion of the back-upper rotary decorative body 3440 and the back-upper decorative body 3451, and the front surface of the back-upper decorative board 3452 is a player especially when the LED is in a non-emission state. It may be visible from the side. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back upper decorative substrate 3452 with a coating film made of a white solder resist, even through the lens portions of the back upper rotating decorative body 3440 and the back upper decorative body 3451, From the player's side, the lens portion can be recognized only in white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by the front surface of the decorative substrate 3452 being visible after the back.

  As shown in FIG. 306, in a state where the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 are in the retracted position, the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 are forwardly arranged in front of the back-upper decoration 3451. The rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 are located. From this, light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-upper decorative board 3452 is reflected by the back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-upper front decorative body 3421, and the back-upper back decorative board 3452. Irradiates toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3452 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further passes through the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the site can be visually recognized brightly.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of the rear surface of the back-upper decorative board 3452 (the rear surface facing the back of the gaming machine) of this example. As the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the rear upper back substrate 3452, a top view type LED is mounted, and the rear side of the rear upper back substrate 3452 (opposite to the player side; in other words, pachinko). (A back side of the machine 1).

  In addition, the rear upper decorative substrate 3452 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the rear surface as well as on the rear surface, excluding a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface and other mounting components. have. As described above, the coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, light can be efficiently emitted toward the rear of the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452.

  As shown in FIG. 306, in the state where the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 are in the retracted position, regardless of whether the back-movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, The rear movable decorative body 3110 is not located behind the upper part of the decorative substrate 3452 in the vertical direction. Further, the effect display device 1600 is not located behind the upper part in the vertical direction of the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper decorative substrate 3452 is not blocked by the back-movable decorative body 3110 and the effect display device 1600, The light is directly irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located at the rear. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the rear upper back decoration board 3452 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 can be viewed brightly.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 307, in the state where the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 are in the appearance position, they are located in front of the effect display device 1600, Light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface is not irradiated toward the back box 3010 or the tank rail 553. For this reason, in a state where the back-upper back decoration body 3440 and the back-upper back decoration body 3451 are at the appearance position, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper back decoration board 3452 are controlled not to emit light. .

  Next, the back-side movable decorative body 3110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307. As described above in detail, the rear movable decoration 3110 of the rear rearward effect unit 3100 is provided behind the rear upper decoration 3451. More specifically, the rear movable movable body 3110 is a transparent flat decorative body 3111 extending in the left-right direction and having a decoration constituting a part of the decorative portion 3150 by embossed (relief) irregularities. A translucent sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3112 provided with a decoration (pattern) provided behind the decorative body 3111 and constituting the rest of the decorative portion 3150; and provided behind the decorative sheet 3112. A light guide radiation plate 3113 in the form of a transparent flat plate, and a back decoration board 3114 provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113 and having a plurality of first LEDs 3114a and second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface. I have. The back rear decoration substrate 3114 emits the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b mounted on the front surface, so that light traveling forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the decoration body 3111, and the decoration body 3111 (the back side). The movable decorative body 3110) can be illuminated.

  As shown in FIG. 307, the back movable decorative body 3110 can move from the retreat position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In the state where the back movable ornament 3110 is in the retracted position, it is located behind the back upper front ornament 3421 and is invisible to the player. At this time, the tank rail 553 is located at the rear of the upper part of the rear movable ornamental body 3110, whereas the effect display device 1600 is located at the rear of the lower part of the rear movable ornamental body 3110. . In addition, in a state where the rear movable movable body 3110 has moved to the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600 and is visible to the player.

  In addition, on the front surface (the surface portion facing the front side facing the player) of the back rear decoration substrate 3114, as a plurality of LEDs, a plurality of side view type first LEDs 3114a and a top view type plurality of second LEDs 3114b. Has been implemented. The first LED 3114a of the side view type can emit light toward the front (player side) of the back decoration board 3114, whereas the second LED 3114b of the top view type can emit light toward the back decoration board. Light can be emitted toward the side of 3114. In addition, the rear movable movable body 3110 is provided with a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113, and the first LED 3114 a and the second LED 3114 b of the rear rear decoration substrate 3114 emit light toward the light guide radiation plate 3113. By irradiating, the light guide radiation plate 3113 emits light forward, so that the decoration 3111 can be uniformly irradiated with light as a whole, and the decoration 3111 (the back movable decoration 3110) can be illuminated. ) Can be easily visually recognized and can be light-emitting decorated.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on a surface portion of the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounting components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, the decorative body 3111 can be efficiently irradiated with light, and the decorative body 3111 (the back movable movable body 3110) can be brightly illuminated. In addition, there is a possibility that the front side of the back decoration board 3114 can be visually recognized from the player side through the decoration body 3111 of the back decoration body 3110 especially when the LED is in a non-light emitting state. is there. In this regard, by providing a coating film made of a white solder resist on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114, the decoration body 3111 from the player side can be passed through the decoration body 3111 of the movable back decoration body 3110. Can be recognized as white, and a decrease in interest caused by the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 being visible can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 306, in a state in which the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 and the rear upper back front decorative body 3421 are provided in front of the rear back movable decorative body 3110. The decorative body 3451 is located. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is reflected on the back upper rotation decoration 3410, the back decoration 3421, and the back decoration 3451. The light is emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the movable decorative body 3110 behind the back. The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back movable movable body 3110 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 can be viewed brightly.

  Light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is diffused in the light guide radiating plate 3113 and irradiated toward the front of the light guide radiating plate 3113. Light is also emitted from the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the radiation plate 3113 toward the side of the light guide radiation plate 3113. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 passes through the light guide emission plate 3113 from the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the light guide emission plate 3113 (the back decoration board 3114 ( The light is emitted toward the side surface of the back box 3010 located on the side of the light guide radiation plate 3113). The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decoration substrate 3114 is emitted via the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the light emission near the transparent portion on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side of the pachinko machine 1. The region L2 and the light emitting region L3 can be visually recognized brightly.

  Light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is emitted from the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the light guide radiating plate 3113. A part of the light emitted from the rear side is emitted upward and backward from the back decoration substrate 3114. In a state where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the effect display device 1600 is not located above and behind the back rear decorative substrate 3114. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is blocked by the effect display device 1600 from the upper end of the light guide radiation plate 3113 via the light guide radiation plate 3113. Instead, the light is emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located above and behind the back decoration board 3114 (light guide radiation plate 3113). The back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 partially use a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the rear back decoration board 3114 passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and further emits light near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The region L1 can be viewed brightly.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 306, in the state where the back movable decoration 3110 is in the appearance position, since it is located in front of the effect display device 1600, the plurality of back decorations 3110 mounted on the front surface of the back movable decoration 3110 are located. Light from the LED is not irradiated toward the back box 3010 or the tank rail 553.

  Note that, in this example, a transparent flat light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided in the back rear movable decorative body 3110, and light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 conducts light. Although it is diffused in the light emitting plate 3113, the light guide emitting plate 3113 may not be provided. In such a case, the side of the back view decorative substrate 3114 is illuminated on the front side of the back view decorative substrate 3114 or toward the top and rear of the back view decorative substrate 3114 so as to irradiate light toward the front and back. Preferably, an LED 3114a is provided. Thus, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is also irradiated toward the side of the back box 3010 located on the side of the back decoration board 3114, and the pachinko machine 1 The light-emitting region L2 and the light-emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the side surface of the back box 3010 on the side of the side can be seen brightly. Light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located above and behind the back decoration board 3114, and becomes light. , The light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized brightly.

  Although the transparent box is partially provided in the back box 3010 of this example, a penetrating section may be provided in the back box 3010 instead of the transparent section. Even in such a case, light from the LED of the light-emitting decorative body can pass through the penetrating portion of the back box 3010. For example, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 passes through the bright portion of the back box 3010 and further passes through the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting region L1 near the transparent part can be visually recognized brightly.

  Further, the back box 3010 of this example is provided with a light-transmitting portion which is a transparent portion and a non-light-transmitting portion, and the non-light-transmitting portion is provided on the back side thereof (the back side of the pachinko machine 1). Side) is white-printed or white-painted, or mirror-finished or mirror-finished, and can reflect light with higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.) I have to. Thereby, the light directed to the non-light-transmitting portion can efficiently reflect the light on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized brightly.

  Further, regarding the above-described light-emitting decorative body, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the various decorative substrates is not only radiated toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but also on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Irradiates toward the back box 3010 or the tank rail 553 located on the front side of the decorative substrate (such as a decorative substrate of a luminous decorative body other than the luminous decorative body described above) to be specialized for the effect. The light from the plurality of LEDs is configured not to be emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, for the decorative substrate that should be specialized for production, the mounting surface is formed with a coating film made of green or black solder resist or enclosed in a box to diffuse the light from the LED. , And the light from the LED is clearly visible.

  As another example, the back decoration board 3114 may be provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. Such another example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 308, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is emitted toward the decoration 3111 located in front of the back decoration board 3452. A part of the light emitted toward the decoration 3111 is reflected and goes to the rear of the decoration 3111. When a plurality of holes are provided in the back decoration substrate 3114, the reflected light of the light emitted toward the decorative body 3111 passes through the plurality of holes and travels to the rear of the back decoration substrate 3114. It becomes possible. Note that a decorative body base 3115 is attached to the rear side of the back decoration board 3114 so as to cover the rear side of the back decoration board 3114. Holes are provided at corresponding positions. Thereby, light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 partially reflects on the decoration 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back decoration board 3114. Thus, light can be efficiently emitted toward the rear of the back decoration substrate 3114. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is partially reflected by the decoration body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back decoration board 3114. The light is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind (upper and rear) the back decoration board 3114, passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further passes through the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. The light-emitting region L1 near the transparent portion can be visually recognized brightly.

  In the above description, the back decoration substrate 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. The size of the holes is as small as possible. It is preferable that the LED is formed smaller than the LED. For example, when the size of the hole provided in the back decoration board 3114 is large, light from behind the back decoration board 3114 (for example, light emitted from the effect display device 1600) is transmitted to the back decoration board 3114. It is easy to enter through the hole provided in the 3114, and even if the LED mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is turned off, it may look as if it is turned on. Such an adverse effect can be reduced by reducing the size of the hole provided in the rear decoration substrate 3114.

  Similarly, the back decoration board 3114 is provided with a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction. The number of the holes is as small as possible. For example, the holes are mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114. It is preferable that the number of LEDs is smaller than the number of LEDs. For example, when the number of holes provided on the back decoration board 3114 is increased, light from behind the back decoration board 3114 (for example, light emitted from the effect display device 1600) emits light from the back decoration board 3114. It is easy to enter through the hole provided in the 3114, and even if the LED mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is turned off, it may look as if it is turned on. Such an adverse effect can be reduced by reducing the number of holes provided in the rear decoration substrate 3114.

  In the above description, a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided in the back decoration board 3114. Similarly, the plurality of front decoration boards 3422 and the back decoration board 3452 penetrating in the front-back direction are also provided. Holes may be provided. In this manner, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422 is reflected by the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421, and Light can be efficiently emitted toward the rear of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 through the plurality of holes provided in the front decorative substrate 3422. Also, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back-upper decoration board 3452 is reflected by the back-upper rotation decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 to form the back-upper decoration. Through a plurality of holes provided in the substrate 3452, light can be efficiently emitted toward the rear of the back upper rear decoration substrate 3452. In other words, a part of the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 and the back upper rear decorative substrate 3452 becomes reflected light, and the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 and the back upper rear decorative substrate 3422 are reflected light. The light is emitted toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the 3452, passes through the transparent portion of the back box 3010, and further emits the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. It can be seen brightly.

  Next, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are not shown in FIGS. 306 and 307, but will be described below. As described in detail above, when viewed from the front side of the game board 5, a back front left decorative body 3713 of the back front left decorative body unit 3710 is provided on the left side of the display area of the performance display device 1600, and the effect display. On the right side of the display area of the device 1600, a back right decoration 3813 of the back right decoration unit 3810 is provided. More specifically, the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right decorative body 3813 are provided with characters, items, logos, etc. in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and are provided with non-translucent parts and translucent parts. It consists of an optical lens part. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light-emitting decoration more vivid when viewed from the front.

  On the rear side of the back front left decorative body 3713, a back front left decorative board 3714 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front face is attached. Then, the back front left decorative board 3714 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light traveling forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713, and the back front left The lens portion of the decorative body 3713 can be illuminated. In addition, the front left back decorative board 3714 may be visible from the player side through the lens portion of the front left back decorative body 3713, especially when the LED is not emitting light. There is. In this regard, by providing the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 with a coating film made of a white solder resist, the lens portion from the player side can pass through the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713 from the player side. It is possible to recognize only white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 being visible.

  In addition, on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 (a surface portion facing the front side facing the player), side view type LEDs are mounted as a plurality of LEDs. The side-view type LED can reflect light to the front of the back front left decorative board 3714 and irradiate the light toward the front of the back front left decorative board 3714 (player side). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the lens portion of the front left back decoration 3713 located in front with light, and to lightly decorate the lens portion of the front left decoration 3713 brightly.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on a surface portion of the front surface of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713, and to brightly illuminate the lens portion of the back front left decorative body 3713.

  In the above description, the direction of the side-view type LED is provided on the back front left decorative board 3714 so that the light is emitted toward the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714. In other words, on the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714, the left side face of the back box 3010 on the side close to the back back decorative board 3114 among the side faces of the back box 3010 is located, and the direction of the side view type LED is set. Are provided facing the left side surface of the back box 3010. For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 is irradiated toward the left side surface of the back box 3010 located on the left side of the back front left decorative board 3714. Becomes The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 310, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front left decorative board 3714 emits light from the light emitting area near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 behind the pachinko machine 1. L2 can be seen brightly.

  Note that the back front right decorative body 3813 has the same configuration as the back front left decorative body 3713, and light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back front right decorative board 3814 is transmitted to the back front right decorative board 3814. It is configured to be irradiated toward the right side of the back box 3010 located on the right side of. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 311, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of the back front right decorative board 3814 is transmitted to the transparent portion of the light emitting area L3 on the right side of the back box 3010 behind the pachinko machine 1. The vicinity can be visually recognized brightly.

  Next, the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307. As described in detail above, when visually recognized from the front side of the game board 5, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 of the lower back middle rendering unit 3300 is provided in the lower center of the display area of the performance display device 1600. More specifically, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has six numeral decorations formed in a relief shape from “1” to “6” on the entire surface, and is rotated 60 degrees clockwise around the center. It is arranged on the circumference for each angle, and is composed of a non-light-transmitting part and a light-transmitting lens part. The “translucent lens portion” is a portion having a lens cut shape that bends light, and makes the light-emitting decoration more vivid when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 306, a back lower middle first decorative substrate 3322 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is attached to the rear side of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. Then, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, so that light traveling forward from the plurality of LEDs reaches the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, The lens portion of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be illuminated.

  As shown in FIG. 307, the under-back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can move from the evacuation position to the appearance position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. In a state in which the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, it is located behind the game panel 1100 forming the game area 5a and is visible to the player. At this time, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are located behind the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310. In addition, in a state in which the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has moved to the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600 and is visible to the player.

  In addition, a top-view type LED is mounted as a plurality of LEDs on the front surface (the surface facing the front side facing the player) of the first lower decorative substrate 3322. The top-view type LED can emit light toward the front (player side) of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322. For this reason, it is possible to efficiently irradiate light to the lens portion of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310 located at the front, and to brightly illuminate the lens portion of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310.

  In addition, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on a surface portion of the front surface of the lower first lower decorative substrate 3322 except for a plurality of mounted LEDs and other mounted components. I have. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to efficiently irradiate the light to the lens portion of the under-rear middle rotation decoration 3310, and to brightly illuminate the lens of the under-rear middle rotation decoration 3310. Also, the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 is visible from the player side through the lens portion of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, particularly when the LED is in a non-emission state. There is a possibility that it can be done. In this regard, by having the front surface of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 have a coating film made of a white solder resist, even through the lens portion of the lower back middle rotation decorative body 3310, from the player side, The lens portion can be recognized only in white, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by the front surface of the first decorative substrate 3322 being visible in the lower back.

  In addition, a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the lower surface of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 (the rear surface facing the back of the gaming machine) of the present example. As the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, a top view type LED is mounted, and behind the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 (the side opposite to the player side). In other words, it is possible to irradiate light toward the back of the pachinko machine 1).

  As shown in FIG. 306, in the state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position, the back box 3010 and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are located behind the lower back middle first decorative board 3322. ing. The back box 3010 partially uses a transparent member (transparent part), and the transparent part can transmit light with high transmittance. However, behind the back box 3010, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is located, and the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the first decorative board 3322 in the lower back is behind the main control board 1310. Is irradiated so as to brighten the vicinity of the light emitting area L4 near the transparent portion of the back box 3010, but is blocked by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 307, in a state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the appearance position, it is located in front of the effect display device 1600. For this reason, in a state where the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the appearance position, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 are controlled not to emit light.

  From the above, as the light emitting decorative body for brightening the back side and the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper decorative body. 3451, a back and back movable decorative body 3110 is provided, on the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative bodies. A unit 3810 is provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 309, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. The luminous decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from behind, and brightens the luminous area L2 near the transparent portion on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1). As shown in FIG. 311, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from behind, and the vicinity of a transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are lightened.

(About the advantage of providing a light emitting area on the back side of a pachinko machine)
Generally, the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility provided in a game hall. Specifically, a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row on one side of the island facility, or a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row on both sides of the island facility. Or be done. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the inside thereof is closed and darkened. By the way, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, control members such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, wiring connecting the control members, a supply mechanism of a game ball B used for a game, and the like are arranged. In some cases, maintenance is required for a predetermined location on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row on both sides of the island facility, the pachinko machines 1 on one side of the island facility are opened and the pachinko machines 1 on the other side are opened. Although the back surface can be maintained, since the inside of the island facility is dark, visibility of a portion to be maintained is poor, and it is difficult to visually check the back surface of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the pachinko machine 1 can open and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 about one side as an axis. Can be opened, and the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be maintained. However, in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, external light (hole light) is applied to a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is far from the open axis of the main body frame 4. While it is easy to reach and can be viewed brightly, external light (light from the hole) hardly reaches the portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 that is close to the open axis of the main body frame 4, It cannot be seen brightly. That is, when the location to be maintained is a portion close to the open shaft of the main body frame 4, the visibility of the location to be maintained is poor, and it is difficult to visually inspect the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies provided on the game board 5 not only make the front side of the pachinko machine 1 bright for decoration purposes, but also the back side and side surfaces are not decorative. It is configured to be bright for the purpose of. Specifically, the light from the LED mounted on the light emitting decorative body is directed not only to the front side of the pachinko machine 1 but also to the rear side and the side, and the light is transmitted to the transparent part of the back box 3010. The light-emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and the light-emitting region L2 and the light-emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 are configured to pass through. be able to. For example, the light irradiating the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 can pass through the transparent portion of the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553, and further brighten the rear of the pachinko machine 1. That is, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the inside thereof is closed and darkened, but by brightening the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the island facility can be brightened. Thereby, when performing maintenance on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the location to be maintained is improved, and the efficiency of visual work on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In the present example, the plurality of light-emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 have both a role of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and a role of brightening the back side and side surfaces of the pachinko machine 1. It is configured to be. For example, by providing an LED that can emit light toward the rear side on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to brighten the rear of the pachinko machine 1, but if an LED dedicated to maintenance is provided, The number of parts increases and the cost increases. In this regard, a plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies that brighten the front side of the pachinko machine 1 also serve to brighten the back side and side surfaces of the pachinko machine 1, thereby suppressing an increase in cost. it can.

  In the present example, the light from the LEDs of the plurality of light emitting decorations provided on the game board 5 is configured to brighten the back side and the side of the pachinko machine 1. It is not desirable that the light source of the LED is directly viewed during the maintenance of the rear surface or the side surface. Therefore, the light source of the LED that makes the rear surface or the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 brighter is It is configured to be indirect light that is not directly viewed. For example, the back-upper decorative body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper decorative board 3422, and is capable of emitting light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, when viewed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, when the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is viewed), the LED is provided with a cover so that the light source of the LED is not directly viewed, The light from the LED is configured to be indirect light. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED that makes the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter from hindering the operation.

(About the characteristic configuration of the light-emitting decorative body of this example)
The light-emitting decorative body of the present example is variously devised so that the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is not only brightened for decorative purposes, but also the back side and the side faces are brightened for purposes other than decoration. Although described above in detail, specific configurations include the following configurations.

  First, the back-side movable decorative body 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the back-side decorative board 3114, and is capable of emitting light toward the front (the front side) of the pachinko machine 1. In a state where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, and the back upper rear decorative body 3451 are located in front of the back rear movable decorative body 3110. I have. From this, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is reflected by the front upper back decoration 3410, the front decoration 3421, and the back decoration 3451. The light is indirectly irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back decoration board 3114. Thus, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 illuminates and decorates the rear movable decoration 3110, and brightens the front side of the pachinko machine 1. After passing through the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened.

  The back decorative movable body 3110 of the present example receives and emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decorative board 3114. The upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, and the back upper rear decorative body 3451 have a larger area than the back rear movable decorative body 3110. From this, when the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is reflected on the back upper rotation decoration body 3410, the back upper decoration body 3421, and the back upper decoration body 3451. In addition, it is diffused to a wider area than the back movable decorative body 3110. Thereby, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be widened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently brightened.

  In the above description, a coating film made of a white solder resist is formed on the rear surface of the front upper decorative body 3421 and the rear surface of the rear upper decorative body 3451. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with a higher reflectance than other colors (red, black, green, etc.). For this reason, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is reflected with high reflectance on the rear surface of the back decoration body 3421 and the rear surface of the back decoration body 3451. Thus, the light is efficiently irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind the back decoration board 3114. Thereby, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be efficiently brightened.

  Next, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back rear decorative board 3114, and can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. However, as described as another example, by providing a plurality of holes penetrating in the front-rear direction in the back decoration board 3114, the reflected light of the light irradiated toward the decoration 3111 of the back decoration 3110 is formed. , Through the plurality of holes, it is possible to go to the rear of the back decoration board 3114. That is, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 is partially reflected by the decoration body 3111 and passes through the plurality of holes provided in the back decoration board 3114. Then, the light is irradiated toward the back box 3010 and the tank rail 553 located behind (upper and rear) of the back decoration board 3114. Accordingly, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back decoration board 3114 emits light and decorates the back movable decoration body 3110 and brightens the front side of the pachinko machine 1. After passing through the transparent part 3010, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened, and the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 can be played.

  Next, the back upper front decorative body 3421 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, and can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. I have. Behind the back upper decorative body 3421, a part where the back upper rotating decorative body 3440, the back upper decorative body 3451, and the back movable movable body 3110 are located at the retracted position, and a back upper rear rotating decorative body. 3440, the back upper decorative body 3451, and the part where the back movable movable body 3110 is not located. Of these, the portion where the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, the back-upper decoration 3451, and the back-movable decoration 3110 are located at the retracted position are mounted on the back surface of the back-upper decoration board 3422. The light from the plurality of LEDs is reflected on the rear upper and lower back decorations 3440 and 3451 located at the rear and the rear movable decoration 3110 and is directed toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1. Irradiation. On the other hand, for the portion where the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, the back-upper decoration 3451, and the back-movable decoration 3110 are not located, the back box 3010 and the tank rail located behind the back-upper decoration board 3422 are located. 553 is directly irradiated. Accordingly, the light from the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3422, in addition to the role of brightening the front side of the pachinko machine 1, passes through the back box 3010, and the pachinko machine 1 The light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 at the rear can be brightened, and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened.

  Next, as a light-emitting decorative body, on the upper part of the game board 5, a back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410, a back-upper front decorative body 3421, a back-upper decorative body 3451, and a back-back movable decorative body 3110 are provided. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided. On the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided. Have been. The light-emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and the light-emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 By visually recognizing the pachinko machine 1 from behind, the light emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and the light emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the game board 5 By visually recognizing the pachinko machine 1 from behind, the light emitting area L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and the plurality of areas on the back side and the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 are reduced. It is possible to make it bright.

  In addition, the light emitting decorative body includes an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, an LED that can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1, Is provided. As for the LED capable of emitting light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1, the light is reflected by a member located in front of the LED and is directed toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. The back light of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened by the indirect light. On the other hand, with respect to the LED that can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be brightened by the direct light. At this time, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 is used, and an area that can be brightened by the indirect light is used. It is also possible to use an LED that can emit light toward the rear (rear side) of the light emitting device and to separate an area that can be brightened by the direct light.

  In the above description, the area that can be brightened by the direct light from the LED may be a part of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 where a worker such as a hall manager can perform work. Are suitable. As will be described in detail later, examples of a part where a worker such as a hall manager can perform an operation include an operation part 640a of the back cover 640 and a detachable part. The operation unit 640a and the attachment / detachment unit of the back cover 640 are provided at positions where the direct light from the LED can be received, so that the operation unit 640a can receive the direct light from the LED and make it brighter than the indirect light. it can. Thus, when working on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4. By visually recognizing the operation unit 640a and the attachment / detachment unit, an object to be operated by the operator can be easily confirmed, and the attachment / detachment of the back cover 640 to / from the main body frame 4 is facilitated, and the inspection work of the hall manager is performed. Can be facilitated.

  When direct light from the LED is applied to a portion where a worker such as a hall manager can perform a work as described above, a board on which such an LED is mounted is used. Preferably, the mounting surface is dark (eg, green or black). When a dark mounting surface is used, the light is hardly reflected by the dark mounting surface, so that the direct light from the LED is not diffused much, and the portion irradiated with the direct light from the LED is pinpointed. It becomes possible to irradiate light. Thereby, for example, when the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640 and the attachment / detachment unit are provided at a position where the direct light from the LED can be received, the direct light from the LED is received at a pinpoint, The operation portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 can be clearly recognized by the difference in brightness from the peripheral portion.

(Adjustment of light intensity of light emitting area provided on back side of pachinko machine)
The hall environment in which the island facilities are provided is various. For example, it is conceivable that the inside of the island facilities is separately brightened regardless of the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has a configuration for brightening the back side, but there is a possibility that such a back side need not be brightened. In addition, when the number of pachinko machines 1 whose back side is brightened as a gaming machine provided in the island facility is small, although the inside of the island facility is dark, only the back side is brightened at normal brightness. Then, there is a possibility that the inside of the island facilities cannot be made sufficiently bright. Therefore, an example in which the brightness on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted according to the hall environment will be described below.

  The light emitting decorative body of the present example includes an LED that can emit light toward the front (front side) of the pachinko machine 1 and an LED that can emit light toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1. Are provided, but for these LEDs, the light amount is adjusted stepwise by performing a light amount adjustment operation using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. It is possible to adjust. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of the light quantity of the LED from 1 (lowest light quantity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light quantity), and the light quantity of the LED increases as the level increases. . In other words, the LED of the light emitting decorative body is configured such that light is directed toward the rear (back side) of the pachinko machine 1 and the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is brightened, but the light amount of the LED is adjustable. Thus, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed. For example, when the interior of the island facility has a bright hall environment, a worker such as a hall manager may adjust the light amount of the LED to be small so as to darken the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In the case of a dark hall environment in the island facility, a worker such as a hall manager may adjust the amount of LED light so that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is bright. As described above, by adjusting the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 according to the hall environment, when performing maintenance on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the location to be maintained is improved, The efficiency of the visual work on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In the above, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed by adjusting the light amount of the LED of the light emitting decorative body, and the degree of freedom of the visual recognition mode with respect to the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. However, assuming that the light amounts of the LEDs are collectively adjusted for all the light-emitting decorative bodies provided on the front side of the game board 5, for example, when the light amounts of the LEDs of all the light-emitting decorative bodies are reduced. The front side of the pachinko machine 1 becomes too dark, and the original effect (such as a customer approach) using the light-emitting decorative body may be lost while the worker is working during the hall operation. Further, even when the worker reduces the light amount of the LED of the light-emitting decorative body and neglected to return the light amount of the LED after the work, the original effect using the light-emitting decorative body is reduced. May be lost. In this regard, in the present example, among the light-emitting decorative bodies provided for the purpose of decoration provided on the front side of the game board 5, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410, the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper decorative body 3451, and the back upper decorative body 3451 As described above, since the rear movable decorative body 3110 and the like also have the role of brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the light amount of the LED is adjusted by the light amount adjusting operation. Of the light-emitting decorative bodies provided for the decorative purpose provided on the side, the light-emitting decorative body having the first big winning opening decorative board 2420 for light-emitting decoration of the first big winning opening 2005 is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. It does not have a role of brightening the light, but is a light-emitting decorative body that brightens with an emphasis on the purpose of attracting customers, and is excluded from the adjustment of the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation. That is, among the light-emitting decorative bodies for the purpose of decoration, at least the light-emitting decorative body having a role of brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is an object of adjusting the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjusting operation. Thereby, the light amount of the LED of the light emitting decorative body is adjusted, and, for example, even if the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is darkened, the light emitting decorative body provided on the front side of the game board 5 has the brightness. Therefore, it is possible to favorably maintain the purpose of attracting customers.

  Note that the light amount adjustment operation of the LED of the light-emitting decorative body can be performed both in a standby state in which the symbols are not variably displayed and in a variable display in which the symbols are variably displayed. In this example, the player can perform the light amount adjustment operation using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a separate operation unit that allows the hall manager to perform a light amount adjustment operation may be provided. At this time, the object of adjusting the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation on the operation unit for the hall manager is the same as the object of adjusting the light amount of the LED by the light amount adjustment operation on the operation unit for the player. In addition, even if the light amount adjustment operation for the player's operation unit is adjusted to the minimum light amount, the light amount cannot be set to zero and the LED cannot be completely turned off. As for the light amount adjustment operation, when the light amount is adjusted to the minimum, the light amount may be set to zero and the LED may be completely turned off.

(About the visibility of the wiring provided on the side of the pachinko machine)
Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (on the back side of the back box 3010), various substrates and wiring for connecting the various substrates are provided. Since the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration in which the back side is brightened by using light from the light emitting decoration provided on the game board 5, the wiring exposed outside the pachinko machine 1 is described. Is easy to check the status from the outside, but it is difficult to check the status from the outside for the wiring that is not exposed outside the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to easily check the state of the wiring that is not exposed outside the pachinko machine 1 from outside will be described below.

  In this example, on the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided as light-emitting decorative bodies for brightening the back side and the side of the pachinko machine 1, and on the right side of the game board 5, Three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 310, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from behind, and the transparent portion on the right side surface of the back box 3010 (the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1). The light-emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from the rear, as shown in FIG. 311, and the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the pachinko machine 1 (Left side) of the light-emitting region L3 near the transparent portion is brightened.

  In addition, on the back surface of the back box 3010, an effect drive board 1720 for driving a decoration board, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in accordance with a command from the peripheral control board 1510 is attached. Have been. The effect drive board 1720 is electrically connected to the decoration board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like by a plurality of wirings, and these wirings are along the left side surface and the right side surface inside the back box 3010. It was arranged so that. In this regard, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from behind, and changes the light-emitting area L2 near the transparent part on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1). Since the light is radiated so as to be bright, it is possible to satisfactorily visually recognize the state of the wiring along the right side inside the back box 3010. Similarly, the light-emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the game board 5 visually recognizes the pachinko machine 1 from behind, and changes the light-emitting area L3 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1). Since the light is radiated so as to be bright, it is possible to satisfactorily visually recognize the state of the wiring along the left side surface inside the back box 3010. For example, when the decorative board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like do not operate normally, the wiring along the left side or the right side inside the back box 3010 is disconnected or disconnected from the connection terminal. However, by irradiating the light such that the left side and the right side are brightened, the visibility of the wiring from the side of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, and the work of confirming the state of the wiring is performed. Efficiency can be improved.

  Further, in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 is a portion far from the open axis of the main body frame 4. Light from the outside (light of the hall) easily reaches the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1 and the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1 which is a portion close to the open axis of the main body frame 4. , Light from the outside (light of the hole) hardly reaches, and it cannot be seen brightly. For this reason, when a structure for brightening the back surface or side surface is not provided unlike a conventional gaming machine, the wiring is arranged near the right side surface of the pachinko machine 1, which is a portion close to the open axis of the main body frame 4. When it becomes necessary to check the state of the wiring, it has become particularly difficult. In this regard, in this example, in the present example, light is applied so as to brighten the light emitting area L2 near the transparent portion on the right side of the back box 3010, and wiring that needs to be arranged near the right side of the pachinko machine 1 is described. Are arranged along the right side inside the back box 3010. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the state of the wiring along the right side inside the back box 3010 cannot be visually recognized.

  In this example, as the wiring along the side surface inside the back box 3010, the wiring connecting the effect drive board 1720, the decorative board, the drive motor, the drive solenoid, and the like is given. Alternatively, for example, a wiring connected to the main control board 1310 may be used. The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. For example, the main control board 1310 outputs information related to the game to the outside (a hall computer) via an external terminal plate 558 connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring. And At this time, if the wiring connecting the main control board 1310 and the external terminal board 558 is illegal, the information regarding the game cannot be normally grasped outside (the hall computer), and the pachinko machine 1 A situation arises in which fraud is likely to occur. That is, among the various wirings, the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 can be said to be a wiring having a high importance in progressing the game. In this regard, by irradiating the light so as to brighten the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is improved, and such illegal wiring is performed. Can be prevented.

  In addition, a plurality of wirings are bundled by a hook portion formed integrally with the back box 3010 and a bundling wire with respect to the wirings along the left side surface and the right side surface inside the back box 3010. These hook portions and the bundled wires are formed of a translucent member, and are provided at positions visible through transparent portions on the left and right sides of the back box 3010. Thus, light is emitted so as to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1). At this time, the hook portions and the bundled wires themselves are brightened, so that the state of the wiring can be easily visually recognized. Further, when irradiating light so as to brighten the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side of the back box 3010 (left side of the pachinko machine 1). In addition, it is possible to prevent the brightness of such a light emitting region from decreasing without hindering the progress of light.

  In addition, the wirings along the left side surface and the right side surface in the inside of the back box 3010 are formed so that the transparent parts on the left side surface and the right side of the back box 3010 are not blocked by the plurality of wirings. Are superimposed or bundled in the vertical direction on the left side surface or right side surface of the back box 3010. For example, if a plurality of wirings are provided so as to be parallel to the left side and the right side of the back box 3010, a transparent portion on the left side and the right side of the back box 3010 will be blocked, and the left side of the back box 3010 will be closed. It is difficult to maintain the brightness of the light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion of the surface and the light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion of the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1). By providing a plurality of wirings so as not to cover the transparent portions on the left side surface and the right side surface, such a situation can be prevented from occurring.

(About the change of the visual recognition mode of the light emitting area when the state changes)
Further, in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed on the island facility, if the pachinko machine 1 is opened and the main body frame 4 is being maintained, the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island facility are to be maintained. Even if an abnormality occurs, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 in which the abnormality has occurred cannot be visually recognized, making it difficult to notice the occurrence of the abnormality. Therefore, an example in which the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be recognized even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

  In this example, as a light-emitting decorative body, at the upper part of the gaming board 5, a back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410, a back-upper front decorative body 3421, a back-upper decorative body 3451, and a back-movable decorative body 3110 are provided. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided, and on the right side of the game board 5, three back front right decorative body units 3810 are provided. In addition, with regard to these luminous decorative bodies, if any abnormality such as detection of fraud by magnets or vibrations occurs and the game cannot be played, the luminous decorations remain until the abnormality is resolved. The LED provided on the body is controlled to blink. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553, a right side of the back box 3010 (a right side of the pachinko machine 1) The light emitting area L2 near the transparent part and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) are provided, and the LED provided on the light emitting decorative body is controlled to blink. At this time, these light-emitting regions are made to blink. With this, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility and the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, the other pachinko machines 1 on the back side of the island facility can be maintained. When an abnormality occurs, the light-emitting area that can be brightened by the other light-emitting decorations of the pachinko machine 1 blinks, so that the occurrence of the abnormality can be recognized through the interior of the island facility. Become. In other words, even when the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, an abnormality with respect to another pachinko machine 1 on the same island facility can be found at an early stage through the inside of the island facility. It is possible to prevent fraudulent operations on other pachinko machines 1.

  Further, with respect to the LEDs of the light-emitting decorative body, the light amount adjustment operation using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 in the effect operation unit 300 is performed, so that the light amount is adjusted stepwise. Making it possible. For example, it is possible to adjust the level of the light quantity of the LED from 1 (lowest light quantity) → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 (maximum light quantity), and the light quantity of the LED increases as the level increases. . As described above in detail, the brightness of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed by adjusting the amount of light of the LED of the light emitting decorative body. However, when an abnormality such as detection of fraud by a magnet or vibration is detected, the LED of the light emitting decoration body for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is configured to be controlled to blink with the adjusted light amount. When the adjusted light amount is darkened, the occurrence of an abnormality may not be noticed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Further, even when the worker reduces the light amount of the LED of the light emitting decorative body and neglected to return the light amount of the LED after the work, the light amount of the LED is small and the light amount of the LED from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. Then, in some cases, the occurrence of an abnormality was not noticed. In this regard, in this example, during a period in which a game cannot be performed due to occurrence of some abnormality such as detection of fraud by a magnet or vibration, the amount of light of the LED of the light emitting decorative body for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is determined. Adjustment is disabled, and the LED is controlled to blink at a predetermined light amount (for example, step 5 which is the upper limit light amount among the light amounts that can be adjusted in a normal state). Accordingly, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, when the light-emitting area that can be made brighter by the light-emitting decorative body flickers, the light-emitting area does not become too dark. In other words, even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to detect the abnormality without noticing the occurrence of the abnormality, and to surely detect the abnormality, thereby preventing illegal operation of the other pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented.

  Similarly, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 3, the LED provided on the light-emitting decorative body is controlled to blink until the main body frame 4 is closed. I have to. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553, a right side of the back box 3010 (a right side of the pachinko machine 1) The light emitting area L2 near the transparent part and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) are provided, and the LED provided on the light emitting decorative body is controlled to blink. At this time, these light-emitting regions are made to blink. For example, in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in the island facility, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, the main body of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility is installed. Even if a fraudster opens the frame 4 fraudulently, it is difficult to notice the fraudulent opening action because the front side of the pachinko machine 1 that has been fraudulently opened cannot be seen. However, in this example, when the fraudulent person illegally opens the main body frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 brighter with the light emitting decorative body. The blinking of the light emitting area makes it possible to recognize an unauthorized opening action through the inside of the island facility. In other words, even if the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, an act of illegally opening the pachinko machine 1 to another pachinko machine 1 on the same island facility via the inside of the island facility is found at an early stage. It is possible to prevent fraudulent operations on other pachinko machines 1.

  When the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 3, not only a period until the main body frame 4 is closed but also a certain time after the main body frame 4 is closed. Until the operation, the blinking control of the LED provided in the light-emitting decorative body may be continued. Thus, when a fraudulent person illegally opens the main frame 4 of another pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility, even if the opening is for a short time, the luminous decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 is performed. The flashing of the light emitting area, which can be made brighter by the body, continues for a certain period of time, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which an illegal opening operation is overlooked through the inside of the island facility as much as possible.

  Further, for the light-emitting decorative body, when the display shifts to the standby state in which the symbol change is not performed, the light amount of the LED provided in the light-emitting decorative body is changed until the symbol change is started and the standby state ends. It is controlled to decrease. On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553, a right side of the back box 3010 (a right side of the pachinko machine 1) ), A light-emitting area L2 near the transparent part and a light-emitting area L3 near the transparent part on the left side of the back box 3010 (the left side of the pachinko machine 1) are provided, and the light amount of the LED provided on the light-emitting decorative body is reduced. When controlled, these light-emitting regions are darkened. For example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are installed in the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 is opened for maintenance and the main body 4 is under maintenance, the front of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility is installed. Since the side is invisible, it is difficult to grasp whether the pachinko machine 1 is playing a game. However, in this example, when the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility shifts to the standby state, the light emitting area that can be made brighter by the light emitting decoration of the other pachinko machine 1 is darkened. , It is possible to know whether or not a game is being played through the interior of the island facility. In other words, even when the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and maintenance is being performed, it is possible to determine whether or not another pachinko machine 1 on the same island facility is playing a game through the interior of the island facility. It is possible to determine whether or not it is necessary to strengthen the monitoring so that no fraud occurs during the standby state.

(Change in visibility of light emitting area during operation of light emitting decorative body)
In addition, when the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened and the maintenance of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is being performed, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 cannot be visually recognized. It is difficult to check whether the body works properly. Therefore, an example in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the movable body normally operates even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described below.

  In this example, as a luminous decorative body for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, a back-upper rotating decoration 3410, a back-upper decorative body 3421, a back-upper rotating decoration 3440, and a back-up. A rear decorative body 3451 and a back rear movable decorative body 3110 are provided. The light emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. are doing. Of these, the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440, the back-upper decorative body 3451, and the back-movable decorative body 3110 can move from the retracted position to the appearing position when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. . In a state in which the back-upper rotating decorative body 3440, the back-upper decorative body 3451, and the back-back movable decorative body 3110 have moved to the appearance positions, light from the LEDs of these light-emitting decorative bodies is transparent to the tank rail 553. The light emitting region L1 near the site was prevented from reaching. In particular, the light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back upper decorative body 3451 is prevented from reaching the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. On the other hand, with respect to the light from the LED mounted on the back surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3440, the back upper rear decorative body 3451, and the back rear movable decorative body 3110 move to the appearance position. As a result, the light is not interrupted because it is not located behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, and the light reaches the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. That is, during operation of the light-emitting decorative body that can operate, of the plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies, the brightness in the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 changes, and the light is visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Of the light emitting region L1 can be changed. Thereby, even if it is from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to grasp whether or not the light-emitting decorative body is operating by changing the visual recognition mode of the light-emitting area L1.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, an initial operation of a light-emitting decorative body that can operate among a plurality of light-emitting decorative bodies is performed. Specifically, an operation is performed in which the back-upper rotating decoration 3440, the back-upper decoration 3451, and the back-movable decoration 3110 move from the retracted position to the appearing position, and then move from the appearing position to the retracted position. An operation is repeatedly performed to confirm that these light-emitting decorative bodies can move to the appearance position. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and operate the power switch of the power supply board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. At times, it is not possible to directly visually check from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 whether or not the initial operation of the light-emitting decorative body is normally performed, and it has been particularly difficult to check the operation. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 is changed according to the operation of the light emitting decorative body, and even from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 is changed. By visually confirming the change in the visual recognition mode, it was possible to confirm that the initial operation of the light-emitting decorative body was performed normally. Thus, when the power switch is operated, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized, but the visual appearance of the light emitting area L1 is changed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 when the initial operation of the light emitting decorative body is performed. It is only necessary to check whether or not the visual operation is performed, and the efficiency of the visual operation for the initial operation of the light emitting decorative body can be improved.

  It should be noted that the brightness of the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is changed during the operation of the light emitting decorative body that can operate among the plurality of light emitting decorative bodies. It is preferable that the configuration is such that the change in brightness is large between the state where the light-emitting decorative body is at the retracted position and the state where it is at the appearance position. For example, an LED that emits light toward the light-emitting region L1 is mounted on the rear surface of the back-upper front decorative substrate 3422, but a back-upper-back rotating decorative body 3440 located behind the back-upper front decorative substrate 3422. When the back decoration 3451 or the back movable decoration 3110 moves to the appearance position, the LED mounted on the rear surface of the back decoration board 3422 may be turned off. The LED itself may not be mounted on the rear surface of the upper front decorative substrate 3422. In such a configuration, when the back-upper rotating decoration 3440 and the back-upper decoration 3451 located behind the back-upper decoration board 3422 or the back-movable decoration 3110 move to the appearance position, Light from the LED mounted on the rear surface of the front decorative substrate 3422 does not reach the light emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, and the brightness of the light emitting region L1 can be reduced. As a result, the change in brightness in the light-emitting area L1 between the state in which the light-emitting decorative body is in the retracted position and the state in which the light-emitting decorative body is in the appearance position is large, and whether the light-emitting decorative body is operating from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 It can be easily grasped.

(About the light from the back side of the staging display)
In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has a configuration in which the back side is brightened by using light from the light-emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5, and the effect display is performed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In the area behind the device 1600, the light from the LED of the light emitting decoration is cut off by the effect display device 1600, and it is not possible to light the bright spot on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 only by using the light emitting decoration. There is. For example, in a region behind the effect display device 1600, if a part that the hall manager needs to work on is dark, it becomes difficult to work on that part. Therefore, an example in which a predetermined portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be made bright even in a region behind the effect display device 1600 will be described below.

  First, the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 312 is a diagram illustrating an opening provided on the back surface side of the effect display device. As shown in FIG. 312, effect display device 1600 is provided so as to cover a box-like box 1611 (metal frame) having front and rear openings and a front opening of box 1611 to display a predetermined image. A liquid crystal panel 1612 which is provided behind the liquid crystal panel 1612 and which is capable of irradiating light toward the liquid crystal panel 1612; and a light guide plate 1613 which is provided below the light guide plate 1613. A light emitting substrate 1615 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the light guide plate 1613 are mounted, and a light guide substrate 1615 provided behind the light guide plate 1613 so as to close an opening on the rear side of the box 1611; A metal back panel 1614 (metal back cover) capable of blocking light from the light plate 1613 to the rear. Although not shown, the effect display device 1600 includes a panel driving board that drives the liquid crystal panel 1612.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted side by side on the light emitting substrate 1615 on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 can emit light toward the light guide plate 1613 located above the light emitting substrate 1615. Further, the light guide plate 1613 can receive light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 and emit light from the front side of the light guide plate 1613, and is located in front of the light guide plate 1613. It is possible to irradiate the liquid crystal panel 1612 with light. Therefore, light can be efficiently emitted to the liquid crystal panel 1612, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be viewed brightly.

  The light emitting substrate 1615 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounting components. A coating film made of a white solder resist can reflect light with high reflectance. Therefore, light can be efficiently emitted to the liquid crystal panel 1612, and a predetermined image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 1612 can be viewed brightly.

  On the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615, a connector 1615a for electrically connecting to the effect drive board 1720 is mounted. The connector 1615a is an opaque member. The connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 has a terminal surface facing rearward, and is connected to the connector on the wiring side on which the wiring from the effect driving board 1720 is bundled, so that the light emitting substrate 1615 is effected. The driving substrate 1720 can be electrically connected. Thus, the effect drive board 1720 can control whether or not a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615 are lit, adjust brightness, and the like.

  The light guide plate 1613 is configured to receive light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 and emit light intensely on the front side of the light guide plate 1613, but only on the front side of the light guide plate 1613. Instead, the light guide plate 1613 is also configured to emit light weakly on the rear surface side and the side surface. As described above, the light-emitting substrate 1615 has a coating film made of a white solder resist on the surface excluding a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface and other mounting components and the like. The light emission is enhanced not only on the front side of the light plate 1613 but also on the rear side and side surfaces of the light guide plate 1613.

  The back panel 1614 is configured to block the light from the light guide plate 1613 that emits light by receiving the light from the plurality of LEDs, and the back panel 1614 receives the light from the light guide plate 1613. A plurality of openings that can pass through are intentionally provided at predetermined positions. Accordingly, light from the rear surface or side surface of the light guide plate 1613 that emits light by receiving light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted from the plurality of openings toward the rear (the rear of the effect display device 1600). It is possible.

  Specifically, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided at the lower left portion of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600, and two openings B are provided on the right side of the back panel 1614 and slightly near the center. The opening C is provided on the right side along the right end of the back panel 1614, and the opening D is provided on the upper side along the upper end of the back panel 1614.

  First, the opening A of the back panel 1614 is provided at a position corresponding to the rear of the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615. The opening A is an opening that is slightly larger than the connector 1615a. Thereby, the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615 can be visually recognized from the opening A. Since the light from the rear side or the side of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits the light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted from the opening A, the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a is brightened. It can be visually recognized. Accordingly, the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting substrate 1615 needs to be connected to the connector 1615a on the wiring side where the wiring from the effect drive substrate 1720 is bundled, but the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a is required. By visually recognizing, it can be easily confirmed whether or not the connection with the connector on the wiring side is normal, and the inspection work of the hall manager can be facilitated.

  By the way, a plurality of LEDs are provided on the light emitting board 1615. From the opening A, the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615 is visible, while all of the plurality of LEDs are visible. It is configured to be impossible. In other words, of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting board 1615, even the LED closest to the opening A is not provided at a position where the LED can be visually recognized from the opening A. For example, when light from some of the plurality of LEDs is directly radiated through the opening A, when working on the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615, Direct light from the LED enters the eyes of the worker, making it difficult to perform the work. On the other hand, since the light from the plurality of LEDs is only indirectly irradiated through the opening A, it becomes difficult to work on the connector 1615a mounted on the upper surface of the light emitting board 1615. Can be prevented. Similarly, the openings B to D of the back panel 1614 are configured so that any of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate 1615 cannot be viewed from the openings B to D.

  The two openings B of the back panel 1614 are vertically arranged at a position slightly closer to the center than the opening C on the right side of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces forward, but when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the rear side of the game board 5 is provided. Is provided so as to cover. The back cover 640 can be opened and closed around the left side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 as viewed from behind the pachinko machine 1. On the right side of the back cover 640, two operation units 640a are provided vertically separated from each other so as to be able to be operated by an operator, while the main body frame 4 corresponds to each of the two operation units 640a. Are provided at two positions where two operating portions 640a can be respectively attached and detached. By detaching the operating portion 640a from the attaching and detaching portion, the back cover 640 is attached to the main body frame 4. Can be opened and closed. The back cover 640 (the operation unit 640a) and the attachment / detachment unit are both transparent or translucent members.

  When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the operation portion 640 a of the back cover 640 and the detachable portion are provided at a position corresponding to the rear of the opening B of the back panel 1614 (the rear of the effect display device 1600). ing. In other words, since the light from the rear surface or the side surface of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits the light from the plurality of LEDs is radiated from the opening B, the operation unit 640 a of the back cover 640 and the detachable unit Are provided at positions where such light can be received. Accordingly, the operation unit 640a and the detachable unit of the back cover 640 receive the light from the opening B, so that the light emitting area L6 near the operation unit 640a and the detachable unit of the back cover 640 can be visually recognized. When working on various boards such as the main control board 1310 attached to the game board 5, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4, but the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640 is required. By making the light-emitting area L6 near the attachment / detachment area brightly visible, it is possible to easily confirm an object to be operated by the operator, and to easily attach / detach the back cover 640 to / from the main body frame 4, thereby making it easier for the hall manager. Inspection work can be facilitated.

  The main body frame 4 can be opened and closed around a main frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 located on the right side of the outer frame 2 when viewed from behind the pachinko machine 1. That is, the operation unit 640 a and the attachment / detachment unit of the back cover 640 are provided at positions near the open shaft of the main body frame 4. A plurality of pachinko machines 1 are provided side by side on the gaming island, and the inside of the gaming island is darkened in a closed space. When the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, light (hole light) from the outside reaches a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 far from the open axis of the main body frame 4. While the pachinko machine 1 can be easily viewed brightly, light from outside (light of a hole) hardly reaches a portion of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 which is close to the open axis of the main body frame 4 and is visually recognized brightly. Can not do it. In this regard, the operating portion 640a and the detachable portion of the back cover 640 are located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 near the opening axis of the main frame 4, and the main frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. However, the light from the outside (light from the hole) is difficult to reach, but by receiving the light from the opening B, the operation section 640a of the back cover 640 and the light emitting area L6 near the attaching / detaching section can be viewed brightly. Can be.

  The opening C of the back panel 1614 is provided on the right side along the right end of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 so that the display area faces forward, but when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is behind the opening C. A payout unit 560 is provided at the position. The payout unit 560 is configured to guide the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, and to send the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 that pays out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game balls B that pass through the upper full ball path unit 600 by the door frame 3 side. Or a lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side, but behind the opening C, the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit of the payout unit 560. 600 are located. Note that at least the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the upper full tank path unit 600 of the payout unit 560 are transparent members.

  Since the light from the rear surface or the side surface of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted from the opening C, the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560 includes The light-emitting region L7 near the payout device 580 and the upper full ball path unit 600 can be visually recognized brightly. Accordingly, in the payout unit 560, when the game ball B is guided downward from the tank rail 553, there is a possibility that the ball is clogged. However, the light emitting area L7 in the vicinity of the payout unit 560 is visually recognized brightly. It is possible to easily check whether or not the ball is clogged in the passage for guiding the ball B, and to easily remove the ball when the ball is clogged. Work can be facilitated.

  The opening D of the back panel 1614 is provided at an upper portion along the upper end of the back panel 1614 when viewed from behind the effect display device 1600. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the game board 5 so that the display area faces forward. A tank rail 553 is provided at a position. Note that the tank rail 553 uses a transparent member and can transmit light with high transmittance. Since the light from the rear surface or the side surface of the light guide plate 1613 that receives and emits light from the plurality of LEDs is emitted from the opening D, the light emitting area near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 is emitted. L1 can be visually recognized brightly.

  As described above in detail, with regard to the light-emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5, if any abnormality such as detection of fraud by a magnet or vibration occurs and the game cannot be played, the abnormality is performed. Until the situation is resolved, the LED provided on the light-emitting decorative body is controlled to blink. In other words, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 and the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) ), A light emitting region L2 near the transparent portion and a light emitting region L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) are provided, and the LEDs provided on the light emitting decorative body are controlled to blink. As a result, these light-emitting regions blink.

  In addition, when an abnormality such as detection of fraud by magnets or vibrations occurs and the game cannot be performed, if the pachinko machine 1 has an abnormality, the pachinko machine 1 needs to contact the outer frame 3. In some cases, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 and perform maintenance on members provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. For example, in order to perform maintenance on various substrates disposed inside the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the back cover 640 with respect to the main body frame 4 by operating the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640. In some cases, a ball clogging may occur in the payout unit 560, and it may be necessary to remove the ball clogging. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is configured to blink the LED provided on the light-emitting board 1615 of the effect display device 1600 similarly to the LED provided on the light-emitting decoration body when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the maintenance can be performed. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the work target. In this regard, in the present example, the effect of the effect display device 1600 can be reduced even if some abnormality occurs, such as detection of fraud by a magnet or vibration, and the game cannot be played. The LED provided on the light emitting substrate 1615 is not controlled to blink, but is controlled to be always on as in the normal case. In other words, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, as a light emitting area that can receive light from the opening of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 and brighten it, the area around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615 is provided. A light emitting area L5, a light emitting area L6 near the operation unit 640a of the back cover 640 and the detachable unit, a light emitting area L7 near the payout unit 560, and a light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 are provided. By controlling the LEDs provided on the light emitting substrate 1615 of the illuminating device 1660 to be constantly turned on as in the normal state, the visibility of these light emitting regions does not change. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the LED provided on the light-emitting decoration is controlled to blink, but in a place where maintenance is highly necessary, the lighting is constantly controlled as in the normal case. By providing the light emitting region described above, the visibility is good without changing the visibility, and the efficiency of the maintenance work at the time of abnormality on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

(About visibility of the gap between control boards provided on the back side of pachinko machine 1)
Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (on the back side of the back box 3010), various substrates and wiring for connecting the various substrates are provided. The pachinko machine 1 of this example has a configuration in which the back surface side is brightened by using light from a light emitting decorative body provided on the game board 5 and an opening of the back panel 1614 in the effect display device 1600. When the entire area on the back side of the machine 1 is configured to be bright, the hall manager can easily perform maintenance work in the island facilities, while various substrates provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are provided. This makes it easier for fraudsters to commit fraud. Therefore, an example will be described below in which the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is configured to be bright, but it is difficult for a wrongdoer to perform wrongdoing on various substrates provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. .

  As shown in FIG. 309, as the light-emitting decorative body for brightening the back side and the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421, A decorative body 3451 and a back and back movable decorative body 3110 are provided. On the left side of the game board 5, three back front left decorative body units 3710 are provided. On the right side of the game board 5, three back front right sides are provided. A decoration unit 3810 is provided. The light-emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 brightens the light-emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1, and the light-emitting decorative body provided on the left side of the game board 5 By visually recognizing the pachinko machine 1 from behind, the light emitting area L2 near the transparent portion on the right side of the back box 3010 (the right side of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened, and the light emitting decorative body provided on the right side of the game board 5 The pachinko machine 1 is visually recognized from behind, and the light emitting area L3 near the transparent portion on the left side surface of the back box 3010 (the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1) is brightened.

  In addition, as a characteristic configuration for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, an opening of the back panel 1614 in the effect display device 1600 can be given. Specifically, an opening A is provided on the lower left side of the back panel 1614, an opening B is provided on the right side of the back panel 1614 and slightly near the center, and an opening C is provided on the right side of the back panel 1614. In addition, an opening D is provided above the back panel 1614. The light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 brightens the light emitting area L5 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615, and the light from the opening B is used to operate the back cover 640. The light emitting region L6 near the portion 640a and the attaching / detaching portion is brightened, the light from the opening C brightens the light emitting region L7 near the payout unit 560, and the light from the opening D is near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553. The light emitting area L1 is brightened. The light from the opening A of the back panel 1614 of the effect display device 1600 brightens the light emitting area L6 around the connector 1615a mounted on the light emitting board 1615. Since the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300 is located, light from the opening A is blocked by the main control board 1310, making it difficult to visually recognize the light emitting area L6 from behind the pachinko machine 1.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700, which are attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The pilot lamp is provided on each of the effect drive boards 1720 at a position visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The pilot lamp is a member for notifying whether or not each substrate is operating normally by the light emitting mode of the LED. The light from the pilot lamp on the peripheral control board 1510 brightens the light-emitting area L8 near the pilot lamp, and the light from the pilot lamp on the effect drive board 1720 brightens the light-emitting area L9 near the pilot lamp. The light from the pilot lamp on the main control board 1310 brightens the light emitting region L10 near the pilot lamp. That is, these configurations can also be cited as configurations for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The above-mentioned light emitting area is provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the drive board unit 1700 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720 are provided around a control board group. That is, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, except for the control board group attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the light emitting area is configured to be bright. Thus, in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility, the inside of the pachinko machine 1 is closed and darkened. However, by brightening the rear of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the island facility can be brightened.

  On the other hand, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the panel relay board 1710 of the drive board unit 1700 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The light emitting area is not provided in the area where the control board group including the effect driving board 1720 is provided. In other words, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the gap between the control boards constituting the control board group (the gap between the main control board 1310, the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720, the peripheral control board 1510, the panel The gap between the relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720) is configured to be dark. The panel relay board 1710 is a board that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and is connected to the main control board 1310 by wiring and to the peripheral control board 1510 by wiring. And such wiring is arranged in a gap between the control boards constituting the control board group. Among them, the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game, so that if a wire connected to the main control board 1310 is tampered with, the wrongdoer can benefit. There is a problem that an unjust situation occurs. In this regard, by making the gap between the control boards constituting the control board group dark while making the back side of the pachinko machine 1 bright, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the wiring arranged in the gap. It is possible to prevent improper operation of the wiring and the like connected to the control board 1310.

(About visibility for the configuration of metal powder measures)
Next, an electric trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Will be described with reference to FIGS. 309 and 313. FIG. 313 is an enlarged schematic view showing a part of a cross section cut along the line CC of FIG. 99 (a), and shows an outline of a configuration for preventing metal powder.

  The game balls B flowing from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 fall due to metal powder being peeled off from the game balls B due to abrasion such as collision of the game balls B or rubbing. For this reason, when the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B is attached to the main guiding portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is obstructed, so that the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. , And the payout of the game balls B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 309, in the present example, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a so that metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Have been. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B naturally falls from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, so that the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guiding portion 553a, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B attached to the main guiding portion 553a falls from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa. As a result, the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a, and a staff such as a game hall clerk inserts a cotton swab into the cutout portion 553aa to cause abrasion of the game ball B attached to the main guiding portion 553a. By performing the operation of removing the metal powder, the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a.

  By the way, the metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed below the tank rail 553. Then, an electrical trouble occurs, which causes a problem in the peripheral control unit 1500 or a malfunction. For example, a peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes an IC such as a peripheral control IC, a ROM, and an SDRAM described below, and a peripheral data ROM board described later includes an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. As the pin intervals of these ICs are reduced, the pin intervals of the various connectors 1615a and the special connector 1615a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are narrowed, and the number of connectors 1615a on the peripheral control board 1510 is increased. And the space between the connector 1615a and the special connector 1615a is also narrowed, so that it is necessary to take measures against electrical trouble due to foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 313, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It is displaced rearward as compared with the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface (on the rear side of the effect display device 1600) (in the present embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). Are displaced by the distance dimension of).

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side to the rear side of the top plate 551a (from the front to the back of the top plate 551a). ), A plurality of steps are formed in a stepped shape bent downward. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 313, the first eave portion 551da extended rearward of the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that the lower end portion of the top plate portion is substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. . When the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eave portion 551 da in surface contact.

  Thereby, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and adhered to the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. I have. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa by the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a causes the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the base body 1502. To prevent the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, from entering the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

  As described in detail above, as shown in FIG. 309, in this example, as a luminous decorative body for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1, in the upper part of the game board 5, a back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and a back-upper front decoration A body 3421, a back decoration body 3440, a back decoration body 3451, a back decoration body 3451, and a back movable decoration body 3110 are provided. The light-emitting decoration body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 is provided behind the pachinko machine 1. The light emitting area L1 near the transparent part of the tank rail 553 is brightened. That is, since the light from the LEDs of these light-emitting decorative bodies is irradiated toward the light-emitting region L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B is removed from the tank rail 553. When the tank rail 553, which is a transparent member, is visually recognized from the rear of the pachinko machine 1, when the metal powder adheres to the main guide portion 553a of the pachinko machine 1, the metal powder floats up as a black spot, and the visibility to the metal powder is good. It has become something. This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not metal powder is attached to the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553, and efficiently removes the metal powder from the cutout portion 553aa of the main guide portion 553a. It can be carried out.

  Further, the light emitting region L1 also includes the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a located below the main guiding portion 553a. The first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and the back cover 630 are transparent members. That is, since the light from the LED of the light emitting decorative body provided on the upper part of the game board 5 is irradiated toward the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a in the light emitting region L1, the notch portion 553aa is formed. When the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a adheres to the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a located below, the transparent member is provided from behind the pachinko machine 1. When the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a is visually recognized, the metal powder floats up like a black spot, and the visibility to the metal powder is good. This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not metal powder has adhered to the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, and also to remove the metal powder from the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. , Can be performed efficiently.

  In the above, even when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1, the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the closed pachinko machine 1 is used. Since the main frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1 on the back side of the island facility is opened, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B in the closed pachinko machine 1 is released from the tank rail 553. It can be easily confirmed whether or not it is attached to the main guiding portion 553a and the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. In addition, the light from the LED of the back-upper rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-upper decoration body 3421, the back-upper rotating decoration body 3440, the back-upper decoration 3451, and the back-moving decorative body 3110 of the pachinko machine 1 is stored in a tank. Although the light is emitted toward the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the rail 553, it is not desirable that the light source of the LED is directly viewed during the maintenance of the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is not desirable. Is configured to be indirect light that is not directly viewed by the light source of the LED.

  After confirming the adhesion of the metal powder, when removing the metal powder from the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 or the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1 is removed. Luminous decorative body (back-upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and back upper front decorative body 3421, back-upper rear rotating decorative body 3440 and back-upper decorative body 3451, back-back movable) The light from the decorative body 3110) may hinder the removal operation. For this reason, after confirming the adhesion of the metal powder by opening the main frame 4 of the other pachinko machine 1, when the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 from which the metal powder is to be removed is opened, the rear of the pachinko machine 1 is opened. Of the luminous decorative body (the front upper back rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421, the rear upper back rotating decorative body 3440, and the rear upper back decorative body 3451) brightening the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 in FIG. Alternatively, the LED of the back movable movable body 3110) may be turned off so that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is not brightened. In addition, not only the light-emitting decorative body that makes the light-emitting region L1 bright, but also the light of the LED that may hinder the operation of removing the metal powder may be turned off. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the light from the LED that makes the back side of the pachinko machine 1 brighter to hinder the operation of removing the metal powder.

  However, depending on the hall environment, it may be preferable that the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is bright when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, for example, when the hall itself is dark and metal powder is removed. Therefore, in a state where the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, a light emitting decorative body (a back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and a front upper rotating decorative body 3410) that arbitrarily brightens the light emitting area L1 near the transparent portion of the tank rail 553 behind the pachinko machine 1. A light emission start switch may be provided to enable the LEDs of the front upper back decoration 3421, the rear upper back decoration 3440, the rear upper back decoration 3451, and the rear back decoration 3110) to start emitting light. Such a light emission start switch is provided at a position that can be operated only with the main body frame 4 opened. Thus, in a state where the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened, the hall manager can freely operate whether or not to start the light emission of the LED for brightening the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to match the hall environment. be able to.

  The tank rail 553 is formed of a transparent material (such as polycarbonate resin), and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. Accordingly, even if a ball jam (ball damage) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the clogging of the ball in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, and the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging can be shortened as much as possible. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a movable defect occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, it is possible to check the status of the drive motor and the transmission mechanism such as gears and belts while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4. The same operation and effect as the application effect can be obtained.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the abutting portion with the first eave portion 551da such that the back cover 640 covers at least a part of the rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. , The metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa and adhered to the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a, has the top plate portion. When the metal powder falls from the first eave portion 551da of the 551a, the metal powder is on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Dropping toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the vehicle, and eventually from the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. The metal powder of the game ball B is prevented from entering the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 is suppressed. I can do it.

  As described above, the top plate portion 551a and the back cover 640 of the payout base 551 are formed of the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. From falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eaves or cover that can be used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first eaves portion 551da is provided below the notch portion 553aa, the main eaves portion 553aa is provided not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. The metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the guiding portion 553a can be received and adhered at the first eave portion 551da, and the metal ball of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa. The metal powder falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa. The metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the peripheral control board 1510 by suppressing entry into the cover body 1501 of the 1500. So that the generation of electrical trouble can be suppressed by.

  In the example described above, the upper end of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eave portion 551da when assembled to the main body frame 4, but the upper end of the back cover 640 and the first eave portion 551da are in contact with each other. The portion 551da may be arranged to be separated. That is, the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da cooperate with each other, and the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa enters the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The arrangement form of the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da is not limited as long as it prevents entry.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553, and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600 is shifted in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 (in the present embodiment, about two-half the diameter of the game ball B). 1 (that is, the peripheral control unit 1500 is not disposed immediately below the notch 553aa), so that the game ball B from the tank rail 553 is displaced. This is effective for preventing metal powder from causing electrical trouble.

  The ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, while the upper side, the left side, and the like of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) are provided. Since it is not provided on each of the cover side walls provided on the lower side and the right side, the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). However, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the inside of the cover 1501.

  In addition, among the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover plate of the cover body 1501, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, one or a combination of the ventilation holes. A plurality of 1501az may be formed. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side. . Even with this configuration, foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game balls B) drops toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. Thus, it is possible to prevent an electrical trouble due to a foreign object falling on various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to a foreign object falling from the tank rail 553. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is formed through the ventilation hole 1501az. When foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B) which falls on the inside of the game ball B falls and enters, the foreign matter dropped on the various substrates of the peripheral control board box 1505 is electrically connected. This is because the probability of occurrence of trouble increases.

  When the ventilation holes 1501 are not provided on the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the heat dissipation function is compensated by increasing the number of ventilation holes 1501 provided on the other surface or increasing the area of the ventilation holes 1501. You may. This can contribute to suppressing a rise in the temperature of the peripheral control board box 1505, and can suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles such as thermal runaway.

  Further, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 in a state where the cover body 1501 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is in a substantially horizontal state. Therefore, when the metal powder of the game ball B falls outside from the main guiding portion 553a and adheres to the upper surface of the cover 1501 via the cutout portion 553aa, the metal powder can be retained on the upper surface of the cover 1501. it can. This can prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inside of the cover 1501. In addition, as long as the metal powder of the game balls B does not drop toward the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501, a part or all of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 may be inclined.

  Further, the first eaves member 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 may be attached to the top plate 551a as another member (another structural component).

  In addition, when the first eave portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and / or the back cover 640 covers the upper and rear sides of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, or the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. When the plurality of cutout portions 553aa and the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are displaced in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a are used. If the probability that the metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a toward the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is low is low, one of the upper surfaces of the cover 1501 attached to the pachinko machine 1 is (For example, corners of the cover body 1501, most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 are partially closed, May the ventilation holes 1501az provided at equal) the ventilating hole 1501az is formed.

  Further, the present technical idea is not limited to completely preventing the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, from entering the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. However, as compared with the conventional pachinko machine, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa, is prevented from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 in a state where the cover body 1501 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a corner portion of the cover body 1501, most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 are closed, but the ventilation holes 1501az are partly closed). In this case, the ventilating hole 1501az is also provided.

  A plurality of slit holes are formed in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Further, the cover body 1501 is provided with seven connector holes provided on a peripheral control board 1510 attached inside the cover body 1501 along a lower side thereof, and seven connector holes at positions corresponding to the volume adjustment switch, and Volume adjustment holes are respectively formed, and two connector holes are respectively formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output substrate described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached inside the cover body 1501, gaps are formed in the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are respectively exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole formed on the cover body 1501, A volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume control hole. Further, in a state where a liquid crystal output board described later is attached inside the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, The two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are respectively exposed from these two connector holes.

  The cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 receives air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501, and a shield plate housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. It is taken in through a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the 1540, and the gaps described above (the gaps formed in the seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501) A gap formed in the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a volume control hole formed in the cover 1501, two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board, and two connectors formed on the cover 1501 Through the hole and the gap formed in the hole)

  Incidentally, when the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 takes in the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500, the heavy powder of the metal powder of the game ball B is influenced by the flow of the air and moves toward the inner space of the cover body 1501. Various electronic components provided on various substrates such as a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 due to an increase in the probability of being sucked and an electric trouble (short circuit) due to the sucked metal powder. In such a case, a malfunction (failure) occurs.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), the first eave portion 551da is formed along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, so that the gaming ball is formed. It can be configured to have a function as an eave to prevent heavy powders of the metal powder B from being sucked into the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 from the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover 1501. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, one notch, hole, or groove may be formed in the ball passage on which the game ball B rolls, similarly to the notch 553aa. Specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide path 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, the metal powder of the game ball B in the guide path 570a is removed from the guide path 570a. A cutout, hole, or groove that can be removed to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571 of the guiding unit 570. A payout device 580, a board unit 620, and the like are arranged below the ball guiding unit 570. The payout device 580 includes a board on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted, and the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630. , A payout control board 633, an interface board 635, etc., and various boards are arranged. For this reason, when a notch, a hole, or a groove is formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, the hole, or the groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the B metal powder from adhering to various substrates disposed below the guidance unit 570. Therefore, an eave-shaped member can be formed by projecting rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear cover 582 of the dispensing device 580, and a notch formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571 can be formed. , Holes or grooves, and positions of various substrates such as a substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the dispensing device 580 is mounted, can be configured to be shifted, and both can be configured. Can also. Further, an eave-shaped member is formed to protrude rearward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, and the like. The position of the cutout, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, and the positions of the power supply board cover 631, the dispensing control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be configured. It can be configured by shifting, or can be configured by adopting both.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, but the present invention is applicable to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arranged ball machine, and furthermore, a plurality of drums ( The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that rotates a torso or a reel. Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 314 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 314, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are mutually connected via a hinge (not shown). With the hinge as a center of rotation, a key is inserted into a keyhole 6005 of a metal locking device provided on the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turned clockwise, thereby turning the front door (front frame) 6002 into a main body. Portion (box) 6004 can be opened.

  The metal locking device is attached to a cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) of a front door (front frame) 6002 and cooperates with a locking unit (not shown) to form a main body (box) 6004. This is used for opening and closing the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device is attached to a metal cylindrical cylinder main body (not shown) extending back and forth, a metal keyhole 6005 formed on a front end surface of the cylinder main body, and a rear side of the cylinder main body. A metal rotation transmitting member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates together with the rotation of a regular metal key. The cylinder body of the metal locking device penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcement unit from behind, and has a rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and is positioned from the rear end toward the front at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmitting member is formed such that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. The rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder and rotated by inserting the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder into the pair of cutouts. When the rotation transmission member of the locking device made of metal and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with the front door (front frame) 6002 closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004, the metal is made of metal. And the locking unit is electrically connected.

  The door frame reinforcement unit functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to provide rigidity, and functions as a main body portion (not shown) via a door frame metal ground wire (not shown). It is electrically connected to an earth substrate provided inside the box 6004. That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit is a frame ground on the door frame side. The ground board (not shown) can collect electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places and ground it to the island equipment of the game hall (earth). It is electrically connected to the equipment ground.

  An open switch (not shown) that can detect the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is disposed on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. I have. The open switch detects opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 due to input of an electric signal by an opening / closing operation by a metal locking device. Instead, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is detected independently of the opening / closing operation by the metal locking device. The release switch is not located near the metal locking device and is located below the metal locking device so as not to be affected by the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the metal locking device. An open switch is provided on the portion (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. In this way, even if the electromagnetic noise enters the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic noise.

  The front door (front frame) 6002 is for decorating the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative portions. Some of these various decorative portions have no decorative plating, while others have decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. The decorative plating is a noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has electroconductivity, so that electromagnetic wave noise may enter. Of the various decorative portions, those having decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to a metal door frame reinforcing unit in the door frame base unit constituting the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), while the conductive members are directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. And some are electrically connected). Thus, by transmitting the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the various decorative portions to the metal door frame reinforcement unit, it is possible to prevent various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative portions from entering the substrate ground. Also, among the various decorative parts, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcing unit via wiring (not shown), and the door frame metal ground wire is applied. Through the earth board provided inside the main body (box) 6004, and from the earth board to the earth of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit is the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

  Note that an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static elimination unit at a predetermined position on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, or when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body (box) 6004, An electrostatic elimination pad may be provided as a static eliminator on a portion on the open side opposite to the side on which the hinge is arranged (closed side). The static elimination pad is capable of removing noise (electromagnetic noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

  The front door (front frame) 6002 is for decorating the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. There are also decorative plating on the entire surface. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). And the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the island facility ground wire. It is not electrically connected to the ground substrate, but is electrically connected to a terminal of a power supply board (not shown) of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004 to connect the metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board. It may be electrically connected. The power supply board is supplied with AC 24 V from the island facility in the game hall. The AC 24 V has L (live) and N (neutral). The L terminal of the power supply board to which L (live) is input is connected to the non-ground side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) for transiently protecting against excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board. This surge protection element (surge absorber) usually has a high resistance value and hardly allows current to flow, but when an excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, the resistance value decreases instantaneously and the current flows, and when the excessive voltage disappears, , Which have the performance of returning to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). Thus, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) by the surge protection element (surge absorber) from the N terminal of the power supply board to be removed from the slot machine 6000. .

  The upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is formed with a protruding portion projecting forward from the game panel 6006. A medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 in this protruding portion. Further, in the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative board 6024 are arranged, and below the decorative board 6024, a tray 6026 is provided. These bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, the storage settlement button 6022, and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Have been. The main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is fixed by being attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004.

  The main control board box 1320 accommodates, together with the main control board 1310, a setting change board 1311 on which a setting key switch 1311a capable of changing a set value is mounted. That is, since the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, the setting key switch Reference numeral 1311a is arranged inside the main body (box) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and attached to and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, or may be fixed to the main body. The power supply unit may be fixed to a housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the portion (box) 6004. In addition to the setting key switch 1311a, a setting switching button for selecting and switching a setting value, a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is provided on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311. And a setting change permission lamp 1310z described above.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006. Through this display window, three variable rotating bodies (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 are provided. It can be seen through. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

  On these variable rotators, a translucent design band on which a plurality of types of designs (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as design information is affixed to each tubular frame. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotator is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) is connected to each variable rotator. The drive of these stepping motors is controlled by a main control board 1310. When the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from the above-described display window from the top to the bottom. Has become visible.

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effectors (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of the plurality of movable effectors, the drawing control of the effect display device 1600, the light emission control of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards, and the like based on various commands from the main control board 1310. By performing various controls, the progress of the effect is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

  The main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 as a game medium, starts changing the symbol information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and has a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, and a right stop button 6018. The change display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as game media to the tray 6026.

  In the fusion machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008 ', and the main control board 1310 allows a predetermined number of game balls to be thrown into the ball slot 6008' as a game medium. Based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the elapse of a predetermined time, the fluctuation display of the symbol information is stopped. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit provision state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as game media to the tray 6026.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 3000 Back unit 3100 Back production unit 3110 Back movable decoration 3111 Decorative body (decorative member, decorative plate)
3111a First decorative protrusion 3111d Metal decorative part 3112 Decorative sheet (decorative member, decorative plate)
3113 Light guide radiation plate (decorative member, radiation plate)
3113a Main body 3113b Flange (peripheral wall)
3113c First LED accommodation section 3113d Second LED accommodation section 3113e Reflecting section 3114 Decorative substrate (decorative substrate) behind back
3114a First LED (LED, specific LED)
3114b Second LED (LED)
3114c Board main body 3114d Copper foil 3114e Electronic component 3115 Decorative base 3115a Cover plate 3115b Flange EL Creepage distance SL Predetermined distance

The following are effective solutions for achieving the above-mentioned object .

(Solution 1)
A gaming machine having a gaming board on which a plurality of boards are mounted, wherein the gaming board includes a plurality of main-side boards related to the progress of a game, and a part number capable of specifying a mounted component as the main-side board . a first main side substrate having a display unit which is marked, have a, a different second main side substrate from the first main side substrate, the second main side substrate, the first A game machine provided at a position closer to the player than the main-side board of the game machine, wherein the display section is not provided on any of both sides of the board .
(Solution 2)
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second main-side substrate is covered with a resin material.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine on which a plurality of boards are mounted,
Equipped with multiple main-side boards related to the progress of the game,
As the main-side substrate,
A first main-side substrate having a display unit capable of identifying a mounted component;
A second main-side board that does not have a display unit capable of identifying the mounted component and that makes it difficult to externally estimate the contents of the electronic circuit as compared to the first main-side board. Gaming machine to do.